Long live Qt 4.5!

198 files changed, 35528 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/doc/src/examples/2dpainting.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/2dpainting.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..31aea59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/2dpainting.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,224 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example opengl/2dpainting
+    \title 2D Painting Example
+
+    The 2D Painting example shows how QPainter and QGLWidget can be used
+    together to display accelerated 2D graphics on supported hardware.
+
+    \image 2dpainting-example.png
+
+    The QPainter class is used to draw 2D graphics primitives onto
+    paint devices provided by QPaintDevice subclasses, such as QWidget
+    and QImage.
+
+    Since QGLWidget is a subclass of QWidget, it is possible
+    to reimplement its \l{QWidget::paintEvent()}{paintEvent()} and use
+    QPainter to draw on the device, just as you would with a QWidget.
+    The only difference is that the painting operations will be accelerated
+    in hardware if it is supported by your system's OpenGL drivers.
+
+    In this example, we perform the same painting operations on a
+    QWidget and a QGLWidget. The QWidget is shown with anti-aliasing
+    enabled, and the QGLWidget will also use anti-aliasing if the
+    required extensions are supported by your system's OpenGL driver.
+
+    \section1 Overview
+
+    To be able to compare the results of painting onto a QGLWidget subclass
+    with native drawing in a QWidget subclass, we want to show both kinds
+    of widget side by side. To do this, we derive subclasses of QWidget and
+    QGLWidget, using a separate \c Helper class to perform the same painting
+    operations for each, and lay them out in a top-level widget, itself
+    provided a the \c Window class.
+
+    \section1 Helper Class Definition
+
+    In this example, the painting operations are performed by a helper class.
+    We do this because we want the same painting operations to be performed
+    for both our QWidget subclass and the QGLWidget subclass.
+
+    The \c Helper class is minimal:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/2dpainting/helper.h 0
+
+    Apart from the constructor, it only provides a \c paint() function to paint
+    using a painter supplied by one of our widget subclasses.
+
+    \section1 Helper Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor of the class sets up the resources it needs to paint
+    content onto a widget:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/2dpainting/helper.cpp 0
+
+    The actual painting is performed in the \c paint() function. This takes
+    a QPainter that has already been set up to paint onto a paint device
+    (either a QWidget or a QGLWidget), a QPaintEvent that provides information
+    about the region to be painted, and a measure of the elapsed time (in
+    milliseconds) since the paint device was last updated.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/2dpainting/helper.cpp 1
+
+    We begin painting by filling in the region contained in the paint event
+    before translating the origin of the coordinate system so that the rest
+    of the painting operations will be displaced towards the center of the
+    paint device.
+
+    We draw a spiral pattern of circles, using the elapsed time specified to
+    animate them so that they appear to move outward and around the coordinate
+    system's origin:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/2dpainting/helper.cpp 2
+
+    Since the coordinate system is rotated many times during
+    this process, we \l{QPainter::save()}{save()} the QPainter's state
+    beforehand and \l{QPainter::restore()}{restore()} it afterwards.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/2dpainting/helper.cpp 3
+
+    We draw some text at the origin to complete the effect.
+
+    \section1 Widget Class Definition
+
+    The \c Widget class provides a basic custom widget that we use to
+    display the simple animation painted by the \c Helper class.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/2dpainting/widget.h 0
+
+    Apart from the constructor, it only contains a
+    \l{QWidget::paintEvent()}{paintEvent()} function, that lets us draw
+    customized content, and a slot that is used to animate its contents.
+    One member variable keeps track of the \c Helper that the widget uses
+    to paint its contents, and the other records the elapsed time since
+    it was last updated.
+
+    \section1 Widget Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor only initializes the member variables, storing the
+    \c Helper object supplied and calling the base class's constructor,
+    and enforces a fixed size for the widget:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/2dpainting/widget.cpp 0
+
+    The \c animate() slot is called whenever a timer, which we define later, times
+    out:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/2dpainting/widget.cpp 1
+
+    Here, we determine the interval that has elapsed since the timer last
+    timed out, and we add it to any existing value before repainting the
+    widget. Since the animation used in the \c Helper class loops every second,
+    we can use the modulo operator to ensure that the \c elapsed variable is
+    always less than 1000.
+
+    Since the \c Helper class does all of the actual painting, we only have
+    to implement a paint event that sets up a QPainter for the widget and calls
+    the helper's \c paint() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/2dpainting/widget.cpp 2
+
+    \section1 GLWidget Class Definition
+
+    The \c GLWidget class definition is basically the same as the \c Widget
+    class except that it is derived from QGLWidget.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/2dpainting/glwidget.h 0
+
+    Again, the member variables record the \c Helper used to paint the
+    widget and the elapsed time since the previous update.
+
+    \section1 GLWidget Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor differs a little from the \c Widget class's constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/2dpainting/glwidget.cpp 0
+
+    As well as initializing the \c elapsed member variable and storing the
+    \c Helper object used to paint the widget, the base class's constructor
+    is called with the format that specifies the \l QGL::SampleBuffers flag.
+    This enables anti-aliasing if it is supported by your system's OpenGL
+    driver.
+
+    The \c animate() slot is exactly the same as that provided by the \c Widget
+    class:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/2dpainting/glwidget.cpp 1
+
+    The \c paintEvent() is almost the same as that found in the \c Widget class:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/2dpainting/glwidget.cpp 2
+
+    Since anti-aliasing will be enabled if available, we only need to set up
+    a QPainter on the widget and call the helper's \c paint() function to display
+    the widget's contents.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The \c Window class has a basic, minimal definition:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/2dpainting/window.h 0
+
+    It contains a single \c Helper object that will be shared between all
+    widgets.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor does all the work, creating a widget of each type and
+    inserting them with labels into a layout:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/2dpainting/window.cpp 0
+
+    A timer with a 50 millisecond time out is constructed for animation purposes,
+    and connected to the \c animate() slots of the \c Widget and \c GLWidget objects.
+    Once started, the widgets should be updated at around 20 frames per second.
+
+    \section1 Running the Example
+
+    The example shows the same painting operations performed at the same time
+    in a \c Widget and a \c GLWidget. The quality and speed of rendering in the
+    \c GLWidget depends on the level of support for multisampling and hardware
+    acceleration that your system's OpenGL driver provides. If support for either
+    of these is lacking, the driver may fall back on a software renderer that
+    may trade quality for speed.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/activeqt/comapp.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/comapp.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..05f3fb5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/comapp.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example activeqt/comapp
+    \title COM App Example (ActiveQt)
+
+    The COM App example shows how to use ActiveQt to develop a Qt
+    application that can be automated via COM. Different QObject
+    based classes are exposed as COM objects that communicate with the
+    GUI of the running Qt application. The APIs of those COM objects
+    has been designed to resemble the APIs of standard COM
+    applications; i.e. those from Microsoft Office.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/comapp/main.cpp 2
+    The first class \c Application represents the application object. It
+    exposes read-only properties \c documents and \c id to get access to the
+    list of documents, and an identifier. A read/write property \c visible
+    controls whether the QTabWidget-based user interface of the application 
+    should be visible, and a slot \c quit() terminates the application.
+
+    The \e RegisterObject attribute is set to make sure that instances of this
+    class are registered in COM's running object table (ROT) - this allows COM
+    clients to connect to an already instantiated COM object.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/comapp/main.cpp 1
+    The \c DocumentList class stores a list of documents. It provides an API
+    to read the number of documents, to access each document by index and to 
+    create a new document. The \c application property returns the root object.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/comapp/main.cpp 0
+
+    The \c Document class finally represents a document in the application.
+    Each document is represented by a page in the application's tab widget, and
+    has a title that is readable and writable through the document's API.
+    The \c application property again returns the root object.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/comapp/main.cpp 3
+    The implementation of the \c Document class creates a new page for the tab
+    widget, and uses the title of that page for the title property. The page 
+    is deleted when the document is deleted.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/comapp/main.cpp 4
+    The \c DocumentList implementation is straightforward.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/comapp/main.cpp 5
+    The \c Application class initializes the user interface in the constructor,
+    and shows and hides it in the implementation of \c setVisible(). The object
+    name (accessible through the \c id property) is set to \c "From QAxFactory" 
+    to indicate that this COM object has been created by COM. Note that there is 
+    no destructor that would delete the QTabWidget - this is instead done in the 
+    \c quit() slot, before calling QApplication::quit() through a single-shot-timer, 
+    which is necessary ensure that the COM call to the slot is complete.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/comapp/main.cpp 6
+    The classes are exported from the server using the QAxFactory macros. Only
+    \c Application objects can be instantiated from outside - the other APIs can
+    only be used after accessing the respective objects throught the \c Application
+    API.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/comapp/main.cpp 7
+    The main() entry point function creates a QApplication, and just enters the
+    event loop if the application has been started by COM. If the application
+    has been started by the user, then the \c Application object is created and 
+    the object name is set to "From Application". Then the COM server is started,
+    and the application object is registered with COM. It is now accessible to
+    COM clients through the client-specific APIs.
+
+    Application exiting is controlled explicitly - if COM started the application, 
+    then the client code has to call quit(); if the user started the application,
+    then the application terminates when the last window has been closed.
+
+    Finally, the user interface is made visible, and the event loop is started.
+
+    A simple Visual Basic application could now access this Qt application. In VB,
+    start a new "Standard Exe" project and add a project reference to the comappLib
+    type library. Create a form with a listbox "DocumentList", a static label 
+    "DocumentsCount" and a command button "NewDocument". Finally, implement the code 
+    for the form like this:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_activeqt_comapp.qdoc 0
+
+    To build the example you must first build the QAxServer library.
+    Then run \c qmake and your make tool in
+    \c{examples\activeqt\comapp}.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/activeqt/dotnet.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/dotnet.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..afe7034
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/dotnet.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,355 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \page activeqt-dotnet.html
+    \title Dot Net Example (ActiveQt)
+
+    The Dot Net example demonstrates how Qt objects can be used in a
+    .NET environment, and how .NET objects can be used in a Qt
+    environment.
+
+    If you need to combine Qt and Win Forms widgets in the same
+    application, you might want to use the higher-level
+    \l{QtWinForms Solution} instead.
+
+    Contents:
+
+    \tableofcontents
+
+    \section1 Qt vs. .NET
+
+    Qt is a C++ library and is compiled into traditional, native
+    binaries that make full use of the performance provided by the
+    runtime environment.
+
+    One of the key concepts of .NET is the idea of "intermediate language
+    code" - the source code is compiled into a bytecode format, and at
+    runtime, that bytecode is executed in a virtual machine - the \e
+    {Common Language Runtime} (CLR).
+
+    Another key concept is that of \e {managed code}. This is essentially
+    intermediate language code written in such a way that the CLR can take
+    care of the memory management, i.e. the CLR will do automatic garbage
+    collection, so the application code does not need to explicitly free
+    the memory for unused objects.
+
+    The MS compilers for C# and VB.NET will only produce managed
+    code. Such programs cannot directly call normal, native functions
+    or classes. \footnote The .NET framework provides Platform Invocation
+    Services - P/Invoke - that enable managed code to call native C (not
+    C++) functions located in DLLs directly. The resulting application
+    then becomes partially unmanaged.\endfootnote
+
+    The MS C++ compiler for .NET on the other hand, can produce both
+    normal and managed code. To write a C++ class that can be compiled
+    into managed code, the developer must flag the class as managed using
+    the \c __gc keyword, and restrict the code to only use the subset of
+    C++ known as "Managed Extensions for C++", or MC++ for short. The
+    advantage is that MC++ code can freely call and use normal C++
+    functions and classes. And it also works the other way around: normal
+    C++ code can call managed functions and use managed classes (e.g. the
+    entire .NET framework class library), including managed functions and
+    classes implemented in C# or VB.NET. This feature of mixing managed
+    and normal C++ code immensely eases the interoperability with .NET,
+    and is by Microsoft referred to as the "It Just Works" (IJW) feature.
+
+    This document demonstrates two different ways of integrating normal
+    C++ code (that uses Qt) with managed .NET code. First, the manual way
+    is presented, which includes using a thin MC++ wrapper class around
+    the normal Qt/C++ class. Then, the automated way is presented, which
+    utilizes the ActiveQt framework as a generic bridge. The advantage of
+    the first method is that it gives the application developer full
+    control, while the second method requires less coding and relieves the
+    developer of dealing with the conversion between managed and normal
+    data objects.
+
+    The impatient reader, who right away wants to see a QPushButton
+    and a custom Qt widget (\l{activeqt/multiple}{QAxWidget2}) run in
+    a .NET GUI application is referred to the example directory of
+    ActiveQt. It contains the result of this walkthrough using both
+    C# and VB.NET, created with Visual Studio .NET (not 2003).
+    Load \c {examples/dotnet/walkthrough/csharp.csproj},
+    \c {examples/dotnet/walkthrough/vb.vbproj}
+    or \c {examples/dotnet/wrapper/wrapper.sln} into the IDE and run
+    the solution.
+
+    \bold{Remark:} You will notice that in the generated code the following line is
+    commented out:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_activeqt_dotnet.qdoc 0
+
+    This line is regenerated without comment whenever you change the
+    dialog, in which case you have to comment it out again to be able
+    to run the project. This is a bug in the original version of
+    Visual Studio.NET, and is fixed in the 2003 edition.
+
+    \section1 Walkthrough: .NET interop with MC++ and IJW
+
+    Normal C++ classes and functions can be used from managed .NET code by
+    providing thin wrapper classes written in MC++. The wrapper class will
+    take care of forwarding the calls to the normal C++ functions or
+    methods, and converting parameter data as necessary. Since the wrapper
+    class is a managed class, it can be used without further ado in any
+    managed .NET application, whether written in C#, VB.NET, MC++ or other
+    managed programming language.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/dotnet/wrapper/lib/worker.h 0
+
+    The Qt class has nothing unusual for Qt users, and as even the Qt
+    specialities like \c Q_PROPERTY, \c slots and \c signals are
+    implemented with straight C++ they don't cause any trouble when
+    compiling this class with any C++ compiler.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/dotnet/wrapper/lib/networker.h 0
+
+    The .NET wrapper class uses keywords that are part of MC++ to indicate
+    that the class is managed/garbage collected (\c {__gc}), and that \c
+    StatusString should be accessible as a property in languages that
+    support this concept (\c {__property}).  We also declare an event
+    function \c statusStringChanged(String*) (\c {__event}), the
+    equivalent of the respective signal in the Qt class.
+
+    Before we can start implementing the wrapper class we need a way to
+    convert Qt's datatypes (and potentionally your own) into .NET
+    datatypes, e.g. \c QString objects need to be converted into objects
+    of type \c {String*}.
+
+    When operating on managed objects in normal C++ code, a little extra
+    care must be taken because of the CLR's garbage collection. A normal
+    pointer variable should not \footnote Indeed, the compiler will in
+    many cases disallow it. \endfootnote be used to refer to a managed
+    object. The reason is that the garbage collection can kick in at any
+    time and move the object to another place on the heap, leaving you
+    with an invalid pointer.
+
+    However, two methods are provided that solves this problem easily. The
+    first is to use a \e pinned pointer, i.e. declare the pointer variable
+    with the \c __pin keyword. This guarantees that the object pointed to
+    will not be moved by the garbage collector. It is recommended that
+    this method not be used to keep a references to managed objects for a
+    long time, since it will decrease the efficiency of the garbage
+    collector. The second way is to use the \c gcroot smartpointer
+    template type. This lets you create safe pointers to managed
+    objects. E.g. a variable of type \c gcroot<String> will always point
+    to the String object, even if it has been moved by the garbage
+    collector, and it can be used just like a normal pointer.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/dotnet/wrapper/lib/tools.cpp 0
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/dotnet/wrapper/lib/tools.cpp 1
+
+    The convertor functions can then be used in the wrapper class
+    implementation to call the functions in the native C++ class.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/dotnet/wrapper/lib/networker.cpp 0
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/dotnet/wrapper/lib/networker.cpp 1
+
+    The constructor and destructor simply create and destroy the Qt
+    object wrapped using the C++ operators \c new and \c delete.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/dotnet/wrapper/lib/networker.cpp 2
+
+    The netWorker class delegates calls from the .NET code to the native
+    code. Although the transition between those two worlds implies a small
+    performance hit for each function call, and for the type conversion,
+    this should be negligible since we are anyway going to run within the
+    CLR.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/dotnet/wrapper/lib/networker.cpp 3
+
+    The property setter calls the native Qt class before firing the
+    event using the \c __raise keyword.
+
+    This wrapper class can now be used in .NET code, e.g. using C++, C#,
+    Visual Basic or any other programming language available for .NET.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/dotnet/wrapper/main.cs 0
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/dotnet/wrapper/main.cs 1
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/dotnet/wrapper/main.cs 2
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/dotnet/wrapper/main.cs 3
+
+    \section1 Walkthrough: .NET/COM Interop with ActiveQt
+
+    Fortunately .NET provides a generic wrapper for COM objects, the
+    \e {Runtime Callable Wrapper} (RCW). This RCW is a proxy for the
+    COM object and is generated by the CLR when a .NET Framework client
+    activates a COM object. This provides a generic way to reuse COM
+    objects in a .NET Framework project.
+
+    Making a QObject class into a COM object is easily achieved with
+    ActiveQt and demonstrated in the QAxServer examples (e.g., the
+    \l{activeqt/simple}{Simple} example). The walkthrough will use
+    the Qt classes implemented in those examples, so the first thing
+    to do is to make sure that those  examples have been built
+    correctly, e.g. by opening the
+    \l{qaxserver-demo-multiple.html}{demonstration pages} in Internet
+    Explorer to verify that the controls are functional.
+
+    \section2 Starting a Project
+
+    Start Visual Studio.NET, and create a new C# project for writing a
+    Windows application. This will present you with an empty form in
+    Visual Studio's dialog editor. You should see the toolbox, which
+    presents you with a number of available controls and objects in
+    different categories. If you right-click on the toolbox it allows
+    you to add new tabs. We will add the tab "Qt".
+
+    \section2 Importing Qt Widgets
+
+    The category only has a pointer tool by default, and we have to add
+    the Qt objects we want to use in our form. Right-click on the empty
+    space, and select "Customize". This opens a dialog that has two
+    tabs, "COM Components" and ".NET Framework Components". We used
+    ActiveQt to wrap QWidgets into COM objects, so we select the "COM
+    Components" page, and look for the classes we want to use, e.g.
+    "QPushButton" and "QAxWidget2".
+
+    When we select those widgets and close the dialog the two widgets
+    will now be available from the toolbox as grey squares with their
+    name next to it \footnote Icons could be added by modifying the
+    way the controls register themselves. \endfootnote.
+
+    \section2 Using Qt Widgets
+
+    We can now add an instance of QAxWidget2 and a QPushButton to
+    the form. Visual Studio will automatically generate the RCW for the
+    object servers. The QAxWidget2 instance takes most of the upper
+    part of the form, with the QPushButton in the lower right corner.
+
+    In the property editor of Visual Studio we can modify the properties
+    of our controls - QPushButton exposes the \c QWidget API and has many
+    properties, while QAxWidget2 has only the Visual Studio standard
+    properties in addition to its own property "lineWidth" in the
+    "Miscellaneous" category. The objects are named "axQPushButton1" and
+    "axQAxWidget21", and since especially the last name is a bit
+    confusing we rename the objects to "resetButton" and "circleWidget".
+
+    We can also change the Qt properties, e.g. set the "text" property
+    of the \c resetButton to "Reset", and the "lineWidth" property of the
+    \c circleWidget to 5. We can also put those objects into the layout
+    system that Visual Studio's dialog editor provides, e.g. by setting
+    the anchors of the \c circleWidget to "Left, Top, Right, Bottom", and
+    the anchors of the \c resetButton to "Bottom, Right".
+
+    Now we can compile and start the project, which will open a user
+    interface with our two Qt widgets. If we can resize the dialog,
+    the widgets will resize appropriately.
+
+    \section2 Handling Qt Signals
+
+    We will now implement event handlers for the widgets. Select the
+    \c circleWidget and select the "Events" page in the property
+    editor. The widget exposes events because the QAxWidget2 class has
+    the "StockEvents" attribute set in its class definition. We implement
+    the event handler \c circleClicked for the \c ClickEvent to increase
+    the line width by one for every click:
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/dotnet/walkthrough/Form1.cs 0
+
+    In general we can implement a default event handler by double
+    clicking on the widget in the form, but the default events for
+    our widgets are right now not defined.
+
+    We will also implement an event handler for the \c clicked signal
+    emitted by QPushButton. Add the event handler \c resetLineWidth to
+    the \c clicked event, and implement the generated function:
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/dotnet/walkthrough/Form1.cs 1
+
+    We reset the property to 1, and also call the \c setFocus() slot
+    to simulate the user style on Windows, where a button grabs focus
+    when you click it (so that you can click it again with the spacebar).
+
+    If we now compile and run the project we can click on the circle
+    widget to increase its line width, and press the reset button to
+    set the line width back to 1.
+
+    \section1 Summary
+
+    Using ActiveQt as a universal interoperability bridge between the
+    .NET world and the native world of Qt is very easy, and makes it
+    often  unnecessary to implement a lot of handwritten wrapper classes.
+    Instead, the QAxFactory implementation in the otherwise completely
+    cross-platform Qt project provides the glue that .NET needs to to
+    generate the RCW.
+
+    If this is not sufficient we can implement our own wrapper classes
+    thanks to the C++ extensions provided by Microsoft.
+
+    \section2 Limitations
+
+    All the limitations when using ActiveQt are implied when using this
+    technique to interoperate with .NET, e.g. the datatypes we can use
+    in the APIs can only be those supported by ActiveQt and COM. However,
+    since this includes subclasses of QObject and QWidget we can wrap
+    any of our datatypes into a QObject subclass to make its API
+    available to .NET. This has the positive side effect that the same
+    API is automatically available in
+    \l{http://qtsoftware.com/products/qsa/}{QSA}, the cross platform
+    scripting solution for Qt applications, and to COM clients in general.
+
+    When using the "IJW" method, in priciple the only limitation is the
+    time required to write the wrapper classes and data type conversion
+    functions.
+
+    \section2 Performance Considerations
+
+    Every call from CLR bytecode to native code implies a small
+    performance hit, and necessary type conversions introduce an
+    additional delay with every layer that exists between the two
+    frameworks. Consequently every approach to mix .NET and native
+    code should try to minimize the communication necessary between
+    the different worlds.
+
+    As ActiveQt introduces three layers at once - the RCW, COM and finally
+    ActiveQt itself - the performance penalty when using the generic
+    Qt/ActiveQt/COM/RCW/.NET bridge is larger than when using a
+    hand-crafted IJW-wrapper class. The execution speed however is still
+    sufficient for connecting to and modifying interactive elements in a
+    user interface, and as soon as the benefit of using Qt and C++ to
+    implement and compile performance critical algorithms into native code
+    kicks in, ActiveQt becomes a valid choice for making even non-visual
+    parts of your application accessible to .NET.
+
+    \sa {QtWinForms Solution}
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/activeqt/hierarchy-demo.qdocinc b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/hierarchy-demo.qdocinc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9d0cb5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/hierarchy-demo.qdocinc
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+\raw HTML
+//! [0]
+<script language="javascript">
+function createSubWidget( form )
+{
+    ParentWidget.createSubWidget( form.nameEdit.value );
+}
+
+function renameSubWidget( form )
+{
+    var SubWidget = ParentWidget.subWidget( form.nameEdit.value );
+    if ( !SubWidget ) {
+        alert( "No such widget " + form.nameEdit.value + "!" );
+        return;
+    }
+    SubWidget.label = form.labelEdit.value;
+    form.nameEdit.value = SubWidget.label;
+}
+
+function setFont( form )
+{
+    ParentWidget.font = form.fontEdit.value;
+}
+</script>
+
+<p>
+This widget can have many children!
+</p>
+<object ID="ParentWidget" CLASSID="CLSID:d574a747-8016-46db-a07c-b2b4854ee75c"
+CODEBASE="http://qtsoftware.com/demos/hierarchy.cab">
+[Object not available! Did you forget to build and register the server?]
+</object><br />
+<form>
+<input type="edit" ID="nameEdit" value="&lt;enter object name&gt;" />
+<input type="button" value="Create" onClick="createSubWidget(this.form)" />
+<input type="edit" ID="labelEdit" />
+<input type="button" value="Rename" onClick="renameSubWidget(this.form)" />
+<br />
+<input type="edit" ID="fontEdit" value="MS Sans Serif" />
+<input type="button" value = "Set Font" onClick="setFont(this.form)" />
+</form>
+//! [0]
+\endraw
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/activeqt/hierarchy.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/hierarchy.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..868d0ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/hierarchy.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*! 
+    \page qaxserver-demo-hierarchy.html
+    \title Qt Widget Hierarchy
+
+    \input examples/activeqt/hierarchy-demo.qdocinc
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \example activeqt/hierarchy
+    \title Hierarchy Example (ActiveQt)
+
+    The Hierarchy example is shows how to write an in-process ActiveX
+    control. The control is a QWidget subclass with child widgets
+    that are accessible as sub-types.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/hierarchy/objects.h 0
+    The \c QParentWidget class provides slots to create a widget
+    with a name, and to return a pointer to a named widget. The class
+    declaration uses \c Q_CLASSINFO() to provide the COM identifiers for
+    this class.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/hierarchy/objects.cpp 0
+    The constructor of QParentWidget creates a vertical box layout.
+    New child widgets are automatically added to the layout.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/hierarchy/objects.cpp 1
+    The \c createSubWidget slot creates a new \c QSubWidget with
+    the name provided in the parameter, and sets the label to that
+    name. The widget is also shown explicitly.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/hierarchy/objects.cpp 2
+    The \c subWidget slot uses the \c QObject::child() function and
+    returns the first child of type \c QSubWidget that has the requested
+    name.
+
+     \snippet examples/activeqt/hierarchy/objects.h 1
+    The \c QSubWidget class has a single string-property \c label,
+    and implements the paintEvent to draw the label. The class uses
+    again \c Q_CLASSINFO to provide the COM identifiers, and also sets
+    the \e ToSuperClass attribute to \e QSubWidget, to ensure that only
+    no slots of any superclasses (i.e. QWidget) are exposed.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/hierarchy/objects.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/hierarchy/objects.cpp 4
+    The implementation of the QSubWidget class is self-explanatory.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/hierarchy/main.cpp 0
+    The classes are then exported using a QAxFactory. \c QParentWidget is
+    exported as a full class (which can be created ), while \c QSubWidget is
+    only exported as a type, which can only be created indirectly through
+    APIs of \c QParentWidget.
+
+    To build the example you must first build the QAxServer library.
+    Then run qmake and your make tool in \c examples/activeqt/hierarchy.
+
+    The \l{qaxserver-demo-hierarchy.html}{demonstration} requires
+    your WebBrowser to support ActiveX controls, and scripting to be
+    enabled.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/hierarchy-demo.qdocinc 0
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/activeqt/menus.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/menus.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6ce1625
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/menus.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \page qaxserver-demo-menus.html
+    \preliminary
+
+    \title Menubar Merging
+
+    This example is not full functional at the moment.
+
+    \raw HTML
+    <object ID="QMenus" CLASSID="CLSID:4dc3f340-a6f7-44e4-a79b-3e9217695fbd"
+    CODEBASE="http://qtsoftware.com/demos/menusax.cab">
+    [Object not available! Did you forget to build and register the server?]
+    </object>
+    \endraw
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \example activeqt/menus
+    \title Menus Example (ActiveQt)
+
+    The Menus example demonstrates the use of QMenuBar and QStatusBar
+    in a QMainWindow to implement an in-place active control.
+
+    To build the example you must first build the QAxServer library.
+    Then run \c qmake and your make tool in \c
+    examples/activeqt/menus.
+
+    The \l{qaxserver-demo-menus.html}{demonstration} requires your
+    WebBrowser to support ActiveX controls, and scripting to be
+    enabled.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_activeqt_menus.qdoc 0
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/activeqt/multiple-demo.qdocinc b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/multiple-demo.qdocinc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee174bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/multiple-demo.qdocinc
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+\raw HTML
+//! [0]
+<script language="javascript">
+function setColor( form )
+{
+    Ax1.fillColor = form.colorEdit.value;
+}
+
+function setWidth( form )
+{
+    Ax2.lineWidth = form.widthEdit.value;
+}
+</script>
+
+<p />
+This is one QWidget subclass:<br />
+<object ID="Ax1" CLASSID="CLSID:1D9928BD-4453-4bdd-903D-E525ED17FDE5"
+CODEBASE="http://qtsoftware.com/demos/multipleax.cab">
+[Object not available! Did you forget to build and register the server?]
+</object><br />
+<form>
+Fill Color: <input type="edit" ID="colorEdit" value = "red" />
+<input type="button" value = "Set" onClick="setColor(this.form)" />
+<input type="button" value = "Hide" onClick="Ax1.hide()" />
+<input type="button" value = "Show" onClick="Ax1.show()" />
+</form>
+
+<p />
+This is another QWidget subclass:<br />
+<object ID="Ax2" CLASSID="CLSID:58139D56-6BE9-4b17-937D-1B1EDEDD5B71"
+CODEBASE="http://qtsoftware.com/demos/multipleax.cab">
+[Object not available! Did you forget to build and register the server?]
+</object><br />
+<form>
+Line width: <input type="edit" ID="widthEdit" value = "1" />
+<input type="button" value = "Set" onClick="setWidth(this.form)" />
+</form>
+//! [0]
+\endraw
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/activeqt/multiple.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/multiple.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d15371b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/multiple.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \page qaxserver-demo-multiple.html
+    \title Two Simple Qt Widgets
+
+    \input examples/activeqt/multiple-demo.qdocinc
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \example activeqt/multiple
+    \title Multiple Example (ActiveQt)
+
+    The Multiple example demonstrates the implementation of a
+    QAxFactory to provide multiple ActiveX controls in a single in
+    process ActiveX server using the \c QAXFACTORY_EXPORT() macro.
+    The ActiveX controls in this example are simple QWidget
+    subclasses that reimplement QWidget::paintEvent().
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/multiple/ax1.h 0
+
+    The first control draws a filled rectangle. The fill color is exposed
+    as a property. \c Q_CLASSINFO() is used to specify the COM identifiers.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/multiple/ax2.h 0
+
+    The second control draws a circle. The linewith is exposed as a property.
+    \c Q_CLASSINFO() is used to specify the COM identifiers, and to set the
+    attributes \e ToSuperClass and \e StockEvents to expose only the API of
+    the class itself, and to add COM stock events to the ActiveX control.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/multiple/main.cpp 0
+
+    The classes are exported from the server using the QAxFactory macros.
+
+    To build the example you must first build the QAxServer library.
+    Then run \c qmake and your make tool in  \c
+    examples/activeqt/multiple.
+
+    The \l{qaxserver-demo-multiple.html}{demonstration} requires your
+    WebBrowser to support ActiveX controls, and scripting to be
+    enabled.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/multiple-demo.qdocinc 0
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/activeqt/opengl-demo.qdocinc b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/opengl-demo.qdocinc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..44df0c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/opengl-demo.qdocinc
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+\raw HTML
+//! [0]
+<SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">
+function setRot( form )
+{
+    GLBox.setXRotation( form.XEdit.value );
+    GLBox.setYRotation( form.YEdit.value );
+    GLBox.setZRotation( form.ZEdit.value );
+}
+</SCRIPT>
+
+<p />
+An OpenGL scene:<br />
+<object ID="GLBox" CLASSID="CLSID:5fd9c22e-ed45-43fa-ba13-1530bb6b03e0"
+CODEBASE="http://qtsoftware.com/demos/openglax.cab">
+[Object not available! Did you forget to build and register the server?]
+</object><br />
+
+<form>
+Rotate the scene:<br />
+X:<input type="edit" ID="XEdit" value="0" /><br />
+Y:<input type="edit" name="YEdit" value="0" /><br />
+Z:<input type="edit" name="ZEdit" value="0" /><br />
+<input type="button" value="Set" onClick="setRot(this.form)" />
+</form>
+//! [0]
+\endraw
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/activeqt/opengl.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/opengl.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..05c9d08
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/opengl.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*! 
+    \page qaxserver-demo-opengl.html
+
+    \title OpenGL in an HTML page
+
+    \raw HTML
+    <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">
+    function setRot( form )
+    {
+        GLBox.setXRotation( form.XEdit.value );
+        GLBox.setYRotation( form.YEdit.value );
+        GLBox.setZRotation( form.ZEdit.value );
+    }
+    </SCRIPT>
+
+    <p />
+    An OpenGL scene:<br />
+    <object ID="GLBox" CLASSID="CLSID:5fd9c22e-ed45-43fa-ba13-1530bb6b03e0"
+    CODEBASE="http://qtsoftware.com/demos/openglax.cab">
+    [Object not available! Did you forget to build and register the server?]
+    </object><br />
+
+    <form>
+    Rotate the scene:<br />
+    X:<input type="edit" ID="XEdit" value="0" /><br />
+    Y:<input type="edit" name="YEdit" value="0" /><br />
+    Z:<input type="edit" name="ZEdit" value="0" /><br />
+    <input type="button" value="Set" onClick="setRot(this.form)" />
+    </form>
+    \endraw
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \example activeqt/opengl
+    \title OpenGL Example (ActiveQt)
+
+    The OpenGL example demonstrates the use of the default factory
+    and  QAxFactory::isServer(), and the implementation of an
+    additional COM interface using QAxBindable and QAxAggregated.
+    The server executable  can run both as an ActiveX server and as a
+    stand-alone application.
+
+    The ActiveX control in this example uses the QGlWidget class in
+    Qt to render an OpenGL scene in an ActiveX. The control exposes a few
+    methods to change the scene.
+
+    The application uses the default factory as provided by the 
+    QAXFACTORY_DEFAULT macro to expose the \c GLBox widget as an ActiveX 
+    control.
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/opengl/main.cpp 0
+    The implementation of \c main initializes the QApplication object,
+    and uses \c QAxFactory::isServer() to determine whether or not it is
+    appropriate to create and show the application interface.
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/opengl/main.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/opengl/main.cpp 2
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/opengl/main.cpp 3
+
+    The \c GLBox class inherits from both the \l QGLWidget class to be able
+    to render OpenGL, and from \l QAxBindable.
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/opengl/glbox.h 0
+    The class reimplements the \l QAxBindable::createAggregate() function from QAxBindable
+    to return the pointer to a \l QAxAggregated object.
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/opengl/glbox.h 1
+    The rest of the class declaration and the implementation of the OpenGL
+    rendering is identical to the original "box" example.
+
+    The implementation file of the \c GLBox class includes the \c objsafe.h
+    system header, in which the \c IObjectSafety COM interface is defined.
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/opengl/glbox.cpp 0
+    A class \c ObjectSafetyImpl is declared using multiple inheritance
+    to subclass the QAxAggregated class, and to implement the IObjectSafety
+    interface.
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/opengl/glbox.cpp 1
+    The class declares a default constructor, and implements the queryInterface
+    function to support the IObjectSafety interface.
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/opengl/glbox.cpp 2
+    Since every COM interface inherits \c IUnknown the \c QAXAGG_IUNKNOWN macro
+    is used to provide the default implementation of the \c IUnknown interface.
+    The macro is defined to delegate all calls to \c QueryInterface, \c AddRef
+    and \c Release to the interface returned by the controllingUnknown() function.
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/opengl/glbox.cpp 3
+    The implementation of the \c IObjectSafety interface provides the caller
+    with information about supported and enabled safety options, and returns 
+    \c S_OK for all calls to indicate that the ActiveX control is safe.
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/opengl/glbox.cpp 4
+    The implementation of the \c createAggregate() function just returns a new
+    \c ObjectSafetyImpl object.
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/opengl/glbox.cpp 5
+
+    To build the example you must first build the QAxServer library.
+    Then run \c qmake and your make tool in  \c
+    examples/activeqt/wrapper.
+
+    The \l{qaxserver-demo-opengl.html}{demonstration} requires your
+    WebBrowser to support ActiveX controls, and scripting to be
+    enabled.
+
+    In contrast to the other QAxServer examples Internet Explorer will not
+    open a dialog box to ask the user whether or not the scripting of the GLBox
+    control should be allowed (the exact browser behaviour depends on the security 
+    settings in the Internet Options dialog).
+
+    \snippet doc/src/examples/activeqt/opengl-demo.qdocinc 0
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/activeqt/qutlook.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/qutlook.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c29feeb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/qutlook.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*! 
+    \example activeqt/qutlook
+    \title Qutlook Example (ActiveQt)
+
+    The Qutlook example demonstrates the use of ActiveQt to automate
+    Outlook. The example makes use of the \l dumpcpp tool to generate
+    a C++ namespace for the type library describing the Outlook
+    Object Model.
+
+    The project file for the example looks like this:
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/qutlook/qutlook.pro 1
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/qutlook/qutlook.pro 2
+
+    The project file uses the \c dumpcpp tool to add an MS Outlook type library to the project.
+    If this fails, then the generated makefile will just print an error message, otherwise
+    the build step will now run the \e dumpcpp tool on the type library, and 
+    generate a header and a cpp file (in this case, \c msoutl.h and \c msoutl.cpp) that 
+    declares and implement an easy to use API to the Outlook objects.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/qutlook/addressview.h 0
+
+    The AddressView class is a QWidget subclass for the user interface. The QTreeView widget
+    will display the contents of Outlook's Contact folder as provided by the \c{model}.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/qutlook/addressview.cpp 0
+    The AddressBookModel class is a QAbstractListModel subclass that communicates directly with 
+    Outlook, using a QHash for caching.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/qutlook/addressview.cpp 1
+    The constructor initializes Outlook. The various signals Outlook provides to notify about 
+    contents changes are connected to the \c updateOutlook() slot.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/qutlook/addressview.cpp 2
+    The destructor logs off from the session.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/qutlook/addressview.cpp 3
+    The \c rowCount() implementation returns the number of entries as reported by Outlook. \c columnCount
+    and \c headerData are implemented to show four columns in the tree view.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/qutlook/addressview.cpp 4
+    The \c headerData() implementation returns hardcoded strings.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/qutlook/addressview.cpp 5
+    The \c data() implementation is the core of the model. If the requested data is in the cache the
+    cached value is used, otherwise the data is acquired from Outlook.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/qutlook/addressview.cpp 6
+    The \c changeItem() slot is called when the user changes the current entry using the user interface.
+    The Outlook item is accessed using the Outlook API, and is modified using the property setters.
+    Finally, the item is saved to Outlook, and removed from the cache. Note that the model does not
+    signal the view of the data change, as Outlook will emit a signal on its own.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/qutlook/addressview.cpp 7
+    The \c addItem() slot calls the CreateItem method of Outlook to create a new contact item,
+    sets the properties of the new item to the values entered by the user and saves the item.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/qutlook/addressview.cpp 8
+    The \c update() slot clears the cache, and emits the reset() signal to notify the view about the
+    data change requiring a redraw of the contents.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/qutlook/addressview.cpp 9
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/qutlook/addressview.cpp 10
+    The rest of the file implements the user interface using only Qt APIs, i.e. without communicating
+    with Outlook directly.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/qutlook/main.cpp 0
+
+    The \c main() entry point function finally instantiates the user interface and enters the
+    event loop.
+
+    To build the example you must first build the QAxContainer
+    library. Then run your make tool in \c examples/activeqt/qutlook
+    and run the resulting \c qutlook.exe.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/activeqt/simple-demo.qdocinc b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/simple-demo.qdocinc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45a346c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/simple-demo.qdocinc
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+\raw HTML
+//! [0]
+<object ID="QSimpleAX" CLASSID="CLSID:DF16845C-92CD-4AAB-A982-EB9840E74669"
+CODEBASE="http://qtsoftware.com/demos/simpleax.cab">
+    <PARAM NAME="text" VALUE="A simple control" />
+    <PARAM NAME="value" VALUE="1" />
+[Object not available! Did you forget to build and register the server?]
+</object>
+//! [0] //! [1]
+
+<FORM>
+    <INPUT TYPE="BUTTON" VALUE="About..." onClick="QSimpleAX.about()" />
+</FORM>
+//! [1]
+
+//! [2]
+<object ID="Calendar" CLASSID="CLSID:8E27C92B-1264-101C-8A2F-040224009C02">
+[Standard Calendar control not available!]
+    <PARAM NAME="day" VALUE="1" />
+</object>
+//! [2]
+
+<FORM>
+    <INPUT TYPE="BUTTON" VALUE="Today" onClick="Calendar.Today()" />
+</FORM>
+
+//! [3]
+<SCRIPT LANGUAGE="VBScript">
+Sub Calendar_Click()
+    MsgBox( "Calendar Clicked!" )
+End Sub
+
+Sub QSimpleAX_TextChanged( str )
+    document.title = str
+End Sub
+</SCRIPT>
+
+<SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">
+function QSimpleAX::ValueChanged( Newvalue )
+{
+    Calendar.Day = Newvalue;
+}
+</SCRIPT>
+//! [3]
+\endraw
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/activeqt/simple.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/simple.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e79e542
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/simple.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*! 
+    \page qaxserver-demo-simple.html
+
+    \title A standard ActiveX and the "simple" ActiveQt widget
+
+    \raw HTML
+    <object ID="QSimpleAX" CLASSID="CLSID:DF16845C-92CD-4AAB-A982-EB9840E74669"
+    CODEBASE="http://qtsoftware.com/demos/simpleax.cab">
+        <PARAM NAME="text" VALUE="A simple control" />
+        <PARAM NAME="value" VALUE="1" />
+    [Object not available! Did you forget to build and register the server?]
+    </object>
+
+    <FORM>
+        <INPUT TYPE="BUTTON" VALUE="About..." onClick="QSimpleAX.about()" />
+    </FORM>
+
+    <object ID="Calendar" CLASSID="CLSID:8E27C92B-1264-101C-8A2F-040224009C02">
+    [Standard Calendar control not available!]
+        <PARAM NAME="day" VALUE="1" />
+    </object>
+
+    <FORM>
+        <INPUT TYPE="BUTTON" VALUE="Today" onClick="Calendar.Today()" />
+    </FORM>
+
+    <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="VBScript">
+    Sub Calendar_Click()
+        MsgBox( "Calendar Clicked!" )
+    End Sub
+
+    Sub QSimpleAX_TextChanged( str )
+        document.title = str
+    End Sub
+    </SCRIPT>
+
+    <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript">
+    function QSimpleAX::ValueChanged( Newvalue )
+    {
+        Calendar.Day = Newvalue;
+    }
+    </SCRIPT>
+    \endraw
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \example activeqt/simple
+    \title Simple Example (ActiveQt)
+
+    The Simple example demonstrates the use of
+    QAxBindable::requestPropertyChange() and
+    QAxBindable::propertyChanged(), and the use of the default
+    QAxFactory through the \c QAXFACTORY_DEFAULT() macro.
+    
+    The ActiveX control in this example is a laid out QWidget with a
+    QSlider, a QLCDNumber and a QLineEdit. It provides a
+    signal/slot/property interface to change the values of the slider
+    and the line edit, and to get notified of any property changes.
+
+
+    The Qt implementation of the ActiveX for this example is
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/simple/main.cpp 0
+
+    The control is exported using the default QAxFactory
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/simple/main.cpp 1
+
+    To build the example you must first build the QAxServer library.
+    Then run qmake and your make tool in \c examples/activeqt/simple.
+
+    The \l{qaxserver-demo-simple.html}{demonstration} requires your
+    WebBrowser to support ActiveX controls, and scripting to be enabled.
+
+    The simple ActiveX control is embedded using the \c <object> tag.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/examples/activeqt/simple-demo.qdocinc 0
+
+    A simple HTML button is connected to the ActiveQt's about() slot.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/examples/activeqt/simple-demo.qdocinc 1
+
+    A second ActiveX control - the standard Calendar Control - is instantiated
+
+    \snippet doc/src/examples/activeqt/simple-demo.qdocinc 2
+
+    Events from the ActiveX controls are handled using both Visual Basic Script
+    and JavaScript.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/examples/activeqt/simple-demo.qdocinc 3
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/activeqt/webbrowser.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/webbrowser.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..46b83f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/webbrowser.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example activeqt/webbrowser
+    \title Web Browser Example (ActiveQt)
+
+    The Web Browser example uses the Microsoft Web Browser
+    ActiveX control to implement a fully functional Web Browser
+    application. The user interface has been developed using the Qt
+    Designer integration of the QAxWidget class.
+
+    The code demonstrates how the Qt application can communicate 
+    with the embedded ActiveX controls using signals, slots and the 
+    dynamicCall() function.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/webbrowser/main.cpp 0
+
+    The \c MainWindow class declares a \c QMainWindow based user interface,
+    using the \c Ui::MainWindow class generated by Qt Designer. A number
+    of slots are implemented to handle events from the various user 
+    interface elements, including the \c WebBrowser object, which is a
+    QAxWidget hosting the Microsoft Web Browser control.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/webbrowser/main.cpp 1
+
+    The constructor initializes the user interface, installs a
+    progress bar on the status bar, and uses QAxBase::dynamicCall()
+    to invoke the \c GoHome() method of Internet Explorer to
+    navigate  to the user's home page.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/webbrowser/main.cpp 2
+    Different slots handle the signals emitted by the WebBrowser object.
+
+    Connections that don't require any coding, i.e. connecting the \c back 
+    action to the \c GoBack() slot, have already been made in Qt Designer.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/webbrowser/main.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/webbrowser/main.cpp 4
+
+    The rest of the implementation is not related to ActiveQt - the actions
+    are handled by different slots, and the entry point function starts the
+    application using standard Qt APIs.
+
+    To build the example you must first build the QAxContainer
+    library. Then run your make tool in \c
+    examples/activeqt/webbrowser and run the resulting \c
+    webbrowser.exe.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/activeqt/wrapper-demo.qdocinc b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/wrapper-demo.qdocinc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1457119
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/wrapper-demo.qdocinc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+\raw HTML
+//! [0]
+<SCRIPT LANGUAGE="VBScript">
+Sub ToolButton_Clicked()
+    RadioButton.text = InputBox( "Enter something", "Wrapper Demo" )
+End Sub
+
+Sub PushButton_clicked()
+    MsgBox( "Thank you!" )
+End Sub
+
+Sub CheckBox_toggled( state )
+    if state = 0 then
+        CheckBox.text = "Check me!"
+    else
+        CheckBox.text = "Uncheck me!"
+    end if
+End Sub
+</SCRIPT>
+<p />
+A QPushButton:<br />
+<object ID="PushButton" CLASSID="CLSID:2B262458-A4B6-468B-B7D4-CF5FEE0A7092"
+CODEBASE="http://qtsoftware.com/demos/wrapperax.cab">
+    <PARAM NAME="text" VALUE="Click me!" />
+[Object not available! Did you forget to build and register the server?]
+</object><br />
+
+<p />
+A QCheckBox:<br />
+<object ID="CheckBox" CLASSID="CLSID:6E795de9-872d-43cf-a831-496ef9d86c68"
+CODEBASE="http://qtsoftware.com/demos/wrapperax.cab">
+    <PARAM NAME="text" VALUE="Check me!" />
+[Object not available! Did you forget to build and register the server?]
+</object><br />
+
+<p />
+A QToolButton:<br />
+<object ID="ToolButton" CLASSID="CLSID:7c0ffe7a-60c3-4666-bde2-5cf2b54390a1"
+CODEBASE="http://qtsoftware.com/demos/wrapperax.cab">
+[Object not available! Did you forget to build and register the server?]
+</object><br />
+
+<p />
+A QRadioButton:<br />
+<object ID="RadioButton" CLASSID="CLSID:afcf78c8-446c-409a-93b3-ba2959039189"
+CODEBASE="http://qtsoftware.com/demos/wrapperax.cab">
+    <PARAM NAME="text" VALUE="Tune me!" />
+[Object not available! Did you forget to build and register the server?]
+</object><br />
+//! [0]
+\endraw
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/activeqt/wrapper.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/wrapper.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..017da30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/activeqt/wrapper.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \page qaxserver-demo-wrapper.html
+
+    \title Standard Qt widgets in an HTML page
+
+    \input examples/activeqt/wrapper-demo.qdocinc
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \example activeqt/wrapper
+    \title Wrapper Example (ActiveQt)
+
+    The Wrapper example demonstrates how to export existing QWidget
+    classes as ActiveX controls, and the use of QAxFactory together
+    with the \c QAXFACTORY_EXPORT() macro. ActiveX controls in this
+    example are the standard button classes QPushButton, QCheckBox
+    and QRadioButton as provided by Qt.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/wrapper/main.cpp 0
+    The factory implementation returns the list of supported controls,
+    creates controls on request and provides information about the unique
+    IDs of the COM classes and interfaces for each control.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/wrapper/main.cpp 1
+    The factory is exported using the QAXFACTORY_EXPORT macro.
+
+    To build the example you must first build the QAxServer library.
+    Then run \c qmake and your make tool in \c
+    examples/activeqt/wrapper.
+
+    The \l{qaxserver-demo-wrapper.html}{demonstration} requires a
+    web browser that supports ActiveX controls, and scripting to be
+    enabled.
+
+    \snippet examples/activeqt/wrapper-demo.qdocinc 0
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/addressbook.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/addressbook.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fb5c1ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/addressbook.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,456 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/addressbook
+    \title Address Book Example
+
+    The address book example shows how to use proxy models to display
+    different views onto data from a single model.
+
+    \image addressbook-example.png Screenshot of the Address Book example
+
+    This example provides an address book that allows contacts to be
+    grouped alphabetically into 9 groups: ABC, DEF, GHI, ... , VW,
+    ..., XYZ. This is achieved by using multiple views on the same
+    model, each of which is filtered using an instance of the
+    QSortFilterProxyModel class.
+
+
+    \section1 Overview
+
+    The address book contains 5 classes: \c MainWindow,
+    \c AddressWidget, \c TableModel, \c NewAddressTab and
+    \c AddDialog. The \c MainWindow class uses \c AddressWidget as
+    its central widget and provides \gui File and \gui Tools menus.
+
+    \image addressbook-classes.png Diagram for Address Book Example
+
+    The \c AddressWidget class is a QTabWidget subclass that is used
+    to manipulate the 10 tabs displayed in the example: the 9
+    alphabet group tabs and an instance of \c NewAddressTab.
+    The \c NewAddressTab class is a subclass of QWidget that
+    is only used whenever the address book is empty, prompting the
+    user to add some contacts. \c AddressWidget also interacts with
+    an instance of \c TableModel to add, edit and remove entries to
+    the address book.
+
+    \c TableModel is a subclass of QAbstractTableModel that provides
+    the standard model/view API to access data. It also holds a
+    QList of \l{QPair}s corresponding to the contacts added.
+    However, this data is not all visible in a single tab. Instead,
+    QTableView is used to provide 9 different views of the same
+    data, according to the alphabet groups.
+
+    QSortFilterProxyModel is the class responsible for filtering
+    the contacts for each group of contacts. Each proxy model uses
+    a QRegExp to filter out contacts that do not belong in the
+    corresponding alphabetical group. The \c AddDialog class is
+    used to obtain information from the user for the address book.
+    This QDialog subclass is instantiated by \c NewAddressTab to
+    add contacts, and by \c AddressWidget to add and edit contacts.
+
+    We begin by looking at the \c TableModel implementation.
+
+
+    \section1 TableModel Class Definition
+
+    The \c TableModel class provides standard API to access data in
+    its QList of \l{QPair}s by subclassing QAbstractTableModel. The
+    basic functions that must be implemented in order to do so are:
+    \c rowCount(), \c columnCount(), \c data(), \c headerData().
+    For TableModel to be editable, it has to provide implementations
+    \c insertRows(), \c removeRows(), \c setData() and \c flags()
+    functions.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/tablemodel.h 0
+
+    Two constructors are used, a default constructor which uses
+    \c TableModel's own \c {QList<QPair<QString, QString>>} and one
+    that takes \c {QList<QPair<QString, QString>} as an argument,
+    for convenience.
+
+
+    \section1 TableModel Class Implementation
+
+    We implement the two constructors as defined in the header file.
+    The second constructor initializes the list of pairs in the
+    model, with the parameter value.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/tablemodel.cpp 0
+
+    The \c rowCount() and \c columnCount() functions return the
+    dimensions of the model. Whereas, \c rowCount()'s value will vary
+    depending on the number of contacts added to the address book,
+    \c columnCount()'s value is always 2 because we only need space
+    for the \bold Name and \bold Address columns.
+
+    \note The \c Q_UNUSED() macro prevents the compiler from
+    generating warnings regarding unused parameters.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/tablemodel.cpp 1
+
+    The \c data() function returns either a \bold Name or
+    \bold {Address}, based on the contents of the model index
+    supplied. The row number stored in the model index is used to
+    reference an item in the list of pairs. Selection is handled
+    by the QItemSelectionModel, which will be explained with
+    \c AddressWidget.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/tablemodel.cpp 2
+
+    The \c headerData() function displays the table's header,
+    \bold Name and \bold Address. If you require numbered entries
+    for your address book, you can use a vertical header which we
+    have hidden in this example (see the \c AddressWidget
+    implementation).
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/tablemodel.cpp 3
+
+    The \c insertRows() function is called before new data is added,
+    otherwise the data will not be displayed. The
+    \c beginInsertRows() and \c endInsertRows() functions are called
+    to ensure all connected views are aware of the changes.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/tablemodel.cpp 4
+
+    The \c removeRows() function is called to remove data. Again,
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{beginRemoveRows()} and
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{endRemoveRows()} are called to ensure
+    all connected views are aware of the changes.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/tablemodel.cpp 5
+
+    The \c setData() function is the function that inserts data into
+    the table, item by item and not row by row. This means that to
+    fill a row in the address book, \c setData() must be called
+    twice, as each row has 2 columns. It is important to emit the
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{dataChanged()} signal as it tells all
+    connected views to update their displays.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/tablemodel.cpp 6
+
+    The \c flags() function returns the item flags for the given
+    index.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/tablemodel.cpp 7
+
+    We set the Qt::ItemIsEditable flag because we want to allow the
+    \c TableModel to be edited. Although for this example we don't
+    use the editing features of the QTableView object, we enable
+    them here so that we can reuse the model in other programs.
+
+    The last function in \c {TableModel}, \c getList() returns the
+    QList<QPair<QString, QString>> object that holds all the
+    contacts in the address book. We use this function later to
+    obtain the list of contacts to check for existing entries, write
+    the contacts to a file and read them back. Further explanation is
+    given with \c AddressWidget.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/tablemodel.cpp 8
+
+
+    \section1 AddressWidget Class Definition
+
+    The \c AddressWidget class is technically the main class
+    involved in this example as it provides functions to add, edit
+    and remove contacts, to save the contacts to a file and to load
+    them from a file.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/addresswidget.h 0
+
+    \c AddressWidget extends QTabWidget in order to hold 10 tabs
+    (\c NewAddressTab and the 9 alphabet group tabs) and also
+    manipulates \c table, the \c TableModel object, \c proxyModel,
+    the QSortFilterProxyModel object that we use to filter the
+    entries, and \c tableView, the QTableView object.
+
+
+    \section1 AddressWidget Class Implementation
+
+    The \c AddressWidget constructor accepts a parent widget and
+    instantiates \c NewAddressTab, \c TableModel and
+    QSortFilterProxyModel. The \c NewAddressTab object, which is
+    used to indicate that the address book is empty, is added
+    and the rest of the 9 tabs are set up with \c setupTabs().
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/addresswidget.cpp 0
+
+    The \c setupTabs() function is used to set up the 9 alphabet
+    group tabs, table views and proxy models in
+    \c AddressWidget. Each proxy model in turn is set to filter
+    contact names according to the relevant alphabet group using a
+    \l{Qt::CaseInsensitive}{case-insensitive} QRegExp object. The
+    table views are also sorted in ascending order using the
+    corresponding proxy model's \l{QSortFilterProxyModel::}{sort()}
+    function.
+
+    Each table view's \l{QTableView::}{selectionMode} is set to
+    QAbstractItemView::SingleSelection and
+    \l{QTableView::}{selectionBehavior} is set to
+    QAbstractItemView::SelectRows, allowing the user to select
+    all the items in one row at the same time. Each QTableView object
+    is automatically given a QItemSelectionModel that keeps track
+    of the selected indexes.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/addresswidget.cpp 1
+
+    The QItemSelectionModel class provides a
+    \l{QItemSelectionModel::selectionChanged()}{selectionChanged}
+    signal that is connected to \c{AddressWidget}'s
+    \c selectionChanged() signal. This signal to signal connection
+    is necessary to enable the \gui{Edit Entry...} and
+    \gui{Remove Entry} actions in \c MainWindow's Tools menu. This
+    connection is further explained in \c MainWindow's
+    implementation.
+
+    Each table view in the address book is added as a tab to the
+    QTabWidget with the relevant label, obtained from the QStringList
+    of groups.
+
+    \image addressbook-signals.png Signals and Slots Connections
+
+    We provide 2 \c addEntry() functions: 1 which is intended to be
+    used to accept user input, and the other which performs the actual
+    task of adding new entries to the address book. We divide the
+    responsibility of adding entries into two parts to allow
+    \c newAddressTab to  insert data without having to popup a dialog.
+
+    The first \c addEntry() function is a slot connected to the
+    \c MainWindow's \gui{Add Entry...} action. This function creates an
+    \c AddDialog object and then calls the second \c addEntry()
+    function to actually add the contact to \c table.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/addresswidget.cpp 2
+
+    Basic validation is done in the second \c addEntry() function to
+    prevent duplicate entries in the address book. As mentioned with
+    \c TableModel, this is part of the reason why we require the
+    getter method \c getList().
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/addresswidget.cpp 3
+
+    If the model does not already contain an entry with the same name,
+    we call \c setData() to insert the name and address into the
+    first and second columns. Otherwise, we display a QMessageBox
+    to inform the user.
+
+    \note The \c newAddressTab is removed once a contact is added
+    as the address book is no longer empty.
+
+    Editing an entry is a way to update the contact's address only,
+    as the example does not allow the user to change the name of an
+    existing contact.
+
+    Firstly, we obtain the active tab's QTableView object using
+    QTabWidget::currentWidget(). Then we extract the
+    \c selectionModel from the \c tableView to obtain the selected
+    indexes.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/addresswidget.cpp 4a
+
+    Next we extract data from the row the user intends to 
+    edit. This data is displayed in an instance of \c AddDialog
+    with a different window title. The \c table is only
+    updated if changes have been made to data in \c aDialog.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/addresswidget.cpp 4b
+
+    \image addressbook-editdialog.png Screenshot of Dialog to Edit a Contact
+
+    Entries are removed using the \c removeEntry() function.
+    The selected row is removed by accessing it through the
+    QItemSelectionModel object, \c selectionModel. The
+    \c newAddressTab is re-added to the \c AddressWidget only if
+    the user removes all the contacts in the address book.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/addresswidget.cpp 5
+
+    The \c writeToFile() function is used to save a file containing
+    all the contacts in the address book. The file is saved in a
+    custom \c{.dat} format. The contents of the QList of \l{QPair}s
+    are written to \c file using QDataStream. If the file cannot be
+    opened, a QMessageBox is displayed with the related error message.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/addresswidget.cpp 6
+
+    The \c readFromFile() function loads a file containing all the
+    contacts in the address book, previously saved using
+    \c writeToFile(). QDataStream is used to read the contents of a
+    \c{.dat} file into a list of pairs and each of these is added
+    using \c addEntry().
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/addresswidget.cpp 7
+
+
+    \section1 NewAddressTab Class Definition
+
+    The \c NewAddressTab class provides an informative tab telling
+    the user that the address book is empty. It appears and
+    disappears according to the contents of the address book, as
+    mentioned in \c{AddressWidget}'s implementation.
+
+    \image addressbook-newaddresstab.png Screenshot of NewAddressTab
+
+    The \c NewAddressTab class extends QWidget and contains a QLabel
+    and QPushButton.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/newaddresstab.h 0
+
+
+    \section1 NewAddressTab Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor instantiates the \c addButton,
+    \c descriptionLabel and connects the \c{addButton}'s signal to
+    the \c{addEntry()} slot.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/newaddresstab.cpp 0
+
+    The \c addEntry() function is similar to \c AddressWidget's
+    \c addEntry() in the sense that both functions instantiate an
+    \c AddDialog object. Data from the dialog is extracted and sent
+    to \c AddressWidget's \c addEntry() slot by emitting the
+    \c sendDetails() signal.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/newaddresstab.cpp 1
+
+    \image signals-n-slots-aw-nat.png
+
+
+    \section1 AddDialog Class Definition
+
+    The \c AddDialog class extends QDialog and provides the user
+    with a QLineEdit and a QTextEdit to input data into the
+    address book.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/adddialog.h 0
+
+    \image addressbook-adddialog.png
+
+
+    \section1 AddDialog Class Implementation
+
+    The \c AddDialog's constructor sets up the user interface,
+    creating the necessary widgets and placing them into layouts.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/adddialog.cpp 0
+
+    To give the dialog the desired behavior, we connect the \gui OK
+    and \gui Cancel buttons to the dialog's \l{QDialog::}{accept()} and
+    \l{QDialog::}{reject()} slots. Since the dialog only acts as a
+    container for name and address information, we do not need to
+    implement any other functions for it.
+
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    The \c MainWindow class extends QMainWindow and implements the
+    menus and actions necessary to manipulate the address book.
+
+    \table
+    \row \o \inlineimage addressbook-filemenu.png
+         \o \inlineimage addressbook-toolsmenu.png
+    \endtable
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    The \c MainWindow class uses an \c AddressWidget as its central
+    widget and provides the File menu with \gui Open, \gui Close and
+    \gui Exit actions, as well as the \gui Tools menu with
+    \gui{Add Entry...}, \gui{Edit Entry...} and \gui{Remove Entry}
+    actions.
+
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor for \c MainWindow instantiates AddressWidget,
+    sets it as its central widget and calls the \c createMenus()
+    function.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    The \c createMenus() function sets up the \gui File and
+    \gui Tools menus, connecting the actions to their respective slots.
+    Both the \gui{Edit Entry...} and \gui{Remove Entry} actions are
+    disabled by default as such actions cannot be carried out on an empty
+    address book. They are only enabled when one or more contacts
+    are added.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/mainwindow.cpp 1a
+    \dots
+    \codeline
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/mainwindow.cpp 1b
+
+    Apart from connecting all the actions' signals to their
+    respective slots, we also connect \c AddressWidget's
+    \c selectionChanged() signal to its \c updateActions() slot.
+
+    The \c openFile() function allows the user to choose a file with
+    the \l{QFileDialog::getOpenFileName()}{open file dialog}. The chosen
+    file has to be a custom \c{.dat} file that contains address book
+    contacts. This function is a slot connected to \c openAct in the
+    \gui File menu.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    The \c saveFile() function allows the user to save a file with
+    the \l{QFileDialog::getSaveFileName()}{save file dialog}. This function
+    is a slot connected to \c saveAct in the \gui File menu.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+    The \c updateActions() function enables and disables
+    \gui{Edit Entry...} and \gui{Remove Entry} depending on the contents of
+    the address book. If the address book is empty, these actions
+    are disabled; otherwise, they are enabled. This function is a slot
+    is connected to the \c AddressWidget's \c selectionChanged()
+    signal.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+
+    \section1 main() Function
+
+    The main function for the address book instantiates QApplication
+    and opens a \c MainWindow before running the event loop.
+
+    \snippet itemviews/addressbook/main.cpp 0
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/ahigl.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/ahigl.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d42df66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/ahigl.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,572 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example qws/ahigl
+    \title OpenGL for Embedded Systems Example
+
+    \section1 Introduction
+
+    This example demonstrates how you can use OpenGL for Embedded
+    Systems (ES) in your own screen driver and \l{add your graphics
+    driver to Qt for Embedded Linux}. In \l{Qt for Embedded Linux},
+    painting is done in software, normally performed in two steps:
+    First, each client renders its windows onto its window surface in
+    memory using a paint engine. Then the server uses the screen
+    driver to compose the window surface images and copy the
+    composition to the screen.  (See the \l{Qt for Embedded Linux
+    Architecture} documentation for details.)
+
+    This example is not for the novice. It assumes the reader is
+    familiar with both OpenGL and the screen driver framework
+    demonstrated in the \l {Accelerated Graphics Driver Example}.
+
+    An OpenGL screen driver for Qt for Embedded Linux can use OpenGL ES
+    in three ways. First, the \l{QWSServer}{Qt for Embedded Linux server}
+    can use the driver to compose multiple window images and then show the
+    composition on the screen. Second, clients can use the driver to
+    accelerate OpenGL painting operations using the QOpenGLPaintEngine
+    class. Finally, clients can use the driver to do OpenGL operations
+    with instances of the QGLWidget class. This example implements all
+    three cases.
+
+    The example uses an implementation of OpenGL ES from 
+    \l {http://ati.amd.com}{ATI} for the 
+    \l {http://ati.amd.com/products/imageon238x/}{Imageon 2380}. The
+    OpenGL include files gl.h and egl.h must be installed to compile
+    the example, and the OpenGL and EGL libraries must be installed
+    for linking. If your target device is different, you must install
+    the include files and libraries for that device, and you also
+    might need to modify the example source code, if any API signatures
+    in your EGL library differ from the ones used here.
+
+    After compiling and linking the example source, install the
+    screen driver plugin with the command \c {make install}. To
+    start an application that uses the plugin, you can either set the
+    environment variable \l QWS_DISPLAY and then start the
+    application, or just start the application with the \c -display
+    switch, as follows:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_ahigl.qdoc 0
+
+    The example driver also implements an animated transition effect
+    for use when showing new windows or reshowing windows that have
+    been minimized. To enable this transition effect, run the
+    application with \c {-display ahigl:effects}.
+
+    \section1 The Class Definitions
+
+    The example comprises three main classes plus some helper classes.
+    The three main classes are the plugin (QAhiGLScreenPlugin), which
+    is defined in qscreenahiglplugin.cpp, the screen driver
+    (QAhiGLScreen), which is defined in qscreenahigl_qws.h, and the
+    window surface (QAhiGLWindowSurface), which is defined in
+    qwindowsurface_ahigl_p.h. The "Ahi" prefix in these class names
+    stands for \e {ATI Handheld Interface}. The example was written
+    for the ATI Imageon 2380, but it can also be used as a template
+    for other ATI handheld devices.
+
+    \section2 The Plugin Class Definition
+
+    The screen driver plugin is class QAhiGLScreenPlugin.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahiglplugin.cpp 0
+
+    QAhiGLScreenPlugin is derived from class QScreenDriverPlugin,
+    which in turn is derived from QObject.
+
+    \section2 The Screen Driver Class Definitions
+
+    The screen driver classes are the public class QAhiGLScreen and
+    its private implementation class QAhiGLScreenPrivate. QAhiGLScreen
+    is derived from QGLScreen, which is derived from QScreen. If your
+    screen driver will only do window compositions and display them,
+    then you can derive your screen driver class directly from
+    QScreen.  But if your screen driver will do accelerated graphics
+    rendering operations with the QOpenGLPaintEngine, or if it will
+    handle instances of class QGLWidget, then you must derive your
+    screen driver class from QGLScreen.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.h 0
+
+    All functions in the public API of class QAhiGLScreen are virtual
+    functions declared in its base classes. hasOpenGL() is declared in
+    QGLScreen. It simply returns true indicating our example screen
+    driver does support OpenGL operations.  The other functions in the
+    public API are declared in QScreen.  They are called by the
+    \l{QWSServer}{Qt for Embedded Linux server} at the appropriate times.
+
+    Note that class QScreen is a documented class but class QGLScreen
+    is not. This is because the design of class QGLScreen is not yet
+    final.
+
+    The only data member in class QAhiGLScreen is a standard d_ptr,
+    which points to an instance of the driver's private implementation
+    class QAhiGLScreenPrivate. The driver's internal state is stored
+    in the private class. Using the so-called d-pointer pattern allows
+    you to make changes to the driver's internal design without
+    breaking binary compatibility.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 0
+
+    Class QAhiGLScreenPrivate is derived from QObject so that it can
+    use the Qt signal/slot mechanism. QAhiGLScreen is not a QObject,
+    so it can't use the signal/slot mechanism. Signals meant for our
+    screen driver are received by slots in the private implementation
+    class, in this case, windowEvent() and redrawScreen().
+
+    \section2 The Window Surface Class Definitions
+
+    The window surface classes are QAhiGLWindowSurface and its private
+    implementation class QAhiGLWindowSurfacePrivate. We create class
+    QAhiGLWindowSurface so the screen driver can use the OpenGL paint
+    engine and the OpenGL widget, classes QOpenGLPaintEngine and
+    QGLWidget.  QAhiGLWindowSurface is derived from the more general
+    OpenGL window surface class, QWSGLWindowSurface, which is derived
+    from QWSWindowSurface.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qwindowsurface_ahigl_p.h 0
+
+    In addition to implementing the standard functionality required by
+    any new subclass of QWSWindowSurface, QAhiGLWindowSurface also
+    contains the textureId() function used by QAhiGLScreen.
+
+    The same d-pointer pattern is used in this window surface class.
+    The private implementation class is QAhiGLWindowSurfacePrivate. It
+    allows making changes to the state variables of the window surface
+    without breaking binary compatibility.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qwindowsurface_ahigl.cpp 0
+
+    In this case, our private implementation class has no member
+    functions except for its constructor. It contains only public data
+    members which hold state information for the window surface.
+
+    \section2 The Helper Classes
+
+    The example screen driver maintains a static \l {QMap} {map} of
+    all the \l {QWSWindow} {windows} it is showing on the screen.
+    Each window is mapped to an instance of struct WindowInfo.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 2
+
+    As each new window is created, an instance of struct WindowInfo is
+    allocated and inserted into the window map. WindowInfo uses a
+    GLuint to identify the OpenGL texture it creates for the window.
+    Note that the example driver, in addition to drawing windows using
+    OpenGL, also supports drawing windows in the normal way without
+    OpenGL, but it uses an OpenGL texture for the rendering operations
+    in either case.  Top-level windows that are drawn without OpenGL
+    are first rendered in the normal way into a shared memory segment,
+    which is then converted to a OpenGL texture and drawn to the
+    screen.
+
+    To animate the window transition effect, WindowInfo uses an
+    instance of the helper class ShowAnimation.  The animation is
+    created by the windowEvent() slot in QAhiGLScreenPrivate, whenever
+    a \l {QWSServer::WindowEvent} {Show} window event is emitted by
+    the \l {QWSServer} {window server}. The server emits this signal
+    when a window is shown the first time and again later, when the
+    window is reshown after having been minimized.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 1
+
+    Class ShowAnimation is derived from the QTimeLine class, which is
+    used for controlling animations. QTimeLine is a QObject, so
+    ShowAnimation can use the Qt signal/slot mechanism. We will see
+    how the timeline's \l {QTimeLine::valueChanged()} {valueChanged()}
+    and \l {QTimeLine::finished()} {finished()} signals are used to
+    control the animation and then destroy the instance of
+    ShowAnimation, when the animation ends. The ShowAnimation
+    constructor needs the pointer to the screen driver's private
+    implementation class so it can set up these signal/slot
+    connections.
+
+    \section1 The Class Implementations
+
+    \section2 The Plugin Class Implementation
+
+    QAhiGLScreenPlugin is a straightforward derivation of
+    QScreenDriverPlugin.  It reimplements \l{QScreenDriverPlugin::}{keys()}
+    and \l{QScreenDriverPlugin::}{create()}. They are
+    called as needed by the \l{QWSServer}{Qt for Embedded Linux server.}
+    Recall that the server detects that the ahigl screen driver has
+    been requested, either by including "ahigl" in the value for the
+    environment variable QWS_DISPLAY, or by running your application
+    with a command line like the following.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_ahigl.qdoc 1
+
+    The server calls \l {QScreenDriverPlugin::} {keys()}, which
+    returns a \l {QStringList} containing the singleton "ahigl"
+    matching the requested screen driver and telling the server that
+    it can use our example screen driver. The server then calls \l
+    {QScreenDriverPlugin::} {create()}, which creates the instance of
+    QAhiGLScreen.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahiglplugin.cpp 1
+
+    In the code snippet above, the macro Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2 is used to export
+    the plugin class, QAhiGLScreen, for the qahiglscreen plugin.
+    Further information regarding plugins and how to create them
+    can be found at \l{How to Create Qt Plugins}.
+
+    \section2 The Screen Driver Class Implementations
+
+    The plugin creates the singleton instance of QAhiGLScreen. The
+    constructor is passed a \c displayId, which is used in the base
+    class QGLScreen to identify the server that the screen driver is
+    connected to. The constructor also creates its instance of
+    QAhiGLScreenPrivate, which instantiates a QTimer. The timeout()
+    signal of this timer is connected to the redrawScreen() slot so
+    the timer can be used to limit the frequency of actual drawing
+    operations in the hardware.
+
+    The public API of class QAhiGLScreen consists of implementations
+    of virtual functions declared in its base classes. The function
+    hasOpenGL() is declared in base class QGLScreen. The others are
+    declared in base class QScreen.
+
+    The \l {QScreen::}{connect()} function is the first one called by
+    the server after the screen driver is constructed. It initializes
+    the QScreen data members to hardcoded values that describe the ATI
+    screen. A better implementation would query the hardware for the
+    corresponding values in its current state and use those. It asks
+    whether the screen driver was started with the \c effects option
+    and sets the \c doEffects flag accordingly.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 7
+
+    The \l {QScreen::}{initDevice()} function is called by the server
+    after \l {QScreen::}{connect()}. It uses EGL library functions to
+    initialize the ATI hardware. Note that some data structures used
+    in this example are specific to the EGL implementation used, e.g.,
+    the DummyScreen structure.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 8
+
+    Note the signal/slot connection at the bottom of initDevice(). We
+    connect the server's QWSServer::windowEvent() signal to the
+    windowEvent() slot in the screen driver's private implementation
+    class.  The windowEvent() slot handles three window events,
+    QWSServer::Create, QWSServer::Destroy, and QWSServer::Show.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 5
+
+    The function manages instances of the helper classes associated
+    with each window.  When a QWSServer::Create event occurs, it means
+    a new top-level \l {QWSWindow} {window} has been created. In this
+    case, an instance of helper class WindowInfo is created and
+    inserted into the window map with the pointer to the new \l
+    {QWSWindow} {window} as its key. When a QWSServer::Destroy event
+    occurs, a window is being destroyed, and its mapping is removed
+    from the window map. These two events are straightforward. The
+    tricky bits happen when a QWSServer::Show event occurs. This case
+    occurs when a window is shown for the first time and when it is
+    reshown after having been minimized. If the window transition
+    effect has been enabled, a new instance of the helper class
+    ShowAnimation is created and stored in a QPointer in the window's
+    instance of WindowInfo. The constructor of ShowAnimation
+    automatically \l {QTimeLine::start()} {starts} the animation of
+    the transition effect.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 3
+
+    To ensure that a ShowAnimation is not deleted until its animation
+    ends, the \l {QTimeLine::finished()} {finished()} signal is
+    connected to the \l {QObject::deleteLater()} {deleteLater()} slot.
+    When the animation ends, the finished() signal is emitted and the
+    deleteLater() slot deletes the ShowAnimation. The key here is that
+    the pointer to the ShowAnimation is stored in a QPointer in the
+    WindowInfo class. This QPointer will also be notified when the
+    ShowAnimation is deleted, so the QPointer in WindowInfo can null
+    itself out, if and only if it is still pointing to the instance
+    of ShowAnimation being deleted.
+
+    The \l {QTimeLine::valueForTime()} {valueForTime()} function in
+    QTimeLine is reimplemented in ShowAnimation to return time values
+    that represent a curved path for the window transition effect.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 4
+
+    valueForTime() is called internally, when the time interval it
+    computed during the previous call has elapsed. If it computes a
+    next time value that is different from the one computed
+    previously, the \l {QTimeLine::valueChanged()} {valueChanged()}
+    signal is emitted.  The ShowAnimation constructor shown above
+    connects this signal to the redrawScreen() slot in the screen
+    driver's private implementation class. This is how the animation
+    actually happens.
+
+    The screen driver's implementation of \l {QScreen::}
+    {exposeRegion()} is where the main work of the screen driver is
+    meant to be done, i.e., updating the screen. It is called by the
+    \l {QWSServer} {window system} to update a particular window's
+    region of the screen. But note that it doesn't actually update the
+    screen, i.e., it doesn't actually call redrawScreen() directly,
+    but starts the updateTimer, which causes redrawScreen() to be
+    called once for each updateTimer interval. This means that all
+    calls to exposeRegion() during an updateTimer interval are handled
+    by a single call to redrawScreen(). Thus updateTimer can be used
+    to limit the frequency of screen updates.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 13
+
+    The call to the private function invalidateTexture() destroys
+    the window's existing texture (image). This ensures that a new
+    texture will be created for the window, when redrawScreen() is
+    eventually called.
+
+    But there is a caveat to using updateTimer to limit the frequency
+    of screen updates. When the driver's animated transition effect
+    for new windows is enabled and a new window is being shown for the
+    first time or reshown after having been minimized, an instance of
+    ShowAnimation is created to run the animation. The valueChanged()
+    signal of this ShowAnimation is also connected to the
+    redrawScreen() slot, and QTimeLine, the base class of our
+    ShowAnimation, uses its own, internal timer to limit the speed of
+    the animation. This means that in the driver as currently written,
+    if the window transition effect is enabled (i.e. if the plugin is
+    started, with \c {-display ahigl:effects}), then redrawScreen()
+    can be called both when the update timer times out and when the
+    ShowAnimation timer times out, so the screen might get updated
+    more often than the frequency established by the update timer.
+    This may or may not be a bug, depending on your own hardware, if
+    you use this example as a template for your own OpenGL driver.
+
+    The screen driver's private function redrawScreen() constructs
+    the window compositions. It is called only by the function of the
+    same name in the screen driver's private implementation class.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 6
+
+    Recall that this redrawScreen() in the private implementation
+    class is a slot function connected to two signals, the \c
+    timeout() signal of the updateTimer in the private implementation
+    class, and the valueChanged() signal of the helper class
+    ShowAnimation. Thus, the screen is only ever updated when a
+    timeout of one of the two timers occurs. This is important for two
+    reasons. First, the screen is meant to be updated no more than
+    once per updateTimer interval. Second, however, if the animated
+    window transition effect is requested, the screen might be updated
+    more often than that, and this might be a bug if the hardware
+    can't handle more frequent updates.
+
+    The redrawScreen() in QAhiGLScreen begins by using standard
+    OpenGL to fill the screen with the background color.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 10
+
+    Next it iterates over the list of all \l {QWSWindow} {client
+    windows} obtained from the \l {QWSServer} {server}, extracting
+    from each window its instance of QWSWIndowSurface, then using that
+    window surface to create an OpenGL texture, and finally calling
+    the helper function drawWindow() to draw the texture on the
+    screen.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 11
+
+    Note the call to glBindTexture() immediately before the call to
+    drawWindow(). This call binds the identifer \c GL_TEXTURE_2D to
+    the texture we have just created. This makes our texture
+    accessible to functions in the OpenGL libraries. If you miss that
+    point, digging into the internals of drawWindow() won't make much
+    sense.
+
+    Finally, the cursor is added to the window composition, and in the
+    last statement, the whole thing is displayed on the screen.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 12
+
+    The call to \c drawWindow(win,progress), in addition to passing a
+    pointer to the window to be redrawn, also passes the \c progress
+    parameter obtained by calling \l {QTimeLine::currentValue()} on
+    the window's instance of ShowAnimation. Recall that the current
+    value of the timeline is updated internally by a timer local to
+    the timeline, and the redrawScreen() slot is called whenever the
+    current value changes. The progress value will only be used if
+    the animated transition effect has been enabled. These extra calls
+    of redrawScreen() may cause the screen to be updated more often
+    than the rate determined by updateTimer. This must be taken
+    into account, if you set your updateTimer to timeout at the
+    maximum screen update frequency your hardware can handle.
+
+    The drawWindow() function is not shown here and not explained
+    further, but the call to drawWindow() is the entry point to a
+    hierarchy of private helper functions that execute sequences of
+    OpenGL and EGL library calls. The reader is assumed to be familiar
+    enough with the OpenGL and EGL APIs to understand the code in
+    these helper functions on his own. Besides drawWindow(), the list
+    of these helper functions includes drawQuad(), drawQuadWavyFlag(),
+    the two overloadings of drawQuad_helper() (used by drawQuad() and
+    drawQuadWacyFlag()), and setRectCoords().
+
+    Note the two different ways the window's texture can be created in
+    redrawScreen(). If the window surface is an OpenGL window surface
+    (QAhiGLWindowSurface described below), the texture is obtained
+    from the window surface directly by calling its textureId()
+    function. But when the window surface is not an OpenGL one, the
+    static function createTexture() is called with the window
+    surface's \l {QImage} {image} to copy that image into an OpenGL
+    texture. This is done with the EGL functions glTexImage2D() and
+    glTexSubImage2D(). createTexture() is another function that
+    should be understandable for exsperienced OpenGL users, so it is
+    not shown or explained further here.
+
+    The two implementations of \l {QScreen::}{createSurface()} are for
+    instantiating new window surfaces. The overloading with the widget 
+    parameter is called in the client.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 14
+
+    If the parameter is an \l {QGLWidget} {OpenGL widget}, or, when it
+    isn't an OpenGL widget but its size is no bigger than 256 x 256,
+    we instantiate our subclass QAhiGLWindowSurface.  Otherwise, we
+    instantiate a QWSWindowSurface. The size contraint is a
+    limitation of the OpenGL ES libraries we are using for our ATI
+    device.
+
+    Note the test at the top of the function asking if our application
+    process is the \l {QApplication::GuiServer} {server}.  We only
+    create instances of QAhiGLWindowSurface if our client is in the
+    server process. This is because of an implementation restriction
+    required by the OpenGL library used in the example. They only
+    support use of OpenGL in the server process. Hence a client can
+    use the QAhiGLWindowSurface if the client is in the server
+    process.
+
+    The other overloading of createSurface() is called by the
+    server to create a window surface that will hold a copy of a
+    client side window surface.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 15
+
+    This overloading accepts a QString parameter identifying the type
+    of window surface to instantiate. QAhiGLWindowSurface is
+    instantiated if the parameter is \c ahigl. Otherwise, a normal
+    QWSWindowSurface is instantiated. The client's window surface
+    communicates its image data to the server's window surface through
+    shared memory.
+
+    The implementation of \l {QScreen::}{setMode()}, is a stub in this
+    example. It would normally reset the frame buffer's resolution.
+    Its parameters are the \e width, \e height, and the bit \e depth
+    for the frame buffer's new resolution. If you implement setMode()
+    in your screen driver, remember that it must emit a signal to warn
+    other applications to redraw their frame buffers with the new
+    resolution.  There is no significance to setMode() not being
+    implemented in this example. It simply wasn't implemented.
+    However, the stub had to be included because QScreen declares
+    setMode() to be pure virtual.
+
+    Before the application exits, the server will call \l {QScreen::}
+    {shutdownDevice()} to release the hardware resources. This is also
+    done using EGL library functions.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qscreenahigl_qws.cpp 9
+
+    The server will also call \l {QScreen::}{disconnect()}, but this
+    function is only a stub in this example.
+
+    \section2 The window Surface Class Implementations    
+
+    QAhiGLScreen creates instances of QAhiGLWindowSurface in its two
+    createSurface() functions, and there are two constructors for
+    QAhiGLWindowSurface that correspond to these two versions of
+    createSurface(). The constructor accepting a \l {QWidget} {widget}
+    parameter is called by the client side version of createSurface(),
+    and the constructor without the \l {QWidget} {widget} parameter is
+    called by the server side version. There will be a window surface
+    constructed on the server side for each one constructed on the
+    client side.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qwindowsurface_ahigl.cpp 1
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qwindowsurface_ahigl.cpp 2
+
+    The constructors create an instance of QAhiGLWindowSurfacePrivate,
+    the private implementation class, which contains all the state
+    variables for QAhiGLWindowSurface. The client side constructor
+    also creates an instance of QWSGLPaintDevice, the OpenGL paint
+    device, for return by \l {QWSWindowSurface::} {paintDevice()}.
+    This ensures that all \l {QPainter}s used on this surface will use
+    an OpenGL enabled QPaintEngine. It is a bit of jiggery pokery,
+    which is required because \l {QWSWindowSurface::} {paintDevice()}
+    is declared pure virtual. Normally, the client side constructor
+    will be called with an \l {QGLWidget}{OpenGL widget}, which has
+    its own \l {QWidget::} {paintEngine()} function that returns the
+    global static OpenGL paint engine, but because the constructor
+    also accepts a normal \l {QWidget}{widget}, it must be able to
+    find the OpenGL paint engine in that case as well, so since \l
+    {QWSWindowSurface::} {paintDevice()} must be implemented anyway,
+    the constructor creates an instance of QWSGLPaintDevice, which can
+    always return the global static pointer to QOpenGLPaintEngine.
+
+    The OpenGL library implementation used for this example only
+    supports one OpenGL context. This context is therefore shared
+    among the single instance of QAhiGLScreen and all instances of
+    QAhiGLWindowSurface. It is passed to both constructors.
+
+    This example uses the OpenGL frame buffer object extension, which
+    allows for accelerating OpenGL painting operations. Using this
+    OpenGL extension, painting operations are performed in a frame
+    buffer object, which QAhiGLScreen later uses to construct window
+    compositions on the screen. Allocation of the frame buffer object
+    is performed in \l {QWindowSurface::} {setGeometry()}. A safer way
+    to use this extension would be to first test to see if the
+    extension is supported by your OpenGL library, and use a different
+    approach if it is not.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qwindowsurface_ahigl.cpp 3
+
+    Since there can be several instances of the QAhiGLWindowSurface, we need
+    to make sure that the correct framebuffer object is active before painting.
+    This is done by reimplementing \l QWindowSurface::beginPaint():
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qwindowsurface_ahigl.cpp 4
+
+    Finally we need to make sure that whenever a widget grows beyond the size
+    supported by this driver (256 x 256), the surface is deleted and a new
+    standard surface is created instead. This is handled by reimplementing
+    \l QWSWindowSurface::isValid():    
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/ahigl/qwindowsurface_ahigl.cpp 5
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/analogclock.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/analogclock.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d5f7273
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/analogclock.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/analogclock
+    \title Analog Clock Example
+
+    The Analog Clock example shows how to draw the contents of a custom
+    widget.
+
+    \image analogclock-example.png Screenshot of the Analog Clock example
+
+    This example also demonstrates how the transformation and scaling
+    features of QPainter can be used to make drawing custom widgets
+    easier.
+
+    \section1 AnalogClock Class Definition
+
+    The \c AnalogClock class provides a clock widget with hour and minute
+    hands that is automatically updated every few seconds.
+    We subclass \l QWidget and reimplement the standard
+    \l{QWidget::paintEvent()}{paintEvent()} function to draw the clock face:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.h 0
+
+    \section1 AnalogClock Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 1
+
+    When the widget is constructed, we set up a one-second timer to
+    keep track of the current time, and we connect it to the standard
+    \l{QWidget::update()}{update()} slot so that the clock face is
+    updated when the timer emits the \l{QTimer::timeout()}{timeout()}
+    signal.
+
+    Finally, we resize the widget so that it is displayed at a
+    reasonable size.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 8
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 10
+
+    The \c paintEvent() function is called whenever the widget's
+    contents need to be updated. This happens when the widget is
+    first shown, and when it is covered then exposed, but it is also
+    executed when the  widget's \l{QWidget::update()}{update()} slot
+    is called. Since we connected the timer's
+    \l{QTimer::timeout()}{timeout()} signal to this slot, it will be
+    called at least once every five seconds.
+
+    Before we set up the painter and draw the clock, we first define
+    two lists of \l {QPoint}s and two \l{QColor}s that will be used
+    for the hour and minute hands. The minute hand's color has an
+    alpha component of 191, meaning that it's 75% opaque.
+
+    We also determine the length of the widget's shortest side so that we
+    can fit the clock face inside the widget. It is also useful to determine
+    the current time before we start drawing.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 11
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 12
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 13
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 14
+
+    The contents of custom widgets are drawn with a QPainter.
+    Painters can be used to draw on any QPaintDevice, but they are
+    usually used with widgets, so we pass the widget instance to the
+    painter's constructor.
+
+    We call QPainter::setRenderHint() with QPainter::Antialiasing to
+    turn on antialiasing. This makes drawing of diagonal lines much
+    smoother.
+
+    The translation moves the origin to the center of the widget, and
+    the scale operation ensures that the following drawing operations
+    are scaled to fit within the widget. We use a scale factor that
+    let's us use x and y coordinates between -100 and 100, and that
+    ensures that these lie within the length of the widget's shortest
+    side.
+
+    To make our code simpler, we will draw a fixed size clock face that will
+    be positioned and scaled so that it lies in the center of the widget.
+
+    The painter takes care of all the transformations made during the
+    paint event, and ensures that everything is drawn correctly. Letting
+    the painter handle transformations is often easier than performing
+    manual calculations just to draw the contents of a custom widget.
+
+    \img analogclock-viewport.png
+
+    We draw the hour hand first, using a formula that rotates the coordinate
+    system counterclockwise by a number of degrees determined by the current
+    hour and minute. This means that the hand will be shown rotated clockwise
+    by the required amount.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 15
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 16
+
+    We set the pen to be Qt::NoPen because we don't want any outline,
+    and we use a solid brush with the color appropriate for
+    displaying hours. Brushes are used when filling in polygons and
+    other geometric shapes.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 17
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 19
+
+    We save and restore the transformation matrix before and after the
+    rotation because we want to place the minute hand without having to
+    take into account any previous rotations.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 20
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 21
+
+    We draw markers around the edge of the clock for each hour. We
+    draw each marker then rotate the coordinate system so that the
+    painter is ready for the next one.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 22
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 23
+
+    The minute hand is rotated in a similar way to the hour hand.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 25
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/analogclock/analogclock.cpp 26
+
+    Again, we draw markers around the edge of the clock, but this
+    time to indicate minutes. We skip multiples of 5 to avoid drawing
+    minute markers on top of hour markers.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/application.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/application.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..32e8c10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/application.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,410 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example mainwindows/application
+    \title Application Example
+
+    The Application example shows how to implement a standard GUI
+    application with menus, toolbars, and a status bar. The example
+    itself is a simple text editor program built around QTextEdit.
+
+    \image application.png Screenshot of the Application example
+
+    Nearly all of the code for the Application example is in the \c
+    MainWindow class, which inherits QMainWindow. QMainWindow
+    provides the framework for windows that have menus, toolbars,
+    dock windows, and a status bar. The application provides
+    \menu{File}, \menu{Edit}, and \menu{Help} entries in the menu
+    bar, with the following popup menus:
+
+    \image application-menus.png The Application example's menu system
+
+    The status bar at the bottom of the main window shows a
+    description of the menu item or toolbar button under the cursor.
+
+    To keep the example simple, recently opened files aren't shown in
+    the \menu{File} menu, even though this feature is desired in 90%
+    of applications. The \l{mainwindows/recentfiles}{Recent Files}
+    example shows how to implement this. Furthermore, this example
+    can only load one file at a time. The \l{mainwindows/sdi}{SDI}
+    and \l{mainwindows/mdi}{MDI} examples shows how to lift these
+    restrictions.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    Here's the class definition:
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    The public API is restricted to the constructor. In the \c
+    protected section, we reimplement QWidget::closeEvent() to detect
+    when the user attempts to close the window, and warn the user
+    about unsaved changes. In the \c{private slots} section, we
+    declare slots that correspond to menu entries, as well as a
+    mysterious \c documentWasModified() slot. Finally, in the \c
+    private section of the class, we have various members that will
+    be explained in due time.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    We start by including \c <QtGui>, a header file that contains the
+    definition of all classes in the \l QtCore and \l QtGui
+    libraries. This saves us from the trouble of having to include
+    every class individually. We also include \c mainwindow.h.
+
+    You might wonder why we don't include \c <QtGui> in \c
+    mainwindow.h and be done with it. The reason is that including
+    such a large header from another header file can rapidly degrade
+    performances. Here, it wouldn't do any harm, but it's still
+    generally a good idea to include only the header files that are
+    strictly necessary from another header file.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    In the constructor, we start by creating a QTextEdit widget as a
+    child of the main window (the \c this object). Then we call
+    QMainWindow::setCentralWidget() to tell that this is going to be
+    the widget that occupies the central area of the main window,
+    between the toolbars and the status bar.
+
+    Then we call \c createActions(), \c createMenus(), \c
+    createToolBars(), and \c createStatusBar(), four private
+    functions that set up the user interface. After that, we call \c
+    readSettings() to restore the user's preferences.
+
+    We establish a signal-slot connection between the QTextEdit's
+    document object and our \c documentWasModified() slot. Whenever
+    the user modifies the text in the QTextEdit, we want to update
+    the title bar to show that the file was modified.
+
+    At the end, we set the window title using the private
+    \c setCurrentFile() function. We'll come back to this later.
+
+    \target close event handler
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+    When the user attempts to close the window, we call the private
+    function \c maybeSave() to give the user the possibility to save
+    pending changes. The function returns true if the user wants the
+    application to close; otherwise, it returns false. In the first
+    case, we save the user's preferences to disk and accept the close
+    event; in the second case, we ignore the close event, meaning
+    that the application will stay up and running as if nothing
+    happened.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 6
+
+    The \c newFile() slot is invoked when the user selects
+    \menu{File|New} from the menu. We call \c maybeSave() to save any
+    pending changes and if the user accepts to go on, we clear the
+    QTextEdit and call the private function \c setCurrentFile() to
+    update the window title and clear the
+    \l{QWidget::windowModified}{windowModified} flag.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 7
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 8
+
+    The \c open() slot is invoked when the user clicks
+    \menu{File|Open}. We pop up a QFileDialog asking the user to
+    choose a file. If the user chooses a file (i.e., \c fileName is
+    not an empty string), we call the private function \c loadFile()
+    to actually load the file.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 9
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 10
+
+    The \c save() slot is invoked when the user clicks
+    \menu{File|Save}. If the user hasn't provided a name for the file
+    yet, we call \c saveAs(); otherwise, we call the private function
+    \c saveFile() to actually save the file.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 11
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 12
+
+    In \c saveAs(), we start by popping up a QFileDialog asking the
+    user to provide a name. If the user clicks \gui{Cancel}, the
+    returned file name is empty, and we do nothing.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 13
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 14
+
+    The application's About box is done using one statement, using
+    the QMessageBox::about() static function and relying on its
+    support for an HTML subset.
+
+    The \l{QObject::tr()}{tr()} call around the literal string marks
+    the string for translation. It is a good habit to call
+    \l{QObject::tr()}{tr()} on all user-visible strings, in case you
+    later decide to translate your application to other languages.
+    The \l{Internationalization with Qt} overview convers
+    \l{QObject::tr()}{tr()} in more detail.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 15
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 16
+
+    The \c documentWasModified() slot is invoked each time the text
+    in the QTextEdit changes because of user edits. We call
+    QWidget::setWindowModified() to make the title bar show that the
+    file was modified. How this is done varies on each platform.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 17
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 18
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 22
+
+    The \c createActions() private function, which is called from the
+    \c MainWindow constructor, creates \l{QAction}s. The code is very
+    repetitive, so we show only the actions corresponding to
+    \menu{File|New}, \menu{File|Open}, and \menu{Help|About Qt}.
+
+    A QAction is an object that represents one user action, such as
+    saving a file or invoking a dialog. An action can be put in a
+    QMenu or a QToolBar, or both, or in any other widget that
+    reimplements QWidget::actionEvent().
+
+    An action has a text that is shown in the menu, an icon, a
+    shortcut key, a tooltip, a status tip (shown in the status bar),
+    a "What's This?" text, and more. It emits a
+    \l{QAction::triggered()}{triggered()} signal whenever the user
+    invokes the action (e.g., by clicking the associated menu item or
+    toolbar button). We connect this signal to a slot that performs
+    the actual action.
+
+    The code above contains one more idiom that must be explained.
+    For some of the actions, we specify an icon as a QIcon to the
+    QAction constructor. The QIcon constructor takes the file name
+    of an image that it tries to load. Here, the file name starts
+    with \c{:}. Such file names aren't ordinary file names, but
+    rather path in the executable's stored resources. We'll come back
+    to this when we review the \c application.qrc file that's part of
+    the project.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 23
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 24
+
+    The \gui{Edit|Cut} and \gui{Edit|Copy} actions must be available
+    only when the QTextEdit contains selected text. We disable them
+    by default and connect the QTextEdit::copyAvailable() signal to
+    the QAction::setEnabled() slot, ensuring that the actions are
+    disabled when the text editor has no selection.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 25
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 27
+
+    Creating actions isn't sufficient to make them available to the
+    user; we must also add them to the menu system. This is what \c
+    createMenus() does. We create a \menu{File}, an \menu{Edit}, and
+    a \menu{Help} menu. QMainWindow::menuBar() lets us access the
+    window's menu bar widget. We don't have to worry about creating
+    the menu bar ourselves; the first time we call this function, the
+    QMenuBar is created.
+
+    Just before we create the \menu{Help} menu, we call
+    QMenuBar::addSeparator(). This has no effect for most widget
+    styles (e.g., Windows and Mac OS X styles), but for Motif-based
+    styles this makes sure that \menu{Help} is pushed to the right
+    side of the menu bar. Try running the application with various
+    styles and see the results:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_application.qdoc 0
+
+    Let's now review the toolbars:
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 30
+
+    Creating toolbars is very similar to creating menus. The same
+    actions that we put in the menus can be reused in the toolbars.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 32
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 33
+
+    QMainWindow::statusBar() returns a pointer to the main window's
+    QStatusBar widget. Like with \l{QMainWindow::menuBar()}, the
+    widget is automatically created the first time the function is
+    called.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 34
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 36
+
+    The \c readSettings() function is called from the constructor to
+    load the user's preferences and other application settings. The
+    QSettings class provides a high-level interface for storing
+    settings permanently on disk. On Windows, it uses the (in)famous
+    Windows registry; on Mac OS X, it uses the native XML-based
+    CFPreferences API; on Unix/X11, it uses text files.
+
+    The QSettings constructor takes arguments that identify your
+    company and the name of the product. This ensures that the
+    settings for different applications are kept separately.
+
+    We use QSettings::value() to extract the value of the "pos" and
+    "size" settings. The second argument to QSettings::value() is
+    optional and specifies a default value for the setting if there
+    exists none. This value is used the first time the application is
+    run.
+
+    When restoring the position and size of a window, it's important
+    to call QWidget::resize() before QWidget::move(). The reason why
+    is given in the \l{geometry.html}{Window Geometry} overview.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 37
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 39
+
+    The \c writeSettings() function is called from \c closeEvent().
+    Writing settings is similar to reading them, except simpler. The
+    arguments to the QSettings constructor must be the same as in \c
+    readSettings().
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 40
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 41
+
+    The \c maybeSave() function is called to save pending changes. If
+    there are pending changes, it pops up a QMessageBox giving the
+    user to save the document. The options are QMessageBox::Yes,
+    QMessageBox::No, and QMessageBox::Cancel. The \gui{Yes} button is
+    made the default button (the button that is invoked when the user
+    presses \key{Return}) using the QMessageBox::Default flag; the
+    \gui{Cancel} button is made the escape button (the button that is
+    invoked when the user presses \key{Esc}) using the
+    QMessageBox::Escape flag.
+
+    The \c maybeSave() function returns \c true in all cases, except
+    when the user clicks \gui{Cancel}. The caller must check the
+    return value and stop whatever it was doing if the return value
+    is \c false.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 42
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 43
+
+    In \c loadFile(), we use QFile and QTextStream to read in the
+    data. The QFile object provides access to the bytes stored in a
+    file.
+
+    We start by opening the file in read-only mode. The QFile::Text
+    flag indicates that the file is a text file, not a binary file.
+    On Unix and Mac OS X, this makes no difference, but on Windows,
+    it ensures that the "\\r\\n" end-of-line sequence is converted to
+    "\\n" when reading.
+
+    If we successfully opened the file, we use a QTextStream object
+    to read in the data. QTextStream automatically converts the 8-bit
+    data into a Unicode QString and supports various encodings. If no
+    encoding is specified, QTextStream assumes the file is written
+    using the system's default 8-bit encoding (for example, Latin-1;
+    see QTextCodec::codecForLocale() for details).
+
+    Since the call to QTextStream::readAll() might take some time, we
+    set the cursor to be Qt::WaitCursor for the entire application
+    while it goes on.
+
+    At the end, we call the private \c setCurrentFile() function,
+    which we'll cover in a moment, and we display the string "File
+    loaded" in the status bar for 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds).
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 44
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 45
+
+    Saving a file is very similar to loading one. Here, the
+    QFile::Text flag ensures that on Windows, "\\n" is converted into
+    "\\r\\n" to conform to the Windows convension.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 46
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 47
+
+    The \c setCurrentFile() function is called to reset the state of
+    a few variables when a file is loaded or saved, or when the user
+    starts editing a new file (in which case \c fileName is empty).
+    We update the \c curFile variable, clear the
+    QTextDocument::modified flag and the associated \c
+    QWidget:windowModified flag, and update the window title to
+    contain the new file name (or \c untitled.txt).
+
+    The \c strippedName() function call around \c curFile in the
+    QWidget::setWindowTitle() call shortens the file name to exclude
+    the path. Here's the function:
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 48
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 49
+
+    \section1 The main() Function
+
+    The \c main() function for this application is typical of
+    applications that contain one main window:
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/main.cpp 0
+
+    \section1 The Resource File
+
+    As you will probably recall, for some of the actions, we
+    specified icons with file names starting with \c{:} and mentioned
+    that such file names aren't ordinary file names, but path in the
+    executable's stored resources. These resources are compiled
+
+    The resources associated with an application are specified in a
+    \c .qrc file, an XML-based file format that lists files on the
+    disk. Here's the \c application.qrc file that's used by the
+    Application example:
+
+    \quotefile mainwindows/application/application.qrc
+
+    The \c .png files listed in the \c application.qrc file are files
+    that are part of the Application example's source tree. Paths are
+    relative to the directory where the \c application.qrc file is
+    located (the \c mainwindows/application directory).
+
+    The resource file must be mentioned in the \c application.pro
+    file  so that \c qmake knows about it:
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/application/application.pro 0
+
+    \c qmake will produce make rules to generate a file called \c
+    qrc_application.cpp that is linked into the application. This
+    file contains all the data for the images and other resources as
+    static C++ arrays of compressed binary data. See
+    \l{resources.html}{The Qt Resource System} for more information
+    about resources.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/arrowpad.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/arrowpad.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..76b753b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/arrowpad.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example linguist/arrowpad
+    \title Arrow Pad Example
+
+    This example is a slightly more involved and introduces a key \e
+    {Qt Linguist} concept: "contexts". It also shows how to use two
+    or more languages.
+
+    \image linguist-arrowpad_en.png
+
+    We will use two translations, French and Dutch, although there is no
+    effective limit on the number of possible translations that can be used
+    with an application. The relevant lines of \c arrowpad.pro are
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/arrowpad/arrowpad.pro 0
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/linguist/arrowpad/arrowpad.pro 1
+
+    Run \c lupdate; it should produce two identical message files
+    \c arrowpad_fr.ts and \c arrowpad_nl.ts. These files will contain all the source
+    texts marked for translation with \c tr() calls and their contexts.
+
+    See the \l{Qt Linguist manual} for more information about
+    translating Qt application.
+
+    \section1 Line by Line Walkthrough
+
+    In \c arrowpad.h we define the \c ArrowPad subclass which is a
+    subclass of QWidget. In the screenshot above, the central
+    widget with the four buttons is an \c ArrowPad.
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/arrowpad/arrowpad.h 0
+    \snippet examples/linguist/arrowpad/arrowpad.h 1
+    \snippet examples/linguist/arrowpad/arrowpad.h 2
+
+    When \c lupdate is run it not only extracts the source texts but it
+    also groups them into contexts. A context is the name of the class in
+    which the source text appears. Thus, in this example, "ArrowPad" is a
+    context: it is the context of the texts in the \c ArrowPad class. 
+    The \c Q_OBJECT macro defines \c tr(x) in \c ArrowPad like this:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_arrowpad.qdoc 0
+
+    Knowing which class each source text appears in enables \e {Qt
+    Linguist} to group texts that are logically related together, e.g.
+    all the text in a dialog will have the context of the dialog's class
+    name and will be shown together. This provides useful information for
+    the translator since the context in which text appears may influence how
+    it should be translated. For some translations keyboard
+    accelerators may need to be changed and having all the source texts in a
+    particular context (class) grouped together makes it easier for the
+    translator to perform any accelerator changes without introducing
+    conflicts.
+
+    In \c arrowpad.cpp we implement the \c ArrowPad class.
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/arrowpad/arrowpad.cpp 0
+    \snippet examples/linguist/arrowpad/arrowpad.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/linguist/arrowpad/arrowpad.cpp 2
+    \snippet examples/linguist/arrowpad/arrowpad.cpp 3
+
+    We call \c ArrowPad::tr() for each button's label since the labels are
+    user-visible text.
+
+    \image linguist-arrowpad_en.png
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/arrowpad/mainwindow.h 0
+    \snippet examples/linguist/arrowpad/mainwindow.h 1
+
+    In the screenshot above, the whole window is a \c MainWindow.
+    This is defined in the \c mainwindow.h header file. Here too, we
+    use \c Q_OBJECT, so that \c MainWindow will become a context in
+    \e {Qt Linguist}.
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/arrowpad/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    In the implementation of \c MainWindow, \c mainwindow.cpp, we create
+    an instance of our \c ArrowPad class.
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/arrowpad/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    We also call \c MainWindow::tr() twice, once for the action and
+    once for the shortcut.
+
+    Note the use of \c tr() to support different keys in other
+    languages. "Ctrl+Q" is a good choice for Quit in English, but a
+    Dutch translator might want to use "Ctrl+A" (for Afsluiten) and a
+    German translator "Strg+E" (for Beenden). When using \c tr() for
+    \key Ctrl key accelerators, the two argument form should be used
+    with the second argument describing the function that the
+    accelerator performs.
+
+    Our \c main() function is defined in \c main.cpp as usual.
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/arrowpad/main.cpp 2
+    \snippet examples/linguist/arrowpad/main.cpp 3
+
+    We choose which translation to use according to the current locale.
+    QLocale::system() can be influenced by setting the \c LANG
+    environment variable, for example. Notice that the use of a naming
+    convention that incorporates the locale for \c .qm message files,
+    (and \c .ts files), makes it easy to implement choosing the
+    translation file according to locale.
+
+    If there is no \c .qm message file for the locale chosen the original
+    source text will be used and no error raised.
+
+    \section1 Translating to French and Dutch
+
+    We'll begin by translating the example application into French. Start
+    \e {Qt Linguist} with \c arrowpad_fr.ts. You should get the seven source
+    texts ("\&Up", "\&Left", etc.) grouped in two contexts ("ArrowPad"
+    and "MainWindow").
+
+    Now, enter the following translations:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c ArrowPad
+         \list
+         \o \&Up - \&Haut
+         \o \&Left - \&Gauche
+         \o \&Right - \&Droite
+         \o \&Down - \&Bas
+         \endlist
+    \o \c MainWindow
+         \list
+         \o E\&xit - \&Quitter
+         \o Ctrl+Q - Ctrl+Q
+         \o \&File - \&Fichier
+         \endlist
+    \endlist
+
+    It's quickest to press \key{Alt+D} (which clicks the \gui {Done \& Next}
+    button) after typing each translation, since this marks the
+    translation as done and moves on to the next source text.
+
+    Save the file and do the same for Dutch working with \c arrowpad_nl.ts:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c ArrowPad
+         \list
+         \o \&Up - \&Omhoog
+         \o \&Left - \&Links
+         \o \&Right - \&Rechts
+         \o \&Down - Omlaa\&g
+         \endlist
+    \o \c MainWindow
+         \list
+         \o E\&xit - \&Afsluiten
+         \o Ctrl+Q - Ctrl+A
+         \o File - \&Bestand
+         \endlist
+    \endlist
+
+    We have to convert the \c tt1_fr.ts and \c tt1_nl.ts translation source
+    files into \c .qm files. We could use \e {Qt Linguist} as we've done
+    before; however using the command line tool \c lrelease ensures that
+    \e all the \c .qm files for the application are created without us
+    having to remember to load and \gui File|Release each one
+    individually from \e {Qt Linguist}.
+
+    Type
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_arrowpad.qdoc 1
+
+    This should create both \c arrowpad_fr.qm and \c arrowpad_nl.qm. Set the \c
+    LANG environment variable to \c fr. In Unix, one of the two following
+    commands should work
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_arrowpad.qdoc 2
+
+    In Windows, either modify \c autoexec.bat or run
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_arrowpad.qdoc 3
+
+    When you run the program, you should now see the French version:
+
+    \image linguist-arrowpad_fr.png
+
+    Try the same with Dutch, by setting \c LANG=nl. Now the Dutch
+    version should appear:
+
+    \image linguist-arrowpad_nl.png
+
+    \section1 Exercises
+
+    Mark one of the translations in \e {Qt Linguist} as not done, i.e.
+    by unchecking the "done" checkbox; run \c lupdate, then \c lrelease,
+    then the example. What effect did this change have?
+
+    Set \c LANG=fr_CA (French Canada) and run the example program again. 
+    Explain why the result is the same as with \c LANG=fr.
+
+    Change one of the accelerators in the Dutch translation to eliminate the
+    conflict between \e \&Bestand and \e \&Boven.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/basicdrawing.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/basicdrawing.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5297201
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/basicdrawing.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,468 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example painting/basicdrawing
+    \title Basic Drawing Example
+
+    The Basic Drawing example shows how to display basic graphics
+    primitives in a variety of styles using the QPainter class.
+
+    QPainter performs low-level painting on widgets and other paint
+    devices. The class can draw everything from simple lines to
+    complex shapes like pies and chords. It can also draw aligned text
+    and pixmaps. Normally, it draws in a "natural" coordinate system,
+    but it can in addition do view and world transformation.
+
+    \image basicdrawing-example.png
+
+    The example provides a render area, displaying the currently
+    active shape, and lets the user manipulate the rendered shape and
+    its appearance using the QPainter parameters: The user can change
+    the active shape (\gui Shape), and modify the QPainter's pen (\gui
+    {Pen Width}, \gui {Pen Style}, \gui {Pen Cap}, \gui {Pen Join}),
+    brush (\gui {Brush Style}) and render hints (\gui
+    Antialiasing). In addition the user can rotate a shape (\gui
+    Transformations); behind the scenes we use QPainter's ability to
+    manipulate the coordinate system to perform the rotation.
+
+    The Basic Drawing example consists of two classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c RenderArea is a custom widget that renders multiple
+       copies of the currently active shape.
+    \o \c Window is the application's main window displaying a
+       \c RenderArea widget in addition to several parameter widgets.
+    \endlist
+
+    First we will review the \c Window class, then we will take a
+    look at the \c RenderArea class.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The Window class inherits QWidget, and is the application's main
+    window displaying a \c RenderArea widget in addition to several
+    parameter widgets.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.h 0
+
+    We declare the various widgets, and three private slots updating
+    the \c RenderArea widget: The \c shapeChanged() slot updates the
+    \c RenderArea widget when the user changes the currently active
+    shape. We call the \c penChanged() slot when either of the
+    QPainter's pen parameters changes. And the \c brushChanged() slot
+    updates the \c RenderArea widget when the user changes the
+    painter's brush style.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    In the constructor we create and initialize the various widgets
+    appearing in the main application window.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 1
+
+    First we create the \c RenderArea widget that will render the
+    currently active shape. Then we create the \gui Shape combobox,
+    and add the associated items (i.e. the different shapes a QPainter
+    can draw).
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 2
+
+    QPainter's pen is a QPen object; the QPen class defines how a
+    painter should draw lines and outlines of shapes. A pen has
+    several properties: Width, style, cap and join.
+
+    A pen's width can be \e zero or greater, but the most common width
+    is zero. Note that this doesn't mean 0 pixels, but implies that
+    the shape is drawn as smoothly as possible although perhaps not
+    mathematically correct.
+
+    We create a QSpinBox for the \gui {Pen Width} parameter.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 3
+
+    The pen style defines the line type. The default style is solid
+    (Qt::SolidLine). Setting the style to none (Qt::NoPen) tells the
+    painter to not draw lines or outlines.  The pen cap defines how
+    the end points of lines are drawn.  And the pen join defines how
+    two lines join when multiple connected lines are drawn. The cap
+    and join only apply to lines with a width of 1 pixel or greater.
+
+    We create \l {QComboBox}es for each of the \gui {Pen Style}, \gui
+    {Pen Cap} and \gui {Pen Join} parameters, and adds the associated
+    items (i.e the values of the Qt::PenStyle, Qt::PenCapStyle and
+    Qt::PenJoinStyle enums respectively).
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 4
+
+    The QBrush class defines the fill pattern of shapes drawn by a
+    QPainter. The default brush style is Qt::NoBrush. This style tells
+    the painter to not fill shapes. The standard style for filling is
+    Qt::SolidPattern.
+
+    We create a QComboBox for the \gui {Brush Style} parameter, and add
+    the associated items (i.e. the values of the Qt::BrushStyle enum).
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 6
+
+    Antialiasing is a feature that "smoothes" the pixels to create
+    more even and less jagged lines, and can be applied using
+    QPainter's render hints. QPainter::RenderHints are used to specify
+    flags to QPainter that may or may not be respected by any given
+    engine.
+
+    We simply create a QCheckBox for the \gui Antialiasing option.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 7
+
+    The \gui Transformations option implies a manipulation of the
+    coordinate system that will appear as if the rendered shape is
+    rotated in three dimensions.
+
+    We use the QPainter::translate(), QPainter::rotate() and
+    QPainter::scale() functions to implement this feature represented
+    in the main application window by a simple QCheckBox.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 8
+
+    Then we connect the parameter widgets with their associated slots
+    using the static QObject::connect() function, ensuring that the \c
+    RenderArea widget is updated whenever the user changes the shape,
+    or any of the other parameters.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 9
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 10
+
+    Finally, we add the various widgets to a layout, and call the \c
+    shapeChanged(), \c penChanged(), and \c brushChanged() slots to
+    initialize the application. We also turn on antialiasing.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 11
+
+    The \c shapeChanged() slot is called whenever the user changes the
+    currently active shape.
+
+    First we retrieve the shape the user has chosen using the
+    QComboBox::itemData() function. This function returns the data for
+    the given role in the given index in the combobox. We use
+    QComboBox::currentIndex() to retrieve the index of the shape, and
+    the role is defined by the Qt::ItemDataRole enum; \c IdRole is an
+    alias for Qt::UserRole.
+
+    Note that Qt::UserRole is only the first role that can be used for
+    application-specific purposes. If you need to store different data
+    in the same index, you can use different roles by simply
+    incrementing the value of Qt::UserRole, for example: 'Qt::UserRole
+    + 1' and 'Qt::UserRole + 2'. However, it is a good programming
+    practice to give each role their own name: 'myFirstRole =
+    Qt::UserRole + 1' and 'mySecondRole = Qt::UserRole + 2'. Even
+    though we only need a single role in this particular example, we
+    add the following line of code to the beginning of the \c
+    window.cpp file.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 0
+
+    The QComboBox::itemData() function returns the data as a QVariant,
+    so we need to cast the data to \c RenderArea::Shape. If there is
+    no data for the given role, the function returns
+    QVariant::Invalid.
+
+    In the end we call the \c RenderArea::setShape() slot to update
+    the \c RenderArea widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 12
+
+    We call the \c penChanged() slot whenever the user changes any of
+    the pen parameters. Again we use the QComboBox::itemData()
+    function to retrieve the parameters, and then we call the \c
+    RenderArea::setPen() slot to update the \c RenderArea widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 13
+
+    The brushChanged() slot is called whenever the user changes the
+    brush parameter which we retrieve using the QComboBox::itemData()
+    function as before.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 14
+
+    If the brush parameter is a gradient fill, special actions are
+    required.
+
+    The QGradient class is used in combination with QBrush to specify
+    gradient fills. Qt currently supports three types of gradient
+    fills: linear, radial and conical. Each of these is represented by
+    a subclass of QGradient: QLinearGradient, QRadialGradient and
+    QConicalGradient.
+
+    So if the brush style is Qt::LinearGradientPattern, we first
+    create a QLinearGradient object with interpolation area between
+    the coordinates passed as arguments to the constructor. The
+    positions are specified using logical coordinates. Then we set the
+    gradient's colors using the QGradient::setColorAt() function. The
+    colors is defined using stop points which are composed by a
+    position (between 0 and 1) and a QColor. The set of stop points
+    describes how the gradient area should be filled. A gradient can
+    have an arbitrary number of stop points.
+
+    In the end we call \c RenderArea::setBrush() slot to update the \c
+    RenderArea widget's brush with the QLinearGradient object.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 15
+
+    A similar pattern of actions, as the one used for QLinearGradient,
+    is used in the cases of Qt::RadialGradientPattern and
+    Qt::ConicalGradientPattern.
+
+    The only difference is the arguments passed to the constructor:
+    Regarding the QRadialGradient constructor the first argument is
+    the center, and the second the radial gradient's radius. The third
+    argument is optional, but can be used to define the focal point of
+    the gradient inside the circle (the default focal point is the
+    circle center).  Regarding the QConicalGradient constructor, the
+    first argument specifies the center of the conical, and the second
+    specifies the start angle of the interpolation.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 16
+
+    If the brush style is Qt::TexturePattern we create a QBrush from a
+    QPixmap. Then we call \c RenderArea::setBrush() slot to update the
+    \c RenderArea widget with the newly created brush.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/window.cpp 17
+
+    Otherwise we simply create a brush with the given style and a
+    green color, and then call \c RenderArea::setBrush() slot to
+    update the \c RenderArea widget with the newly created brush.
+
+    \section1 RenderArea Class Definition
+
+    The \c RenderArea class inherits QWidget, and renders multiple
+    copies of the currently active shape using a QPainter.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/renderarea.h 0
+
+    First we define a public \c Shape enum to hold the different
+    shapes that can be rendered by the widget (i.e the shapes that can
+    be rendered by a QPainter). Then we reimplement the constructor as
+    well as two of QWidget's public functions: \l
+    {QWidget::minimumSizeHint()}{minimumSizeHint()} and \l
+    {QWidget::sizeHint()}{sizeHint()}.
+
+    We also reimplement the QWidget::paintEvent() function to be able
+    to draw the currently active shape according to the specified
+    parameters.
+
+    We declare several private slots: The \c setShape() slot changes
+    the \c RenderArea's shape, the \c setPen() and \c setBrush() slots
+    modify the widget's pen and brush, and the \c setAntialiased() and
+    \c setTransformed() slots modify the widget's respective
+    properties.
+
+    \section1 RenderArea Class Implementation
+
+    In the constructor we initialize some of the widget's variables.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/renderarea.cpp 0
+
+    We set its shape to be a \gui Polygon, its antialiased property to
+    be false and we load an image into the widget's pixmap
+    variable. In the end we set the widget's background role, defining
+    the brush from the widget's \l {QWidget::palette}{palette} that
+    will be used to render the background. QPalette::Base is typically
+    white.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/renderarea.cpp 2
+
+    The \c RenderArea inherits QWidget's \l
+    {QWidget::sizeHint()}{sizeHint} property holding the recommended
+    size for the widget. If the value of this property is an invalid
+    size, no size is recommended.
+
+    The default implementation of the QWidget::sizeHint() function
+    returns an invalid size if there is no layout for the widget, and
+    returns the layout's preferred size otherwise.
+
+    Our reimplementation of the function returns a QSize with a 400
+    pixels width and a 200 pixels height.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/renderarea.cpp 1
+
+    \c RenderArea also inherits QWidget's
+    \l{QWidget::minimumSizeHint()}{minimumSizeHint} property holding
+    the recommended minimum size for the widget. Again, if the value
+    of this property is an invalid size, no size is recommended.
+
+    The default implementation of QWidget::minimumSizeHint() returns
+    an invalid size if there is no layout for the widget, and returns
+    the layout's minimum size otherwise.
+
+    Our reimplementation of the function returns a QSize with a 100
+    pixels width and a 100 pixels height.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/renderarea.cpp 3
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/renderarea.cpp 4
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/renderarea.cpp 5
+
+    The public \c setShape(), \c setPen() and \c setBrush() slots are
+    called whenever we want to modify a \c RenderArea widget's shape,
+    pen or brush. We set the shape, pen or brush according to the
+    slot parameter, and call QWidget::update() to make the changes
+    visible in the \c RenderArea widget.
+
+    The QWidget::update() slot does not cause an immediate
+    repaint; instead it schedules a paint event for processing when Qt
+    returns to the main event loop.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/renderarea.cpp 6
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/renderarea.cpp 7
+
+    With the \c setAntialiased() and \c setTransformed() slots we
+    change the state of the properties according to the slot
+    parameter, and call the QWidget::update() slot to make the changes
+    visible in the \c RenderArea widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/renderarea.cpp 8
+
+    Then we reimplement the QWidget::paintEvent() function. The first
+    thing we do is to create the graphical objects we will need to
+    draw the various shapes.
+
+    We create a vector of four \l {QPoint}s. We use this vector to
+    render the \gui Points, \gui Polyline and \gui Polygon
+    shapes. Then we create a QRect, defining a rectangle in the plane,
+    which we use as the bounding rectangle for all the shapes excluding
+    the \gui Path and the \gui Pixmap.
+
+    We also create a QPainterPath. The QPainterPath class provides a
+    container for painting operations, enabling graphical shapes to be
+    constructed and reused. A painter path is an object composed of a
+    number of graphical building blocks, such as rectangles, ellipses,
+    lines, and curves. For more information about the QPainterPath
+    class, see the \l {painting/painterpaths}{Painter Paths}
+    example. In this example, we create a painter path composed of one
+    straight line and a Bezier curve.
+
+    In addition we define a start angle and an arc length that we will
+    use when drawing the \gui Arc, \gui Chord and \gui Pie shapes.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/renderarea.cpp 9
+
+    We create a QPainter for the \c RenderArea widget, and set the
+    painters pen and brush according to the \c RenderArea's pen and
+    brush. If the \gui Antialiasing parameter option is checked, we
+    also set the painter's render hints. QPainter::Antialiasing
+    indicates that the engine should antialias edges of primitives if
+    possible.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/renderarea.cpp 10
+
+    Finally, we render the multiple copies of the \c RenderArea's
+    shape. The number of copies is depending on the size of the \c
+    RenderArea widget, and we calculate their positions using two \c
+    for loops and the widgets height and width.
+
+    For each copy we first save the current painter state (pushes the
+    state onto a stack). Then we translate the coordinate system,
+    using the QPainter::translate() function, to the position
+    determined by the variables of the \c for loops. If we omit this
+    translation of the coordinate system all the copies of the shape
+    will be rendered on top of each other in the top left cormer of
+    the \c RenderArea widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/renderarea.cpp 11
+
+    If the \gui Transformations parameter option is checked, we do an
+    additional translation of the coordinate system before we rotate
+    the coordinate system 60 degrees clockwise using the
+    QPainter::rotate() function and scale it down in size using the
+    QPainter::scale() function. In the end we translate the coordinate
+    system back to where it was before we rotated and scaled it.
+
+    Now, when rendering the shape, it will appear as if it was rotated
+    in three dimensions.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/renderarea.cpp 12
+
+    Next, we identify the \c RenderArea's shape, and render it using
+    the associated QPainter drawing function:
+
+    \list
+        \o QPainter::drawLine(),
+        \o QPainter::drawPoints(),
+        \o QPainter::drawPolyline(),
+        \o QPainter::drawPolygon(),
+        \o QPainter::drawRect(),
+        \o QPainter::drawRoundedRect(),
+        \o QPainter::drawEllipse(),
+        \o QPainter::drawArc(),
+        \o QPainter::drawChord(),
+        \o QPainter::drawPie(),
+        \o QPainter::drawPath(),
+        \o QPainter::drawText() or
+        \o QPainter::drawPixmap()
+    \endlist
+
+    Before we started rendering, we saved the current painter state
+    (pushes the state onto a stack). The rationale for this is that we
+    calculate each shape copy's position relative to the same point in
+    the coordinate system. When translating the coordinate system, we
+    lose the knowledge of this point unless we save the current
+    painter state \e before we start the translating process.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/basicdrawing/renderarea.cpp 13
+
+    Then, when we are finished rendering a copy of the shape we can
+    restore the original painter state, with its associated coordinate
+    system, using the QPainter::restore() function. In this way we
+    ensure that the next shape copy will be rendered in the correct
+    position.
+
+    We could translate the coordinate system back using
+    QPainter::translate() instead of saving the painter state. But
+    since we in addition to translating the coordinate system (when
+    the \gui Transformation parameter option is checked) both rotate
+    and scale the coordinate system, the easiest solution is to save
+    the current painter state.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/basicgraphicslayouts.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/basicgraphicslayouts.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..92571af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/basicgraphicslayouts.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example graphicsview/basicgraphicslayouts
+    \title Basic Graphics Layouts Example
+
+    The Basic Graphics Layouts example shows how to use the layout classes
+    in QGraphicsView: QGraphicsLinearLayout and QGraphicsGridLayout.
+
+    \image basicgraphicslayouts-example.png Screenshot of the Basic Layouts Example
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The \c Window class is a subclass of QGraphicsWidget. It has a
+    constructor with a QGraphicsWidget \a parent as its parameter.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/basicgraphicslayouts/window.h 0
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor of \c Window instantiates a QGraphicsLinearLayout object,
+    \c windowLayout, with vertical orientation. We instantiate another
+    QGraphicsLinearLayout object, \c linear, whose parent is \c windowLayout.
+    Next, we create a \c LayoutItem object, \c item and add it to \c linear
+    with the \l{QGraphicsLinearLayout::}{addItem()} function. We also provide
+    \c item with a \l{QGraphicsLinearLayout::setStretchFactor()}
+    {stretchFactor}.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/basicgraphicslayouts/window.cpp 0
+
+    We repeat the process:
+
+    \list
+        \o create a new \c LayoutItem,
+        \o add the item \c linear, and
+        \o provide a stretch factor.
+    \endlist
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/basicgraphicslayouts/window.cpp 1
+
+    We then add \c linear to \c windowLayout, nesting two
+    QGraphicsLinearLayout objects. Apart from the QGraphicsLinearLayout, we
+    also use a QGraphicsGridLayout object, \c grid, which is a 4x3 grid with
+    some cells spanning to other rows.
+
+    We create seven \c LayoutItem objects and place them into \c grid with
+    the \l{QGraphicsGridLayout::}{addItem()} function as shown in the code
+    snippet below:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/basicgraphicslayouts/window.cpp 2
+
+    The first item we add to \c grid is placed in the top left cell,
+    spanning four rows. The next two items are placed in the second column,
+    and they span two rows. Each item's \l{QGraphicsWidget::}{maximumHeight()}
+    and \l{QGraphicsWidget::}{minimumHeight()} are set to be equal so that
+    they do not expand vertically. As a result, these items will not
+    fit vertically in their cells. So, we specify that they should be
+    vertically aligned in the center of the cell using Qt::AlignVCenter.
+
+    Finally, \c grid itself is added to \c windowLayout. Unlike
+    QGridLayout::addItem(), QGraphicsGridLayout::addItem() requires a row
+    and a column for its argument, specifying which cell the item should be
+    positioned in. Also, if the \c rowSpan and \c columnSpan arguments
+    are omitted, they will default to 1.
+
+    Note that we do not specify a parent for each \c LayoutItem that we
+    construct, as all these items will be added to \c windowLayout. When we
+    add an item to a layout, it will be automatically reparented to the widget
+    on which the layout is installed.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/basicgraphicslayouts/window.cpp 3
+
+    Now that we have set up \c grid and added it to \c windowLayout, we
+    install \c windowLayout onto the window object using
+    QGraphicsWidget::setLayout() and we set the window title.
+
+    \section1 LayoutItem Class Definition
+
+    The \c LayoutItem class is a subclass of QGraphicsWidget. It has a
+    constructor, a destructor, and a reimplementation of the
+    {QGraphicsItem::paint()}{paint()} function.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/basicgraphicslayouts/layoutitem.h 0
+
+    The \c LayoutItem class also has a private instance of QPixmap, \c pix.
+
+    \note We subclass QGraphicsWidget so that \c LayoutItem objects can
+    be automatically plugged into a layout, as QGraphicsWidget is a
+    specialization of QGraphicsLayoutItem.
+
+    \section1 LayoutItem Class Implementation
+
+    In \c{LayoutItem}'s constructor, \c pix is instantiated and the
+    \c{QT_original_R.png} image is loaded into it. We set the size of
+    \c LayoutItem to be slightly larger than the size of the pixmap as we
+    require some space around it for borders that we will paint later.
+    Alternatively, you could scale the pixmap to prevent the item from
+    becoming smaller than the pixmap.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/basicgraphicslayouts/layoutitem.cpp 0
+
+    We use the Q_UNUSED() macro to prevent the compiler from generating
+    warnings regarding unused parameters.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/basicgraphicslayouts/layoutitem.cpp 1
+
+    The idea behind the \c paint() function is to paint the
+    background rect then paint a rect around the pixmap.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/basicgraphicslayouts/layoutitem.cpp 2
+
+*/
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/basiclayouts.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/basiclayouts.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0d64b1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/basiclayouts.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,204 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example layouts/basiclayouts
+    \title Basic Layouts Example
+
+    The Basic Layouts example shows how to use the standard layout
+    managers that are available in Qt: QBoxLayout, QGridLayout and
+    QFormLayout.
+
+    \image basiclayouts-example.png Screenshot of the Basic Layouts example
+
+    The QBoxLayout class lines up widgets horizontally or vertically.
+    QHBoxLayout and QVBoxLayout are convenience subclasses of QBoxLayout.
+    QGridLayout lays out widgets in cells by dividing the available space
+    into rows and columns. QFormLayout, on the other hand, lays out its
+    children in a two-column form with labels in the left column and
+    input fields in the right column.
+
+    \section1 Dialog Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/layouts/basiclayouts/dialog.h 0
+
+    The \c Dialog class inherits QDialog. It is a custom widget that
+    displays its child widgets using the geometry managers:
+    QHBoxLayout, QVBoxLayout, QGridLayout and QFormLayout.
+
+    We declare four private functions to simplify the class
+    constructor: The \c createMenu(), \c createHorizontalGroupBox(),
+    \c createGridGroupBox() and \c createFormGroupBox() functions create
+    several widgets that the example uses to demonstrate how the layout
+    affects their appearances.
+
+    \section1 Dialog Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/layouts/basiclayouts/dialog.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor, we first use the \c createMenu() function to
+    create and populate a menu bar and the \c createHorizontalGroupBox()
+    function to create a group box containing four buttons with a
+    horizontal layout. Next we use the \c createGridGroupBox() function
+    to create a group box containing several line edits and a small text
+    editor which are displayed in a grid layout. Finally, we use the
+    \c createFormGroupBox() function to createa a group box with
+    three labels and three input fields: a line edit, a combo box and
+    a spin box.
+
+    \snippet examples/layouts/basiclayouts/dialog.cpp 1
+
+    We also create a big text editor and a dialog button box. The
+    QDialogButtonBox class is a widget that presents buttons in a
+    layout that is appropriate to the current widget style. The
+    preferred buttons can be specified as arguments to the
+    constructor, using the QDialogButtonBox::StandardButtons enum.
+
+    Note that we don't have to specify a parent for the widgets when
+    we create them. The reason is that all the widgets we create here
+    will be added to a layout, and when we add a widget to a layout,
+    it is automatically reparented to the widget the layout is
+    installed on.
+
+    \snippet examples/layouts/basiclayouts/dialog.cpp 2
+
+    The main layout is a QVBoxLayout object. QVBoxLayout is a
+    convenience class for a box layout with vertical orientation.
+
+    In general, the QBoxLayout class takes the space it gets (from its
+    parent layout or from the parent widget), divides it up into a
+    series of boxes, and makes each managed widget fill one box.  If
+    the QBoxLayout's orientation is Qt::Horizontal the boxes are
+    placed in a row. If the orientation is Qt::Vertical, the boxes are
+    placed in a column.  The corresponding convenience classes are
+    QHBoxLayout and QVBoxLayout, respectively.
+
+    \snippet examples/layouts/basiclayouts/dialog.cpp 3
+
+    When we call the QLayout::setMenuBar() function, the layout places
+    the provided menu bar at the top of the parent widget, and outside
+    the widget's \l {QWidget::contentsRect()}{content margins}. All
+    child widgets are placed below the bottom edge of the menu bar.
+
+    \snippet examples/layouts/basiclayouts/dialog.cpp 4
+
+    We use the QBoxLayout::addWidget() function to add the widgets to
+    the end of layout. Each widget will get at least its minimum size
+    and at most its maximum size. It is possible to specify a stretch
+    factor in the \l {QBoxLayout::addWidget()}{addWidget()} function,
+    and any excess space is shared according to these stretch
+    factors. If not specified, a widget's stretch factor is 0.
+
+    \snippet examples/layouts/basiclayouts/dialog.cpp 5
+
+    We install the main layout on the \c Dialog widget using the
+    QWidget::setLayout() function, and all of the layout's widgets are
+    automatically reparented to be children of the \c Dialog widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/layouts/basiclayouts/dialog.cpp 6
+
+    In the private \c createMenu() function we create a menu bar, and
+    add a pull-down \gui File menu containing an \gui Exit option.
+
+    \snippet examples/layouts/basiclayouts/dialog.cpp 7
+
+    When we create the horizontal group box, we use a QHBoxLayout as
+    the internal layout. We create the buttons we want to put in the
+    group box, add them to the layout and install the layout on the
+    group box.
+
+    \snippet examples/layouts/basiclayouts/dialog.cpp 8
+
+    In the \c createGridGroupBox() function we use a QGridLayout which
+    lays out widgets in a grid. It takes the space made available to
+    it (by its parent layout or by the parent widget), divides it up
+    into rows and columns, and puts each widget it manages into the
+    correct cell.
+
+    \snippet examples/layouts/basiclayouts/dialog.cpp 9
+
+    For each row in the grid we create a label and an associated line
+    edit, and add them to the layout. The QGridLayout::addWidget()
+    function differ from the corresponding function in QBoxLayout: It
+    needs the row and column specifying the grid cell to put the
+    widget in.
+
+    \snippet examples/layouts/basiclayouts/dialog.cpp 10
+
+    QGridLayout::addWidget() can in addition take arguments
+    specifying the number of rows and columns the cell will be
+    spanning. In this example, we create a small editor which spans
+    three rows and one column.
+
+    For both the QBoxLayout::addWidget() and QGridLayout::addWidget()
+    functions it is also possible to add a last argument specifying
+    the widget's alignment. By default it fills the whole cell. But we
+    could, for example, align a widget with the right edge by
+    specifying the alignment to be Qt::AlignRight.
+
+    \snippet examples/layouts/basiclayouts/dialog.cpp 11
+
+    Each column in a grid layout has a stretch factor. The stretch
+    factor is set using QGridLayout::setColumnStretch() and determines
+    how much of the available space the column will get over and above
+    its necessary minimum.
+
+    In this example, we set the stretch factors for columns 1 and 2.
+    The stretch factor is relative to the other columns in this grid;
+    columns with a higher stretch factor take more of the available
+    space. So column 2 in our grid layout will get more of the
+    available space than column 1, and column 0 will not grow at all
+    since its stretch factor is 0 (the default).
+
+    Columns and rows behave identically; there is an equivalent
+    stretch factor for rows, as well as a QGridLayout::setRowStretch()
+    function.
+
+    \snippet examples/layouts/basiclayouts/dialog.cpp 12
+
+    In the \c createFormGroupBox() function, we use a QFormLayout
+    to neatly arrange objects into two columns - name and field.
+    There are three QLabel objects for names with three
+    corresponding input widgets as fields: a QLineEdit, a QComboBox
+    and a QSpinBox. Unlike QBoxLayout::addWidget() and
+    QGridLayout::addWidget(), we use QFormLayout::addRow() to add widgets
+    to the layout.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/basicsortfiltermodel.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/basicsortfiltermodel.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..557729a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/basicsortfiltermodel.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/basicsortfiltermodel
+    \title Basic Sort/Filter Model Example
+
+    The Basic Sort/Filter Model example illustrates how to use
+    QSortFilterProxyModel to perform basic sorting and filtering.
+
+    \image basicsortfiltermodel-example.png Screenshot of the Basic Sort/Filter Model Example
+
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/blockingfortuneclient.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/blockingfortuneclient.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c9dbe1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/blockingfortuneclient.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,230 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example network/blockingfortuneclient
+    \title Blocking Fortune Client Example
+
+    The Blocking Fortune Client example shows how to create a client for a
+    network service using QTcpSocket's synchronous API in a non-GUI thread.
+
+    \image blockingfortuneclient-example.png
+
+    QTcpSocket supports two general approaches to network programming:
+
+    \list
+
+    \o \e{The asynchronous (non-blocking) approach.} Operations are scheduled
+    and performed when control returns to Qt's event loop. When the operation
+    is finished, QTcpSocket emits a signal. For example,
+    QTcpSocket::connectToHost() returns immediately, and when the connection
+    has been established, QTcpSocket emits
+    \l{QTcpSocket::connected()}{connected()}.
+    
+    \o \e{The synchronous (blocking) approach.} In non-GUI and multithreaded
+    applications, you can call the \c waitFor...() functions (e.g.,
+    QTcpSocket::waitForConnected()) to suspend the calling thread until the
+    operation has completed, instead of connecting to signals.
+
+    \endlist
+
+    The implementation is very similar to the
+    \l{network/fortuneclient}{Fortune Client} example, but instead of having
+    QTcpSocket as a member of the main class, doing asynchronous networking in
+    the main thread, we will do all network operations in a separate thread
+    and use QTcpSocket's blocking API.
+
+    The purpose of this example is to demonstrate a pattern that you can use
+    to simplify your networking code, without losing responsiveness in your
+    user interface.  Use of Qt's blocking network API often leads to
+    simpler code, but because of its blocking behavior, it should only be used
+    in non-GUI threads to prevent the user interface from freezing. But
+    contrary to what many think, using threads with QThread does not
+    necessarily add unmanagable complexity to your application.
+
+    We will start with the FortuneThread class, which handles the network
+    code.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.h 0
+
+    FortuneThread is a QThread subclass that provides an API for scheduling
+    requests for fortunes, and it has signals for delivering fortunes and
+    reporting errors. You can call requestNewFortune() to request a new
+    fortune, and the result is delivered by the newFortune() signal. If any
+    error occurs, the error() signal is emitted.
+
+    It's important to notice that requestNewFortune() is called from the main,
+    GUI thread, but the host name and port values it stores will be accessed
+    from FortuneThread's thread. Because we will be reading and writing
+    FortuneThread's data members from different threads concurrently, we use
+    QMutex to synchronize access.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.cpp 2
+
+    The requestNewFortune() function stores the host name and port of the
+    fortune server as member data, and we lock the mutex with QMutexLocker to
+    protect this data. We then start the thread, unless it is already
+    running. We will come back to the QWaitCondition::wakeOne() call later.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.cpp 4
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.cpp 5
+
+    In the run() function, we start by acquiring the mutex lock, fetching the
+    host name and port from the member data, and then releasing the lock
+    again. The case that we are protecting ourselves against is that \c
+    requestNewFortune() could be called at the same time as we are fetching
+    this data. QString is \l reentrant but \e not \l{thread-safe}, and we must
+    also avoid the unlikely risk of reading the host name from one request,
+    and port of another. And as you might have guessed, FortuneThread can only
+    handle one request at a time.
+
+    The run() function now enters a loop:
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.cpp 6
+
+    The loop will continue requesting fortunes for as long as \e quit is
+    false. We start our first request by creating a QTcpSocket on the stack,
+    and then we call \l{QTcpSocket::connectToHost()}{connectToHost()}. This
+    starts an asynchronous operation which, after control returns to Qt's
+    event loop, will cause QTcpSocket to emit
+    \l{QTcpSocket::connected()}{connected()} or
+    \l{QTcpSocket::error()}{error()}.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.cpp 8
+
+    But since we are running in a non-GUI thread, we do not have to worry
+    about blocking the user interface. So instead of entering an event loop,
+    we simply call QTcpSocket::waitForConnected(). This function will wait,
+    blocking the calling thread, until QTcpSocket emits connected() or an
+    error occurs. If connected() is emitted, the function returns true; if the
+    connection failed or timed out (which in this example happens after 5
+    seconds), false is returned. QTcpSocket::waitForConnected(), like the
+    other \c waitFor...() functions, is part of QTcpSocket's \e{blocking
+    API}.
+
+    After this statement, we have a connected socket to work with. Now it's
+    time to see what the fortune server has sent us.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.cpp 9
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.cpp 10
+
+    This step is to read the size of the packet. Although we are only reading
+    two bytes here, and the \c while loop may seem to overdo it, we present this
+    code to demonstrate a good pattern for waiting for data using
+    QTcpSocket::waitForReadyRead(). It goes like this: For as long as we still
+    need more data, we call waitForReadyRead(). If it returns false,
+    we abort the operation. After this statement, we know that we have received
+    enough data.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.cpp 11
+
+    Now we can create a QDataStream object, passing the socket to
+    QDataStream's constructor, and as in the other client examples we set
+    the stream protocol version to QDataStream::Qt_4_0, and read the size
+    of the packet.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.cpp 12
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.cpp 13
+
+    Again, we'll use a loop that waits for more data by calling
+    QTcpSocket::waitForReadyRead(). In this loop, we're waiting until
+    QTcpSocket::bytesAvailable() returns the full packet size.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.cpp 14
+
+    Now that we have all the data that we need, we can use QDataStream to
+    read the fortune string from the packet. The resulting fortune is
+    delivered by emitting newFortune().
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.cpp 15
+
+    The final part of our loop is that we acquire the mutex so that we can
+    safely read from our member data. We then let the thread go to sleep by
+    calling QWaitCondition::wait(). At this point, we can go back to
+    requestNewFortune() and look closed at the call to wakeOne():
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.cpp 1
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.cpp 3
+
+    What happened here was that because the thread falls asleep waiting for a
+    new request, we needed to wake it up again when a new request
+    arrives. QWaitCondition is often used in threads to signal a wakeup call
+    like this.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/fortunethread.cpp 0
+
+    Finishing off the FortuneThread walkthrough, this is the destructor that
+    sets \e quit to true, wakes up the thread and waits for the thread to exit
+    before returning. This lets the \c while loop in run() will finish its current
+    iteration. When run() returns, the thread will terminate and be destroyed.
+
+    Now for the BlockingClient class:
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/blockingclient.h 0
+
+    BlockingClient is very similar to the Client class in the
+    \l{network/fortuneclient}{Fortune Client} example, but in this class
+    we store a FortuneThread member instead of a pointer to a QTcpSocket.
+    When the user clicks the "Get Fortune" button, the same slot is called,
+    but its implementation is slightly different:
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/blockingclient.cpp 0
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/blockingclient.cpp 1
+
+    We connect our FortuneThread's two signals newFortune() and error() (which
+    are somewhat similar to QTcpSocket::readyRead() and QTcpSocket::error() in
+    the previous example) to requestNewFortune() and displayError().
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/blockingclient.cpp 2
+
+    The requestNewFortune() slot calls FortuneThread::requestNewFortune(),
+    which \e shedules the request. When the thread has received a new fortune
+    and emits newFortune(), our showFortune() slot is called:
+
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/blockingclient.cpp 3
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/network/blockingfortuneclient/blockingclient.cpp 4
+    
+    Here, we simply display the fortune we received as the argument.
+
+    \sa {Fortune Client Example}, {Fortune Server Example}
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/borderlayout.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/borderlayout.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6275249
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/borderlayout.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example layouts/borderlayout
+    \title Border Layout Example
+
+    The Border Layout example shows how to create a custom layout that arranges
+    child widgets according to a simple set of rules.
+
+    \image borderlayout-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/broadcastreceiver.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/broadcastreceiver.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..253b68b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/broadcastreceiver.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example network/broadcastreceiver
+    \title Broadcast Receiver Example
+
+    The Broadcast Receiever example shows how to receive information that is broadcasted
+    over a local network.
+
+    \image broadcastreceiver-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/broadcastsender.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/broadcastsender.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..05975aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/broadcastsender.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example network/broadcastsender
+    \title Broadcast Sender Example
+
+    The Broadcast Sender example shows how to broadcast information to multiple clients
+    on a local network.
+
+    \image broadcastsender-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/cachedtable.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/cachedtable.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b7f416b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/cachedtable.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example sql/cachedtable
+    \title Cached Table Example
+
+    The Cached Table example shows how a table view can be used to access a database,
+    caching any changes to the data until the user explicitly submits them using a
+    push button.
+
+    \image cachedtable-example.png
+
+    The example consists of a single class, \c TableEditor, which is a
+    custom dialog widget that allows the user to modify data stored in
+    a database. We will first review the class definiton and how to
+    use the class, then we will take a look at the implementation.
+
+    \section1 TableEditor Class Definition
+
+    The \c TableEditor class inherits QDialog making the table editor
+    widget a top-level dialog window.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/cachedtable/tableeditor.h 0
+
+    The \c TableEditor constructor takes two arguments: The first is a
+    pointer to the parent widget and is passed on to the base class
+    constructor. The other is a reference to the database table the \c
+    TableEditor object will operate on.
+
+    Note the QSqlTableModel variable declaration: As we will see in
+    this example, the QSqlTableModel class can be used to provide data
+    to view classes such as QTableView. The QSqlTableModel class
+    provides an editable data model making it possible to read and
+    write database records from a single table. It is build on top of
+    the lower-level QSqlQuery class which provides means of executing
+    and manipulating SQL statements.
+
+    We are also going to show how a table view can be used to cache
+    any changes to the data until the user explicitly requests to
+    submit them. For that reason we need to declare a \c submit() slot
+    in additon to the model and the editor's buttons.
+
+    \table 100%
+    \header \o Connecting to a Database
+    \row
+    \o
+
+    Before we can use the \c TableEditor class, we must create a
+    connection to the database containing the table we want to edit:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/cachedtable/main.cpp 0
+
+    The \c createConnection() function is a helper function provided
+    for convenience. It is defined in the \c connection.h file which
+    is located in the \c sql example directory (all the examples in
+    the \c sql directory use this function to connect to a database).
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/connection.h 0
+
+    The \c createConnection function opens a connection to an
+    in-memory SQLITE database and creates a test table.  If you want
+    to use another database, simply modify this function's code.
+    \endtable
+
+    \section1 TableEditor Class Implementation
+
+    The class implementation consists of only two functions, the
+    constructor and the \c submit() slot. In the constructor we create
+    and customize the data model and the various window elements:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/cachedtable/tableeditor.cpp 0
+
+    First we create the data model and set the SQL database table we
+    want the model to operate on. Note that the
+    QSqlTableModel::setTable() function does not select data from the
+    table; it only fetches its field information. For that reason we
+    call the QSqlTableModel::select() function later on, populating
+    the model with data from the table. The selection can be
+    customized by specifying filters and sort conditions (see the
+    QSqlTableModel class documentation for more details).
+
+    We also set the model's edit strategy. The edit strategy dictates
+    when the changes done by the user in the view, are actually
+    applied to the database. Since we want to cache the changes in the
+    table view (i.e. in the model) until the user explicitly submits
+    them, we choose the QSqlTableModel::OnManualSubmit strategy. The
+    alternatives are QSqlTableModel::OnFieldChange and
+    QSqlTableModel::OnRowChange.
+
+    Finally, we set up the labels displayed in the view header using
+    the \l {QSqlQueryModel::setHeaderData()}{setHeaderData()} function
+    that the model inherits from the QSqlQueryModel class.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/cachedtable/tableeditor.cpp 1
+
+    Then we create a table view. The QTableView class provides a
+    default model/view implementation of a table view, i.e. it
+    implements a table view that displays items from a model. It also
+    allows the user to edit the items, storing the changes in the
+    model. To create a read only view, set the proper flag using the
+    \l {QAbstractItemView::editTriggers}{editTriggers} property the
+    view inherits from the QAbstractItemView class.
+
+    To make the view present our data, we pass our model to the view
+    using the \l {QAbstractItemView::setModel()}{setModel()} function.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/cachedtable/tableeditor.cpp 2
+
+    The \c {TableEditor}'s buttons are regular QPushButton objects. We
+    add them to a button box to ensure that the buttons are presented
+    in a layout that is appropriate to the current widget style. The
+    rationale for this is that dialogs and message boxes typically
+    present buttons in a layout that conforms to the interface
+    guidelines for that platform. Invariably, different platforms have
+    different layouts for their dialogs. QDialogButtonBox allows a
+    developer to add buttons to it and will automatically use the
+    appropriate layout for the user's desktop environment.
+
+    Most buttons for a dialog follow certain roles. When adding a
+    button to a button box using the \l
+    {QDialogButtonBox}{addButton()} function, the button's role must
+    be specified using the QDialogButtonBox::ButtonRole
+    enum. Alternatively, QDialogButtonBox provides several standard
+    buttons (e.g. \gui OK, \gui Cancel, \gui Save) that you can
+    use. They exist as flags so you can OR them together in the
+    constructor.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/cachedtable/tableeditor.cpp 3
+
+    We connect the \gui Quit button to the table editor's \l
+    {QWidget::close()}{close()} slot, and the \gui Submit button to
+    our private \c submit() slot. The latter slot will take care of
+    the data transactions. Finally, we connect the \gui Revert button
+    to our model's \l {QSqlTableModel::revertAll()}{revertAll()} slot,
+    reverting all pending changes (i.e., restoring the original data).
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/cachedtable/tableeditor.cpp 4
+
+    In the end we add the button box and the table view to a layout,
+    install the layout on the table editor widget, and set the
+    editor's window title.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/cachedtable/tableeditor.cpp 5
+
+    The \c submit() slot is called whenever the users hit the \gui
+    Submit button to save their changes.
+
+    First, we begin a transaction on the database using the
+    QSqlDatabase::transaction() function. A database transaction is a
+    unit of interaction with a database management system or similar
+    system that is treated in a coherent and reliable way independent
+    of other transactions. A pointer to the used database can be
+    obtained using the QSqlTableModel::database() function.
+
+    Then, we try to submit all the pending changes, i.e. the model's
+    modified items. If no error occurs, we commit the transaction to
+    the database using the QSqlDatabase::commit() function (note that
+    on some databases, this function will not work if there is an
+    active QSqlQuery on the database). Otherwise we perform a rollback
+    of the transaction using the QSqlDatabase::rollback() function and
+    post a warning to the user.
+
+    \table 100%
+    \row
+    \o
+    \bold {See also:}
+
+    A complete list of Qt's SQL \l {Database Classes}, and the \l
+    {Model/View Programming} documentation.
+
+    \endtable
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/calculator.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/calculator.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2cae6ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/calculator.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,389 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/calculator
+    \title Calculator Example
+
+    The example shows how to use signals and slots to implement the
+    functionality of a calculator widget, and how to use QGridLayout
+    to place child widgets in a grid.
+
+    \image calculator-example.png Screenshot of the Calculator example
+
+    The example consists of two classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c Calculator is the calculator widget, with all the
+       calculator functionality.
+    \o \c Button is the widget used for each of the calculator
+       button. It derives from QToolButton.
+    \endlist
+
+    We will start by reviewing \c Calculator, then we will take a
+    look at \c Button.
+
+    \section1 Calculator Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.h 0
+
+    The \c Calculator class provides a simple calculator widget. It
+    inherits from QDialog and has several private slots associated
+    with the calculator's buttons. QObject::eventFilter() is
+    reimplemented to handle mouse events on the calculator's display.
+
+    Buttons are grouped in categories according to their behavior.
+    For example, all the digit buttons (labeled \gui 0 to \gui 9)
+    append a digit to the current operand. For these, we connect
+    multiple buttons to the same slot (e.g., \c digitClicked()). The
+    categories are digits, unary operators (\gui{Sqrt}, \gui{x\unicode{178}},
+    \gui{1/x}), additive operators (\gui{+}, \gui{-}), and
+    multiplicative operators (\gui{\unicode{215}}, \gui{\unicode{247}}). The other buttons
+    have their own slots.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.h 1
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.h 2
+
+    The private \c createButton() function is used as part of the
+    widget construction. \c abortOperation() is called whenever a
+    division by zero occurs or when a square root operation is
+    applied to a negative number. \c calculate() applies a binary
+    operator (\gui{+}, \gui{-}, \gui{\unicode{215}}, or \gui{\unicode{247}}).
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.h 3
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.h 4
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.h 5
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.h 6
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.h 7
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.h 8
+
+    These variables, together with the contents of the calculator
+    display (a QLineEdit), encode the state of the calculator:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c sumInMemory contains the value stored in the calculator's memory
+       (using \gui{MS}, \gui{M+}, or \gui{MC}).
+    \o \c sumSoFar stores the value accumulated so far. When the user
+       clicks \gui{=}, \c sumSoFar is recomputed and shown on the
+       display. \gui{Clear All} resets \c sumSoFar to zero.
+    \o \c factorSoFar stores a temporary value when doing
+        multiplications and divisions.
+    \o \c pendingAdditiveOperator stores the last additive operator
+       clicked by the user.
+    \o \c pendingMultiplicativeOperator stores the last multiplicative operator
+       clicked by the user.
+    \o \c waitingForOperand is \c true when the calculator is
+       expecting the user to start typing an operand.
+    \endlist
+
+    Additive and multiplicative operators are treated differently
+    because they have different precedences. For example, \gui{1 + 2 \unicode{247}
+    3} is interpreted as \gui{1 + (2 \unicode{247} 3)} because \gui{\unicode{247}} has higher
+    precedence than \gui{+}.
+
+    The table below shows the evolution of the calculator state as
+    the user enters a mathematical expression.
+
+    \table
+    \header \o User Input            \o Display  \o Sum so Far \o Add. Op. \o Factor so Far \o Mult. Op. \o Waiting for Operand?
+    \row    \o                       \o 0        \o 0          \o          \o               \o           \o \c true
+    \row    \o \gui{1}               \o 1        \o 0          \o          \o               \o           \o \c false
+    \row    \o \gui{1 +}             \o 1        \o 1          \o \gui{+}  \o               \o           \o \c true
+    \row    \o \gui{1 + 2}           \o 2        \o 1          \o \gui{+}  \o               \o           \o \c false
+    \row    \o \gui{1 + 2 \unicode{247}}         \o 2        \o 1          \o \gui{+}  \o 2             \o \gui{\unicode{247}}   \o \c true
+    \row    \o \gui{1 + 2 \unicode{247} 3}       \o 3        \o 1          \o \gui{+}  \o 2             \o \gui{\unicode{247}}   \o \c false
+    \row    \o \gui{1 + 2 \unicode{247} 3 -}     \o 1.66667  \o 1.66667    \o \gui{-}  \o               \o           \o \c true
+    \row    \o \gui{1 + 2 \unicode{247} 3 - 4}   \o 4        \o 1.66667    \o \gui{-}  \o               \o           \o \c false
+    \row    \o \gui{1 + 2 \unicode{247} 3 - 4 =} \o -2.33333 \o 0          \o          \o               \o           \o \c true
+    \endtable
+
+    Unary operators, such as \gui Sqrt, require no special handling;
+    they can be applied immediately since the operand is already
+    known when the operator button is clicked.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.h 9
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.h 10
+
+    Finally, we declare the variables associated with the display and the
+    buttons used to display numerals.
+
+    \section1 Calculator Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor, we initialize the calculator's state. The \c
+    pendingAdditiveOperator and \c pendingMultiplicativeOperator
+    variables don't need to be initialized explicitly, because the
+    QString constructor initializes them to empty strings.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 2
+
+    We create the QLineEdit representing the calculator's display and
+    set up some of its properties. In particular, we set it to be
+    read-only.
+
+    We also enlarge \c{display}'s font by 8 points.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 4
+
+    For each button, we call the private \c createButton() function with
+    the proper text label and a slot to connect to the button.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 6
+
+    The layout is handled by a single QGridLayout. The
+    QLayout::setSizeConstraint() call ensures that the \c Calculator
+    widget is always shown as its optimal size (its
+    \l{QWidget::sizeHint()}{size hint}), preventing the user from
+    resizing the calculator. The size hint is determined by the size
+    and \l{QWidget::sizePolicy()}{size policy} of the child widgets.
+
+    Most child widgets occupy only one cell in the grid layout. For
+    these, we only need to pass a row and a column to
+    QGridLayout::addWidget(). The \c display, \c backspaceButton, \c
+    clearButton, and \c clearAllButton widgets occupy more than one
+    column; for these we must also pass a row span and a column
+    span.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 7
+
+    Pressing one of the calculator's digit buttons will emit the
+    button's \l{QToolButton::clicked()}{clicked()} signal, which will
+    trigger the \c digitClicked() slot.
+
+    First, we find out which button sent the signal using
+    QObject::sender(). This function returns the sender as a QObject
+    pointer. Since we know that the sender is a \c Button object, we
+    can safely cast the QObject. We could have used a C-style cast or
+    a C++ \c static_cast<>(), but as a defensive programming
+    technique we use a \l qobject_cast(). The advantage is that if
+    the object has the wrong type, a null pointer is returned.
+    Crashes due to null pointers are much easier to diagnose than
+    crashes due to unsafe casts. Once we have the button, we extract
+    the operator using QToolButton::text().
+
+    The slot needs to consider two situations in particular. If \c
+    display contains "0" and the user clicks the \gui{0} button, it
+    would be silly to show "00". And if the calculator is in
+    a state where it is waiting for a new operand,
+    the new digit is the first digit of that new operand; in that case,
+    any result of a previous calculation must be cleared first.
+
+    At the end, we append the new digit to the value in the display.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 8
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 9
+
+    The \c unaryOperatorClicked() slot is called whenever one of the
+    unary operator buttons is clicked. Again a pointer to the clicked
+    button is retrieved using QObject::sender(). The operator is
+    extracted from the button's text and stored in \c
+    clickedOperator. The operand is obtained from \c display.
+
+    Then we perform the operation. If \gui Sqrt is applied to a
+    negative number or \gui{1/x} to zero, we call \c
+    abortOperation(). If everything goes well, we display the result
+    of the operation in the line edit and we set \c waitingForOperand
+    to \c true. This ensures that if the user types a new digit, the
+    digit will be considered as a new operand, instead of being
+    appended to the current value.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 10
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 11
+
+    The \c additiveOperatorClicked() slot is called when the user
+    clicks the \gui{+} or \gui{-} button.
+
+    Before we can actually do something about the clicked operator,
+    we must handle any pending operations. We start with the
+    multiplicative operators, since these have higher precedence than
+    additive operators:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 12
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 13
+
+    If \gui{\unicode{215}} or \gui{\unicode{247}} has been clicked earlier, without clicking
+    \gui{=} afterward, the current value in the display is the right
+    operand of the \gui{\unicode{215}} or \gui{\unicode{247}} operator and we can finally
+    perform the operation and update the display.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 14
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 15
+
+    If \gui{+} or \gui{-} has been clicked earlier, \c sumSoFar is
+    the left operand and the current value in the display is the
+    right operand of the operator. If there is no pending additive
+    operator, \c sumSoFar is simply set to be the text in the
+    display.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 16
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 17
+
+    Finally, we can take care of the operator that was just clicked.
+    Since we don't have the right-hand operand yet, we store the clicked
+    operator in the \c pendingAdditiveOperator variable. We will
+    apply the operation later, when we have a right operand, with \c
+    sumSoFar as the left operand.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 18
+
+    The \c multiplicativeOperatorClicked() slot is similar to \c
+    additiveOperatorClicked(). We don't need to worry about pending
+    additive operators here, because multiplicative operators have
+    precedence over additive operators.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 20
+
+    Like in \c additiveOperatorClicked(), we start by handing any
+    pending multiplicative and additive operators. Then we display \c
+    sumSoFar and reset the variable to zero. Resetting the variable
+    to zero is necessary to avoid counting the value twice.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 22
+
+    The \c pointClicked() slot adds a decimal point to the content in
+    \c display.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 24
+
+    The \c changeSignClicked() slot changes the sign of the value in
+    \c display. If the current value is positive, we prepend a minus
+    sign; if the current value is negative, we remove the first
+    character from the value (the minus sign).
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 26
+
+    The \c backspaceClicked() removes the rightmost character in the
+    display. If we get an empty string, we show "0" and set \c
+    waitingForOperand to \c true.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 28
+
+    The \c clear() slot resets the current operand to zero. It is
+    equivalent to clicking \gui Backspace enough times to erase the
+    entire operand.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 30
+
+    The \c clearAll() slot resets the calculator to its initial state.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 32
+
+    The \c clearMemory() slot erases the sum kept in memory, \c
+    readMemory() displays the sum as an operand, \c setMemory()
+    replace the sum in memory with the current sum, and \c
+    addToMemory() adds the current value to the value in memory. For
+    \c setMemory() and \c addToMemory(), we start by calling \c
+    equalClicked() to update \c sumSoFar and the value in the
+    display.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 34
+
+    The private \c createButton() function is called from the
+    constructor to create calculator buttons.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 36
+
+    The private \c abortOperation() function is called whenever a
+    calculation fails. It resets the calculator state and displays
+    "####".
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/calculator.cpp 38
+
+    The private \c calculate() function performs a binary operation.
+    The right operand is given by \c rightOperand. For additive
+    operators, the left operand is \c sumSoFar; for multiplicative
+    operators, the left operand is \c factorSoFar. The function
+    return \c false if a division by zero occurs.
+
+    \section1 Button Class Definition
+
+    Let's now take a look at the \c Button class:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/button.h 0
+
+    The \c Button class has a convenience constructor that takes a
+    text label and a parent widget, and it reimplements QWidget::sizeHint()
+    to provide more space around the text than the amount QToolButton
+    normally provides.
+
+    \section1 Button Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/button.cpp 0
+
+    The buttons' appearance is determined by the layout of the
+    calculator widget through the size and
+    \l{QWidget::sizePolicy}{size policy} of the layout's child
+    widgets. The call to the
+    \l{QWidget::setSizePolicy()}{setSizePolicy()} function in the
+    constructor ensures that the button will expand horizontally to
+    fill all the available space; by default, \l{QToolButton}s don't
+    expand to fill available space. Without this call, the different
+    buttons in a same column would have different widths.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/button.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calculator/button.cpp 2
+
+    In \l{QWidget::sizeHint()}{sizeHint()}, we try to return a size
+    that looks good for most buttons. We reuse the size hint of the
+    base class (QToolButton) but modify it in the following ways:
+
+    \list
+    \o We add 20 to the \l{QSize::height()}{height} component of the size hint.
+    \o We make the \l{QSize::width()}{width} component of the size
+       hint at least as much as the \l{QSize::width()}{height}.
+    \endlist
+
+    This ensures that with most fonts, the digit and operator buttons
+    will be square, without truncating the text on the
+    \gui{Backspace}, \gui{Clear}, and \gui{Clear All} buttons.
+
+    The screenshot below shows how the \c Calculator widget would
+    look like if we \e didn't set the horizontal size policy to
+    QSizePolicy::Expanding in the constructor and if we didn't
+    reimplement QWidget::sizeHint().
+
+    \image calculator-ugly.png The Calculator example with default size policies and size hints
+
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/calculatorbuilder.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/calculatorbuilder.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c63267e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/calculatorbuilder.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example designer/calculatorbuilder
+    \title Calculator Builder Example
+
+    The Calculator Builder example shows how to create a user interface from
+    a \QD form at run-time, using the QUiLoader class.
+
+    \image calculatorbuilder-example.png
+
+    We use the form created in the \l{designer/calculatorform}{Calculator Form}
+    example to show that the same user interface can be generated when the
+    application is executed or defined when the application is built.
+
+    \section1 Preparation
+
+    The \l{designer/calculatorform}{Calculator Form} example defines a user
+    interface that we can use without modification. In this example, we use a
+    \l{The Qt Resource System}{resource file} to contain the \c{calculatorform.ui}
+    file created in the previous example, but it could be stored on disk instead.
+
+    To generate a form at run time, we need to link the example against the
+    \c QtUiTools module library. The project file we use contains all the
+    necessary information to do this:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/calculatorbuilder/calculatorbuilder.pro 0
+
+    All the other necessary files are declared as usual.
+
+    \section1 CalculatorForm Class Definition
+
+    The \c CalculatorForm class defines the widget used to host the form's
+    user interface:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/calculatorbuilder/calculatorform.h 0
+
+    Note that we do not need to include a header file to describe the user
+    interface. We only define two public slots, using the auto-connection
+    naming convention required by \c uic, and declare private variables
+    that we will use to access widgets provided by the form after they are
+    constructed.
+
+    \section1 CalculatorForm Class Implementation
+
+    We will need to use the QUiLoader class that is provided by the
+    \c libQtUiTools library, so we first ensure that we include the header
+    file for the module:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/calculatorbuilder/calculatorform.cpp 0
+
+    The constructor uses a form loader object to construct the user
+    interface that we retrieve, via a QFile object, from the example's
+    resources:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/calculatorbuilder/calculatorform.cpp 1
+
+    By including the user interface in the example's resources, we ensure
+    that it will be present when the example is run. The \c{loader.load()}
+    function takes the user interface description contained in the file
+    and constructs the form widget as a child widget of the \c{CalculatorForm}.
+
+    We are interested in three widgets in the generated user interface:
+    two spin boxes and a label. For convenience, we retrieve pointers to
+    these widgets from the widget that was constructed by the \c FormBuilder,
+    and we record them for later use. The \c qFindChild() template function
+    allows us to query widgets in order to find named child widgets.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/calculatorbuilder/calculatorform.cpp 2
+
+    The widgets created by the form loader need to be connected to the
+    specially-named slots in the \c CalculatorForm object. We use Qt's
+    meta-object system to enable these connections:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/calculatorbuilder/calculatorform.cpp 3
+
+    The form widget is added to a layout, and the window title is set:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/calculatorbuilder/calculatorform.cpp 4
+
+    The two slots that modify widgets provided by the form are defined
+    in a similar way to those in the \l{designer/calculatorform}{Calculator
+    Form} example, except that we read the values from the spin boxes and
+    write the result to the output widget via the pointers we recorded in
+    the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/calculatorbuilder/calculatorform.cpp 5
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/designer/calculatorbuilder/calculatorform.cpp 7
+
+    The advantage of this approach is that we can replace the form when the
+    application is run, but we can still manipulate the widgets it contains
+    as long as they are given appropriate names.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/calculatorform.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/calculatorform.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8e891e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/calculatorform.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example designer/calculatorform
+    \title Calculator Form Example
+
+    The Calculator Form Example shows how to use a form created with
+    \QD in an application by using the user interface information from
+    a QWidget subclass.  We use \l{Using a Designer .ui File in Your Application} 
+    {uic's auto-connection} feature to automatically connect signals 
+    from widgets on the form to slots in our code.
+
+    \image calculatorform-example.png Screenshot of the Calculator Form example
+
+    The example presents two spin boxes that are used to input integer values
+    and a label that shows their sum. Whenever either of the spin boxes are
+    updated, the signal-slot connections between the widgets and the form
+    ensure that the label is also updated.
+
+    \section1 Preparation
+
+    The user interface for this example is designed completely using \QD. The
+    result is a .ui file describing the form, the widgets used, any signal-slot
+    connections between them, and other standard user interface properties.
+
+    To ensure that the example can use this file, we need to include a \c FORMS
+    declaration in the example's project file:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/calculatorform/calculatorform.pro 1
+
+    When the project is built, \c uic will create a header file that lets us
+    construct the form.
+
+    \section1 CalculatorForm Class Definition
+
+    The \c CalculatorForm class uses the user interface described in the
+    \c calculatorform.ui file. To access the form and its contents, we need
+    to include the \c ui_calculatorform.h header file created by \c uic
+    during the build process:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/calculatorform/calculatorform.h 0
+
+    We define the \c CalculatorForm class by subclassing QWidget because the
+    form itself is based on QWidget:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/calculatorform/calculatorform.h 1
+
+    Apart from the constructor, the class contains two private slots that
+    are named according to the auto-connection naming convention required
+    by \c uic.
+    The private \c ui member variable refers to the form, and is used to
+    access the contents of the user interface.
+
+    \section1 CalculatorForm Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor simply calls the base class's constructor and
+    sets up the form's user interface.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/calculatorform/calculatorform.cpp 0
+
+    The user interface is set up with the \c setupUI() function. We pass
+    \c this as the argument to this function to use the \c CalculatorForm
+    widget itself as the container for the user interface.
+
+    To automatically connect signals from the spin boxes defined in the
+    user interface, we use the naming convention that indicates which
+    widgets and their signals in the user interface should be connected
+    to each slot. The first slot is called whenever the spin box called
+    "inputSpinBox1" in the user interface emits the
+    \l{QSpinBox::valueChanged()}{valueChanged()} signal:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/calculatorform/calculatorform.cpp 1
+
+    When this occurs, we use the value supplied by the signal to update the
+    output label by setting its new text directly. We access the output label
+    and the other spin box via the class's private \c ui variable.
+
+    The second slot is called whenever the second spin box, called
+    "inputSpinBox2", emits the \l{QSpinBox::valueChanged()}{valueChanged()}
+    signal:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/calculatorform/calculatorform.cpp 2
+
+    In this case, the value from the first spin box is read and combined
+    with the value supplied by the signal. Again, the output label is
+    updated directly via the \c ui variable.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/calendar.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/calendar.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e6beef4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/calendar.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example richtext/calendar
+    \title Calendar Example
+
+    The Calendar example shows how to create rich text content and display it using
+    a rich text editor.
+
+    \image calendar-example.png
+
+    Specifically, the example demonstrates the following:
+
+    \list
+      \o Use of a text editor with a text document
+      \o Insertion of tables and frames into a document
+      \o Navigation within a table
+      \o Insert text in different styles
+    \endlist
+
+    The rich text editor used to display the document is used within a main window
+    application.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    The \c MainWindow class provides a text editor widget and some controls to
+    allow the user to change the month and year shown. The font size used for the
+    text can also be adjusted.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    The private \c insertCalendar() function performs most of the work, relying on
+    the \c fontSize and \c selectedDate variables to write useful information to
+    the \c editor.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    The \c MainWindow constructor sets up the user interface and initializes
+    variables used to generate a calendar for each month.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    We begin by setting default values for the selected date that will be highlighted
+    in the calendar and the font size to be used. Since we are using a QMainWindow
+    for the user interface, we construct a widget for use as the central widget.
+
+    The user interface will include a line of controls above the generated calendar;
+    we construct a label and a combobox to allow the month to be selected, and a
+    spin box for the year. These widgets are configured to provide a reasonable range
+    of values for the user to try:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    We use the \c selectedDate object to obtain the current month and year, and we
+    set these in the combobox and spin box:
+
+    The font size is displayed in a spin box which we restrict to a sensible range
+    of values:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    We construct an editor and use the \c insertCalendar() function to create
+    a calendar for it. Each calendar is displayed in the same text editor; in
+    this example we use a QTextBrowser since we do not allow the calendar to be
+    edited.
+
+    The controls used to set the month, year, and font size will not have any
+    effect on the appearance of the calendar unless we make some signal-slot
+    connections:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+    The signals are connected to some simple slots in the \c MainWindow class
+    which we will describe later.
+
+    We create layouts to manage the widgets we constructed:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+    Finally, the central widget is set for the window.
+
+    Each calendar is created for the editor by the \c insertCalendar() function
+    which uses the date and font size, defined by the private \a selectedDate
+    and \c fontSize variables, to produce a suitable plan for the specified
+    month and year.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 5
+
+    We begin by clearing the editor's rich text document, and obtain a text
+    cursor from the editor that we will use to add content. We also create a
+    QDate object based on the currently selected date.
+
+    The calendar is made up of a table with a gray background color that contains
+    seven columns: one for each day of the week. It is placed in the center of the
+    page with equal space to the left and right of it. All of these properties are
+    set in a QTextTableFormat object:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 6
+
+    Each cell in the table will be padded and spaced to make the text easier to
+    read.
+
+    We want the columns to have equal widths, so we provide a vector containing
+    percentage widths for each of them and set the constraints in the
+    QTextTableFormat:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 7
+
+    The constraints used for the column widths are only useful if the table has
+    an appropriate number of columns. With the format for the table defined, we
+    construct a new table with one row and seven columns at the current cursor
+    position:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 8
+
+    We only need one row to start with; more can be added as we need them. Using
+    this approach means that we do not need to perform any date calculations
+    until we add cells to the table.
+
+    When inserting objects into a document with the cursor's insertion functions,
+    the cursor is automatically moved inside the newly inserted object. This means
+    that we can immediately start modifying the table from within:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 9
+
+    Since the table has an outer frame, we obtain the frame and its format so that
+    we can customize it. After making the changes we want, we set the frame's format
+    using the modified format object. We have given the table an outer border one
+    pixel wide.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 10
+
+    In a similar way, we obtain the cursor's current character format and
+    create customized formats based on it.
+
+    We do not set the format on the cursor because this would change the default
+    character format; instead, we use the customized formats explicitly when we
+    insert text. The following loop inserts the days of the week into the table
+    as bold text:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 11
+
+    For each day of the week, we obtain an existing table cell in the first row
+    (row 0) using the table's \l{QTextTable::cellAt()}{cellAt()} function. Since
+    we start counting the days of the week at day 1 (Monday), we subtract 1 from
+    \c weekDay to ensure that we obtain the cell for the correct column of the
+    table.
+
+    Before text can be inserted into a cell, we must obtain a cursor with the
+    correct position in the document. The cell provides a function for this
+    purpose, and we use this cursor to insert text using the \c boldFormat
+    character format that we created earlier:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 12
+
+    Inserting text into document objects usually follows the same pattern.
+    Each object can provide a new cursor that corresponds to the first valid
+    position within itself, and this can be used to insert new content. We
+    continue to use this pattern as we insert the days of the month into the
+    table.
+
+    Since every month has more than seven days, we insert a single row to begin
+    and add days until we reach the end of the month. If the current date is
+    encountered, it is inserted with a special format (created earlier) that
+    makes it stand out:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 13
+
+    We add a new row to the table at the end of each week only if the next week
+    falls within the currently selected month.
+
+    For each calendar that we create, we change the window title to reflect the
+    currently selected month and year:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 14
+
+    The \c insertCalendar() function relies on up-to-date values for the month,
+    year, and font size. These are set in the following slots:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 15
+
+    The \c setFontSize() function simply changes the private \c fontSize variable
+    before updating the calendar.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 16
+
+    The \c setMonth slot is called when the QComboBox used to select the month is
+    updated. The value supplied is the currently selected row in the combobox.
+    We add 1 to this value to obtain a valid month number, and create a new QDate
+    based on the existing one. The calendar is then updated to use this new date.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/calendar/mainwindow.cpp 17
+
+    The \c setYear() slot is called when the QDateTimeEdit used to select the
+    year is updated. The value supplied is a QDate object; this makes
+    the construction of a new value for \c selectedDate simple. We update the
+    calendar afterwards to use this new date.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/calendarwidget.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/calendarwidget.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f4417c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/calendarwidget.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,305 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \title Calendar Widget Example
+    \example widgets/calendarwidget
+
+    The Calendar Widget example shows use of \c QCalendarWidget.
+
+    \image calendarwidgetexample.png
+
+    QCalendarWidget displays one calendar month
+    at a time and lets the user select a date.
+    The calendar consists of four components: a navigation
+    bar that lets the user change the month that is
+    displayed, a grid where each cell represents one day
+    in the month, and two headers that display weekday names
+    and week numbers.
+
+    The Calendar Widget example displays a QCalendarWidget and lets the user
+    configure its appearance and behavior using
+    \l{QComboBox}es, \l{QCheckBox}es, and \l{QDateEdit}s. In
+    addition, the user can influence the formatting of individual dates
+    and headers.
+
+    The properties of the QCalendarWidget are summarized in the table
+    below.
+
+    \table
+    \header \o Property
+            \o Description
+    \row \o \l{QCalendarWidget::}{selectedDate}
+         \o The currently selected date.
+    \row \o \l{QCalendarWidget::}{minimumDate}
+         \o The earliest date that can be selected.
+    \row \o \l{QCalendarWidget::}{maximumDate}
+         \o The latest date that can be selected.
+    \row \o \l{QCalendarWidget::}{firstDayOfWeek}
+         \o The day that is displayed as the first day of the week
+            (usually Sunday or Monday).
+    \row \o \l{QCalendarWidget::}{gridVisible}
+         \o Whether the grid should be shown.
+    \row \o \l{QCalendarWidget::}{selectionMode}
+         \o Whether the user can select a date or not.
+    \row \o \l{QCalendarWidget::}{horizontalHeaderFormat}
+         \o The format of the day names in the horizontal header
+            (e.g., "M", "Mon", or "Monday").
+    \row \o \l{QCalendarWidget::}{verticalHeaderFormat}
+         \o The format of the vertical header.
+    \row \o \l{QCalendarWidget::}{navigationBarVisible}
+         \o Whether the navigation bar at the top of the calendar
+            widget is shown.
+    \endtable
+
+    The example consists of one class, \c Window, which creates and
+    lays out the QCalendarWidget and the other widgets that let the
+    user configure the QCalendarWidget.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    Here is the definition of the \c Window class:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.h 0
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.h 1
+
+    As is often the case with classes that represent self-contained
+    windows, most of the API is private. We will review the private
+    members as we stumble upon them in the implementation.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    Let's now review the class implementation, starting with the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 0
+
+    We start by creating the four \l{QGroupBox}es and their child
+    widgets (including the QCalendarWidget) using four private \c
+    create...GroupBox() functions, described below. Then we arrange
+    the group boxes in a QGridLayout.
+
+    We set the grid layout's resize policy to QLayout::SetFixedSize to
+    prevent the user from resizing the window. In that mode, the
+    window's size is set automatically by QGridLayout based on the
+    size hints of its contents widgets.
+
+    To ensure that the window isn't automatically resized every time
+    we change a property of the QCalendarWidget (e.g., hiding the
+    navigation bar, trhe vertical header, or the grid), we set the
+    minimum height of row 0 and the minimum width of column 0 to the
+    initial size of the QCalendarWidget.
+
+    Let's move on to the \c createPreviewGroupBox() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 9
+
+    The \gui Preview group box contains only one widget: the
+    QCalendarWidget. We set it up, connect its
+    \l{QCalendarWidget::}{currentPageChanged()} signal to our \c
+    reformatCalendarPage() slot to make sure that every new page gets
+    the formatting specified by the user.
+
+    The \c createGeneralOptionsGroupBox() function is somewhat large
+    and several widgets are set up the same way; we look at parts of
+    its implementation here and skip the rest:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 10
+    \dots
+
+    We start with the setup of the \gui{Week starts on} combobox.
+    This combobox controls which day should be displayed as the first
+    day of the week.
+
+    The QComboBox class lets us attach user data as a QVariant to
+    each item. The data can later be retrieved with QComboBox's
+    \l{QComboBox::}{itemData()} function. QVariant doesn't directly
+    support the Qt::DayOfWeek data type, but it supports \c int, and
+    C++ will happily convert any enum value to \c int.
+
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 11
+    \dots
+
+    After creating the widgets, we connect the signals and slots. We
+    connect the comboboxes to private slots of \c Window or to
+    public slots provided by QComboBox.
+
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 12
+
+    At the end of the function, we call the slots that update the calendar to ensure
+    that the QCalendarWidget is synchronized with the other widgets on startup.
+
+    Let's now take a look at the \c createDatesGroupBox() private function:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 13
+
+    In this function, we create the \gui {Minimum Date}, \gui {Maximum Date},
+    and \gui {Current Date} editor widgets,
+    which control the calendar's minimum, maximum, and selected dates.
+    The calendar's minimum and maximum dates have already been
+    set in \c createPrivewGroupBox(); we can then set the widgets
+    default values to the calendars values.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 14
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 15
+
+    We connect the \c currentDateEdit's
+    \l{QDateEdit::}{dateChanged()} signal directly to the calendar's
+    \l{QCalendarWidget::}{setSelectedDate()} slot. When the calendar's
+    selected date changes, either as a result of a user action or
+    programmatically, our \c selectedDateChanged() slot updates
+    the \gui {Current Date} editor. We also need to react when the user
+    changes the \gui{Minimum Date} and \gui{Maximum Date} editors.
+
+    Here is the \c createTextFormatsGroup() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 16
+
+    We set up the \gui {Weekday Color} and \gui {Weekend Color} comboboxes
+    using \c createColorCombo(), which instantiates a QComboBox and
+    populates it with colors ("Red", "Blue", etc.).
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 17
+
+    The \gui {Header Text Format} combobox lets the user change the
+    text format (bold, italic, or plain) used for horizontal and
+    vertical headers. The \gui {First Friday in blue} and \gui {May 1
+    in red} check box affect the rendering of specific dates.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 18
+
+    We connect the check boxes and comboboxes to various private
+    slots. The \gui {First Friday in blue} and \gui {May 1 in red}
+    check boxes are both connected to \c reformatCalendarPage(),
+    which is also called when the calendar switches month.
+
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 19
+
+    At the end of \c createTextFormatsGroupBox(), we call private
+    slots to synchronize the QCalendarWidget with the other widgets.
+
+    We're now done reviewing the four \c create...GroupBox()
+    functions. Let's now take a look at the other private functions
+    and slots.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 20
+
+    In \c createColorCombo(), we create a combobox and populate it with
+    standard colors. The second argument to QComboBox::addItem()
+    is a QVariant storing user data (in this case, QColor objects).
+
+    This function was used to set up the \gui {Weekday Color}
+    and \gui {Weekend Color} comboboxes.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 1
+
+    When the user changes the \gui {Week starts on} combobox's
+    value, \c firstDayChanged() is invoked with the index of the
+    combobox's new value. We retrieve the custom data item
+    associated with the new current item using
+    \l{QComboBox::}{itemData()} and cast it to a Qt::DayOfWeek.
+
+    \c selectionModeChanged(), \c horizontalHeaderChanged(), and \c
+    verticalHeaderChanged() are very similar to \c firstDayChanged(),
+    so they are omitted.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 2
+
+    The \c selectedDateChanged() updates the \gui{Current Date}
+    editor to reflect the current state of the QCalendarWidget.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 3
+
+    When the user changes the minimum date, we tell the
+    QCalenderWidget. We also update the \gui {Maximum Date} editor,
+    because if the new minimum date is later than the current maximum
+    date, QCalendarWidget will automatically adapt its maximum date
+    to avoid a contradicting state.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 4
+
+    \c maximumDateChanged() is implemented similarly to \c
+    minimumDateChanged().
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 5
+
+    Each combobox item has a QColor object as user data corresponding to the
+    item's text. After fetching the colors from the comboboxes, we
+    set the text format of each day of the week.
+
+    The text format of a column in the calendar is given as a
+    QTextCharFormat, which besides the foreground color lets us
+    specify various character formatting information. In this
+    example, we only show a subset of the possibilities.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 6
+
+    \c weekendFormatChanged() is the same as \c
+    weekdayFormatChanged(), except that it affects Saturday and
+    Sunday instead of Monday to Friday.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 7
+
+    The \c reformatHeaders() slot is called when the user
+    changes the text format of
+    the headers. We compare the current text of the \gui {Header Text Format}
+    combobox to determine which format to apply. (An alternative would
+    have been to store \l{QTextCharFormat} values alongside the combobox
+    items.)
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/calendarwidget/window.cpp 8
+
+    In \c reformatCalendarPage(), we set the text format of the first
+    Friday in the month and May 1 in the current year. The text
+    formats that are actually used depend on which check boxes are
+    checked.
+
+    QCalendarWidget lets us set the text format of individual dates
+    with the \l{QCalendarWidget::}{setDateTextFormat()}. We chose to
+    set the dates when the calendar page changes, i.e., a new month is
+    displayed. We check which of the \c mayFirstCheckBox and \c
+    firstDayCheckBox, if any, are checked
+    and set the text formats accordingly.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/capabilitiesexample.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/capabilitiesexample.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9d62c71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/capabilitiesexample.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example phonon/capabilities
+    \title Capabilities Example
+
+    The Backend Capabilities example shows how to check which MIME
+    types, audio devices, and audio effects are available.
+
+    \image capabilitiesexample.png
+
+    Phonon does not implement the multimedia functionality itself, but
+    relies on a backend to manage this. The backends do not manage the
+    hardware directly, but use intermediate technologies: QuickTime on
+    Mac, GStreamer on Linux, and DirectShow (which requires DirectX)
+    on Windows. 
+
+    The user may add support for new MIME types and effects to these
+    systems, and the systems abilities may also be different. The
+    support for multimedia MIME types, and audio effects in Phonon
+    will therefore vary from system to system.
+
+    Backends informs the programmer about current capabilities through
+    an implementation of the Phonon::BackendCapabilities namespace.
+    The backend reports which MIME types can be played back, which
+    audio effects are available, and which sound devices are available
+    on the system. When the capabilities of a backend changes, it will
+    emit the
+    \l{Phonon::BackendCapabilities::Notifier::}{capabilitiesChanged()}
+    signal.
+
+    The example consists of one class, \c Window, which displays
+    capabilities information from the current backend used by Phonon.
+
+    See the \l{Phonon Overview} for a high-level introduction to
+    Phonon.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The \c Window class queries the Phonon backend for its
+    capabilities. The results are presented in a GUI consisting of
+    standard Qt widgets. We will now take a tour of the Phonon related
+    parts of both the definition and implementation of the \c Window
+    class.
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/capabilities/window.h windowMembers
+
+    We need the slot to notice changes in the backends capabilities. 
+
+    \c mimeListWidget and \c devicesListView lists MIME types and
+    audio devices. The \c effectsTreeWidget lists audio effects, and
+    expands to show their parameters.
+
+    The \c setupUi() and \c setupBackendBox() private utility
+    functions create the widgets and lays them out. We skip these
+    functions while discussing the implementation because they do not
+    contain Phonon relevant code.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    Our examination starts with a look at the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/capabilities/window.cpp constructor
+
+    After creating the user interface, we call \c updateWidgets(),
+    which will fill the widgets with the information we get from the
+    backend. We then connect the slot to the
+    \l{Phonon::BackendCapabilities::Notifier::}{capabilitiesChanged()}
+    and
+    \l{Phonon::BackendCapabilities::Notifier::availableAudioOutputDevicesChanged()}{availableAudioOutputDevicesChanged()}
+    signals in case the backend's abilities changes while the example
+    is running. The signal is emitted by a
+    Phonon::BackendCapabilities::Notifier object, which listens for
+    changes in the backend.
+
+    In the \c updateWidgets() function, we query the backend for
+    information it has about its abilities and present it in the GUI
+    of \c Window. We dissect it here:
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/capabilities/window.cpp outputDevices
+
+    The
+    \l{Phonon::BackendCapabilities::Notifier::}{availableAudioOutputDevicesChanged()}
+    function is a member of the Phonon::BackendCapabilities namespace.
+    It returns a list of \l{Phonon::}{AudioOutputDevice}s, which gives
+    us information about a particular device, e.g., a sound card or a
+    USB headset.
+
+    Note that \l{Phonon::}{AudioOutputDevice} and also
+    \l{Phonon::}{EffectDescription}, which is described shortly, are
+    typedefs of \l{Phonon::}{ObjectDescriptionType}.
+
+    \omit
+    ###
+    The \l{Phonon::}{ObjectDescriptionModel} is a convenience
+    model that displays the names of the devices. Their
+    descriptions are shown as tooltips and disabled devices are
+    shown in gray.
+    \endomit
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/capabilities/window.cpp mimeTypes
+
+    The MIME types supported are given as strings in a QStringList. We
+    can therefore create a list widget item with the string, and
+    append it to the \c mimeListWidget, which displays the available
+    MIME types.
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/capabilities/window.cpp effects
+
+    As before we add the description and name to our widget, which in
+    this case is a QTreeWidget. A particular effect may also have
+    parameters, which are inserted in the tree as child nodes of their
+    effect.
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/capabilities/window.cpp effectsParameters
+
+    The parameters are only accessible through an instance of the
+    \l{Phonon::}{Effect} class. Notice that an effect is created
+    with the effect description.
+
+    The \l{Phonon::}{EffectParameter} contains information about one
+    of an effects parameters. We pick out some of the information to
+    describe the parameter in the tree widget.
+
+    \section1 The main() function
+
+    Because Phonon uses D-Bus on Linux, it is necessary to give the
+    application a name. You do this with
+    \l{QCoreApplication::}{setApplicationName()}.
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/capabilities/main.cpp everything
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/charactermap.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/charactermap.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..64c00db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/charactermap.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,288 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+\example widgets/charactermap
+\title Character Map Example
+
+The Character Map example shows how to create a custom widget that can
+both display its own content and respond to user input.
+
+The example displays an array of characters which the user can click on
+to enter text in a line edit. The contents of the line edit can then be
+copied into the clipboard, and pasted into other applications. The
+purpose behind this sort of tool is to allow users to enter characters
+that may be unavailable or difficult to locate on their keyboards.
+
+\image charactermap-example.png Screenshot of the Character Map example
+
+The example consists of the following classes:
+
+\list
+\i \c CharacterWidget displays the available characters in the current
+   font and style.
+\i \c MainWindow provides a standard main window that contains font and
+   style information, a view onto the characters, a line edit, and a push
+   button for submitting text to the clipboard.
+\endlist
+
+\section1 CharacterWidget Class Definition
+
+The \c CharacterWidget class is used to display an array of characters in
+a user-specified font and style. For flexibility, we subclass QWidget and
+reimplement only the functions that we need to provide basic rendering
+and interaction features.
+
+The class definition looks like this:
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/characterwidget.h 0
+
+The widget does not contain any other widgets, so it must provide its own
+size hint to allow its contents to be displayed correctly.
+We reimplement \l{QWidget::paintEvent()} to draw custom content. We also
+reimplement \l{QWidget::mousePressEvent()} to allow the user to interact
+with the widget.
+
+The updateFont() and updateStyle() slots are used to update the font and
+style of the characters in the widget whenever the user changes the
+settings in the application.
+The class defines the characterSelected() signal so that other parts
+of the application are informed whenever the user selects a character in
+the widget.
+As a courtesy, the widget provides a tooltip that shows the current
+character value. We reimplement the \l{QWidget::mouseMoveEvent()} event
+handler and define showToolTip() to enable this feature.
+
+The \c columns, \c displayFont and \c currentKey private data members
+are used to record the number of columns to be shown, the current font,
+and the currently highlighted character in the widget.
+
+\section1 CharacterWidget Class Implementation
+
+Since the widget is to be used as a simple canvas, the constructor just
+calls the base class constructor and defines some default values for
+private data members.
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/characterwidget.cpp 0
+
+We initialize \c currentKey with a value of -1 to indicate
+that no character is initially selected. We enable mouse tracking to
+allow us to follow the movement of the cursor across the widget.
+
+The class provides two functions to allow the font and style to be set up.
+Each of these modify the widget's display font and call update():
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/characterwidget.cpp 1
+\codeline
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/characterwidget.cpp 2
+
+We use a fixed size font for the display. Similarly, a fixed size hint is
+provided by the sizeHint() function:
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/characterwidget.cpp 3
+
+Three standard event functions are implemented so that the widget
+can respond to clicks, provide tooltips, and render the available
+characters. The paintEvent() shows how the contents of the widget are
+arranged and displayed:
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/characterwidget.cpp 6
+
+A QPainter is created for the widget and, in all cases, we ensure that the
+widget's background is painted. The painter's font is set to the
+user-specified display font.
+
+The area of the widget that needs to be redrawn is used to determine which
+characters need to be displayed:
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/characterwidget.cpp 7
+
+Using integer division, we obtain the row and column numbers of each
+characters that should be displayed, and we draw a square on the widget
+for each character displayed.
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/characterwidget.cpp 8
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/characterwidget.cpp 9
+
+The symbols for each character in the array are drawn within each square,
+with the symbol for the most recently selected character displayed in red:
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/characterwidget.cpp 10
+
+We do not need to take into account the difference between the area
+displayed in the viewport and the area we are drawing on because
+everything outside the visible area will be clipped.
+
+The mousePressEvent() defines how the widget responds to mouse clicks.
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/characterwidget.cpp 5
+
+We are only interested when the user clicks with the left mouse button
+over the widget. When this happens, we calculate which character was
+selected and emit the characterSelected() signal.
+The character's number is found by dividing the x and y-coordinates of
+the click by the size of each character's grid square. Since the number
+of columns in the widget is defined by the \c columns variable, we
+simply multiply the row index by that value and add the column number
+to obtain the character number.
+
+If any other mouse button is pressed, the event is passed on to the
+QWidget base class. This ensures that the event can be handled properly
+by any other interested widgets.
+
+The mouseMoveEvent() maps the mouse cursor's position in global
+coordinates to widget coordinates, and determines the character that
+was clicked by performing the calculation
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/characterwidget.cpp 4
+
+The tooltip is given a position defined in global coordinates.
+
+\section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+The \c MainWindow class provides a minimal user interface for the example,
+with only a constructor, slots that respond to signals emitted by standard
+widgets, and some convenience functions that are used to set up the user
+interface.
+
+The class definition looks like this:
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/mainwindow.h 0
+
+The main window contains various widgets that are used to control how
+the characters will be displayed, and defines the findFonts() function
+for clarity and convenience. The findStyles() slot is used by the widgets
+to determine the styles that are available, insertCharacter() inserts
+a user-selected character into the window's line edit, and
+updateClipboard() synchronizes the clipboard with the contents of the
+line edit.
+
+\section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+In the constructor, we set up the window's central widget and fill it with
+some standard widgets (two comboboxes, a line edit, and a push button).
+We also construct a CharacterWidget custom widget, and add a QScrollArea
+so that we can view its contents:
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+QScrollArea provides a viewport onto the \c CharacterWidget when we set
+its widget and handles much of the work needed to provide a scrolling
+viewport.
+
+The font combo box is automatically popuplated with a list of available
+fonts. We list the available styles for the current font in the style
+combobox using the following function:
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+The line edit and push button are used to supply text to the clipboard:
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+We also obtain a clipboard object so that we can send text entered by the
+user to other applications.
+
+Most of the signals emitted in the example come from standard widgets.
+We connect these signals to slots in this class, and to the slots provided
+by other widgets.
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+The font combobox's
+\l{QFontComboBox::currentFontChanged()}{currentFontChanged()} signal is
+connected to the findStyles() function so that the list of available styles
+can be shown for each font that is used. Since both the font and the style
+can be changed by the user, the font combobox's currentFontChanged() signal
+and the style combobox's
+\l{QComboBox::currentIndexChanged()}{currentIndexChanged()} are connected
+directly to the character widget.
+
+The final two connections allow characters to be selected in the character
+widget, and text to be inserted into the clipboard:
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/mainwindow.cpp 5
+
+The character widget emits the characterSelected() custom signal when
+the user clicks on a character, and this is handled by the insertCharacter()
+function in this class. The clipboard is changed when the push button emits
+the clicked() signal, and we handle this with the updateClipboard() function.
+
+The remaining code in the constructor sets up the layout of the central widget,
+and provides a window title:
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/mainwindow.cpp 6
+
+The font combobox is automatically populated with a list of available font
+families. The styles that can be used with each font are found by the
+findStyles() function. This function is called whenever the user selects a
+different font in the font combobox.
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/mainwindow.cpp 7
+
+We begin by recording the currently selected style, and we clear the
+style combobox so that we can insert the styles associated with the
+current font family.
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/mainwindow.cpp 8
+
+We use the font database to collect the styles that are available for the
+current font, and insert them into the style combobox. The current item is
+reset if the original style is not available for this font.
+
+The last two functions are slots that respond to signals from the character
+widget and the main window's push button. The insertCharacter() function is
+used to insert characters from the character widget when the user clicks a
+character:
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/mainwindow.cpp 9
+
+The character is inserted into the line edit at the current cursor position.
+
+The main window's "To clipboard" push button is connected to the
+updateClipboard() function so that, when it is clicked, the clipboard is
+updated to contain the contents of the line edit:
+
+\snippet examples/widgets/charactermap/mainwindow.cpp 10
+
+We copy all the text from the line edit to the clipboard, but we do not clear
+the line edit.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/chart.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/chart.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..22f8a51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/chart.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/chart
+    \title Chart Example
+
+    The Chart example shows how to create a custom view for the model/view framework.
+
+    \image chart-example.png
+
+    In this example, the items in a table model are represented as slices in a pie chart,
+    relying on the flexibility of the model/view architecture to handle custom editing
+    and selection features.
+
+    \bold{Note that you only need to create a new view class if your data requires a
+    specialized representation.} You should first consider using a standard QListView,
+    QTableView, or QTreeView with a custom QItemDelegate subclass if you need to
+    represent data in a special way.
+
+    \omit
+    \section1 PieView Class Definition
+
+    The \c PieView class is a subclass of QAbstractItemView. The base class provides
+    much of the functionality required by view classes, so we only need to provide
+    implementations for three public functions: visualRect(), scrollTo(), and
+    indexAt(). However, the view needs to maintain strict control over its look and
+    feel, so we also provide implementations for a number of other functions:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/chart/pieview.h 0
+
+
+
+    \section1 PieView Class Implementation
+
+    The paint event renders the data from the standard item model as a pie chart.
+    We interpret the data in the following way:
+
+    \list
+    \o Column 0 contains data in two different roles:
+       The \l{Qt::ItemDataRole}{DisplayRole} contains a label, and the
+       \l{Qt::ItemDataRole}{DecorationRole} contains the color of the pie slice.
+    \o Column 1 contains a quantity which we will convert to the angular extent of
+       the slice.
+    \endlist
+
+    The figure is always drawn with the chart on the left and the key on
+    the right. This means that we must try and obtain an area that is wider
+    than it is tall. We do this by imposing a particular aspect ratio on
+    the chart and applying it to the available vertical space. This ensures
+    that we always obtain the maximum horizontal space for the aspect ratio
+    used.
+    We also apply fixed size margin around the figure.
+
+    We use logical coordinates to draw the chart and key, and position them
+    on the view using viewports.
+    \endomit
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/classwizard.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/classwizard.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a36edf7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/classwizard.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,204 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example dialogs/classwizard
+    \title Class Wizard Example
+
+    The License Wizard example shows how to implement linear
+    wizards using QWizard.
+
+    \image classwizard.png Screenshot of the Class Wizard example
+
+    Most wizards have a linear structure, with page 1 followed by
+    page 2 and so on until the last page. Some wizards are more
+    complex in that they allow different traversal paths based on the
+    information provided by the user. The
+    \l{dialogs/licensewizard}{License Wizard} example shows how to
+    create such wizards.
+
+    The Class Wizard example consists of the following classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c ClassWizard inherits QWizard and provides a
+       three-step wizard that generates the skeleton of a C++ class
+       based on the user's input.
+    \o \c IntroPage, \c ClassInfoPage, \c CodeStylePage, \c
+       OutputFilesPage, and \c ConclusionPage are QWizardPage
+       subclasses that implement the wizard pages.
+    \endlist
+
+    \section1 ClassWizard Class Definition
+
+    \image classwizard-flow.png The Class Wizard pages
+
+    We will see how to subclass QWizard to implement our own wizard.
+    The concrete wizard class is called \c ClassWizard and provides
+    five pages:
+
+    \list
+    \o The first page is an introduction page, telling the user what
+       the wizard is going to do.
+    \o The second page asks for a class name and a base class, and
+       allows the user to specify whether the class should have a \c
+       Q_OBJECT macro and what constructors it should provide.
+    \o The third page allows the user to set some options related to the code
+       style, such as the macro used to protect the header file from
+       multiple inclusion (e.g., \c MYDIALOG_H).
+    \o The fourth page allows the user to specify the names of the
+       output files.
+    \o The fifth page is a conclusion page.
+    \endlist
+
+    Although the program is just an example, if you press \gui Finish
+    (\gui Done on Mac OS X), actual C++ source files will actually be
+    generated.
+
+    \section1 The ClassWizard Class
+
+    Here's the \c ClassWizard definition:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.h 0
+
+    The class reimplements QDialog's \l{QDialog::}{accept()} slot.
+    This slot is called when the user clicks \gui{Finish}.
+
+    Here's the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.cpp 1
+
+    We instantiate the five pages and insert them into the wizard
+    using QWizard::addPage(). The order in which they are inserted
+    is also the order in which they will be shown later on.
+
+    We call QWizard::setPixmap() to set the banner and the
+    background pixmaps for all pages. The banner is used as a
+    background for the page header when the wizard's style is
+    \l{QWizard::}{ModernStyle}; the background is used as the
+    dialog's background in \l{QWizard::}{MacStyle}. (See \l{Elements
+    of a Wizard Page} for more information.)
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.cpp 4
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.cpp 6
+
+    If the user clicks \gui Finish, we extract the information from
+    the various pages using QWizard::field() and generate the files.
+    The code is long and tedious (and has barely anything to do with
+    noble art of designing wizards), so most of it is skipped here.
+    See the actual example in the Qt distribution for the details if
+    you're curious.
+
+    \section1 The IntroPage Class
+
+    The pages are defined in \c classwizard.h and implemented in \c
+    classwizard.cpp, together with \c ClassWizard. We will start with
+    the easiest page:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.h 1
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.cpp 7
+
+    A page inherits from QWizardPage. We set a
+    \l{QWizardPage::}{title} and a
+    \l{QWizard::WatermarkPixmap}{watermark pixmap}. By not setting
+    any \l{QWizardPage::}{subTitle}, we ensure that no header is
+    displayed for this page. (On Windows, it is customary for wizards
+    to display a watermark pixmap on the first and last pages, and to
+    have a header on the other pages.)
+
+    Then we create a QLabel and add it to a layout.
+
+    \section1 The ClassInfoPage Class
+
+    The second page is defined and implemented as follows:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.h 2
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.cpp 9
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.cpp 12
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.cpp 13
+
+    First, we set the page's \l{QWizardPage::}{title},
+    \l{QWizardPage::}{subTitle}, and \l{QWizard::LogoPixmap}{logo
+    pixmap}. The logo pixmap is displayed in the page's header in
+    \l{QWizard::}{ClassicStyle} and \l{QWizard::}{ModernStyle}.
+
+    Then we create the child widgets, create \l{Registering and Using
+    Fields}{wizard fields} associated with them, and put them into
+    layouts. The \c className field is created with an asterisk (\c
+    *) next to its name. This makes it a \l{mandatory field}, that
+    is, a field that must be filled before the user can press the
+    \gui Next button (\gui Continue on Mac OS X). The fields' values
+    can be accessed from any other page using QWizardPage::field(),
+    or from the wizard code using QWizard::field().
+
+    \section1 The CodeStylePage Class
+
+    The third page is defined and implemented as follows:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.h 3
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.cpp 14
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.cpp 15
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/classwizard/classwizard.cpp 16
+
+    The code in the constructor is very similar to what we did for \c
+    ClassInfoPage, so we skipped most of it.
+
+    The \c initializePage() function is what makes this class
+    interesting. It is reimplemented from QWizardPage and is used to
+    initialize some of the page's fields with values from the
+    previous page (namely, \c className and \c baseClass). For
+    example, if the class name on page 2 is \c SuperDuperWidget, the
+    default macro name on page 3 is \c SUPERDUPERWIDGET_H.
+
+    The \c OutputFilesPage and \c ConclusionPage classes are very
+    similar to \c CodeStylePage, so we won't review them here.
+
+    \sa QWizard, {License Wizard Example}, {Trivial Wizard Example}
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/codecs.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/codecs.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb38cbe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/codecs.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example tools/codecs
+    \title Codecs Example
+
+    The Codecs example demonstrates the principles behind importing and exporting text
+    using codecs to ensure that characters are encoded properly, avoiding loss of data
+    and retaining the correct symbols used in various scripts.
+
+    \image codecs-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/codeeditor.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/codeeditor.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..669ab45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/codeeditor.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/codeeditor
+    \title Code Editor Example
+
+    The Code Editor example shows how to create a simple editor that
+    has line numbers and that highlights the current line.
+
+    \image codeeditor-example.png
+
+    As can be seen from the image, the editor displays the line
+    numbers in an area to the left of the area for editing. The editor
+    will highlight the line containing the cursor.
+
+    We implement the editor in \c CodeEditor, which is a widget that
+    inherits QPlainTextEdit. We keep a separate widget in \c
+    CodeEditor (\c LineNumberArea) onto which we draw the line
+    numbers.
+
+    QPlainTextEdit inherits from QAbstractScrollArea, and editing
+    takes place within its \l{QAbstractScrollArea::}{viewport()}'s
+    margins. We make room for our line number area by setting the left
+    margin of the viewport to the size we need to draw the line
+    numbers.
+
+    When it comes to editing code, we prefer QPlainTextEdit over
+    QTextEdit because it is optimized for handling plain text. See
+    the QPlainTextEdit class description for details.
+
+    QPlainTextEdit lets us add selections in addition to the the
+    selection the user can make with the mouse or keyboard. We use
+    this functionality to highlight the current line. More on this
+    later.
+
+    We will now move on to the definitions and implementations of \c
+    CodeEditor and \c LineNumberArea. Let's start with the \c
+    LineNumberArea class. 
+
+    \section1 The LineNumberArea Class
+
+    We paint the line numbers on this widget, and place it over the \c
+    CodeEditor's \l{QAbstractScrollArea::}{viewport()}'s left margin
+    area.
+
+    We need to use protected functions in QPlainTextEdit while
+    painting the area. So to keep things simple, we  paint the area in
+    the \c CodeEditor class. The area also asks the editor to
+    calculate its size hint.
+
+    Note that we could simply paint the line numbers directly on the
+    code editor, and drop the LineNumberArea class. However, the
+    QWidget class helps us to \l{QWidget::}{scroll()} its contents.
+    Also, having a separate widget is the right choice if we wish to
+    extend the editor with breakpoints or other code editor features.
+    The widget would then help in the handling of mouse events.
+
+    \snippet widgets/codeeditor/codeeditor.h extraarea
+
+    \section1 CodeEditor Class Definition
+
+    Here is the code editor's class definition:
+
+    \snippet widgets/codeeditor/codeeditor.h codeeditordefinition
+
+    In the editor we resize and draw the line numbers on the \c
+    LineNumberArea. We need to do this when the number of lines in the
+    editor changes, and when the editor's viewport() is scrolled. Of
+    course, it is also done when the editor's size changes. We do
+    this in \c updateLineNumberWidth() and \c updateLineNumberArea().
+
+    Whenever, the cursor's position changes, we highlight the current
+    line in \c highlightCurrentLine().
+
+    \section1 CodeEditor Class Implementation
+
+    We will now go through the code editors implementation, starting
+    off with the constructor.
+
+    \snippet widgets/codeeditor/codeeditor.cpp constructor
+
+    In the constructor we connect our slots to signals in
+    QPlainTextEdit. It is necessary to calculate the line number area
+    width and highlight the first line when the editor is created.
+
+    \snippet widgets/codeeditor/codeeditor.cpp extraAreaWidth
+
+    The \c lineNumberAreaWidth() function calculates the width of the
+    \c LineNumberArea widget. We take the number of digits in the last
+    line of the editor and multiply that with the maximum width of a
+    digit.
+
+    \snippet widgets/codeeditor/codeeditor.cpp slotUpdateExtraAreaWidth
+
+    When we update the width of the line number area, we simply call
+    QAbstractScrollArea::setViewportMargins().
+
+    \snippet widgets/codeeditor/codeeditor.cpp slotUpdateRequest
+
+    This slot is invoked when the editors viewport has been scrolled.
+    The QRect given as argument is the part of the editing area that
+    is do be updated (redrawn). \c dy holds the number of pixels the
+    view has been scrolled vertically.
+
+    \snippet widgets/codeeditor/codeeditor.cpp resizeEvent
+
+    When the size of the editor changes, we also need to resize the
+    line number area. 
+
+    \snippet widgets/codeeditor/codeeditor.cpp cursorPositionChanged
+
+    When the cursor position changes, we highlight the current line,
+    i.e., the line containing the cursor.
+
+    QPlainTextEdit gives the possibility to have more than one
+    selection at the same time. we can set the character format
+    (QTextCharFormat) of these selections. We clear the cursors
+    selection before setting the new new
+    QPlainTextEdit::ExtraSelection, else several lines would get
+    highlighted when the user selects multiple lines with the mouse.
+    \omit ask someone how this works \endomit
+
+    One sets the selection with a text cursor. When using the
+    FullWidthSelection property, the current cursor text block (line)
+    will be selected. If you want to select just a portion of the text
+    block, the cursor should be moved with QTextCursor::movePosition()
+    from a position set with \l{QTextCursor::}{setPosition()}.
+
+    \snippet widgets/codeeditor/codeeditor.cpp extraAreaPaintEvent_0
+
+    The \c lineNumberAreaPaintEvent() is called from \c LineNumberArea
+    whenever it receives a paint event. We start off by painting the
+    widget's background. 
+
+    \snippet widgets/codeeditor/codeeditor.cpp extraAreaPaintEvent_1
+
+    We will now loop through all visible lines and paint the line
+    numbers in the extra area for each line. Notice that in a plain
+    text edit each line will consist of one QTextBlock; though, if
+    line wrapping is enabled, a line may span several rows in the text
+    edit's viewport. 
+
+    We get the top and bottom y-coordinate of the first text block,
+    and adjust these values by the height of the current text block in
+    each iteration in the loop. 
+
+    \snippet widgets/codeeditor/codeeditor.cpp extraAreaPaintEvent_2
+
+    Notice that we check if the block is visible in addition to check
+    if it is in the areas viewport - a block can, for example, be
+    hidden by a window placed over the text edit.
+
+    \section1 Suggestions for Extending the Code Editor
+
+    No self-respecting code editor is without a syntax
+    highligther; the \l{Syntax Highlighter Example} shows how to
+    create one.
+
+    In addition to line numbers, you can add more to the extra area,
+    for instance, break points.
+        
+    QSyntaxHighlighter gives the possibility to add user data to each
+    text block with
+    \l{QSyntaxHighlighter::}{setCurrentBlockUserData()}. This can be
+    used to implement parenthesis matching. In the \c
+    highlightCurrentLine(), the data of the currentBlock() can be
+    fetched with QTextBlock::userData(). Matching parentheses can be
+    highlighted with an extra selection.
+
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/collidingmice-example.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/collidingmice-example.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7ea2ca2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/collidingmice-example.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,279 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example graphicsview/collidingmice
+    \title Colliding Mice Example
+
+    The Colliding Mice example shows how to use the Graphics View
+    framework to implement animated items and detect collision between
+    items.
+
+    \image collidingmice-example.png
+
+    Graphics View provides the QGraphicsScene class for managing and
+    interacting with a large number of custom-made 2D graphical items
+    derived from the QGraphicsItem class, and a QGraphicsView widget
+    for visualizing the items, with support for zooming and rotation.
+
+    The example consists of an item class and a main function:
+    the \c Mouse class represents the individual mice extending
+    QGraphicsItem, and the \c main() function provides the main
+    application window.
+
+    We will first review the \c Mouse class to see how to animate
+    items and detect item collision, and then we will review the \c
+    main() function to see how to put the items into a scene and how to
+    implement the corresponding view.
+
+    \section1 Mouse Class Definition
+
+    The \c mouse class inherits both QObject and QGraphicsItem. The
+    QGraphicsItem class is the base class for all graphical items in
+    the Graphics View framework, and provides a light-weight
+    foundation for writing your own custom items.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/mouse.h 0
+
+    When writing a custom graphics item, you must implement
+    QGraphicsItem's two pure virtual public functions: \l
+    {QGraphicsItem::}{boundingRect()}, which returns an estimate of
+    the area painted by the item, and \l {QGraphicsItem::}{paint()},
+    which implements the actual painting. In addition, we reimplement
+    the \l {QGraphicsItem::}{shape()} function to return an accurate
+    shape of our mouse item; the default implementation simply returns
+    the item's bounding rectangle.
+
+    The rationale for deriving from QObject in addition to
+    QGraphicsItem is to be able to animate our items by reimplementing
+    QObject's \l {QObject::}{timerEvent()} function and use
+    QObject::startTimer() to generate timer events.
+
+    \section1 Mouse Class Definition
+
+    When constructing a mouse item, we first ensure that all the item's
+    private variables are properly initialized:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/mouse.cpp 0
+
+    To calculate the various components of the mouse's color, we use
+    the global qrand() function which is a thread-safe version of the
+    standard C++ rand() function.
+
+    Then we call the \l {QGraphicsItem::rotate()}{rotate()} function
+    inherited from QGraphicsItem. Items live in their own local
+    coordinate system. Their coordinates are usually centered around
+    (0, 0), and this is also the center for all transformations. By
+    calling the item's \l {QGraphicsItem::rotate()}{rotate()} function
+    we alter the direction in which the mouse will start moving.
+
+    In the end we call QObject's \l {QObject::}{startTimer()}
+    function, emitting a timer event every 1000/33 millisecond. This
+    enables us to animate our mouse item using our reimplementation of
+    the \l {QObject::}{timerEvent()} function; whenever a mouse
+    receives a timer event it will trigger \l
+    {QObject::}{timerEvent()}:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/mouse.cpp 4
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/mouse.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/mouse.cpp 6
+
+    First we ensure that the mice stays within a circle with a radius
+    of 150 pixels.
+
+    Note the \l {QGraphicsItem::mapFromScene()}{mapFromScene()}
+    function provided by QGraphicsItem. This function maps a position
+    given in \e scene coordinates, to the item's coordinate system.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/mouse.cpp 7
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/mouse.cpp 8
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/mouse.cpp 9
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/mouse.cpp 10
+
+    Then we try to avoid colliding with other mice.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/mouse.cpp 11
+
+    Finally, we calculate the mouse's speed and its eye direction (for
+    use when painting the mouse), and set its new position.
+
+    The position of an item describes its origin (local coordinate (0,
+    0)) in the parent coordinates. The \l {QGraphicsItem::setPos()}
+    function sets the position of the item to the given position in
+    the parent's coordinate system. For items with no parent, the
+    given position is interpreted as scene coordinates. QGraphicsItem
+    also provides a \l {QGraphicsItem::}{mapToParent()} function to
+    map a position given in item coordinates, to the parent's
+    coordinate system. If the item has no parent, the position will be
+    mapped to the scene's coordinate system instead.
+
+    Then it is time to provide an implementation for the pure virtual
+    functions inherited from QGraphicsItem. Let's first take a look at
+    the \l {QGraphicsItem::}{boundingRect()} function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/mouse.cpp 1
+
+    The \l {QGraphicsItem::boundingRect()}{boundingRect()} function
+    defines the outer bounds of the item as a rectangle. Note that the
+    Graphics View framework uses the bounding rectangle to determine
+    whether the item requires redrawing, so all painting must be
+    restricted inside this rectangle.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/mouse.cpp 3
+
+    The Graphics View framework calls the \l
+    {QGraphicsItem::paint()}{paint()} function to paint the contents
+    of the item; the function paints the item in local coordinates.
+
+    Note the painting of the ears: Whenever a mouse item collides with
+    other mice items its ears are filled with red; otherwise they are
+    filled with dark yellow. We use the
+    QGraphicsScene::collidingItems() function to check if there are
+    any colliding mice.  The actual collision detection is handled by
+    the Graphics View framework using shape-shape intersection. All we
+    have to do is to ensure that the QGraphicsItem::shape() function
+    returns an accurate shape for our item:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/mouse.cpp 2
+
+    Because the complexity of arbitrary shape-shape intersection grows
+    with an order of magnitude when the shapes are complex, this
+    operation can be noticably time consuming. An alternative approach
+    is to reimplement the \l
+    {QGraphicsItem::collidesWithItem()}{collidesWithItem()} function
+    to provide your own custom item and shape collision algorithm.
+
+    This completes the \c Mouse class implementation, it is now ready
+    for use. Let's take a look at the \c main() function to see how to
+    implement a scene for the mice and a view for displaying the
+    contents of the scene.
+
+    \section1 The Main() Function
+
+    In this example we have chosen to let the \c main() function
+    provide the main application window, creating the items and the
+    scene, putting the items into the scene and creating a
+    corresponding view.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/main.cpp 0
+
+    First, we create an application object and call the global
+    qsrand() function to specify the seed used to generate a new
+    random number sequence of pseudo random integers with the
+    previously mentioned qrand() function.
+
+    Then it is time to create the scene:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/main.cpp 1
+
+    The QGraphicsScene class serves as a container for
+    QGraphicsItems. It also provides functionality that lets you
+    efficiently determine the location of items as well as determining
+    which items that are visible within an arbitrary area on the
+    scene.
+
+    When creating a scene it is recommended to set the scene's
+    rectangle, i.e., the rectangle that defines the extent of the
+    scene. It is primarily used by QGraphicsView to determine the
+    view's default scrollable area, and by QGraphicsScene to manage
+    item indexing. If not explicitly set, the scene's default
+    rectangle will be the largest bounding rectangle of all the items
+    on the scene since the scene was created (i.e., the rectangle will
+    grow when items are added or moved in the scene, but it will never
+    shrink).
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/main.cpp 2
+
+    The item index function is used to speed up item discovery. \l
+    {QGraphicsScene::NoIndex}{NoIndex} implies that item location is
+    of linear complexity, as all items on the scene are
+    searched. Adding, moving and removing items, however, is done in
+    constant time. This approach is ideal for dynamic scenes, where
+    many items are added, moved or removed continuously.  The
+    alternative is \l {QGraphicsScene::BspTreeIndex}{BspTreeIndex}
+    which makes use of binary search resulting in item location
+    algorithms that are of an order closer to logarithmic complexity.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/main.cpp 3
+
+    Then we add the mice to the scene.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/main.cpp 4
+
+    To be able to view the scene we must also create a QGraphicsView
+    widget. The QGraphicsView class visualizes the contents of a scene
+    in a scrollable viewport. We also ensure that the contents is
+    rendered using antialiasing, and we create the cheese background
+    by setting the view's background brush.
+
+    The image used for the background is stored as a binary file in
+    the application's executable using Qt's \l {The Qt Resource
+    System}{resource system}. The QPixmap constructor accepts both
+    file names that refer to actual files on disk and file names that
+    refer to the application's embedded resources.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/main.cpp 5
+
+    Then we set the cache mode; QGraphicsView can cache pre-rendered
+    content in a pixmap, which is then drawn onto the viewport. The
+    purpose of such caching is to speed up the total rendering time
+    for areas that are slow to render, e.g., texture, gradient and
+    alpha blended backgrounds. The \l
+    {QGraphicsView::CacheMode}{CacheMode} property holds which parts
+    of the view that are cached, and the \l
+    {QGraphicsView::CacheBackground}{CacheBackground} flag enables
+    caching of the view's background.
+
+    By setting the \l {QGraphicsView::dragMode}{dragMode} property we
+    define what should happen when the user clicks on the scene
+    background and drags the mouse. The \l
+    {QGraphicsView::ScrollHandDrag}{ScrollHandDrag} flag makes the
+    cursor change into a pointing hand, and dragging the mouse around
+    will scroll the scrollbars.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/collidingmice/main.cpp 6
+
+    In the end, we set the application window's title and size before
+    we enter the main event loop using the QApplication::exec()
+    function.
+*/
+
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/coloreditorfactory.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/coloreditorfactory.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..768bb51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/coloreditorfactory.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,169 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/coloreditorfactory
+    \title Color Editor Factory Example
+
+    This example shows how to create an editor that can be used by
+    a QItemDelegate.
+
+    \image coloreditorfactoryimage.png
+
+    When editing data in a QListView, QTableView, or QTreeView,
+    editors are created and displayed by a \l{Delegate
+    Classes}{delegate}. QItemDelegate, which is the default delegate
+    used by Qt's \l{View Classes}{item views}, uses a
+    QItemEditorFactory to create editors for it. A unique instance
+    provided by QItemEditorFactory is by default installed on all
+    item delegates.
+
+    An item editor factory contains a collection of
+    QItemEditorCreatorBase instances, which are specialized factories
+    that produce editors for one particular QVariant data type (all
+    models in Qt store their data in \l{QVariant}s). An editor can be any
+    Qt or custom widget.
+
+    In this example, we will create an editor (implemented in the \c
+    ColorListEditor class) that can edit the QColor data type and be
+    used by \l{QItemDelegate}s. We do this by creating a new
+    QItemEditorCreatorBase that produces \c ColorListEditors and
+    register it with a new factory, which we set as the default editor
+    item factory (the unique factory instance). To test our editor, we
+    have implemented the \c Window class, which displays a
+    QTableWidget in which \l{QColor}s can be edited.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    In the Window class, we create the item editor creator
+    base for our color editor and add it to the default factory.
+    We also create a QTableWidget in which our editor can be
+    tested. It is filled with some data and displayed in a window.
+
+    We take a closer look at the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/coloreditorfactory/window.cpp 0
+
+    The QStandardItemEditorCreator is a convenience class that
+    inherits QItemEditorCreatorBase. Its constructor takes a template
+    class, of which instances are returned from
+    \l{QItemEditorCreatorBase::}{createWidget()}. The creator uses a
+    constructor that takes a QWidget as its only parameter; the
+    template class must provide this. This way, there is no need to
+    subclass QStandardItemEditorCreator.
+
+    After the new factory has been set, all standard item delegates
+    will use it (i.e, also delegates that were created before the new
+    default factory was set). 
+
+    The \c createGUI() function sets up the table and fills it
+    with data.
+
+    \section1 ColorListEditor Definition
+
+    The ColorListEditor inherits QComboBox and lets the user
+    select a QColor from its popup list.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/coloreditorfactory/colorlisteditor.h 0
+
+    QItemDelegate manages the interaction between the editor and
+    the model, i.e., it retrieves data to edit from the model and
+    store data from the editor in the model. The data that is edited
+    by an editor is stored in the editor's user data property, and the
+    delegate uses Qt's \l{Qt's Property System}{property system} to
+    access it by name. We declare our user data property with the
+    Q_PROPERTY macro. The property is set to be the user type with the
+    USER keyword.
+
+    \section1 ColorListEditor Implementation
+
+    The constructor of \c ColorListEditor simply calls \c
+    populateList(), which we will look at later. We move on to the
+    \c color() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/coloreditorfactory/colorlisteditor.cpp 0
+
+    We return the data that is selected in the combobox. The data
+    is stored in the Qt::DecorationRole as the color is then also
+    displayed in the popup list (as shown in the image above).
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/coloreditorfactory/colorlisteditor.cpp 1
+
+    The \c findData() function searches the items in the combobox
+    and returns the index of the item that has \c color in the
+    Qt::Decoration role.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/coloreditorfactory/colorlisteditor.cpp 2
+
+    Qt knows some predefined colors by name. We simply loop
+    through these to fill our editor with items.
+
+    \section1 Further Customization of Item View Editors
+
+    You can customize Qt's \l{Model/View Programming}{model view
+    framework} in many ways. The procedure shown in this example is
+    usually sufficient to provide custom editors. Further
+    customization is achieved by subclassing QItemEditorFactory
+    and QItemEditorCreatorBase. It is also possible to subclass
+    QItemDelegate if you don't wish to use a factory at all.
+
+    Possible suggestions are:
+
+    \list
+	\o If the editor widget has no user property defined, the delegate
+	   asks the factory for the property name, which it in turn
+	   asks the item editor creator for. In this case, you can use 
+	   the QItemEditorCreator class, which takes the property 
+	   name to use for editing as a constructor argument.
+	\o If the editor requires other constructors or other
+	   initialization than provided by QItemEditorCreatorBase, you
+	   must reimplement
+	   QItemEditorCreatorBase::createWidget().
+	\o You could also subclass QItemEditorFactory if you only want
+	   to provide editors for certain kinds of data or use another
+	   method of creating the editors than using creator bases.
+    \endlist
+
+    In this example, we use a standard QVariant data type. You can
+    also use custom types. In the \l{Star Delegate Example}, we
+    show how to store a custom data type in a QVariant and paint
+    and edit it in a class that inherits QItemDelegate.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/combowidgetmapper.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/combowidgetmapper.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cf44bdb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/combowidgetmapper.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/combowidgetmapper
+    \title Combo Widget Mapper Example
+
+    The Delegate Widget Mapper example shows how to use a custom delegate to
+    map information from a model to specific widgets on a form.
+
+    \image combo-widget-mapper.png
+
+    In the \l{Simple Widget Mapper Example}, we showed the basic use of a
+    widget mapper to relate data exposed by a model to simple input widgets
+    in a user interface. However, sometimes we want to use input widgets that
+    expose data as choices to the user, such as QComboBox, and we need a way
+    to relate their input to the values stored in the model.
+
+    This example is very similar to the \l{Simple Widget Mapper Example}.
+    Again, we create a \c Window class with an almost identical user interface,
+    except that, instead of providing a spin box so that each person's age
+    can be entered, we provide a combo box to allow their addresses to be
+    classified as "Home", "Work" or "Other".
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The class provides a constructor, a slot to keep the buttons up to date,
+    and a private function to set up the model:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/combowidgetmapper/window.h Window definition
+
+    In addition to the QDataWidgetMapper object and the controls used to make
+    up the user interface, we use a QStandardItemModel to hold our data and
+    a QStringListModel to hold information about the types of address that
+    can be applied to each person's data.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor of the \c Window class can be explained in three parts.
+    In the first part, we set up the widgets used for the user interface:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/combowidgetmapper/window.cpp Set up widgets
+
+    Note that we set up the mapping the combo box in the same way as for other
+    widgets, but that we apply its own model to it so that it will display
+    data from its own model, the \c typeModel, rather than from the model
+    containing data about each person.
+
+    Next, we set up the widget mapper, relating each input widget to a column
+    in the model specified by the call to \l{QDataWidgetMapper::}{setModel()}:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/combowidgetmapper/window.cpp Set up the mapper
+
+    For the combo box, we pass an extra argument to tell the widget mapper
+    which property to relate to values from the model. As a result, the user
+    is able to select an item from the combo box, and the corresponding
+    value stored in the widget's \c currentIndex property will be stored in
+    the model.
+
+    \omit
+    However, we also set a delegate on the mapper. As with \l{Delegate Classes},
+    this changes the way that data is presented to the user. In this case, the
+    delegate acts as a proxy between the mapper and the input widgets,
+    translating the data into a suitable form for the combo box but not
+    interfering with the other input widgets. The implementation is shown later.
+    \endomit
+
+    The rest of the constructor is very similar to that of the
+    \l{Simple Widget Mapper Example}:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/combowidgetmapper/window.cpp Set up connections and layouts
+
+    The model is initialized in the window's \c{setupModel()} function. Here,
+    we create a standard model with 5 rows and 3 columns. In each row, we
+    insert a name, address, and a value that indicates the type of address.
+    The address types are stored in a string list model.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/combowidgetmapper/window.cpp Set up the model
+
+    As we insert each row into the model, like a record in a database, we
+    store values that correspond to items in \c typeModel for each person's
+    address type. When the widget mapper reads these values from the final
+    column of each row, it will need to use them as references to values in
+    \c typeModel, as shown in the following diagram. This is where the
+    delegate is used.
+
+    \image widgetmapper-combo-mapping.png
+
+    We show the implementation of the \c{updateButtons()} slot for
+    completeness:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/combowidgetmapper/window.cpp Slot for updating the buttons
+
+    \omit
+    \section1 Delegate Class Definition and Implementation
+
+    The delegate we use to mediate interaction between the widget mapper and
+    the input widgets is a small QItemDelegate subclass:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/combowidgetmapper/delegate.h Delegate class definition
+
+    This provides implementations of the two standard functions used to pass
+    data between editor widgets and the model (see the \l{Delegate Classes}
+    documentation for a more general description of these functions).
+
+    Since we only provide an empty implementation of the constructor, we
+    concentrate on the other two functions.
+
+    The \l{QItemDelegate::}{setEditorData()} implementation takes the data
+    referred to by the model index supplied and processes it according to
+    the presence of a \c currentIndex property in the editor widget:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/combowidgetmapper/delegate.cpp setEditorData implementation
+
+    If, like QComboBox, the editor widget has this property, it is set using
+    the value from the model. Since we are passing around QVariant values,
+    the strings stored in the model are automatically converted to the integer
+    values needed for the \c currentIndex property.
+
+    As a result, instead of showing "0", "1" or "2" in the combo box, one of
+    its predefined set of items is shown. We call QItemDelegate::setEditorData()
+    for widgets without the \c currentIndex property.
+
+    The \l{QItemDelegate::}{setModelData()} implementation performs the reverse
+    process, taking the value stored in the widget's \c currentIndex property
+    and storing it back in the model:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/combowidgetmapper/delegate.cpp setModelData implementation
+    \endomit
+
+    \section1 Summary and Further Reading
+
+    The use of a separate model for the combo box provides a menu of choices
+    that are separate from the data stored in the main model. Using a named
+    mapping that relates the combo box's \c currentIndex property to a column
+    in the model effectively allows us to store a look-up value in the model.
+
+    However, when reading the model outside the context of the widget mapper,
+    we need to know about the \c typeModel to make sense of these look-up
+    values. It would be useful to be able to store both the data and the
+    choices held by the \c typeModel in one place.
+    This is covered by the \l{SQL Widget Mapper Example}.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/completer.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/completer.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f47ba07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/completer.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,255 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example tools/completer
+    \title Completer Example
+
+    The Completer example shows how to provide string-completion facilities
+    for an input widget based on data provided by a model.
+
+    \image completer-example.png
+
+    This example uses a custom item model, \c DirModel, and a QCompleter object.
+    QCompleter is a class that provides completions based on an item model. The
+    type of model, the completion mode, and the case sensitivity can be
+    selected using combo boxes.
+
+    \section1 The Resource File
+
+    The Completer example requires a resource file in order to store the
+    \e{countries.txt} and \e{words.txt}. The resource file contains the
+    following code:
+
+    \quotefile examples/tools/completer/completer.qrc
+
+    \section1 DirModel Class Definition
+
+    The \c DirModel class is a subclass of QDirModel, which provides a data
+    model for the local filesystem.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/dirmodel.h 0
+
+    This class only has a constructor and a \c data() function as it is only
+    created to enable \c data() to return the entire file path for the
+    display role, unlike \l{QDirModel}'s \c data() function that only returns
+    the folder and not the drive label. This is further explained in
+    \c DirModel's implementation.
+
+    \section1 DirModel Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor for the \c DirModel class is used to pass \a parent to
+    QDirModel.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/dirmodel.cpp 0
+
+    As mentioned earlier, the \c data() function is reimplemented in order to
+    get it to return the entire file parth for the display role. For example,
+    with a QDirModel, you will see "Program Files" in the view. However, with
+    \c DirModel, you will see "C:\\Program Files".
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/dirmodel.cpp 1
+
+    The screenshots below illustrate this difference:
+
+    \table
+    \row \o \inlineimage completer-example-qdirmodel.png
+         \o \inlineimage completer-example-dirmodel.png
+    \endtable
+
+    The Qt::EditRole, which QCompleter uses to look for matches, is left
+    unchanged.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    The \c MainWindow class is a subclass of QMainWindow and implements four
+    private slots - \c about(), \c changeCase(), \c changeMode(), and
+    \c changeModel().
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    Within the \c MainWindow class, we have two private functions:
+    \c createMenu() and \c modelFromFile(). We also declare the private widgets
+    needed - three QComboBox objects, a QCheckBox, a QCompleter, a QLabel, and
+    a QLineEdit.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.h 1
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor of \c MainWindow constructs a \c MainWindow with a parent
+    widget and initializes the private members. The \c createMenu() function
+    is then invoked.
+
+    We set up three QComboBox objects, \c modelComb, \c modeCombo and
+    \c caseCombo. By default, the \c modelCombo is set to QDirModel,
+    the \c modeCombo is set to "Filtered Popup" and the \c caseCombo is set
+    to "Case Insensitive".
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    The \c wrapCheckBox is then set up. This \c checkBox determines if the
+    \c{completer}'s \l{QCompleter::setWrapAround()}{setWrapAround()} property
+    is enabled or disabled.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    We instantiate \c contentsLabel and set its size policy to
+    \l{QSizePolicy::Fixed}{fixed}. The combo boxes' \l{QComboBox::activated()}
+    {activated()} signals are then connected to their respective slots.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    The \c lineEdit is set up and then we arrange all the widgets using a
+    QGridLayout. The \c changeModel() function is called, to initialize the
+    \c completer.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+    The \c createMenu() function is used to instantiate the QAction objects
+    needed to fill the \c fileMenu and \c helpMenu. The actions'
+    \l{QAction::triggered()}{triggered()} signals are connected to their
+    respective slots.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+    The \c modelFromFile() function accepts the \a fileName of a file and
+    processes it depending on its contents.
+
+    We first validate the \c file to ensure that it can be opened in
+    QFile::ReadOnly mode. If this is unsuccessful, the function returns an
+    empty QStringListModel.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 5
+
+    The mouse cursor is then overriden with Qt::WaitCursor before we fill
+    a QStringList object, \c words, with the contents of \c file. Once this
+    is done, we restore the mouse cursor.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 6
+
+    As mentioned earlier, the resources file contains two files -
+    \e{countries.txt} and \e{words.txt}. If the \c file read is \e{words.txt},
+    we return a QStringListModel with \c words as its QStringList and
+    \c completer as its parent.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 7
+
+    If the \c file read is \e{countries.txt}, then we require a
+    QStandardItemModel with \c words.count() rows, 2 columns, and \c completer
+    as its parent.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 8
+
+    A standard line in \e{countries.txt} is:
+    \quotation
+        Norway                          NO
+    \endquotation
+
+    Hence, to populate the QStandardItemModel object, \c m, we have to
+    split the country name and its symbol. Once this is done, we return
+    \c m.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 9
+
+    The \c changeMode() function sets the \c{completer}'s mode, depending on
+    the value of \c index.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 10
+
+    The \c changeModel() function changes the item model used based on the
+    model selected by the user.
+
+    A \c switch statement is used to change the item model based on the index
+    of \c modelCombo. If \c case is 0, we use an unsorted QDirModel, providing
+    us with a file path excluding the drive label.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 11
+
+    Note that we create the model with \c completer as the parent as this
+    allows us to replace the model with a new model. The \c completer will
+    ensure that the old one is deleted the moment a new model is assigned
+    to it.
+
+    If \c case is 1, we use the \c DirModel we defined earlier, resulting in
+    full paths for the files.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 12
+
+    When \c case is 2, we attempt to complete names of countries. This requires
+    a QTreeView object, \c treeView. The country names are extracted from
+    \e{countries.txt} and set the popup used to display completions to
+    \c treeView.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 13
+
+    The screenshot below shows the Completer with the country list model.
+
+    \image completer-example-country.png
+
+    If \c case is 3, we attempt to complete words. This is done using a
+    QStringListModel that contains data extracted from \e{words.txt}. The
+    model is sorted \l{QCompleter::CaseInsensitivelySortedModel}
+    {case insensitively}.
+
+    The screenshot below shows the Completer with the word list model.
+
+    \image completer-example-word.png
+
+    Once the model type is selected, we call the \c changeMode() function and
+    the \c changeCase() function and set the wrap option accordingly. The
+    \c{wrapCheckBox}'s \l{QCheckBox::clicked()}{clicked()} signal is connected
+    to the \c{completer}'s \l{QCompleter::setWrapAround()}{setWrapAround()}
+    slot.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 14
+
+    The \c about() function provides a brief description about the example.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/mainwindow.cpp 15
+
+    \section1 \c main() Function
+
+    The \c main() function instantiates QApplication and \c MainWindow and
+    invokes the \l{QWidget::show()}{show()} function.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/completer/main.cpp 0
+    */
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/complexpingpong.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/complexpingpong.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dd05a41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/complexpingpong.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example dbus/complexpingpong
+    \title Complex Ping Pong Example
+
+    The Complex Ping Pong example improves on the \l{D-Bus Ping Pong Example} by providing
+    a more useful demonstration of D-Bus interfaces.
+
+    \quotefile doc/src/snippets/complexpingpong-example.qdoc
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/concentriccircles.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/concentriccircles.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7c36b0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/concentriccircles.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,245 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example painting/concentriccircles
+    \title Concentric Circles Example
+
+    The Concentric Circles example shows the improved rendering
+    quality that can be obtained using floating point precision and
+    anti-aliasing when drawing custom widgets. The example also shows
+    how to do simple animations.
+
+    The application's main window displays several widgets which are
+    drawn using the various combinations of precision and
+    anti-aliasing.
+
+    \image concentriccircles-example.png
+
+    Anti-aliasing is one of QPainter's render hints. The
+    QPainter::RenderHints are used to specify flags to QPainter that
+    may, or may not, be respected by any given
+    engine. QPainter::Antialiasing indicates that the engine should
+    anti-alias the edges of primitives if possible, i.e. put
+    additional pixels around the original ones to smooth the edges.
+
+    The difference between floating point precision and integer
+    precision is a matter of accuracy, and is visible in the
+    application's main window: Even though the logic that is
+    calculating the circles' geometry is the same, floating points
+    ensure that the white spaces between each circle are of the same
+    size, while integers make two and two circles appear as if they
+    belong together. The reason is that the integer based precision
+    rely on rounding off non-integer calculations.
+
+    The example consists of two classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c CircleWidget is a custom widget which renders several animated
+       concentric circles.
+    \o \c Window is the application's main window displaying four \c
+       {CircleWidget}s drawn using different combinations of precision
+       and aliasing.
+    \endlist
+
+    First we will review the CircleWidget class, then we will take a
+    look at the Window class.
+
+    \section1 CircleWidget Class Definition
+
+    The CircleWidget class inherits QWidget, and is a custom widget
+    which renders several animated concentric circles.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/concentriccircles/circlewidget.h 0
+
+    We declare the \c floatBased and \c antialiased variables to hold
+    whether an instance of the class should be rendered with integer
+    or float based precision, and whether the rendering should be
+    anti-aliased or not. We also declare functions setting each of
+    these variables.
+
+    In addition we reimplement the QWidget::paintEvent() function to
+    apply the various combinations of precision and anti-aliasing when
+    rendering, and to support the animation. We reimplement the
+    QWidget::minimumSizeHint() and QWidget::sizeHint() functions to
+    give the widget a reasonable size within our application.
+
+    We declare the private \c nextAnimationFrame() slot, and the
+    associated \c frameNo variable holding the number of "animation
+    frames" for the widget, to facilitate the animation.
+
+    \section1 CircleWidget Class Implementation
+
+    In the constructor we make the widget's rendering integer based
+    and aliased by default:
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/concentriccircles/circlewidget.cpp 0
+
+    We initialize the widget's \c frameNo variable, and set the
+    widget's background color using the QWidget::setBackgroundColor()
+    function which takes a \l {QPalette::ColorRole}{color role} as
+    argument; the QPalette::Base color role is typically white.
+
+    Then we set the widgets size policy using the
+    QWidget::setSizePolicy() function. QSizePolicy::Expanding means
+    that the widget's \l {QWidget::sizeHint()}{sizeHint()} is a
+    sensible size, but that the widget can be shrunk and still be
+    useful. The widget can also make use of extra space, so it should
+    get as much space as possible.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/concentriccircles/circlewidget.cpp 1
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/concentriccircles/circlewidget.cpp 2
+
+    The public \c setFloatBased() and \c setAntialiased() functions
+    update the widget's rendering preferences, i.e. whether the widget
+    should be rendered with integer or float based precision, and
+    whether the rendering should be anti-aliased or not.
+
+    The functions also generate a paint event by calling the
+    QWidget::update() function, forcing a repaint of the widget with
+    the new rendering preferences.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/concentriccircles/circlewidget.cpp 3
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/concentriccircles/circlewidget.cpp 4
+
+    The default implementations of the QWidget::minimumSizeHint() and
+    QWidget::sizeHint() functions return invalid sizes if there is no
+    layout for the widget, otherwise they return the layout's minimum and
+    preferred size, respectively.
+
+    We reimplement the functions to give the widget minimum and
+    preferred sizes which are reasonable within our application.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/concentriccircles/circlewidget.cpp 5
+
+    The nextAnimationFrame() slot simply increments the \c frameNo
+    variable's value, and calls the QWidget::update() function which
+    schedules a paint event for processing when Qt returns to the main
+    event loop.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/concentriccircles/circlewidget.cpp 6
+
+    A paint event is a request to repaint all or part of the
+    widget. The \c paintEvent() function is an event handler that can
+    be reimplemented to receive the widget's paint events. We
+    reimplement the event handler to apply the various combinations of
+    precision and anti-aliasing when rendering the widget, and to
+    support the animation.
+
+    First, we create a QPainter for the widget, and set its
+    antialiased flag to the widget's preferred aliasing. We also
+    translate the painters coordinate system, preparing to draw the
+    widget's cocentric circles. The translation ensures that the
+    center of the circles will be equivalent to the widget's center.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/concentriccircles/circlewidget.cpp 7
+
+    When painting a circle, we use the number of "animation frames" to
+    determine the alpha channel of the circle's color. The alpha
+    channel specifies the color's transparency effect, 0 represents a
+    fully transparent color, while 255 represents a fully opaque
+    color.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/concentriccircles/circlewidget.cpp 8
+
+    If the calculated alpha channel is fully transparent, we don't
+    draw anything since that would be equivalent to drawing a white
+    circle on a white background. Instead we skip to the next circle
+    still creating a white space. If the calculated alpha channel is
+    fully opaque, we set the pen (the QColor passed to the QPen
+    constructor is converted into the required QBrush by default) and
+    draw the circle. If the widget's preferred precision is float
+    based, we specify the circle's bounding rectangle using QRectF and
+    double values, otherwise we use QRect and integers.
+
+    The animation is controlled by the public \c nextAnimationFrame()
+    slot: Whenever the \c nextAnimationFrame() slot is called the
+    number of frames is incremented and a paint event is
+    scheduled. Then, when the widget is repainted, the alpha-blending
+    of the circles' colors change and the circles appear as animated.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The Window class inherits QWidget, and is the application's main
+    window rendering four \c {CircleWidget}s using different
+    combinations of precision and aliasing.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/concentriccircles/window.h 0
+
+    We declare the various components of the main window, i.e the text
+    labels and a double array that will hold reference to the four \c
+    {CircleWidget}s. In addition we declare the private \c
+    createLabel() function to simplify the constructor.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/concentriccircles/window.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor, we first create the various labels and put
+    them in a QGridLayout.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/concentriccircles/window.cpp 1
+
+    Then we create a QTimer. The QTimer class is a high-level
+    programming interface for timers, and provides repetitive and
+    single-shot timers.
+
+    We create a timer to facilitate the animation of our concentric
+    circles; when we create the four CircleWidget instances (and add
+    them to the layout), we connect the QTimer::timeout() signal to
+    each of the widgets' \c nextAnimationFrame() slots.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/concentriccircles/window.cpp 2
+
+    Before we set the layout and window title for our main window, we
+    make the timer start with a timeout interval of 100 milliseconds,
+    using the QTimer::start() function. That means that the
+    QTimer::timeout() signal will be emitted, forcing a repaint of the
+    four \c {CircleWidget}s, every 100 millisecond which is the reason
+    the circles appear as animated.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/concentriccircles/window.cpp 3
+
+    The private \c createLabel() function is implemented to simlify
+    the constructor.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/configdialog.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/configdialog.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..afb1c5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/configdialog.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example dialogs/configdialog
+    \title Config Dialog Example
+
+    The Config Dialog examples shows how a configuration dialog can be created by
+    using an icon view with a stacked widget.
+
+    \image configdialog-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/containerextension.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/containerextension.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a4fbcea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/containerextension.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,518 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example designer/containerextension
+    \title Container Extension Example
+
+    The Container Extension example shows how to create a custom
+    multi-page plugin for Qt Designer using the
+    QDesignerContainerExtension class.
+
+    \image containerextension-example.png
+
+    To provide a custom widget that can be used with \QD, we need to
+    supply a self-contained implementation. In this example we use a
+    custom multi-page widget designed to show the container extension
+    feature.
+
+    An extension is an object which modifies the behavior of \QD. The
+    QDesignerContainerExtension enables \QD to manage and manipulate a
+    custom multi-page widget, i.e. adding and deleting pages to the
+    widget.
+
+    There are four available types of extensions in \QD:
+
+    \list
+        \o QDesignerMemberSheetExtension  provides an extension that allows
+           you to manipulate a widget's member functions which is displayed
+           when configuring connections using Qt Designer's mode for editing
+           signals and slots.
+        \o QDesignerPropertySheetExtension provides an extension that
+           allows you to manipulate a widget's properties which is displayed
+           in Qt Designer's property editor.
+        \o QDesignerTaskMenuExtension provides an extension that allows
+           you to add custom menu entries to \QD's task menu.
+        \o QDesignerContainerExtension provides an extension that allows
+           you to add (and delete) pages to a multi-page container plugin
+           in \QD.
+    \endlist
+
+    You can use all the extensions following the same pattern as in
+    this example, only replacing the respective extension base
+    class. For more information, see the \l {QtDesigner Module}.
+
+    The Container Extension example consists of four classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c MultiPageWidget is a custom container widget that lets the user
+       manipulate and populate its pages, and navigate among these
+       using a combobox.
+    \o \c MultiPageWidgetPlugin exposes the \c MultiPageWidget class
+       to \QD.
+    \o \c MultiPageWidgetExtensionFactory creates a
+       \c MultiPageWidgetContainerExtension object.
+    \o \c MultiPageWidgetContainerExtension provides the container
+       extension.
+    \endlist
+
+    The project file for custom widget plugins needs some additional
+    information to ensure that they will work within \QD. For example,
+    custom widget plugins rely on components supplied with \QD, and
+    this must be specified in the project file that we use. We will
+    first take a look at the plugin's project file.
+
+    Then we will continue by reviewing the \c MultiPageWidgetPlugin
+    class, and take a look at the \c MultiPageWidgetExtensionFactory
+    and \c MultiPageWidgetContainerExtension classes. Finally, we will
+    take a quick look at the \c MultiPageWidget class definition.
+
+    \section1 The Project File: containerextension.pro
+
+    The project file must contain some additional information to
+    ensure that the plugin will work as expected:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/containerextension.pro 0
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/containerextension.pro 1
+
+    The \c TEMPLATE variable's value makes \c qmake create the custom
+    widget as a library. Later, we will ensure that the widget will be
+    recognized as a plugin by Qt by using the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro
+    to export the relevant widget information.
+
+    The \c CONFIG variable contains two values, \c designer and \c
+    plugin:
+
+    \list
+        \o \c designer: Since custom widgets plugins rely on components
+           supplied with \QD, this value ensures that our plugin links against
+           \QD's library (\c libQtDesigner.so).
+
+        \o \c plugin: We also need to ensure that \c qmake considers the
+           custom widget a \e plugin library.
+    \endlist
+
+    When Qt is configured to build in both debug and release modes,
+    \QD will be built in release mode.  When this occurs, it is
+    necessary to ensure that plugins are also built in release
+    mode. For that reason we add a \c debug_and_release value to the
+    \c CONFIG variable. Otherwise, if a plugin is built in a mode that
+    is incompatible with \QD, it won't be loaded and installed.
+
+    The header and source files for the widget are declared in the
+    usual way:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/containerextension.pro 2
+
+    We provide an implementation of the plugin interface so that \QD
+    can use the custom widget. In this particular example we also
+    provide implementations of the container extension interface and
+    the extension factory.
+
+    It is important to ensure that the plugin is installed in a
+    location that is searched by \QD. We do this by specifying a
+    target path for the project and adding it to the list of items to
+    install:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_containerextension.qdoc 0
+
+    The container extension is created as a library, and will be
+    installed alongside the other \QD plugins when the project is
+    installed (using \c{make install} or an equivalent installation
+    procedure).
+
+    Note that if you want the plugins to appear in a Visual Studio
+    integration, the plugins must be built in release mode and their
+    libraries must be copied into the plugin directory in the install
+    path of the integration (for an example, see \c {C:/program
+    files/trolltech as/visual studio integration/plugins}).
+
+    For more information about plugins, see the \l {How to Create Qt
+    Plugins} documentation.
+
+    \section1 MultiPageWidgetPlugin Class Definition
+
+    The \c MultiPageWidgetPlugin class exposes the \c MultiPageWidget
+    class to \QD. Its definition is similar to the \l
+    {designer/customwidgetplugin}{Custom Widget Plugin} example's
+    plugin class which is explained in detail. The parts of the class
+    definition that is specific to this particular custom widget is
+    the class name and a couple of private slots:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.h 0
+
+    The plugin class provides \QD with basic information about our
+    plugin, such as its class name and its include file. Furthermore
+    it knows how to create instances of the \c MultiPageWidget widget.
+    \c MultiPageWidgetPlugin also defines the \l
+    {QDesignerCustomWidgetInterface::initialize()}{initialize()}
+    function which is called after the plugin is loaded into \QD. The
+    function's QDesignerFormEditorInterface parameter provides the
+    plugin with a gateway to all of \QD's API's.
+
+    In the case of a multipage widget such as ours, we must also implement
+    two private slots, currentIndexChanged() and pageTitleChanged(),
+    to be able to update \QD's property editor whenever the user views
+    another page or changes one of the page titles. To be able to give
+    each page their own title, we have chosen to use the
+    QWidget::windowTitle property to store the page title (for more
+    information see the MultiPageWidget class \l
+    {designer/containerextension/multipagewidget.cpp}{implementation}). Note
+    that currently there is no way of adding a custom property (e.g.,
+    a page title) to the pages without using a predefined property as
+    placeholder.
+
+    The \c MultiPageWidgetPlugin class inherits from both QObject and
+    QDesignerCustomWidgetInterface. It is important to remember, when
+    using multiple inheritance, to ensure that all the interfaces
+    (i.e. the classes that doesn't inherit Q_OBJECT) are made known to
+    the meta object system using the Q_INTERFACES() macro. This
+    enables \QD to use \l qobject_cast() to query for supported
+    interfaces using nothing but a QObject pointer.
+
+    \section1 MultiPageWidgetPlugin Class Implementation
+
+    The MultiPageWidgetPlugin class implementation is in most parts
+    equivalent to the \l {designer/customwidgetplugin}{Custom Widget
+    Plugin} example's plugin class:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.cpp 0
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.cpp 3
+
+    One of the functions that differ is the isContainer() function
+    which returns true in this example since our custom widget is
+    intended to be used as a container.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.cpp 1
+
+    Another function that differ is the function creating our custom widget:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.cpp 2
+
+    In addition to create and return the widget, we connect our custom
+    container widget's currentIndexChanged() signal to the plugin's
+    currentIndexChanged() slot to ensure that \QD's property editor is
+    updated whenever the user views another page. We also connect the
+    widget's pageTitleChanged() signal to the plugin's
+    pageTitleChanged() slot.
+
+    The currentIndexChanged() slot is called whenever our custom
+    widget's currentIndexChanged() \e signal is emitted, i.e. whenever
+    the user views another page:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.cpp 8
+
+    First, we retrieve the object emitting the signal using the
+    QObject::sender() and qobject_cast() functions. If it's called in
+    a slot activated by a signal, QObject::sender() returns a pointer
+    to the object that sent the signal; otherwise it returns 0.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.cpp 9
+
+    Once we have the widget we can update the property editor. \QD
+    uses the QDesignerPropertySheetExtension class to feed its
+    property editor, and whenever a widget is selected in its
+    workspace, Qt Designer will query for the widget's property sheet
+    extension and update the property editor.
+
+    So what we want to achieve is to notify \QD that our widget's \e
+    internal selection has changed: First we use the static
+    QDesignerFormWindowInterface::findFormWindow() function to
+    retrieve the QDesignerFormWindowInterface object containing the
+    widget. The QDesignerFormWindowInterface class allows you to query
+    and manipulate form windows appearing in Qt Designer's
+    workspace. Then, all we have to do is to emit its \l
+    {QDesignerFormWindowInterface::emitSelectionChanged()}{emitSelectionChanged()}
+    signal, forcing an update of the property editor.
+
+    When changing a page title a generic refresh of the property
+    editor is not enough because it is actually the page's property
+    extension that needs to be updated. For that reason we need to
+    access the QDesignerPropertySheetExtension object for the page
+    which title we want to change. The QDesignerPropertySheetExtension
+    class also allows you to manipulate a widget's properties, but to
+    get hold of the extension we must first retrieve access to \QD's
+    extension manager:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.cpp 10
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.cpp 11
+
+    Again we first retrieve the widget emitting the signal, using the
+    QObject::sender() and qobject_cast() functions. Then we retrieve
+    the current page from the widget that emitted the signal, and we
+    use the static QDesignerFormWindowInterface::findFormWindow()
+    function to retrieve the form containing our widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.cpp 12
+
+    Now that we have the form window, the QDesignerFormWindowInterface
+    class provides the \l
+    {QDesignerFormWindowInterface::core()}{core()} function which
+    returns the current QDesignerFormEditorInterface object. The
+    QDesignerFormEditorInterface class allows you to access Qt
+    Designer's various components. In particular, the
+    QDesignerFormEditorInterface::extensionManager() function returns
+    a reference to the current extension manager.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.cpp 13
+
+    Once we have the extension manager we can update the extension
+    sheet: First we retrieve the property extension for the page which
+    title we want to change, using the qt_extension() function.  Then
+    we retrieve the index for the page title using the
+    QDesignerPropertySheetExtension::indexOf() function. As previously
+    mentioned, we have chosen to use the QWidget::windowTitle property
+    to store the page title (for more information see the
+    MultiPageWidget class \l
+    {designer/containerextension/multipagewidget.cpp}{implementation}).
+    Finally, we implicitly force an update of the page's property
+    sheet by calling the the
+    QDesignerPropertySheetExtension::setChanged() function.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.cpp 4
+
+    Note also the initialize() function: The \c initialize() function
+    takes a QDesignerFormEditorInterface object as argument.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.cpp 5
+
+    When creating extensions associated with custom widget plugins, we
+    need to access \QD's current extension manager which we retrieve
+    from the QDesignerFormEditorInterface parameter.
+
+    In addition to allowing you to manipulate a widget's properties,
+    the QExtensionManager class provides extension management
+    facilities for \QD. Using \QD's current extension manager you can
+    retrieve the extension for a given object. You can also register
+    and unregister an extension for a given object. Remember that an
+    extension is an object which modifies the behavior of \QD.
+
+    When registrering an extension, it is actually the associated
+    extension factory that is registered. In \QD, extension factories
+    are used to look up and create named extensions as they are
+    required. So, in this example, the container extension itself is
+    not created until \QD must know whether the associated widget is a
+    container, or not.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.cpp 6
+
+    We create a \c MultiPageWidgetExtensionFactory object that we
+    register using \QD's current \l {QExtensionManager}{extension
+    manager} retrieved from the QDesignerFormEditorInterface
+    parameter. The first argument is the newly created factory and the
+    second argument is an extension identifier which is a string. The
+    \c Q_TYPEID() macro simply convert the string into a
+    QLatin1String.
+
+    The \c MultiPageWidgetExtensionFactory class is a subclass of
+    QExtensionFactory. When \QD must know whether a widget is a
+    container, or not, \QD's extension manager will run through all
+    its registered factories invoking the first one which is able to
+    create a container extension for that widget. This factory will in
+    turn create a \c MultiPageWidgetExtension object.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.cpp 7
+
+    Finally, take a look at the \c domXml() function. This function
+    includes default settings for the widget in the standard XML
+    format used by \QD. In this case, we specify the container's first
+    page; any inital pages of a multi-page widget must be specified
+    within this function.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetplugin.cpp 14
+
+    Remember to use the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro to export the
+    MultiPageWidgetPlugin class for use with Qt's plugin handling
+    classes: This macro ensures that \QD can access and construct the
+    custom widget. Without this macro, there is no way for \QD to use
+    the widget.
+
+    \section1 MultiPageWidgetExtensionFactory Class Definition
+
+    The \c MultiPageWidgetExtensionFactory class inherits QExtensionFactory
+    which provides a standard extension factory for \QD.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetextensionfactory.h 0
+
+    The subclass's purpose is to reimplement the
+    QExtensionFactory::createExtension() function, making it able to
+    create a \c MultiPageWidget container extension.
+
+
+    \section1 MultiPageWidgetExtensionFactory Class Implementation
+
+    The class constructor simply calls the QExtensionFactory base
+    class constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetextensionfactory.cpp 0
+
+    As described above, the factory is invoked when \QD must know
+    whether the associated widget is a container, or not.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetextensionfactory.cpp 1
+
+    \QD's behavior is the same whether the requested extension is
+    associated with a container, a member sheet, a property sheet or a
+    task menu: Its extension manager runs through all its registered
+    extension factories calling \c createExtension() for each until
+    one responds by creating the requested extension.
+
+    So the first thing we do in \c
+    MultiPageWidgetExtensionFactory::createExtension() is to check if
+    the QObject, for which the extension is requested, is in fact a \c
+    MultiPageWidget object. Then we check if the requested extension
+    is a container extension.
+
+    If the object is a MultiPageWidget requesting a container
+    extension, we create and return a \c MultiPageWidgetExtension
+    object. Otherwise, we simply return a null pointer, allowing \QD's
+    extension manager to continue its search through the registered
+    factories.
+
+
+    \section1 MultiPageWidgetContainerExtension Class Definition
+
+    The \c MultiPageWidgetContainerExtension class inherits
+    QDesignerContainerExtension which allows you to add (and delete)
+    pages to a multi-page container plugin in \QD.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetcontainerextension.h 0
+
+    It is important to recognize that the QDesignerContainerExtension
+    class only is intended to provide \QD access to your custom
+    multi-page widget's functionality; your custom multi-page widget
+    must implement functionality corresponding to the extension's
+    functions.
+
+    Note also that we implement a constructor that takes \e two
+    arguments: the parent widget, and the \c MultiPageWidget object
+    for which the task menu is requested.
+
+    QDesignerContainerExtension provides a couple of menu entries in
+    \QD's task menu by default, enabling the user to add or delete
+    pages to the associated custom multi-page widget in \QD's
+    workspace.
+
+    \section1 MultiPageWidgetContainerExtension Class Implementation
+
+    In the constructor we save the reference to the \c MultiPageWidget
+    object sent as parameter, i.e the widget associated with the
+    extension. We will need this later to access the custom multi-page
+    widget performing the requested actions.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetcontainerextension.cpp 0
+
+    To fully enable \QD to manage and manipulate your custom
+    multi-page widget, you must reimplement all the functions of
+    QDesignerContainerExtension:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetcontainerextension.cpp 1
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetcontainerextension.cpp 2
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetcontainerextension.cpp 3
+
+    You must reimplement \l
+    {QDesignerContainerExtension::addWidget()}{addWidget()} adding a
+    given page to the container, \l
+    {QDesignerContainerExtension::count()}{count()} returning the
+    number of pages in the container, and \l
+    {QDesignerContainerExtension::currentIndex()}{currentIndex()}
+    returning the index of the currently selected page.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetcontainerextension.cpp 4
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetcontainerextension.cpp 5
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetcontainerextension.cpp 6
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidgetcontainerextension.cpp 7
+
+    You must reimplement \l
+    {QDesignerContainerExtension::insertWidget()}{insertWidget()}
+    adding a given page to the container at a given index, \l
+    {QDesignerContainerExtension::remove()}{remove()} deleting the
+    page at a given index, \l
+    {QDesignerContainerExtension::setCurrentIndex()}{setCurrentIndex()}
+    setting the index of the currently selected page, and finally \l
+    {QDesignerContainerExtension::widget()}{widget()} returning the
+    page at a given index.
+
+    \section1 MultiPageWidget Class Definition
+
+    The MultiPageWidget class is a custom container widget that lets
+    the user manipulate and populate its pages, and navigate among
+    these using a combobox.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/containerextension/multipagewidget.h 0
+
+    The main detail to observe is that your custom multi-page widget
+    must implement functionality corresponding to the
+    QDesignerContainerExtension's member functions since the
+    QDesignerContainerExtension class only is intended to provide Qt
+    Designer access to your custom multi-page widget's functionality.
+
+    In addition, we declare the \c currentIndex and \c pageTitle
+    properties, and their associated set and get functions. By
+    declaring these attributes as properties, we allow \QD to manage
+    them in the same way it manages the properties the MultiPageWidget
+    widget inherits from QWidget and QObject, for example featuring
+    the property editor.
+
+    Note the \c STORED attribute in the declaration of the \c
+    pageTitle property: The \c STORED attribute indicates persistence,
+    i.e. it declares whether the property's value must be remembered
+    when storing an object's state. As mentioned above, we have chosen
+    to store the page title using the QWidget::windowTitle property to
+    be able to give each page their own title. For that reason the \c
+    pageTitle property is a "fake" property, provided for editing
+    purposes, and doesn't need to be stored.
+
+    We must also implement and emit the currentIndexChanged() and
+    pageTitleChanged() signals to ensure that \QD's property editor is
+    updated whenever the user views another page or changes one of the
+    page titles.
+
+    See the MultiPageWidget class \l
+    {designer/containerextension/multipagewidget.cpp}{implementation}
+    for more details.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/context2d.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/context2d.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a45b8bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/context2d.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,353 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example script/context2d
+    \title Context2D Example
+
+    This Qt Script example is an implementation of the Context2D API.
+
+    \image context2d-example.png
+
+    Context2D is part of the specification for the HTML \c{<canvas>}
+    element. It can be used to draw graphics via scripting. A good
+    resource for learning more about the HTML \c{<canvas>} element is
+    the \l{http://developer.mozilla.org/en/docs/HTML:Canvas}{Mozilla Developer Center}.
+
+    \section1 Using The HTML Canvas Element in a Web Browser
+
+    First, let's look at how the \c{<canvas>} element is typically
+    used in a web browser. The following HTML snippet defines a
+    canvas of size 400x400 pixels with id \c{mycanvas}:
+
+    \code
+    <canvas width="400" height="400" id="mycanvas">Fallback content goes here.</canvas>
+    \endcode
+
+    To draw on the canvas, we must first obtain a reference to the
+    DOM element corresponding to the \c{<canvas>} tag and then call
+    the element's getContext() function. The resulting object
+    implements the Context2D API that we use to draw.
+
+    \code
+    <script>
+    var canvas = document.getElementById("mycanvas");
+    var ctx = canvas.getContext("2d");
+
+    // Draw a face
+    ctx.beginPath();
+    ctx.arc(75,75,50,0,Math.PI*2,true); // Outer circle
+    ctx.moveTo(110,75);
+    ctx.arc(75,75,35,0,Math.PI,false);   // Mouth
+    ctx.moveTo(65,65);
+    ctx.arc(60,65,5,0,Math.PI*2,true);  // Left eye
+    ctx.moveTo(95,65);
+    ctx.arc(90,65,5,0,Math.PI*2,true);  // Right eye
+    ctx.stroke();
+    </script>
+    \endcode
+
+    When the page is rendered by a browser that supports the
+    \c{<canvas>} tag, this would be the result:
+
+    \image context2d-example-smileysmile.png
+
+    \section1 Using Qt Script to script a Canvas
+
+    The goal of this example is to be able to evaluate scripts
+    that use the Context2D API, and render the results. Basic
+    interaction (mouse, keyboard) should also be supported.
+    In other words, we want to present scripts with an execution
+    environment that very much resembles that of a web browser. Of
+    course, our environment is only a small subset of what a browser
+    provides; i.e. we don't provide a full DOM API, only what is
+    needed to run "self-contained" Context2D scripts (i.e. scripts
+    that don't depend on other parts of the DOM document).
+
+    Our "Context2D-browser" is set up through the following steps:
+    \list
+    \o Create an Environment.
+    \o Create a Context2D, and a QContext2DCanvas widget to render it.
+    \o Add the canvas object to the environment; this will enable
+       scripts to obtain a reference to it.
+    \o Evaluate scripts in the environment.
+    \endlist
+
+    Once a script has been evaluated, the application handles any
+    timer events and input events that occur subsequently
+    (i.e. forwards events to their associated script targets).
+
+    \section1 The Context2D Class
+
+    The "heart" of this example is the Context2D C++ class that implements
+    the drawing API. Its interface is defined in terms of properties
+    and slots. Note that this class isn't tied to Qt Script in any
+    way.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/context2d.h 0
+
+    The properties define various aspects of the Context2D
+    configuration.
+    
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/context2d.h 1
+
+    The slots define the operations that can be performed.
+    
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/context2d.h 2
+
+    The changed() signal is emitted when the contents of the drawing
+    area has changed, so that clients associated with the Context2D
+    object (i.e. the canvas widget that renders it) are notified.
+
+    \section2 Implementation
+
+    Conveniently enough, the concepts, data structures and operations
+    of the Context2D API map more or less directly to Qt's painting
+    API. Conceptually, all we have to do is initialize a QPainter
+    according to the Context2D properties, and use functions like
+    QPainter::strokePath() to do the painting. Painting is done on a
+    QImage.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/context2d.cpp 0
+
+    The property accessors and most of the slots manipulate the
+    internal Context2D state in some way. For the \c{lineCap}
+    property, Context2D uses a string representation; we therefore
+    have to map it from/to a Qt::PenCapStyle. The \c{lineJoin}
+    property is handled in the same fashion. All the property setters
+    also set a \e{dirty flag} for the property; this is used to
+    decide which aspects of the QPainter that need to be updated
+    before doing the next painting operation.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/context2d.cpp 3
+
+    The implementation of the \c{fillStyle} property is interesting,
+    since the value can be either a string or a \c{CanvasGradient}.
+    We handle this by having the property be of type QVariant,
+    and check the actual type of the value to see how to handle the
+    write.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/context2d.cpp 1
+
+    Context2D does not have a concept of a paint event; painting
+    operations can happen at any time. We would like to be efficient,
+    and not have to call QPainter::begin() and QPainter::end() for
+    every painting operation, since typically many painting operations
+    will follow in quick succession. The implementations of the
+    painting operations use a helper function, beginPainting(), that
+    activates the QPainter if it isn't active already, and updates
+    the state of the QPainter (brush, pen, etc.) so that it reflects
+    the current Context2D state.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/context2d.cpp 2
+
+    The implementation of each painting operation ends by calling
+    scheduleChange(), which will post a zero-timer event if one is
+    not already pending. When the application returns to the event
+    loop later (presumably after all the drawing operations have
+    finished), the timer will trigger, QPainter::end() will be
+    called, and the changed() signal is emitted with the new
+    image as argument. The net effect is that there will typically
+    be only a single (QPainter::begin(), QPainter::end()) pair
+    executed for the full sequence of painting operations.
+
+    \section1 The Canvas Widget
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/qcontext2dcanvas.h 0
+
+    The QContext2DCanvas class provides a widget that renders
+    the contents of a Context2D object. It also provides a
+    minimal scripting API, most notably the getContext() function.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/qcontext2dcanvas.cpp 3
+
+    The constructor connects to the changed() signal of the
+    Context2D object, so that the widget can update itself
+    when it needs to do so. Mouse tracking is enabled so that
+    mouse move events will be received even when no mouse
+    buttons are depressed.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/qcontext2dcanvas.cpp 0
+
+    The getContext() function asks the environment to wrap the
+    Context2D object; the resulting proxy object makes the
+    Context2D API available to scripts.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/qcontext2dcanvas.cpp 1
+
+    The paintEvent() function simply paints the contents that
+    was last received from the Context2D object.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/qcontext2dcanvas.cpp 2
+
+    The canvas widget reimplements mouse and key event handlers, and
+    forwards these events to the scripting environment. The
+    environment will take care of delivering the event to the proper
+    script target, if any.
+
+    \section1 The Environment
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/environment.h 0
+
+    The Environment class provides a scripting environment where a
+    Canvas C++ object can be registered, looked up by ID (name),
+    and where scripts can be evaluated. The environment has a
+    \c{document} property, just like the scripting environment of a
+    web browser, so that scripts can call
+    \c{document.getElementById()} to obtain a reference to a canvas.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/environment.h 1
+
+    The Environment class provides the timer attributes of the DOM
+    Window Object interface. This enables us to support scripts that
+    do animation, for example.
+    
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/environment.h 2
+
+    The scriptError() signal is emitted when evaluation of a script
+    causes a script exception. For example, if a mouse press handler
+    or timeout handler causes an exception, the environment's client(s)
+    will be notified of this and can report the error.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/environment.cpp 0
+
+    The constructor initializes the environment. First it creates
+    the QScriptEngine that will be used to evaluate scripts. It
+    creates the Document object that provides the getElementById()
+    function. Note that the QScriptEngine::ExcludeSuperClassContents
+    flag is specified to avoid the wrapper objects from exposing properties
+    and methods inherited from QObject. Next, the environment wraps
+    a pointer to \e{itself}; this is to prepare for setting this object
+    as the script engine's Global Object. The properties of the standard
+    Global Object are copied, so that these will also be available in
+    our custom Global Object. We also create two self-references to the
+    object; again, this is to provide a minimal level of compabilitity
+    with the scripting environment that web browsers provide.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/environment.cpp 5
+
+    The addCanvas() function adds the given canvas to the list of
+    registered canvas objects. The canvasByName() function looks up
+    a canvas by QObject::objectName(). This function is used to
+    implement the \c{document.getElementById()} script function.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/environment.cpp 1
+
+    The setInterval() and clearInterval() implementations use a QHash
+    to map from timer ID to the QScriptValue that holds the expression
+    to evaluate when the timer is triggered. A helper function,
+    maybeEmitScriptError(), is called after invoking the script handler;
+    it will emit the scriptError() signal if the script engine has an
+    uncaught exception.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/environment.cpp 2
+
+    The toWrapper() functions creates a QScriptValue that wraps the
+    given QObject. Note that the QScriptEngine::PreferExistingWrapperObject
+    flag is specified; this guarantees that a single, unique wrapper
+    object will be returned, even if toWrapper() is called several times
+    with the same argument. This is important, since it is possible that
+    a script can set new properties on the resulting wrapper object (e.g.
+    event handlers like \c{onmousedown}), and we want these to persist.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/environment.cpp 3
+
+    The handleEvent() function determines if there exists a handler
+    for the given event in the environment, and if so, invokes that
+    handler. Since the script expects a DOM event, the Qt C++ event
+    must be converted to a DOM event before it is passed to the
+    script. This mapping is relatively straightforward, but again,
+    we only implement a subset of the full DOM API; just enough to
+    get most scripts to work.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/environment.cpp 4
+
+    The newFakeDomEvent() function is a helper function that creates
+    a new script object and initializes it with default values for
+    the attributes defined in the DOM Event and DOM UIEvent
+    interfaces.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/environment.h 3
+
+    The Document class defines two slots that become available to
+    scripts: getElementById() and getElementsByTagName().
+    When the tag name is "canvas", getElementsByTagName() will
+    return a list of all canvas objects that are registered in
+    the environment.
+
+    \section1 The Application Window
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/window.cpp 0
+
+    The Window constructor creates an Environment object and
+    connects to its scriptError() signal. It then creates a
+    Context2D object, and a QContext2DCanvas widget to hold it.
+    The canvas widget is given the name \c{tutorial}, and added to the
+    environment; scripts can access the canvas by e.g.
+    \c{document.getElementById('tutorial')}.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/window.cpp 1
+
+    The window contains a list widget that is populated with
+    available scripts (read from a \c{scripts/} folder).
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/window.cpp 2
+
+    When an item is selected, the corresponding script is
+    evaluated in the environment.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/window.cpp 3
+
+    When the "Run in Debugger" button is clicked, the Qt Script debugger will
+    automatically be invoked when the first statement of the script is
+    reached. This enables the user to inspect the scripting environment and
+    control further execution of the script; e.g. he can single-step through
+    the script and/or set breakpoints. It is also possible to enter script
+    statements in the debugger's console widget, e.g. to perform custom
+    Context2D drawing operations, interactively.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/context2d/window.cpp 4
+
+    If the evaluation of a script causes an uncaught exception, the Qt Script
+    debugger will automatically be invoked; this enables the user to get an
+    idea of what went wrong.
+
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/customcompleter.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/customcompleter.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8d0404a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/customcompleter.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,201 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example tools/customcompleter
+    \title Custom Completer Example
+
+    The Custom Completer example shows how to provide string-completion
+    facilities for an input widget based on data provided by a model. The
+    completer pops up suggestions for possible words based on the first three
+    characters input by the user and the user's choice of word is inserted
+    into the \c TextEdit using QTextCursor.
+
+    \image customcompleter-example.png
+
+    \section1 Setting Up The Resource File
+
+    The Custom Completer example requires a resource file, \e wordlist.txt,
+    that has a list of words to help QCompleter complete words. This file
+    contains the following:
+
+    \quotefile examples/tools/customcompleter/customcompleter.qrc
+
+    \section1 TextEdit Class Definition
+
+    The \c TextEdit class is a subclass of QTextEdit with a custom
+    \c insertCompletion() slot and it reimplements the
+    \l{QAbstractScrollArea::keyPressEvent()}{keyPressEvent()} and the
+    \l{QWidget::focusInEvent()}{focusInEvent()} functions. \c TextEdit also
+    contains a private function \c textUnderCursor() and a private instance
+    of QCompleter, \c c.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/textedit.h 0
+
+    \section1 TextEdit Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor for \c TextEdit constructs a \c TextEdit with a parent and
+    initializes \c c. The instructions to use the completer is displayed on
+    the \c TextEdit object, using the
+    \l{QTextEdit::setPlainText()}{setPlainText()} function.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/textedit.cpp 0
+
+    In addition, \c TextEdit also includes a default destructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/textedit.cpp 1
+
+    The \c setCompleter() function accepts a \a completer and sets it up.
+    We use \c{if (c)} to check if \c c has been initialized. If it has been
+    initialized, the QObject::disconnect() function is invoked to disconnect
+    the signal from the slot. This is to ensure that no previous completer
+    object is still connected to the slot.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/textedit.cpp 2
+
+    We then instantiate \c c with \a completer and set it as \c{TextEdit}'s
+    widget. The completion mode and case sensitivity are also set and then
+    we connect the \l{QCompleter::activated()}{activated()} signal to the
+    \c insertCompletion() slot.
+
+    The \c completer() function is a getter function that returns \c c.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/textedit.cpp 3
+
+    The completer pops up the options available, based on the contents of
+    \e wordlist.txt, but the text cursor is responsible for filling in the
+    missing characters, according to the user's choice of word.
+
+    Suppose the user inputs "ACT" and accepts the completer's suggestion of
+    "ACTUAL". The \c completion string is then sent to \c insertCompletion()
+    by the completer's \l{QCompleter::activated()}{activated()} signal.
+
+    The \c insertCompletion() function is responsible for completing the word
+    using a QTextCursor object, \c tc. It validates to ensure that the
+    completer's widget is \c TextEdit before using \c tc to insert the extra
+    characters to complete the word.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/textedit.cpp 4
+
+    The figure below illustrates this process:
+
+    \image customcompleter-insertcompletion.png
+
+    \c{completion.length()} = 6
+
+    \c{c->completionPrefix().length()}=3
+
+    The difference between these two values is \c extra, which is 3. This
+    means that the last three characters from the right, "U", "A", and "L",
+    will be inserted by \c tc.
+
+    The \c textUnderCursor() function uses a QTextCursor, \c tc, to select a
+    word under the cursor and return it.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/textedit.cpp 5
+
+    The \c TextEdit class reimplements \l{QWidget::focusInEvent()}
+    {focusInEvent()} function, which is an event handler used to receive
+    keyboard focus events for the widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/textedit.cpp 6
+
+    The \l{QAbstractScrollArea::keyPressEvent()}{keyPressEvent()} is
+    reimplemented to ignore key events like Qt::Key_Enter, Qt::Key_Return,
+    Qt::Key_Escape, Qt::Key_Tab, and Qt::Key_Backtab so the completer can
+    handle them.
+
+    If there is an active completer, we cannot process the shortcut, Ctrl+E.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/textedit.cpp 7
+
+    We also handle other modifiers and shortcuts for which we do not want the
+    completer to respond to.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/textedit.cpp 8
+
+    Finally, we pop up the completer.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    The \c MainWindow class is a subclass of QMainWindow and implements a
+    private slot, \c about(). This class also has two private functions,
+    \c createMenu() and \c modelFromFile() as well as private instances of
+    QCompleter and \c TextEdit.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor constructs a \c MainWindow with a parent and initializes
+    the \c completer. It also instantiates a \c TextEdit and sets its
+    completer. A QStringListModel, obtained from \c modelFromFile(), is used
+    to populate the \c completer. The \c{MainWindow}'s central widget is set
+    to \c TextEdit and its size is set to 500 x 300.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    The \c createMenu() function creates the necessary QAction objects needed
+    for the "File" and "Help" menu and their \l{QAction::triggered()}
+    {triggered()} signals are connected to the \c quit(), \c about(), and
+    \c aboutQt() slots respectively.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    The \c modelFromFile() function accepts a \a fileName and attempts to
+    extract the contents of this file into a QStringListModel. We display the
+    Qt::WaitCursor when we are populating the QStringList, \c words, and
+    restore the mouse cursor when we are done.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    The \c about() function provides a brief description about the Custom
+    Completer example.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+    \section1 \c main() Function
+
+    The \c main() function instantiates \c MainWindow and invokes the
+    \l{QWidget::show()}{show()} function.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customcompleter/main.cpp 0
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/customsortfiltermodel.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/customsortfiltermodel.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5778581
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/customsortfiltermodel.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,303 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/customsortfiltermodel
+    \title Custom Sort/Filter Model Example
+
+    The Custom Sort/Filter Model example illustrates how to subclass
+    QSortFilterProxyModel to perform advanced sorting and filtering.
+
+    \image customsortfiltermodel-example.png Screenshot of the Custom Sort/Filter Model Example
+
+    The QSortFilterProxyModel class provides support for sorting and
+    filtering data passed between another model and a view.
+
+    The model transforms the structure of a source model by mapping
+    the model indexes it supplies to new indexes, corresponding to
+    different locations, for views to use. This approach allows a
+    given source model to be restructured as far as views are
+    concerned, without requiring any transformations on the underlying
+    data and without duplicating the data in memory.
+
+    The Custom Sort/Filter Model example consists of two classes:
+
+    \list
+
+        \o The \c MySortFilterProxyModel class provides a custom proxy
+        model.
+
+        \o The \c Window class provides the main application window,
+        using the custom proxy model to sort and filter a standard
+        item model.
+
+    \endlist
+
+    We will first take a look at the \c MySortFilterProxyModel class
+    to see how the custom proxy model is implemented, then we will
+    take a look at the \c Window class to see how the model is
+    used. Finally we will take a quick look at the \c main() function.
+
+    \section1 MySortFilterProxyModel Class Definition
+
+    The \c MySortFilterProxyModel class inherits the
+    QSortFilterProxyModel class.
+
+    Since QAbstractProxyModel and its subclasses are derived from
+    QAbstractItemModel, much of the same advice about subclassing
+    normal models also applies to proxy models.
+
+    On the other hand, it is worth noting that many of
+    QSortFilterProxyModel's default implementations of functions are
+    written so that they call the equivalent functions in the relevant
+    source model. This simple proxying mechanism may need to be
+    overridden for source models with more complex behavior; in this
+    example we derive from the QSortFilterProxyModel class to ensure
+    that our filter can recognize a valid range of dates, and to
+    control the sorting behavior.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/mysortfilterproxymodel.h 0
+
+    We want to be able to filter our data by specifying a given period
+    of time. For that reason, we implement the custom \c
+    setFilterMinimumDate() and \c setFilterMaximumDate() functions as
+    well as the corresponding \c filterMinimumDate() and \c
+    filterMaximumDate() functions. We reimplement
+    QSortFilterProxyModel's \l
+    {QSortFilterProxyModel::filterAcceptsRow()}{filterAcceptsRow()}
+    function to only accept rows with valid dates, and
+    QSortFilterProxyModel::lessThan() to be able to sort the senders
+    by their email adresses. Finally, we implement a \c dateInRange()
+    convenience function that we will use to determine if a date is
+    valid.
+
+    \section1 MySortFilterProxyModel Class Implementation
+
+    The \c MySortFilterProxyModel constructor is trivial, passing the
+    parent parameter on to the base class constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/mysortfilterproxymodel.cpp 0
+
+    The most interesting parts of the \c MySortFilterProxyModel
+    implementation are the reimplementations of
+    QSortFilterProxyModel's \l
+    {QSortFilterProxyModel::filterAcceptsRow()}{filterAcceptsRow()}
+    and \l {QSortFilterProxyModel::lessThan()}{lessThan()}
+    functions. Let's first take a look at our customized \c lessThan()
+    function.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/mysortfilterproxymodel.cpp 4
+
+    We want to sort the senders by their email adresses. The \l
+    {QSortFilterProxyModel::}{lessThan()} function is used as the <
+    operator when sorting. The default implementation handles a
+    collection of types including QDateTime and String, but in order
+    to be able to sort the senders by their email adresses we must
+    first identify the adress within the given string:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/mysortfilterproxymodel.cpp 6
+
+    We use QRegExp to define a pattern for the adresses we are looking
+    for. The QRegExp::indexIn() function attempts to find a match in
+    the given string and returns the position of the first match, or
+    -1 if there was no match. If the given string contains the
+    pattern, we use QRegExp's \l {QRegExp::cap()}{cap()} function to
+    retrieve the actual adress. The \l {QRegExp::cap()}{cap()}
+    function returns the text captured by the \e nth
+    subexpression. The entire match has index 0 and the parenthesized
+    subexpressions have indexes starting from 1 (excluding
+    non-capturing parentheses).
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/mysortfilterproxymodel.cpp 3
+
+    The \l
+    {QSortFilterProxyModel::filterAcceptsRow()}{filterAcceptsRow()}
+    function, on the other hand, is expected to return true if the
+    given row should be included in the model. In our example, a row
+    is accepted if either the subject or the sender contains the given
+    regular expression, and the date is valid.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/mysortfilterproxymodel.cpp 7
+
+    We use our custom \c dateInRange() function to determine if a date
+    is valid.
+
+    To be able to filter our data by specifying a given period of
+    time, we also implement functions for getting and setting the
+    minimum and maximum dates:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/mysortfilterproxymodel.cpp 1
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/mysortfilterproxymodel.cpp 2
+
+    The get functions, \c filterMinimumDate() and \c
+    filterMaximumDate(), are trivial and implemented as inline
+    function in the header file.
+
+    This completes our custom proxy model. Let's see how we can use it
+    in an application.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The \c CustomFilter class inherits QWidget, and provides this
+    example's main application window:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/window.h 0
+
+    We implement two private slots, \c textFilterChanged() and \c
+    dateFilterChanged(), to respond to the user changing the filter
+    pattern, case sensitivity or any of the dates. In addition, we
+    implement a public \c setSourceModel() convenience function to set
+    up the model/ view relation.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    In this example, we have chosen to create and set the source model
+    in the \c main () function (which we will come back to later). So
+    when constructing the main application window, we assume that a
+    source model already exists and start by creating an instance of
+    our custom proxy model:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/window.cpp 0
+
+    We set the \l
+    {QSortFilterProxyModel::dynamicSortFilter}{dynamicSortFilter}
+    property that holds whether the proxy model is dynamically sorted
+    and filtered. By setting this property to true, we ensure that the
+    model is sorted and filtered whenever the contents of the source
+    model change.
+
+    The main application window shows views of both the source model
+    and the proxy model. The source view is quite simple:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/window.cpp 1
+
+    The QTreeView class provides a default model/view implementation
+    of a tree view; our view implements a tree representation of items
+    in the application's source model.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/window.cpp 2
+
+    The QTreeView class provides a default model/view implementation
+    of a tree view; our view implements a tree representation of items
+    in the application's source model. We add our view widget to a
+    layout that we install on a corresponding group box.
+
+    The proxy model view, on the other hand, contains several widgets
+    controlling the various aspects of transforming the source model's
+    data structure:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/window.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/window.cpp 4
+
+    Note that whenever the user changes one of the filtering options,
+    we must explicitly reapply the filter. This is done by connecting
+    the various editors to functions that update the proxy model.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/window.cpp 5
+
+    The sorting will be handled by the view. All we have to do is to
+    enable sorting for our proxy view by setting the
+    QTreeView::sortingEnabled property (which is false by
+    default). Then we add all the filtering widgets and the proxy view
+    to a layout that we install on a corresponding group box.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/window.cpp 6
+
+    Finally, after putting our two group boxes into another layout
+    that we install on our main application widget, we customize the
+    application window.
+
+    As mentioned above, we create the source model in the \c main ()
+    function, calling the \c Window::setSourceModel() function to make
+    the application use it:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/window.cpp 7
+
+    The QSortFilterProxyModel::setSourceModel() function makes the
+    proxy model process the data in the given model, in this case out
+    mail model. The \l {QAbstractItemView::}{setModel()} that the
+    view widget inherits from the QAbstractItemModel class, sets the
+    model for the view to present. Note that the latter function will
+    also create and set a new selection model.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/window.cpp 8
+
+    The \c textFilterChanged() function is called whenever the user
+    changes the filter pattern or the case sensitivity.
+
+    We first retrieve the preferred syntax (the QRegExp::PatternSyntax
+    enum is used to interpret the meaning of the given pattern), then
+    we determine the preferred case sensitivity. Based on these
+    preferences and the current filter pattern, we set the proxy
+    model's \l {QSortFilterProxyModel::}{filterRegExp} property. The
+    \l {QSortFilterProxyModel::}{filterRegExp} property holds the
+    regular expression used to filter the contents of the source
+    model. Note that calling QSortFilterProxyModel's \l
+    {QSortFilterProxyModel::}{setFilterRegExp()} function also updates
+    the model.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/window.cpp 9
+
+    The \c dateFilterChanged() function is called whenever the user
+    modifies the range of valid dates. We retrieve the new dates from
+    the user interface, and call the corresponding functions (provided
+    by our custom proxy model) to set the proxy model's minimum and
+    maximum dates. As we explained above, calling these functions also
+    updates the model.
+
+    \section1 The Main() Function
+
+    In this example, we have separated the application from the source
+    model by creating the model in the \c main () function. First we
+    create the application, then we create the source model:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/main.cpp 0
+
+    The \c createMailModel() function is a convenience function
+    provided to simplify the constructor. All it does is to create and
+    return a model describing a collection of emails. The model is an
+    instance of the QStandardItemModel class, i.e., a generic model
+    for storing custom data typically used as a repository for
+    standard Qt data types. Each mail description is added to the
+    model using \c addMail(), another convenience function. See \l
+    {itemviews/customsortfiltermodel/main.cpp}{main.cpp} for details.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/customtype.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/customtype.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ffeccc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/customtype.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,157 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example tools/customtype
+    \title Custom Type Example
+
+    The Custom Type example shows how to integrate a custom type into Qt's
+    meta-object system.
+
+    Contents:
+
+    \tableofcontents
+
+    \section1 Overview
+
+    Qt provides a range of standard value types that are used to provide
+    rich and meaningful APIs. These types are integrated with the meta-object
+    system, enabling them to be stored in QVariant objects, written out in
+    debugging information and sent between components in signal-slot
+    communication.
+
+    Custom types can also be integrated with the meta-object system as long as
+    they are written to conform to some simple guidelines. In this example, we
+    introduce a simple \c Message class, we describe how we make it work with
+    QVariant, and we show how it can be extended to generate a printable
+    representation of itself for use in debugging output.
+
+    \section1 The Message Class Definition
+
+    The \c Message class is a simple value class that contains two pieces
+    of information (a QString and a QStringList), each of which can be read
+    using trivial getter functions:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customtype/message.h custom type definition
+
+    The default constructor, copy constructor and destructor are
+    all required, and must be public, if the type is to be integrated into the
+    meta-object system. Other than this, we are free to implement whatever we
+    need to make the type do what we want, so we also include a constructor
+    that lets us set the type's data members.
+
+    To enable the type to be used with QVariant, we declare it using the
+    Q_DECLARE_METATYPE() macro:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customtype/message.h custom type meta-type declaration
+
+    We do not need to write any additional code to accompany this macro.
+
+    To allow us to see a readable description of each \c Message object when it
+    is sent to the debug output stream, we define a streaming operator:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customtype/message.h custom type streaming operator
+
+    This facility is useful if you need to insert tracing statements in your
+    code for debugging purposes.
+
+    \section1 The Message Class Implementation
+
+    The implementation of the default constructor, copy constructor and destructor
+    are straightforward for the \c Message class:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customtype/message.cpp Message class implementation
+
+    The streaming operator is implemented in the following way:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customtype/message.cpp custom type streaming operator
+
+    Here, we want to represent each value depending on how many lines are stored
+    in the message body. We stream text to the QDebug object passed to the
+    operator and return the QDebug object obtained from its maybeSpace() member
+    function; this is described in more detail in the
+    \l{Creating Custom Qt Types#Making the Type Printable}{Creating Custom Qt Types}
+    document.
+
+    We include the code for the getter functions for completeness:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customtype/message.cpp getter functions
+
+    With the type fully defined, implemented, and integrated with the
+    meta-object system, we can now use it.
+
+    \section1 Using the Message 
+
+    In the example's \c{main()} function, we show how a \c Message object can
+    be printed to the console by sending it to the debug stream:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customtype/main.cpp printing a custom type
+
+    You can use the type with QVariant in exactly the same way as you would
+    use standard Qt value types. Here's how to store a value using the
+    QVariant::setValue() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customtype/main.cpp storing a custom value
+
+    Alternatively, the qVariantFromValue() and qVariantSetValue() functions
+    can be used if you are using a compiler without support for member template
+    functions.
+
+    The value can be retrieved using the QVariant::value() member template
+    function:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customtype/main.cpp retrieving a custom value
+
+    Alternatively, the qVariantValue() template function can be used if
+    you are using a compiler without support for member template functions.
+
+    \section1 Further Reading
+
+    The custom \c Message type can also be used with direct signal-slot
+    connections; see the \l{Custom Type Sending Example} for a demonstration
+    of this.
+    To register a custom type for use with queued signals and slots, such as
+    those used in cross-thread communication, see the
+    \l{Queued Custom Type Example}.
+
+    More information on using custom types with Qt can be found in the
+    \l{Creating Custom Qt Types} document.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/customtypesending.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/customtypesending.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d335c28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/customtypesending.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example tools/customtypesending
+    \title Custom Type Sending Example
+
+    The Custom Type Sending example shows how to use a custom type with signals
+    and slots.
+
+    \image customtypesending-example.png
+
+    Contents:
+
+    \tableofcontents
+
+    \section1 Overview
+
+    In the \l{Custom Type Example}, we showed how to integrate custom types
+    with the meta-object system, enabling them to be stored in QVariant
+    objects, written out in debugging information and used in signal-slot
+    communication.
+
+    In this example, we demonstrate that the preparations made to the
+    \c Message class and its declaration with Q_DECLARE_METATYPE() enable it
+    to be used with direct signal-slot connections. We do this by creating
+    a \c Window class containing signals and slots whose signatures include
+    \c Message arguments.
+
+    \section1 The Window Class Definition
+
+    We define a simple \c Window class with a signal and public slot that
+    allow a \c Message object to be sent via a signal-slot connection:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customtypesending/window.h Window class definition
+
+    The window will contain a text editor to show the contents of a message
+    and a push button that the user can click to send a message. To facilitate
+    this, we also define the \c sendMessage() slot. We also keep a \c Message
+    instance in the \c thisMessage private variable which holds the actual
+    message to be sent.
+
+    \section1 The Window Class Implementation
+
+    The \c Window constructor sets up a user interface containing a text
+    editor and a push button.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customtypesending/window.cpp Window constructor
+
+    The button's \l{QPushButton::}{clicked()} signal is connected to the
+    window's \c{sendMessage()} slot, which emits the \c{messageSent(Message)}
+    signal with the \c Message held by the \c thisMessage variable:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customtypesending/window.cpp sending a message
+
+    We implement a slot to allow the message to be received, and this also
+    lets us set the message in the window programatically:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customtypesending/window.cpp receiving a message
+
+    In this function, we simply assign the new message to \c thisMessage
+    and update the text in the editor.
+
+    \section1 Making the Connection
+
+    In the example's \c{main()} function, we perform the connection between
+    two instances of the \c Window class:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/customtypesending/main.cpp main function
+
+    We set the message for the first window and connect the
+    \c{messageSent(Message)} signal from each window to the other's
+    \c{setMessage(Message)} slot. Since the signals and slots mechanism is only
+    concerned with the type, we can simplify the signatures of both the
+    signal and slot when we make the connection.
+
+    When the user clicks on the \gui{Send message} button in either window,
+    the message shown will be emitted in a signal that the other window will
+    receive and display.
+
+    \section1 Further Reading
+
+    Although the custom \c Message type can be used with direct signals and
+    slots, an additional registration step needs to be performed if you want
+    to use it with queued signal-slot connections. See the
+    \l{Queued Custom Type Example} for details.
+
+    More information on using custom types with Qt can be found in the
+    \l{Creating Custom Qt Types} document.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/customwidgetplugin.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/customwidgetplugin.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..31ad65b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/customwidgetplugin.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,252 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example designer/customwidgetplugin
+    \title Custom Widget Plugin Example
+
+    The Custom Widget example shows how to create a custom widget plugin for \QD.
+
+    \image customwidgetplugin-example.png
+
+    In this example, the custom widget used is based on the
+    \l{widgets/analogclock}{Analog Clock example}, and does not provide any custom
+    signals or slots.
+
+    \section1 Preparation
+
+    To provide a custom widget that can be used with \QD, we need to supply a
+    self-contained implementation and provide a plugin interface. In this
+    example, we reuse the \l{widgets/analogclock}{Analog Clock example} for
+    convenience.
+
+    Since custom widgets plugins rely on components supplied with \QD, the
+    project file that we use needs to contain information about \QD's
+    library components:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.pro 2
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.pro 0
+
+    The \c TEMPLATE variable's value makes \c qmake create the custom
+    widget as a library. Later, we will ensure that the widget will be
+    recognized as a plugin by Qt by using the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro
+    to export the relevant widget information.
+
+    The \c CONFIG variable contains two values, \c designer and \c
+    plugin:
+
+    \list
+
+    \o \c designer: Since custom widgets plugins rely on components
+    supplied with \QD, this value ensures that our plugin links
+    against \QD's library (\c libQtDesigner.so).
+
+    \o \c plugin: We also need to ensure that \c qmake considers the
+    custom widget a plugin library.
+
+    \endlist
+
+    When Qt is configured to build in both debug and release modes,
+    \QD will be built in release mode. When this occurs, it is
+    necessary to ensure that plugins are also built in release
+    mode. For that reason we add the \c debug_and_release value to the
+    \c CONFIG variable. Otherwise, if a plugin is built in a mode that
+    is incompatible with \QD, it won't be loaded and
+    installed.
+
+    The header and source files for the widget are declared in the usual way,
+    and we provide an implementation of the plugin interface so that \QD can
+    use the custom widget:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.pro 3
+
+    It is also important to ensure that the plugin is installed in a
+    location that is searched by \QD. We do this by specifying a
+    target path for the project and adding it to the list of items to
+    install:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_customwidgetplugin.qdoc 0
+
+    The custom widget is created as a library, and will be installed
+    alongside the other \QD plugins when the project is installed
+    (using \c{make install} or an equivalent installation procedure).
+    Later, we will ensure that it is recognized as a plugin by \QD by
+    using the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro to export the relevant widget
+    information.
+
+    Note that if you want the plugins to appear in a Visual Studio
+    integration, the plugins must be built in release mode and their
+    libraries must be copied into the plugin directory in the install
+    path of the integration (for an example, see \c {C:/program
+    files/trolltech as/visual studio integration/plugins}).
+
+    For more information about plugins, see the \l {How to
+    Create Qt Plugins} documentation.
+
+    \section1 AnalogClock Class Definition and Implementation
+
+    The \c AnalogClock class is defined and implemented in exactly the same
+    way as described in the \l{widgets/analogclock}{Analog Clock example}.
+    Since the class is self-contained, and does not require any external
+    configuration, it can be used without modification as a custom widget in
+    \QD.
+
+    \section1 AnalogClockPlugin Class Definition
+
+    The \c AnalogClock class is exposed to \QD through the \c
+    AnalogClockPlugin class. This class inherits from both QObject and
+    the QDesignerCustomWidgetInterface class, and implements an
+    interface defined by QDesignerCustomWidgetInterface:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.h 0
+
+    The functions provide information about the widget that \QD can use in
+    the \l{Getting to Know Qt Designer#WidgetBox}{widget box}.
+    The \c initialized private member variable is used to record whether
+    the plugin has been initialized by \QD.
+
+    Note that the only part of the class definition that is specific to
+    this particular custom widget is the class name.
+
+    \section1 AnalogClockPlugin Implementation
+
+    The class constructor simply calls the QObject base class constructor
+    and sets the \c initialized variable to \c false.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.cpp 0
+
+    \QD will initialize the plugin when it is required by calling the
+    \c initialize() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.cpp 1
+
+    In this example, the \c initialized private variable is tested, and only
+    set to \c true if the plugin is not already initialized. Although, this
+    plugin does not require any special code to be executed when it is
+    initialized, we could include such code after the test for initialization.
+
+    The \c isInitialized() function lets \QD know whether the plugin is
+    ready for use:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.cpp 2
+
+    Instances of the custom widget are supplied by the \c createWidget()
+    function. The implementation for the analog clock is straightforward:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.cpp 3
+
+    In this case, the custom widget only requires a \c parent to be specified.
+    If other arguments need to be supplied to the widget, they can be
+    introduced here.
+
+    The following functions provide information for \QD to use to represent
+    the widget in the widget box.
+    The \c name() function returns the name of class that provides the
+    custom widget:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.cpp 4
+
+    The \c group() function is used to describe the type of widget that the
+    custom widget belongs to:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.cpp 5
+
+    The widget plugin will be placed in a section identified by its
+    group name in \QD's widget box. The icon used to represent the
+    widget in the widget box is returned by the \c icon() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.cpp 6
+
+    In this case, we return a null icon to indicate that we have no icon
+    that can be used to represent the widget.
+
+    A tool tip and "What's This?" help can be supplied for the custom widget's
+    entry in the widget box. The \c toolTip() function should return a short
+    message describing the widget:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.cpp 7
+
+    The \c whatsThis() function can return a longer description:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.cpp 8
+
+    The \c isContainer() function tells \QD whether the widget is supposed to
+    be used as a container for other widgets. If not, \QD will not allow the
+    user to place widgets inside it.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.cpp 9
+
+    Most widgets in Qt can contain child widgets, but it only makes sense
+    to use dedicated container widgets for this purpose in \QD. By returning
+    \c false, we indicate that the custom widget cannot hold other widgets;
+    if we returned true, \QD would allow other widgets to be placed inside
+    the analog clock and a layout to be defined.
+
+    The \c domXml() function provides a way to include default settings for
+    the widget in the standard XML format used by \QD. In this case, we only
+    specify the widget's geometry:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.cpp 10
+
+    If the widget provides a reasonable size hint, it is not necessary to
+    define it here. In addition, returning an empty string instead of a
+    \c{<widget>} element will tell \QD not to install the widget in the
+    widget box.
+
+    To make the analog clock widget usable by applications, we implement
+    the \c includeFile() function to return the name of the header file
+    containing the custom widget class definition:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.cpp 12
+
+    Finally, we use the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro to export the \c
+    AnalogClockPlugin class for use with \QD:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/customwidgetplugin/customwidgetplugin.cpp 13
+
+    This macro ensures that \QD can access and construct the custom widget.
+    Without this macro, there is no way for \QD to use the widget.
+
+    It is important to note that you can only use the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2()
+    macro once in any implementation. If you have several custom widgets in
+    an implementation that you wish to make available to \QD, you will need
+    to implement \l{QDesignerCustomWidgetCollectionInterface}.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/dbscreen.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/dbscreen.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..88f6d51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/dbscreen.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,200 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example qws/dbscreen
+    \title Double Buffered Graphics Driver Example
+
+    The Double Buffered Graphics Driver example shows how to write your own
+    double buffered graphics driver and add it to Qt for Embedded Linux.
+
+    Similar to the \l{Accelerated Graphics Driver Example}, there are three steps
+    to writing and implementing this graphics driver:
+
+    \list 1
+        \o \l {Step 1: Creating a Custom Graphics Driver}
+        {Creating a Custom Graphics Driver}
+
+        \o \l {Step 2: Implementing the Back Buffer}
+        {Implementing the Back Buffer}
+
+        \o \l {Step 3: Creating the Driver Plugin}
+        {Creating the Driver Plugin}
+
+    \endlist
+
+    After compiling the example code, install the graphics driver plugin with
+    the command \c {make install}. To start an application using the graphics
+    driver, you can either set the environment variable \l QWS_DISPLAY and
+    then run the application, or you can just run the application using the
+    \c -display switch.
+
+    Note that this is a minimal example and this driver will not work well
+    with widgets painting themself directly to the screen (e.g. widgets with
+    the Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen window attribute set). Also, the example requires
+    the Linux framebuffer to be set up correctly and with the correct device
+    permissions. For further information, refer to
+    \l{Testing the Linux Framebuffer}.
+
+    \section1 Step 1: Creating a Custom Graphics Driver
+
+    Usually, a custom graphics driver is created by subclassing the QScreen
+    class, the base class for implementing screen or graphics drivers in
+    Qt for Embedded Linux. In this example, however, we subclass the QLinuxFbScreen
+    class instead, to ensure that our driver uses the Linux framebuffer.
+
+    For our graphics driver, the \c DBScreen class, we reimplement five
+    functions belonging to QScreen:
+
+    \list
+        \o \l{QScreen::initDevice()}{initDevice()},
+        \o \l{QScreen::shutdownDevice()}{shutdownDevice()},
+        \o \l{QScreen::blit()}{blit()},
+        \o \l{QScreen::solidFill()}{solidFill()}, and
+        \o \l{QScreen::exposeRegion()}{exposeRegion()}.
+    \endlist
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/dbscreen/dbscreen.h 0
+
+    In addition to the abovementioned functions, there is a private instance
+    of QPainter and QImage - \c painter, used for drawing operations on
+    the back buffer, and \c image, the back buffer itself.
+
+    \section1 Step 2: Implementing the Back Buffer
+
+    The graphics driver must carry out three main functions:
+
+    \list 1
+        \o Allocate the back buffer on startup and deallocate it on shutdown.
+        \o Draw to the back buffer instead of directly to the screen
+           (which is what QLinuxFbScreen does).
+        \o Copy the back buffer to the screen whenever a screen update is
+           done.
+    \endlist
+
+    \section2 Device initializing and shutdown 
+
+    We first reimplement \c initDevice() and \c shutdownDevice().
+
+    The \c initDevice() function initializes the framebuffer. We reimplement
+    this function to enable accelerated drivers to set up the graphic card.
+    For this example, we first call the super class' implementation to set up
+    the Linux framebuffer. If this call returns \c false, we return \c false.
+    Otherwise, we initialize the screen cursor with
+    QScreenCursor::initSoftwareCursor() as well as instantiate \c image and
+    \c painter. Then, we return \c true.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/dbscreen/dbscreen.cpp 0
+
+    The \c shutdownDevice() function's default implementation only hides the
+    mouse cursor. Hence, we reimplement it to carry out the necessary cleanup
+    before the Qt for Embedded Linux server exits.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/dbscreen/dbscreen.cpp 1
+
+    Again, we call the super class implementation to shutdown the Linux
+    framebuffer prior to deleting \c image and \c painter.
+
+    \section2 Drawing to the back buffer
+
+    We move on to the drawing functions - \c solidFill() and \c blit(). In
+    QLinuxFbScreen, these functions draw directly to the Linux framebuffer;
+    but in our driver we reimplement them to draw to the back buffer instead.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/dbscreen/dbscreen.cpp 2
+
+    The \c solidFill() function is called from \c exposeRegion() to fill the
+    given \c region of the screen with the specified \c color. In this
+    example, we use \c painter to fill rectangles in \c image, the back
+    buffer, according to the given region.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/dbscreen/dbscreen.cpp 3
+
+    The \c blit() function is also called from \c exposeRegion() to copy the
+    given QRegion object, \c region, in the given QImage object, \c image, to
+    the QPoint object specified by \c topLeft. Once again we use \c painter
+    to draw in the back buffer, \c image.
+
+    \section2 Displaying the buffer on the screen
+
+    The \c exposeRegion() function is called by the Qt for Embedded Linux server
+    whenever a screen update is required. The given \c region is the screen
+    region that needs to be updated and \c changing is is the index into
+    QWSServer::clientWindows() of the window that caused the update.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/dbscreen/dbscreen.cpp 4
+
+    In our implementation, we first call the super class implementation to
+    ensure that \c solidFill() and \c blit() will be called correctly. This
+    causes the changed areas to be updated in the back buffer. We then call
+    the super class' implementation of \c blit() to copy the updated region
+    from the back buffer into the Linux framebuffer.
+
+    \section1 Step 3: Creating the Driver Plugin
+
+    Qt provides a high level API for writing Qt extentions. One of the plugin
+    base classes provided is QScreenDriverPlugin, which we use in this example
+    to create our screen driver plugin.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/dbscreen/dbscreendriverplugin.cpp 0
+
+    There are only two functions to reimplement:
+
+    \list
+        \o \l{QScreenDriverPlugin::create()}{create()} - creates a driver
+           matching the given key
+        \o \l{QScreenDriverPlugin::create()}{keys()} - returns a list of
+           valid keys representing the drivers supported by the plugin
+    \endlist
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/dbscreen/dbscreendriverplugin.cpp 1
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/qws/dbscreen/dbscreendriverplugin.cpp 2
+
+    Our plugin will only support one driver, \c dbscreen.
+
+    Lastly, we export the plugin.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/dbscreen/dbscreendriverplugin.cpp 3
+
+    For detailed information about the Qt plugin system see
+    \l{How to Create Qt Plugins.}
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/dbus-chat.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/dbus-chat.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f062c23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/dbus-chat.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example dbus/dbus-chat
+    \title D-Bus Chat Example
+
+    The D-Bus Chat example shows how to use D-Bus to communicate between two
+    applications.
+
+    \image dbus-chat-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/dbus-listnames.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/dbus-listnames.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b13abe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/dbus-listnames.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example dbus/listnames
+    \title D-Bus List Names Example
+
+    The D-Bus List Names examples shows how to query D-Bus for a list of service names.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/dbus-pingpong.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/dbus-pingpong.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b15978
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/dbus-pingpong.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+/*!
+    \example dbus/pingpong
+    \title D-Bus Ping Pong Example
+
+    The D-Bus Ping Pong example provides a basic demonstration of D-Bus
+    interfaces.
+
+    \quotefile doc/src/snippets/dbus-pingpong-example.qdoc
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/dbus-remotecontrolledcar.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/dbus-remotecontrolledcar.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef31bd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/dbus-remotecontrolledcar.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example dbus/remotecontrolledcar
+    \title D-Bus Remote Controlled Car Example
+
+    The Remote Controlled Car example shows how to use D-Bus to control one
+    application using another.
+
+    \image remotecontrolledcar-car-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/defaultprototypes.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/defaultprototypes.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dc65902
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/defaultprototypes.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example script/defaultprototypes
+    \title Default Prototypes Example
+
+    This Qt Script example shows how to use default prototypes
+    to make a non-QObject-based type scriptable.
+
+    \image defaultprototypes-example.png
+
+    With QScriptEngine::setDefaultPrototype() you can specify
+    a QtScript object that defines a scripting interface for
+    a C++ type; Qt Script operations on values of such types
+    will then be delegated to your prototype object. In this
+    example, a simple scripting interface for QListWidgetItem is
+    defined, so that the text of items can easily be accessed from
+    script code.
+
+    To define a scripting API for QListWidgetItem in terms of
+    Qt properties and slots, we subclass QObject and QScriptable.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/defaultprototypes/prototypes.h 0
+
+    A single property, \c{text}, is defined, along with a slot,
+    \c{toString}.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/defaultprototypes/prototypes.cpp 0
+
+    The implementation of the property accessors use
+    the qscriptvalue_cast() function to cast the script object
+    to a QListWidgetItem pointer. The normal C++ QListWidgetItem
+    API is then used to implement the desired functionality.
+
+    Although not shown here, it is possible to throw a script
+    exception from a prototype function; for example, you could throw
+    a TypeError exception if the qscriptvalue_cast() fails.
+
+    QListWidgetItems are usually added to a QListWidget. While
+    QListWidget is a QObject-based class, not all the functionality
+    needed for this example are present. We can solve this by creating
+    a default prototype for the QListWidget class as well. The
+    prototype will augment the functionality already provided by the
+    Qt Script QObject integration; i.e. if a property or slot is not
+    found in the QListWidget object itself, the prototype will be used
+    as a fallback.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/defaultprototypes/prototypes.h 1
+
+    The additional slots will make it possible to add items to
+    a QListWidget from script code, and to set the background
+    color of the widget from a string.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/defaultprototypes/prototypes.cpp 1
+
+    Again, we use qscriptvalue_cast() to cast the script object
+    to the relevant C++ type, in this case a QListWidget pointer.
+    The addItem() and addItems() functions simply forward their
+    arguments to the corresponding functions in the QListWidget
+    class. setBackgroundColor() gets the widget's palette, creates
+    a QColor from the given string argument and changes the palette
+    accordingly.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/defaultprototypes/main.cpp 0
+
+    The relevant C++ types must be made known to Qt's meta type
+    system.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/defaultprototypes/main.cpp 1
+
+    For each type that we want to associate a prototype object with,
+    we create an instance of the prototype class, pass it to
+    QScriptEngine::newQObject(), and then create the link between
+    the C++ type and the resulting script object by calling
+    QScriptEngine::setDefaultPrototype().
+
+    \snippet examples/script/defaultprototypes/main.cpp 2
+
+    In this example, a single QListWidget object is added as
+    a global script variable, called \c{listWidget}. Script code
+    can add items to this widget by calling addItem() or addItems().
+
+    \snippet examples/script/defaultprototypes/code.js 0
+
+    Script code can connect to signals of the QListWidget object;
+    signal handlers can use the interface defined in
+    the QListWidgetItem prototype to manipulate item arguments.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/defaultprototypes/code.js 1
+
+    Not shown in this example is how to make QListWidgetItem
+    constructible from Qt Script code, i.e. to be able to
+    write "new QListWidgetItem()" in a script. In order to do
+    this, you have to define your own script constructor for
+    the type. The constructor would just be a factory function
+    that constructs a new C++ QListWidgetItem and returns it
+    back to the script. See QScriptEngine::newFunction() for more
+    information.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/delayedencoding.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/delayedencoding.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cd1c4ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/delayedencoding.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example draganddrop/delayedencoding
+    \title Delayed Encoding Example
+
+    The Delayed Encoding example shows how to delay preparing of data
+    for drag and drop operations until a drop target is found.
+
+    \image delayedecoding-example.png
+
+    The \gui Export push button is pressed down to start the drag.
+    The data for the drag and drop operation is not processed until
+    the user of the application has found a valid drop target. This
+    removes redundant processing if the operation is aborted. In our
+    case, we have an SVG image that we wish to send as the \c {
+    "image/png" } MIME type. It is the conversion from SVG to PNG we
+    wish to delay - it can be quite expensive.
+
+    The example is implemented in two classes: \c SourceWidget and \c
+    MimeData. The \c SourceWidget class sets up the GUI and starts the
+    drag operation on request. The \c MimeData class, which inherits
+    QMimeData, sends a signal when a drop target is found. This signal
+    is connected to a slot in \c SourceWidget, which does the
+    conversion from SVG to PNG. 
+
+    \section1 SourceWidget Class Definition
+
+    The \c SourceWidget class starts drag and drop operations and also
+    does the image conversion.
+    
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/delayedencoding/sourcewidget.h 0
+    
+    The \gui Export push button is connected to the \c startDrag()
+    slot. The \c createData() slot will be invoked when data for the
+    drag and drop operation is to be created.
+
+    \section1 SourceWidget Class Implementation
+
+    Let's start our code tour with a look at the \c startDrag() slot.
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/delayedencoding/sourcewidget.cpp 0
+
+    We emit \c dataRequested() from \c MimeData when the operation has
+    found a valid drop target.
+
+    We gallop along to \c createData():
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/delayedencoding/sourcewidget.cpp 1
+
+    Fortunately, Qt provides QSvgRenderer, which can render the SVG
+    image to any QPaintDevice. Also, QImage has no problems saving to
+    the PNG format.
+
+    Finally, we can give the data to \c MimeData.
+
+    \section1 MimeData Class Definition
+
+    The \c MimeData class inherits QMimeData and makes it possible to
+    delay preparing of the data for a drag and drop operation.
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/delayedencoding/mimedata.h 0
+
+    We will look closer at \c retrieveData() and \c formats() in the
+    next section.
+
+    \section1 MimeData Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/delayedencoding/mimedata.cpp 0
+
+    In the \c formats() function, we return the format of the
+    data we provide. This is the \c { image/png } MIME type.
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/delayedencoding/mimedata.cpp 1
+
+    \c retrieveData() is reimplemented from QMimeData and is
+    called when the data is requested by the drag and drop
+    operation. Fortunately for us, this happens when the operation
+    is finishing, i.e., when a drop target has been found.
+
+    We emit the \c dataRequested() signal, which is picked up by
+    \c SourceWidget. The \c SourceWidget (as already explained)
+    sets the data on \c MimeData with \l{QMimeData::}{setData()}.
+
+*/
+
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/diagramscene.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/diagramscene.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ebf93e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/diagramscene.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,846 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example graphicsview/diagramscene
+    \title Diagram Scene Example
+    
+    This example shows use of Qt's graphics framework. 
+
+    \image diagramscene.png
+
+    The Diagram Scene example is an application in which you can
+    create a flowchart diagram. It is possible to add flowchart shapes
+    and text and connect the shapes by arrows as shown in the image
+    above.  The shapes, arrows, and text can be given different
+    colors, and it is possible to change the font, style, and
+    underline of the text.
+
+    The Qt graphics view framework is designed to manage and
+    display custom 2D graphics items. The main classes of the
+    framework are QGraphicsItem, QGraphicsScene and QGraphicsView. The
+    graphics scene manages the items and provides a surface for them.
+    QGraphicsView is a widget that is used to render a scene on the
+    screen. See the \l{The Graphics View Framework}{overview document}
+    for a more detailed description of the framework. 
+
+    In this example we show how to create such custom graphics
+    scenes and items by implementing classes that inherit
+    QGraphicsScene and QGraphicsItem. 
+
+    In particular we show how to:
+
+    \list
+	\o Create custom graphics items.
+	\o Handle mouse events and movement of items.
+	\o Implement a graphics scene that can manage our custom items.
+	\o Custom painting of items.
+	\o Create a movable and editable text item.
+    \endlist
+
+    The example consists of the following classes:
+    \list
+	\o \c MainWindow creates the widgets and display
+	   them in a QMainWindow. It also manages the interaction 
+	   between the widgets and the graphics scene, view and 
+	   items.
+	\o \c DiagramItem inherits QGraphicsPolygonItem and
+	   represents a flowchart shape. 
+	\o \c TextDiagramItem inherits QGraphicsTextItem and
+	   represents text items in the diagram. The class adds
+	   support for moving the item with the mouse, which is not
+	   supported by QGraphicsTextItem.
+	\o \c Arrow inherits QGraphicsLineItem and is an arrow
+	   that connect two DiagramItems. 
+	\o \c DiagramScene inherits QGraphicsDiagramScene and
+	   provides support for \c DiagramItem, \c Arrow and 
+	   \c DiagramTextItem (In addition to the support already
+	   handled by QGraphicsScene).
+    \endlist
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    The \c MainWindow class creates and lays out the widgets in a
+    QMainWindow. The class forwards input from the widgets to the
+    DiagramScene. It also updates its widgets when the diagram 
+    scene's text item changes, or a diagram item or a diagram text item
+    is inserted into the scene.
+
+    The class also deletes items from the scene and handles the
+    z-ordering, which decides the order in which items are drawn when
+    they overlap each other.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+
+    We start with a look at the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor we call methods to create the widgets and
+    layouts of the example before we create the diagram scene. 
+    The toolbars must be created after the scene as they connect 
+    to its signals. We then lay the widgets out in the window.
+
+    We connect to the \c itemInserted() and \c textInserted() slots of
+    the diagram scenes as we want to uncheck the buttons in the tool
+    box when an item is inserted. When an item is selected in
+    the scene we receive the \c itemSelected() signal. We use this to
+    update the widgets that display font properties if the item
+    selected is a \c DiagramTextItem.
+
+    The \c createToolBox() function creates and lays out the widgets 
+    of the \c toolBox QToolBox. We will not examine it with a
+    high level of detail as it does not deal with graphics framework 
+    specific functionality. Here is its implementation:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 21
+    
+    This part of the function sets up the tabbed widget item that
+    contains the flowchart shapes. An exclusive QButtonGroup always 
+    keeps one button checked; we want the group to allow all buttons
+    to be unchecked.
+    We still use a button group since we can associate user
+    data, which we use to store the diagram type, with each button. 
+    The \c createCellWidget() function sets up the buttons in the 
+    tabbed widget item and is examined later.
+
+    The buttons of the background tabbed widget item is set up in the
+    same way, so we skip to the creation of the tool box:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 22
+
+    We set the preferred size of the toolbox as its maximum. This
+    way, more space is given to the graphics view. 
+
+    Here is the \c createActions() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 23
+
+    We show an example of the creation of an action. The
+    functionality the actions trigger is discussed in the slots we
+    connect the actions to. You can see the \l{Application
+    Example}{application example} if you need a high-level
+    introduction to actions.
+
+    The is the \c createMenus() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 24
+
+    We create the three menus' of the example.
+
+    The \c createToolbars() function sets up the examples tool
+    bars.  The three \l{QToolButton}s in the \c colorToolBar, the \c
+    fontColorToolButton, \c fillColorToolButton, and \c
+    lineColorToolButton, are interesting as we create icons for them
+    by drawing on a QPixmap with a QPainter. We show how the \c
+    fillColorToolButton is created. This button lets the user select a
+    color for the diagram items.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 25
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 26
+
+    We set the menu of the tool button with
+    \l{QToolButton::}{setMenu()}. We need the \c fillAction QAction
+    object to always be pointing to the selected action of the menu.
+    The menu is created with the \c createColorMenu() function and, as
+    we shall see later, contains one menu item for each color that the
+    items can have.  When the user presses the button, which trigger
+    the \l{QToolButton::}{clicked()} signal, we can set the color of
+    the selected item to the color of \c fillAction. It is with \c
+    createColorToolButtonIcon() we create the icon for the button.
+
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 27
+
+    Here is the \c createBackgroundCellWidget() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 28
+
+    This function creates \l{QWidget}s containing a tool button
+    and a label. The widgets created with this function are used for
+    the background tabbed widget item in the tool box.
+
+    Here is the \c createCellWidget() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 29
+
+    This function returns a QWidget containing a QToolButton with
+    an image of one of the \c DiagramItems, i.e., flowchart shapes.
+    The image is created by the \c DiagramItem through the \c image()
+    function.  The QButtonGroup class lets us attach a QVariant with
+    each button; we store the diagram's type, i.e., the
+    DiagramItem::DiagramType enum. We use the stored diagram type when
+    we create new diagram items for the scene.  The widgets created
+    with this function is used in the tool box.
+
+    Here is the \c createColorMenu() function:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 30
+
+    This function creates a color menu that is used as the
+    drop-down menu for the tool buttons in the \c colorToolBar. We
+    create an action for each color that we add to the menu. We fetch
+    the actions data when we set the color of items, lines, and text.
+
+    Here is the \c createColorToolButtonIcon() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 31
+
+    This function is used to create the QIcon of the \c
+    fillColorToolButton, \c fontColorToolButton, and \c
+    lineColorToolButton. The \a imageFile string is either the text,
+    flood-fill, or line symbol that is used for the buttons. Beneath
+    the image we draw a filled rectangle using \a color.
+
+    Here is the \c createColorIcon() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 32
+
+    This function creates an icon with a filled rectangle in the 
+    color of \a color. It is used for creating icons for the color
+    menus in the \c fillColorToolButton, \c fontColorToolButton, and
+    \c lineColorToolButton.
+
+    Here is the \c backgroundButtonGroupClicked() slot:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    In this function we set the QBrush that is used to draw the
+    background of the diagramscene. The background can be a grid of
+    squares of blue, gray, or white tiles, or no grid at all. We have
+    \l{QPixmap}s of the tiles from png files that we create the brush
+    with.
+
+    When one of the buttons in the background tabbed widget item is
+    clicked we change the brush; we find out which button it is by 
+    checking its text. 
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c buttonGroupClicked():
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    This slot is called when a button in \c buttonGroup is checked.
+    When a button is checked the user can click on the graphics view
+    and a \c DiagramItem of the selected type will be inserted into
+    the \c DiagramScene. We must loop through the buttons in the group
+    to uncheck other buttons as only one button is allowed to be
+    checked at a time.
+
+    \c QButtonGroup assigns an id to each button. We have set the id
+    of each button to the diagram type, as given by DiagramItem::DiagramType 
+    that will be inserted into the scene when it is clicked. We can 
+    then use the button id when we set the diagram type with 
+    \c setItemType(). In the case of text we assigned an id that has a
+    value that is not in the DiagramType enum.
+    
+    Here is the implementation of \c deleteItem():
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 3
+    
+    This slot deletes the selected item, if any, from the scene. If
+    the item to be deleted is a \c DiagramItem, we also need to delete
+    arrows connected to it; we don't want arrows in the scene that
+    aren't connected to items in both ends.
+    
+    This is the implementation of pointerGroupClicked():
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 4
+    
+    The \c pointerTypeGroup decides whether the scene is in ItemMove
+    or InsertLine mode. This button group is exclusive, i.e., only 
+    one button is checked at any time. As with the \c buttonGroup above
+    we have assigned an id to the buttons that matches values of the
+    DiagramScene::Mode enum, so that we can use the id to set the
+    correct mode.
+    
+    Here is the \c bringToFront() slot:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 5
+    
+    Several items may collide, i.e., overlap, with each other in
+    the scene.  This slot is called when the user requests that an
+    item should be placed on top of the items it collides with.
+    \l{QGraphicsItem}{QGrapicsItems} have a z-value that decides the
+    order in which items are stacked in the scene; you can think of it
+    as the z-axis in a 3D coordinate system.  When items collide the
+    items with higher z-values will be drawn on top of items with
+    lower values. When we bring an item to the front we can loop
+    through the items it collides with and set a z-value that is
+    higher than all of them.
+    
+    Here is the \c sendToBack() slot:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 6
+    
+    This slot works in the same way as \c bringToFront() described
+    above, but sets a z-value that is lower than items the item that
+    should be send to the back collides with.
+    
+    This is the implementation of \c itemInserted():
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 7
+    
+    This slot is called from the \c DiagramScene when an item has been
+    added to the scene. We set the mode of the scene back to the mode
+    before the item was inserted, which is ItemMove or InsertText
+    depending on which button is checked in the \c pointerTypeGroup. 
+    We must also uncheck the button in the in the \c buttonGroup.
+    
+    Here is the implementation of \c textInserted():
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 8
+    
+    We simply set the mode of the scene back to the mode it had before
+    the text was inserted.
+    
+    Here is the \c currentFontChanged() slot:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 9
+    
+    When the user requests a font change, by using one of the
+    widgets in the \c fontToolBar, we create a new QFont object and
+    set its properties to match the state of the widgets. This is done
+    in \c handleFontChange(), so we simply call that slot.
+    
+    Here is the \c fontSizeChanged() slot:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 10
+    
+    When the user requests a font change, by using one of the
+    widgets in the \c fontToolBar, we create a new QFont object and
+    set its properties to match the state of the widgets. This is done
+    in \c handleFontChange(), so we simply call that slot.
+    
+    Here is the implementation of \c sceneScaleChanged():
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 11
+    
+    The user can increase or decrease the scale, with the \c
+    sceneScaleCombo, the scene is drawn in.
+    It is not the scene itself that changes its scale, but only the
+    view.  
+    
+    Here is the \c textColorChanged() slot:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 12
+    
+    This slot is called when an item in the drop-down menu of the \c
+    fontColorToolButton is pressed. We need to change the icon on 
+    the button to the color of the selected QAction. We keep a pointer
+    to the selected action in \c textAction. It is in \c
+    textButtonTriggered() we change the text color to the color of \c
+    textAction, so we call that slot.
+    
+    Here is the \c itemColorChanged() implementation:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 13
+    
+    This slot handles requests for changing the color of \c
+    DiagramItems in the same manner as \c textColorChanged() does for
+    \c DiagramTextItems.
+    
+    Here is the implementation of \c lineColorChanged():
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 14
+    
+    This slot handles requests for changing the color of \c Arrows in
+    the same manner that \c textColorChanged() does it for \c
+    DiagramTextItems.
+    
+    Here is the \c textButtonTriggered() slot:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 15
+    
+    \c textAction points to the  QAction of the currently selected menu item
+    in the \c fontColorToolButton's color drop-down menu. We have set
+    the data of the action to the QColor the action represents, so we
+    can simply fetch this when we set the color of text with \c
+    setTextColor().
+    
+    Here is the \c fillButtonTriggered() slot:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 16
+    
+    \c fillAction points to the selected menu item in the drop-down
+    menu of \c fillColorToolButton(). We can therefore use the data of
+    this action when we set the item color with \c setItemColor().
+    
+    Here is the \c lineButtonTriggered() slot:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 17
+    
+    \c lineAction point to the selected item in the drop-down menu of
+    \c lineColorToolButton. We use its data when we set the arrow 
+    color with \c setLineColor().
+    
+    Here is the \c handleFontChange() function:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 18
+    
+    \c handleFontChange() is called when any of the widgets that show
+    font properties changes. We create a new QFont object and set its
+    properties based on the widgets. We then call the \c setFont()
+    function of \c DiagramScene; it is the scene that set the font of
+    the \c DiagramTextItems it manages.
+    
+    Here is the \c itemSelected() slot:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 19
+    
+    This slot is called when an item in the \c DiagramScene is
+    selected. In the case of this example it is only text items that
+    emit signals when they are selected, so we do not need to check
+    what kind of graphics \a item is.
+    
+    We set the state of the widgets to match the properties of the
+    font of the selected text item.
+    
+    This is the \c about() slot:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/mainwindow.cpp 20
+    
+    This slot displays an about box for the example when the user
+    selects the about menu item from the help menu.
+    
+    \section1 DiagramScene Class Definition
+    
+    The \c DiagramScene class inherits QGraphicsScene and adds
+    functionality to handle \c DiagramItems, \c Arrows, and \c
+    DiagramTextItems in addition to the items handled by its super
+    class.
+    
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.h 0
+    
+    In the \c DiagramScene a mouse click can give three different
+    actions: the item under the mouse can be moved, an item may be
+    inserted, or an arrow may be connected between to diagram items.
+    Which action a mouse click has depends on the mode, given by the
+    Mode enum, the scene is in. The mode is set with the \c setMode()
+    function.
+    
+    The scene also sets the color of its items and the font of its
+    text items.  The colors and font used by the scene can be set with
+    the \c setLineColor(), \c setTextColor(), \c setItemColor() and \c
+    setFont() functions. The type of \c DiagramItem, given by the
+    DiagramItem::DiagramType function, to be created when an item is
+    inserted is set with the \c setItemType() slot.
+    
+    The \c MainWindow and \c DiagramScene share responsibility for
+    the examples functionality. \c MainWindow handles the following
+    tasks: the deletion of items, text, and arrows; moving diagram
+    items to the back and front; and setting the scale of the scene. 
+
+    \section1 DiagramScene Class Implementation
+
+
+    We start with the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.cpp 0
+
+    The scene uses \c myItemMenu to set the context menu when it
+    creates \c DiagramItems. We set the default mode to \c
+    DiagramScene::MoveItem as this gives the default behavior of
+    QGraphicsScene.
+
+    Here is the \c setLineColor() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.cpp 1
+
+    The \c isItemChange function returns true if an \c Arrow item is
+    selected in the scene in which case we want to change its color.
+    When the \c DiagramScene creates and adds new arrows to the scene
+    it will also use the new \a color.
+
+    Here is the \c setTextColor() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.cpp 2
+
+    This function sets the color of \c DiagramTextItems equal to the
+    way \c setLineColor() sets the color of \c Arrows.
+
+    Here is the \c setItemColor() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.cpp 3
+
+    This function sets the color the scene will use when creating 
+    \c DiagramItems. It also changes the color of a selected \c
+    DiagramItem.
+
+    This is the implementation of \c setFont():
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.cpp 4
+
+    Set the font to use for new and selected, if a text item is
+    selected, \c DiagramTextItems.
+
+    This is the implementation of \c editorLostFocus() slot:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.cpp 5
+
+    \c DiagramTextItems emit a signal when they loose focus, which is
+    connected to this slot. We remove the item if it has no text.
+    If not, we would leak memory and confuse the user as the items
+    will be edited when pressed on by the mouse.
+    
+    The \c mousePressEvent() function handles mouse press event's
+    different depending on which mode the \c DiagramScene is in. We
+    examine its implementation for each mode:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.cpp 6
+
+    We simply create a new \c DiagramItem and add it to the scene at
+    the position the mouse was pressed. Note that the origin of its 
+    local coordinate system will be under the mouse pointer position.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.cpp 7
+
+    The user adds \c Arrows to the scene by stretching a line between
+    the items the arrow should connect. The start of the line is fixed
+    in the place the user clicked the mouse and the end follows the
+    mouse pointer as long as the button is held down. When the user
+    releases the mouse button an \c Arrow will be added to the scene
+    if there is a \c DiagramItem under the start and end of the line.
+    We will see how this is implemented later; here we simply add the
+    line.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.cpp 8
+    
+    The \c DiagramTextItem is editable when the
+    Qt::TextEditorInteraction flag is set, else it is movable by the
+    mouse. We always want the text to be drawn on top of the other
+    items in the scene, so we set the value to a number higher
+    than other items in the scene.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.cpp 9
+
+    We are in MoveItem mode if we get to the default switch; we
+    can then call the QGraphicsScene implementation, which
+    handles movement of items with the mouse. We make this call even
+    if we are in another mode making it possible to add an item and
+    then keep the mouse button pressed down and start moving 
+    the item. In the case of text items, this is not possible as they
+    do not propagate mouse events when they are editable.
+
+    This is the \c mouseMoveEvent() function:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.cpp 10
+
+    We must draw the line if we are in InsertMode and the mouse button
+    is pressed down (the line is not 0). As discussed in \c
+    mousePressEvent() the line is drawn from the position the mouse
+    was pressed to the current position of the mouse.
+
+    If we are in MoveItem mode, we call the QGraphicsScene
+    implementation, which handles movement of items.
+
+    In the \c mouseReleaseEvent() function we need to check if an arrow
+    should be added to the scene:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.cpp 11
+    
+    First we need to get the items (if any) under the line's start
+    and end points. The line itself is the first item at these points,
+    so we remove it from the lists. As a precaution, we check if the
+    lists are empty, but this should never happen.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.cpp 12
+
+    Now we check if there are two different \c DiagramItems under
+    the lines start and end points. If there are we can create an \c
+    Arrow with the two items. The arrow is then added to each item and
+    finally the scene. The arrow must be updated to adjust its start
+    and end points to the items. We set the z-value of the arrow to
+    -1000.0 because we always want it to be drawn under the items.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.cpp 13
+
+    Here is the \c isItemChange() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramscene.cpp 14
+
+    The scene has single selection, i.e., only one item can be
+    selected at any given time. The foreach will then loop one time
+    with the selected item or none if no item is selected. \c
+    isItemChange() is used to check whether a selected item exists
+    and also is of the specified diagram \a type.
+
+    \section1 DiagramItem Class Definition
+
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramitem.h 0
+
+    The \c DiagramItem represents a flowchart shape in the \c
+    DiagramScene. It inherits QGraphicsPolygonItem and has a polygon
+    for each shape. The enum DiagramType has a value for each of the
+    flowchart shapes.
+    
+    The class has a list of the arrows that are connected to it.
+    This is necessary because only the item knows when it is being
+    moved (with the \c itemChanged() function) at which time the
+    arrows must be updated. The item can also draw itself onto a
+    QPixmap with the \c image() function. This is used for the tool
+    buttons in \c MainWindow, see \c createColorToolButtonIcon() in
+    \c MainWindow.
+
+    The Type enum is a unique identifier of the class. It is used by 
+    \c qgraphicsitem_cast(), which does dynamic casts of graphics
+    items. The UserType constant is the minimum value a custom
+    graphics item type can be.
+
+    \section1 DiagramItem Class Implementation
+
+
+    We start with a look at the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramitem.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor we create the items polygon according to
+    \a diagramType. \l{QGraphicsItem}s are not movable or selectable
+    by default, so we must set these properties.
+
+    Here is the \c removeArrow() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramitem.cpp 1
+
+    \c removeArrow() is used to remove \c Arrow items when they
+    or \c DiagramItems they are connected to are removed from the
+    scene.
+
+    Here is the \c removeArrows() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramitem.cpp 2
+
+    This function is called when the item is removed from the scene
+    and removes all arrows that are connected to this item. The arrow
+    must be removed from the \c arrows list of both its start and end
+    item.
+
+    Here is the \c addArrow() function:
+    
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramitem.cpp 3
+
+    This function simply adds the \a arrow to the items \c arrows list.
+
+    Here is the \c image() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramitem.cpp 4
+
+    This function draws the polygon of the item onto a QPixmap. In
+    this example we use this to create icons for the tool buttons in
+    the tool box.
+
+    Here is the \c contextMenuEvent() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramitem.cpp 5
+
+    We show the context menu. As right mouse clicks, which shows the
+    menu, don't select items by default we set the item selected with
+    \l{QGraphicsItem::}{setSelected()}. This is necessary since an
+    item must be selected to change its elevation with the
+    \c bringToFront and \c sendToBack actions.
+
+    This is the implementation of \c itemChange():
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramitem.cpp 6
+
+    If the item has moved, we need to update the positions of the
+    arrows connected to it. The implementation of QGraphicsItem does
+    nothing, so we just return \a value.
+
+    \section1 DiagramTextItem Class Definition
+
+    The \c TextDiagramItem class inherits QGraphicsTextItem and
+    adds the possibility to move editable text items. Editable
+    QGraphicsTextItems are designed to be fixed in place and editing
+    starts when the user single clicks on the item. With \c
+    DiagramTextItem the editing starts with a double click leaving
+    single click available to interact with and move it.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramtextitem.h 0
+
+    We use \c itemChange() and \c focusOutEvent() to notify the
+    \c DiagramScene when the text item loses focus and gets selected.
+
+    Vi reimplement the functions that handle mouse events to make it
+    possible to alter the mouse behavior of QGraphicsTextItem.
+
+    \section1 DiagramTextItem Implementation
+    
+    We start with the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramtextitem.cpp 0
+
+    We simply set the item movable and selectable, as these flags are
+    off by default.
+
+    Here is the \c itemChange() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramtextitem.cpp 1
+
+    When the item is selected we emit the selectedChanged signal. The
+    \c MainWindow uses this signal to update the widgets that display
+    font properties to the font of the selected text item.
+
+    Here is the \c focusOutEvent() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramtextitem.cpp 2
+
+    \c DiagramScene uses the signal emitted when the text item looses
+    remove the item if it is empty, i.e., it contains no text. 
+
+    This is the implementation of \c mouseDoubleClickEvent():
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/diagramtextitem.cpp 5
+
+    When we receive a double click event, we make the item editable by calling
+    QGraphicsTextItem::setTextInteractionFlags(). We then forward the
+    double-click to the item itself.
+
+    \section1 Arrow Class Definition
+
+    The \c Arrow class is a graphics item that connects two \c
+    DiagramItems. It draws an arrow head to one of the items. To
+    achieve this the item needs to paint itself and also re implement
+    methods used by the graphics scene to check for collisions and
+    selections. The class inherits QGraphicsLine item, and draws the
+    arrowhead and moves with the items it connects.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/arrow.h 0
+
+    The item's color can be set with \c setColor().
+
+    \c boundingRect() and \c shape() are reimplemented 
+    from QGraphicsLineItem and are used by the scene
+    to check for collisions and selections.
+
+    Calling \c updatePosition() causes the arrow to recalculate its
+    position and arrow head angle. \c paint() is reimplemented so that
+    we can paint an arrow rather than just a line between items.
+
+    \c myStartItem and \c myEndItem are the diagram items that the
+    arrow connects. The arrow is drawn with its head to the end item.
+    \c arrowHead is a polygon with three vertices's we use to draw the
+    arrow head.
+
+    \section1 Arrow Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor of the \c Arrow class looks like this:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/arrow.cpp 0
+
+    We set the start and end diagram items of the arrow. The arrow
+    head will be drawn where the line intersects the end item.
+
+    Here is the \c boundingRect() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/arrow.cpp 1
+
+    We need to reimplement this function because the arrow is
+    larger than the bounding rectangle of the QGraphicsLineItem. The
+    graphics scene uses the bounding rectangle to know which regions
+    of the scene to update. 
+
+    Here is the \c shape() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/arrow.cpp 2
+
+    The shape function returns a QPainterPath that is the exact
+    shape of the item. The QGraphicsLineItem::shape() returns a path
+    with a line drawn with the current pen, so we only need to add
+    the arrow head. This function is used to check for collisions and
+    selections with the mouse. 
+
+    Here is the \c updatePosition() slot:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/arrow.cpp 3
+
+    This slot updates the arrow by setting the start and end
+    points of its line to the center of the items it connects. 
+
+    Here is the \c paint() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/arrow.cpp 4
+
+    If the start and end items collide we do not draw the arrow; the
+    algorithm we use to find the point the arrow should be drawn at
+    may fail if the items collide.
+
+    We first set the pen and brush we will use for drawing the arrow.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/arrow.cpp 5
+
+    We then need to find the position at which to draw the
+    arrowhead.  The head should be drawn where the line and the end
+    item intersects. This is done by taking the line between each
+    point in the polygon and check if it intersects with the line of
+    the arrow. Since the line start and end points are set to the
+    center of the items the arrow line should intersect one and only
+    one of the lines of the polygon. Note that the points in the
+    polygon are relative to the local coordinate system of the item.
+    We must therefore add the position of the end item to make the
+    coordinates relative to the scene. 
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/arrow.cpp 6
+
+    We calculate the angle between the x-axis and the line of the
+    arrow. We need to turn the arrow head to this angle so that it
+    follows the direction of the arrow. If the angle is negative we
+    must turn the direction of the arrow.
+
+    We can then calculate the three points of the arrow head polygon.
+    One of the points is the end of the line, which now is the
+    intersection between the arrow line and the end polygon. Then we
+    clear the \c arrowHead polygon from the previous calculated arrow
+    head and set these new points.
+
+    \snippet examples/graphicsview/diagramscene/arrow.cpp 7
+
+    If the line is selected we draw to dotted lines that are
+    parallel with the line of the arrow. We do not use the default
+    implementation, which uses \l{QGraphicsItem::}{boundingRect()}
+    because the QRect bounding rectangle is considerably larger than
+    the line.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/digitalclock.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/digitalclock.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0ff4642
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/digitalclock.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/digitalclock
+    \title Digital Clock Example
+
+    The Digital Clock example shows how to use QLCDNumber to display a 
+    number with LCD-like digits.
+
+    \image digitalclock-example.png Screenshot of the Digital Clock example
+
+    This example also demonstrates how QTimer can be used to update a widget
+    at regular intervals.
+
+    \section1 DigitalClock Class Definition
+
+    The \c DigitalClock class provides a clock widget showing the time with
+    hours and minutes separated by a blinking colon. We subclass QLCDNumber
+    and implement a private slot called \c showTime() to update the clock
+    display:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/digitalclock/digitalclock.h 0
+
+    \section1 DigitalClock Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/digitalclock/digitalclock.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor, we first change the look of the LCD numbers. The
+    QLCDNumber::Filled style produces raised segments filled with the
+    foreground color (typically black). We also set up a one-second timer
+    to keep track of the current time, and we connect
+    its \l{QTimer::timeout()}{timeout()} signal to the private \c showTime() slot
+    so that the display is updated every second. Then, we
+    call the \c showTime() slot; without this call, there would be a one-second
+    delay at startup before the time is shown.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/digitalclock/digitalclock.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/widgets/digitalclock/digitalclock.cpp 2
+
+    The \c showTime() slot is called whenever the clock display needs
+    to be updated.
+
+    The current time is converted into a string with the format "hh:mm".
+    When QTime::second() is a even number, the colon in the string is
+    replaced with a space. This makes the colon appear and vanish every
+    other second.
+
+    Finally, we call QLCDNumber::display() to update the widget.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/dirview.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/dirview.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2cbfcfe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/dirview.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/dirview
+    \title Dir View Example
+
+    The Dir View example shows a tree view onto the local filing system. It uses the
+    QDirModel class to provide supply file and directory information.
+
+    \image dirview-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/dockwidgets.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/dockwidgets.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc9f5f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/dockwidgets.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example mainwindows/dockwidgets
+    \title Dock Widgets Example
+
+    The Dock Widgets example shows how to add dock windows to an
+    application. It also shows how to use Qt's rich text engine.
+
+    \image dockwidgets-example.png Screenshot of the Dock Widgets example
+
+    The application presents a simple business letter template, and has
+    a list of customer names and addresses and a list of standard
+    phrases in two dock windows. The user can click a customer to have
+    their name and address inserted into the template, and click one or
+    more of the standard phrases. Errors can be corrected by clicking
+    the Undo button. Once the letter has been prepared it can be printed
+    or saved as HTML.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    Here's the class definition:
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/dockwidgets/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    We will now review each function in turn.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/dockwidgets/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    We start by including \c <QtGui>, a header file that contains the
+    definition of all classes in the \l QtCore and \l QtGui
+    libraries. This saves us from having to include
+    every class individually and is especially convenient if we add new
+    widgets. We also include \c mainwindow.h.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/dockwidgets/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    In the constructor, we start by creating a QTextEdit widget. Then we call
+    QMainWindow::setCentralWidget(). This function passes ownership of
+    the QTextEdit to the \c MainWindow and tells the \c MainWindow that
+    the QTextEdit will occupy the \c MainWindow's central area.
+
+    Then we call \c createActions(), \c createMenus(), \c
+    createToolBars(), \c createStatusBar(), and \c createDockWindows()
+    to set up the user interface. Finally we call \c setWindowTitle() to
+    give the application a title, and \c newLetter() to create a new
+    letter template.
+
+    We won't quote the \c createActions(), \c createMenus(), \c
+    createToolBars(), and \c createStatusBar() functions since they
+    follow the same pattern as all the other Qt examples.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/dockwidgets/mainwindow.cpp 9
+
+    We create the customers dock window first, and in addition to a
+    window title, we also pass it a \c this pointer so that it becomes a
+    child of \c MainWindow. Normally we don't have to pass a parent
+    because widgets are parented automatically when they are laid out:
+    but dock windows aren't laid out using layouts.
+
+    We've chosen to restrict the customers dock window to the left and
+    right dock areas. (So the user cannot drag the dock window to the
+    top or bottom dock areas.) The user can drag the dock window out of
+    the dock areas entirely so that it becomes a free floating window.
+    We can change this (and whether the dock window is moveable or
+    closable) using QDockWidget::setFeatures().
+
+    Once we've created the dock window we create a list widget with the
+    dock window as parent, then we populate the list and make it the
+    dock window's widget. Finally we add the dock widget to the \c
+    MainWindow using \c addDockWidget(), choosing to put it in the right
+    dock area.
+
+    We undertake a similar process for the paragraphs dock window,
+    except that we don't restrict which dock areas it can be dragged to.
+
+    Finally we set up the signal-slot connections. If the user clicks a
+    customer or a paragraph their \c currentTextChanged() signal will be
+    emitted and we connect these to \c insertCustomer() and
+    addParagraph() passing the text that was clicked.
+
+    We briefly discuss the rest of the implementation, but have now
+    covered everything relating to dock windows.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/dockwidgets/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    In this function we clear the QTextEdit so that it is empty. Next we
+    create a QTextCursor on the QTextEdit. We move the cursor to the
+    start of the document and create and format a frame. We then create
+    some character formats and a table format. We insert a table into
+    the document and insert the company's name and address into a table
+    using the table and character formats we created earlier. Then we
+    insert the skeleton of the letter including two markers \c NAME and
+    \c ADDRESS. We will also use the \c{Yours sincerely,} text as a marker.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/dockwidgets/mainwindow.cpp 6
+
+    If the user clicks a customer we split the customer details into
+    pieces. We then look for the \c NAME marker using the \c find()
+    function. This function selects the text it finds, so when we call
+    \c insertText() with the customer's name the name replaces the marker.
+    We then look for the \c ADDRESS marker and replace it with each line
+    of the customer's address. Notice that we wrapped all the insertions
+    between a \c beginEditBlock() and \c endEditBlock() pair. This means
+    that the entire name and address insertion is treated as a single
+    operation by the QTextEdit, so a single undo will revert all the
+    insertions.
+    
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/dockwidgets/mainwindow.cpp 7
+
+    This function works in a similar way to \c insertCustomer(). First
+    we look for the marker, in this case, \c {Yours sincerely,}, and then
+    replace it with the standard paragraph that the user clicked. Again
+    we use a \c beginEditBlock() ... \c endEditBlock() pair so that the
+    insertion can be undone as a single operation.
+    
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/dockwidgets/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+    Qt's QTextDocument class makes printing documents easy. We simply
+    take the QTextEdit's QTextDocument, set up the printer and print the
+    document.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/dockwidgets/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+    QTextEdit can output its contents in HTML format, so we prompt the
+    user for the name of an HTML file and if they provide one we simply
+    write the QTextEdit's contents in HTML format to the file.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/dockwidgets/mainwindow.cpp 5
+
+    If the focus is in the QTextEdit, pressing \key Ctrl+Z undoes as
+    expected. But for the user's convenience we provide an
+    application-wide undo function that simply calls the QTextEdit's
+    undo: this means that the user can undo regardless of where the
+    focus is in the application.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/dombookmarks.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/dombookmarks.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f3944ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/dombookmarks.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example xml/dombookmarks
+    \title DOM Bookmarks Example
+
+    The DOM Bookmarks example provides a reader for XML Bookmark Exchange Language (XBEL)
+    files that uses Qt's DOM-based XML API to read and parse the files. The SAX Bookmarks
+    example provides an alternative way to read this type of file.
+
+    \image dombookmarks-example.png
+
+    See the \l{http://pyxml.sourceforge.net/topics/xbel/}{XML Bookmark Exchange Language
+    Resource Page} for more information about XBEL files.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/draganddroppuzzle.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/draganddroppuzzle.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0e6ed09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/draganddroppuzzle.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example draganddrop/puzzle
+    \title Drag and Drop Puzzle Example
+
+    The Drag and Drop Puzzle example demonstrates a way of using the drag and drop system with
+    item view widgets.
+
+    \image draganddroppuzzle-example.png
+
+    This example is an implementation of a simple jigsaw puzzle game using Qt's
+    drag and drop API.
+    The \l{Item Views Puzzle Example}{Item View Puzzle} example shows
+    many of the same features, but takes an alternative approach that uses Qt's
+    model/view framework to manage drag and drop operations.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/dragdroprobot.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/dragdroprobot.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d3f97b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/dragdroprobot.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example graphicsview/dragdroprobot
+    \title Drag and Drop Robot Example
+
+    This GraphicsView example shows how to implement drag and drop in
+    a QGraphicsItem subclass, as well as how to animate items using
+    QGraphicsItemAnimation and QTimeLine.
+
+    \image dragdroprobot-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/draggableicons.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/draggableicons.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..23150f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/draggableicons.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example draganddrop/draggableicons
+    \title Draggable Icons Example
+
+    The Draggable Icons example shows how to drag and drop image data between widgets
+    in the same application, and between different applications.
+
+    \image draggableicons-example.png
+
+    In many situations where drag and drop is used, the user starts dragging from
+    a particular widget and drops the payload onto another widget. In this example,
+    we subclass QLabel to create labels that we use as drag sources, and place them
+    inside \l{QWidget}s that serve as both containers and drop sites.
+
+    In addition, when a drag and drop operation occurs, we want to send more than
+    just an image. We also want to send information about where the user clicked in
+    the image so that the user can place it precisely on the drop target. This level
+    of detail means that we must create a custom MIME type for our data.
+
+    \section1 DragWidget Class Definition
+
+    The icon widgets that we use to display icons are subclassed from QLabel:
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/draggableicons/dragwidget.h 0
+
+    Since the QLabel class provides most of what we require for the icon, we
+    only need to reimplement the \l QWidget::mousePressEvent() to provide
+    drag and drop facilities.
+
+    \section1 DragWidget Class Implementation
+
+    The \c DragWidget constructor sets an attribute on the widget that ensures
+    that it will be deleted when it is closed:
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/draggableicons/dragwidget.cpp 0
+
+    To enable dragging from the icon, we need to act on a mouse press event.
+    We do this by reimplementing \l QWidget::mousePressEvent() and setting up
+    a QDrag object.
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/draggableicons/dragwidget.cpp 1
+
+    Since we will be sending pixmap data for the icon and information about the
+    user's click in the icon widget, we construct a QByteArray and package up the
+    details using a QDataStream.
+
+    For interoperability, drag and drop operations describe the data they contain
+    using MIME types. In Qt, we describe this data using a QMimeData object:
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/draggableicons/dragwidget.cpp 2
+
+    We choose an unofficial MIME type for this purpose, and supply the QByteArray
+    to the MIME data object.
+
+    The drag and drop operation itself is handled by a QDrag object:
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/draggableicons/dragwidget.cpp 3
+
+    Here, we pass the data to the drag object, set a pixmap that will be shown
+    alongside the cursor during the operation, and define the position of a hot
+    spot that places the position of this pixmap under the cursor.
+
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/draggabletext.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/draggabletext.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d3d89d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/draggabletext.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example draganddrop/draggabletext
+    \title Draggable Text Example
+
+    The Draggable Text example shows how to drag and drop textual data between widgets
+    in the same application, and between different applications.
+
+    \image draggabletext-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/drilldown.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/drilldown.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..344b9e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/drilldown.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,552 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example sql/drilldown
+    \title Drill Down Example
+
+    The Drill Down example shows how to read data from a database as
+    well as submit changes, using the QSqlRelationalTableModel and
+    QDataWidgetMapper classes.
+
+    \image drilldown-example.png Screenshot of the Drill Down Example
+
+    When running the example application, a user can retrieve
+    information about each of Nokia's Qt Software offices by clicking the
+    corresponding image. The application pops up an information window
+    displaying the data, and allows the users to alter the location
+    description as well as the image. The main view will be updated
+    when the users submit their changes.
+
+    The example consists of three classes:
+
+    \list
+        \o \c ImageItem is a custom graphics item class used to
+        display the office images.
+
+        \o \c View is the main application widget allowing the user to
+        browse through the various locations.
+
+        \o \c InformationWindow displays the requested information,
+        allowing the users to alter it and submit their changes to the
+        database.
+    \endlist
+
+    We will first take a look at the \c InformationWindow class to see
+    how you can read and modify data from a database. Then we will
+    review the main application widget, i.e., the \c View class, and
+    the associated \c ImageItem class.
+
+    \section1 InformationWindow Class Definition
+
+    The \c InformationWindow class is a custom widget inheriting
+    QWidget:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/informationwindow.h 0
+
+    When we create an information window, we pass the associated
+    location ID, a parent, and a pointer to the database, to the
+    constructor. We will use the database pointer to populate our
+    window with data, while passing the parent parameter on to the
+    base class. The ID is stored for future reference.
+
+    Once a window is created, we will use the public \c id() function
+    to locate it whenever information for the given location is
+    requested. We will also use the ID to update the main application
+    widget when the users submit their changes to the database, i.e.,
+    we will emit a signal carrying the ID and file name as parameters
+    whenever the users changes the associated image.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/informationwindow.h 1
+
+    Since we allow the users to alter some of the location data, we
+    must provide functionality for reverting and submitting their
+    changes. The \c enableButtons() slot is provided for convenience
+    to enable and disable the various buttons when required.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/informationwindow.h 2
+
+    The \c createButtons() function is also a convenience function,
+    provided to simplify the constructor. As mentioned above we store
+    the location ID for future reference. We also store the name of
+    the currently displayed image file to be able to determine when to
+    emit the \c imageChanged() signal.
+
+    The information window uses the QLabel class to display the office
+    location and the country. The associated image file is displayed
+    using a QComboBox instance while the description is displayed using
+    QTextEdit. In addition, the window has three buttons to control
+    the data flow and whether the window is shown or not.
+
+    Finally, we declare a \e mapper. The QDataWidgetMapper class
+    provides mapping between a section of a data model to widgets. We
+    will use the mapper to extract data from the given database,
+    updating the database whenever the user modifies the data.
+
+    \section1 InformationWindow Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor takes three arguments: a location ID, a database
+    pointer and a parent widget. The database pointer is actually a
+    pointer to a QSqlRelationalTableModel object providing an editable
+    data model (with foreign key support) for our database table.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/informationwindow.cpp 0
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/informationwindow.cpp 1
+
+    First we create the various widgets required to display the data
+    contained in the database. Most of the widgets are created in a
+    straight forward manner. But note the combobox displaying the
+    name of the image file:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/informationwindow.cpp 2
+
+    In this example, the information about the offices are stored in a
+    database table called "offices". When creating the model,
+    we will use a foreign key to establish a relation between this
+    table and a second data base table, "images", containing the names
+    of the available image files. We will get back to how this is done
+    when reviewing the \c View class. The rationale for creating such
+    a relation though, is that we want to ensure that the user only
+    can choose between predefined image files.
+
+    The model corresponding to the "images" database table, is
+    available through the QSqlRelationalTableModel's \l
+    {QSqlRelationalTableModel::}{relationModel()} function, requiring
+    the foreign key (in this case the "imagefile" column number) as
+    argument. We use QComboBox's \l {QComboBox::}{setModel()} function
+    to make the combobox use the "images" model. And, since this model
+    has two columns ("locationid" and "file"), we also specify which
+    column we want to be visible using the QComboBox::setModelColumn()
+    function.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/informationwindow.cpp 3
+
+    Then we create the mapper. The QDataWidgetMapper class allows us
+    to create data-aware widgets by mapping them to sections of an
+    item model.
+
+    The \l {QDataWidgetMapper::}{addMapping()} function adds a mapping
+    between the given widget and the specified section of the
+    model. If the mapper's orientation is horizontal (the default) the
+    section is a column in the model, otherwise it is a row. We call
+    the \l {QDataWidgetMapper::}{setCurrentIndex()} function to
+    initialize the widgets with the data associated with the given
+    location ID. Every time the current index changes, all the widgets
+    are updated with the contents from the model.
+
+    We also set the mapper's submit policy to
+    QDataWidgetMapper::ManualSubmit. This means that no data is
+    submitted to the database until the user expliclity requests a
+    submit (the alternative is QDataWidgetMapper::AutoSubmit,
+    automatically submitting changes when the corresponding widget
+    looses focus). Finally, we specify the item delegate the mapper
+    view should use for its items. The QSqlRelationalDelegate class
+    represents a delegate that unlike the default delegate, enables
+    combobox functionality for fields that are foreign keys into other
+    tables (like "imagefile" in our "trolltechoffices" table).
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/informationwindow.cpp 4
+
+    Finally, we connect the "something's changed" signals in the
+    editors to our custom \c enableButtons() slot, enabling the users
+    to either submit or revert their changes. We add all the widgets
+    into a layout, store the location ID and the name of the displayed
+    image file for future reference, and set the window title and
+    initial size.
+
+    Note that we also set the Qt::Window window flag to indicate that
+    our widget is in fact a window, with a window system frame and a
+    title bar.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/informationwindow.cpp 5
+
+    When a window is created, it is not deleted until the main
+    application exits (i.e., if the user closes the information
+    window, it is only hidden). For this reason we do not want to
+    create more than one \c InformationWindow object for each
+    location, and we provide the public \c id() function to be able to
+    determine whether a window already exists for a given location
+    when the user requests information about it.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/informationwindow.cpp 6
+
+    The \c revert() slot is triggered whenever the user hits the \gui
+    Revert button.
+
+    Since we set the QDataWidgetMapper::ManualSubmit submit policy,
+    none of the user's changes are written back to the model unless
+    the user expliclity choose to submit all of them. Nevertheless, we
+    can use the QDataWidgetMapper's \l {QDataWidgetMapper::}{revert()}
+    slot to reset the editor widgets, repopulating all widgets with
+    the current data of the model.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/informationwindow.cpp 7
+
+    Likewise, the \c submit() slot is triggered whenever the users
+    decide to submit their changes by pressing the \gui Submit button.
+
+    We use QDataWidgetMapper's \l {QDataWidgetMapper::}{submit()} slot
+    to submit all changes from the mapped widgets to the model,
+    i.e. to the database. For every mapped section, the item delegate
+    will then read the current value from the widget and set it in the
+    model. Finally, the \e model's \l {QAbstractItemModel::}{submit()}
+    function is invoked to let the model know that it should submit
+    whatever it has cached to the permanent storage.
+
+    Note that before any data is submitted, we check if the user has
+    chosen another image file using the previously stored \c
+    displayedImage variable as reference. If the current and stored
+    file names differ, we store the new file name and emit the \c
+    imageChanged() signal.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/informationwindow.cpp 8
+
+    The \c createButtons() function is provided for convenience, i.e.,
+    to simplify the constructor.
+
+    We make the \gui Close button the default button, i.e., the button
+    that is pressed when the user presses \gui Enter, and connect its
+    \l {QPushButton::}{clicked()} signal to the widget's \l
+    {QWidget::}{close()} slot. As mentioned above closing the window
+    only hides the widget; it is not deleted. We also connect the \gui
+    Submit and \gui Revert buttons to the corresponding \c submit()
+    and \c revert() slots.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/informationwindow.cpp 9
+
+    The QDialogButtonBox class is a widget that presents buttons in a
+    layout that is appropriate to the current widget style. Dialogs
+    like our information window, typically present buttons in a layout
+    that conforms to the interface guidelines for that
+    platform. Invariably, different platforms have different layouts
+    for their dialogs. QDialogButtonBox allows us to add buttons,
+    automatically using the appropriate layout for the user's desktop
+    environment.
+
+    Most buttons for a dialog follow certain roles. We give the \gui
+    Submit and \gui Revert buttons the \l
+    {QDialogButtonBox::ButtonRole}{reset} role, i.e., indicating that
+    pressing the button resets the fields to the default values (in
+    our case the information contained in the database). The \l
+    {QDialogButtonBox::ButtonRole}{reject} role indicates that
+    clicking the button causes the dialog to be rejected. On the other
+    hand, since we only hide the information window, any changes that
+    the user has made wil be preserved until the user expliclity
+    revert or submit them.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/informationwindow.cpp 10
+
+    The \c enableButtons() slot is called to enable the buttons
+    whenever the user changes the presented data. Likewise, when the
+    data the user choose to submit the changes, the buttons are
+    disabled to indicate that the current data is stored in the
+    database.
+
+    This completes the \c InformationWindow class. Let's take a look
+    at how we have used it in our example application.
+
+    \section1 View Class Definition
+
+    The \c View class represents the main application window and
+    inherits QGraphicsView:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/view.h 0
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/view.h 1
+
+    The QGraphicsView class is part of the \l {The Graphics View
+    Framework} which we will use to display the images of Nokia's
+    Qt Software offices. To be able to respond to user interaction;
+    i.e., showing the
+    appropriate information window whenever the user clicks one of the
+    office images, we reimplement QGraphicsView's \l
+    {QGraphicsView::}{mouseReleaseEvent()} function.
+
+    Note that the constructor expects the names of two database
+    tables: One containing the detailed information about the offices,
+    and another containing the names of the available image files.  We
+    also provide a private \c updateImage() slot to catch \c
+    {InformationWindow}'s \c imageChanged() signal that is emitted
+    whenever the user changes a location's image.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/view.h 2
+
+    The \c addItems() function is a convenience function provided to
+    simplify the constructor. It is called only once, creating the
+    various items and adding them to the view.
+
+    The \c findWindow() function, on the other hand, is frequently
+    used. It is called from the \c showInformation() function to
+    detemine whether a window is already created for the given
+    location (whenever we create an \c InformationWindow object, we
+    store a reference to it in the \c informationWindows list). The
+    latter function is in turn called from our custom \c
+    mouseReleaseEvent() implementation.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/view.h 3
+
+    Finally we declare a QSqlRelationalTableModel pointer. As
+    previously mentioned, the QSqlRelationalTableModel class provides
+    an editable data model with foreign key support. There are a
+    couple of things you should keep in mind when using the
+    QSqlRelationalTableModel class: The table must have a primary key
+    declared and this key cannot contain a relation to another table,
+    i.e., it cannot be a foreign key. Note also that if a relational
+    table contains keys that refer to non-existent rows in the
+    referenced table, the rows containing the invalid keys will not be
+    exposed through the model. It is the user's or the database's
+    responsibility to maintain referential integrity.
+
+    \section1 View Class Implementation
+
+    Although the constructor requests the names of both the table
+    containing office details as well as the table containing the
+    names of the available image files, we only have to create a
+    QSqlRelationalTableModel object for the office table:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/view.cpp 0
+
+    The reason is that once we have a model with the office details,
+    we can create a relation to the available image files using
+    QSqlRelationalTableModel's \l
+    {QSqlRelationalTableModel::}{setRelation()} function. This
+    function creates a foreign key for the given model column. The key
+    is specified by the provided QSqlRelation object constructed by
+    the name of the table the key refers to, the field the key is
+    mapping to and the field that should be presented to the user.
+
+    Note that setting the table only specifies which table the model
+    operates on, i.e., we must explicitly call the model's \l
+    {QSqlRelationalTableModel::}{select()} function to populate our
+    model.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/view.cpp 1
+
+    Then we create the contents of our view, i.e., the scene and its
+    items. The location labels are regular QGraphicsTextItem objects,
+    and the "Qt" logo is represented by a QGraphicsPixmapItem
+    object. The images, on the other hand, are instances of the \c
+    ImageItem class (derived from QGraphicsPixmapItem). We will get
+    back to this shortly when reviewing the \c addItems() function.
+
+    Finally, we set the main application widget's size constraints and
+    window title.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/view.cpp 3
+
+    The \c addItems() function is called only once, i.e., when
+    creating the main application window. For each row in the database
+    table, we first extract the corresponding record using the model's
+    \l {QSqlRelationalTableModel::}{record()} function. The QSqlRecord
+    class encapsulates both the functionality and characteristics of a
+    database record, and supports adding and removing fields as well
+    as setting and retrieving field values. The QSqlRecord::value()
+    function returns the value of the field with the given name or
+    index as a QVariant object.
+
+    For each record, we create a label item as well as an image item,
+    calculate their position and add them to the scene. The image
+    items are represented by instances of the \c ImageItem class. The
+    reason we must create a custom item class is that we want to catch
+    the item's hover events, animating the item when the mouse cursor
+    is hovering over the image (by default, no items accept hover
+    events). Please see the \l{The Graphics View Framework}
+    documentation and the
+    \l{Qt Examples#Graphics View}{Graphics View examples} for more
+    details.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/view.cpp 5
+
+    We reimplement QGraphicsView's \l
+    {QGraphicsView::}{mouseReleaseEvent()} event handler to respond to
+    user interaction. If the user clicks any of the image items, this
+    function calls the private \c showInformation() function to pop up
+    the associated information window.
+
+    \l {The Graphics View Framework} provides the qgraphicsitem_cast()
+    function to determine whether the given QGraphicsItem instance is
+    of a given type. Note that if the event is not related to any of
+    our image items, we pass it on to the base class implementation.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/view.cpp 6
+
+    The \c showInformation() function is given an \c ImageItem object
+    as argument, and starts off by extracting the item's location
+    ID. Then it determines if there already is created an information
+    window for this location. If it is, and the window is visible, it
+    ensures that the window is raised to the top of the widget stack
+    and activated. If the window exists but is hidden, calling its \l
+    {QWidget::}{show()} slot gives the same result.
+
+    If no window for the given location exists, we create one by
+    passing the location ID, a pointer to the model, and our view as a
+    parent, to the \c InformationWindow constructor. Note that we
+    connect the information window's \c imageChanged() signal to \e
+    this widget's \c updateImage() slot, before we give it a suitable
+    position and add it to the list of existing windows.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/view.cpp 7
+
+    The \c updateImage() slot takes a location ID and the name of an
+    image files as arguments. It filters out the image items, and
+    updates the one that correspond to the given location ID, with the
+    provided image file.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/view.cpp 8
+
+    The \c findWindow() function simply searches through the list of
+    existing windows, returning a pointer to the window that matches
+    the given location ID, or 0 if the window doesn't exists.
+
+    Finally, let's take a quick look at our custom \c ImageItem class:
+
+    \section1 ImageItem Class Definition
+
+    The \c ImageItem class is provided to facilitate animation of the
+    image items. It inherits QGraphicsPixmapItem and reimplements its
+    hover event handlers:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/imageitem.h 0
+
+    In addition, we implement a public \c id() function to be able to
+    identify the associated location and a public \c adjust() function
+    that can be called to ensure that the image item is given the
+    preferred size regardless of the original image file.
+
+    The animation is implemented using the QTimeLine class together
+    with the event handlers and the private \c setFrame() slot: The
+    image item will expand when the mouse cursor hovers over it,
+    returning back to its orignal size when the cursor leaves its
+    borders.
+
+    Finally, we store the location ID that this particular record is
+    associated with as well as a z-value. In the \l {The Graphics View
+    Framework}, an item's z-value determines its position in the item
+    stack. An item of high Z-value will be drawn on top of an item
+    with a lower z-value if they share the same parent item. We also
+    provide an \c updateItemPosition() function to refresh the view
+    when required.
+
+    \section1 ImageItem Class Implementation
+
+    The \c ImageItem class is really only a QGraphicsPixmapItem with
+    some additional features, i.e., we can pass most of the
+    constructor's arguments (the pixmap, parent and scene) on to the
+    base class constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/imageitem.cpp 0
+
+    Then we store the ID for future reference, and ensure that our
+    item will accept hover events. Hover events are delivered when
+    there is no current mouse grabber item. They are sent when the
+    mouse cursor enters an item, when it moves around inside the item,
+    and when the cursor leaves an item. As we mentioned earlier, none
+    of the \l {The Graphics View Framework}'s items accept hover
+    event's by default.
+
+    The QTimeLine class provides a timeline for controlling
+    animations. Its \l {QTimeLine::}{duration} property holds the
+    total duration of the timeline in milliseconds. By default, the
+    time line runs once from the beginning and towards the end. The
+    QTimeLine::setFrameRange() function sets the timeline's frame
+    counter; when the timeline is running, the \l
+    {QTimeLine::}{frameChanged()} signal is emitted each time the
+    frame changes. We set the duration and frame range for our
+    animation, and connect the time line's \l
+    {QTimeLine::}{frameChanged()} and \l {QTimeLine::}{finished()}
+    signals to our private \c setFrame() and \c updateItemPosition()
+    slots.
+
+    Finally, we call \c adjust() to ensure that the item is given the
+    preferred size.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/imageitem.cpp 1
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/imageitem.cpp 2
+
+    Whenever the mouse cursor enters or leave the image item, the
+    corresponding event handlers are triggered: We first set the time
+    line's direction, making the item expand or shrink,
+    respectively. Then we alter the item's z-value if it is not already
+    set to the expected value.
+
+    In the case of hover \e enter events, we immediately update the
+    item's position since we want the item to appear on top of all
+    other items as soon as it starts expanding. In the case of hover
+    \e leave events, on the other hand, we postpone the actual update
+    to achieve the same result. But remember that when we constructed
+    our item, we connected the time line's \l
+    {QTimeLine::}{finished()} signal to the \c updateItemPosition()
+    slot. In this way the item is given the correct position in the
+    item stack once the animation is completed. Finally, if the time
+    line is not already running, we start it.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/imageitem.cpp 3
+
+    When the time line is running, it triggers the \c setFrame() slot
+    whenever the current frame changes due to the connection we
+    created in the item constructor. It is this slot that controls the
+    animation, expanding or shrinking the image item step by step.
+
+    We first call the \c adjust() function to ensure that we start off
+    with the item's original size. Then we scale the item with a
+    factor depending on the animation's progress (using the \c frame
+    parameter). Note that by default, the transformation will be
+    relative to the item's top-left corner. Since we want the item to
+    be transformed relative to its center, we must translate the
+    coordinate system before we scale the item.
+
+    In the end, only the following convenience functions remain:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/imageitem.cpp 4
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/imageitem.cpp 5
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/sql/drilldown/imageitem.cpp 6
+
+    The \c adjust() function defines and applies a transformation
+    matrix, ensuring that our image item appears with the preferred
+    size regardless of the size of the source image. The \c id()
+    function is trivial, and is simply provided to be able to identify
+    the item. In the \c updateItemPosition() slot we call the
+    QGraphicsItem::setZValue() function, setting the elevation (i.e.,
+    the position) of the item.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/dropsite.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/dropsite.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4780b82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/dropsite.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,263 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example draganddrop/dropsite
+    \title Drop Site Example
+
+    The example shows how to distinguish the various MIME formats available
+    in a drag and drop operation.
+
+    \image dropsite-example.png Screenshot of the Drop Site example
+
+    The Drop Site example accepts drops from other applications, and displays
+    the MIME formats provided by the drag object.
+
+    There are two classes, \c DropArea and \c DropSiteWindow, and a \c main()
+    function in this example. A \c DropArea object is instantiated in
+    \c DropSiteWindow; a \c DropSiteWindow object is then invoked in the
+    \c main() function.
+
+    \section1 DropArea Class Definition
+
+    The \c DropArea class is a subclass of QLabel with a public slot,
+    \c clear(), and a \c changed() signal.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/droparea.h DropArea header part1
+
+    In addition, \c DropArea also contains a private instance of QLabel and
+    reimplementations of four \l{QWidget} event handlers:
+
+    \list 1
+        \o \l{QWidget::dragEnterEvent()}{dragEnterEvent()}
+        \o \l{QWidget::dragMoveEvent()}{dragMoveEvent()}
+        \o \l{QWidget::dragLeaveEvent()}{dragLeaveEvent()}
+        \o \l{QWidget::dropEvent()}{dropEvent()}
+    \endlist
+
+    These event handlers are further explained in the implementation of the
+    \c DropArea class.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/droparea.h DropArea header part2
+
+    \section1 DropArea Class Implementation
+
+    In the \c DropArea constructor, we set the \l{QWidget::setMinimumSize()}
+    {minimum size} to 200x200 pixels, the \l{QFrame::setFrameStyle()}
+    {frame style} to both QFrame::Sunken and QFrame::StyledPanel, and we align
+    its contents to the center.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/droparea.cpp DropArea constructor
+
+    Also, we enable drop events in \c DropArea by setting the
+    \l{QWidget::acceptDrops()}{acceptDrops} property to \c true. Then,
+    we enable the \l{QWidget::autoFillBackground()}{autoFillBackground}
+    property and invoke the \c clear() function.
+
+    The \l{QWidget::dragEnterEvent()}{dragEnterEvent()} event handler is
+    called when a drag is in progress and the mouse enters the \c DropArea
+    object. For the \c DropSite example, when the mouse enters \c DropArea,
+    we set its text to "<drop content>" and highlight its background.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/droparea.cpp dragEnterEvent() function
+
+    Then, we invoke \l{QDropEvent::acceptProposedAction()}
+    {acceptProposedAction()} on \a event, setting the drop action to the one
+    proposed. Lastly, we emit the \c changed() signal, with the data that was
+    dropped and its MIME type information as a parameter.
+
+    For \l{QWidget::dragMoveEvent()}{dragMoveEvent()}, we just accept the
+    proposed QDragMoveEvent object, \a event, with
+    \l{QDropEvent::acceptProposedAction()}{acceptProposedAction()}.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/droparea.cpp dragMoveEvent() function
+
+    The \c DropArea class's implementation of \l{QWidget::dropEvent()}
+    {dropEvent()} extracts the \a{event}'s mime data and displays it
+    accordingly.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/droparea.cpp dropEvent() function part1
+
+    The \c mimeData object can contain one of the following objects: an image,
+    HTML text, plain text, or a list of URLs.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/droparea.cpp dropEvent() function part2
+
+    \list
+        \o If \c mimeData contains an image, we display it in \c DropArea with
+           \l{QLabel::setPixmap()}{setPixmap()}.
+        \o If \c mimeData contains HTML, we display it with
+           \l{QLabel::setText()}{setText()} and set \c{DropArea}'s text format
+           as Qt::RichText.
+        \o If \c mimeData contains plain text, we display it with
+           \l{QLabel::setText()}{setText()} and set \c{DropArea}'s text format
+           as Qt::PlainText. In the event that \c mimeData contains URLs, we
+           iterate through the list of URLs to display them on individual
+           lines.
+        \o If \c mimeData contains other types of objects, we set
+           \c{DropArea}'s text, with \l{QLabel::setText()}{setText()} to
+           "Cannot display data" to inform the user.
+    \endlist
+
+    We then set \c{DropArea}'s \l{QWidget::backgroundRole()}{backgroundRole} to
+    QPalette::Dark and we accept \c{event}'s proposed action.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/droparea.cpp dropEvent() function part3
+
+    The \l{QWidget::dragLeaveEvent()}{dragLeaveEvent()} event handler is
+    called when a drag is in progress and the mouse leaves the widget.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/droparea.cpp dragLeaveEvent() function
+
+    For \c{DropArea}'s implementation, we clear invoke \c clear() and then
+    accept the proposed event.
+
+    The \c clear() function sets the text in \c DropArea to "<drop content>"
+    and sets the \l{QWidget::backgroundRole()}{backgroundRole} to
+    QPalette::Dark. Lastly, it emits the \c changed() signal.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/droparea.cpp clear() function
+
+    \section1 DropSiteWindow Class Definition
+
+    The \c DropSiteWindow class contains a constructor and a public slot,
+    \c updateFormatsTable().
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/dropsitewindow.h DropSiteWindow header
+
+    The class also contains a private instance of \c DropArea, \c dropArea,
+    QLabel, \c abstractLabel, QTableWidget, \c formatsTable, QDialogButtonBox,
+    \c buttonBox, and two QPushButton objects, \c clearButton and
+    \c quitButton.
+
+    \section1 DropSiteWindow Class Implementation
+
+    In the constructor of \c DropSiteWindow, we instantiate \c abstractLabel
+    and set its \l{QLabel::setWordWrap()}{wordWrap} property to \c true. We
+    also call the \l{QLabel::adjustSize()}{adjustSize()} function to adjust
+    \c{abstractLabel}'s size according to its contents.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/dropsitewindow.cpp constructor part1
+
+    Then we instantiate \c dropArea and connect its \c changed() signal to
+    \c{DropSiteWindow}'s \c updateFormatsTable() slot.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/dropsitewindow.cpp constructor part2
+
+    We now set up the QTableWidget object, \c formatsTable. Its
+    horizontal header is set using a QStringList object, \c labels. The number
+    of columms are set to two and the table is not editable. Also, the
+    \c{formatTable}'s horizontal header is formatted to ensure that its second
+    column stretches to occupy additional space available.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/dropsitewindow.cpp constructor part3
+
+    Two QPushButton objects, \c clearButton and \c quitButton, are instantiated
+    and added to \c buttonBox - a QDialogButtonBox object. We use
+    QDialogButtonBox here to ensure that the push buttons are presented in a
+    layout that conforms to the platform's style.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/dropsitewindow.cpp constructor part4
+
+    The \l{QPushButton::clicked()}{clicked()} signals for \c quitButton and
+    \c clearButton are connected to \l{QWidget::close()}{close()} and
+    \c clear(), respectively.
+
+    For the layout, we use a QVBoxLayout, \c mainLayout, to arrange our widgets
+    vertically. We also set the window title to "Drop Site" and the minimum
+    size to 350x500 pixels.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/dropsitewindow.cpp constructor part5
+
+    We move on to the \c updateFormatsTable() function. This function updates
+    the \c formatsTable, displaying the MIME formats of the object dropped onto
+    the \c DropArea object. First, we set \l{QTableWidget}'s
+    \l{QTableWidget::setRowCount()}{rowCount} property to 0. Then, we validate
+    to ensure that the QMimeData object passed in is a valid object.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/dropsitewindow.cpp updateFormatsTable() part1
+
+    Once we are sure that \c mimeData is valid, we iterate through its
+    supported formats using the \l{The foreach Keyword}{foreach keyword}.
+    This keyword has the following format:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_dropsite.qdoc 0
+
+    In our example, \c format is the \a variable and the \a container is a
+    QStringList, obtained from \c mimeData->formats().
+
+    \note The \l{QMimeData::formats()}{formats()} function returns a
+    QStringList object, containing all the formats supported by the
+    \c mimeData.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/dropsitewindow.cpp updateFormatsTable() part2
+
+    Within each iteration, we create a QTableWidgetItem, \c formatItem and we
+    set its \l{QTableWidgetItem::setFlags()}{flags} to Qt::ItemIsEnabled, and
+    its \l{QTableWidgetItem::setTextAlignment()}{text alignment} to Qt::AlignTop
+    and Qt::AlignLeft.
+
+    A QString object, \c text, is customized to display data according to the
+    contents of \c format. We invoke {QString}'s \l{QString::simplified()}
+    {simplified()} function on \c text, to obtain a string that has no
+    additional space before, after or in between words.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/dropsitewindow.cpp updateFormatsTable() part3
+
+    If \c format contains a list of URLs, we iterate through them, using spaces
+    to separate them. On the other hand, if \c format contains an image, we
+    display the data by converting the text to hexadecimal.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/dropsitewindow.cpp updateFormatsTable() part4
+
+    Once \c text has been customized to contain the appropriate data, we insert
+    both \c format and \c text into \c formatsTable with
+    \l{QTableWidget::setItem()}{setItem()}. Lastly, we invoke
+    \l{QTableView::resizeColumnToContents()}{resizeColumnToContents()} on
+    \c{formatsTable}'s first column.
+
+    \section1 The main() Function
+
+    Within the \c main() function, we instantiate \c DropSiteWindow and invoke
+    its \l{QWidget::show()}{show()} function.
+
+    \snippet draganddrop/dropsite/main.cpp main() function
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/dynamiclayouts.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/dynamiclayouts.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..96b791b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/dynamiclayouts.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example layouts/dynamiclayouts
+    \title Dynamic Layouts Example
+
+    The Dynamic Layouts example shows how to move widgets around in
+    existing layouts.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/echoplugin.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/echoplugin.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..32ad15b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/echoplugin.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,222 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example tools/echoplugin
+    \title Echo Plugin Example
+
+    This example shows how to create a Qt plugin.
+
+    \image echopluginexample.png
+
+    There are two kinds of plugins in Qt: plugins that extend Qt
+    itself and plugins that extend applications written in Qt. In this
+    example, we show the procedure of implementing plugins that extend
+    applications. When you create a plugin you declare an interface,
+    which is a class with only pure virtual functions. This interface
+    is inherited by the class that implements the plugin. The class is
+    stored in a shared library and can therefore be loaded by
+    applications at run-time. When loaded, the plugin is dynamically
+    cast to the interface using Qt's \l{Meta-Object
+    System}{meta-object system}. The plugin \l{How to Create Qt
+    Plugins}{overview document} gives a high-level introduction to
+    plugins.
+    
+    We have implemented a plugin, the \c EchoPlugin, which implements
+    the \c EchoInterface. The interface consists of \c echo(), which
+    takes a QString as argument. The \c EchoPlugin returns the string
+    unaltered (i.e., it works as the familiar echo command found in
+    both Unix and Windows).
+
+    We test the plugin in \c EchoWindow: when you push the QPushButton
+    (as seen in the image above), the application sends the text in
+    the QLineEdit to the plugin, which echoes it back to the
+    application. The answer from the plugin is displayed in the
+    QLabel.
+
+
+    \section1 EchoWindow Class Definition
+
+    The \c EchoWindow class lets us test the \c EchoPlugin through a
+    GUI.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/echoplugin/echowindow/echowindow.h 0
+
+    We load the plugin in \c loadPlugin() and cast it to \c
+    EchoInterface. When the user clicks the \c button we take the 
+    text in \c lineEdit and call the interface's \c echo() with it. 
+
+
+    \section1 EchoWindow Class Implementation
+
+    We start with a look at the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/echoplugin/echowindow/echowindow.cpp 0
+
+    We create the widgets and set a title for the window. We then load
+    the plugin. \c loadPlugin() returns false if the plugin could not
+    be loaded, in which case we disable the widgets. If you wish a
+    more detailed error message, you can use
+    \l{QPluginLoader::}{errorString()}; we will look more closely at
+    QPluginLoader later.
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c sendEcho():
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/echoplugin/echowindow/echowindow.cpp 1
+
+    This slot is called when the user pushes \c button or presses
+    enter in \c lineEdit. We call \c echo() of the echo interface. In
+    our example this is the \c EchoPlugin, but it could be any plugin
+    that inherit the \c EchoInterface. We take the QString returned
+    from \c echo() and display it in the \c label.
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c createGUI():
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/echoplugin/echowindow/echowindow.cpp 2
+
+    We create the widgets and lay them out in a grid layout. We
+    connect the label and line edit to our \c sendEcho() slot.
+
+    Here is the \c loadPlugin() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/echoplugin/echowindow/echowindow.cpp 3
+
+    Access to plugins at run-time is provided by QPluginLoader. You
+    supply it with the filename of the shared library the plugin is
+    stored in and call \l{QPluginLoader::}{instance()}, which loads
+    and returns the root component of the plugin (i.e., it resolves
+    the type of the plugin and creates a QObject instance of it). If
+    the plugin was not successfully loaded, it will be null, so we
+    return false. If it was loaded correctly, we can cast the plugin
+    to our \c EchoInterface and return true. In the case that the
+    plugin loaded does not implement the \c EchoInterface, \c
+    instance() will return null, but this cannot happen in our
+    example. Notice that the location of the plugin is not the same
+    for all platforms.
+
+
+    \section1 EchoInterface Class Definition
+
+    The \c EchoInterface defines the functions that the plugin will
+    provide. An interface is a class that only consists of pure
+    virtual functions. If non virtual functions were present in the
+    class you would get misleading compile errors in the moc files.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/echoplugin/echowindow/echointerface.h 0
+
+    We declare \c echo(). In our \c EchoPlugin we use this method to
+    return, or echo, \a message.
+
+    We use the Q_DECLARE_INTERFACE macro to let \l{Meta-Object
+    System}{Qt's meta object system} aware of the interface. We do
+    this so that it will be possible to identify plugins that
+    implements the interface at run-time. The second argument is a
+    string that must identify the interface in a unique way. 
+
+
+    \section1 EchoPlugin Class Definition
+
+    We inherit both QObject and \c EchoInterface to make this class a
+    plugin. The Q_INTERFACES macro tells Qt which interfaces the class
+    implements. In our case we only implement the \c EchoInterface. 
+    If a class implements more than one interface, they are given as 
+    a comma separated list.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/echoplugin/plugin/echoplugin.h 0
+
+
+    \section1 EchoPlugin Class Implementation
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c echo():
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/echoplugin/plugin/echoplugin.cpp 0
+
+    We simply return the functions parameter. 
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/echoplugin/plugin/echoplugin.cpp 1
+
+    We use the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2 macro to let Qt know that the \c
+    EchoPlugin class is a plugin. The first parameter is the name of
+    the plugin; it is usual to give the plugin and the library file it
+    is stored in the same name.
+
+    \section1 The \c main() function
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/echoplugin/echowindow/main.cpp 0
+
+    We create an \c EchoWindow and display it as a top-level window.
+
+    \section1 The Profiles
+
+    When creating plugins the profiles need to be adjusted.
+    We show here what changes need to be done. 
+
+    The profile in the echoplugin directory uses the \c subdirs
+    template and simply includes includes to directories in which
+    the echo window and echo plugin lives:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/echoplugin/echoplugin.pro 0
+
+    The profile for the echo window does not need any plugin specific
+    settings. We move on to the plugin profile:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/echoplugin/plugin/plugin.pro 0
+
+    We need to set the TEMPLATE as we now want to make a library
+    instead of an executable. We also need to tell qmake that we are
+    creating a plugin. The \c EchoInterface that the plugin implements
+    lives in the \c echowindow directory, so we need to add that
+    directory to the include path. We set the TARGET of the project,
+    which is the name of the library file in which the plugin will be
+    stored; qmake appends the appropriate file extension depending on
+    the platform. By convention the target should have the same name
+    as the plugin (set with Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2)
+
+    \section1 Further reading and examples
+
+    You can find an overview of the macros needed to create plugins
+    \l{Macros for Defining Plugins}{here}.
+    
+    We give an example of a plugin that extend Qt in the \l{Style
+    Plugin Example}{style plugin} example. The \l{Plug & Paint
+    Example}{plug and paint} example shows how to create static
+    plugins.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/editabletreemodel.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/editabletreemodel.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..da01830
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/editabletreemodel.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,459 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/editabletreemodel
+    \title Editable Tree Model Example
+
+    This example shows how to implement a simple item-based tree model that can
+    be used with other classes the model/view framework.
+
+    \image itemviews-editabletreemodel.png
+
+    The model supports editable items, custom headers, and the ability to
+    insert and remove rows and columns. With these features, it is also
+    possible to insert new child items, and this is shown in the supporting
+    example code.
+
+    \note The model only shows the basic principles used when creating an
+    editable, hierarchical model. You may wish to use the \l{ModelTest}
+    project to test production models.
+
+    \section1 Overview
+
+    As described in the \l{Model Subclassing Reference}, models must
+    provide implementations for the standard set of model functions:
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{flags()}, \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{data()},
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{headerData()}, and
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{rowCount()}. In addition, hierarchical models,
+    such as this one, need to provide implementations of
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{index()} and \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{parent()}.
+
+    An editable model needs to provide implementations of
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{setData()} and
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{headerData()}, and must return a suitable
+    combination of flags from its \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{flags()} function.
+
+    Since this example allows the dimensions of the model to be changed,
+    we must also implement \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{insertRows()},
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{insertColumns()},
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{removeRows()}, and
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{removeColumns()}.
+
+    \section1 Design
+
+    As with the \l{itemviews/simpletreemodel}{Simple Tree Model} example,
+    the model simply acts as a wrapper around a collection
+    of instances of a \c TreeItem class. Each \c TreeItem is designed to
+    hold data for a row of items in a tree view, so it contains a list of
+    values corresponding to the data shown in each column.
+
+    Since QTreeView provides a row-oriented view onto a model, it is
+    natural to choose a row-oriented design for data structures that
+    will supply data via a model to this kind of view. Although this makes
+    the tree model less flexible, and possibly less useful for use with
+    more sophisticated views, it makes it less complex to design and easier
+    to implement.
+
+    \target Relations-between-internal-items
+    \table
+    \row \o \inlineimage itemviews-editabletreemodel-items.png
+    \o \bold{Relations between internal items}
+
+    When designing a data structure for use with a custom model, it is useful
+    to expose each item's parent via a function like
+    \l{TreeItem::parent}{TreeItem::parent()} because it will make
+    writing the model's own \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{parent()} function easier.
+    Similarly, a function like \l{TreeItem::child}{TreeItem::child()} is
+    helpful when implementing the model's \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{index()}
+    function. As a result, each \c TreeItem maintains information about
+    its parent and children, making it possible for us to traverse the tree
+    structure.
+
+    The diagram shows how \c TreeItem instances are connected via their
+    \l{TreeItem::parent}{parent()} and \l{TreeItem::child}{child()}
+    functions.
+
+    In the example shown, two top-level items, \bold{A} and
+    \bold{B}, can be obtained from the root item by calling its child()
+    function, and each of these items return the root node from their
+    parent() functions, though this is only shown for item \bold{A}.
+    \endtable
+
+    Each \c TreeItem stores data for each column in the row it represents
+    in its \c itemData private member (a list of QVariant objects).
+    Since there is a one-to-one mapping between each column in the view
+    and each entry in the list, we provide a simple
+    \l{TreeItem::data}{data()} function to read entries in the \c itemData
+    list and a \l{TreeItem::setData}{setData()} function to allow them to
+    be modified.
+    As with other functions in the item, this simplifies the implemention
+    of the model's \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{data()} and
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{setData()} functions.
+
+    We place an item at the root of the tree of items. This root item
+    corresponds to the null model index, \l{QModelIndex::}{QModelIndex()},
+    that is used to represent the parent of a top-level item when handling
+    model indexes.
+    Although the root item does not have a visible representation in any of
+    the standard views, we use its internal list of QVariant objects to
+    store a list of strings that will be passed to views for use as
+    horizontal header titles.
+
+    \table
+    \row \o \inlineimage itemviews-editabletreemodel-model.png
+    \o \bold{Accessing data via the model}
+
+    In the case shown in the diagram, the piece of information represented
+    by \bold{a} can be obtained using the standard model/view API:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_editabletreemodel.qdoc 0
+
+    Since each items holds pieces of data for each column in a given row,
+    there can be many model indexes that map to the same \c TreeItem object.
+    For example, the information represented by \bold{b} can be obtained
+    using the following code:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_editabletreemodel.qdoc 1
+
+    The same underlying \c TreeItem would be accessed to obtain information
+    for the other model indexes in the same row as \bold{b}.
+    \endtable
+
+    In the model class, \c TreeModel, we relate \c TreeItem objects to
+    model indexes by passing a pointer for each item when we create its
+    corresponding model index with QAbstractItemModel::createIndex() in
+    our \l{TreeModel::index}{index()} and \l{TreeModel::parent}{parent()}
+    implementations.
+    We can retrieve pointers stored in this way by calling the
+    \l{QModelIndex::}{internalPointer()} function on the relevant model
+    index - we create our own \l{TreeModel::getItem}{getItem()} function to
+    do this work for us, and call it from our \l{TreeModel::data}{data()}
+    and \l{TreeModel::parent}{parent()} implementations.
+
+    Storing pointers to items is convenient when we control how they are
+    created and destroyed since we can assume that an address obtained from
+    \l{QModelIndex::}{internalPointer()} is a valid pointer.
+    However, some models need to handle items that are obtained from other
+    components in a system, and in many cases it is not possible to fully
+    control how items are created or destroyed. In such situations, a pure
+    pointer-based approach needs to be supplemented by safeguards to ensure
+    that the model does not attempt to access items that have been deleted.
+
+    \table
+    \row \o \bold{Storing information in the underlying data structure}
+
+    Several pieces of data are stored as QVariant objects in the \c itemData
+    member of each \c TreeItem instance
+
+    The diagram shows how pieces of information,
+    represented by the labels \bold{a}, \bold{b} and \bold{c} in the
+    previous two diagrams, are stored in items \bold{A}, \bold{B} and
+    \bold{C} in the underlying data structure. Note that pieces of
+    information from the same row in the model are all obtained from the
+    same item. Each element in a list corresponds to a piece of information
+    exposed by each column in a given row in the model.
+
+    \o \inlineimage itemviews-editabletreemodel-values.png
+    \endtable
+
+    Since the \c TreeModel implementation has been designed for use with
+    QTreeView, we have added a restriction on the way it uses \c TreeItem
+    instances: each item must expose the same number of columns of data.
+    This makes viewing the model consistent, allowing us to use the root
+    item to determine the number of columns for any given row, and only
+    adds the requirement that we create items containing enough data for
+    the total number of columns. As a result, inserting and removing
+    columns are time-consuming operations because we need to traverse the
+    entire tree to modify every item.
+
+    An alternative approach would be to design the \c TreeModel class so
+    that it truncates or expands the list of data in individual \c TreeItem
+    instances as items of data are modified. However, this "lazy" resizing
+    approach would only allow us to insert and remove columns at the end of
+    each row and would not allow columns to be inserted or removed at
+    arbitrary positions in each row.
+
+    \target Relating-items-using-model-indexes
+    \table
+    \row
+    \o \inlineimage itemviews-editabletreemodel-indexes.png
+    \o \bold{Relating items using model indexes}
+
+    As with the \l{itemviews/simpletreemodel}{Simple Tree Model} example,
+    the \c TreeModel needs to be able to take a model index, find the
+    corresponding \c TreeItem, and return model indexes that correspond to
+    its parents and children. 
+
+    In the diagram, we show how the model's \l{TreeModel::parent()}{parent()}
+    implementation obtains the model index corresponding to the parent of
+    an item supplied by the caller, using the items shown in a
+    \l{Relations-between-internal-items}{previous diagram}.
+
+    A pointer to item \bold{C} is obtained from the corresponding model index
+    using the \l{QModelIndex::internalPointer()} function. The pointer was
+    stored internally in the index when it was created. Since the child
+    contains a pointer to its parent, we use its \l{TreeItem::parent}{parent()}
+    function to obtain a pointer to item \bold{B}. The parent model index is
+    created using the QAbstractItemModel::createIndex() function, passing
+    the pointer to item \bold{B} as the internal pointer.
+    \endtable
+
+    \section1 TreeItem Class Definition
+
+    The \c TreeItem class provides simple items that contain several
+    pieces of data, and which can provide information about their parent
+    and child items:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treeitem.h 0
+
+    We have designed the API to be similar to that provided by
+    QAbstractItemModel by giving each item functions to return the number
+    of columns of information, read and write data, and insert and remove
+    columns. However, we make the relationship between items explicit by
+    providing functions to deal with "children" rather than "rows".
+
+    Each item contains a list of pointers to child items, a pointer to its
+    parent item, and a list of QVariant objects that correspond to
+    information held in columns in a given row in the model.
+
+    \section1 TreeItem Class Implementation
+
+    Each \c TreeItem is constructed with a list of data and an optional
+    parent item:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 0
+
+    Initially, each item has no children. These are added to the item's
+    internal \c childItems member using the \c insertChildren() function
+    described later.
+
+    The destructor ensures that each child added to the item is deleted
+    when the item itself is deleted:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 1
+
+    \target TreeItem::parent
+    Since each item stores a pointer to its parent, the \c parent() function
+    is trivial:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 9
+
+    \target TreeItem::child
+    Three functions provide information about the children of an item.
+    \c child() returns a specific child from the internal list of children:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 2
+
+    The \c childCount() function returns the total number of children:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 3
+
+    The \c childNumber() function is used to determine the index of the child
+    in its parent's list of children. It accesses the parent's \c childItems
+    member directly to obtain this information:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 4
+
+    The root item has no parent item; for this item, we return zero to be
+    consistent with the other items.
+
+    The \c columnCount() function simply returns the number of elements in
+    the internal \c itemData list of QVariant objects:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 5
+
+    \target TreeItem::data
+    Data is retrieved using the \c data() function, which accesses the
+    appropriate element in the \c itemData list:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 6
+
+    \target TreeItem::setData
+    Data is set using the \c setData() function, which only stores values
+    in the \c itemData list for valid list indexes, corresponding to column
+    values in the model:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 11
+
+    To make implementation of the model easier, we return true to indicate
+    whether the data was set successfully, or false if an invalid column
+
+    Editable models often need to be resizable, enabling rows and columns to
+    be inserted and removed. The insertion of rows beneath a given model index
+    in the model leads to the insertion of new child items in the corresponding
+    item, handled by the \c insertChildren() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 7
+
+    This ensures that new items are created with the required number of columns
+    and inserted at a valid position in the internal \c childItems list.
+    Items are removed with the \c removeChildren() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 10
+
+    As discussed above, the functions for inserting and removing columns are
+    used differently to those for inserting and removing child items because
+    they are expected to be called on every item in the tree. We do this by
+    recursively calling this function on each child of the item:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 8
+
+    \section1 TreeModel Class Definition
+
+    The \c TreeModel class provides an implementation of the QAbstractItemModel
+    class, exposing the necessary interface for a model that can be edited and
+    resized.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treemodel.h 0
+
+    The constructor and destructor are specific to this model.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treemodel.h 1
+
+    Read-only tree models only need to provide the above functions. The
+    following public functions provide support for editing and resizing:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treemodel.h 2
+
+    To simplify this example, the data exposed by the model is organized into
+    a data structure by the model's \l{TreeModel::setupModelData}{setupModelData()}
+    function. Many real world models will not process the raw data at all, but
+    simply work with an existing data structure or library API.
+
+    \section1 TreeModel Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor creates a root item and initializes it with the header
+    data supplied:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 0
+
+    We call the internal \l{TreeModel::setupModelData}{setupModelData()}
+    function to convert the textual data supplied to a data structure we can
+    use with the model. Other models may be initialized with a ready-made
+    data structure, or use an API to a library that maintains its own data.
+
+    The destructor only has to delete the root item; all child items will
+    be recursively deleted by the \c TreeItem destructor.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 1
+
+    \target TreeModel::getItem
+    Since the model's interface to the other model/view components is based
+    on model indexes, and the internal data structure is item-based, many of
+    the functions implemented by the model need to be able to convert any
+    given model index to its corresponding item. For convenience and
+    consistency, we have defined a \c getItem() function to perform this
+    repetitive task:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 4
+
+    This function assumes that each model index it is passed corresponds to
+    a valid item in memory. If the index is invalid, or its internal pointer
+    does not refer to a valid item, the root item is returned instead.
+
+    The model's \c rowCount() implementation is simple: it first uses the
+    \c getItem() function to obtain the relevant item, then returns the
+    number of children it contains:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 8
+
+    By contrast, the \c columnCount() implementation does not need to look
+    for a particular item because all items are defined to have the same
+    number of columns associated with them.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 2
+
+    As a result, the number of columns can be obtained directly from the root
+    item.
+
+    To enable items to be edited and selected, the \c flags() function needs
+    to be implemented so that it returns a combination of flags that includes
+    the Qt::ItemIsEditable and Qt::ItemIsSelectable flags as well as
+    Qt::ItemIsEnabled:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 3
+
+    \target TreeModel::index
+    The model needs to be able to generate model indexes to allow other
+    components to request data and information about its structure. This task
+    is performed by the \c index() function, which is used to obtain model
+    indexes corresponding to children of a given parent item:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 5
+
+    In this model, we only return model indexes for child items if the parent
+    index is invalid (corresponding to the root item) or if it has a zero
+    column number.
+
+    We use the custom \l{TreeModel::getItem}{getItem()} function to obtain
+    a \c TreeItem instance that corresponds to the model index supplied, and
+    request its child item that corresponds to the specified row.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 6
+
+    Since each item contains information for an entire row of data, we create
+    a model index to uniquely identify it by calling
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{createIndex()} it with the row and column numbers
+    and a pointer to the item. In the \l{TreeModel::data}{data()} function,
+    we will use the item pointer and column number to access the data
+    associated with the model index; in this model, the row number is not
+    needed to identify data.
+
+    \target TreeModel::parent
+    The \c parent() function supplies model indexes for parents of items
+    by finding the corresponding item for a given model index, using its
+    \l{TreeItem::parent}{parent()} function to obtain its parent item,
+    then creating a model index to represent the parent. (See
+    \l{Relating-items-using-model-indexes}{the above diagram}).
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/editabletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 7
+
+    Items without parents, including the root item, are handled by returning
+    a null model index. Otherwise, a model index is created and returned as
+    in the \l{TreeModel::index}{index()} function, with a suitable row number,
+    but with a zero column number to be consistent with the scheme used in
+    the \l{TreeModel::index}{index()} implementation.
+
+    \target TreeModel::data
+    \target TreeModel::setupModelData
+
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/elasticnodes.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/elasticnodes.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..90f2f01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/elasticnodes.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example graphicsview/elasticnodes
+    \title Elastic Nodes Example
+
+    This GraphicsView example shows how to implement edges between nodes in a graph.
+
+    \image elasticnodes-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/extension.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/extension.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a0ca3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/extension.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example dialogs/extension
+    \title Extension Example
+
+    The Extension example shows how to add an extension to a QDialog
+    using the QAbstractButton::toggled() signal and the
+    QWidget::setVisible() slot.
+
+    \image extension-example.png Screenshot of the Extension example
+
+    The Extension application is a dialog that allows the user to
+    perform a simple search as well as a more advanced search.
+
+    The simple search has two options: \gui {Match case} and \gui
+    {Search from start}. The advanced search options include the
+    possibilities to search for \gui {Whole words}, \gui {Search
+    backward} and \gui {Search selection}. Only the simple search is
+    visible when the application starts. The advanced search options
+    are located in the application's extension part, and can be made
+    visible by pressing the \gui More button:
+
+    \image extension_more.png Screenshot of the Extension example
+
+    \section1 FindDialog Class Definition
+
+    The \c FindDialog class inherits QDialog. The QDialog class is the
+    base class of dialog windows. A dialog window is a top-level
+    window mostly used for short-term tasks and brief communications
+    with the user.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/extension/finddialog.h 0
+
+    The \c FindDialog widget is the main application widget, and
+    displays the application's search options and controlling
+    buttons.
+
+    In addition to a constructor, we declare the several child
+    widgets: We need a QLineEdit with an associated QLabel to let the
+    user type a word to search for, we need several  \l
+    {QCheckBox}{QCheckBox}es to facilitate the search options, and we
+    need three \l {QPushButton}{QPushButton}s: the \gui Find button to
+    start a search, the \gui More button to enable an advanced search,
+    and the \gui Close button to exit the application. Finally, we
+    need a QWidget representing the application's extension part.
+
+    \section1 FindDialog Class Implementation
+
+    In the constructor we first create the standard child widgets for
+    the simple search: the QLineEdit with the associated QLabel, two
+    of the \l {QCheckBox}{QCheckBox}es and all the \l
+    {QPushButton}{QPushButton}s.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/extension/finddialog.cpp 0
+
+    We give the options and buttons a shortcut key using the &
+    character. In the \gui {Find what} option's case, we also need to
+    use the QLabel::setBuddy() function to make the shortcut key work
+    as expected; then, when the user presses the shortcut key
+    indicated by the label, the keyboard focus is transferred to the
+    label's buddy widget, the QLineEdit.
+
+    We set the \gui Find button's default property to true, using the
+    QPushButton::setDefault() function. Then the push button will be
+    pressed if the user presses the Enter (or Return) key. Note that a
+    QDialog can only have one default button.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/extension/finddialog.cpp 2
+
+    Then we create the extension widget, and the \l
+    {QCheckBox}{QCheckBox}es associated with the advanced search
+    options.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/extension/finddialog.cpp 3
+
+    Now that the extension widget is created, we can connect the \gui
+    More button's \l{QAbstractButton::toggled()}{toggled()} signal to
+    the extension widget's \l{QWidget::setVisible()}{setVisible()} slot.
+
+    The QAbstractButton::toggled() signal is emitted whenever a
+    checkable button changes its state. The signal's argument is true
+    if the button is checked, or false if the button is unchecked. The
+    QWidget::setVisible() slot sets the widget's visible status. If
+    the status is true the widget is shown, otherwise the widget is
+    hidden.
+
+    Since we made the \gui More button checkable when we created it,
+    the connection makes sure that the extension widget is shown
+    depending on the state of \gui More button.
+
+    We also connect the \gui Close button to the QWidget::close()
+    slot, and we put the checkboxes associated with the advanced
+    search options into a layout we install on the extension widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/extension/finddialog.cpp 4
+
+    Before we create the main layout, we create several child layouts
+    for the widgets: First we allign the QLabel ans its buddy, the
+    QLineEdit, using a QHBoxLayout. Then we vertically allign the
+    QLabel and QLineEdit with the checkboxes associated with the
+    simple search, using a QVBoxLayout. We also create a QVBoxLayout
+    for the buttons. In the end we lay out the two latter layouts and
+    the extension widget using a QGridLayout.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/extension/finddialog.cpp 5
+
+    Finally, we hide the extension widget using the QWidget::hide()
+    function, making the application only show the simple search
+    options when it starts. When the user wants to access the advanced
+    search options, the dialog only needs to change the visibility of
+    the extension widget. Qt's layout management takes care of the
+    dialog's appearance.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/fetchmore.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/fetchmore.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5434098
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/fetchmore.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/fetchmore
+    \title Fetch More Example
+
+    The Fetch More example shows how two add items to an item view
+    model on demand.
+
+    \image fetchmore-example.png
+
+    The user of the example can enter a directory in the \gui
+    Directory line edit. The contents of the directory will
+    be listed in the list view below.
+
+    When you have large - or perhaps even infinite - data sets, you
+    will need to add items to the model in batches, and preferably only
+    when the items are needed by the view (i.e., when they are visible
+    in the view).
+
+    In this example, we implement \c FileListModel - an item view
+    model containing the entries of a directory. We also have \c
+    Window, which sets up the GUI and feeds the model with
+    directories.
+
+    Let's take a tour of \c {FileListModel}'s code.
+
+    \section1 FileListModel Class Definition
+
+    The \c FileListModel inherits QAbstractListModel and contains the
+    contents of a directory. It will add items to itself only when
+    requested to do so by the view.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/fetchmore/filelistmodel.h 0
+
+    The secret lies in the reimplementation of
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{fetchMore()} and
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{canFetchMore()} from QAbstractItemModel.
+    These functions are called by the item view when it needs more
+    items. 
+
+    The \c setDirPath() function sets the directory the model will
+    work on. We emit \c numberPopulated() each time we add a batch of
+    items to the model.
+
+    We keep all directory entries in \c fileList. \c fileCount is the
+    number of items that have been added to the model.
+
+    \section1 FileListModel Class Implementation
+
+    We start by checking out the \c setDirPath().
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/fetchmore/filelistmodel.cpp 0
+
+    We use a QDir to get the contents of the directory. We need to
+    inform QAbstractItemModel that we want to remove all items - if
+    any - from the model.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/fetchmore/filelistmodel.cpp 1
+
+    The \c canFetchMore() function is called by the view when it needs
+    more items. We return true if there still are entries that we have
+    not added to the model; otherwise, we return false.
+
+    And now, the \c fetchMore() function itself:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/fetchmore/filelistmodel.cpp 2
+
+    We first calculate the number of items to fetch.
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{beginInsertRows()} and
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::}{endInsertRows()} are mandatory for
+    QAbstractItemModel to keep up with the row insertions. Finally, we
+    emit \c numberPopulated(), which is picked up by \c Window.
+
+    To complete the tour, we also look at \c rowCount() and \c data().
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/fetchmore/filelistmodel.cpp 4
+
+    Notice that the row count is only the items we have added so far,
+    i.e., not the number of entries in the directory.
+
+    In \c data(), we return the appropriate entry from the \c
+    fileList. We also separate the batches with a different background
+    color.
+*/
+
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/filetree.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/filetree.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e53769c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/filetree.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,421 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+  \example xmlpatterns/filetree
+  \title File System Example
+
+  This example shows how to use QtXmlPatterns for querying non-XML
+  data that is modeled to look like XML. 
+
+  \tableofcontents
+
+  \section1 Introduction
+
+  The example models your computer's file system to look like XML and
+  allows you to query the file system with XQuery. Suppose we want to
+  find all the \c{cpp} files in the subtree beginning at
+  \c{/filetree}:
+
+  \image filetree_1-example.png
+
+  \section2 The User Inteface
+
+  The example is shown below. First, we use \c{File->Open Directory}
+  (not shown) to select the \c{/filetree} directory. Then we use the
+  combobox on the right to select the XQuery that searches for \c{cpp}
+  files (\c{listCPPFiles.xq}).  Selecting an XQuery runs the query,
+  which in this case traverses the model looking for all the \c{cpp}
+  files. The XQuery text and the query results are shown on the right:
+
+  \image filetree_2-example.png
+
+  Don't be mislead by the XML representation of the \c{/filetree}
+  directory shown on the left. This is not the node model itself but
+  the XML obtained by traversing the node model and outputting it as
+  XML. Constructing and using the custom node model is explained in
+  the code walk-through.
+
+  \section2 Running your own XQueries
+
+  You can write your own XQuery files and run them in the example
+  program. The file \c{xmlpatterns/filetree/queries.qrc} is the \l{The
+  Qt Resource System} {resource file} for this example. It is used in
+  \c{main.cpp} (\c{Q_INIT_RESOURCE(queries);}). It lists the XQuery
+  files (\c{.xq}) that can be selected in the combobox.
+
+  \quotefromfile examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/queries.qrc
+  \printuntil
+
+  To add your own queries to the example's combobox, store your
+  \c{.xq} files in the \c{examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/queries}
+  directory and add them to \c{queries.qrc} as shown above.
+
+  \section1 Code Walk-Through
+
+  The strategy is to create a custom node model that represents the
+  directory tree of the computer's file system. That tree structure is
+  non-XML data. The custom node model must have the same callback
+  interface as the XML node models that the QtXmlPatterns query engine
+  uses to execute queries. The query engine can then traverse the
+  custom node model as if it were traversing the node model built from
+  an XML document.
+
+  The required callback interface is in QAbstractXmlNodeModel, so we
+  create a custom node model by subclassing QAbstractXmlNodeModel and
+  providing implementations for its pure virtual functions. For many
+  cases, the implementations of several of the virtual functions are
+  always the same, so QtXmlPatterns also provides QSimpleXmlNodeModel,
+  which subclasses QAbstractXmlNodeModel and provides implementations
+  for the callback functions that you can ignore. By subclassing
+  QSimpleXmlNodeModel instead of QAbstractXmlNodeModel, you can reduce
+  development time.
+
+  \section2 The Custom Node Model Class: FileTree
+
+  The custom node model for this example is class \c{FileTree}, which
+  is derived from QSimpleXmlNodeModel. \c{FileTree} implements all the
+  callback functions that don't have standard implementations in
+  QSimpleXmlNodeModel. When you implement your own custom node model,
+  you must provide implementations for these callback functions:
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/filetree.h 0
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/filetree.h 1
+
+  The \c{FileTree} class declares four data members:
+  
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/filetree.h 2
+
+  The QVector \c{m_fileInfos} will contain the node model. Each
+  QFileInfo in the vector will represent a file or a directory in the
+  file system. At this point it is instructive to note that although
+  the node model class for this example (\c{FileTree}) actually builds
+  and contains the custom node model, building the custom node model
+  isn't always required. The node model class for the \l{QObject XML
+  Model Example} {QObject node model example} does not build its node
+  model but instead uses an already existing QObject tree as its node
+  model and just implements the callback interface for that already
+  existing data structure. In this file system example, however,
+  although we have an already existing data structure, i.e. the file
+  system, that data structure is not in memory and is not in a form we
+  can use. So we must build an analog of the file system in memory
+  from instances of QFileInfo, and we use that analog as the custom
+  node model.
+  
+  The two sets of flags, \c{m_filterAllowAll} and \c{m_sortFlags},
+  contain OR'ed flags from QDir::Filters and QDir::SortFlags
+  respectively. They are set by the \c{FileTree} constructor and used
+  in calls to QDir::entryInfoList() for getting the child list for a
+  directory node, i.e. a QFileInfoList containing the file and
+  directory nodes for all the immediate children of a directory.
+
+  The QVector \c{m_names} is an auxiliary component of the node
+  model. It holds the XML element and attribute names (QXmlName) for
+  all the node types that will be found in the node model. \c{m_names}
+  is indexed by the enum \c{FileTree::Type}, which specifies the node
+  types:
+
+  \target Node_Type
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/filetree.h 4
+
+  \c{Directory} and \c{File} will represent the XML element nodes for
+  directories and files respectively, and the other enum values will
+  represent the XML attribute nodes for a file's path, name, suffix,
+  its size in bytes, and its mime type. The \c{FileTree} constructor
+  initializes \c{m_names} with an appropriate QXmlName for each
+  element and attribute type:
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/filetree.cpp 2
+
+  Note that the constructor does \e{not} pre-build the entire node
+  model. Instead, the node model is built \e{incrementally} as the
+  query engine evaluates a query. To see how the query engine causes
+  the node model to be built incrementally, see \l{Building And
+  Traversing The Node Model}. To see how the query engine accesses the
+  node model, see \l{Accessing the node model}. See also: \l{Node
+  Model Building Strategy}.
+
+  \section3 Accessing The Node Model
+
+  Since the node model is stored outside the query engine in the
+  \c{FileTree} class, the query engine knows nothing about it and can
+  only access it by calling functions in the callback interface. When
+  the query engine calls any callback function to access data in the
+  node model, it passes a QXmlNodeModelIndex to identify the node in
+  the node model that it wants to access.  Hence all the virtual
+  functions in the callback interface use a QXmlNodeModelIndex to
+  uniquely identify a node in the model.
+
+  We use the index of a QFileInfo in \c{m_fileInfos} to uniquely
+  identify a node in the node model. To get the QXmlNodeModelIndex for
+  a QFileInfo, the class uses the private function \c{toNodeIndex()}:
+
+  \target main toNodeIndex
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/filetree.cpp 1
+
+  It searches the \c{m_fileInfos} vector for a QFileInfo that matches
+  \c{fileInfo}. If a match is found, its array index is passed to
+  QAbstractXmlNodeModel::createIndex() as the \c data value for the
+  QXmlNodeIndex. If no match is found, the unmatched QFileInfo is
+  appended to the vector, so this function is also doing the actual
+  incremental model building (see \l{Building And Traversing The Node
+  Model}).
+
+  Note that \c{toNodeIndex()} gets a \l{Node_Type} {node type} as the
+  second parameter, which it just passes on to
+  \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::createIndex()} {createIndex()} as the
+  \c{additionalData} value. Logically, this second parameter
+  represents a second dimension in the node model, where the first
+  dimension represents the \e element nodes, and the second dimension
+  represents each element's attribute nodes. The meaning is that each
+  QFileInfo in the \c{m_fileInfos} vector can represent an \e{element}
+  node \e{and} one or more \e{attribute} nodes. In particular, the
+  QFileInfo for a file will contain the values for the attribute nodes
+  path, name, suffix, size, and mime type (see
+  \c{FileTree::attributes()}). Since the attributes are contained in
+  the QFileInfo of the file element, there aren't actually any
+  attribute nodes in the node model. Hence, we can use a QVector for
+  \c{m_fileInfos}.
+
+  A convenience overloading of \l{toNodeIndex of convenience}
+  {toNodeIndex()} is also called in several places, wherever it is
+  known that the QXmlNodeModelIndex being requested is for a directory
+  or a file and not for an attribute. The convenience function takes
+  only the QFileInfo parameter and calls the other \l{main toNodeIndex}
+  {toNodeIndex()}, after obtaining either the Directory or File node
+  type directly from the QFileInfo:
+
+  \target toNodeIndex of convenience
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/filetree.cpp 0
+
+  Note that the auxiliary vector \c{m_names} is accessed using the
+  \l{Node_Type} {node type}, for example:
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/filetree.cpp 3
+
+  Most of the virtual functions in the callback interface are as
+  simple as the ones described so far, but the callback function used
+  for traversing (and building) the node model is more complex.
+
+  \section3 Building And Traversing The Node Model 
+
+  The node model in \c{FileTree} is not fully built before the query
+  engine begins evaluating the query. In fact, when the query engine
+  begins evaluating its first query, the only node in the node model
+  is the one representing the root directory for the selected part of
+  the file system. See \l{The UI Class: MainWindow} below for details
+  about how the UI triggers creation of the model.
+
+  The query engine builds the node model incrementally each time it
+  calls the \l{next node on axis} {nextFromSimpleAxis()} callback
+  function, as it traverses the node model to evaluate a query. Thus
+  the query engine only builds the region of the node model that it
+  needs for evaluating the query.
+
+  \l{next node on axis} {nextFromSimpleAxis()} takes an
+  \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::SimpleAxis} {axis identifier} and a
+  \l{QXmlNodeModelIndex} {node identifier} as parameters. The
+  \l{QXmlNodeModelIndex} {node identifier} represents the \e{context
+  node} (i.e. the query engine's current location in the model), and
+  the \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::SimpleAxis} {axis identifier}
+  represents the direction we want to move from the context node. The
+  function finds the appropriate next node and returns its
+  QXmlNodeModelIndex.
+
+  \l{next node on axis} {nextFromSimpleAxis()} is where most of the
+  work of implementing a custom node model will be required. The
+  obvious way to do it is to use a switch statement with a case for
+  each \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::SimpleAxis} {axis}.
+
+  \target next node on axis
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/filetree.cpp 4
+
+  The first thing this function does is call \l{to file info}
+  {toFileInfo()} to get the QFileInfo of the context node. The use of
+  QVector::at() here is guaranteed to succeed because the context node
+  must already be in the node model, and hence must have a QFileInfo
+  in \c{m_fileInfos}.
+
+  \target to file info
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/filetree.cpp 6
+
+  The \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::Parent} {Parent} case looks up the
+  context node's parent by constructing a QFileInfo from the context
+  node's \l{QFileInfo::absoluteFilePath()} {path} and passing it to
+  \l{main toNodeIndex} {toNodeIndex()} to find the QFileInfo in
+  \c{m_fileInfos}.
+
+  The \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::FirstChild} {FirstChild} case requires
+  that the context node must be a directory, because a file doesn't
+  have children. If the context node is not a directory, a default
+  constructed QXmlNodeModelIndex is returned. Otherwise,
+  QDir::entryInfoList() constructs a QFileInfoList of the context
+  node's children. The first QFileInfo in the list is passed to
+  \l{toNodeIndex of convenience} {toNodeIndex()} to get its
+  QXmlNodeModelIndex. Note that this will add the child to the node
+  model, if it isn't in the model yet.
+
+  The \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::PreviousSibling} {PreviousSibling} and
+  \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::NextSibling} {NextSibling} cases call the
+  \l{nextSibling helper} {nextSibling() helper function}. It takes the
+  QXmlNodeModelIndex of the context node, the QFileInfo of the context
+  node, and an offest of +1 or -1. The context node is a child of some
+  parent, so the function gets the parent and then gets the child list
+  for the parent. The child list is searched to find the QFileInfo of
+  the context node. It must be there. Then the offset is applied, -1
+  for the previous sibling and +1 for the next sibling. The resulting
+  index is passed to \l{toNodeIndex of convenience} {toNodeIndex()} to
+  get its QXmlNodeModelIndex. Note again that this will add the
+  sibling to the node model, if it isn't in the model yet.
+
+  \target nextSibling helper
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/filetree.cpp 5
+
+  \section2 The UI Class: MainWindow
+
+  The example's UI is a conventional Qt GUI application inheriting
+  QMainWindow and the Ui_MainWindow base class generated by 
+  \l{Qt Designer Manual} {Qt Designer}.
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/mainwindow.h 0
+
+  It contains the custom node model (\c{m_fileTree}) and an instance
+  of QXmlNodeModelIndex (\c{m_fileNode}) used for holding the node
+  index for the root of the file system subtree. \c{m_fileNode} will
+  be bound to a $variable in the XQuery to be evaluated.
+
+  Two actions of interest are handled by slot functions: \l{Selecting
+  A Directory To Model} and \l{Selecting And Running An XQuery}.
+
+  \section3 Selecting A Directory To Model
+
+  The user selects \c{File->Open Directory} to choose a directory to
+  be loaded into the custom node model. Choosing a directory signals
+  the \c{on_actionOpenDirectory_triggered()} slot:
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+  The slot function simply calls the private function
+  \c{loadDirectory()} with the path of the chosen directory:
+
+  \target the standard code pattern
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+  \c{loadDirectory()} demonstrates a standard code pattern for using
+  QtXmlPatterns programatically. First it gets the node model index
+  for the root of the selected directory. Then it creates an instance
+  of QXmlQuery and calls QXmlQuery::bindVariable() to bind the node
+  index to the XQuery variable \c{$fileTree}. It then calls
+  QXmlQuery::setQuery() to load the XQuery text.
+
+  \note QXmlQuery::bindVariable() must be called \e before calling
+  QXmlQuery::setQuery(), which loads and parses the XQuery text and
+  must have access to the variable binding as the text is parsed.
+
+  The next lines create an output device for outputting the query
+  result, which is then used to create a QXmlFormatter to format the
+  query result as XML. QXmlQuery::evaluateTo() is called to run the
+  query, and the formatted XML output is displayed in the left panel
+  of the UI window.
+
+  Finally, the private function \l{Selecting And Running An XQuery}
+  {evaluateResult()} is called to run the currently selected XQuery
+  over the custom node model.
+
+  \note As described in \l{Building And Traversing The Node Model},
+  the \c FileTree class wants to build the custom node model
+  incrementally as it evaluates the XQuery. But, because the
+  \c{loadDirectory()} function runs the \c{wholeTree.xq} XQuery, it
+  actually builds the entire node model anyway. See \l{Node Model
+  Building Strategy} for a discussion about building your custom node
+  model.
+
+  \section3 Selecting And Running An XQuery
+
+  The user chooses an XQuery from the menu in the combobox on the
+  right. Choosing an XQuery signals the
+  \c{on_queryBox_currentIndexChanged()} slot:
+  
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+  The slot function opens and loads the query file and then calls the
+  private function \c{evaluateResult()} to run the query:
+  
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+  \c{evaluateResult()} is a second example of the same code pattern
+  shown in \l{the standard code pattern} {loadDirectory()}. In this
+  case, it runs the XQuery currently selected in the combobox instead
+  of \c{qrc:/queries/wholeTree.xq}, and it outputs the query result to
+  the panel on the lower right of the UI window.
+
+  \section2 Node Model Building Strategy
+
+  We saw that the \l{The Custom Node Model Class: FileTree} {FileTree}
+  tries to build its custom node model incrementally, but we also saw
+  that the \l{the standard code pattern} {MainWindow::loadDirectory()}
+  function in the UI class immediately subverts the incremental build
+  by running the \c{wholeTree.xq} XQuery, which traverses the entire
+  selected directory, thereby causing the entire node model to be
+  built.
+
+  If we want to preserve the incremental build capability of the
+  \c{FileTree} class, we can strip the running of \c{wholeTree.xq} out
+  of \l{the standard code pattern} {MainWindow::loadDirectory()}:
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/mainwindow.cpp 5
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/filetree/mainwindow.cpp 6
+
+  Note, however, that \c{FileTree} doesn't have the capability of
+  deleting all or part of the node model. The node model, once built,
+  is only deleted when the \c{FileTree} instance goes out of scope.
+
+  In this example, each element node in the node model represents a
+  directory or a file in the computer's file system, and each node is
+  represented by an instance of QFileInfo. An instance of QFileInfo is
+  not costly to produce, but you might imagine a node model where
+  building new nodes is very costly. In such cases, the capability to
+  build the node model incrementally is important, because it allows
+  us to only build the region of the model we need for evaluating the
+  query. In other cases, it will be simpler to just build the entire
+  node model. 
+
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/findfiles.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/findfiles.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db41f43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/findfiles.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,263 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example dialogs/findfiles
+    \title Find Files Example
+
+    The Find Files example shows how to use QProgressDialog to provide
+    feedback on the progress of a slow operation. The example also
+    shows how to use QFileDialog to facilitate browsing, how to use
+    QTextStream's streaming operators to read a file, and how to use
+    QTableWidget to provide standard table display facilities for
+    applications. In addition, files can be opened using the
+    QDesktopServices class.
+
+    \image findfiles-example.png Screenshot of the Find Files example
+
+    With the Find Files application the user can search for files in a
+    specified directory, matching a specified file name (using wild
+    cards if appropiate) and containing a specified text.
+
+    The user is provided with a \gui Browse option, and the result of
+    the search is displayed in a table with the names of the files
+    found and their sizes. In addition the application provides a
+    total count of the files found.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The \c Window class inherits QWidget, and is the main application
+    widget. It shows the search options, and displays the search
+    results.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/findfiles/window.h 0
+
+    We need two private slots: The \c browse() slot is called whenever
+    the user wants to browse for a directory to search in, and the \c
+    find() slot is called whenever the user requests a search to be
+    performed by pressing the \gui Find button.
+
+    In addition we declare several private functions: We use the \c
+    findFiles() function to search for files matching the user's
+    specifications, we call the \c showFiles() function to display the
+    results, and we use \c createButton(), \c createComboBox() and \c
+    createFilesTable() when we are constructing the widget.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    In the constructor we first create the application's widgets.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/findfiles/window.cpp 0
+
+    We create the application's buttons using the private \c
+    createButton() function. Then we create the comboboxes associated
+    with the search specifications, using the private \c
+    createComboBox() function. We also create the application's labels
+    before we use the private \c createFilesTable() function to create
+    the table displaying the search results.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/findfiles/window.cpp 1
+
+    Then we add all the widgets to a main layout using QGridLayout. We
+    have, however, put the \c Find and \c Quit buttons and a
+    stretchable space in a separate QHBoxLayout first, to make the
+    buttons appear in the \c Window widget's bottom right corner.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/findfiles/window.cpp 2
+
+    The \c browse() slot presents a file dialog to the user, using the
+    QFileDialog class. QFileDialog enables a user to traverse the file
+    system in order to select one or many files or a directory. The
+    easiest way to create a QFileDialog is to use the convenience
+    static functions.
+
+    Here we use the static QFileDialog::getExistingDirectory()
+    function which returns an existing directory selected by the
+    user. Then we display the directory in the directory combobox
+    using the QComboBox::addItem() function, and updates the current
+    index.
+
+    QComboBox::addItem() adds an item to the combobox with the given
+    text (if it is not already present in the list), and containing
+    the specified userData. The item is appended to the list of
+    existing items.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/findfiles/window.cpp 3
+
+    The \c find() slot is called whenever the user requests a new
+    search by pressing the \gui Find button.
+
+    First we eliminate any previous search results by setting the
+    table widgets row count to zero. Then we retrieve the
+    specified file name, text and directory path from the respective
+    comboboxes.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/findfiles/window.cpp 4
+
+    We use the directory's path to create a QDir; the QDir class
+    provides access to directory structures and their contents. We
+    create a list of the files (contained in the newly created QDir)
+    that match the specified file name. If the file name is empty
+    the list will contain all the files in the directory.
+
+    Then we search through all the files in the list, using the private
+    \c findFiles() function, eliminating the ones that don't contain
+    the specified text. And finally, we display the results using the
+    private \c showFiles() function.
+
+    If the user didn't specify any text, there is no reason to search
+    through the files, and we display the results immediately.
+
+    \image findfiles_progress_dialog.png Screenshot of the Progress Dialog
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/findfiles/window.cpp 5
+
+    In the private \c findFiles() function we search through a list of
+    files, looking for the ones that contain a specified text. This
+    can be a very slow operation depending on the number of files as
+    well as their sizes. In case there are a large number of files, or
+    there exists some large files on the list, we provide a
+    QProgressDialog.
+
+    The QProgressDialog class provides feedback on the progress of a
+    slow operation. It is used to give the user an indication of how
+    long an operation is going to take, and to demonstrate that the
+    application has not frozen. It can also give the user an
+    opportunity to abort the operation.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/findfiles/window.cpp 6
+
+    We run through the files, one at a time, and for each file we
+    update the QProgressDialog value. This property holds the current
+    amount of progress made. We also update the progress dialog's
+    label.
+
+    Then we call the QCoreApplication::processEvents() function using
+    the QApplication object. In this way we interleave the display of
+    the progress made with the process of searching through the files
+    so the application doesn't appear to be frozen.
+
+    The QApplication class manages the GUI application's control flow
+    and main settings. It contains the main event loop, where all
+    events from the window system and other sources are processed and
+    dispatched. QApplication inherits QCoreApplication.  The
+    QCoreApplication::processEvents() function processes all pending
+    events according to the specified QEventLoop::ProcessEventFlags
+    until there are no more events to process. The default flags are
+    QEventLoop::AllEvents.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/findfiles/window.cpp 7
+
+    After updating the QProgressDialog, we create a QFile using the
+    QDir::absoluteFilePath() function which returns the absolute path
+    name of a file in the directory. We open the file in read-only
+    mode, and read one line at a time using QTextStream.
+
+    The QTextStream class provides a convenient interface for reading
+    and writing text. Using QTextStream's streaming operators, you can
+    conveniently read and write words, lines and numbers.
+
+    For each line we read we check if the QProgressDialog has been
+    canceled. If it has, we abort the operation, otherwise we check if
+    the line contains the specified text. When we find the text within
+    one of the files, we add the file's name to a list of found files
+    that contain the specified text, and start searching a new file.
+
+    Finally, we return the list of the files found.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/findfiles/window.cpp 8
+
+    Both the \c findFiles() and \c showFiles() functions are called from
+    the \c find() slot. In the \c showFiles() function we run through
+    the provided list of file names, adding each file name to the
+    first column in the table widget and retrieving the file's size using
+    QFile and QFileInfo for the second column.
+
+    We also update the total number of files found.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/findfiles/window.cpp 9
+
+    The private \c createButton() function is called from the
+    constructor. We create a QPushButton with the provided text,
+    connect it to the provided slot, and return a pointer to the
+    button.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/findfiles/window.cpp 10
+
+    The private \c createComboBox() function is also called from the
+    contructor. We create a QComboBox with the given text, and make it
+    editable.
+
+    When the user enters a new string in an editable combobox, the
+    widget may or may not insert it, and it can insert it in several
+    locations, depending on the QComboBox::InsertPolicy. The default
+    policy is is QComboBox::InsertAtBottom.
+
+    Then we add the provided text to the combobox, and specify the
+    widget's size policies, before we return a pointer to the
+    combobox.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/findfiles/window.cpp 11
+
+    The private \c createFilesTable() function is called from the
+    constructor. In this function we create the QTableWidget that
+    will display the search results. We set its horizontal headers and
+    their resize mode.
+
+    QTableWidget inherits QTableView which provides a default
+    model/view implementation of a table view. The
+    QTableView::horizontalHeader() function returns the table view's
+    horizontal header as a QHeaderView. The QHeaderView class provides
+    a header row or header column for item views, and the
+    QHeaderView::setResizeMode() function sets the constraints on how
+    the section in the header can be resized.
+
+    Finally, we hide the QTableWidget's vertical headers using the
+    QWidget::hide() function, and remove the default grid drawn for
+    the table using the QTableView::setShowGrid() function.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/findfiles/window.cpp 12
+
+    The \c openFileOfItem() slot is invoked when the user double
+    clicks on a cell in the table. The QDesktopServices::openUrl()
+    knows how to open a file given the file name.
+*/
+
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/flowlayout.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/flowlayout.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..557ba39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/flowlayout.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example layouts/flowlayout
+    \title Flow Layout Example
+
+    The Flow Layout example demonstrates a custom layout that arranges child widgets from
+    left to right and top to bottom in a top-level widget.
+
+    \image flowlayout-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/fontsampler.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/fontsampler.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1fbb879
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/fontsampler.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+  \example painting/fontsampler
+  \title Font Sampler Example
+
+  The Font Sampler example shows how to preview and print multi-page documents.
+
+  \image fontsampler-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/formextractor.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/formextractor.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b98f5bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/formextractor.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example webkit/formextractor
+    \title Form Extractor Example
+
+    The Form Extractor example shows how to use QWebFrame with JavaScript to
+    extract form data.
+
+    \image formextractor-example.png
+
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/fortuneclient.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/fortuneclient.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cbdd164
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/fortuneclient.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,174 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example network/fortuneclient
+    \title Fortune Client Example
+
+    The Fortune Client example shows how to create a client for a simple
+    network service using QTcpSocket. It is intended to be run alongside the
+    \l{network/fortuneserver}{Fortune Server} example or
+    the \l{network/threadedfortuneserver}{Threaded Fortune Server} example.
+
+    \image fortuneclient-example.png Screenshot of the Fortune Client example
+
+    This example uses a simple QDataStream-based data transfer protocol to
+    request a line of text from a fortune server (from the
+    \l{network/fortuneserver}{Fortune Server} example). The client requests a
+    fortune by simply connecting to the server. The server then responds with
+    a 16-bit (quint16) integer containing the length of the fortune text,
+    followed by a QString.
+
+    QTcpSocket supports two general approaches to network programming:
+
+    \list
+
+    \o \e{The asynchronous (non-blocking) approach.} Operations are scheduled
+    and performed when control returns to Qt's event loop. When the operation
+    is finished, QTcpSocket emits a signal. For example,
+    QTcpSocket::connectToHost() returns immediately, and when the connection
+    has been established, QTcpSocket emits
+    \l{QTcpSocket::connected()}{connected()}.
+
+    \o \e{The synchronous (blocking) approach.} In non-GUI and multithreaded
+    applications, you can call the \c waitFor...() functions (e.g.,
+    QTcpSocket::waitForConnected()) to suspend the calling thread until the
+    operation has completed, instead of connecting to signals.
+
+    \endlist
+
+    In this example, we will demonstrate the asynchronous approach. The
+    \l{network/blockingfortuneclient}{Blocking Fortune Client} example
+    illustrates the synchronous approach.
+
+    Our class contains some data and a few private slots:
+
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneclient/client.h 0
+
+    Other than the widgets that make up the GUI, the data members include a
+    QTcpSocket pointer, a copy of the fortune text currently displayed, and
+    the size of the packet we are currently reading (more on this later).
+
+    The socket is initialized in the Client constructor. We'll pass the main
+    widget as parent, so that we won't have to worry about deleting the
+    socket:
+
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneclient/client.cpp 0
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneclient/client.cpp 1
+
+    The only QTcpSocket signals we need in this example are
+    QTcpSocket::readyRead(), signifying that data has been received, and
+    QTcpSocket::error(), which we will use to catch any connection errors:
+
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneclient/client.cpp 3
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneclient/client.cpp 5
+
+    Clicking the \gui{Get Fortune} button will invoke the \c
+    requestNewFortune() slot:
+
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneclient/client.cpp 6
+
+    In this slot, we initialize \c blockSize to 0, preparing to read a new block
+    of data.  Because we allow the user to click \gui{Get Fortune} before the
+    previous connection finished closing, we start off by aborting the
+    previous connection by calling QTcpSocket::abort(). (On an unconnected
+    socket, this function does nothing.) We then proceed to connecting to the
+    fortune server by calling QTcpSocket::connectToHost(), passing the
+    hostname and port from the user interface as arguments.
+
+    As a result of calling \l{QTcpSocket::connectToHost()}{connectToHost()},
+    one of two things can happen:
+
+    \list
+    \o \e{The connection is established.} In this case, the server will send us a
+    fortune. QTcpSocket will emit \l{QTcpSocket::readyRead()}{readyRead()}
+    every time it receives a block of data.
+
+    \o \e{An error occurs.} We need to inform the user if the connection
+    failed or was broken. In this case, QTcpSocket will emit
+    \l{QTcpSocket::error()}{error()}, and \c Client::displayError() will be
+    called.
+    \endlist
+
+    Let's go through the \l{QTcpSocket::error()}{error()} case first:
+
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneclient/client.cpp 13
+
+    We pop up all errors in a dialog using
+    QMessageBox::information(). QTcpSocket::RemoteHostClosedError is silently
+    ignored, because the fortune server protocol ends with the server closing
+    the connection.
+
+    Now for the \l{QTcpSocket::readyRead()}{readyRead()} alternative. This
+    signal is connected to \c Client::readFortune():
+
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneclient/client.cpp 8
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneclient/client.cpp 10
+
+    The protocol is based on QDataStream, so we start by creating a stream
+    object, passing the socket to QDataStream's constructor. We then
+    explicitly set the protocol version of the stream to QDataStream::Qt_4_0
+    to ensure that we're using the same version as the fortune server, no
+    matter which version of Qt the client and server use.
+
+    Now, TCP is based on sending a stream of data, so we cannot expect to get
+    the entire fortune in one go. Especially on a slow network, the data can
+    be received in several small fragments. QTcpSocket buffers up all incoming
+    data and emits \l{QTcpSocket::readyRead()}{readyRead()} for every new
+    block that arrives, and it is our job to ensure that we have received all
+    the data we need before we start parsing. The server's response starts
+    with the size of the packet, so first we need to ensure that we can read
+    the size, then we will wait until QTcpSocket has received the full packet.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneclient/client.cpp 11
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneclient/client.cpp 12
+
+    We proceed by using QDataStream's streaming operator to read the fortune
+    from the socket into a QString. Once read, we can call QLabel::setText()
+    to display the fortune.
+
+    \sa {Fortune Server Example}, {Blocking Fortune Client Example}
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/fortuneserver.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/fortuneserver.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e6a7f85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/fortuneserver.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example network/fortuneserver
+    \title Fortune Server Example
+
+    The Fortune Server example shows how to create a server for a simple
+    network service. It is intended to be run alongside the
+    \l{network/fortuneclient}{Fortune Client} example or the the
+    \l{network/blockingfortuneclient}{Blocking Fortune Client} example.
+
+    \image fortuneserver-example.png Screenshot of the Fortune Server example
+
+    This example uses QTcpServer to accept incoming TCP connections, and a
+    simple QDataStream based data transfer protocol to write a fortune to the
+    connecting client (from the \l{network/fortuneclient}{Fortune Client}
+    example), before closing the connection.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneserver/server.h 0
+
+    The server is implemented using a simple class with only one slot, for
+    handling incoming connections.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneserver/server.cpp 1
+
+    In its constructor, our Server object calls QTcpServer::listen() to set up
+    a QTcpServer to listen on all addresses, on an arbitrary port. In then
+    displays the port QTcpServer picked in a label, so that user knows which
+    port the fortune client should connect to.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneserver/server.cpp 2
+
+    Our server generates a list of random fortunes that is can send to
+    connecting clients.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneserver/server.cpp 3
+
+    When a client connects to our server, QTcpServer will emit
+    QTcpServer::newConnection(). In turn, this will invoke our
+    sendFortune() slot:
+
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneserver/server.cpp 4
+
+    The purpose of this slot is to select a random line from our list of
+    fortunes, encode it into a QByteArray using QDataStream, and then write it
+    to the connecting socket. This is a common way to transfer binary data
+    using QTcpSocket. First we create a QByteArray and a QDataStream object,
+    passing the bytearray to QDataStream's constructor. We then explicitly set
+    the protocol version of QDataStream to QDataStream::Qt_4_0 to ensure that
+    we can communicate with clients from future versions of Qt. (See
+    QDataStream::setVersion().)
+
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneserver/server.cpp 6
+
+    At the start of our QByteArray, we reserve space for a 16 bit integer that
+    will contain the total size of the data block we are sending. We continue
+    by streaming in a random fortune. Then we seek back to the beginning of
+    the QByteArray, and overwrite the reserved 16 bit integer value with the
+    total size of the array. By doing this, we provide a way for clients to
+    verify how much data they can expect before reading the whole packet.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneserver/server.cpp 7
+
+    We then call QTcpServer::newPendingConnection(), which returns the
+    QTcpSocket representing the server side of the connection. By connecting
+    QTcpSocket::disconnected() to QObject::deleteLater(), we ensure that the
+    socket will be deleted after disconnecting.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/fortuneserver/server.cpp 8
+
+    The encoded fortune is written using QTcpSocket::write(), and we finally
+    call QTcpSocket::disconnectFromHost(), which will close the connection
+    after QTcpSocket has finished writing the fortune to the network. Because
+    QTcpSocket works asynchronously, the data will be written after this
+    function returns, and control goes back to Qt's event loop. The socket
+    will then close, which in turn will cause QObject::deleteLater() to delete
+    it.
+
+    \sa {Fortune Client Example}, {Threaded Fortune Server Example}
+ */
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/framebufferobject.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/framebufferobject.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3220641
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/framebufferobject.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example opengl/framebufferobject
+    \title Framebuffer Object Example
+
+    The Framebuffer Object example demonstrates how to use the
+    QGLFramebufferObject class to render into an off-screen buffer and
+    use the contents as a texture in a QGLWidget.
+
+    \image framebufferobject-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/framebufferobject2.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/framebufferobject2.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..721706a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/framebufferobject2.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example opengl/framebufferobject2
+    \title Framebuffer Object 2 Example
+
+    The Framebuffer Object 2 example demonstrates how to use the
+    QGLFramebufferObject class to render into an off-screen buffer and
+    use the contents as a texture in a QGLWidget.
+
+    \image framebufferobject2-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/fridgemagnets.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/fridgemagnets.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..de95b52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/fridgemagnets.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,374 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example draganddrop/fridgemagnets
+    \title Fridge Magnets Example
+
+    The Fridge Magnets example shows how to supply more than one type
+    of MIME-encoded data with a drag and drop operation.
+
+    \image fridgemagnets-example.png
+
+    With this application the user can play around with a collection
+    of fridge magnets, using drag and drop to form new sentences from
+    the words on the magnets. The example consists of two classes:
+
+    \list
+        \o \c DragLabel is a custom widget representing one
+           single fridge magnet.
+        \o \c DragWidget provides the main application window.
+    \endlist
+
+    We will first take a look at the \c DragLabel class, then we will
+    examine the \c DragWidget class.
+
+    \section1 DragLabel Class Definition
+
+    Each fridge magnet is represented by an instance of the \c
+    DragLabel class:
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/draglabel.h 0
+
+    Each instance of this QLabel subclass will be used to display an
+    pixmap generated from a text string. Since we cannot store both
+    text and a pixmap in a standard label, we declare a private variable
+    to hold the original text, and we define an additional member
+    function to allow it to be accessed.
+
+    \section1 DragLabel Class Implementation
+
+    In the \c DragLabel constructor, we first create a QImage object
+    on which we will draw the fridge magnet's text and frame:
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/draglabel.cpp 0
+
+    Its size depends on the current font size, and its format is
+    QImage::Format_ARGB32_Premultiplied; i.e., the image is stored
+    using a premultiplied 32-bit ARGB format (0xAARRGGBB).
+
+    We then construct a font object that uses the application's
+    default font, and set its style strategy. The style strategy tells
+    the font matching algorithm what type of fonts should be used to
+    find an appropriate default family. The QFont::ForceOutline forces
+    the use of outline fonts.
+
+    To draw the text and frame onto the image, we use the QPainter
+    class. QPainter provides highly optimized methods to do most of
+    the drawing GUI programs require. It can draw everything from
+    simple lines to complex shapes like pies and chords. It can also
+    draw aligned text and pixmaps.
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/draglabel.cpp 1
+
+    A painter can be activated by passing a paint device to the
+    constructor, or by using the \l{QPainter::}{begin()} method as we
+    do in this example. The \l{QPainter::}{end()} method deactivates
+    it. Note that the latter function is called automatically upon
+    destruction when the painter is actived by its constructor. The
+    QPainter::Antialiasing render hint ensures that the paint engine
+    will antialias the edges of primitives if possible.
+
+    When the painting is done, we convert our image to a pixmap using
+    QPixmap's \l {QPixmap::}{fromImage()} method. This method also
+    takes an optional flags argument, and converts the given image to
+    a pixmap using the specified flags to control the conversion (the
+    flags argument is a bitwise-OR of the Qt::ImageConversionFlags;
+    passing 0 for flags sets all the default options).
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/draglabel.cpp 2
+
+    Finally, we set the label's \l{QLabel::pixmap}{pixmap property}
+    and store the label's text for later use.
+
+    \e{Note that setting the pixmap clears any previous content, including
+    any text previously set using QLabel::setText(), and disables
+    the label widget's buddy shortcut, if any.}
+
+    \section1 DragWidget Class Definition
+
+    The \c DragWidget class inherits QWidget, providing support for
+    drag and drop operations:
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.h 0
+
+    To make the widget responsive to drag and drop operations, we simply
+    reimplement the \l{QWidget::}{dragEnterEvent()},
+    \l{QWidget::}{dragMoveEvent()} and \l{QWidget::}{dropEvent()} event
+    handlers inherited from QWidget.
+
+    We also reimplement \l{QWidget::}{mousePressEvent()} to make the
+    widget responsive to mouse clicks. This is where we will write code
+    to start drag and drop operations.
+
+    \section1 DragWidget Class Implementation
+
+    In the constructor, we first open the file containing the words on
+    our fridge magnets:
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 0
+
+    QFile is an I/O device for reading and writing text and binary
+    files and resources, and may be used by itself or in combination
+    with QTextStream or QDataStream. We have chosen to read the
+    contents of the file using the QTextStream class that provides a
+    convenient interface for reading and writing text.
+
+    We then create the fridge magnets. As long as there is data (the
+    QTextStream::atEnd() method returns true if there is no more data
+    to be read from the stream), we read one line at a time using
+    QTextStream's \l {QTextStream::}{readLine()} method.
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 1
+
+    For each line, we create a \c DragLabel object using the read line
+    as text, we calculate its position and ensure that it is visible by
+    calling the QWidget::show() method. We set the Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose
+    attribute on each label to ensure that any unused labels will be
+    deleted; we will need to create new labels and delete old ones when
+    they are dragged around, and this ensures that the example does not
+    leak memory.
+
+    We also set the \c FridgeMagnets widget's palette, minimum size
+    and window title.
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 2
+
+    Finally, to enable our user to move the fridge magnets around, we
+    must also set the \c FridgeMagnets widget's
+    \l{QWidget::acceptDrops}{acceptDrops} property.
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 3
+
+    Setting this property to true announces to the system that this
+    widget \e may be able to accept drop events (events that are sent
+    when drag and drop actions are completed). Later, we will
+    implement the functions that ensure that the widget accepts the
+    drop events it is interested in.
+
+    \section2 Dragging
+
+    Let's take a look at the \l{QWidget::}{mousePressEvent()} event
+    handler, where drag and drop operations begin:
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 13
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 14
+
+    Mouse events occur when a mouse button is pressed or released
+    inside a widget, or when the mouse cursor is moved. By
+    reimplementing the \l{QWidget::}{mousePressEvent()} method we
+    ensure that we will receive mouse press events for the widget
+    containing the fridge magnets.
+
+    Whenever we receive such an event, we first check to see if the
+    position of the click coincides with one of the labels. If not,
+    we simply return.
+
+    If the user clicked a label, we determine the position of the
+    \e{hot spot} (the position of the click relative to the top-left
+    corner of the label). We create a byte array to store the label's
+    text and the hot spot, and we use a QDataStream object to stream
+    the data into the byte array.
+
+    With all the information in place, we create a new QMimeData object.
+    As mentioned above, QMimeData objects associate the data that they
+    hold with the corresponding MIME types to ensure that information
+    can be safely transferred between applications. The
+    \l{QMimeData::}{setData()} method sets the data associated with a
+    given MIME type. In our case, we associate our item data with the
+    custom \c application/x-fridgemagnet type.
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 15
+
+    Note that we also associate the magnet's text with the
+    \c text/plain MIME type using QMimeData's \l{QMimeData::}{setText()}
+    method. Below, we will see how our widget detects both these MIME
+    types with its event handlers.
+
+    Finally, we create a QDrag object. It is the QDrag class that
+    handles most of the details of a drag and drop operation,
+    providing support for MIME-based drag and drop data transfer. The
+    data to be transferred by the drag and drop operation is contained
+    in a QMimeData object. When we call QDrag's
+    \l{QDrag::}{setMimeData()} method the ownership of our item data is
+    transferred to the QDrag object.
+
+    We call the \l{QDrag::}{setPixmap()} function to set the pixmap used
+    to represent the data during the drag and drop operation.
+    Typically, this pixmap shows an icon that represents the MIME type
+    of the data being transferred, but any pixmap can be used. In this
+    example, we simply use the pixmap used by the label itself to make
+    it look like the fridge magnet itself is being moved.
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 16
+
+    We also specify the cursor's hot spot, its position relative to the
+    top-level corner of the drag pixmap, to be the point we calculated
+    above. This makes the process of dragging the label feel more natural
+    because the cursor always points to the same place on the label
+    during the drag operation. 
+
+    We start the drag operation using QDrag's \l{QDrag::}{exec()} function,
+    requesting that the magnet is copied when the drag is completed.
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 17
+
+    The function returns the drop action actually performed by the user
+    (this can be either a copy or a move action in this case); if this
+    action is equal to Qt::MoveAction we will close the activated
+    fridge magnet widget because we will create a new one to replace it
+    (see the \l{drop}{dropEvent()} implementation). Otherwise, if
+    the drop is outside our main widget, we simply show the widget in
+    its original position.
+
+    \section2 Dropping
+
+    When a a drag and drop action enters our widget, we will receive a
+    drag enter \e event. QDragEnterEvent inherits most of its
+    functionality from QDragMoveEvent, which in turn inherits most of
+    its functionality from QDropEvent. Note that we must accept this
+    event in order to receive the drag move events that are sent while
+    the drag and drop action is in progress. The drag enter event is
+    always immediately followed by a drag move event.
+
+    In our \c dragEnterEvent() implementation, we first determine
+    whether we support the event's MIME type or not:
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 4
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 6
+
+    If the type is \c application/x-fridgemagnet and the event
+    origins from any of this application's fridge magnet widgets, we
+    first set the event's drop action using the
+    QDropEvent::setDropAction() method. An event's drop action is the
+    action to be performed on the data by the target. Qt::MoveAction
+    indicates that the data is moved from the source to the target.
+
+    Then we call the event's \l {QDragMoveEvent::}{accept()} method to
+    indicate that we have handled the event. In general, unaccepted
+    events might be propagated to the parent widget. If the event
+    origins from any other widget, we simply accept the proposed
+    action.
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 7
+
+    We also accept the proposed action if the event's MIME type is \c
+    text/plain, i.e., if QMimeData::hasText() returns true. If the
+    event has any other type, on the other hand, we call the event's
+    \l {QDragMoveEvent::}{ignore()} method allowing the event to be
+    propagated further.
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 8
+
+    Drag move events occur when the cursor enters a widget, when it
+    moves within the widget, and when a modifier key is pressed on the
+    keyboard while the widget has focus. Our widget will receive drag
+    move events repeatedly while a drag is within its boundaries. We
+    reimplement the \l {QWidget::}{dragMoveEvent()} method, and
+    examine the event in the exact same way as we did with drag enter
+    events.
+
+    Note that the \l{QWidget::}{dropEvent()} event handler behaves
+    slightly differently: We first get hold of the event's MIME
+    data.
+
+    \target drop
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 9
+
+    The QMimeData class provides a container for data that
+    records information about its MIME type. QMimeData objects
+    associate the data that they hold with the corresponding MIME
+    types to ensure that information can be safely transferred between
+    applications, and copied around within the same application.
+
+    We retrieve the data associated with the \c application/x-fridgemagnet
+    MIME type using a data stream in order to create a new \c DragLabel
+    object.
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 10
+
+    The QDataStream class provides serialization of binary data to a
+    QIODevice (a data stream is a binary stream of encoded information
+    which is completely independent of the host computer's operating
+    system, CPU or byte order).
+
+    Finally, we create a label and move it to the event's position:
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 11
+
+    If the source of the event is also the widget receiving the
+    drop event, we set the event's drop action to Qt::MoveAction and
+    call the event's \l{QDragMoveEvent::}{accept()}
+    method. Otherwise, we simply accept the proposed action. This
+    means that labels are moved rather than copied in the same
+    window. However, if we drag a label to a second instance of the
+    Fridge Magnets example, the default action is to copy it, leaving
+    the original in the first instance.
+
+    If the event's MIME type is \c text/plain (i.e., if
+    QMimeData::hasText() returns true) we retrieve its text and split
+    it into words. For each word we create a new \c DragLabel action,
+    and show it at the event's position plus an offset depending on
+    the number of words in the text. In the end we accept the proposed
+    action. This lets the user drop selected text from a text editor or
+    Web browser onto the widget to add more fridge magnets.
+
+    \snippet examples/draganddrop/fridgemagnets/dragwidget.cpp 12
+
+    If the event has any other type, we call the event's
+    \l{QDragMoveEvent::}{ignore()} method allowing the event to be
+    propagated further.
+
+    \section1 Summary
+
+    We set our main widget's \l{QWidget::}{acceptDrops} property
+    and reimplemented QWidget's \l{QWidget::}{dragEnterEvent()},
+    \l{QWidget::}{dragMoveEvent()} and \l{QWidget::}{dropEvent()} event
+    handlers to support content dropped on our widget.
+
+    In addition, we reimplemented the \l{QWidget::}{mousePressEvent()}
+    function to let the user pick up fridge magnets in the first place.
+
+    Because data is communicated using drag and drop operations and
+    encoded using MIME types, you can run more than one instance of this
+    example, and transfer magnets between them.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/ftp.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/ftp.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9cc9cd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/ftp.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,211 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example network/ftp
+    \title FTP Example
+
+    The FTP example demonstrates a simple FTP client that can be used
+    to list the available files on an FTP server and download them.
+
+    \image ftp-example.png
+
+    The user of the example can enter the address or hostname of an
+    FTP server in the \gui {Ftp Server} line edit, and then push the
+    \gui Connect button to connect to it. A list of the server's
+    top-level directory is then presented in the \gui {File List} tree
+    view. If the selected item in the view is a file, the user can
+    download it by pushing the \gui Download button. An item
+    representing a directory can be double clicked with the mouse to
+    show the contents of that directory in the view.
+
+    The functionality required for the example is implemented in the
+    QFtp class, which provides an easy, high-level interface to the
+    file transfer protocol. FTP operations are requested through
+    \l{QFtp::Command}s. The operations are asynchronous. QFtp will
+    notify us through signals when commands are started and finished.
+
+    We have one class, \c FtpWindow, which sets up the GUI and handles
+    the FTP functionality. We will now go through its definition and
+    implementation - focusing on the code concerning FTP. The code for
+    managing the GUI is explained in other examples.
+
+    \section1 FtpWindow Class Definition
+
+    The \c FtpWindow class displays a window, in which the user can
+    connect to and browse the contents of an FTP server. The slots of
+    \c FtpWindow are connected to its widgets, and contain the
+    functionality for managing the FTP connection. We also connect to
+    signals in QFtp, which tells us when the
+    \l{QFtp::Command}{commands} we request are finished, the progress
+    of current commands, and information about files on the server.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.h 0
+
+    We will look at each slot when we examine the \c FtpWindow
+    implementation in the next section. We also make use of a few
+    private variables:
+
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.h 1
+
+    The \c isDirectory hash keeps a history of all entries explored on
+    the FTP server, and registers whether an entry represents a
+    directory or a file. We use the QFile object to download files
+    from the FTP server. 
+ 
+    \section1 FtpWindow Class Implementation
+
+    We skip the \c FtpWindow constructor as it only contains code for
+    setting up the GUI, which is explained in other examples.
+    
+    We move on to the slots, starting with \c connectOrDisconnect().
+
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.cpp 0
+
+    If \c ftp is already pointing to a QFtp object, we QFtp::Close its
+    FTP connection and delete the object it points to. Note that we do
+    not delete the object using standard C++ \c delete as we need it
+    to finish its abort operation.
+
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.cpp 1
+
+    If we get here, \c connectOrDisconnect() was called to establish a
+    new FTP connection. We create a new QFtp for our new connection,
+    and connect its signals to slots in \c FtpWindow. The
+    \l{QFtp::}{listInfo()} signal is emitted whenever information
+    about a single file on the sever has been resolved. This signal is
+    sent when we ask QFtp to \l{QFtp::}{list()} the contents of a
+    directory. Finally, the \l{QFtp::}{dataTransferProgress()} signal
+    is emitted repeatedly during an FTP file transfer, giving us
+    progress reports.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.cpp 2
+
+    The \gui {Ftp Server} line edit contains the IP address or
+    hostname of the server to which we want to connect. We first check
+    that the URL is a valid FTP sever address. If it isn't, we still
+    try to connect using the plain text in \c ftpServerLineEdit. In
+    either case, we assume that port \c 21 is used.
+
+    If the URL does not contain a user name and password, we use
+    QFtp::login(), which will attempt to log into the FTP sever as an
+    anonymous user. The QFtp object will now notify us when it has
+    connected to the FTP server; it will also send a signal if it
+    fails to connect or the username and password were rejected.
+
+    We move on to the \c downloadFile() slot:
+
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.cpp 3
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.cpp 4
+    
+    We first fetch the name of the file, which we find in the selected
+    item of \c fileList. We then start the download by using
+    QFtp::get(). QFtp will send progress signals during the download
+    and a signal when the download is completed.  
+
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.cpp 5
+
+    QFtp supports canceling the download of files.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.cpp 6
+
+    The \c ftpCommandFinished() slot is called when QFtp has
+    finished a QFtp::Command. If an error occurred during the
+    command, QFtp will set \c error to one of the values in
+    the QFtp::Error enum; otherwise, \c error is zero.
+    
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.cpp 7
+
+    After login, the QFtp::list() function will list the top-level
+    directory on the server. addToList() is connected to
+    QFtp::listInfo(), and will be invoked for each entry in that
+    directory.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.cpp 8
+
+    When a \l{QFtp::}{Get} command is finished, a file has finished
+    downloading (or an error occurred during the download).
+    
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.cpp 9
+
+    After a \l{QFtp::}{List} command is performed, we have to check if
+    no entries were found (in which case our \c addToList() function
+    would not have been called). 
+
+    Let's continue with the the \c addToList() slot:
+
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.cpp 10
+
+    When a new file has been resolved during a QFtp::List command,
+    this slot is invoked with a QUrlInfo describing the file. We
+    create a separate row for the file in \c fileList. If \c fileList
+    does not have a current item, we set the new item to be the
+    current item.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.cpp 11
+
+    The \c processItem() slot is called when an item is double clicked
+    in the \gui {File List}. If the item represents a directory, we
+    want to load the contents of that directory with QFtp::list().
+
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.cpp 12
+
+    \c cdToParent() is invoked when the the user requests to go to the
+    parent directory of the one displayed in the file list. After
+    changing the directory, we QFtp::List its contents.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.cpp 13
+
+    The \c updateDataTransferProgress() slot is called regularly by
+    QFtp::dataTransferProgress() when a file download is in progress.
+    We use a QProgressDialog to show the download progression to the
+    user.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/ftp/ftpwindow.cpp 14
+
+    The \c enableDownloadButton() is called whenever the current item
+    in \c fileList changes. If the item represents a file, the \gui
+    {Enable Download} Button should be enabled; otherwise, it is
+    disabled.
+*/
+
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/globalVariables.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/globalVariables.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e1b83fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/globalVariables.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,238 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example xmlpatterns/xquery/globalVariables
+    \title C++ Source Code Analyzer Example
+
+    This example uses XQuery and the \c xmlpatterns command line utility to
+    query C++ source code.
+
+    \tableofcontents
+
+    \section1 Introduction
+
+    Suppose we want to analyze C++ source code to find coding standard
+    violations and instances of bad or inefficient patterns. We can do
+    it using the common searching and pattern matching utilities to
+    process the C++ files (e.g., \c{grep}, \c{sed}, and \c{awk}). Now
+    we can also use XQuery with the QtXmlPatterns module.
+
+    An extension to the \c{g++} open source C++ compiler
+    (\l{http://public.kitware.com/GCC_XML/HTML/Index.html} {GCC-XML})
+    generates an XML description of C++ source code declarations. This
+    XML description can then be processed by QtXmlPatterns using
+    XQueries to navigate the XML description of the C++ source and
+    produce a report. Consider the problem of finding mutable global
+    variables:
+
+    \section2 Reporting Uses of Mutable Global Variables
+
+    Suppose we want to introduce threading to a C++ application that
+    was originally written without threading. In a threaded program,
+    mutable global variables can cause bugs, because one thread might
+    change a global variable that other threads are reading, or two
+    threads might try to set the same global variable. So when
+    converting our program to use threading, one of the things we must
+    do is protect the global variables to prevent the bugs described
+    above. How can we use XQuery and
+    \l{http://public.kitware.com/GCC_XML/HTML/Index.html} {GCC-XML} to
+    find the variables that need protecting? 
+
+    \section3 A C++ application
+
+    Consider the declarations in this hypothetical C++ application:
+
+    \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/xquery/globalVariables/globals.cpp 0
+
+    \section3 The XML description of the C++ application
+
+    Submitting this C++ source to  
+    \l{http://public.kitware.com/GCC_XML/HTML/Index.html} {GCC-XML}
+    produces this XML description:
+
+    \quotefromfile examples/xmlpatterns/xquery/globalVariables/globals.gccxml
+    \printuntil
+
+    \section3 The XQuery for finding global variables
+
+    We need an XQuery to find the global variables in the XML
+    description. Here is our XQuery source. We walk through it in
+    \l{XQuery Code Walk-Through}.
+
+    \quotefromfile examples/xmlpatterns/xquery/globalVariables/reportGlobals.xq
+    \printuntil
+
+    \section3 Running the XQuery
+
+    To run the XQuery using the \c xmlpatterns command line utility,
+    enter the following command:
+
+    \code
+    xmlpatterns reportGlobals.xq -param fileToOpen=globals.gccxml -output globals.html
+    \endcode
+
+    \section3 The XQuery output
+
+    The \c xmlpatterns command loads and parses \c globals.gccxml,
+    runs the XQuery \c reportGlobals.xq, and generates this report:
+
+    \raw HTML
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml/" xml:lang="en" lang="en">
+    <head>
+        <title>Global variables report for globals.gccxml</title>
+    </head>
+    <style type="text/css">
+        .details
+        {
+            text-align: left;
+            font-size: 80%;
+            color: blue
+        }
+        .variableName
+        {
+            font-family: courier;
+	    color: blue
+        }
+    </style>
+    <body>
+        <p class="details">Start report: 2008-12-16T13:43:49.65Z</p>
+        <p>Global variables with complex types:</p>
+        <ol>
+            <li>
+                <span class="variableName">mutableComplex1</span> in globals.cpp at line 14</li>
+            <li>
+                <span class="variableName">mutableComplex2</span> in globals.cpp at line 15</li>
+            <li>
+                <span class="variableName">constComplex1</span> in globals.cpp at line 16</li>
+            <li>
+                <span class="variableName">constComplex2</span> in globals.cpp at line 17</li>
+        </ol>
+        <p>Mutable global variables with primitives types:</p>
+        <ol>
+            <li>
+                <span class="variableName">mutablePrimitive1</span> in globals.cpp at line 1</li>
+            <li>
+                <span class="variableName">mutablePrimitive2</span> in globals.cpp at line 2</li>
+        </ol>
+        <p class="details">End report: 2008-12-16T13:43:49.65Z</p>
+    </body>
+</html>
+    \endraw
+
+    \section1 XQuery Code Walk-Through  
+
+    The XQuery source is in
+    \c{examples/xmlpatterns/xquery/globalVariables/reportGlobals.xq}
+    It begins with two variable declarations that begin the XQuery:
+
+    \quotefromfile examples/xmlpatterns/xquery/globalVariables/reportGlobals.xq
+    \skipto declare variable
+    \printto (:
+
+    The first variable, \c{$fileToOpen}, appears in the \c xmlpatterns
+    command shown earlier, as \c{-param fileToOpen=globals.gccxml}.
+    This binds the variable name to the file name. This variable is
+    then used in the declaration of the second variable, \c{$inDoc},
+    as the parameter to the
+    \l{http://www.w3.org/TR/xpath-functions/#func-doc} {doc()}
+    function. The \c{doc()} function returns the document node of
+    \c{globals.gccxml}, which is assigned to \c{$inDoc} to be used
+    later in the XQuery as the root node of our searches for global
+    variables.
+
+    Next skip to the end of the XQuery, where the \c{<html>} element
+    is constructed. The \c{<html>} will contain a \c{<head>} element
+    to specify a heading for the html page, followed by some style
+    instructions for displaying the text, and then the \c{<body>}
+    element.
+
+    \quotefromfile examples/xmlpatterns/xquery/globalVariables/reportGlobals.xq
+    \skipto <html xmlns
+    \printuntil
+
+    The \c{<body>} element contains a call to the \c{local:report()}
+    function, which is where the query does the "heavy lifting."  Note
+    the two \c{return} clauses separated by the \e {comma operator}
+    about halfway down:
+
+    \quotefromfile examples/xmlpatterns/xquery/globalVariables/reportGlobals.xq
+    \skipto declare function local:report()
+    \printuntil };
+
+    The \c{return} clauses are like two separate queries. The comma
+    operator separating them means that both \c{return} clauses are
+    executed and both return their results, or, rather, both output
+    their results. The first \c{return} clause searches for global
+    variables with complex types, and the second searches for mutable
+    global variables with primitive types.
+
+    Here is the html generated for the \c{<body>} element. Compare
+    it with the XQuery code above:
+
+    \quotefromfile examples/xmlpatterns/xquery/globalVariables/globals.html
+    \skipto <body>
+    \printuntil </body>
+     
+    The XQuery declares three more local functions that are called in
+    turn by the \c{local:report()} function. \c{isComplexType()}
+    returns true if the variable has a complex type. The variable can
+    be mutable or const.
+    
+    \quotefromfile examples/xmlpatterns/xquery/globalVariables/reportGlobals.xq
+    \skipto declare function local:isComplexType
+    \printuntil };
+
+    \c{isPrimitive()} returns true if the variable has a primitive
+    type. The variable must be mutable.
+
+    \quotefromfile examples/xmlpatterns/xquery/globalVariables/reportGlobals.xq
+    \skipto declare function local:isPrimitive
+    \printuntil };
+
+    \c{location()} returns a text constructed from the variable's file
+    and line number attributes.
+
+    \quotefromfile examples/xmlpatterns/xquery/globalVariables/reportGlobals.xq
+    \skipto declare function local:location
+    \printuntil };
+
+ */
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/grabber.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/grabber.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..efb5b6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/grabber.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example opengl/grabber
+    \title Grabber Example
+
+    The Grabber examples shows how to retrieve the contents of an OpenGL framebuffer.
+
+    \image grabber-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/groupbox.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/groupbox.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c5f6a62
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/groupbox.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,154 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/groupbox
+    \title Group Box Example
+
+    The Group Box example shows how to use the different kinds of group
+    boxes in Qt.
+
+    Group boxes are container widgets that organize buttons into groups,
+    both logically and on screen. They manage the interactions between
+    the user and the application so that you do not have to enforce
+    simple constraints.
+
+    Group boxes are usually used to organize check boxes and radio
+    buttons into exclusive groups.
+
+    \image groupbox-example.png
+
+    The Group Boxes example consists of a single \c Window class that
+    is used to show four group boxes: an exclusive radio button group,
+    a non-exclusive checkbox group, an exclusive radio button group
+    with an enabling checkbox, and a group box with normal push buttons.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The \c Window class is a subclass of \c QWidget that is used to
+    display a number of group boxes. The class definition contains
+    functions to construct each group box and populate it with different
+    selections of button widgets:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/groupbox/window.h 0
+
+    In the example, the widget will be used as a top-level window, so
+    the constructor is defined so that we do not have to specify a parent
+    widget.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor creates a grid layout and fills it with each of the
+    group boxes that are to be displayed:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/groupbox/window.cpp 0
+
+    The functions used to create each group box each return a
+    QGroupBox to be inserted into the grid layout.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/groupbox/window.cpp 1
+
+    The first group box contains and manages three radio buttons. Since
+    the group box contains only radio buttons, it is exclusive by
+    default, so only one radio button can be checked at any given time.
+    We check the first radio button to ensure that the button group
+    contains one checked button.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/groupbox/window.cpp 3
+
+    We use a vertical layout within the group box to present the
+    buttons in the form of a vertical list, and return the group
+    box to the constructor.
+
+    The second group box is itself checkable, providing a convenient
+    way to disable all the buttons inside it. Initially, it is
+    unchecked, so the group box itself must be checked before any of
+    the radio buttons inside can be checked.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/groupbox/window.cpp 4
+
+    The group box contains three exclusive radio buttons, and an
+    independent checkbox. For consistency, one radio button must be
+    checked at all times, so we ensure that the first one is initially
+    checked.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/groupbox/window.cpp 5
+
+    The buttons are arranged in the same way as those in the first
+    group box.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/groupbox/window.cpp 6
+
+    The third group box is constructed with a "flat" style that is
+    better suited to certain types of dialog.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/groupbox/window.cpp 7
+
+    This group box contains only checkboxes, so it is non-exclusive by
+    default. This means that each checkbox can be checked independently
+    of the others.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/groupbox/window.cpp 8
+
+    Again, we use a vertical layout within the group box to present
+    the buttons in the form of a vertical list.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/groupbox/window.cpp 9
+
+    The final group box contains only push buttons and, like the
+    second group box, it is checkable.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/groupbox/window.cpp 10
+
+    We create a normal button, a toggle button, and a flat push button:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/groupbox/window.cpp 11
+
+    Push buttons can be used to display popup menus. We create one, and
+    attach a simple menu to it:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/groupbox/window.cpp 12
+
+    Finally, we lay out the widgets vertically, and return the group box
+    that we created:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/groupbox/window.cpp 13
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/hellogl.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/hellogl.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2fc51a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/hellogl.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,272 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example opengl/hellogl
+    \title Hello GL Example
+
+    The Hello GL example demonstrates the basic use of the OpenGL-related classes
+    provided with Qt.
+
+    \image hellogl-example.png
+
+    Qt provides the QGLWidget class to enable OpenGL graphics to be rendered within
+    a standard application user interface. By subclassing this class, and providing
+    reimplementations of event handler functions, 3D scenes can be displayed on
+    widgets that can be placed in layouts, connected to other objects using signals
+    and slots, and manipulated like any other widget.
+
+    \tableofcontents
+
+    \section1 GLWidget Class Definition
+
+    The \c GLWidget class contains some standard public definitions for the
+    constructor, destructor, \l{QWidget::sizeHint()}{sizeHint()}, and
+    \l{QWidget::minimumSizeHint()}{minimumSizeHint()} functions:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/glwidget.h 0
+
+    We use a destructor to ensure that any OpenGL-specific data structures
+    are deleted when the widget is no longer needed.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/glwidget.h 1
+
+    The signals and slots are used to allow other objects to interact with the
+    3D scene.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/glwidget.h 2
+
+    OpenGL initialization, viewport resizing, and painting are handled by
+    reimplementing the QGLWidget::initializeGL(), QGLWidget::resizeGL(), and
+    QGLWidget::paintGL() handler functions. To enable the user to interact
+    directly with the scene using the mouse, we reimplement
+    QWidget::mousePressEvent() and QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/glwidget.h 3
+
+    The rest of the class contains utility functions and variables that are
+    used to construct and hold orientation information for the scene. The
+    \c object variable will be used to hold an identifier for an OpenGL
+    display list.
+
+    \section1 GLWidget Class Implementation
+
+    In this example, we split the class into groups of functions and describe
+    them separately. This helps to illustrate the differences between subclasses
+    of native widgets (such as QWidget and QFrame) and QGLWidget subclasses.
+
+    \section2 Widget Construction and Sizing
+
+    The constructor provides default rotation angles for the scene, initializes
+    the variable used for the display list, and sets up some colors for later use.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/glwidget.cpp 0
+
+    We also implement a destructor to release OpenGL-related resources when the
+    widget is deleted:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/glwidget.cpp 1
+
+    The destructor ensures that the display list is deleted properly.
+
+    We provide size hint functions to ensure that the widget is shown at a
+    reasonable size:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/glwidget.cpp 2
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/glwidget.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/glwidget.cpp 4
+
+    The widget provides three slots that enable other components in the
+    example to change the orientation of the scene:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/glwidget.cpp 5
+
+    In the above slot, the \c xRot variable is updated only if the new angle
+    is different to the old one, the \c xRotationChanged() signal is emitted to
+    allow other components to be updated, and the widget's
+    \l{QGLWidget::updateGL()}{updateGL()} handler function is called.
+
+    The \c setYRotation() and \c setZRotation() slots perform the same task for
+    rotations measured by the \c yRot and \c zRot variables.
+
+    \section2 OpenGL Initialization
+
+    The \l{QGLWidget::initializeGL()}{initializeGL()} function is used to
+    perform useful initialization tasks that are needed to render the 3D scene.
+    These often involve defining colors and materials, enabling and disabling
+    certain rendering flags, and setting other properties used to customize the
+    rendering process.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/glwidget.cpp 6
+
+    In this example, we reimplement the function to set the background color,
+    create a display list containing information about the object we want to
+    display, and set up the rendering process to use a particular shading model
+    and rendering flags:
+
+    \section2 Resizing the Viewport
+
+    The \l{QGLWidget::resizeGL()}{resizeGL()} function is used to ensure that
+    the OpenGL implementation renders the scene onto a viewport that matches the
+    size of the widget, using the correct transformation from 3D coordinates to
+    2D viewport coordinates.
+
+    The function is called whenever the widget's dimensions change, and is
+    supplied with the new width and height. Here, we define a square viewport
+    based on the length of the smallest side of the widget to ensure that
+    the scene is not distorted if the widget has sides of unequal length:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/glwidget.cpp 8
+
+    A discussion of the projection transformation used is outside the scope of
+    this example. Please consult the OpenGL reference documentation for an
+    explanation of projection matrices.
+
+    \section2 Painting the Scene
+
+    The \l{QGLWidget::paintGL()}{paintGL()} function is used to paint the
+    contents of the scene onto the widget. For widgets that only need to be
+    decorated with pure OpenGL content, we reimplement QGLWidget::paintGL()
+    \e instead of reimplementing QWidget::paintEvent():
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/glwidget.cpp 7
+
+    In this example, we clear the widget using the background color that
+    we defined in the \l{QGLWidget::initializeGL()}{initializeGL()} function,
+    set up the frame of reference for the object we want to display, and call
+    the display list containing the rendering commands for the object.
+
+    \section2 Mouse Handling
+
+    Just as in subclasses of native widgets, mouse events are handled by
+    reimplementing functions such as QWidget::mousePressEvent() and
+    QWidget::mouseMoveEvent().
+
+    The \l{QWidget::mousePressEvent()}{mousePressEvent()} function simply
+    records the position of the mouse when a button is initially pressed:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/glwidget.cpp 9
+
+    The \l{QWidget::mouseMoveEvent()}{mouseMoveEvent()} function uses the
+    previous location of the mouse cursor to determine how much the object
+    in the scene should be rotated, and in which direction:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/glwidget.cpp 10
+
+    Since the user is expected to hold down the mouse button and drag the
+    cursor to rotate the object, the cursor's position is updated every time
+    a move event is received.
+
+    \section2 Utility Functions
+
+    We have omitted the utility functions, \c makeObject(), \c quad(),
+    \c extrude(), and \c normalizeAngle() from our discussion. These can be
+    viewed in the quoted source for \c glwidget.cpp via the link at the
+    start of this document.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The \c Window class is used as a container for the \c GLWidget used to
+    display the scene:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/window.h 0
+
+    In addition, it contains sliders that are used to change the orientation
+    of the object in the scene.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor constructs an instance of the \c GLWidget class and some
+    sliders to manipulate its contents.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/window.cpp 0
+
+    We connect the \l{QAbstractSlider::valueChanged()}{valueChanged()} signal
+    from each of the sliders to the appropriate slots in \c{glWidget}.
+    This allows the user to change the orientation of the object by dragging
+    the sliders.
+
+    We also connect the \c xRotationChanged(), \c yRotationChanged(), and
+    \c zRotationChanged() signals from \c glWidget to the
+    \l{QAbstractSlider::setValue()}{setValue()} slots in the
+    corresponding sliders.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/window.cpp 1
+
+    The sliders are placed horizontally in a layout alongside the \c GLWidget,
+    and initialized with suitable default values.
+
+    The \c createSlider() utility function constructs a QSlider, and ensures
+    that it is set up with a suitable range, step value, tick interval, and
+    page step value before returning it to the calling function:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl/window.cpp 2
+
+    \section1 Summary
+
+    The \c GLWidget class implementation shows how to subclass QGLWidget for
+    the purposes of rendering a 3D scene using OpenGL calls. Since QGLWidget
+    is a subclass of QWidget, subclasses of QGLWidget can be placed in layouts
+    and provided with interactive features just like normal custom widgets.
+
+    We ensure that the widget is able to correctly render the scene using OpenGL
+    by reimplementing the following functions:
+
+    \list
+    \o QGLWidget::initializeGL() sets up resources needed by the OpenGL implementation
+       to render the scene.
+    \o QGLWidget::resizeGL() resizes the viewport so that the rendered scene fits onto
+       the widget, and sets up a projection matrix to map 3D coordinates to 2D viewport
+       coordinates.
+    \o QGLWidget::paintGL() performs painting operations using OpenGL calls.
+    \endlist
+
+    Since QGLWidget is a subclass of QWidget, it can also be used
+    as a normal paint device, allowing 2D graphics to be drawn with QPainter.
+    This use of QGLWidget is discussed in the \l{2D Painting Example}{2D Painting}
+    example.
+
+    More advanced users may want to paint over parts of a scene rendered using
+    OpenGL. QGLWidget allows pure OpenGL rendering to be mixed with QPainter
+    calls, but care must be taken to maintain the state of the OpenGL implementation.
+    See the \l{Overpainting Example}{Overpainting} example for more information.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/hellogl_es.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/hellogl_es.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0293584
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/hellogl_es.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+/*!
+    \example opengl/hellogl_es
+    \title Hello GL ES Example
+
+    The Hello GL ES example is the \l{Hello GL Example} ported to OpenGL ES.
+    It also included some effects from the OpenGL \l{Overpainting Example}.
+
+    \image hellogl-es-example.png
+
+    A complete introduction to OpenGL ES and a description of all differences
+    between OpenGL and OpenGL ES is out of the scope of this document; but
+    we will describe some of the major issues and differences.
+
+    Since Hello GL ES is a direct port of standard OpenGL code, it is a fairly
+    good example for porting OpenGL code to OpenGL ES.
+
+    \tableofcontents
+
+    \section1 Using QGLWidget
+
+    QGLWidget can be used for OpenGL ES similar to the way it is used with
+    standard OpenGL; but there are some differences. We use EGL 1.0 to embedd
+    the OpenGL ES window within the native window manager. In
+    QGLWidget::initializeGL() we initialize OpenGL ES.
+
+    \section1 Using OpenGL ES rendering commands
+
+    To update the scene, we reimplment QGLWidget::paintGL(). We use OpenGL ES
+    rendering commands just like we do with standard OpenGL. Since the OpenGL
+    ES common light profile only supports fixed point functions, we need to
+    abstract it somehow. Hence, we define an abstraction layer in
+    \c{cl_helper.h}.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl_es/cl_helper.h 0
+
+    Instead of \c glFogxv() or \c glFogfv() we use \c q_glFogv() and to
+    convert the coordinates of a vertice we use the macro \c f2vt(). That way,
+    if QT_OPENGL_ES_CL is defined we use the fixed point functions and every
+    float is converted to fixed point.
+
+    If QT_OPENGL_ES_CL is not defined we use the floating point functions.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl_es/cl_helper.h 1
+
+    This way we support OpenGL ES Common and Common Light with the same code
+    and abstract the fact that we use either the floating point functions or
+    otherwise the fixed point functions.
+
+    \section1 Porting OpenGL to OpenGL ES
+
+    Since OpenGL ES is missing the immediate mode and does not support quads,
+    we have to create triangle arrays.
+
+    We create a quad by adding vertices to a QList of vertices. We create both
+    sides of the quad and hardcode a distance of 0.05f. We also compute the
+    correct normal for each face and store them in another QList.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl_es/glwidget.cpp 0
+
+    And then we convert the complete list of vertexes and the list of normals
+    into the native OpenGL ES format that we can use with the OpenGL ES API.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl_es/glwidget.cpp 1
+
+    In \c paintQtLogo() we draw the triangle array using OpenGL ES. We use
+    q_vertexTypeEnum to abstract the fact that our vertex and normal arrays
+    are either in float or in fixed point format.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl_es/glwidget.cpp 2
+
+    \section1 Using QGLPainter
+
+    Since the \c QGLPainter is slower for OpenGL ES we paint the bubbles with
+    the rasterizer and cache them in a QImage. This happends only once during
+    the initialiazation.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl_es/bubble.cpp 0
+
+    For each bubble this QImage is then drawn to the QGLWidget by using the
+    according QPainter with transparency enabled.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl_es/bubble.cpp 1
+
+    Another difference beetwen OpenGL and OpenGL ES is that OpenGL ES does not
+    support glPushAttrib(GL_ALL_ATTRIB_BITS). So we have to restore all the
+    OpenGL states ourselves, after we created the QPainter in
+    GLWidget::paintGL().
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl_es/glwidget.cpp 3
+
+    Setting up up the model view matrix and setting the right OpenGL states is
+    done in the same way as for standard OpenGL.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl_es/glwidget.cpp 4
+
+    Now we have to restore the OpenGL state for the QPainter. This is not done
+    automatically for OpenGL ES.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl_es/glwidget.cpp 5
+
+    Now we use the QPainter to draw the transparent bubbles.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl_es/glwidget.cpp 6
+
+    In the end, we calculate the framerate and display it using the QPainter
+    again.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl_es/glwidget.cpp 7
+
+    After we finished all the drawing operations we swap the screen buffer.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/hellogl_es/glwidget.cpp 8
+
+    \section1 Summary
+
+    Similar to the \l{Hello GL Example}, we subclass QGLWidget to render
+    a 3D scene using OpenGL ES calls. QGLWidget is a subclass of QWidget.
+    Hence, its \l{QGLWidget}'s subclasses can be placed in layouts and
+    provided with interactive features just like normal custom widgets.
+
+    QGLWidget allows pure OpenGL ES rendering to be mixed with QPainter calls,
+    but care must be taken to maintain the state of the OpenGL ES
+    implementation.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/helloscript.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/helloscript.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5662680
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/helloscript.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example script/helloscript
+    \title Hello Script Example
+
+    The Hello Script example shows the basic use of Qt Script: How to embed
+    a script engine into the application, how to evaluate a script, and how
+    to process the result of the evaluation. The example also shows how to
+    apply internationalization to scripts.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/helloscript/main.cpp 0
+
+    The application will load the script file to evaluate from a resource, so
+    we first make sure that the resource is initialized.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/helloscript/main.cpp 1
+
+    We attempt to load a translation, and install translation functions in the
+    script engine. How to produce a translation is explained later.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/helloscript/main.cpp 2
+
+    A push button is created and exported to the script environment as a
+    global variable, \c button. Scripts will be able to access properties,
+    signals and slots of the button as properties of the \c button script
+    object; the script object acts as a proxy to the C++ button object.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/helloscript/main.cpp 3
+
+    The contents of the script file are read.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/helloscript/helloscript.qs 0
+
+    The script sets the \c text (note that the qTr() function is used to allow
+    for translation) and \c styleSheet properties of the button, and calls the
+    button's \c show() slot.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/helloscript/main.cpp 4
+
+    The script is evaluated. Note that the file name is passed as the
+    (optional) second parameter; this makes it possible for the script engine
+    to produce a meaningful backtrace if something goes wrong, and makes the
+    qTr() function be able to resolve the translations that are associated
+    with this script.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/helloscript/main.cpp 5
+
+    If the result is an Error object (e.g. the script contained a syntax
+    error, or tried to call a function that doesn't exist), we obtain
+    the line number and string representation of the error and display
+    it in a message box.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/helloscript/main.cpp 6
+
+    If the evaluation went well, the application event loop is entered.
+
+    \section1 Translating the Application
+
+    The Qt Script internalization support builds on what Qt already provides
+    for C++; see the \l{Hello tr() Example} for an introduction.
+
+    Since we haven't made the translation file \c helloscript_la.qm, the
+    source text is shown when we run the application ("Hello world!").
+
+    To generate the translation file, run \c lupdate as follows:
+
+    \code
+    lupdate helloscript.qs -ts helloscript_la.ts
+    \endcode
+
+    You should now have a file \c helloscript_la.ts in the current
+    directory. Run \c linguist to edit the translation:
+
+    \code
+    linguist helloscript_la.ts
+    \endcode
+
+    You should now see the text "helloscript.qs" in the top left pane.
+    Double-click it, then click on "Hello world!" and enter "Orbis, te
+    saluto!" in the \gui Translation pane (the middle right of the
+    window). Don't forget the exclamation mark!
+
+    Click the \gui Done checkbox and choose \gui File|Save from the
+    menu bar. The \c .ts file will no longer contain
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_hellotr.qdoc 3
+
+    but instead will have
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_hellotr.qdoc 4
+
+    To see the application running in Latin, we have to generate a \c .qm
+    file from the \c .ts file. Generating a \c .qm file can be achieved
+    either from within \e {Qt Linguist} (for a single \c .ts file), or
+    by using the command line program \c lrelease which will produce one \c
+    .qm file for each of the \c .ts files listed in the project file.
+    Generate \c hellotr_la.qm from \c hellotr_la.ts by choosing
+    \gui File|Release from \e {Qt Linguist}'s menu bar and pressing
+    \gui Save in the file save dialog that pops up. Now run the \c helloscript
+    program again. This time the button will be labelled "Orbis, te
+    saluto!".
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/hellotr.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/hellotr.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72efd11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/hellotr.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example linguist/hellotr
+    \title Hello tr() Example
+
+    This example is a small Hello World program with a Latin translation. The
+    screenshot below shows the English version.
+
+    \image linguist-hellotr_en.png
+
+    See the \l{Qt Linguist manual} for more information about
+    translating Qt application.
+
+    \section1 Line by Line Walkthrough
+
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/hellotr/main.cpp 0
+
+    This line includes the definition of the QTranslator class. 
+    Objects of this class provide translations for user-visible text.
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/hellotr/main.cpp 5
+
+    Creates a QTranslator object without a parent.
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/hellotr/main.cpp 6
+
+    Tries to load a file called \c hellotr_la.qm (the \c .qm file extension is
+    implicit) that contains Latin translations for the source texts used in
+    the program. No error will occur if the file is not found.
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/hellotr/main.cpp 7
+
+    Adds the translations from \c hellotr_la.qm to the pool of translations used
+    by the program.
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/hellotr/main.cpp 8
+
+    Creates a push button that displays "Hello world!". If \c hellotr_la.qm
+    was found and contains a translation for "Hello world!", the
+    translation appears; if not, the source text appears.
+
+    All classes that inherit QObject have a \c tr() function. Inside
+    a member function of a QObject class, we simply write \c tr("Hello
+    world!") instead of \c QPushButton::tr("Hello world!") or \c
+    QObject::tr("Hello world!").
+
+    \section1 Running the Application in English
+
+    Since we haven't made the translation file \c hellotr_la.qm, the source text
+    is shown when we run the application:
+
+    \image linguist-hellotr_en.png
+
+    \section1 Creating a Latin Message File
+
+    The first step is to create a project file, \c hellotr.pro, that lists
+    all the source files for the project. The project file can be a qmake
+    project file, or even an ordinary makefile. Any file that contains
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/hellotr/hellotr.pro 0
+    \snippet examples/linguist/hellotr/hellotr.pro 1
+
+    will work. \c TRANSLATIONS specifies the message files we want to
+    maintain. In this example, we just maintain one set of translations,
+    namely Latin.
+
+    Note that the file extension is \c .ts, not \c .qm. The \c .ts
+    translation source format is designed for use during the
+    application's development. Programmers or release managers run
+    the \c lupdate program to generate and update \c .ts files with
+    the source text that is extracted from the source code.
+    Translators read and update the \c .ts files using \e {Qt
+    Linguist} adding and editing their translations.
+
+    The \c .ts format is human-readable XML that can be emailed directly
+    and is easy to put under version control. If you edit this file
+    manually, be aware that the default encoding for XML is UTF-8, not
+    Latin1 (ISO 8859-1). One way to type in a Latin1 character such as
+    '\oslash' (Norwegian o with slash) is to use an XML entity:
+    "\&#xf8;". This will work for any Unicode 4.0 character.
+
+    Once the translations are complete the \c lrelease program is used to
+    convert the \c .ts files into the \c .qm Qt message file format. The
+    \c .qm format is a compact binary format designed to deliver very
+    fast lookup performance. Both \c lupdate and \c lrelease read all the
+    project's source and header files (as specified in the HEADERS and
+    SOURCES lines of the project file) and extract the strings that
+    appear in \c tr() function calls.
+
+    \c lupdate is used to create and update the message files (\c hellotr_la.ts
+    in this case) to keep them in sync with the source code. It is safe to
+    run \c lupdate at any time, as \c lupdate does not remove any
+    information. For example, you can put it in the makefile, so the \c .ts
+    files are updated whenever the source changes.
+
+    Try running \c lupdate right now, like this:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_hellotr.qdoc 0
+
+    (The \c -verbose option instructs \c lupdate to display messages that
+    explain what it is doing.) You should now have a file \c hellotr_la.ts in
+    the current directory, containing this:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_hellotr.qdoc 1
+
+    You don't need to understand the file format since it is read and
+    updated using tools (\c lupdate, \e {Qt Linguist}, \c lrelease).
+
+    \section1 Translating to Latin with Qt Linguist
+
+    We will use \e {Qt Linguist} to provide the translation, although
+    you can use any XML or plain text editor to enter a translation into a
+    \c .ts file.
+
+    To start \e {Qt Linguist}, type
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_hellotr.qdoc 2
+
+    You should now see the text "QPushButton" in the top left pane.
+    Double-click it, then click on "Hello world!" and enter "Orbis, te
+    saluto!" in the \gui Translation pane (the middle right of the
+    window). Don't forget the exclamation mark!
+
+    Click the \gui Done checkbox and choose \gui File|Save from the
+    menu bar. The \c .ts file will no longer contain
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_hellotr.qdoc 3
+
+    but instead will have
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_hellotr.qdoc 4
+
+    \section1 Running the Application in Latin
+
+    To see the application running in Latin, we have to generate a \c .qm
+    file from the \c .ts file. Generating a \c .qm file can be achieved
+    either from within \e {Qt Linguist} (for a single \c .ts file), or
+    by using the command line program \c lrelease which will produce one \c
+    .qm file for each of the \c .ts files listed in the project file.
+    Generate \c hellotr_la.qm from \c hellotr_la.ts by choosing
+    \gui File|Release from \e {Qt Linguist}'s menu bar and pressing
+    \gui Save in the file save dialog that pops up. Now run the \c hellotr
+    program again. This time the button will be labelled "Orbis, te
+    saluto!".
+
+    \image linguist-hellotr_la.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/http.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/http.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..17404a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/http.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example network/http
+    \title HTTP Example
+
+    The HTTP example demonstrates a simple HTTP client that shows how to fetch files
+    specified by URLs from remote hosts.
+
+    \image http-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/i18n.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/i18n.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..68d9153
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/i18n.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example tools/i18n
+    \title I18N Example
+
+    The Internationalization (I18N) example demonstrates Qt's support for translated
+    text. Developers can write the initial application text in one language, and
+    translations can be provided later without any modifications to the code.
+
+    \image i18n-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/icons.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/icons.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..750ef2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/icons.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,794 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/icons
+    \title Icons Example
+
+    The Icons example shows how QIcon can generate pixmaps reflecting
+    an icon's state, mode and size. These pixmaps are generated from
+    the set of pixmaps made available to the icon, and are used by Qt
+    widgets to show an icon representing a particular action.
+
+    \image icons-example.png Screenshot of the Icons example
+
+    Contents:
+
+    \tableofcontents
+
+    \section1 QIcon Overview
+
+    The QIcon class provides scalable icons in different modes and
+    states. An icon's state and mode are depending on the intended use
+    of the icon. Qt currently defines four modes:
+
+    \table
+    \header \o Mode \o Description
+    \row
+    \o QIcon::Normal
+    \o Display the pixmap when the user is not interacting with the
+       icon, but the functionality represented by the icon is
+       available.
+    \row
+    \o QIcon::Active
+    \o Display the pixmap when the functionality represented by the
+       icon is available and the user is interacting with the icon,
+       for example, moving the mouse over it or clicking it.
+    \row
+    \o QIcon::Disabled
+    \o Display the pixmap when the functionality represented by
+       the icon is not available.
+    \row
+    \o QIcon::Selected
+    \o Display the pixmap when the icon is selected.
+    \endtable
+
+    QIcon's states are QIcon::On and QIcon::Off, which will display
+    the pixmap when the widget is in the respective state. The most
+    common usage of QIcon's states are when displaying checkable tool
+    buttons or menu entries (see QAbstractButton::setCheckable() and
+    QAction::setCheckable()). When a tool button or menu entry is
+    checked, the QIcon's state is \l{QIcon::}{On}, otherwise it's
+    \l{QIcon::}{Off}. You can, for example, use the QIcon's states to
+    display differing pixmaps depending on whether the tool button or
+    menu entry is checked or not.
+
+    A QIcon can generate smaller, larger, active, disabled, and
+    selected pixmaps from the set of pixmaps it is given. Such
+    pixmaps are used by Qt widgets to show an icon representing a
+    particular action.
+
+    \section1 Overview of the Icons Application
+
+    With the Icons application you get a preview of an icon's
+    generated pixmaps reflecting its different states, modes and size.
+
+    When an image is loaded into the application, it is converted into
+    a pixmap and becomes a part of the set of pixmaps available to the
+    icon. An image can be excluded from this set by checking off the
+    related checkbox. The application provides a sub directory
+    containing sets of images explicitly designed to illustrate how Qt
+    renders an icon in different modes and states.
+
+    The application allows you to manipulate the icon size with some
+    predefined sizes and a spin box. The predefined sizes are style
+    dependent, but most of the styles have the same values: Only the
+    Macintosh style differ by using 32 pixels, instead of 16 pixels,
+    for toolbar buttons. You can navigate between the available styles
+    using the \gui View menu.
+
+    \image icons-view-menu.png Screenshot of the View menu
+
+    The \gui View menu also provide the option to make the application
+    guess the icon state and mode from an image's file name. The \gui
+    File menu provide the options of adding an image and removing all
+    images. These last options are also available through a context
+    menu that appears if you press the right mouse button within the
+    table of image files. In addition, the \gui File menu provide an
+    \gui Exit option, and the \gui Help menu provide information about
+    the example and about Qt.
+
+    \image icons_find_normal.png Screenshot of the Find Files
+
+    The screenshot above shows the application with one image file
+    loaded. The \gui {Guess Image Mode/State} is enabled and the
+    style is Plastique.
+
+    When QIcon is provided with only one available pixmap, that
+    pixmap is used for all the states and modes. In this case the
+    pixmap's icon mode is set to normal, and the generated pixmaps
+    for the normal and active modes will look the same. But in
+    disabled and selected mode, Qt will generate a slightly different
+    pixmap.
+
+    The next screenshot shows the application with an additional file
+    loaded, providing QIcon with two available pixmaps. Note that the
+    new image file's mode is set to disabled. When rendering the \gui
+    Disabled mode pixmaps, Qt will now use the new image. We can see
+    the difference: The generated disabled pixmap in the first
+    screenshot is slightly darker than the pixmap with the originally
+    set disabled mode in the second screenshot.
+
+    \image icons_find_normal_disabled.png Screenshot of the Find Files
+
+    When Qt renders the icon's pixmaps it searches through the set of
+    available pixmaps following a particular algorithm. The algorithm
+    is documented in QIcon, but we will describe some particular cases
+    below.
+
+    \image icons_monkey_active.png Screenshot of the Find Files
+
+    In the screenshot above, we have set \c monkey_on_32x32 to be an
+    Active/On pixmap and \c monkey_off_64x64 to be Normal/Off. To
+    render the other six mode/state combinations, QIcon uses the
+    search algorithm described in the table below:
+
+    \table
+    \header \o{2,1} Requested Pixmap \o{8,1} Preferred Alternatives (mode/state)
+    \header \o Mode \o State \o 1  \o 2 \o 3 \o 4 \o 5 \o 6 \o 7 \o 8
+    \row \o{1,2} Normal \o Off \o \bold N0 \o A0 \o N1 \o A1 \o D0 \o S0 \o D1 \o S1
+    \row \o On \o N1 \o \bold A1 \o N0 \o A0 \o D1 \o S1 \o D0 \o S0
+    \row \o{1,2} Active \o Off \o A0 \o \bold N0 \o A1 \o N1 \o D0 \o S0 \o D1 \o S1
+    \row \o On \o \bold A1 \o N1 \o A0 \o N0 \o D1 \o S1 \o D0 \o S0
+    \row \o{1,2} Disabled \o Off \o D0 \o \bold {N0'} \o A0' \o D1 \o N1' \o A1' \o S0' \o S1'
+    \row \o On \o D1 \o N1' \o \bold {A1'} \o D0 \o N0' \o A0' \o S1' \o S0'
+    \row \o{1,2} Selected \o Off \o S0 \o \bold {N0''} \o A0'' \o S1 \o N1'' \o A1'' \o D0'' \o D1''
+    \row \o On \o S1 \o N1'' \o \bold {A1''} \o S0 \o N0'' \o A0'' \o D1'' \o D0''
+    \endtable
+
+    In the table, "0" and "1" stand for Off" and "On", respectively.
+    Single quotes indicates that QIcon generates a disabled ("grayed
+    out") version of the pixmap; similarly, double quuote indicate
+    that QIcon generates a selected ("blued out") version of the
+    pixmap.
+
+    The alternatives used in the screenshot above are shown in bold.
+    For example, the Disabled/Off pixmap is derived by graying out
+    the Normal/Off pixmap (\c monkey_off_64x64).
+
+    In the next screenshots, we loaded the whole set of monkey
+    images. By checking or unchecking file names from the image list,
+    we get different results:
+
+    \table
+    \row
+    \o \inlineimage icons_monkey.png Screenshot of the Monkey Files
+    \o \inlineimage icons_monkey_mess.png Screenshot of the Monkey Files
+    \endtable
+
+    For any given mode/state combination, it is possible to specify
+    several images at different resolutions. When rendering an
+    icon, QIcon will automatically pick the most suitable image
+    and scale it down if necessary. (QIcon never scales up images,
+    because this rarely looks good.)
+
+    The screenshots below shows what happens when we provide QIcon
+    with three images (\c qt_extended_16x16.png, \c qt_extended_32x32.png, \c
+    qt_extended_48x48.png) and try to render the QIcon at various
+    resolutions:
+
+    \table
+    \row
+    \o
+    \o \inlineimage icons_qt_extended_8x8.png Qt Extended icon at 8 x 8
+    \o \inlineimage icons_qt_extended_16x16.png Qt Extended icon at 16 x 16
+    \o \inlineimage icons_qt_extended_17x17.png Qt Extended icon at 17 x 17
+    \row
+    \o
+    \o 8 x 8
+    \o \bold {16 x 16}
+    \o 17 x 17
+    \row
+    \o \inlineimage icons_qt_extended_32x32.png Qt Extended icon at 32 x 32
+    \o \inlineimage icons_qt_extended_33x33.png Qt Extended icon at 33 x 33
+    \o \inlineimage icons_qt_extended_48x48.png Qt Extended icon at 48 x 48
+    \o \inlineimage icons_qt_extended_64x64.png Qt Extended icon at 64 x 64
+    \row
+    \o \bold {32 x 32}
+    \o 33 x 33
+    \o \bold {48 x 48}
+    \o 64 x 64
+    \endtable
+
+    For sizes up to 16 x 16, QIcon uses \c qt_extended_16x16.png and
+    scales it down if necessary. For sizes between 17 x 17 and 32 x
+    32, it uses \c qt_extended_32x32.png. For sizes above 32 x 32, it uses
+    \c qt_extended_48x48.png.
+
+    \section1 Line-by-Line Walkthrough
+
+    The Icons example consists of four classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c MainWindow inherits QMainWindow and is the main application
+       window.
+    \o \c IconPreviewArea is a custom widget that displays all
+       combinations of states and modes for a given icon.
+    \o \c IconSizeSpinBox is a subclass of QSpinBox that lets the
+       user enter icon sizes (e.g., "48 x 48").
+    \o \c ImageDelegate is a subclass of QItemDelegate that provides
+       comboboxes for letting the user set the mode and state
+       associated with an image.
+    \endlist
+
+    We will start by reviewing the \c IconPreviewArea class before we
+    take a look at the \c MainWindow class. Finally, we will review the
+    \c IconSizeSpinBox and \c ImageDelegate classes.
+
+    \section2 IconPreviewArea Class Definition
+
+    An \c IconPreviewArea widget consists of a group box containing a grid of
+    QLabel widgets displaying headers and pixmaps.
+
+    \image icons_preview_area.png Screenshot of IconPreviewArea.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/iconpreviewarea.h 0
+
+    The \c IconPreviewArea class inherits QWidget. It displays the
+    generated pixmaps corresponding to an icon's possible states and
+    modes at a given size.
+
+    We need two public functions to set the current icon and the
+    icon's size. In addition the class has three private functions: We
+    use the \c createHeaderLabel() and \c createPixmapLabel()
+    functions when constructing the preview area, and we need the \c
+    updatePixmapLabels() function to update the preview area when
+    the icon or the icon's size has changed.
+
+    The \c NumModes and \c NumStates constants reflect \l{QIcon}'s
+    number of currently defined modes and states.
+
+    \section2 IconPreviewArea Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/iconpreviewarea.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor we create the labels displaying the headers and
+    the icon's generated pixmaps, and add them to a grid layout.
+
+    When creating the header labels, we make sure the enums \c
+    NumModes and \c NumStates defined in the \c .h file, correspond
+    with the number of labels that we create. Then if the enums at
+    some point are changed, the \c Q_ASSERT() macro will alert that this
+    part of the \c .cpp file needs to be updated as well.
+
+    If the application is built in debug mode, the \c Q_ASSERT()
+    macro will expand to
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_icons.qdoc 0
+
+    In release mode, the macro simply disappear. The mode can be set
+    in the application's \c .pro file. One way to do so is to add an
+    option to \c qmake when building the application:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_icons.qdoc 1
+
+    or
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_icons.qdoc 2
+
+    Another approach is to add this line directly to the \c .pro
+    file.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/iconpreviewarea.cpp 1
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/iconpreviewarea.cpp 2
+
+    The public \c setIcon() and \c setSize() functions change the icon
+    or the icon size, and make sure that the generated pixmaps are
+    updated.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/iconpreviewarea.cpp 3
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/iconpreviewarea.cpp 4
+
+    We use the \c createHeaderLabel() and \c createPixmapLabel()
+    functions to create the preview area's labels displaying the
+    headers and the icon's generated pixmaps. Both functions return
+    the QLabel that is created.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/iconpreviewarea.cpp 5
+
+    We use the private \c updatePixmapLabel() function to update the
+    generated pixmaps displayed in the preview area.
+
+    For each mode, and for each state, we retrieve a pixmap using the
+    QIcon::pixmap() function, which generates a pixmap corresponding
+    to the given state, mode and size.
+
+    \section2 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    The \c MainWindow widget consists of three main elements: an
+    images group box, an icon size group box and a preview area.
+
+    \image icons-example.png Screenshot of the Icons example
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    The MainWindow class inherits from QMainWindow. We reimplement the
+    constructor, and declare several private slots:
+
+    \list
+    \o The \c about() slot simply provides information about the example.
+    \o The \c changeStyle() slot changes the application's GUI style and
+       adjust the style dependent size options.
+    \o The \c changeSize() slot changes the size of the preview area's icon.
+    \o The \c changeIcon() slot updates the set of pixmaps available to the
+       icon displayed in the preview area.
+    \o The \c addImage() slot allows the user to load a new image into the
+       application.
+    \endlist
+
+    In addition we declare several private functions to simplify the
+    constructor.
+
+    \section2 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor we first create the main window's central
+    widget and its child widgets, and put them in a grid layout. Then
+    we create the menus with their associated entries and actions.
+
+    Before we resize the application window to a suitable size, we set
+    the window title and determine the current style for the
+    application. We also enable the icon size spin box by clicking the
+    associated radio button, making the current value of the spin box
+    the icon's initial size.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    The \c about() slot displays a message box using the static
+    QMessageBox::about() function. In this example it displays a
+    simple box with information about the example.
+
+    The \c about() function looks for a suitable icon in four
+    locations: It prefers its parent's icon if that exists. If it
+    doesn't, the function tries the top-level widget containing
+    parent, and if that fails, it tries the active window. As a last
+    resort it uses the QMessageBox's Information icon.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    In the \c changeStyle() slot we first check the slot's
+    parameter. If it is false we immediately return, otherwise we find
+    out which style to change to, i.e. which action that triggered the
+    slot, using the QObject::sender() function.
+
+    This function returns the sender as a QObject pointer. Since we
+    know that the sender is a QAction object, we can safely cast the
+    QObject. We could have used a C-style cast or a C++ \c
+    static_cast(), but as a defensive programming technique we use a
+    \l qobject_cast(). The advantage is that if the object has the
+    wrong type, a null pointer is returned. Crashes due to null
+    pointers are much easier to diagnose than crashes due to unsafe
+    casts.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+    Once we have the action, we extract the style name using
+    QAction::data(). Then we create a QStyle object using the static
+    QStyleFactory::create() function.
+
+    Although we can assume that the style is supported by the
+    QStyleFactory: To be on the safe side, we use the \c Q_ASSERT()
+    macro to check if the created style is valid before we use the
+    QApplication::setStyle() function to set the application's GUI
+    style to the new style. QApplication will automatically delete
+    the style object when a new style is set or when the application
+    exits.
+
+    The predefined icon size options provided in the application are
+    style dependent, so we need to update the labels in the icon size
+    group box and in the end call the \c changeSize() slot to update
+    the icon's size.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 5
+
+    The \c changeSize() slot sets the size for the preview area's
+    icon.
+
+    To determine the new size we first check if the spin box is
+    enabled. If it is, we extract the extent of the new size from the
+    box. If it's not, we search through the predefined size options,
+    extract the QStyle::PixelMetric and use the QStyle::pixelMetric()
+    function to determine the extent. Then we create a QSize object
+    based on the extent, and use that object to set the size of the
+    preview area's icon.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 12
+
+    The first thing we do when the \c addImage() slot is called, is to
+    show a file dialog to the user. The easiest way to create a file
+    dialog is to use QFileDialog's static functions. Here we use the
+    \l {QFileDialog::getOpenFileNames()}{getOpenFileNames()} function
+    that will return one or more existing files selected by the user.
+
+    For each of the files the file dialog returns, we add a row to the
+    table widget. The table widget is listing the images the user has
+    loaded into the application.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 13
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 14
+
+    We retrieve the image name using the QFileInfo::baseName()
+    function that returns the base name of the file without the path,
+    and create the first table widget item in the row. Then we add the
+    file's complete name to the item's data. Since an item can hold
+    several information pieces, we need to assign the file name a role
+    that will distinguish it from other data. This role can be Qt::UserRole
+    or any value above it.
+
+    We also make sure that the item is not editable by removing the
+    Qt::ItemIsEditable flag. Table items are editable by default.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 15
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 16
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 17
+
+    Then we create the second and third items in the row making the
+    default mode Normal and the default state Off. But if the \gui
+    {Guess Image Mode/State} option is checked, and the file name
+    contains "_act", "_dis", or "_sel", the modes are changed to
+    Active, Disabled, or Selected. And if the file name contains
+    "_on", the state is changed to On. The sample files in the
+    example's \c images subdirectory respect this naming convension.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 18
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 19
+
+    In the end we add the items to the associated row, and use the
+    QTableWidget::openPersistentEditor() function to create
+    comboboxes for the mode and state columns of the items.
+
+    Due to the the connection between the table widget's \l
+    {QTableWidget::itemChanged()}{itemChanged()} signal and the \c
+    changeIcon() slot, the new image is automatically converted into a
+    pixmap and made part of the set of pixmaps available to the icon
+    in the preview area. So, corresponding to this fact, we need to
+    make sure that the new image's check box is enabled.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 6
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 7
+
+    The \c changeIcon() slot is called when the user alters the set
+    of images listed in the QTableWidget, to update the QIcon object
+    rendered by the \c IconPreviewArea.
+
+    We first create a QIcon object, and then we run through the
+    QTableWidget, which lists the images the user has loaded into the
+    application.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 8
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 9
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 10
+
+    We also extract the image file's name using the
+    QTableWidgetItem::data() function. This function takes a
+    Qt::DataItemRole as an argument to retrieve the right data
+    (remember that an item can hold several pieces of information)
+    and returns it as a QVariant. Then we use the
+    QVariant::toString() function to get the file name as a QString.
+
+    To create a pixmap from the file, we need to first create an
+    image and then convert this image into a pixmap using
+    QPixmap::fromImage(). Once we have the final pixmap, we add it,
+    with its associated mode and state, to the QIcon's set of
+    available pixmaps.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 11
+
+    After running through the entire list of images, we change the
+    icon of the preview area to the one we just created.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 20
+
+    In the \c removeAllImages() slot, we simply set the table widget's
+    row count to zero, automatically removing all the images the user
+    has loaded into the application. Then we update the set of pixmaps
+    available to the preview area's icon using the \c changeIcon()
+    slot.
+
+    \image icons_images_groupbox.png Screenshot of the images group box
+
+    The \c createImagesGroupBox() function is implemented to simplify
+    the constructor. The main purpose of the function is to create a
+    QTableWidget that will keep track of the images the user has
+    loaded into the application.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 21
+
+    First we create a group box that will contain the table widget.
+    Then we create a QTableWidget and customize it to suit our
+    purposes.
+
+    We call QAbstractItemView::setSelectionMode() to prevent the user
+    from selecting items.
+
+    The QAbstractItemView::setItemDelegate() call sets the item
+    delegate for the table widget. We create a \c ImageDelegate that
+    we make the item delegate for our view.
+
+    The QItemDelegate class can be used to provide an editor for an item view
+    class that is subclassed from QAbstractItemView. Using a delegate
+    for this purpose allows the editing mechanism to be customized and
+    developed independently from the model and view.
+
+    In this example we derive \c ImageDelegate from QItemDelegate.
+    QItemDelegate usually provides line editors, while our subclass
+    \c ImageDelegate, provides comboboxes for the mode and state
+    fields.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 22
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 23
+
+    Then we customize the QTableWidget's horizontal header, and hide
+    the vertical header.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 24
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 25
+
+    At the end, we connect the QTableWidget::itemChanged() signal to
+    the \c changeIcon() slot to ensuret that the preview area is in
+    sync with the image table.
+
+    \image icons_size_groupbox.png Screenshot of the icon size group box
+
+    The \c createIconSizeGroupBox() function is called from the
+    constructor. It creates the widgets controlling the size of the
+    preview area's icon.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 26
+
+    First we create a group box that will contain all the widgets;
+    then we create the radio buttons and the spin box.
+
+    The spin box is not a regular QSpinBox but an \c IconSizeSpinBox.
+    The \c IconSizeSpinBox class inherits QSpinBox and reimplements
+    two functions: QSpinBox::textFromValue() and
+    QSpinBox::valueFromText(). The \c IconSizeSpinBox is designed to
+    handle icon sizes, e.g., "32 x 32", instead of plain integer
+    values.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 27
+
+    Then we connect all of the radio buttons
+    \l{QRadioButton::toggled()}{toggled()} signals and the spin box's
+    \l {QSpinBox::valueChanged()}{valueChanged()} signal to the \c
+    changeSize() slot to make sure that the size of the preview
+    area's icon is updated whenever the user changes the icon size.
+    In the end we put the widgets in a layout that we install on the
+    group box.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 28
+
+    In the \c createActions() function we create and customize all the
+    actions needed to implement the functionality associated with the
+    menu entries in the application.
+
+    In particular we create the \c styleActionGroup based on the
+    currently available GUI styles using
+    QStyleFactory. QStyleFactory::keys() returns a list of valid keys,
+    typically including "windows", "motif", "cde", and
+    "plastique". Depending on the platform, "windowsxp" and
+    "macintosh" may be available.
+
+    We create one action for each key, and adds the action to the
+    action group. Also, for each action, we call QAction::setData()
+    with the style name. We will retrieve it later using
+    QAction::data().
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 29
+
+    In the \c createMenu() function, we add the previously created
+    actions to the \gui File, \gui View and \gui Help menus.
+
+    The QMenu class provides a menu widget for use in menu bars,
+    context menus, and other popup menus. We put each menu in the
+    application's menu bar, which we retrieve using
+    QMainWindow::menuBar().
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 30
+
+    QWidgets have a \l{QWidget::contextMenuPolicy}{contextMenuPolicy}
+    property that controls how the widget should behave when the user
+    requests a context menu (e.g., by right-clicking). We set the
+    QTableWidget's context menu policy to Qt::ActionsContextMenu,
+    meaning that the \l{QAction}s associated with the widget should
+    appear in its context menu.
+
+    Then we add the \gui{Add Image} and \gui{Remove All Images}
+    actions to the table widget. They will then appear in the table
+    widget's context menu.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/mainwindow.cpp 31
+
+    In the \c checkCurrentStyle() function we go through the group of
+    style actions, looking for the current GUI style.
+
+    For each action, we first extract the style name using
+    QAction::data(). Since this is only a QStyleFactory key (e.g.,
+    "macintosh"), we cannot compare it directly to the current
+    style's class name. We need to create a QStyle object using the
+    static QStyleFactory::create() function and compare the class
+    name of the created QStyle object with that of the current style.
+    As soon as we are done with a QStyle candidate, we delete it.
+
+    For all QObject subclasses that use the \c Q_OBJECT macro, the
+    class name of an object is available through its
+    \l{QObject::metaObject()}{meta-object}.
+
+    We can assume that the style is supported by
+    QStyleFactory, but to be on the safe side we use the \c
+    Q_ASSERT() macro to make sure that QStyleFactory::create()
+    returned a valid pointer.
+
+    \section2 IconSizeSpinBox Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/iconsizespinbox.h 0
+
+    The \c IconSizeSpinBox class is a subclass of QSpinBox. A plain
+    QSpinBox can only handle integers. But since we want to display
+    the spin box's values in a more sophisticated way, we need to
+    subclass QSpinBox and reimplement the QSpinBox::textFromValue()
+    and QSpinBox::valueFromText() functions.
+
+    \image icons_size_spinbox.png Screenshot of the icon size spinbox
+
+    \section2 IconSizeSpinBox Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/iconsizespinbox.cpp 0
+
+    The constructor is trivial.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/iconsizespinbox.cpp 2
+
+    QSpinBox::textFromValue() is used by the spin box whenever it
+    needs to display a value. The default implementation returns a
+    base 10 representation of the \c value parameter.
+
+    Our reimplementation returns a QString of the form "32 x 32".
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/iconsizespinbox.cpp 1
+
+    The QSpinBox::valueFromText() function is used by the spin box
+    whenever it needs to interpret text typed in by the user. Since
+    we reimplement the \c textFromValue() function we also need to
+    reimplement the \c valueFromText() function to interpret the
+    parameter text and return the associated int value.
+
+    We parse the text using a regular expression (a QRegExp). We
+    define an expression that matches one or several digits,
+    optionally followed by whitespace, an "x" or the times symbol,
+    whitespace and one or several digits again.
+
+    The first digits of the regular expression are captured using
+    parentheses. This enables us to use the QRegExp::cap() or
+    QRegExp::capturedTexts() functions to extract the matched
+    characters. If the first and second numbers of the spin box value
+    differ (e.g., "16 x 24"), we use the first number.
+
+    When the user presses \key Enter, QSpinBox first calls
+    QSpinBox::valueFromText() to interpret the text typed by the
+    user, then QSpinBox::textFromValue() to present it in a canonical
+    format (e.g., "16 x 16").
+
+    \section2 ImageDelegate Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/imagedelegate.h 0
+
+    The \c ImageDelegate class is a subclass of QItemDelegate. The
+    QItemDelegate class provides display and editing facilities for
+    data items from a model. A single QItemDelegate object is
+    responsible for all items displayed in a item view (in our case,
+    a QTableWidget).
+
+    A QItemDelegate can be used to provide an editor for an item view
+    class that is subclassed from QAbstractItemView. Using a delegate
+    for this purpose allows the editing mechanism to be customized and
+    developed independently from the model and view.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/imagedelegate.h 1
+
+    The default implementation of QItemDelegate creates a QLineEdit.
+    Since we want the editor to be a QComboBox, we need to subclass
+    QItemDelegate and reimplement the QItemDelegate::createEditor(),
+    QItemDelegate::setEditorData() and QItemDelegate::setModelData()
+    functions.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/imagedelegate.h 2
+
+    The \c emitCommitData() slot is used to emit the
+    QImageDelegate::commitData() signal with the appropriate
+    argument.
+
+    \section2 ImageDelegate Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/imagedelegate.cpp 0
+
+    The constructor is trivial.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/imagedelegate.cpp 1
+
+    The default QItemDelegate::createEditor() implementation returns
+    the widget used to edit the item specified by the model and item
+    index for editing. The parent widget and style option are used to
+    control the appearance of the editor widget.
+
+    Our reimplementation create and populate a combobox instead of
+    the default line edit. The contents of the combobox depends on
+    the column in the table for which the editor is requested. Column
+    1 contains the QIcon modes, whereas column 2 contains the QIcon
+    states.
+
+    In addition, we connect the combobox's \l
+    {QComboBox::activated()}{activated()} signal to the \c
+    emitCommitData() slot to emit the
+    QAbstractItemDelegate::commitData() signal whenever the user
+    chooses an item using the combobox. This ensures that the rest of
+    the application notices the change and updates itself.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/imagedelegate.cpp 2
+
+    The QItemDelegate::setEditorData() function is used by
+    QTableWidget to transfer data from a QTableWidgetItem to the
+    editor. The data is stored as a string; we use
+    QComboBox::findText() to locate it in the combobox.
+
+    Delegates work in terms of models, not items. This makes it
+    possible to use them with any item view class (e.g., QListView,
+    QListWidget, QTreeView, etc.). The transition between model and
+    items is done implicitly by QTableWidget; we don't need to worry
+    about it.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/imagedelegate.cpp 3
+
+    The QItemDelegate::setEditorData() function is used by QTableWidget
+    to transfer data back from the editor to the \l{QTableWidgetItem}.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/icons/imagedelegate.cpp 4
+
+    The \c emitCommitData() slot simply emit the
+    QAbstractItemDelegate::commitData() signal for the editor that
+    triggered the slot. This signal must be emitted when the editor
+    widget has completed editing the data, and wants to write it back
+    into the model.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/imagecomposition.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/imagecomposition.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8cba805
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/imagecomposition.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,179 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example painting/imagecomposition
+    \title Image Composition Example
+
+    The Image Composition example lets the user combine images
+    together using any composition mode supported by QPainter, described
+    in detail in \l{QPainter#Composition Modes}{Composition Modes}.
+
+    \image imagecomposition-example.png
+
+    \section1 Setting Up The Resource File
+
+    The Image Composition example requires two source images,
+    \e butterfly.png and \e checker.png that are embedded within
+    \e imagecomposition.qrc. The file contains the following code:
+
+    \quotefile examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposition.qrc
+
+    For more information on resource files, see \l{The Qt Resource System}.
+
+    \section1 ImageComposer Class Definition
+
+    The \c ImageComposer class is a subclass of QWidget that implements three
+    private slots, \c chooseSource(), \c chooseDestination(), and
+    \c recalculateResult().
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.h 0
+
+    In addition, \c ImageComposer consists of five private functions,
+    \c addOp(), \c chooseImage(), \c loadImage(), \c currentMode(), and
+    \c imagePos(), as well as private instances of QToolButton, QComboBox,
+    QLabel, and QImage.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.h 1
+
+    \section1 ImageComposer Class Implementation
+
+    We declare a QSize object, \c resultSize, as a static constant with width
+    and height equal to 200.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.cpp 0
+
+    Within the constructor, we instantiate a QToolButton object,
+    \c sourceButton and set its \l{QAbstractButton::setIconSize()}{iconSize}
+    property to \c resultSize. The \c operatorComboBox is instantiated and
+    then populated using the \c addOp() function. This function accepts a
+    QPainter::CompositionMode, \a mode, and a QString, \a name, representing
+    the name of the composition mode.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.cpp 1
+
+    The \c destinationButton is instantiated and its
+    \l{QAbstractButton::setIconSize()}{iconSize} property is set to
+    \c resultSize as well. The \l{QLabel}s \c equalLabel and \c resultLabel
+    are created and \c{resultLabel}'s \l{QWidget::setMinimumWidth()}
+    {minimumWidth} is set.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.cpp 2
+
+    We connect the following signals to their corresponding slots:
+    \list
+        \o \c{sourceButton}'s \l{QPushButton::clicked()}{clicked()} signal is
+            connected to \c chooseSource(),
+        \o \c{operatorComboBox}'s \l{QComboBox::activated()}{activated()}
+            signal is connected to \c recalculateResult(), and
+        \o \c{destinationButton}'s \l{QToolButton::clicked()}{clicked()} signal
+            is connected to \c chooseDestination().
+    \endlist
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.cpp 3
+
+    A QGridLayout, \c mainLayout, is used to place all the widgets. Note
+    that \c{mainLayout}'s \l{QLayout::setSizeConstraint()}{sizeConstraint}
+    property is set to QLayout::SetFixedSize, which means that
+    \c{ImageComposer}'s size cannot be resized at all.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.cpp 4
+
+    We create a QImage, \c resultImage, and we invoke \c loadImage() twice
+    to load both the image files in our \e imagecomposition.qrc file. Then,
+    we set the \l{QWidget::setWindowTitle()}{windowTitle} property to
+    "Image Composition".
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.cpp 5
+
+    The \c chooseSource() and \c chooseDestination() functions are
+    convenience functions that invoke \c chooseImage() with specific
+    parameters.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.cpp 6
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.cpp 7
+
+    The \c chooseImage() function loads an image of the user's choice,
+    depending on the \a title, \a image, and \a button.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.cpp 10
+
+    The \c recalculateResult() function is used to calculate amd display the
+    result of combining the two images together with the user's choice of
+    composition mode.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.cpp 8
+
+    The \c addOp() function adds an item to the \c operatorComboBox using
+    \l{QComboBox}'s \l{QComboBox::addItem()}{addItem} function. This function
+    accepts a QPainter::CompositionMode, \a mode, and a QString, \a name. The
+    rectangle is filled with Qt::Transparent and both the \c sourceImage and
+    \c destinationImage are painted, before displaying it on \c resultLabel.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.cpp 9
+
+    The \c loadImage() function paints a transparent background using
+    \l{QPainter::fillRect()}{fillRect()} and draws \c image in a
+    centralized position using \l{QPainter::drawImage()}{drawImage()}.
+    This \c image is then set as the \c{button}'s icon.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.cpp 11
+
+    The \c currentMode() function returns the composition mode currently
+    selected in \c operatorComboBox.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.cpp 12
+
+    We use the \c imagePos() function to ensure that images loaded onto the
+    QToolButton objects, \c sourceButton and \c destinationButton, are
+    centralized.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/imagecomposer.cpp 13
+
+    \section1 The \c main() Function
+
+    The \c main() function instantiates QApplication and \c ImageComposer
+    and invokes its \l{QWidget::show()}{show()} function.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/imagecomposition/main.cpp 0
+
+    */
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/imageviewer.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/imageviewer.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6881673
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/imageviewer.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,340 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/imageviewer
+    \title Image Viewer Example
+
+    The example shows how to combine QLabel and QScrollArea to
+    display an image. QLabel is typically used for displaying text,
+    but it can also display an image. QScrollArea provides a
+    scrolling view around another widget. If the child widget exceeds
+    the size of the frame, QScrollArea automatically provides scroll
+    bars.
+
+    The example demonstrates how QLabel's ability to scale its
+    contents (QLabel::scaledContents), and QScrollArea's ability to
+    automatically resize its contents (QScrollArea::widgetResizable),
+    can be used to implement zooming and scaling features. In
+    addition the example shows how to use QPainter to print an image.
+
+    \image imageviewer-example.png Screenshot of the Image Viewer example
+
+    With the Image Viewer application, the users can view an image of
+    their choice. The \gui File menu gives the user the possibility
+    to:
+
+    \list
+    \o \gui{Open...} - Open an image file
+    \o \gui{Print...} - Print an image
+    \o \gui{Exit} - Exit the application
+    \endlist
+
+    Once an image is loaded, the \gui View menu allows the users to:
+
+    \list
+    \o \gui{Zoom In} - Scale the image up by 25%
+    \o \gui{Zoom Out} - Scale the image down by 25%
+    \o \gui{Normal Size} - Show the image at its original size
+    \o \gui{Fit to Window} - Stretch the image to occupy the entire window
+    \endlist
+
+    In addition the \gui Help menu provides the users with information
+    about the Image Viewer example in particular, and about Qt in
+    general.
+
+    \section1 ImageViewer Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.h 0
+
+    The \c ImageViewer class inherits from QMainWindow. We reimplement
+    the constructor, and create several private slots to facilitate
+    the menu entries. In addition we create four private functions.
+
+    We use \c createActions() and \c createMenus() when constructing
+    the \c ImageViewer widget. We use the \c updateActions() function
+    to update the menu entries when a new image is loaded, or when
+    the \gui {Fit to Window} option is toggled. The zoom slots use \c
+    scaleImage() to perform the zooming. In turn, \c
+    scaleImage() uses \c adjustScrollBar() to preserve the focal point after
+    scaling an image.
+
+    \section1 ImageViewer Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor we first create the label and the scroll area.
+
+    We set \c {imageLabel}'s size policy to \l
+    {QSizePolicy::Ignored}{ignored}, making the users able to scale
+    the image to whatever size they want when the \gui {Fit to Window}
+    option is turned on. Otherwise, the default size polizy (\l
+    {QSizePolicy::Preferred}{preferred}) will make scroll bars appear
+    when the scroll area becomes smaller than the label's minimum size
+    hint.
+
+    We ensure that the label will scale its contents to fill all
+    available space, to enable the image to scale properly when
+    zooming. If we omitted to set the \c {imageLabel}'s \l
+    {QLabel::scaledContents}{scaledContents} property, zooming in
+    would enlarge the QLabel, but leave the pixmap at
+    its original size, exposing the QLabel's background.
+
+    We make \c imageLabel the scroll area's child widget, and we make
+    \c scrollArea the central widget of the QMainWindow. At the end
+    we create the associated actions and menus, and customize the \c
+    {ImageViewer}'s appearance.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 2
+
+    In the \c open() slot, we show a file dialog to the user. The
+    easiest way to create a QFileDialog is to use the static
+    convenience functions. QFileDialog::getOpenFileName() returns an
+    existing file selected by the user. If the user presses \gui
+    Cancel, QFileDialog returns an empty string.
+
+    Unless the file name is a empty string, we check if the file's
+    format is an image format by constructing a QImage which tries to
+    load the image from the file. If the constructor returns a null
+    image, we use a QMessageBox to alert the user.
+
+    The QMessageBox class provides a modal dialog with a short
+    message, an icon, and some buttons. As with QFileDialog the
+    easiest way to create a QMessageBox is to use its static
+    convenience functions. QMessageBox provides a range of different
+    messages arranged along two axes: severity (question,
+    information, warning and critical) and complexity (the number of
+    necessary response buttons). In this particular example an
+    information message with an \gui OK button (the default) is
+    sufficient, since the message is part of a normal operation.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 4
+
+    If the format is supported, we display the image in \c imageLabel
+    by setting the label's \l {QLabel::pixmap}{pixmap}. Then we enable
+    the \gui Print and \gui {Fit to Window} menu entries and update
+    the rest of the view menu entries. The \gui Open and \gui Exit
+    entries are enabled by default.
+
+    If the \gui {Fit to Window} option is turned off, the
+    QScrollArea::widgetResizable property is \c false and it is
+    our responsibility (not QScrollArea's) to give the QLabel a
+    reasonable size based on its contents. We call
+    \{QWidget::adjustSize()}{adjustSize()} to achieve this, which is
+    essentially the same as
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_imageviewer.qdoc 0
+
+    In the \c print() slot, we first make sure that an image has been
+    loaded into the application:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 6
+
+    If the application is built in debug mode, the \c Q_ASSERT() macro
+    will expand to
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_imageviewer.qdoc 1
+
+    In release mode, the macro simply disappear. The mode can be set
+    in the application's \c .pro file. One way to do so is to add an
+    option to \gui qmake when building the appliction:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_imageviewer.qdoc 2
+
+    or
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_imageviewer.qdoc 3
+
+    Another approach is to add this line directly to the \c .pro
+    file.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 7
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 8
+
+    Then we present a print dialog allowing the user to choose a
+    printer and to set a few options. We construct a painter with a
+    QPrinter as the paint device. We set the painter's window
+    and viewport in such a way that the image is as large as possible
+    on the paper, but without altering its
+    \l{Qt::KeepAspectRatio}{aspect ratio}.
+
+    In the end we draw the pixmap at position (0, 0).
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 9
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 10
+
+    We implement the zooming slots using the private \c scaleImage()
+    function. We set the scaling factors to 1.25 and 0.8,
+    respectively. These factor values ensure that a \gui {Zoom In}
+    action and a \gui {Zoom Out} action will cancel each other (since
+    1.25 * 0.8 == 1), and in that way the normal image size can be
+    restored using the zooming features.
+
+    The screenshots below show an image in its normal size, and the
+    same image after zooming in:
+
+    \table
+    \row
+    \o \inlineimage imageviewer-original_size.png
+    \o \inlineimage imageviewer-zoom_in_1.png
+    \o \inlineimage imageviewer-zoom_in_2.png
+    \endtable
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 11
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 12
+
+    When zooming, we use the QLabel's ability to scale its contents.
+    Such scaling doesn't change the actual size hint of the contents.
+    And since the \l {QLabel::adjustSize()}{adjustSize()} function
+    use those size hint, the only thing we need to do to restore the
+    normal size of the currently displayed image is to call \c
+    adjustSize() and reset the scale factor to 1.0.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 13
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 14
+
+    The \c fitToWindow() slot is called each time the user toggled
+    the \gui {Fit to Window} option. If the slot is called to turn on
+    the option, we tell the scroll area to resize its child widget
+    with the QScrollArea::setWidgetResizable() function. Then we
+    disable the \gui {Zoom In}, \gui {Zoom Out} and \gui {Normal
+    Size} menu entries using the private \c updateActions() function.
+
+    If the \l {QScrollArea::widgetResizable} property is set to \c
+    false (the default), the scroll area honors the size of its child
+    widget. If this property is set to \c true, the scroll area will
+    automatically resize the widget in order to avoid scroll bars
+    where they can be avoided, or to take advantage of extra space.
+    But the scroll area will honor the minimum size hint of its child
+    widget independent of the widget resizable property. So in this
+    example we set \c {imageLabel}'s size policy to \l
+    {QSizePolicy::Ignored}{ignored} in the constructor, to avoid that
+    scroll bars appear when the scroll area becomes smaller than the
+    label's minimum size hint.
+
+    The screenshots below shows an image in its normal size, and the
+    same image with the \gui {Fit to window} option turned on.
+    Enlarging the window will stretch the image further, as shown in
+    the third screenshot.
+
+    \table
+    \row
+    \o \inlineimage imageviewer-original_size.png
+    \o \inlineimage imageviewer-fit_to_window_1.png
+    \o \inlineimage imageviewer-fit_to_window_2.png
+    \endtable
+
+    If the slot is called to turn off the option, the
+    {QScrollArea::setWidgetResizable} property is set to \c false. We
+    also restore the image pixmap to its normal size by adjusting the
+    label's size to its content. And in the end we update the view
+    menu entries.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 15
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 16
+
+    We implement the \c about() slot to create a message box
+    describing what the example is designed to show.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 17
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 18
+
+    In the private \c createAction() function, we create the
+    actions providing the application features.
+
+    We assign a short-cut key to each action and connect them to the
+    appropiate slots. We only enable the \c openAct and \c exitAxt at
+    the time of creation, the others are updated once an image has
+    been loaded into the application. In addition we make the \c
+    fitToWindowAct \l {QAction::checkable}{checkable}.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 19
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 20
+
+    In the private \c createMenu() function, we add the previously
+    created actions to the \gui File, \gui View and \gui Help menus.
+
+    The QMenu class provides a menu widget for use in menu bars,
+    context menus, and other popup menus. The QMenuBar class provides
+    a horizontal menu bar that consists of a list of pull-down menu
+    items. So at the end we put the menus in the \c {ImageViewer}'s
+    menu bar which we retrieve with the QMainWindow::menuBar()
+    function.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 21
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 22
+
+    The private \c updateActions() function enables or disables the
+    \gui {Zoom In}, \gui {Zoom Out} and \gui {Normal Size} menu
+    entries depending on whether the \gui {Fit to Window} option is
+    turned on or off.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 23
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 24
+
+    In \c scaleImage(), we use the \c factor parameter to calculate
+    the new scaling factor for the displayed image, and resize \c
+    imageLabel. Since we set the
+    \l{QLabel::scaledContents}{scaledContents} property to \c true in
+    the constructor, the call to QWidget::resize() will scale the
+    image displayed in the label. We also adjust the scroll bars to
+    preserve the focal point of the image.
+
+    At the end, if the scale factor is less than 33.3% or greater
+    than 300%, we disable the respective menu entry to prevent the
+    image pixmap from becoming too large, consuming too much
+    resources in the window system.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 25
+    \snippet examples/widgets/imageviewer/imageviewer.cpp 26
+
+    Whenever we zoom in or out, we need to adjust the scroll bars in
+    consequence. It would have been tempting to simply call
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_imageviewer.qdoc 4
+
+    but this would make the top-left corner the focal point, not the
+    center. Therefore we need to take into account the scroll bar
+    handle's size (the \l{QScrollBar::pageStep}{page step}).
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/itemviewspuzzle.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/itemviewspuzzle.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..99ef7d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/itemviewspuzzle.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/puzzle
+    \title Item Views Puzzle Example
+
+    The Puzzle example shows how to enable drag and drop with a custom model
+    to allow items to be transferred between a view and another widget.
+
+    \image itemviewspuzzle-example.png
+
+    This example is an implementation of a simple jigsaw puzzle game using the
+    built-in support for drag and drop provided by Qt's model/view framework.
+    The \l{Drag and Drop Puzzle Example}{Drag and Drop Puzzle} example shows
+    many of the same features, but takes an alternative approach that uses Qt's
+    drag and drop API at the application level to handle drag and drop
+    operations.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/licensewizard.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/licensewizard.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a702c06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/licensewizard.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,232 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example dialogs/licensewizard
+    \title License Wizard Example
+
+    The License Wizard example shows how to implement complex wizards in
+    Qt.
+
+    \image licensewizard-example.png Screenshot of the License Wizard example
+
+    Most wizards have a linear structure, with page 1 followed by
+    page 2 and so on until the last page. The
+    \l{dialogs/classwizard}{Class Wizard} example shows how to create
+    such wizards.
+
+    Some wizards are more complex in that they allow different
+    traversal paths based on the information provided by the user.
+    The License Wizard example illustrates this. It provides five
+    wizard pages; depending on which options are selected, the user
+    can reach different pages.
+
+    \image licensewizard-flow.png The License Wizard pages
+
+    The example consists of the following classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c LicenseWizard inherits QWizard and implements a non-linear
+       five-page wizard that leads the user through the process of
+       choosing a license agreement.
+    \o \c IntroPage, \c EvaluatePage, \c RegisterPage, \c
+       DetailsPage, and \c ConclusionPage are QWizardPage subclasses
+       that implement the wizard pages.
+    \endlist
+
+    \section1 The LicenseWizard Class
+
+    The \c LicenseWizard class derives from QWizard and provides a
+    five-page wizard that guides the user through the process of
+    registering their copy of a fictitious software product. Here's
+    the class definition:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.h 1
+
+    The class's public API is limited to a constructor and an enum.
+    The enum defines the IDs associated with the various pages:
+
+    \table
+    \header \o Class name \o Enum value \o Page ID
+    \row \o \c IntroPage \o \c Page_Intro \o 0
+    \row \o \c EvaluatePage \o \c Page_Evaluate \o 1
+    \row \o \c RegisterPage \o \c Page_Register \o 2
+    \row \o \c DetailsPage \o \c Page_Details \o 3
+    \row \o \c ConclusionPage \o \c Page_Conclusion \o 4
+    \endtable
+
+    For this example, the IDs are arbitrary. The only constraints are
+    that they must be unique and different from -1. IDs allow us to
+    refer to pages.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 2
+
+    In the constructor, we create the five pages, insert them into
+    the wizard using QWizard::setPage(), and set \c Page_Intro to be
+    the first page.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 4
+
+    We set the style to \l{QWizard::}{ModernStyle} on all platforms
+    except Mac OS X,
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 6
+
+    We configure the QWizard to show a \gui Help button, which is
+    connected to our \c showHelp() slot. We also set the
+    \l{QWizard::}{LogoPixmap} for all pages that have a header (i.e.,
+    \c EvaluatePage, \c RegisterPage, and \c DetailsPage).
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 9
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 11
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 13
+
+    In \c showHelp(), we display help texts that are appropiate for
+    the current page. If the user clicks \gui Help twice for the same
+    page, we say, "Sorry, I already gave what help I could. Maybe you
+    should try asking a human?"
+
+    \section1 The IntroPage Class
+
+    The pages are defined in \c licensewizard.h and implemented in \c
+    licensewizard.cpp, together with \c LicenseWizard.
+
+    Here's the definition and implementation of \c{IntroPage}:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.h 4
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 16
+
+    A page inherits from QWizardPage. We set a
+    \l{QWizardPage::}{title} and a
+    \l{QWizard::WatermarkPixmap}{watermark pixmap}. By not setting
+    any \l{QWizardPage::}{subTitle}, we ensure that no header is
+    displayed for this page. (On Windows, it is customary for wizards
+    to display a watermark pixmap on the first and last pages, and to
+    have a header on the other pages.)
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 17
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 19
+
+    The \c nextId() function returns the ID for \c EvaluatePage if
+    the \gui{Evaluate the product for 30 days} option is checked;
+    otherwise it returns the ID for \c RegisterPage.
+
+    \section1 The EvaluatePage Class
+
+    The \c EvaluatePage is slightly more involved:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.h 5
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 20
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 21
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 22
+
+    First, we set the page's \l{QWizardPage::}{title}
+    and \l{QWizardPage::}{subTitle}.
+
+    Then we create the child widgets, create \l{Registering and Using
+    Fields}{wizard fields} associated with them, and put them into
+    layouts. The fields are created with an asterisk (\c
+    *) next to their name. This makes them \l{mandatory fields}, that
+    is, fields that must be filled before the user can press the
+    \gui Next button (\gui Continue on Mac OS X). The fields' values
+    can be accessed from any other page using QWizardPage::field().
+
+    Resetting the page amounts to clearing the two text fields.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 23
+
+    The next page is always the \c ConclusionPage.
+
+    \section1 The ConclusionPage Class
+
+    The \c RegisterPage and \c DetailsPage are very similar to \c
+    EvaluatePage. Let's go directly to the \c ConclusionPage:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.h 6
+
+    This time, we reimplement QWizardPage::initializePage() and
+    QWidget::setVisible(), in addition to
+    \l{QWizardPage::}{nextId()}. We also declare a private slot:
+    \c printButtonClicked().
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 18
+
+    The default implementation of QWizardPage::nextId() returns
+    the page with the next ID, or -1 if the current page has the
+    highest ID. This behavior would work here, because \c
+    Page_Conclusion equals 5 and there is no page with a higher ID,
+    but to avoid relying on such subtle behavior, we reimplement
+    \l{QWizardPage::}{nextId()} to return -1.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 27
+
+    We use QWizard::hasVisitedPage() to determine the type of
+    license agreement the user has chosen. If the user filled the \c
+    EvaluatePage, the license text refers to an Evaluation License
+    Agreement. If the user filled the \c DetailsPage, the license
+    text is a First-Time License Agreement. If the user provided an
+    upgrade key and skipped the \c DetailsPage, the license text is
+    an Update License Agreement.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/licensewizard/licensewizard.cpp 28
+
+    We want to display a \gui Print button in the wizard when the \c
+    ConclusionPage is up. One way to accomplish this is to reimplement
+    QWidget::setVisible():
+
+    \list
+    \o If the page is shown, we set the \l{QWizard::}{CustomButton1} button's
+       text to \gui{\underline{P}rint}, we enable the \l{QWizard::}{HaveCustomButton1}
+       option, and we connect the QWizard's \l{QWizard::}{customButtonClicked()}
+       signal to our \c printButtonClicked() slot.
+    \o If the page is hidden, we disable the \l{QWizard::}{HaveCustomButton1}
+       option and disconnect the \c printButtonClicked() slot.
+    \endlist
+
+    \sa QWizard, {Class Wizard Example}, {Trivial Wizard Example}
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/lineedits.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/lineedits.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee702ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/lineedits.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/lineedits
+    \title Line Edits Example
+
+    The Line Edits example demonstrates the many ways that QLineEdit can be used, and
+    shows the effects of various properties and validators on the input and output
+    supplied by the user.
+
+    \image lineedits-example.png
+
+    The example consists of a single \c Window class, containing a selection of
+    line edits with different input constraints and display properties that can be
+    changed by selecting items from comboboxes. Presenting these together helps
+    developers choose suitable properties to use with line edits, and makes it easy
+    to compare the effects of each validator on user input.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The \c Window class inherits QWidget and contains a constructor and several
+    slots:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/lineedits/window.h 0
+
+    The slots are used to update the type of validator used for a given line edit when
+    a new validator has been selected in the associated combobox. The line edits
+    are stored in the window for use in these slots.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    The \c Window constructor is used to set up the line edits, validators,
+    and comboboxes, connect signals from the comboboxes to slots in the \c Window
+    class, and arrange the child widgets in layouts.
+
+    We begin by constructing a \l{QGroupBox}{group box} to hold a label, combobox,
+    and line edit so that we can demonstrate the QLineEdit::echoMode property:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/lineedits/window.cpp 0
+
+    At this point, none of these widgets have been arranged in layouts. Eventually,
+    the \c echoLabel, \c echoComboBox, and \c echoLineEdit will be placed in a
+    vertical layout inside the \c echoGroup group box.
+
+    Similarly, we construct group boxes and collections of widgets to show the
+    effects of QIntValidator and QDoubleValidator on a line edit's contents:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/lineedits/window.cpp 1
+
+    Text alignment is demonstrated by another group of widgets:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/lineedits/window.cpp 2
+
+    QLineEdit supports the use of \l{QLineEdit::inputMask}{input masks}.
+    These only allow the user to type characters into the line edit that
+    follow a simple specification. We construct a group of widgets to
+    demonstrate a selection of predefined masks:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/lineedits/window.cpp 3
+
+    Another useful feature of QLineEdit is its ability to make its contents
+    read-only. This property is used to control access to a line edit in the
+    following group of widgets:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/lineedits/window.cpp 4
+
+    Now that all the child widgets have been constructed, we connect signals
+    from the comboboxes to slots in the \c Window object:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/lineedits/window.cpp 5
+
+    Each of these connections use the QComboBox::activated() signal that
+    supplies an integer to the slot. This will be used to efficiently
+    make changes to the appropriate line edit in each slot.
+
+    We place each combobox, line edit, and label in a layout for each group
+    box, beginning with the layout for the \c echoGroup group box:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/lineedits/window.cpp 6
+
+    The other layouts are constructed in the same way:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/lineedits/window.cpp 7
+
+    Finally, we place each group box in a grid layout for the \c Window object
+    and set the window title:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/lineedits/window.cpp 8
+
+    The slots respond to signals emitted when the comboboxes are changed by the
+    user.
+
+    When the combobox for the \gui{Echo} group box is changed, the \c echoChanged()
+    slot is called:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/lineedits/window.cpp 9
+
+    The slot updates the line edit in the same group box to use an echo mode that
+    corresponds to the entry described in the combobox.
+
+    When the combobox for the \gui{Validator} group box is changed, the
+    \c validatorChanged() slot is called:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/lineedits/window.cpp 10
+
+    The slot either creates a new validator for the line edit to use, or it removes
+    the validator in use by calling QLineEdit::setValidator() with a zero pointer.
+    We clear the line edit in this case to ensure that the new validator is
+    initially given valid input to work with.
+
+    When the combobox for the \gui{Alignment} group box is changed, the
+    \c alignmentChanged() slot is called:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/lineedits/window.cpp 11
+
+    This changes the way that text is displayed in the line edit to correspond with
+    the description selected in the combobox.
+
+    The \c inputMaskChanged() slot handles changes to the combobox in the
+    \gui{Input Mask} group box:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/lineedits/window.cpp 12
+
+    Each entry in the relevant combobox is associated with an input mask. We set
+    a new mask by calling the QLineEdit::setMask() function with a suitable string;
+    the mask is disabled if an empty string is used.
+
+    The \c accessChanged() slot handles changes to the combobox in the
+    \gui{Access} group box:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/lineedits/window.cpp 13
+
+    Here, we simply associate the \gui{False} and \gui{True} entries in the combobox
+    with \c false and \c true values to be passed to QLineEdit::setReadOnly(). This
+    allows the user to enable and disable input to the line edit.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/localfortuneclient.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/localfortuneclient.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b4489b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/localfortuneclient.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example ipc/localfortuneclient
+    \title Local Fortune Client Example
+
+    The Local Fortune Client example shows how to create a client for a simple
+    local service using QLocalSocket. It is intended to be run alongside the
+    \l{ipc/localfortuneserver}{Local Fortune Server} example.
+
+    \image localfortuneclient-example.png Screenshot of the Local Fortune Client example
+
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/localfortuneserver.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/localfortuneserver.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b2395c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/localfortuneserver.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example ipc/localfortuneserver
+    \title Local Fortune Server Example
+
+    The Local Fortune Server example shows how to create a server for a simple
+    local service. It is intended to be run alongside the
+    \l{ipc/localfortuneclient}{Local Fortune Client} example
+
+    \image localfortuneserver-example.png Screenshot of the Local Fortune Server example
+ */
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/loopback.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/loopback.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b100f71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/loopback.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example network/loopback
+    \title Loopback Example
+
+    The Loopback example shows how to communicate between simple clients and servers on a local
+    host.
+
+    \image loopback-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/mandelbrot.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/mandelbrot.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d2a3ee1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/mandelbrot.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,382 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example threads/mandelbrot
+    \title Mandelbrot Example
+
+    The Mandelbrot example shows how to use a worker thread to
+    perform heavy computations without blocking the main thread's
+    event loop.
+
+    The heavy computation here is the Mandelbrot set, probably the
+    world's most famous fractal. These days, while sophisticated
+    programs such as \l{XaoS} that provide real-time zooming in the
+    Mandelbrot set, the standard Mandelbrot algorithm is just slow
+    enough for our purposes.
+
+    \image mandelbrot-example.png Screenshot of the Mandelbrot example
+
+    In real life, the approach described here is applicable to a
+    large set of problems, including synchronous network I/O and
+    database access, where the user interface must remain responsive
+    while some heavy operation is taking place. The \l
+    network/blockingfortuneclient example shows the same principle at
+    work in a TCP client.
+
+    The Mandelbrot application supports zooming and scrolling using
+    the mouse or the keyboard. To avoid freezing the main thread's
+    event loop (and, as a consequence, the application's user
+    interface), we put all the fractal computation in a separate
+    worker thread. The thread emits a signal when it is done
+    rendering the fractal.
+
+    During the time where the worker thread is recomputing the
+    fractal to reflect the new zoom factor position, the main thread
+    simply scales the previously rendered pixmap to provide immediate
+    feedback. The result doesn't look as good as what the worker
+    thread eventually ends up providing, but at least it makes the
+    application more responsive. The sequence of screenshots below
+    shows the original image, the scaled image, and the rerendered
+    image.
+
+    \table
+    \row
+    \o \inlineimage mandelbrot_zoom1.png
+    \o \inlineimage mandelbrot_zoom2.png
+    \o \inlineimage mandelbrot_zoom3.png
+    \endtable
+
+    Similarly, when the user scrolls, the previous pixmap is scrolled
+    immediately, revealing unpainted areas beyond the edge of the
+    pixmap, while the image is rendered by the worker thread.
+
+    \table
+    \row
+    \o \inlineimage mandelbrot_scroll1.png
+    \o \inlineimage mandelbrot_scroll2.png
+    \o \inlineimage mandelbrot_scroll3.png
+    \endtable
+
+    The application consists of two classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c RenderThread is a QThread subclass that renders
+       the Mandelbrot set.
+    \o \c MandelbrotWidget is a QWidget subclass that shows the
+       Mandelbrot set on screen and lets the user zoom and scroll.
+    \endlist
+
+    If you are not already familiar with Qt's thread support, we
+    recommend that you start by reading the \l{Thread Support in Qt}
+    overview.
+
+    \section1 RenderThread Class Definition
+
+    We'll start with the definition of the \c RenderThread class:
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/renderthread.h 0
+
+    The class inherits QThread so that it gains the ability to run in
+    a separate thread. Apart from the constructor and destructor, \c
+    render() is the only public function. Whenever the thread is done
+    rendering an image, it emits the \c renderedImage() signal.
+
+    The protected \c run() function is reimplemented from QThread. It
+    is automatically called when the thread is started.
+
+    In the \c private section, we have a QMutex, a QWaitCondition,
+    and a few other data members. The mutex protects the other data
+    member.
+
+    \section1 RenderThread Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/renderthread.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor, we initialize the \c restart and \c abort
+    variables to \c false. These variables control the flow of the \c
+    run() function.
+
+    We also initialize the \c colormap array, which contains a series
+    of RGB colors.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/renderthread.cpp 1
+
+    The destructor can be called at any point while the thread is
+    active. We set \c abort to \c true to tell \c run() to stop
+    running as soon as possible. We also call
+    QWaitCondition::wakeOne() to wake up the thread if it's sleeping.
+    (As we will see when we review \c run(), the thread is put to
+    sleep when it has nothing to do.)
+
+    The important thing to notice here is that \c run() is executed
+    in its own thread (the worker thread), whereas the \c
+    RenderThread constructor and destructor (as well as the \c
+    render() function) are called by the thread that created the
+    worker thread. Therefore, we need a mutex to protect accesses to
+    the \c abort and \c condition variables, which might be accessed
+    at any time by \c run().
+
+    At the end of the destructor, we call QThread::wait() to wait
+    until \c run() has exited before the base class destructor is
+    invoked.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/renderthread.cpp 2
+
+    The \c render() function is called by the \c MandelbrotWidget
+    whenever it needs to generate a new image of the Mandelbrot set.
+    The \c centerX, \c centerY, and \c scaleFactor parameters specify
+    the portion of the fractal to render; \c resultSize specifies the
+    size of the resulting QImage.
+
+    The function stores the parameters in member variables. If the
+    thread isn't already running, it starts it; otherwise, it sets \c
+    restart to \c true (telling \c run() to stop any unfinished
+    computation and start again with the new parameters) and wakes up
+    the thread, which might be sleeping.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/renderthread.cpp 3
+
+    \c run() is quite a big function, so we'll break it down into
+    parts.
+
+    The function body is an infinite loop which starts by storing the
+    rendering parameters in local variables. As usual, we protect
+    accesses to the member variables using the class's mutex. Storing
+    the member variables in local variables allows us to minimize the
+    amout of code that needs to be protected by a mutex. This ensures
+    that the main thread will never have to block for too long when
+    it needs to access \c{RenderThread}'s member variables (e.g., in
+    \c render()).
+
+    The \c forever keyword is, like \c foreach, a Qt pseudo-keyword.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/renderthread.cpp 4
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/renderthread.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/renderthread.cpp 6
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/renderthread.cpp 7
+
+    Then comes the core of the algorithm. Instead of trying to create
+    a perfect Mandelbrot set image, we do multiple passes and
+    generate more and more precise (and computationally expensive)
+    approximations of the fractal.
+
+    If we discover inside the loop that \c restart has been set to \c
+    true (by \c render()), we break out of the loop immediately, so
+    that the control quickly returns to the very top of the outer
+    loop (the \c forever loop) and we fetch the new rendering
+    parameters. Similarly, if we discover that \c abort has been set
+    to \c true (by the \c RenderThread destructor), we return from
+    the function immediately, terminating the thread.
+
+    The core algorithm is beyond the scope of this tutorial.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/renderthread.cpp 8
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/renderthread.cpp 9
+
+    Once we're done with all the iterations, we call
+    QWaitCondition::wait() to put the thread to sleep by calling,
+    unless \c restart is \c true. There's no use in keeping a worker
+    thread looping indefinitely while there's nothing to do.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/renderthread.cpp 10
+
+    The \c rgbFromWaveLength() function is a helper function that
+    converts a wave length to a RGB value compatible with 32-bit
+    \l{QImage}s. It is called from the constructor to initialize the
+    \c colormap array with pleasing colors.
+
+    \section1 MandelbrotWidget Class Defintion
+
+    The \c MandelbrotWidget class uses \c RenderThread to draw the
+    Mandelbrot set on screen. Here's the class definition:
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.h 0
+
+    The widget reimplements many event handlers from QWidget. In
+    addition, it has an \c updatePixmap() slot that we'll connect to
+    the worker thread's \c renderedImage() signal to update the
+    display whenever we receive new data from the thread.
+
+    Among the private variables, we have \c thread of type \c
+    RenderThread and \c pixmap, which contains the last rendered
+    image.
+
+    \section1 MandelbrotWidget Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 0
+
+    The implementation starts with a few contants that we'll need
+    later on.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 1
+
+    The interesting part of the constructor is the
+    qRegisterMetaType() and QObject::connect() calls. Let's start
+    with the \l{QObject::connect()}{connect()} call.
+
+    Although it looks like a standard signal-slot connection between
+    two \l{QObject}s, because the signal is emitted in a different
+    thread than the receiver lives in, the connection is effectively a
+    \l{Qt::QueuedConnection}{queued connection}. These connections are
+    asynchronous (i.e., non-blocking), meaning that the slot will be
+    called at some point after the \c emit statement. What's more, the
+    slot will be invoked in the thread in which the receiver lives.
+    Here, the signal is emitted in the worker thread, and the slot is
+    executed in the GUI thread when control returns to the event loop.
+
+    With queued connections, Qt must store a copy of the arguments
+    that were passed to the signal so that it can pass them to the
+    slot later on. Qt knows how to take of copy of many C++ and Qt
+    types, but QImage isn't one of them. We must therefore call the
+    template function qRegisterMetaType() before we can use QImage
+    as parameter in queued connections.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 2
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 4
+
+    In \l{QWidget::paintEvent()}{paintEvent()}, we start by filling
+    the background with black. If we have nothing yet to paint (\c
+    pixmap is null), we print a message on the widget asking the user
+    to be patient and return from the function immediately.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 6
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 7
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 8
+
+    If the pixmap has the right scale factor, we draw the pixmap directly onto
+    the widget. Otherwise, we scale and translate the \l{The Coordinate
+    System}{coordinate system} before we draw the pixmap. By reverse mapping
+    the widget's rectangle using the scaled painter matrix, we also make sure
+    that only the exposed areas of the pixmap are drawn. The calls to
+    QPainter::save() and QPainter::restore() make sure that any painting
+    performed afterwards uses the standard coordinate system.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 9
+
+    At the end of the paint event handler, we draw a text string and
+    a semi-transparent rectangle on top of the fractal.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 10
+
+    Whenever the user resizes the widget, we call \c render() to
+    start generating a new image, with the same \c centerX, \c
+    centerY, and \c curScale parameters but with the new widget size.
+
+    Notice that we rely on \c resizeEvent() being automatically
+    called by Qt when the widget is shown the first time to generate
+    the image the very first time.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 11
+
+    The key press event handler provides a few keyboard bindings for
+    the benefit of users who don't have a mouse. The \c zoom() and \c
+    scroll() functions will be covered later.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 12
+
+    The wheel event handler is reimplemented to make the mouse wheel
+    control the zoom level. QWheelEvent::delta() returns the angle of
+    the wheel mouse movement, in eights of a degree. For most mice,
+    one wheel step corresponds to 15 degrees. We find out how many
+    mouse steps we have and determine the zoom factor in consequence.
+    For example, if we have two wheel steps in the positive direction
+    (i.e., +30 degrees), the zoom factor becomes \c ZoomInFactor
+    to the second power, i.e. 0.8 * 0.8 = 0.64.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 13
+
+    When the user presses the left mouse button, we store the mouse
+    pointer position in \c lastDragPos.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 14
+
+    When the user moves the mouse pointer while the left mouse button
+    is pressed, we adjust \c pixmapOffset to paint the pixmap at a
+    shifted position and call QWidget::update() to force a repaint.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 15
+
+    When the left mouse button is released, we update \c pixmapOffset
+    just like we did on a mouse move and we reset \c lastDragPos to a
+    default value. Then, we call \c scroll() to render a new image
+    for the new position. (Adjusting \c pixmapOffset isn't sufficient
+    because areas revealed when dragging the pixmap are drawn in
+    black.)
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 16
+
+    The \c updatePixmap() slot is invoked when the worker thread has
+    finished rendering an image. We start by checking whether a drag
+    is in effect and do nothing in that case. In the normal case, we
+    store the image in \c pixmap and reinitialize some of the other
+    members. At the end, we call QWidget::update() to refresh the
+    display.
+
+    At this point, you might wonder why we use a QImage for the
+    parameter and a QPixmap for the data member. Why not stick to one
+    type? The reason is that QImage is the only class that supports
+    direct pixel manipulation, which we need in the worker thread. On
+    the other hand, before an image can be drawn on screen, it must
+    be converted into a pixmap. It's better to do the conversion once
+    and for all here, rather than in \c paintEvent().
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 17
+
+    In \c zoom(), we recompute \c curScale. Then we call
+    QWidget::update() to draw a scaled pixmap, and we ask the worker
+    thread to render a new image corresponding to the new \c curScale
+    value.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/mandelbrotwidget.cpp 18
+
+    \c scroll() is similar to \c zoom(), except that the affected
+    parameters are \c centerX and \c centerY.
+
+    \section1 The main() Function
+
+    The application's multithreaded nature has no impact on its \c
+    main() function, which is as simple as usual:
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/mandelbrot/main.cpp 0
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/masterdetail.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/masterdetail.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d7dc0e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/masterdetail.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example sql/masterdetail
+    \title Master Detail Example
+
+    The Master Detail Example shows how to present data from different
+    data sources in the same application. The album titles, and the
+    corresponding artists and release dates, are kept in a
+    database, while each album's tracks are stored in an XML
+    file.
+
+    The example also shows how to add as well as remove data from both
+    the database and the associated XML file using the API provided by
+    the QtSql and QtXml modules, respectively.
+
+    \image masterdetail-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/mdi.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/mdi.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f97db5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/mdi.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*! 
+    \example mainwindows/mdi
+    \title MDI Example
+
+    The MDI example shows how to implement a Multiple Document Interface using Qt's
+    QMdiArea class.
+
+    \image mdi-example.png
+
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/menus.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/menus.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0500101
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/menus.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,232 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example mainwindows/menus
+    \title Menus Example
+
+    The Menus example demonstrates how menus can be used in a main
+    window application.
+
+    A menu widget can be either a pull-down menu in a menu bar or a
+    standalone context menu. Pull-down menus are shown by the menu bar
+    when the user clicks on the respective item or presses the
+    specified shortcut key. Context menus are usually invoked by some
+    special keyboard key or by right-clicking.
+
+    \image menus-example.png
+
+    A menu consists of a list of \e action items. In applications,
+    many common commands can be invoked via menus, toolbar buttons as
+    well as keyboard shortcuts. Since the user expects the commands to
+    be performed in the same way, regardless of the user interface
+    used, it is useful to represent each command as an action.
+
+    The Menus example consists of one single class, \c MainWindow, derived
+    from the QMainWindow class. When choosing one of the
+    action items in our application, it will display the item's path
+    in its central widget.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    QMainWindow provides a main application window, with a menu bar,
+    tool bars, dock widgets and a status bar around a large central
+    widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/menus/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    In this example, we will see how to implement pull-down menus as
+    well as a context menu. In order to implement a custom context
+    menu we must reimplement QWidget's \l
+    {QWidget::}{contextMenuEvent()} function to receive the context
+    menu events for our main window.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/menus/mainwindow.h 1
+
+    We must also implement a collection of private slots to respond to
+    the user activating any of our menu entries.  Note that these
+    slots are left out of this documentation since they are trivial,
+    i.e., most of them are only displaying the action's path in the
+    main window's central widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/menus/mainwindow.h 2
+
+    We have chosen to simplify the constructor by implementing two
+    private convenience functions to create the various actions, to
+    add them to menus and to insert the menus into our main window's
+    menu bar.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/menus/mainwindow.h 3
+
+    Finally, we declare the various menus and actions as well as a
+    simple information label in the application wide scope.
+
+    The QMenu class provides a menu widget for use in menu bars,
+    context menus, and other popup menus while the QAction class
+    provides an abstract user interface action that can be inserted
+    into widgets.
+
+    In some situations it is useful to group actions together, e.g.,
+    we have a \gui {Left Align} action, a \gui {Right Align} action, a
+    \gui {Justify} action, and a \gui {Center} action, and we want
+    only one of these actions to be active at any one time. One simple
+    way of achieving this is to group the actions together in an
+    action group using the QActionGroup class.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    In the constructor, we start off by creating a regular QWidget and
+    make it our main window's central widget. Note that the main
+    window takes ownership of the widget pointer and deletes it at the
+    appropriate time.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/menus/mainwindow.cpp 0
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/menus/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    Then we create the information label as well as a top and bottom
+    filler that we add to a layout which we install on the central
+    widget. QMainWindow objects come with their own customized layout
+    and setting a layout on a the actual main window, or creating a
+    layout with a main window as a parent, is considered an error. You
+    should always set your own layout on the central widget instead.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/menus/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    To create the actions and menus we call our two convenience
+    functions: \c createActions() and \c createMenus(). We will get
+    back to these shortly.
+
+    QMainWindow's \l {QMainWindow::statusBar()}{statusBar()} function
+    returns the status bar for the main window (if the status bar does
+    not exist, this function will create and return an empty status
+    bar). We initialize the status bar and window title, resize the
+    window to an appropriate size as well as ensure that the main
+    window cannot be resized to a smaller size than the given
+    one.
+
+    Now, let's take a closer look at the \c createActions() convenience
+    function that creates the various actions:
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/menus/mainwindow.cpp 4
+    \dots
+
+    A QAction object may contain an icon, a text, a shortcut, a status
+    tip, a "What's This?" text, and a tooltip. Most of these can be
+    set in the constructor, but they can also be set independently
+    using the provided convenience functions.
+
+    In the \c createActions() function, we first create a \c newAct
+    action. We make \gui Ctrl+N its shortcut using the
+    QAction::setShortcut() function, and we set its status tip using the
+    QAction::setStatusTip() function (the status tip is displayed on all
+    status bars provided by the action's top-level parent widget). We
+    also connect its \l {QAction::}{triggered()} signal to the \c
+    newFile() slot.
+
+    The rest of the actions are created in a similar manner. Please
+    see the source code for details.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/menus/mainwindow.cpp 7
+
+
+    Once we have created the \gui {Left Align}, \gui {Right Align},
+    \gui {Justify}, and a \gui {Center} actions, we can also create
+    the previously mentioned action group.
+
+    Each action is added to the group using QActionGroup's \l
+    {QActionGroup::}{addAction()} function. Note that an action also
+    can be added to a group by creating it with the group as its
+    parent. Since an action group is exclusive by default, only one of
+    the actions in the group is checked at any one time (this can be
+    altered using the QActionGroup::setExclusive() function).
+
+    When all the actions are created, we use the \c createMenus()
+    function to add the actions to the menus and to insert the menus
+    into the menu bar:
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/menus/mainwindow.cpp 8
+
+    QMenuBar's \l {QMenuBar::addMenu()}{addMenu()} function appends a
+    new QMenu with the given title, to the menu bar (note that the
+    menu bar takes ownership of the menu). We use QWidget's \l
+    {QWidget::addAction()}{addAction()} function to add each action to
+    the corresponding menu.
+
+    Alternatively, the QMenu class provides several \l
+    {QMenu::addAction()}{addAction()} convenience functions that create
+    and add new actions from given texts and/or icons. You can also
+    provide a member that will automatically connect to the new
+    action's \l {QAction::triggered()}{triggered()} signal, and a
+    shortcut represented by a QKeySequence instance.
+
+    The QMenu::addSeparator() function creates and returns a new
+    separator action, i.e. an action for which QAction::isSeparator()
+    returns true, and adds the new action to the menu's list of
+    actions.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/menus/mainwindow.cpp 12
+
+    Note the \gui Format menu. First of all, it is added as a submenu
+    to the \gui Edit Menu using QMenu's \l
+    {QMenu::addMenu()}{addMenu()} function. Secondly, take a look at the
+    alignment actions: In the \c createActions() function we added the
+    \c leftAlignAct, \c rightAlignAct, \c justifyAct and \c centerAct
+    actions to an action group. Nevertheless, we must add each action
+    to the menu separately while the action group does its magic
+    behind the scene.
+
+    \snippet examples/mainwindows/menus/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+    To provide a custom context menu, we must reimplement QWidget's \l
+    {QWidget::}{contextMenuEvent()} function to receive the widget's
+    context menu events (note that the default implementation simply
+    ignores these events).
+
+    Whenever we receive such an event, we create a menu containing the
+    \gui Cut, \gui Copy and \gui Paste actions. Context menus can be
+    executed either asynchronously using the \l {QMenu::}{popup()}
+    function or synchronously using the \l {QMenu::}{exec()}
+    function. In this example, we have chosen to show the menu using
+    its \l {QMenu::}{exec()} function. By passing the event's position
+    as argument we ensure that the context menu appears at the
+    expected position.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/mousecalibration.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/mousecalibration.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e271265
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/mousecalibration.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example qws/mousecalibration
+    \title Mouse Calibration Example
+
+    The Mouse Calibration example demonstrates how to write a simple
+    program using the mechanisms provided by the QWSMouseHandler class
+    to calibrate the mouse handler in \l{Qt for Embedded Linux}. 
+
+    Calibration is the process of mapping between physical
+    (i.e. device) coordinates and logical coordinates.
+
+    The example consists of two classes in addition to the main program:
+
+    \list
+        \o \c Calibration is a dialog widget that retrieves the device coordinates.
+        \o \c ScribbleWidget is a minimal drawing program used to let the user
+            test the new mouse settings.
+    \endlist
+
+    First we will review the main program, then we will take a look at
+    the \c Calibration class. The \c ScribbleWidget class is only a
+    help tool in this context, and will not be covered here.
+
+    \section1 The Main Program
+
+    The program starts by presenting a message box informing the user
+    of what is going to happen:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/mousecalibration/main.cpp 0
+
+    The QMessageBox class provides a modal dialog with a range of
+    different messages, roughly arranged along two axes: severity and
+    complexity. The message box has a different icon for each of the
+    severity levels, but the icon must be specified explicitly. In our
+    case we use the default QMessageBox::NoIcon value. In addition we
+    use the default complexity, i.e. a message box showing the given
+    text and an \gui OK button.
+
+    At this stage in the program, the mouse could be completely
+    uncalibrated, making the user unable to press the \gui OK button. For
+    that reason we use the static QTimer::singleShot() function to
+    make the message box disappear after 10 seconds. The QTimer class
+    provides repetitive and single-shot timers: The single shot
+    function calls the given slot after the specified interval.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/mousecalibration/main.cpp 1
+
+    Next, we create an instance of the \c Calibration class which is a
+    dialog widget retrieving the required sample coordinates: The
+    dialog sequentially presents five marks for the user to press,
+    storing the device coordinates for the mouse press events.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/mousecalibration/main.cpp 2
+
+    When the calibration dialog returns, we let the user test the new
+    mouse settings by drawing onto a \c ScribbleWidget object. Since
+    the mouse still can be uncalibrated, we continue to use the
+    QMessageBox and QTimer classes to inform the user about the
+    program's progress.
+
+    An improved calibration tool would let the user choose between
+    accepting the new calibration, reverting to the old one, and
+    restarting the calibration.
+
+    \section1 Calibration Class Definition
+
+    The \c Calibration class inherits from QDialog and is responsible
+    for retrieving the device coordinates from the user.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/mousecalibration/calibration.h 0
+
+    We reimplement QDialog's \l {QDialog::exec()}{exec()} and \l
+    {QDialog::accept()}{accept()} slots, and QWidget's \l
+    {QWidget::paintEvent()}{paintEvent()} and \l
+    {QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent()}{mouseReleaseEvent()} functions.
+
+    In addition, we declare a couple of private variables, \c data and
+    \c pressCount, holding the \c Calibration object's number of mouse
+    press events and current calibration data. The \c pressCount
+    variable is a convenience variable, while the \c data is a
+    QWSPointerCalibrationData object (storing the physical and logical
+    coordinates) that is passed to the mouse handler. The
+    QWSPointerCalibrationData class is simply a container for
+    calibration data.
+
+    \section1 Calibration Class Implementation
+
+    In the constructor we first ensure that the \c Calibration dialog
+    fills up the entire screen, has focus and will receive mouse
+    events (the latter by making the dialog modal):
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/mousecalibration/calibration.cpp 0
+
+    Then we initialize the \l{QWSPointerCalibrationData::}{screenPoints}
+    array:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/mousecalibration/calibration.cpp 1
+
+    In order to specify the calibration, the 
+    \l{QWSPointerCalibrationData::screenPoints}{screenPoints} array must
+    contain the screen coordinates for the logical positions
+    represented by the QWSPointerCalibrationData::Location enum
+    (e.g. QWSPointerCalibrationData::TopLeft).  Since non-linearity is
+    expected to increase on the edge of the screen, all points are
+    kept 10 percent within the screen. The \c qt_screen pointer is a
+    reference to the screen device. There can only be one screen
+    device per application.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/mousecalibration/calibration.cpp 2
+
+    Finally, we initialize the variable which keeps track of the number of
+    mouse press events we have received.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/mousecalibration/calibration.cpp 3
+
+    The destructor is trivial.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/mousecalibration/calibration.cpp 4
+
+    The reimplementation of the QDialog::exec() slot is called from
+    the main program.
+
+    First we clear the current calibration making the following mouse
+    event delivered in raw device coordinates. Then we call the
+    QWidget::grabMouse() function to make sure no mouse events are
+    lost, and the QWidget::activateWindow() function to make the
+    top-level widget containing this dialog, the active window. When
+    the call to the QDialog::exec() base function returns, we call
+    QWidget::releaseMouse() to release the mouse grab before the
+    function returns.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/mousecalibration/calibration.cpp 5
+
+    The QWidget::paintEvent() function is reimplemented to receive the
+    widget's paint events. A paint event is a request to repaint all
+    or parts of the widget. It can happen as a result of
+    QWidget::repaint() or QWidget::update(), or because the widget was
+    obscured and has now been uncovered, or for many other reasons.
+    In our reimplementation of the function we simply draw a cross at
+    the next point the user should press.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/mousecalibration/calibration.cpp 6
+
+    We then reimplement the QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent() function to
+    receive the widget's move events, using the QMouseEvent object
+    passed as parameter to find the coordinates the user pressed, and
+    update the QWSPointerCalibrationData::devPoints array.
+
+    In order to complete the mapping between logical and physical
+    coordinates, the \l
+    {QWSPointerCalibrationData::devPoints}{devPoints} array must
+    contain the raw device coordinates for the logical positions
+    represented by the QWSPointerCalibrationData::Location enum
+    (e.g. QWSPointerCalibrationData::TopLeft)
+
+    We continue by drawing the next cross, or close the dialog by
+    calling the QDialog::accept() slot if we have collected all the
+    required coordinate samples.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/mousecalibration/calibration.cpp 7
+
+    Our reimplementation of the QDialog::accept() slot simply activate
+    the new calibration data using the QWSMouseHandler::calibrate()
+    function. We also use the Q_ASSERT() macro to ensure that the number
+    of required samples are present.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/movie.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/movie.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..00e42c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/movie.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/movie
+    \title Movie Example
+
+    The Movie example demonstrates how to use QMovie and QLabel to
+    display animations. Now that Qt comes with \l{Phonon
+    Overview}{Phonon} (the multimedia framework), QMovie is mostly
+    useful if one wants to play a simple animation without the added
+    complexity of a multimedia framework to install and deploy.
+
+    \image movie-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/multipleinheritance.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/multipleinheritance.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff2f00f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/multipleinheritance.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example uitools/multipleinheritance
+    \title Multiple Inheritance Example
+
+    The Multiple Inheritance Example shows how to use a form created with \QD
+    in an application by subclassing both QWidget and the user interface
+    class, which is \c{Ui::CalculatorForm}.
+
+    \image multipleinheritance-example.png
+
+    To subclass the \c calculatorform.ui file and ensure that \c qmake
+    processes it with the \c uic, we have to include \c calculatorform.ui
+    in the \c .pro file, as shown below:
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/multipleinheritance/multipleinheritance.pro 0
+
+    When the project is compiled, the \c uic will generate a corresponding
+    \c ui_calculatorform.h.
+
+    \section1 CalculatorForm Definition
+
+    In the \c CalculatorForm definition, we include the \c ui_calculatorform.h
+    that was generated earlier.
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/multipleinheritance/calculatorform.h 0
+
+    As mentioned earlier, the class is a subclass of both QWidget and
+    \c{Ui::CalculatorForm}.
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/multipleinheritance/calculatorform.h 1
+
+    Two slots are defined according to the \l{Automatic Connections}
+    {automatic connection} naming convention required by \c uic. This is
+    to ensure that \l{QMetaObject}'s auto-connection facilities connect
+    all the signals and slots involved automatically.
+
+    \section1 CalculatorForm Implementation
+
+    In the constructor, we call \c setupUi() to load the user interface file.
+    Note that we do not need the \c{ui} prefix as \c CalculatorForm is a
+    subclass of the user interface class.
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/multipleinheritance/calculatorform.cpp 0
+
+    We include two slots, \c{on_inputSpinBox1_valueChanged()} and
+    \c{on_inputSpinBox2_valueChanged()}. These slots respond to the
+    \l{QSpinBox::valueChanged()}{valueChanged()} signal that both spin boxes
+    emit. Whenever there is a change in one spin box's value, we take that
+    value and add it to whatever value the other spin box has.
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/multipleinheritance/calculatorform.cpp 1
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/uitools/multipleinheritance/calculatorform.cpp 2
+
+    \section1 \c main() Function
+
+    The \c main() function instantiates QApplication and \c CalculatorForm.
+    The \c calculator object is displayed by invoking the \l{QWidget::show()}
+    {show()} function.
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/multipleinheritance/main.cpp 0
+
+    There are various approaches to include forms into applications. The
+    Multiple Inheritance approach is just one of them. See
+    \l{Using a Designer .ui File in Your Application} for more information on
+    the other approaches available.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/musicplayerexample.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/musicplayerexample.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d23c1f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/musicplayerexample.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,248 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example phonon/musicplayer
+    \title Music Player Example
+
+    The Music Player Example shows how to use Phonon - the multimedia
+    framework that comes with Qt - to create a simple music player.
+    The player can play music files, and provides simple playback
+    control, such as pausing, stopping, and resuming the music.
+
+    \image musicplayer.png
+
+    The player has a button group with the play, pause, and stop
+    buttons familiar from most music players. The top-most slider
+    controls the position in the media stream, and the bottom slider
+    allows adjusting the sound volume. 
+
+    The user can use a file dialog to add music files to a table,
+    which displays meta information about the music - such as the
+    title, album, and artist. Each row contains information about a
+    single music file; to play it, the user selects that row and
+    presses the play button. Also, when a row is selected, the files
+    in the table are queued for playback.
+
+    Phonon offers playback of sound using an available audio device,
+    e.g., a sound card or an USB headset. For the implementation, we
+    use two objects: a \l{Phonon::}{MediaObject}, which controls the
+    playback, and an \l{Phonon::}{AudioOutput}, which can output the
+    audio to a sound device. We will explain how they cooperate when
+    we encounter them in the code. For a high-level introduction to
+    Phonon, see its \l{Phonon Overview}{overview}.
+
+    The API of Phonon is implemented through an intermediate
+    technology on each supported platform: DirectShow, QuickTime, and
+    GStreamer. The sound formats supported may therefore vary from
+    system to system. We do not in this example try to determine which
+    formats are supported, but let Phonon report an error if the user
+    tries to play an unsupported sound file.
+
+    Our player consists of one class, \c MainWindow, which both
+    constructs the GUI and handles the playback. We will now go
+    through the parts of its definition and implementation that
+    concerns Phonon.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    Most of the API in \c MainWindow is private, as is often the case
+    for classes that represent self-contained windows. We list Phonon
+    objects and slots we connect to their signals; we take a closer
+    look at them when we walk through the \c MainWindow
+    implementation.
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.h 2
+
+    We use the \l{Phonon::}{SeekSlider} to move the current playback
+    position in the media stream, and the \l{Phonon::}{VolumeSlider}
+    controls the sound volume. Both of these widgets come ready made
+    with Phonon.  We use another \l{Phonon::}{MediaObject},
+    metaInformationProvider, to get the meta information from the
+    music files. More on this later.
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.h 1
+
+    The \l{Phonon::}{MediaObject} informs us of the state of the playback and
+    properties of the media it is playing back through a series of
+    signals. We connect the signals we need to slots in \c MainWindow.
+    The \c tableClicked() slot is connected to the table, so that we
+    know when the user requests playback of a new music file, by
+    clicking on the table.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    The \c MainWindow class handles both the user interface and
+    Phonon. We will now take a look at the code relevant for Phonon.
+    The code required for setting up the GUI is explained elsewhere.
+
+    We start with the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    We start by instantiating our media and audio output objects.
+    As mentioned, the media object knows how to playback
+    multimedia (in our case sound files) while the audio output
+    can send it to a sound device.
+
+    For the playback to work, the media and audio output objects need
+    to get in contact with each other, so that the media object can
+    send the sound to the audio output. Phonon is a graph based
+    framework, i.e., its objects are nodes that can be connected by
+    paths. Objects are connected using the \c createPath() function,
+    which is part of the Phonon namespace.
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    We also connect signals of the media object to slots in our \c
+    MainWindow. We will examine them shortly.
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    Finally, we call private helper functions to set up the GUI.
+    The \c setupUi() function contains code for setting up the seek
+    , and volume slider. We move on to \c setupUi():
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp 3
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+    After creating the widgets, they must be supplied with the
+    \l{Phonon::}{MediaObject} and \l{Phonon::}{AudioOutput} objects
+    they should control.  
+
+    In the \c setupActions(), we connect the actions for the play,
+    pause, and stop tool buttons, to slots of the media object.
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp 5
+
+    We move on to the the slots of \c MainWindow, starting with \c
+    addFiles(): 
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp 6
+
+    In the \c addFiles() slot, we add files selected by the user to
+    the \c sources list. We then set the first source selected on the
+    \c metaInformationProvider \l{Phonon::}{MediaObject}, which will
+    send a state changed signal when the meta information is resolved;
+    we have this signal connected to the \c metaStateChanged() slot.
+
+    The media object informs us of state changes by sending the \c
+    stateChanged() signal. The \c stateChanged() slot is connected
+    to this signal.
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp 9
+
+    The \l{Phonon::MediaObject::}{errorString()} function gives a
+    description of the error that is suitable for users of a Phonon
+    application. The two values of the \l{Phonon::}{ErrorState} enum
+    helps us determine whether it is possible to try to play the same
+    file again.
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp 10
+
+    We update the GUI when the playback state changes, i.e., when it
+    starts, pauses, stops, or resumes.
+
+    The media object will report other state changes, as defined by the
+    \l{Phonon::}{State} enum.
+
+    The \c tick() slot is connected to a \l{Phonon::}{MediaObject} signal which is
+    emitted when the playback position changes:
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp 11
+
+    The \c time is given in milliseconds.
+
+    When the table is clicked on with the mouse, \c tableClick()
+    is invoked:
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp 12
+
+    Since we stop the media object, we first check whether it is
+    currently playing. \c row contains the row in the table that was
+    clicked upon; the indices of \c sources follows the table, so we
+    can simply use \c row to find the new source.
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp 13
+
+    When the media source changes, we simply need to select the
+    corresponding row in the table.
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp 14
+
+    When \c metaStateChanged() is invoked, \c
+    metaInformationProvider has resolved the meta data for its current
+    source. A \l{Phonon::}{MediaObject} will do this before
+    entering \l{Phonon::}{StoppedState}. Note that we could also
+    have used the \l{Phonon::MediaObject::}{metaDataChanged()} signal for
+    this purpose.
+
+    Some of the meta data is then chosen to be displayed in the
+    music table. A file might not contain the meta data requested,
+    in which case an empty string is returned.
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp 15
+
+    If we have media sources in \c sources of which meta information
+    is not resolved, we set a new source on the \c
+    metaInformationProvider, which will invoke \c metaStateChanged()
+    again.
+
+    We move on to the \c aboutToFinish() slot:
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/mainwindow.cpp 16
+
+    When a file is finished playing, the Music Player will move on and
+    play the next file in the table. This slot is connected to the
+    \l{Phonon::}{MediaObject}'s
+    \l{Phonon::MediaObject::}{aboutToFinish()} signal, which is
+    guaranteed to be emitted while there is still time to enqueue
+    another file for playback.
+
+    \section1 The main() function.
+
+    Phonon requires that the application has a name; it is set with
+    \l{QCoreApplication::}{setApplicationName()}. This is because
+    D-Bus, which is used by Phonon on Linux systems, demands this.
+
+    \snippet examples/phonon/musicplayer/main.cpp 1
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/network-chat.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/network-chat.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3caeb9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/network-chat.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example network/network-chat
+    \title Network Chat Example
+
+    The Network Chat example demonstrates a stateful peer-to-peer Chat client
+    that uses broadcasting with QUdpSocket and QNetworkInterface to discover
+    its peers.
+
+    \image network-chat-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/orderform.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/orderform.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f6f2607
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/orderform.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,378 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example richtext/orderform
+    \title Order Form Example
+
+    The Order Form example shows how to generate rich text documents by
+    combining a simple template with data input by the user in a dialog. Data
+    is extracted from a \c DetailsDialog object and displayed on a QTextEdit
+    with a QTextCursor, using various formats. Each form generated is added
+    to a QTabWidget for easy access.
+
+    \image orderform-example.png
+
+    \section1 DetailsDialog Definition
+
+    The \c DetailsDialog class is a subclass of QDialog, implementing a slot
+    \c verify() to allow contents of the \c DetailsDialog to be verified later.
+    This is further explained in \c DetailsDialog Implementation.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/detailsdialog.h 0
+
+    The constructor of \c DetailsDialog accepts parameters \a title and
+    \a parent. The class defines four \e{getter} functions: \c orderItems(),
+    \c senderName(), \c senderAddress(), and \c sendOffers() to allow data
+    to be accessed externally.
+
+    The class definition includes input widgets for the required
+    fields, \c nameEdit and \c addressEdit. Also, a QCheckBox and a
+    QDialogButtonBox are defined; the former to provide the user with the
+    option to receive information on products and offers, and the latter
+    to ensure that buttons used are arranged according to the user's native
+    platform. In addition, a QTableWidget, \c itemsTable, is used to hold
+    order details.
+
+    The screenshot below shows the \c DetailsDialog we intend to create.
+
+    \image orderform-example-detailsdialog.png
+
+    \section1 DetailsDialog Implementation
+
+    The constructor of \c DetailsDialog instantiates the earlier defined fields
+    and their respective labels. The label for \c offersCheckBox is set and the
+    \c setupItemsTable() function is invoked to setup and populate
+    \c itemsTable. The QDialogButtonBox object, \c buttonBox, is instantiated
+    with \gui OK and \gui Cancel buttons. This \c buttonBox's \c accepted() and
+    \c rejected() signals are connected to the \c verify() and \c reject()
+    slots in \c DetailsDialog.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/detailsdialog.cpp 0
+
+    A QGridLayout is used to place all the objects on the \c DetailsDialog.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/detailsdialog.cpp 1
+
+    The \c setupItemsTable() function instantiates the QTableWidget object,
+    \c itemsTable, and sets the number of rows based on the QStringList
+    object, \c items, which holds the type of items ordered. The number of
+    columns is set to 2, providing a "name" and "quantity" layout. A \c for
+    loop is used to populate the \c itemsTable and the \c name item's flag
+    is set to Qt::ItemIsEnabled or Qt::ItemIsSelectable. For demonstration
+    purposes, the \c quantity item is set to a 1 and all items in the
+    \c itemsTable have this value for quantity; but this can be modified by
+    editing the contents of the cells at run time.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/detailsdialog.cpp 2
+
+    The \c orderItems() function extracts data from the \c itemsTable and
+    returns it in the form of a QList<QPair<QString,int>> where each QPair
+    corresponds to an item and the quantity ordered.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/detailsdialog.cpp 3
+
+    The \c senderName() function is used to return the value of the QLineEdit
+    used to store the name field for the order form.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/detailsdialog.cpp 4
+
+    The \c senderAddress() function is used to return the value of the
+    QTextEdit containing the address for the order form.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/detailsdialog.cpp 5
+
+    The \c sendOffers() function is used to return a \c true or \c false
+    value that is used to determine if the customer in the order form
+    wishes to receive more information on the company's offers and promotions.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/detailsdialog.cpp 6
+
+    The \c verify() function is an additionally implemented slot used to
+    verify the details entered by the user into the \c DetailsDialog. If
+    the details entered are incomplete, a QMessageBox is displayed
+    providing the user the option to discard the \c DetailsDialog. Otherwise,
+    the details are accepted and the \c accept() function is invoked.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/detailsdialog.cpp 7
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Definition
+
+    The \c MainWindow class is a subclass of QMainWindow, implementing two
+    slots - \c openDialog() and \c printFile(). It also contains a private
+    instance of QTabWidget, \c letters.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Implementation
+
+    The \c MainWindow constructor sets up the \c fileMenu and the required
+    actions, \c newAction and \c printAction. These actions' \c triggered()
+    signals are connected to the additionally implemented openDialog() slot
+    and the default close() slot. The QTabWidget, \c letters, is
+    instantiated and set as the window's central widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    The \c createLetter() function creates a new QTabWidget with a QTextEdit,
+    \c editor, as the parent. This function accepts four parameters that
+    correspond to we obtained through \c DetailsDialog, in order to "fill"
+    the \c editor.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    We then obtain the cursor for the \c editor using QTextEdit::textCursor().
+    The \c cursor is then moved to the start of the document using
+    QTextCursor::Start.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    Recall the structure of a \l{Rich Text Document Structure}
+    {Rich Text Document}, where sequences of frames and
+    tables are always separated by text blocks, some of which may contain no
+    information.
+
+    In the case of the Order Form Example, the document structure for this portion
+    is described by the table below:
+
+    \table
+        \row
+            \o {1, 8} frame with \e{referenceFrameFormat}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{A company}
+        \row
+            \o block
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{321 City Street}
+        \row
+            \o block
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{Industry Park}
+        \row
+            \o block
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{Another country}
+    \endtable
+
+    This is accomplished with the following code:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+    Note that \c topFrame is the \c {editor}'s top-level frame and is not shown
+    in the document structure.
+
+    We then set the \c{cursor}'s position back to its last position in
+    \c topFrame and fill in the customer's name (provided by the constructor)
+    and address - using a \c foreach loop to traverse the QString, \c address.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+    The \c cursor is now back in \c topFrame and the document structure for
+    the above portion of code is:
+
+    \table
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{Donald}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{47338 Park Avenue}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{Big City}
+    \endtable
+
+    For spacing purposes, we invoke \l{QTextCursor::insertBlock()}
+    {insertBlock()} twice. The \l{QDate::currentDate()}{currentDate()} is
+    obtained and displayed. We use \l{QTextFrameFormat::setWidth()}
+    {setWidth()} to increase the width of \c bodyFrameFormat and we insert
+    a new frame with that width.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 5
+
+    The following code inserts standard text into the order form.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 6
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 7
+
+    This part of the document structure now contains the date, a frame with
+    \c bodyFrameFormat, as well as the standard text.
+
+    \table
+        \row
+            \o block
+        \row
+            \o block
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{Date: 25 May 2007}
+        \row
+            \o block
+        \row
+            \o {1, 4} frame with \e{bodyFrameFormat}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{I would like to place an order for the following items:}
+        \row
+            \o block
+        \row
+            \o block
+    \endtable
+
+    A QTextTableFormat object, \c orderTableFormat, is used to hold the type
+    of item and the quantity ordered.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 8
+
+    We use \l{QTextTable::cellAt()}{cellAt()} to set the headers for the
+    \c orderTable.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 9
+
+    Then, we iterate through the QList of QPair objects to populate
+    \c orderTable.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 10
+
+    The resulting document structure for this section is:
+
+    \table
+        \row
+            \o {1, 11} \c{orderTable} with \e{orderTableFormat}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{Product}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{Quantity}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{T-shirt}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{4}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{Badge}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{3}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{Reference book}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{2}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{Coffee cup}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{5}
+    \endtable
+
+    The \c cursor is then moved back to \c{topFrame}'s
+    \l{QTextFrame::lastPosition()}{lastPosition()} and more standard text
+    is inserted.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 11
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 12
+
+    Another QTextTable is inserted, to display the customer's
+    preference regarding offers.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 13
+
+    The document structure for this portion is:
+
+    \table
+        \row
+            \o block
+        \row
+            \o block\o \c{Please update my...}
+        \row
+            \o {1, 5} block
+        \row
+            \o {1, 4} \c{offersTable}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{I want to receive...}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{I do not want to recieve...}
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{X}
+    \endtable
+
+    The \c cursor is moved to insert "Sincerely" along with the customer's
+    name. More blocks are inserted for spacing purposes. The \c printAction
+    is enabled to indicate that an order form can now be printed.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 14
+
+    The bottom portion of the document structure is:
+
+    \table
+        \row
+            \o block
+        \row
+            \o {1, 5} block\o \c{Sincerely,}
+        \row
+            \o block
+        \row
+            \o block
+        \row
+            \o block
+        \row
+            \o block \o \c{Donald}
+    \endtable
+
+    The \c createSample() function is used for illustration purposes, to create
+    a sample order form.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 15
+
+    The \c openDialog() function opens a \c DetailsDialog object. If the
+    details in \c dialog are accepted, the \c createLetter() function is
+    invoked using the parameters extracted from \c dialog.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 16
+
+    In order to print out the order form, a \c printFile() function is
+    included, as shown below:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/mainwindow.cpp 17
+
+    This function also allows the user to print a selected area with
+    QTextCursor::hasSelection(), instead of printing the entire document.
+
+    \section1 \c main() Function
+
+    The \c main() function instantiates \c MainWindow and sets its size to
+    640x480 pixels before invoking the \c show() function and
+    \c createSample() function.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/orderform/main.cpp 0
+
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/overpainting.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/overpainting.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e19f54b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/overpainting.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,249 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example opengl/overpainting
+    \title Overpainting Example
+
+    The Overpainting example shows how QPainter can be used
+    to overpaint a scene rendered using OpenGL in a QGLWidget.
+
+    \image overpainting-example.png
+
+    QGLWidget provides a widget with integrated OpenGL graphics support
+    that enables 3D graphics to be displayed using normal OpenGL calls,
+    yet also behaves like any other standard Qt widget with support for
+    signals and slots, properties, and Qt's action system.
+
+    Usually, QGLWidget is subclassed to display a pure 3D scene; the
+    developer reimplements \l{QGLWidget::initializeGL()}{initializeGL()}
+    to initialize any required resources, \l{QGLWidget::resizeGL()}{resizeGL()}
+    to set up the projection and viewport, and
+    \l{QGLWidget::paintGL()}{paintGL()} to perform the OpenGL calls needed
+    to render the scene. However, it is possible to subclass QGLWidget
+    differently to allow 2D graphics, drawn using QPainter, to be
+    painted over a scene rendered using OpenGL.
+
+    In this example, we demonstrate how this is done by reusing the code
+    from the \l{Hello GL Example}{Hello GL} example to provide a 3D scene,
+    and painting over it with some translucent 2D graphics. Instead of
+    examining each class in detail, we only cover the parts of the
+    \c GLWidget class that enable overpainting, and provide more detailed
+    discussion in the final section of this document.
+
+    \section1 GLWidget Class Definition
+
+    The \c GLWidget class is a subclass of QGLWidget, based on the one used
+    in the \l{Hello GL Example}{Hello GL} example. Rather than describe the
+    class as a whole, we show the first few lines of the class and only
+    discuss the changes we have made to the rest of it:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.h 0
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.h 1
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.h 4
+
+    As usual, the widget uses \l{QGLWidget::initializeGL()}{initializeGL()}
+    to set up objects for our scene and perform other OpenGL initialization tasks.
+    The \l{QGLWidget::resizeGL()}{resizeGL()} function is used to ensure that
+    the 3D graphics in the scene are transformed correctly to the 2D viewport
+    displayed in the widget.
+
+    Instead of implementing \l{QGLWidget::paintGL()}{paintGL()} to handle updates
+    to the widget, we implement a normal QWidget::paintEvent(). This
+    allows us to mix OpenGL calls and QPainter operations in a controlled way.
+
+    In this example, we also implement QWidget::showEvent() to help with the
+    initialization of the 2D graphics used.
+
+    The new private member functions and variables relate exclusively to the
+    2D graphics and animation. The \c animate() slot is called periodically by the
+    \c animationTimer to update the widget; the \c createBubbles() function
+    initializes the \c bubbles list with instances of a helper class used to
+    draw the animation; the \c drawInstructions() function is responsible for
+    a semi-transparent messages that is also overpainted onto the OpenGL scene.
+
+    \section1 GLWidget Class Implementation
+
+    Again, we only show the parts of the \c GLWidget implementation that are
+    relevant to this example. In the constructor, we initialize a QTimer to
+    control the animation:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.cpp 0
+
+    We turn off the widget's \l{QWidget::autoFillBackground}{autoFillBackground} property to
+    instruct OpenGL not to paint a background for the widget when
+    \l{QPainter::begin()}{QPainter::begin()} is called.
+
+    As in the \l{Hello GL Example}{Hello GL} example, the destructor is responsible
+    for freeing any OpenGL-related resources:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.cpp 1
+
+    The \c initializeGL() function is fairly minimal, only setting up the display
+    list used in the scene.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.cpp 2
+
+    To cooperate fully with QPainter, we defer matrix stack operations and attribute
+    initialization until the widget needs to be updated.
+
+    In this example, we implement \l{QWidget::paintEvent()}{paintEvent()} rather
+    than \l{QGLWidget::paintGL()}{paintGL()} to render
+    our scene. When drawing on a QGLWidget, the paint engine used by QPainter
+    performs certain operations that change the states of the OpenGL
+    implementation's matrix and property stacks. Therefore, it is necessary to
+    make all the OpenGL calls to display the 3D graphics before we construct
+    a QPainter to draw the 2D overlay.
+
+    We render a 3D scene by setting up model and projection transformations
+    and other attributes. We use an OpenGL stack operation to preserve the
+    original matrix state, allowing us to recover it later:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.cpp 4
+
+    We define a color to use for the widget's background, and set up various
+    attributes that define how the scene will be rendered.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.cpp 6
+
+    We call the \c setupViewport() private function to set up the
+    projection used for the scene. This is unnecessary in OpenGL
+    examples that implement the \l{QGLWidget::paintGL()}{paintGL()}
+    function because the matrix stacks are usually unmodified between
+    calls to \l{QGLWidget::resizeGL()}{resizeGL()} and
+    \l{QGLWidget::paintGL()}{paintGL()}.
+
+    Since the widget's background is not drawn by the system or by Qt, we use
+    an OpenGL call to paint it before positioning the object defined earlier
+    in the scene:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.cpp 7
+
+    Once the list containing the object has been executed, the matrix stack
+    needs to be restored to its original state at the start of this function
+    before we can begin overpainting:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.cpp 8
+
+    With the 3D graphics done, we construct a QPainter for use on the widget
+    and simply overpaint the widget with 2D graphics; in this case, using a
+    helper class to draw a number of translucent bubbles onto the widget,
+    and calling \c drawInstructions() to overlay some instructions:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.cpp 10
+
+    When QPainter::end() is called, suitable OpenGL-specific calls are made to
+    write the scene, and its additional contents, onto the widget.
+
+    The implementation of the \l{QGLWidget::resizeGL()}{resizeGL()} function
+    sets up the dimensions of the viewport and defines a projection
+    transformation:
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.cpp 11
+
+    Ideally, we want to arrange the 2D graphics to suit the widget's dimensions.
+    To achieve this, we implement the \l{QWidget::showEvent()}{showEvent()} handler,
+    creating new graphic elements (bubbles) if necessary at appropriate positions
+    in the widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.cpp 12
+
+    This function only has an effect if less than 20 bubbles have already been
+    created.
+
+    The \c animate() slot is called every time the widget's \c animationTimer emits
+    the \l{QTimer::timeout()}{timeout()} signal. This keeps the bubbles moving
+    around.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.cpp 13
+
+    We simply iterate over the bubbles in the \c bubbles list, updating the
+    widget before and after each of them is moved.
+
+    The \c setupViewport() function is called from \c paintEvent()
+    and \c resizeGL().
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.cpp 14
+
+    The \c drawInstructions() function is used to prepare some basic
+    instructions that will be painted with the other 2D graphics over
+    the 3D scene.
+
+    \snippet examples/opengl/overpainting/glwidget.cpp 15
+
+    \section1 Summary
+
+    When overpainting 2D content onto 3D content, we need to use a QPainter
+    \e and make OpenGL calls to achieve the desired effect. Since QPainter
+    itself uses OpenGL calls when used on a QGLWidget subclass, we need to
+    preserve the state of various OpenGL stacks when we perform our own
+    calls, using the following approach:
+
+    \list
+    \o Reimplement QGLWidget::initializeGL(), but only perform minimal
+       initialization. QPainter will perform its own initialization
+       routines, modifying the matrix and property stacks, so it is better
+       to defer certain initialization tasks until just before you render
+       the 3D scene.
+    \o Reimplement QGLWidget::resizeGL() as in the pure 3D case.
+    \o Reimplement QWidget::paintEvent() to draw both 2D and 3D graphics.
+    \endlist
+
+    The \l{QWidget::paintEvent()}{paintEvent()} implementation performs the
+    following tasks:
+
+    \list
+    \o Push the current OpenGL modelview matrix onto a stack.
+    \o Perform initialization tasks usually done in the
+       \l{QGLWidget::initializeGL()}{initializeGL()} function.
+    \o Perform code that would normally be located in the widget's
+       \l{QGLWidget::resizeGL()}{resizeGL()} function to set the correct
+       perspective transformation and set up the viewport.
+    \o Render the scene using OpenGL calls.
+    \o Pop the OpenGL modelview matrix off the stack.
+    \o Construct a QPainter object.
+    \o Initialize it for use on the widget with the QPainter::begin() function.
+    \o Draw primitives using QPainter's member functions.
+    \o Call QPainter::end() to finish painting.
+    \endlist
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/padnavigator.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/padnavigator.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f43725b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/padnavigator.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example graphicsview/padnavigator
+    \title Pad Navigator Example
+
+    The Pad Navigator Example shows how you can use Graphics View
+    together with embedded widgets to create a simple but useful
+    dynamic user interface for embedded devices.
+
+    \image padnavigator-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/painterpaths.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/painterpaths.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd27566
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/painterpaths.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,432 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example painting/painterpaths
+    \title Painter Paths Example
+
+    The Painter Paths example shows how painter paths can be used to
+    build complex shapes for rendering.
+
+    \image painterpaths-example.png
+
+    The QPainterPath class provides a container for painting
+    operations, enabling graphical shapes to be constructed and
+    reused.
+
+    A painter path is an object composed of a number of graphical
+    building blocks (such as rectangles, ellipses, lines, and curves),
+    and can be used for filling, outlining, and clipping. The main
+    advantage of painter paths over normal drawing operations is that
+    complex shapes only need to be created once, but they can be drawn
+    many times using only calls to QPainter::drawPath().
+
+    The example consists of two classes:
+
+    \list
+        \o The \c RenderArea class which is a custom widget displaying
+           a single painter path.
+        \o The \c Window class which is the applications main window
+           displaying several \c RenderArea widgets, and allowing the user
+           to manipulate the painter paths' filling, pen, color
+           and rotation angle.
+    \endlist
+
+    First we will review the \c Window class, then we will take a look
+    at the \c RenderArea class.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The \c Window class inherits QWidget, and is the applications main
+    window displaying several \c RenderArea widgets, and allowing the
+    user to manipulate the painter paths' filling, pen, color and
+    rotation angle.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.h 0
+
+    We declare three private slots to respond to user input regarding
+    filling and color: \c fillRuleChanged(), \c fillGradientChanged()
+    and \c penColorChanged().
+
+    When the user changes the pen width and the rotation angle, the
+    new value is passed directly on to the \c RenderArea widgets using
+    the QSpinBox::valueChanged() signal. The reason why we must
+    implement slots to update the filling and color, is that QComboBox
+    doesn't provide a similar signal passing the new value as
+    argument; so we need to retrieve the new value, or values, before
+    we can update the \c RenderArea widgets.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.h 1
+
+    We also declare a couple of private convenience functions: \c
+    populateWithColors() populates a given QComboBox with items
+    corresponding to the color names Qt knows about, and \c
+    currentItemData() returns the current item for a given QComboBox.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.h 2
+
+    Then we declare the various components of the main window
+    widget. We also declare a convenience constant specifying the
+    number of \c RenderArea widgets.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    In the implementation of the \c Window class we first declare the
+    constant \c Pi with six significant figures:
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor, we then define the various painter paths and
+    create corresponding \c RenderArea widgets which will render the
+    graphical shapes:
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 1
+
+    We construct a rectangle with sharp corners using the
+    QPainterPath::moveTo() and QPainterPath::lineTo()
+    functions.
+
+    QPainterPath::moveTo() moves the current point to the point passed
+    as argument. A painter path is an object composed of a number of
+    graphical building blocks, i.e. subpaths. Moving the current point
+    will also start a new subpath (implicitly closing the previously
+    current path when the new one is started). The
+    QPainterPath::lineTo() function adds a straight line from the
+    current point to the given end point. After the line is drawn, the
+    current point is updated to be at the end point of the line.
+
+    We first move the current point starting a new subpath, and we
+    draw three of the rectangle's sides. Then we call the
+    QPainterPath::closeSubpath() function which draws a line to the
+    beginning of the current subpath. A new subpath is automatically
+    begun when the current subpath is closed. The current point of the
+    new path is (0, 0). We could also have called
+    QPainterPath::lineTo() to draw the last line as well, and then
+    explicitly start a new subpath using the QPainterPath::moveTo()
+    function.
+
+    QPainterPath also provide the QPainterPath::addRect() convenience
+    function, which adds a given rectangle to the path as a closed
+    subpath. The rectangle is added as a clockwise set of lines. The
+    painter path's current position after the rect has been added is
+    at the top-left corner of the rectangle.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 2
+
+    Then we construct a rectangle with rounded corners. As before, we
+    use the QPainterPath::moveTo() and QPainterPath::lineTo()
+    functions to draw the rectangle's sides. To create the rounded
+    corners we use the QPainterPath::arcTo() function.
+
+    QPainterPath::arcTo() creates an arc that occupies the given
+    rectangle (specified by a QRect or the rectangle's coordinates),
+    beginning at the given start angle and extending the given degrees
+    counter-clockwise. Angles are specified in degrees. Clockwise arcs
+    can be specified using negative angles.  The function connects the
+    current point to the starting point of the arc if they are not
+    already connected.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 3
+
+    We also use the QPainterPath::arcTo() function to construct the
+    ellipse path. First we move the current point starting a new
+    path. Then we call QPainterPath::arcTo() with starting angle 0.0
+    and 360.0 degrees as the last argument, creating an ellipse.
+
+    Again, QPainterPath provides a convenience function (
+    QPainterPath::addEllipse()) which creates an ellipse within a
+    given bounding rectangle and adds it to the painter path. If the
+    current subpath is closed, a new subpath is started. The ellipse
+    is composed of a clockwise curve, starting and finishing at zero
+    degrees (the 3 o'clock position).
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 4
+
+    When constructing the pie chart path we continue to use a
+    combination of the mentioned functions: First we move the current
+    point, starting a new subpath. Then we create a line from the
+    center of the chart to the arc, and the arc itself. When we close
+    the subpath, we implicitly construct the last line back to the
+    center of the chart.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 5
+
+    Constructing a polygon is equivalent to constructing a rectangle.
+
+    QPainterPath also provide the QPainterPath::addPolygon()
+    convenience function which adds the given polygon to the path as a
+    new subpath. Current position after the polygon has been added is
+    the last point in polygon.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 6
+
+    Then we create a path consisting of a group of subpaths: First we
+    move the current point, and create a circle using the
+    QPainterPath::arcTo() function with starting angle 0.0, and 360
+    degrees as the last argument, as we did when we created the
+    ellipse path. Then we move the current point again, starting a
+    new subpath, and construct three sides of a square using the
+    QPainterPath::lineTo() function.
+
+    Now, when we call the QPainterPath::closeSubpath() fucntion the
+    last side is created. Remember that the
+    QPainterPath::closeSubpath() function draws a line to the
+    beginning of the \e current subpath, i.e the square.
+
+    QPainterPath provide a convenience function,
+    QPainterPath::addPath() which adds a given path to the path that
+    calls the function.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 7
+
+    When creating the text path, we first create the font. Then we set
+    the font's style strategy which tells the font matching algorithm
+    what type of fonts should be used to find an appropriate default
+    family. QFont::ForceOutline forces the use of outline fonts.
+
+    To construct the text, we use the QPainterPath::addText() function
+    which adds the given text to the path as a set of closed subpaths
+    created from the supplied font. The subpaths are positioned so
+    that the left end of the text's baseline lies at the specified
+    point.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 8
+
+    To create the Bezier path, we use the QPainterPath::cubicTo()
+    function which adds a Bezier curve between the current point and
+    the given end point with the given control point.  After the curve
+    is added, the current point is updated to be at the end point of
+    the curve.
+
+    In this case we omit to close the subpath so that we only have a
+    simple curve. But there is still a logical line from the curve's
+    endpoint back to the beginning of the subpath; it becomes visible
+    when filling the path as can be seen in the applications main
+    window.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 9
+
+    The final path that we construct shows that you can use
+    QPainterPath to construct rather complex shapes using only the
+    previous mentioned QPainterPath::moveTo(), QPainterPath::lineTo()
+    and QPainterPath::closeSubpath() functions.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 10
+
+    Now that we have created all the painter paths that we need, we
+    create a corresponding \c RenderArea widget for each. In the end,
+    we make sure that the number of render areas is correct using the
+    Q_ASSERT() macro.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 11
+
+    Then we create the widgets associated with the painter paths' fill
+    rule.
+
+    There are two available fill rules in Qt: The Qt::OddEvenFill rule
+    determine whether a point is inside the shape by drawing a
+    horizontal line from the point to a location outside the shape,
+    and count the number of intersections. If the number of
+    intersections is an odd number, the point is inside the
+    shape. This rule is the default.
+
+    The Qt::WindingFill rule determine whether a point is inside the
+    shape by drawing a horizontal line from the point to a location
+    outside the shape. Then it determines whether the direction of the
+    line at each intersection point is up or down. The winding number
+    is determined by summing the direction of each intersection. If
+    the number is non zero, the point is inside the shape.
+
+    The Qt::WindingFill rule can in most cases be considered as the
+    intersection of closed shapes.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 12
+
+    We also create the other widgets associated with the filling, the
+    pen and the rotation angle.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 16
+
+    We connect the comboboxes \l {QComboBox::activated()}{activated()}
+    signals to the associated slots in the \c Window class, while we
+    connect the spin boxes \l
+    {QSpinBox::valueChanged()}{valueChanged()} signal directly to the
+    \c RenderArea widget's respective slots.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 17
+
+    We add the \c RenderArea widgets to a separate layout which we
+    then add to the main layout along with the rest of the widgets.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 18
+
+    Finally, we initialize the \c RenderArea widgets by calling the \c
+    fillRuleChanged(), \c fillGradientChanged() and \c
+    penColorChanged() slots, and we set the inital pen width and
+    window title.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 19
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 20
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 21
+
+    The private slots are implemented to retrieve the new value, or
+    values, from the associated comboboxes and update the RenderArea
+    widgets.
+
+    First we determine the new value, or values, using the private \c
+    currentItemData() function and the qvariant_cast() template
+    function. Then we call the associated slot for each of the \c
+    RenderArea widgets to update the painter paths.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 22
+
+    The \c populateWithColors() function populates the given combobox
+    with items corresponding to the color names Qt knows about
+    provided by the static QColor::colorNames() function.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/window.cpp 23
+
+    The \c currentItemData() function simply return the current item
+    of the given combobox.
+
+    \section1 RenderArea Class Definition
+
+    The \c RenderArea class inherits QWidget, and is a custom widget
+    displaying a single painter path.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/renderarea.h 0
+
+    We declare several public slots updating the \c RenderArea
+    widget's associated painter path. In addition we reimplement the
+    QWidget::minimumSizeHint() and QWidget::sizeHint() functions to
+    give the \c RenderArea widget a reasonable size within our
+    application, and we reimplement the QWidget::paintEvent() event
+    handler to draw its painter path.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/renderarea.h 1
+
+    Each instance of the \c RenderArea class has a QPainterPath, a
+    couple of fill colors, a pen width, a pen color and a rotation
+    angle.
+
+    \section1 RenderArea Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor takes a QPainterPath as argument (in addition to
+    the optional QWidget parent):
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/renderarea.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor we initialize the \c RenderArea widget with the
+    QPainterPath parameter as well as initializing the pen width and
+    rotation angle. We also set the widgets \l
+    {QWidget::backgroundRole()}{background role}; QPalette::Base is
+    typically white.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/renderarea.cpp 1
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/renderarea.cpp 2
+
+    Then we reimplement the QWidget::minimumSizeHint() and
+    QWidget::sizeHint() functions to give the \c RenderArea widget a
+    reasonable size within our application.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/renderarea.cpp 3
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/renderarea.cpp 4
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/renderarea.cpp 5
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/renderarea.cpp 6
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/renderarea.cpp 7
+
+    The various public slots updates the \c RenderArea widget's
+    painter path by setting the associated property and make a call to
+    the QWidget::update() function, forcing a repaint of the widget
+    with the new rendering preferences.
+
+    The QWidget::update() slot does not cause an immediate repaint;
+    instead it schedules a paint event for processing when Qt returns
+    to the main event loop.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/renderarea.cpp 8
+
+    A paint event is a request to repaint all or parts of the
+    widget. The paintEvent() function is an event handler that can be
+    reimplemented to receive the widget's paint events. We reimplement
+    the event handler to render the \c RenderArea widget's painter
+    path.
+
+    First, we create a QPainter for the \c RenderArea instance, and
+    set the painter's render hints. The QPainter::RenderHints are used
+    to specify flags to QPainter that may, or may not, be respected by
+    any given engine. QPainter::Antialiasing indicates that the engine
+    should anti-alias the edges of primitives if possible, i.e. put
+    additional pixels around the original ones to smooth the edges.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/renderarea.cpp 9
+
+    Then we scale the QPainter's coordinate system to ensure that the
+    painter path is rendered in the right size, i.e that it grows with
+    the \c RenderArea widget when the application is resized. When we
+    constructed the various painter paths, they were all rnedered
+    within a square with a 100 pixel width wich is equivalent to \c
+    RenderArea::sizeHint(). The QPainter::scale() function scales the
+    coordinate system by the \c RenderArea widget's \e current width
+    and height divided by 100.
+
+    Now, when we are sure that the painter path has the right size, we
+    can translate the coordinate system to make the painter path
+    rotate around the \c RenderArea widget's center. After we have
+    performed the rotation, we must remember to translate the
+    coordinate system back again.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/painterpaths/renderarea.cpp 10
+
+    Then we set the QPainter's pen with the instance's rendering
+    preferences. We create a QLinearGradient and set its colors
+    corresponding to the \c RenderArea widget's fill colors. Finally,
+    we set the QPainter's brush (the gradient is automatically
+    converted into a QBrush), and draw the \c RenderArea widget's
+    painter path using the QPainter::drawPath() function.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/pbuffers.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/pbuffers.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..347cf3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/pbuffers.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example opengl/pbuffers
+    \title Pixel Buffers Example
+
+    The Pixel Buffers example demonstrates how to use the
+    QGLPixelBuffer class to render into an off-screen buffer and use
+    the contents as a dynamic texture in a QGLWidget.
+
+    \image pbuffers-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/pbuffers2.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/pbuffers2.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5426852
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/pbuffers2.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example opengl/pbuffers2
+    \title Pixel Buffers 2 Example
+
+    The Pixel Buffers 2 example demonstrates how to use the
+    QGLPixelBuffer class to render into an off-screen buffer and use
+    the contents as a dynamic texture in a QGLWidget.
+
+    \image pbuffers2-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/pixelator.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/pixelator.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2a8b43d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/pixelator.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,271 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/pixelator
+    \title Pixelator Example
+
+    The Pixelator example shows how delegates can be used to customize the way that
+    items are rendered in standard item views.
+
+    \image pixelator-example.png
+
+    By default, QTreeView, QTableView, and QListView use a standard item delegate
+    to display and edit a set of common data types that are sufficient for many
+    applications. However, an application may need to represent items of data in a
+    particular way, or provide support for rendering more specialized data types,
+    and this often requires the use of a custom delegate.
+
+    In this example, we show how to use custom delegates to modify the appearance
+    of standard views. To do this, we implement the following components:
+
+    \list
+    \i A model which represents each pixel in an image as an item of data, where each
+       item contains a value for the brightness of the corresponding pixel.
+    \i A custom delegate that uses the information supplied by the model to represent
+       each pixel as a black circle on a white background, where the radius of the
+       circle corresponds to the darkness of the pixel.
+    \endlist
+
+    This example may be useful for developers who want to implement their own table
+    models or custom delegates. The process of creating custom delegates for editing
+    item data is covered in the \l{Spin Box Delegate Example}{Spin Box Delegate}
+    example.
+
+    \section1 ImageModel Class Definition
+
+    The \c ImageModel class is defined as follows:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/imagemodel.h 0
+
+    Since we only require a simple, read-only table model, we only need to implement
+    functions to indicate the dimensions of the image and supply data to other
+    components.
+
+    For convenience, the image to be used is passed in the constructor.
+
+    \section1 ImageModel Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor is trivial:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/imagemodel.cpp 0
+
+    The \c setImage() function sets the image that will be used by the model:
+   
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/imagemodel.cpp 1
+
+    The QAbstractItemModel::reset() call tells the view(s) that the model
+    has changed.
+
+    The \c rowCount() and \c columnCount() functions return the height and width of
+    the image respectively:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/imagemodel.cpp 2
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/imagemodel.cpp 3
+
+    Since the image is a simple two-dimensional structure, the \c parent arguments
+    to these functions are unused. They both simply return the relevant size from
+    the underlying image object.
+
+    The \c data() function returns data for the item that corresponds to a given
+    model index in a format that is suitable for a particular role:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/imagemodel.cpp 4
+
+    In this implementation, we only check that the model index is valid, and that
+    the role requested is the \l{Qt::ItemDataRole}{DisplayRole}. If so, the function
+    returns the grayscale value of the relevant pixel in the image; otherwise, a null
+    model index is returned.
+
+    This model can be used with QTableView to display the integer brightness values
+    for the pixels in the image. However, we will implement a custom delegate to
+    display this information in a more artistic way.
+
+    The \c headerData() function is also reimplemented:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/imagemodel.cpp 5
+
+    We return (1, 1) as the size hint for a header item. If we
+    didn't, the headers would default to a larger size, preventing
+    us from displaying really small items (which can be specified
+    using the \gui{Pixel size} combobox).
+
+    \section1 PixelDelegate Class Definition
+
+    The \c PixelDelegate class is defined as follows:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/pixeldelegate.h 0
+
+    This class provides only basic features for a delegate so, unlike the
+    \l{Spin Box Delegate Example}{Spin Box Delegate} example, we subclass
+    QAbstractItemDelegate instead of QItemDelegate.
+
+    We only need to reimplement \l{QAbstractItemDelegate::paint()}{paint()} and
+    \l{QAbstractItemDelegate::sizeHint()}{sizeHint()} in this class.
+    However, we also provide a delegate-specific \c setPixelSize() function so
+    that we can change the delegate's behavior via the signals and slots mechanism.
+
+    \section1 PixelDelegate Class Implementation
+
+    The \c PixelDelegate constructor is used to set up a default value for
+    the size of each "pixel" that it renders. The base class constructor is
+    also called to ensure that the delegate is set up with a parent object,
+    if one is supplied:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/pixeldelegate.cpp 0
+
+    Each item is rendered by the delegate's
+    \l{QAbstractItemDelegate::paint()}{paint()} function. The view calls this
+    function with a ready-to-use QPainter object, style information that the
+    delegate should use to correctly draw the item, and an index to the item in
+    the model:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/pixeldelegate.cpp 1
+
+    The first task the delegate has to perform is to draw the item's background
+    correctly. Usually, selected items appear differently to non-selected items,
+    so we begin by testing the state passed in the style option and filling the
+    background if necessary.
+
+    The radius of each circle is calculated in the following lines of code:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/pixeldelegate.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/pixeldelegate.cpp 4
+
+    First, the largest possible radius of the circle is determined by taking the
+    smallest dimension of the style option's \c rect attribute.
+    Using the model index supplied, we obtain a value for the brightness of the
+    relevant pixel in the image. The radius of the circle is calculated by
+    scaling the brightness to fit within the item and subtracting it from the
+    largest possible radius.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/pixeldelegate.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/pixeldelegate.cpp 6
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/pixeldelegate.cpp 7
+
+    We save the painter's state, turn on antialiasing (to obtain smoother
+    curves), and turn off the pen.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/pixeldelegate.cpp 8
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/pixeldelegate.cpp 9
+
+    The foreground of the item (the circle representing a pixel) must be
+    rendered using an appropriate brush. For unselected items, we will use a
+    solid black brush; selected items are drawn using a predefined brush from
+    the style option's palette.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/pixeldelegate.cpp 10
+
+    Finally, we paint the circle within the rectangle specified by the style
+    option and we call \l{QPainter::}{restore()} on the painter.
+
+    The \c paint() function does not have to be particularly complicated; it is
+    only necessary to ensure that the state of the painter when the function
+    returns is the same as it was when it was called. This usually
+    means that any transformations applied to the painter must be preceded by
+    a call to QPainter::save() and followed by a call to QPainter::restore().
+
+    The delegate's \l{QAbstractItemDelegate::}{sizeHint()} function
+    returns a size for the item based on the predefined pixel size, initially set
+    up in the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/pixeldelegate.cpp 11
+
+    The delegate's size is updated whenever the pixel size is changed.
+    We provide a custom slot to do this:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/pixeldelegate.cpp 12
+
+    \section1 Using The Custom Delegate
+
+    In this example, we use a main window to display a table of data, using the
+    custom delegate to render each cell in a particular way. Much of the
+    \c MainWindow class performs tasks that are not related to item views. Here,
+    we only quote the parts that are relevant. You can look at the rest of the
+    implementation by following the links to the code at the top of this
+    document.
+
+    In the constructor, we set up a table view, turn off its grid, and hide its
+    headers:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/mainwindow.cpp 0
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    This enables the items to be drawn without any gaps between them. Removing
+    the headers also prevents the user from adjusting the sizes of individual
+    rows and columns. 
+    
+    We also set the minimum section size to 1 on the headers. If we
+    didn't, the headers would default to a larger size, preventing
+    us from displaying really small items (which can be specified
+    using the \gui{Pixel size} combobox).
+
+    The custom delegate is constructed with the main window as its parent, so
+    that it will be deleted correctly later, and we set it on the table view.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    Each item in the table view will be rendered by the \c PixelDelegate
+    instance.
+
+    We construct a spin box to allow the user to change the size of each "pixel"
+    drawn by the delegate:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+    This spin box is connected to the custom slot we implemented in the
+    \c PixelDelegate class. This ensures that the delegate always draws each
+    pixel at the currently specified size:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/mainwindow.cpp 4
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/mainwindow.cpp 5
+
+    We also connect the spin box to a slot in the \c MainWindow class. This
+    forces the view to take into account the new size hints for each item;
+    these are provided by the delegate in its \c sizeHint() function.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/pixelator/mainwindow.cpp 6
+
+    We explicitly resize the columns and rows to match the
+    \gui{Pixel size} combobox.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/plugandpaint.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/plugandpaint.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3cdd8a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/plugandpaint.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,554 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example tools/plugandpaint
+    \title Plug & Paint Example
+
+    The Plug & Paint example demonstrates how to write Qt
+    applications that can be extended through plugins.
+
+    \image plugandpaint.png Screenshot of the Plug & Paint example
+
+    A plugin is a dynamic library that can be loaded at run-time to
+    extend an application. Qt makes it possible to create custom
+    plugins and to load them using QPluginLoader. To ensure that
+    plugins don't get lost, it is also possible to link them
+    statically to the executable. The Plug & Paint example uses
+    plugins to support custom brushes, shapes, and image filters. A
+    single plugin can provide multiple brushes, shapes, and/or
+    filters.
+
+    If you want to learn how to make your own application extensible
+    through plugins, we recommend that you start by reading this
+    overview, which explains how to make an application use plugins.
+    Afterward, you can read the
+    \l{tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools}{Basic Tools} and
+    \l{tools/plugandpaintplugins/extrafilters}{Extra Filters}
+    overviews, which show how to implement static and dynamic
+    plugins, respectively.
+
+    Plug & Paint consists of the following classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c MainWindow is a QMainWindow subclass that provides the menu
+       system and that contains a \c PaintArea as the central widget.
+    \o \c PaintArea is a QWidget that allows the user to draw using a
+       brush and to insert shapes.
+    \o \c PluginDialog is a dialog that shows information about the
+       plugins detected by the application.
+    \o \c BrushInterface, \c ShapeInterface, and \c FilterInterface are
+       abstract base classes that can be implemented by plugins to
+       provide custom brushes, shapes, and image filters.
+    \endlist
+
+    \section1 The Plugin Interfaces
+
+    We will start by reviewing the interfaces defined in \c
+    interfaces.h. These interfaces are used by the Plug & Paint
+    application to access extra functionality. They are implemented
+    in the plugins.
+
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/interfaces.h 0
+
+    The \c BrushInterface class declares four pure virtual functions.
+    The first pure virtual function, \c brushes(), returns a list of
+    strings that identify the brushes provided by the plugin. By
+    returning a QStringList instead of a QString, we make it possible
+    for a single plugin to provide multiple brushes. The other
+    functions have a \c brush parameter to identify which brush
+    (among those returned by \c brushes()) is used.
+
+    \c mousePress(), \c mouseMove(), and \c mouseRelease() take a
+    QPainter and one or two \l{QPoint}s, and return a QRect
+    identifying which portion of the image was altered by the brush.
+
+    The class also has a virtual destructor. Interface classes
+    usually don't need such a destructor (because it would make
+    little sense to \c delete the object that implements the
+    interface through a pointer to the interface), but some compilers
+    emit a warning for classes that declare virtual functions but no
+    virtual destructor. We provide the destructor to keep these
+    compilers happy.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/interfaces.h 1
+
+    The \c ShapeInterface class declares a \c shapes() function that
+    works the same as \c{BrushInterface}'s \c brushes() function, and
+    a \c generateShape() function that has a \c shape parameter.
+    Shapes are represented by a QPainterPath, a data type that can
+    represent arbitrary 2D shapes or combinations of shapes. The \c
+    parent parameter can be used by the plugin to pop up a dialog
+    asking the user to specify more information.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/interfaces.h 2
+
+    The \c FilterInterface class declares a \c filters() function
+    that returns a list of filter names, and a \c filterImage()
+    function that applies a filter to an image.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/interfaces.h 4
+
+    To make it possible to query at run-time whether a plugin
+    implements a given interface, we must use the \c
+    Q_DECLARE_INTERFACE() macro. The first argument is the name of
+    the interface. The second argument is a string identifying the
+    interface in a unique way. By convention, we use a "Java package
+    name" syntax to identify interfaces. If we later change the
+    interfaces, we must use a different string to identify the new
+    interface; otherwise, the application might crash. It is therefore
+    a good idea to include a version number in the string, as we did
+    above.
+
+    The \l{tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools}{Basic Tools} plugin
+    and the \l{tools/plugandpaintplugins/extrafilters}{Extra Filters}
+    plugin shows how to derive from \c BrushInterface, \c
+    ShapeInterface, and \c FilterInterface.
+
+    A note on naming: It might have been tempting to give the \c
+    brushes(), \c shapes(), and \c filters() functions a more generic
+    name, such as \c keys() or \c features(). However, that would
+    have made multiple inheritance impractical. When creating
+    interfaces, we should always try to give unique names to the pure
+    virtual functions.
+
+    \section1 The MainWindow Class
+
+    The \c MainWindow class is a standard QMainWindow subclass, as
+    found in many of the other examples (e.g.,
+    \l{mainwindows/application}{Application}). Here, we'll
+    concentrate on the parts of the code that are related to plugins.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+    The \c loadPlugins() function is called from the \c MainWindow
+    constructor to detect plugins and update the \gui{Brush},
+    \gui{Shapes}, and \gui{Filters} menus. We start by handling static
+    plugins (available through QPluginLoader::staticInstances())
+
+    To the application that uses the plugin, a Qt plugin is simply a
+    QObject. That QObject implements plugin interfaces using multiple
+    inheritance.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/mainwindow.cpp 5
+
+    The next step is to load dynamic plugins. We initialize the \c
+    pluginsDir member variable to refer to the \c plugins
+    subdirectory of the Plug & Paint example. On Unix, this is just a
+    matter of initializing the QDir variable with
+    QApplication::applicationDirPath(), the path of the executable
+    file, and to do a \l{QDir::cd()}{cd()}. On Windows and Mac OS X,
+    this file is usually located in a subdirectory, so we need to
+    take this into account.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/mainwindow.cpp 6
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/mainwindow.cpp 7
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/mainwindow.cpp 8
+
+    We use QDir::entryList() to get a list of all files in that
+    directory. Then we iterate over the result using \l foreach and
+    try to load the plugin using QPluginLoader.
+
+    The QObject provided by the plugin is accessible through
+    QPluginLoader::instance(). If the dynamic library isn't a Qt
+    plugin, or if it was compiled against an incompatible version of
+    the Qt library, QPluginLoader::instance() returns a null pointer.
+
+    If QPluginLoader::instance() is non-null, we add it to the menus.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/mainwindow.cpp 9
+
+    At the end, we enable or disable the \gui{Brush}, \gui{Shapes},
+    and \gui{Filters} menus based on whether they contain any items.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/mainwindow.cpp 10
+
+    For each plugin (static or dynamic), we check which interfaces it
+    implements using \l qobject_cast(). First, we try to cast the
+    plugin instance to a \c BrushInterface; if it works, we call the
+    private function \c addToMenu() with the list of brushes returned
+    by \c brushes(). Then we do the same with the \c ShapeInterface
+    and the \c FilterInterface.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+    The \c aboutPlugins() slot is called on startup and can be
+    invoked at any time through the \gui{About Plugins} action. It
+    pops up a \c PluginDialog, providing information about the loaded
+    plugins.
+
+    \image plugandpaint-plugindialog.png Screenshot of the Plugin dialog
+
+
+    The \c addToMenu() function is called from \c loadPlugin() to
+    create \l{QAction}s for custom brushes, shapes, or filters and
+    add them to the relevant menu. The QAction is created with the
+    plugin from which it comes from as the parent; this makes it
+    convenient to get access to the plugin later.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    The \c changeBrush() slot is invoked when the user chooses one of
+    the brushes from the \gui{Brush} menu. We start by finding out
+    which action invoked the slot using QObject::sender(). Then we
+    get the \c BrushInterface out of the plugin (which we
+    conveniently passed as the QAction's parent) and we call \c
+    PaintArea::setBrush() with the \c BrushInterface and the string
+    identifying the brush. Next time the user draws on the paint
+    area, \c PaintArea will use this brush.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    The \c insertShape() is invoked when the use chooses one of the
+    shapes from the \gui{Shapes} menu. We retrieve the QAction that
+    invoked the slot, then the \c ShapeInterface associated with that
+    QAction, and finally we call \c ShapeInterface::generateShape()
+    to obtain a QPainterPath.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    The \c applyFilter() slot is similar: We retrieve the QAction
+    that invoked the slot, then the \c FilterInterface associated to
+    that QAction, and finally we call \c
+    FilterInterface::filterImage() to apply the filter onto the
+    current image.
+
+    \section1 The PaintArea Class
+
+    The \c PaintArea class contains some code that deals with \c
+    BrushInterface, so we'll review it briefly.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/paintarea.cpp 0
+
+    In \c setBrush(), we simply store the \c BrushInterface and the
+    brush that are given to us by \c MainWindow.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/paintarea.cpp 1
+
+    In the \l{QWidget::mouseMoveEvent()}{mouse move event handler},
+    we call the \c BrushInterface::mouseMove() function on the
+    current \c BrushInterface, with the current brush. The mouse
+    press and mouse release handlers are very similar.
+
+    \section1 The PluginDialog Class
+
+    The \c PluginDialog class provides information about the loaded
+    plugins to the user. Its constructor takes a path to the plugins
+    and a list of plugin file names. It calls \c findPlugins()
+    to fill the QTreeWdiget with information about the plugins:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/plugindialog.cpp 0
+
+    The \c findPlugins() is very similar to \c
+    MainWindow::loadPlugins(). It uses QPluginLoader to access the
+    static and dynamic plugins. Its helper function \c
+    populateTreeWidget() uses \l qobject_cast() to find out which
+    interfaces are implemented by the plugins:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/plugindialog.cpp 1
+
+    \section1 Importing Static Plugins
+
+    The \l{tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools}{Basic Tools} plugin
+    is built as a static plugin, to ensure that it is always
+    available to the application. This requires using the
+    Q_IMPORT_PLUGIN() macro somewhere in the application (in a \c
+    .cpp file) and specifying the plugin in the \c .pro file.
+
+    For Plug & Paint, we have chosen to put Q_IMPORT_PLUGIN() in \c
+    main.cpp:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/main.cpp 0
+
+    The argument to Q_IMPORT_PLUGIN() is the plugin's name, as
+    specified with Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() in the \l{Exporting the
+    Plugin}{plugin}.
+
+    In the \c .pro file, we need to specify the static library.
+    Here's the project file for building Plug & Paint:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaint/plugandpaint.pro 0
+
+    The \c LIBS line variable specifies the library \c pnp_basictools
+    located in the \c ../plugandpaintplugins/basictools directory.
+    (Although the \c LIBS syntax has a distinct Unix flavor, \c qmake
+    supports it on all platforms.)
+
+    The \c CONFIG() code at the end is necessary for this example
+    because the example is part of the Qt distribution and Qt can be
+    configured to be built simultaneously in debug and in release
+    modes. You don't need to for your own plugin applications.
+
+    This completes our review of the Plug & Paint application. At
+    this point, you might want to take a look at the
+    \l{tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools}{Basic Tools} example
+    plugin.
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \example tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools
+    \title Plug & Paint Basic Tools Example
+
+    The Basic Tools example is a static plugin for the
+    \l{tools/plugandpaint}{Plug & Paint} example. It provides a set
+    of basic brushes, shapes, and filters. Through the Basic Tools
+    example, we will review the four steps involved in writing a Qt
+    plugin:
+
+    \list 1
+    \o Declare a plugin class.
+    \o Implement the interfaces provided by the plugin.
+    \o Export the plugin using the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro.
+    \o Build the plugin using an adequate \c .pro file.
+    \endlist
+
+    \section1 Declaration of the Plugin Class
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools/basictoolsplugin.h 0
+
+    We start by including \c interfaces.h, which defines the plugin
+    interfaces for the \l{tools/plugandpaint}{Plug & Paint}
+    application. For the \c #include to work, we need to add an \c
+    INCLUDEPATH entry to the \c .pro file with the path to Qt's \c
+    examples/tools directory.
+
+    The \c BasicToolsPlugin class is a QObject subclass that
+    implements the \c BrushInterface, the \c ShapeInterface, and the
+    \c FilterInterface. This is done through multiple inheritance.
+    The \c Q_INTERFACES() macro is necessary to tell \l{moc}, Qt's
+    meta-object compiler, that the base classes are plugin
+    interfaces. Without the \c Q_INTERFACES() macro, we couldn't use
+    \l qobject_cast() in the \l{tools/plugandpaint}{Plug & Paint}
+    application to detect interfaces.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools/basictoolsplugin.h 2
+
+    In the \c public section of the class, we declare all the
+    functions from the three interfaces.
+
+    \section1 Implementation of the Brush Interface
+
+    Let's now review the implementation of the \c BasicToolsPlugin
+    member functions inherited from \c BrushInterface.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools/basictoolsplugin.cpp 0
+
+    The \c brushes() function returns a list of brushes provided by
+    this plugin. We provide three brushes: \gui{Pencil}, \gui{Air
+    Brush}, and \gui{Random Letters}.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools/basictoolsplugin.cpp 1
+
+    On a mouse press event, we just call \c mouseMove() to draw the
+    spot where the event occurred.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools/basictoolsplugin.cpp 2
+
+    In \c mouseMove(), we start by saving the state of the QPainter
+    and we compute a few variables that we'll need later.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools/basictoolsplugin.cpp 3
+
+    Then comes the brush-dependent part of the code:
+
+    \list
+    \o If the brush is \gui{Pencil}, we just call
+       QPainter::drawLine() with the current QPen.
+
+    \o If the brush is \gui{Air Brush}, we start by setting the
+       painter's QBrush to Qt::Dense6Pattern to obtain a dotted
+       pattern. Then we draw a circle filled with that QBrush several
+       times, resulting in a thick line.
+
+    \o If the brush is \gui{Random Letters}, we draw a random letter
+       at the new cursor position. Most of the code is for setting
+       the font to be bold and larger than the default font and for
+       computing an appropriate bounding rect.
+    \endlist
+
+    At the end, we restore the painter state to what it was upon
+    entering the function and we return the bounding rectangle.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools/basictoolsplugin.cpp 4
+
+    When the user releases the mouse, we do nothing and return an
+    empty QRect.
+
+    \section1 Implementation of the Shape Interface
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools/basictoolsplugin.cpp 5
+
+    The plugin provides three shapes: \gui{Circle}, \gui{Star}, and
+    \gui{Text...}. The three dots after \gui{Text} are there because
+    the shape pops up a dialog asking for more information. We know
+    that the shape names will end up in a menu, so we include the
+    three dots in the shape name.
+
+    A cleaner but more complicated design would have been to
+    distinguish between the internal shape name and the name used in
+    the user interface.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools/basictoolsplugin.cpp 6
+
+    The \c generateShape() creates a QPainterPath for the specified
+    shape. If the shape is \gui{Text}, we pop up a QInputDialog to
+    let the user enter some text.
+
+    \section1 Implementation of the Filter Interface
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools/basictoolsplugin.cpp 7
+
+    The plugin provides three filters: \gui{Invert Pixels}, \gui{Swap
+    RGB}, and \gui{Grayscale}.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools/basictoolsplugin.cpp 8
+
+    The \c filterImage() function takes a filter name and a QImage as
+    parameters and returns an altered QImage. The first thing we do
+    is to convert the image to a 32-bit RGB format, to ensure that
+    the algorithms will work as expected. For example,
+    QImage::invertPixels(), which is used to implement the
+    \gui{Invert Pixels} filter, gives counterintuitive results for
+    8-bit images, because they invert the indices into the color
+    table instead of inverting the color table's entries.
+
+    \section1 Exporting the Plugin
+
+    Whereas applications have a \c main() function as their entry
+    point, plugins need to contain exactly one occurrence of the
+    Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro to specify which class provides the
+    plugin:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools/basictoolsplugin.cpp 9
+
+    This line may appear in any \c .cpp file that is part of the
+    plugin's source code.
+
+    \section1 The .pro File
+
+    Here's the project file for building the Basic Tools plugin:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools/basictools.pro 0
+
+    The \c .pro file differs from typical \c .pro files in many
+    respects. First, it starts with a \c TEMPLATE entry specifying \c
+    lib. (The default template is \c app.) It also adds \c plugin to
+    the \c CONFIG variable. This is necessary on some platforms to
+    avoid generating symbolic links with version numbers in the file
+    name, which is appropriate for most dynamic libraries but not for
+    plugins.
+
+    To make the plugin a static plugin, all that is required is to
+    specify \c static in addition to \c plugin. The
+    \l{tools/plugandpaintplugins/extrafilters}{Extra Filters} plugin,
+    which is compiled as a dynamic plugin, doesn't specify \c static
+    in its \c .pro file.
+
+    The \c INCLUDEPATH variable sets the search paths for global
+    headers (i.e., header files included using \c{#include <...>}).
+    We add Qt's \c examples/tools directory (strictly speaking,
+    \c{examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools/../..}) to the
+    list, so that we can include \c <plugandpaint/interfaces.h>.
+
+    The \c TARGET variable specifies which name we want to give the
+    target library. We use \c pnp_ as the prefix to show that the
+    plugin is designed to work with Plug & Paint. On Unix, \c lib is
+    also prepended to that name. On all platforms, a
+    platform-specific suffix is appended (e.g., \c .dll on Windows,
+    \c .a on Linux).
+
+    The \c CONFIG() code at the end is necessary for this example
+    because the example is part of the Qt distribution and Qt can be
+    configured to be built simultaneously in debug and in release
+    modes. You don't need to for your own plugins.
+*/
+
+/*!
+    \example tools/plugandpaintplugins/extrafilters
+    \title Plug & Paint Extra Filters Example
+
+    The Extra Filters example is a plugin for the
+    \l{tools/plugandpaint}{Plug & Paint} example. It provides a set
+    of filters in addition to those provided by the
+    \l{tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools}{Basic Tools} plugin.
+
+    Since the approach is identical to
+    \l{tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools}{Basic Tools}, we won't
+    review the code here. The only part of interes is the
+    \c .pro file, since Extra Filters is a dynamic plugin
+    (\l{tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools}{Basic Tools} is
+    linked statically into the Plug & Paint executable).
+
+    Here's the project file for building the Extra Filters plugin:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/extrafilters/extrafilters.pro 0
+
+    The \c .pro file differs from typical \c .pro files in many
+    respects. First, it starts with a \c TEMPLATE entry specifying \c
+    lib. (The default template is \c app.) It also adds \c plugin to
+    the \c CONFIG variable. This is necessary on some platforms to
+    avoid generating symbolic links with version numbers in the file
+    name, which is appropriate for most dynamic libraries but not for
+    plugins.
+
+    The \c INCLUDEPATH variable sets the search paths for global
+    headers (i.e., header files included using \c{#include <...>}).
+    We add Qt's \c examples/tools directory (strictly speaking,
+    \c{examples/tools/plugandpaintplugins/basictools/../..}) to the
+    list, so that we can include \c <plugandpaint/interfaces.h>.
+
+    The \c TARGET variable specifies which name we want to give the
+    target library. We use \c pnp_ as the prefix to show that the
+    plugin is designed to work with Plug & Paint. On Unix, \c lib is
+    also prepended to that name. On all platforms, a
+    platform-specific suffix is appended (e.g., \c .dll on Windows,
+    \c .so on Linux).
+
+    The \c DESTDIR variable specifies where we want to install the
+    plugin. We put it in Plug & Paint's \c plugins subdirectory,
+    since that's where the application looks for dynamic plugins.
+
+    The \c CONFIG() code at the end is necessary for this example
+    because the example is part of the Qt distribution and Qt can be
+    configured to be built simultaneously in debug and in release
+    modes. You don't need to for your own plugins.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/portedasteroids.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/portedasteroids.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d32732f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/portedasteroids.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example graphicsview/portedasteroids
+    \title Ported Asteroids Example
+
+    This GraphicsView example is a port of the
+    Asteroids game, which was based on QCanvas.
+ 
+    \image portedasteroids-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/portedcanvas.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/portedcanvas.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..76943df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/portedcanvas.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example graphicsview/portedcanvas
+    \title Ported Canvas Example
+
+    This GraphicsView example is a port of the old
+    QCanvas example from Qt 3.
+
+    \sa {Porting to Graphics View}
+
+    \image portedcanvas-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/previewer.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/previewer.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9cbeec1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/previewer.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example webkit/previewer
+    \title Previewer Example
+
+    The Previewer example shows how to use QtWebKit's QWebView to preview
+    HTML data written in a QPlainTextEdit.
+
+    \image previewer-example.png
+
+    \section1 The User Interface
+
+    Before we begin, we create a user interface using \QD. Two QGroupBox
+    objects - the editor group box and the previewer group box are separated
+    by a QSplitter. In the editor group box, we have a QPlainTextEdit object,
+    \c plainTextEdit, and two QPushButton objects. In the previewer group box,
+    we have a QWebView object, \c webView.
+
+    \image previewer-ui.png
+
+    \section1 Previewer Class Definition
+
+    The \c Previewer class is a subclass of both QWidget and Ui::Form.
+    We subclass Ui::Form in order to embed the \QD user interface form
+    created earlier. This method of embedding forms is known as the
+    \l{The Multiple Inheritance Approach}{multiple inheritance approach}.
+
+    In our \c previewer.h file, we have a constructor and a slot,
+    \c on_previewButton_clicked().
+
+    \snippet examples/webkit/previewer/previewer.h 0
+
+    \section1 Previewer Class Implementation
+
+    The \c{Previewer}'s constructor is only responsible for setting up the
+    user interface.
+
+    \snippet examples/webkit/previewer/previewer.cpp 0
+
+    The \c on_previewButton_clicked() is a slot corresponding to the
+    \c{previewButton}'s \l{QPushButton::}{clicked()} signal. When the
+    \c previewButton is clicked, we extract the contents of \c plainTextEdit,
+    and then invoke the \l{QWebView::}{setHtml()} function to display our
+    contents as HTML.
+
+    \snippet examples/webkit/previewer/previewer.cpp 1
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    The \c MainWindow class for the Previewer example is a subclass of
+    QMainWindow with a constructor and five private slots: \c open(),
+    \c openUrl(), \c save(), \c about() and \c updateTextEdit().
+
+    \snippet examples/webkit/previewer/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    The private objects in \c MainWindow are \c centralWidget, which is
+    a \c Previewer object, \c fileMenu, \c helpMenu and the QAction objects
+    \c openAct, \c openUrlAct, \c saveAct, \c exitAct, \c aboutAct and
+    \c aboutQtAct.
+
+    \snippet examples/webkit/previewer/mainwindow.h 1
+
+    There are three private functions: \c createActions(), \c createMenus()
+    and \c setStartupText(). The \c createActions() and \c createMenus()
+    functions are necessary to set up the main window's actions and
+    assign them to the \gui File and \gui Help menus. The \c setStartupText()
+    function, on the other hand, displays a description about the example
+    in its HTML Previewer window.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    The \c{MainWindow}'s constructor invokes \c createActions() and
+    \c createMenus() to set up the \gui File menu and \gui Help menu. Then,
+    the \c Previewer object, \c centralWidget, is set to the main window's
+    central widget. Also, we connect \c webView's
+    \l{QWebView::}{loadFinished()} signal to our \c updateTextEdit() slot.
+    Finally, we call the \c setStartupText() function to display the
+    description of the example.
+
+    \snippet examples/webkit/previewer/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    Within the \c createActions() function, we instantiate all our private
+    QAction objects which we declared in \c{mainwindow.h}. We set the
+    short cut and status tip for these actions and connect their
+    \l{QAction::}{triggered()} signal to appropriate slots.
+
+    \snippet examples/webkit/previewer/mainwindow.cpp 1
+    \dots
+
+    The \c createMenus() function instantiates the QMenu items, \c fileMenu
+    and \c helpMenu and adds them to the main window's
+    \l{QMainWindow::menuBar()}{menu bar}.
+
+    \snippet examples/webkit/previewer/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    The example also provides an \c about() slot to describe its purpose.
+
+    \snippet examples/webkit/previewer/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+    The \c MainWindow class provides two types of \gui Open functions:
+    \c open() and \c openUrl(). The \c open() function opens an HTML file
+    with \c fileName, and reads it with QTextStream. The function then
+    displays the output on \c plainTextEdit. The file's name is obtained
+    using QFileDialog's \l{QFileDialog::}{getOpenFileName()} function.
+
+    \snippet examples/webkit/previewer/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+    The \c openUrl() function, on the other hand, displays a QInputDialog
+    to obtain a URL, and displays it on \c webView.
+
+    \snippet examples/webkit/previewer/mainwindow.cpp 5
+
+    In order to save a HTML file, the \c save() function first extracts the
+    contents of \c plainTextEdit and displays a QFileDialog to obtain
+    \c fileName. Then, we use a QTextStream object, \c in, to write to
+    \c file.
+
+    \snippet examples/webkit/previewer/mainwindow.cpp 6
+
+    Earlier, in \c{MainWindow}'s constructor, we connected \c{webView}'s
+    \l{QWebView::}{loadFinished()} signal to our private \c updateTextEdit()
+    slot. This slot updates the contents of \c plainTextEdit with the HTML
+    source of the web page's main frame, obtained using \l{QWebFrame}'s
+    \l{QWebFrame::}{toHtml()} function.
+
+    \snippet examples/webkit/previewer/mainwindow.cpp 7
+
+    To provide a description about the Previewer example, when it starts up,
+    we use the \c setStartupText() function, as shown below:
+
+    \snippet examples/webkit/previewer/mainwindow.cpp 8
+
+
+    \section1 The \c{main()} Function
+
+    The \c main() function instantiates a \c MainWindow object, \c mainWindow,
+    and displays it with the \l{QWidget::}{show()} function.
+
+    \snippet examples/webkit/previewer/main.cpp 0
+
+*/
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/qobjectxmlmodel.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/qobjectxmlmodel.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ce1dab6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/qobjectxmlmodel.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,353 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+  \example xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel
+  \title QObject XML Model Example
+
+  This example shows how to use QtXmlPatterns to query QObject trees
+  by modeling the non-XML data structure of a QObject tree to look
+  like XML.
+
+  \tableofcontents
+
+  \section1 Introduction
+
+  This example illustrates two important points about using XQuery to
+  query non-XML data modeled to look like XML. The first point is that
+  a custom node model class doesn't always have to actually build the
+  node model. Sometimes the node model can be an already existing data
+  structure, like the QObject tree used in this example. The second
+  point is to explain what is required to make non-XML data look like
+  XML.
+
+  In this example, we want to model a QObject tree to look like
+  XML. That is easy to do because a QObject tree maps to the XML tree
+  structure in a staightforward way. Each QObject node is modeled as
+  an XML element node. However, when we want to add the QMetaObject tree
+  to the QObject tree node model, we are trying to add a second tree to
+  the node model. The QMetaObject tree exists \e{behind} the QObject
+  tree. Adding the QMetaObject tree to the node model changes the two
+  dimensional tree into a three dimensional tree.
+
+  The query engine can only traverse two dimensional trees, because an
+  XML document is always a two dimensional tree. If we want to add the
+  QMetaObject tree to the node model, we have to somehow flatten it
+  into the the same plane as the QObject tree. This requires that the
+  node model class must build an auxiliary data structure and make it
+  part of the two dimensional QObject node model. How to do this is
+  explained in \l{Including The QMetaObject Tree}.
+
+  \section2 The User Interface
+
+  The UI for this example was created using Qt Designer:
+
+  \image qobjectxmlmodel-example.png
+
+  \section1 Code Walk-Through
+
+  The strategy for this example is different from the strategy for the
+  \l{File System Example}{file system example}. In the file system
+  example, the node model class had to actually build a node model
+  because the non-XML data to be traversed was the computer's file
+  system, a structure stored on disk in a form that the query engine
+  couldn't use. The node model class had to build an analog of the
+  computer's file system in memory.
+
+  For this example, the data structure to be traversed already exists
+  in memory in a usable form. It is the QObject tree of the example
+  application itself. All we need is the pointer to the root of the
+  QObject tree.
+
+  \note When we add the QMetaObject tree to the node model, the node
+  model class will have to build an auxiliary data structure to move
+  the QMetaObject tree into the same plane as the QObject tree. This
+  is explained later in \l{Including The QMetaObject Tree}.
+
+  \section2 The Custom Node Model Class: QObjextXmlModel
+
+  The node model class for this example is QObjextXmlModel, which is
+  derived from QSimpleXmlNodeModel. QObjextXmlModel implements the
+  callback interface functions that don't have implementations in
+  QSimpleXmlNodeModel: 
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.h 0
+
+  The node model class declares three data members:
+
+  \target Three Data Members
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.h 2
+
+  The constructor sets \c m_baseURI to the QUrl constructed from the
+  \l{QCoreApplication::applicationFilePath()}{file path} of the
+  application executable.  This is the value returned by
+  \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::documentUri()}{documentUri()}. The
+  constructor sets \c{m_root} to point to the QObject tree for the
+  example application. This is the node model that the query engine
+  will use. And the constructor calls a local function to build the
+  auxiliary data structure (\c{m_allMetaObjects}) for including the
+  QMetaObject tree in the node model. How this auxiliary data
+  structure is incorporated into the QObject node model is discussed
+  in \l{Including The QMetaObject Tree}.
+
+  \section3 Accessing The Node Model
+
+  Since the query engine knows nothing about QObject trees, it can
+  only access them by calling functions in the node model callback
+  interface. The query engine passes a QXmlNodeModelIndex to uniquely
+  identify a node in the node model. The QXmlNodeModelIndex is
+  constructed from a pointer to the QObject that represents the node.
+  \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::createIndex()}{createIndex()} creates the
+  QXmlNodeModelIndex, as in the local \c{root()} function, for example:
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.cpp 0
+
+  A QObject represents an element node in the node model, but we also
+  need to represent attribute nodes. For example, the class name of a
+  QObject is an attribute of the QObject, so it should be an attribute
+  node in the node model. A QObject's class name is obtained from the
+  QObject. (Actually, it is in the QMetaObject, which is obtained from
+  the QObject). This means that a single QObject logically represents
+  multiple nodes in the node model: the element node and potentially
+  many attribute nodes.
+
+  To uniquely identify an attribute node, we need the pointer to the
+  QObject containing the attribute, and an additional value that
+  identifies the attribute in the QObject. For this \e{additional
+  data} value, we use \c{enum QObjectNodeType}:
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.h 3
+
+  Ignore the \c{MetaObjectXXX} values for now. They will be explained
+  in \l{Including The QMetaObject Tree}. Here we are interested in the
+  three node types for QObject nodes: \c{IsQObject}, which represents
+  the element node type for a QObject, and \c{QObjectProperty} and
+  \c{QObjectClassName}, which represent the attribute node types for
+  the attributes of a QObject.
+
+  The \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::createIndex()}{createIndex()}
+  function called in the \c{root()} snippet above is the overload that
+  accepts a \c{void*} pointer and a second parameter,
+  \c{additionalData}, with default value 0 (\c{IsQObject}). Wherever
+  you see a call to \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::createIndex()}
+  {createIndex()} that only passes the QObject pointer, it is creating
+  the node index for a QObject element node. To create the node index
+  for the class name attribute, for example, the \l{QObject
+  attributes} {attributes()} function uses
+  \c{createIndex(object,QObjectClassName)}.
+
+  \target QObject attributes
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.cpp 6
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.cpp 8
+
+  \l{QObject attributes} {attributes()} is one of the callback
+  functions you have to implement in your custom node model class. It
+  returns a QVector of \l{QXmlNodeModelIndex} {node indexes} for all
+  the attribute nodes for QObject \c{n}. It calls
+  \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::createIndex()} {createIndex()} in two places.
+  Both calls use the QObject pointer from the current node \c{n} (the
+  element node), and just add a different value for the \e{additional data}
+  parameter. This makes sense because, in XML, the attributes of an
+  element are part of that element. 
+
+  \section3 Traversing The Node Model
+
+  The query engine traverses the QObject tree by calling back to the
+  node model class's implementation of \l{QObject nextFromSimpleAxis}
+  {nextFromSimpleAxis()}. This function is the heart of the callback
+  interface, and it will probably be the most complex to implement in
+  your custom node model class. Below is a partial listing of the
+  implementation for this example. The full listing will be shown in
+  \l{Including The QMetaObject Tree}, where we discuss traversing the
+  QMetaObject tree.
+
+  \target QObject nextFromSimpleAxis
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.cpp 2
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.cpp 4
+
+  The main switch uses \c toNodeType(), which obtains the node
+  type from \l{QXmlNodeModelIndex::additionalData()}:
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.cpp 1
+
+  \c{case IsObject} case is the most interesting. It switches again on
+  the value of the \c{axis} parameter, which specifies the direction
+  the query engine wants to take from the current node. It is one of
+  the four enum values of \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::SimpleAxis}.  The
+  \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::Parent} {Parent} and
+  \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::FirstChild} {FirstChild} cases reduce to
+  calls to QObject::parent() and QObject::children()
+  respectively. Note that a default constructed QXmlNodeModelIndex is
+  returned in the \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::Parent} {Parent} case if
+  the current node is the root, and in the
+  \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::FirstChild} {FirstChild} case if the
+  current node has no children.
+
+  For the \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::NextSibling} {NextSibling} and
+  \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::PreviousSibling} {PreviousSibling} axes,
+  the helper function \c{qObjectSibling()} is called, with +1 to
+  traverse to the \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::NextSibling} {NextSibling}
+  and -1 to traverse to the
+  \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::PreviousSibling} {PreviousSibling}.
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.cpp 5
+
+  \c{qObjectSibling()} determines whether or not the node has any
+  siblings. It is called with \c{n}, the index of the current node.
+  If the current node is a child, then it has a parent with children
+  (the current node one of these).
+  So, we get the \l{QObject::parent()}{parent}, obtain the parent's
+  \l{QObject::children()} {child list}, find the current node in the
+  list, and construct the node index for the next or previous child
+  (sibling) and return it.
+
+  \note In \l{QObject nextFromSimpleAxis} {nextFromSimpleAxis()}, the
+  special case of asking for the
+  \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::PreviousSibling} {PreviousSibling} of the
+  root node is discussed in \l{Including The QMetaObject Tree}.
+
+  Traversing away from a \c{QObjectClassName} attribute node or a
+  \c{QObjectProperty} attribute node might seem a bit confusing at
+  first glance. The only move allowed from an attribute node is to the
+  \l{QAbstractXmlNodeModel::Parent} {Parent}, because attribute nodes
+  don't have children. But these two cases simply return the 
+  \l{QXmlNodeModelIndex} {node index} of the current node.
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.cpp 7
+
+  Since \c n is the QXmlNodeModelIndex of the current node, all this
+  does is create another QXmlNodeModelIndex for the current node and
+  return it. This was explained above in \l{Accessing The Node Model},
+  where we saw that each QObject in the node model actually represents
+  an element node and potentially many attribute nodes. Traversing to
+  the parent node of an attribute simply creates a node index for the
+  same QObject, but with an \e{additional data} value of 0
+  (\c{IsQObject}).
+
+  If we only wanted to traverse the QObject tree with XQuery, we could
+  just implement the rest of the virtual callback functions listed
+  earlier and we would be done. The implementations for the remaining
+  functions are straightforward. But if we also want to use XQuery to
+  traverse the QMetaObject tree, we must include the QMetaObject tree
+  in the custom node model.
+
+  \section3 Including The QMetaObject Tree
+
+  The \l{Meta-Object System} {metaobject system} not only enables Qt's
+  \l{Signals and Slots} {signals and slots}, it also provides type
+  information that is useful at run-time; e.g., getting and setting
+  properties without knowing the property names at compile time. Each
+  QObject has an associated QMetaObject tree which contains all this
+  useful type information. Given a QObject, its QMetaObject is
+  obtained with QObject::metaObject(). Then QMetaObject::superClass()
+  can be called repeatedly to get the QMetaObject for each class in the 
+  class hierarchy for the original QObject.
+
+  However, the QMetaObject hierarchy is a second tree in a plan that
+  exists logically behind the plane of the QObject tree. The QtXmlPatterns
+  query engine can only traverse a two dimensional node model that
+  represents an XML tree. If we want to include the QMetaObject in the
+  same node model that represents the QObject tree, we must find a way
+  to flatten the QMetaObject tree into the same plane as the QObject
+  tree.
+
+  The node model class declares \l{All MetaObjects}{m_allMetaObjects}
+  as a vector of pointers to QMetaObject:
+
+  \target All MetaObjects
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.h 1
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.h 4
+
+  This vector gets populated by the QObjectXmlModel constructor by
+  calling the private allMetaObjects() function:
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.cpp 9
+
+  The first half of the function is an example of the standard code
+  pattern for using QtXmlPatterns to run an XQuery. First it creates an
+  instance of QXmlQuery. Then it \l{QXmlQuery::bindVariable()}{binds}
+  the XQuery variable \c{$root} to the root node of the of the node
+  model; i.e., the root of the QObject tree. Then it
+  \l{QXmlQuery::setQuery()} {sets the query} to be an XQuery that
+  returns all the QObjects in the node model. Finally, the query is
+  evaluated into a \l{QXmlResultItems} {result item list}.
+
+  \note \l{QXmlQuery::bindVariable()} must be called before
+  \l{QXmlQuery::setQuery()}, because setting the query causes
+  QtXmlPatterns to \e compile the XQuery, which requires knowledge of
+  the variable bindings.
+
+  The second half of the function traverses the \l{QXmlResultItems}
+  {result item list}, getting the QMetaObject hierarchy for each
+  QObject and appending it to \l{All MetaObjects} {m_allMetaObjects},
+  if it isn't already there. But how do we include this vector of
+  pointers to QMetaObjects in the node model? The key insight is
+  shown in the full listing of \l{Full Listing of nextFromSimpleAxis}
+  {nextFromSimpleAxis()}, where we are interested now in the 
+  \c{MetaObjectXXX} cases:
+
+  \target Full Listing of nextFromSimpleAxis
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.cpp 2
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.cpp 3
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.cpp 4
+
+  But first, revisit the \c{PreviousSibling} case for the
+  \c{IsQObject} case:
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.cpp 10
+
+  When asking for the previous sibling of the root of the QObject
+  tree, it creates a node model index with a null QObject pointer and
+  an \c{additionalData} value of \c{MetaObjects}. This effectively
+  allows the query engine to jump from the QObject tree to the
+  QMetaObject tree.
+
+  The query engine can jump from the QMetaObject tree back to the
+  QObject tree in the \c{NextSibling} case of case \c{MetaObjects},
+  where the \c{root()} function is called:
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/qobjectxmlmodel/qobjectxmlmodel.cpp 11
+
+  Having jumped from the QObject tree to the QMetaObject tree, the
+  query engine will use the \c{MetaObject}, \c{MetaObjectClassName},
+  and \c{MetaObjectSuperClass} cases, which are similar to the cases
+  for \c{IsQObject}, \c{QObjectProperty}, and \c{QObjectClassName}.  
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/qtconcurrent-imagescaling.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/qtconcurrent-imagescaling.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74b4be0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/qtconcurrent-imagescaling.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example qtconcurrent/imagescaling
+    \title QtConcurrent Image Scaling Example
+
+    The QtConcurrent Map example shows how to use the asynchronous
+    QtConcurrent API to load and scale a collection of images.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/qtconcurrent-map.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/qtconcurrent-map.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9f5295d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/qtconcurrent-map.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example qtconcurrent/map
+    \title QtConcurrent Map Example
+
+    The QtConcurrent Map example shows how to use the synchronous (blocking)
+    QtConcurrent API to scale a collection of images.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/qtconcurrent-progressdialog.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/qtconcurrent-progressdialog.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..41909fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/qtconcurrent-progressdialog.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example qtconcurrent/progressdialog
+    \title QtConcurrent Progress Dialog Example
+
+    The QtConcurrent Progress Dialog example shows how to use the
+    QFutureWatcher class to monitor the progress of a long-running operation.
+
+    \image qtconcurrent-progressdialog.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/qtconcurrent-runfunction.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/qtconcurrent-runfunction.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c40552
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/qtconcurrent-runfunction.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example qtconcurrent/runfunction
+    \title QtConcurrent Run Function Example
+
+    The QtConcurrent Run Function example shows how to apply concurrency to
+    a standard function, using QFuture instances to retrieve return values
+    at a later time.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/qtconcurrent-wordcount.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/qtconcurrent-wordcount.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d7d3227
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/qtconcurrent-wordcount.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example qtconcurrent/wordcount
+    \title QtConcurrent Word Count Example
+
+    The QtConcurrent Word Count example demonstrates the use of the map-reduce
+    algorithm when applied to the problem of counting words in a collection
+    of files.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/qtscriptcalculator.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/qtscriptcalculator.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d713f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/qtscriptcalculator.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example script/calculator
+    \title QtScript Calculator Example
+    \ingroup scripting
+
+    In this simple QtScript example, we show how to implement the
+    functionality of a calculator widget.
+
+    \image qtscript-calculator-example.png
+
+    The program logic in this example is a fairly straight port of the logic in the C++ \l{Calculator Example}.
+    The graphical user interface is defined in a UI file.
+
+    The C++ part of the example consists of four steps:
+    \list
+    \o Evaluate the script code that defines the \c{Calculator} class.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/calculator/main.cpp 0a
+    \snippet examples/script/calculator/main.cpp 0b
+
+    \o Create a widget from the UI file using QUiLoader.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/calculator/main.cpp 1
+
+    \o Call the Calculator constructor function to create a new \c{Calculator} script object, passing the widget as argument.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/calculator/main.cpp 2
+
+    \o Show the widget and start the application event loop.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/calculator/main.cpp 3
+
+    \endlist
+
+    On the script side, the \c{Calculator} constructor function
+    initializes the instance variables of the new \c{Calculator}
+    object, and connects the clicked() signal of the form's buttons
+    to corresponding functions defined in the \c{Calculator} prototype
+    object; the effect is that when a button is clicked, the proper
+    script function will be invoked to carry out the operation.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/calculator/calculator.js 0
+
+    A \c{Calculator} object is just a plain script object; it is not
+    a widget. Instead, it stores a reference to the calculator form
+    (the widget) in an instance variable, \c{ui}. The calculator
+    script functions can access components of the form by referring
+    to the proper children of the \c{ui} member.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/calculator/calculator.js 1
+
+    The digitClicked() function uses the special local variable
+    __qt_sender__ to access the object that triggered the signal;
+    this gives us a simple way to retrieve the value of the digit
+    that was clicked.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/calculator/calculator.js 2
+
+    The changeSign() function shows how we retrieve the text property
+    of the calculator's display, change it appropriately, and write
+    back the new value.
+
+
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/qtscriptcustomclass.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/qtscriptcustomclass.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f8d85a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/qtscriptcustomclass.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,198 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example script/customclass
+    \title Custom Script Class Example
+
+    The Custom Script Class example shows how to use QScriptClass and QScriptClassPropertyIterator
+    to implement a custom script class.
+
+    The script class we are going to implement is called \c{ByteArray}. It provides a wrapper around
+    the QByteArray class in Qt, with a simplified API. Why do we need such a class? Well, neither the
+    ECMAScript \c{Array} class or \c{String} class is appropriate to use when working with arrays of
+    bytes. Our \c{ByteArray} class will have the right semantics; objects will use only the amount of
+    memory that is really needed (a byte is stored as a byte, not as a floating-point number or a
+    Unicode character) and can be passed directly to C++ slots taking QByteArray arguments (no costly
+    conversion necessary).
+
+    \section1 ByteArray Class In Use
+
+    When the \c{ByteArray} class has been made available to the
+    scripting environment, \c{ByteArray} objects can be constructed like
+    so:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_qtscriptcustomclass.qdoc 0
+
+    \c{ByteArray} objects behave similar to normal \c{Array} objects. Every \c{ByteArray} object has
+    a \c{length} property, that holds the length of the array. If a new value is assigned to the \c{length}
+    property, the array is resized. If the array is enlarged, the new bytes are initialized to 0.
+    (This is a difference from normal \c{Array} objects; \c{ByteArray} objects are always dense arrays.)
+    Use normal array operations to read or write bytes in the array. The following code sets all the
+    bytes of an array to a certain value:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_qtscriptcustomclass.qdoc 1
+
+    When assigning a value to an array element, the value is truncated to eight bits:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_qtscriptcustomclass.qdoc 2
+
+    Like normal \c{Array} objects, if the array index is greater than the current length
+    of the array, the array is resized accordingly:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_qtscriptcustomclass.qdoc 3
+
+    Property names that aren't valid array indexes are treated
+    like normal object properties (again, the same is the case for normal \c{Array} objects);
+    in other words, it's perfectly fine to do something like this:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_qtscriptcustomclass.qdoc 4
+
+    The above assignment won't affect the contents of the array, but will rather assign a value
+    to the object property named "foo".
+
+    \c{ByteArray} objects have a set of methods: chop(), equals(), left(), mid(), toBase64() and so on.
+    These map directly onto the corresponding methods in QByteArray.
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_qtscriptcustomclass.qdoc 5
+
+    \section1 ByteArray Class Implementation
+
+    To implement the \c{ByteArray} script class in C++, we create a subclass of QScriptClass,
+    called ByteArrayClass, and reimplement the virtual functions from QScriptClass. We also provide
+    a Qt Script constructor function suitable for being added to a QScriptEngine's environment.
+
+    The ByteArrayClass constructor prepares the script class:
+
+    \snippet examples/script/customclass/bytearrayclass.cpp 0
+
+    First, the constructor registers a pair of conversion functions, so that C++ QByteArray objects
+    and Qt Script \c{ByteArray} objects can move seamlessly between the C++ side and the script side.
+    For example, if a \c{ByteArray} object is passed to a C++ slot that takes a QByteArray
+    argument, the actual QByteArray that the \c{ByteArray} object wraps will be passed correctly.
+
+    Second, we store a handle to the string "length", so that we can quickly compare a given property name
+    to "length" later on.
+
+    Third, we initialize the standard \c{ByteArray} prototype, to be returned by our prototype()
+    reimplementation later on. (The implementation of the prototype is discussed later.)
+
+    Fourth, we initialize a constructor function for \c{ByteArray}, to be returned by the
+    constructor() function. We set the internal data of the constructor to be a pointer to
+    this ByteArrayClass object, so that the constructor, when it is invoked, can extract the
+    pointer and use it to create a new \c{ByteArray} object.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/customclass/bytearrayclass.cpp 1
+
+    The newInstance() function isn't part of the QScriptClass API; its purpose is to offer
+    a convenient way to construct a \c{ByteArray} object from an existing QByteArray. We store the
+    QByteArray as the internal data of the new object, and return the new object.
+    QScriptEngine::newObject() will call the prototype() function of our class, ensuring that
+    the prototype of the new object will be the standard \c{ByteArray} prototype.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/customclass/bytearrayclass.cpp 2
+
+    construct() is the native function that will act as a constructor for \c{ByteArray}
+    in scripts. We extract the pointer to the class, then call a newInstance() overload
+    that takes an initial size as argument, and return the new script object.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/customclass/bytearrayclass.cpp 3
+
+    queryProperty() is the function that Qt Script will call whenever someone tries to access
+    a property of a \c{ByteArray} object. We first get a pointer to the underlying QByteArray.
+    We check if the property being accessed is the special \c{length} property; if so, we
+    return, indicating that we will handle every kind of access to this property (e.g. both
+    read and write). Otherwise, we attempt to convert the property name to an array index. If
+    this fails, we return, indicating that we don't want to handle this property. Otherwise, we
+    have a valid array index, and store it in the \c{id} argument, so that we don't have to
+    recompute it in e.g. property() or setProperty(). If the index is greater than or equal to
+    the QByteArray's size, we indicate that we don't want to handle read access (but we still want
+    to handle writes, if requested).
+
+    \snippet examples/script/customclass/bytearrayclass.cpp 4
+
+    In the property() reimplementation, we do similar checks as in queryProperty() to find out
+    which property is being requested, and then return the value of that property.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/customclass/bytearrayclass.cpp 5
+
+    The setProperty() reimplementation has a structure that is similar to property(). If the \c{length} property
+    is being set, we resize the underlying QByteArray to the given length. Otherwise, we grab the
+    array index that was calculated in the queryProperty() function, enlarge the array if necessary,
+    and write the given value to the array.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/customclass/bytearrayclass.cpp 6
+
+    The propertyFlags() reimplementation specifies that the \c{length} property can't be deleted,
+    and that it is not enumerable. Array elements can't be deleted.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/customclass/bytearrayclass.cpp 7
+
+    We want the array elements to show up when a \c{ByteArray} object is used in for-in
+    statements and together with QScriptValueIterator. Therefore, we reimplement the
+    newIterator() function and have it return a new iterator for a given \c{ByteArray}.
+
+    \section1 ByteArray Iterator Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/script/customclass/bytearrayclass.cpp 8
+
+    The \c{ByteArrayClassPropertyIterator} class is simple. It maintains an index into the
+    underlying QByteArray, and checks and updates the index in hasNext(), next() and so on.
+
+    \section1 ByteArray Prototype Implementation
+
+    The prototype class, ByteArrayPrototype, implements the \c{ByteArray} functions as slots.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/customclass/bytearrayprototype.h 0
+
+    There is a small helper function, thisByteArray(), that returns a pointer to the QByteArray
+    being operated upon:
+
+    \snippet examples/script/customclass/bytearrayprototype.cpp 0
+
+    The slots simply forward the calls to the QByteArray. Examples:
+
+    \snippet examples/script/customclass/bytearrayprototype.cpp 1
+
+    The remove() function is noteworthy; if we look at QByteArray::remove(), we see that it
+    should return a reference to the QByteArray itself (i.e. not a copy). To get the same
+    behavior in scripts, we return the script object (thisObject()).
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/qtscripttetrix.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/qtscripttetrix.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c96db6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/qtscripttetrix.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example script/qstetrix
+    \title Qt Script Tetrix Example
+
+    The QSTetrix example is a Qt Script version of the classic Tetrix game.
+
+    \image tetrix-example.png
+
+    \section1 Overview
+
+    The program logic in this example is a fairly straight port of the
+    logic in the C++ \l{Tetrix Example}. You may find it useful to compare
+    the implementations of the \c TetrixBoard, \c TetrixPiece and
+    \c TetrixWindow classes to see how Qt Script is used to implement
+    methods, call Qt functions, and emit signals.
+
+    \section1 Setting up the GUI
+
+    The graphical user interface is defined in a \c{.ui} file, creating
+    using Qt Designer, and is set up in the example's C++ \c{main.cpp} file.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/qstetrix/main.cpp 0
+
+    We define a custom UI loader that handles our \c TetrixBoard widget; this
+    is the main component of the UI (where the pieces are drawn).
+
+    \snippet examples/script/qstetrix/main.cpp 1
+
+    We initialize the script engine to have the Qt namespace, so that
+    e.g., \l{Qt::Key_Left}{Qt.Key_Left} will be available to script code.
+    We also make the application object available (for the
+    \l{QApplication::}{quit()} slot).
+
+    \snippet examples/script/qstetrix/main.cpp 2
+
+    Several scripts are evaluated as part of the engine setup process.
+    The \c{tetrixpiece.js} file contains the definition of the \c TetrixPiece
+    class, which is used to populate the play field. The \c{tetrixboard.js}
+    file contains the definition of the \c TetrixBoard class, which contains
+    the main game logic. Finally, \c{tetrixwindow.js} contains the definition
+    of the \c TetrixWindow class, which wires up the top-level widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/qstetrix/main.cpp 3
+
+    A form is created from the UI file. A new \c TetrixWindow script object
+    is then constructed, passing the form as its argument.
+
+    \snippet examples/script/qstetrix/main.cpp 4
+
+    The form is shown, and the event loop is entered.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/querymodel.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/querymodel.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..296f609
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/querymodel.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example sql/querymodel
+    \title Query Model Example
+
+    The Query Model example shows how to make customized versions of
+    data obtained from a SQL query, using a model that encapsulates
+    the query and table views to display the results. 
+
+    \image querymodel-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/queuedcustomtype.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/queuedcustomtype.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bbd1427
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/queuedcustomtype.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example threads/queuedcustomtype
+    \title Queued Custom Type Example
+
+    The Queued Custom Type example shows how to send custom types between
+    threads with queued signals and slots.
+
+    \image queuedcustomtype-example.png
+
+    Contents:
+
+    \tableofcontents
+
+    \section1 Overview
+
+    In the \l{Custom Type Sending Example}, we showed how to use a custom type
+    with signal-slot communication within the same thread.
+
+    In this example, we create a new value class, \c Block, and register it
+    with the meta-object system to enable us to send instances of it between
+    threads using queued signals and slots.
+
+    \section1 The Block Class
+
+    The \c Block class is similar to the \c Message class described in the
+    \l{Custom Type Example}. It provides the default constructor, copy
+    constructor and destructor in the public section of the class that the
+    meta-object system requires. It describes a colored rectangle.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/queuedcustomtype/block.h custom type definition and meta-type declaration
+
+    We will still need to register it with the meta-object system at
+    run-time by calling the qRegisterMetaType() template function before
+    we make any signal-slot connections that use this type.
+    Even though we do not intend to use the type with QVariant in this example,
+    it is good practice to also declare the new type with Q_DECLARE_METATYPE().
+
+    The implementation of the \c Block class is trivial, so we avoid quoting
+    it here.
+
+    \section1 The Window Class
+
+    We define a simple \c Window class with a public slot that accepts a
+    \c Block object. The rest of the class is concerned with managing the
+    user interface and handling images.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/queuedcustomtype/window.h Window class definition
+
+    The \c Window class also contains a worker thread, provided by a
+    \c RenderThread object. This will emit signals to send \c Block objects
+    to the window's \c addBlock(Block) slot.
+
+    The parts of the \c Window class that are most relevant are the constructor
+    and the \c addBlock(Block) slot.
+
+    The constructor creates a thread for rendering images, sets up a user
+    interface containing a label and two push buttons that are connected to
+    slots in the same class.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/queuedcustomtype/window.cpp Window constructor start
+    \snippet examples/threads/queuedcustomtype/window.cpp set up widgets and connections
+    \snippet examples/threads/queuedcustomtype/window.cpp connecting signal with custom type
+
+    In the last of these connections, we connect a signal in the
+    \c RenderThread object to the \c addBlock(Block) slot in the window.
+
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/threads/queuedcustomtype/window.cpp Window constructor finish
+
+    The rest of the constructor simply sets up the layout of the window.
+
+    The \c addBlock(Block) slot receives blocks from the rendering thread via
+    the signal-slot connection set up in the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/queuedcustomtype/window.cpp Adding blocks to the display
+
+    We simply paint these onto the label as they arrive.
+
+    \section1 The RenderThread Class
+
+    The \c RenderThread class processes an image, creating \c Block objects
+    and using the \c sendBlock(Block) signal to send them to other components
+    in the example.
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/queuedcustomtype/renderthread.h RenderThread class definition
+
+    The constructor and destructor are not quoted here. These take care of
+    setting up the thread's internal state and cleaning up when it is destroyed.
+
+    Processing is started with the \c processImage() function, which calls the
+    \c RenderThread class's reimplementation of the QThread::run() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/queuedcustomtype/renderthread.cpp processing the image (start)
+
+    Ignoring the details of the way the image is processed, we see that the
+    signal containing a block is emitted in the usual way:
+
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/threads/queuedcustomtype/renderthread.cpp processing the image (finish)
+
+    Each signal that is emitted will be queued and delivered later to the
+    window's \c addBlock(Block) slot.
+
+    \section1 Registering the Type
+
+    In the example's \c{main()} function, we perform the registration of the
+    \c Block class as a custom type with the meta-object system by calling the
+    qRegisterMetaType() template function:
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/queuedcustomtype/main.cpp main function
+
+    This call is placed here to ensure that the type is registered before any
+    signal-slot connections are made that use it.
+
+    The rest of the \c{main()} function is concerned with setting a seed for
+    the pseudo-random number generator, creating and showing the window, and
+    setting a default image. See the source code for the implementation of the
+    \c createImage() function.
+
+    \section1 Further Reading
+
+    This example showed how a custom type can be registered with the
+    meta-object system so that it can be used with signal-slot connections
+    between threads. For ordinary communication involving direct signals and
+    slots, it is enough to simply declare the type in the way described in the
+    \l{Custom Type Sending Example}.
+
+    In practice, both the Q_DECLARE_METATYPE() macro and the qRegisterMetaType()
+    template function can be used to register custom types, but
+    qRegisterMetaType() is only required if you need to perform signal-slot
+    communication or need to create and destroy objects of the custom type
+    at run-time.
+
+    More information on using custom types with Qt can be found in the
+    \l{Creating Custom Qt Types} document.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/qxmlstreambookmarks.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/qxmlstreambookmarks.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7059043
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/qxmlstreambookmarks.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,200 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example xml/streambookmarks
+    \title QXmlStream Bookmarks Example
+
+    The QXmlStream Bookmarks example provides a reader for XML Bookmark
+    Exchange Language (XBEL) files using Qt's QXmlStreamReader class
+    for reading, and QXmlStreamWriter class for writing the files.
+
+    \image xmlstreamexample-screenshot.png
+
+    \section1 XbelWriter Class Definition
+
+    The \c XbelWriter class is a subclass of QXmlStreamReader, which provides
+    an XML parser with a streaming API. \c XbelWriter also contains a private
+    instance of QTreeWidget in order to display the bookmarks according to
+    hierarchies.
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/xbelwriter.h 0
+
+    \section1 XbelWriter Class Implementation
+
+    The \c XbelWriter constructor accepts a \a treeWidget to initialize within
+    its definition. We enable \l{QXmlStreamWriter}'s auto-formatting property
+    to ensure line-breaks and indentations are added automatically to empty
+    sections between elements, increasing readability as the data is split into
+    several lines.
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/xbelwriter.cpp 0
+
+    The \c writeFile() function accepts a QIODevice object and sets it using
+    \c setDevice(). This function then writes the document type
+    definition(DTD), the start element, the version, and \c{treeWidget}'s
+    top-level items.
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/xbelwriter.cpp 1
+
+    The \c writeItem() function accepts a QTreeWidget object and writes it
+    to the stream, depending on its \c tagName, which can either be a "folder",
+    "bookmark", or "separator".
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/xbelwriter.cpp 2
+
+    \section1 XbelReader Class Definition
+
+    The \c XbelReader class is a subclass of QXmlStreamReader, the pendent
+    class for QXmlStreamWriter. \c XbelReader contains a private instance
+    of QTreeWidget to group bookmarks according to their hierarchies.
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/xbelreader.h 0
+
+    \section1 XbelReader Class Implementation
+
+    The \c XbelReader constructor accepts a QTreeWidget to initialize the
+    \c treeWidget within its definition. A QStyle object is used to set
+    \c{treeWidget}'s style property. The \c folderIcon is set to QIcon::Normal
+    mode where the pixmap is only displayed when the user is not interacting
+    with the icon. The QStyle::SP_DirClosedIcon, QStyle::SP_DirOpenIcon, and
+    QStyle::SP_FileIcon correspond to standard pixmaps that follow the style
+    of your GUI.
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/xbelreader.cpp 0
+
+    The \c read() function accepts a QIODevice and sets it using
+    \l{QXmlStreamReader::setDevice()}{setDevice()}. The actual process
+    of reading only takes place in event the file is a valid XBEL 1.0
+    file. Otherwise, the \l{QXmlStreamReader::raiseError()}
+    {raiseError()} function is used to display an error message.
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/xbelreader.cpp 1
+
+    The \c readUnknownElement() function reads an unknown element. The
+    Q_ASSERT() macro is used to provide a pre-condition for the function.
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/xbelreader.cpp 2
+
+    The \c readXBEL() function reads the name of a startElement and calls
+    the appropriate function to read it, depending on whether if its a
+    "folder", "bookmark" or "separator". Otherwise, it calls
+    \c readUnknownElement().
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/xbelreader.cpp 3
+
+    The \c readTitle() function reads the bookmark's title.
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/xbelreader.cpp 4
+
+    The \c readSeparator() function creates a separator and sets its flags.
+    The text is set to 30 "0xB7", the HEX equivalent for period, and then
+    read using \c readElementText().
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/xbelreader.cpp 5
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    The \c MainWindow class is a subclass of QMainWindow, with a
+    \c File menu and a \c Help menu.
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    The \c MainWindow constructor instantiates the QTreeWidget object, \c
+    treeWidget and sets its header with a QStringList object, \c labels.
+    The constructor also invokes \c createActions() and \c createMenus()
+    to set up the menus and their corresponding actions. The \c statusBar()
+    is used to display the message "Ready" and the window's size is fixed
+    to 480x320 pixels.
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    The \c open() function enables the user to open an XBEL file using
+    QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(). A warning message is displayed along
+    with the \c fileName and \c errorString if the file cannot be read or
+    if there is a parse error.
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    The \c saveAs() function displays a QFileDialog, prompting the user for
+    a \c fileName using QFileDialog::getSaveFileName(). Similar to the
+    \c open() function, this function also displays a warning message if
+    the file cannot be written to.
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    The \c about() function displays a QMessageBox with a brief description
+    of the example.
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+    In order to implement the \c open(), \c saveAs(), \c exit(), \c about()
+    and \c aboutQt() functions, we connect them to QAction objects and
+    add them to the \c fileMenu and \c helpMenu. The connections are as shown
+    below:
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+    The \c createMenus() function creates the \c fileMenu and \c helpMenu
+    and adds the QAction objects to them in order to create the menu shown
+    in the screenshot below:
+
+    \table
+    \row
+         \o \inlineimage xmlstreamexample-filemenu.png
+         \o \inlineimage xmlstreamexample-helpmenu.png
+    \endtable
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/mainwindow.cpp 5
+
+    \section1 \c{main()} Function
+
+    The \c main() function instantiates \c MainWindow and invokes the \c show()
+    function.
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/streambookmarks/main.cpp 0
+
+    See the \l{http://pyxml.sourceforge.net/topics/xbel/}
+    {XML Bookmark Exchange Language Resource Page} for more information
+    about XBEL files.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/recentfiles.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/recentfiles.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..185cbf1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/recentfiles.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*! 
+    \example mainwindows/recentfiles
+    \title Recent Files Example
+
+    The Recent Files example shows how a standard File menu can be extended to show
+    the most recent files loaded by a main window application.
+
+    \image recentfiles-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/recipes.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/recipes.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba06b7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/recipes.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+  \example xmlpatterns/recipes
+  \title Recipes Example
+
+  The recipes example shows how to use QtXmlPatterns to query XML data
+  loaded from a file. 
+
+  \tableofcontents
+
+  \section1 Introduction
+
+  In this case, the XML data represents a cookbook, \c{cookbook.xml},
+  which contains \c{<cookbook>} as its document element, which in turn
+  contains a sequence of \c{<recipe>} elements. This XML data is
+  searched using queries stored in XQuery files (\c{*.xq}). 
+
+  \section2 The User Interface
+
+  The UI for this example was created using \l{Qt Designer Manual} {Qt
+  Designer}:
+
+  \image recipes-example.png
+
+  The UI consists of three \l{QGroupBox} {group boxes} arranged
+  vertically. The top one contains a \l{QTextEdit} {text viewer} that
+  displays the XML text from the cookbook file. The middle group box
+  contains a \l{QComboBox} {combo box} for choosing the \l{A Short
+  Path to XQuery} {XQuery} to run and a \l{QTextEdit} {text viewer}
+  for displaying the text of the selected XQuery. The \c{.xq} files in
+  the file list above are shown in the combo box menu. Choosing an
+  XQuery loads, parses, and runs the selected XQuery. The query result
+  is shown in the bottom group box's \l{QTextEdit} {text viewer}.
+
+  \section2 Running your own XQueries
+
+  You can write your own XQuery files and run them in the example
+  program. The file \c{xmlpatterns/recipes/recipes.qrc} is the \l{The
+  Qt Resource System} {resource file} for this example. It is used in
+  \c{main.cpp} (\c{Q_INIT_RESOURCE(recipes);}). It lists the XQuery
+  files (\c{.xq}) that can be selected in the combobox.
+
+  \quotefromfile examples/xmlpatterns/recipes/recipes.qrc
+  \printuntil
+
+  To add your own queries to the example's combobox, store your
+  \c{.xq} files in the \c{examples/xmlpatterns/recipes/files}
+  directory and add them to \c{recipes.qrc} as shown above.
+
+  \section1 Code Walk-Through
+
+  The example's main() function creates the standard instance of
+  QApplication. Then it creates an instance of the UI class, shows it,
+  and starts the Qt event loop:
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/recipes/main.cpp 0
+
+  \section2 The UI Class: QueryMainWindow
+
+  The example's UI is a conventional Qt GUI application inheriting
+  QMainWindow and the class generated by \l{Qt Designer Manual} {Qt
+  Designer}:
+
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/recipes/querymainwindow.h 0
+
+  The constructor finds the window's \l{QComboBox} {combo box} child
+  widget and connects its \l{QComboBox::currentIndexChanged()}
+  {currentIndexChanged()} signal to the window's \c{displayQuery()}
+  slot. It then calls \c{loadInputFile()} to load \c{cookbook.xml} and
+  display its contents in the top group box's \l{QTextEdit} {text
+  viewer} . Finally, it finds the XQuery files (\c{.xq}) and adds each
+  one to the \l{QComboBox} {combo box} menu.
+  
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/recipes/querymainwindow.cpp 0
+
+  The work is done in the \l{displayQuery() slot} {displayQuery()}
+  slot and the \l{evaluate() function} {evaluate()} function it
+  calls. \l{displayQuery() slot} {displayQuery()} loads and displays
+  the selected query file and passes the XQuery text to \l{evaluate()
+  function} {evaluate()}.
+
+  \target displayQuery() slot
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/recipes/querymainwindow.cpp 1
+
+  \l{evaluate() function} {evaluate()} demonstrates the standard
+  QtXmlPatterns usage pattern. First, an instance of QXmlQuery is
+  created (\c{query}). The \c{query's} \l{QXmlQuery::bindVariable()}
+  {bindVariable()} function is then called to bind the \c cookbook.xml
+  file to the XQuery variable \c inputDocument. \e{After} the variable
+  is bound, \l{QXmlQuery::setQuery()} {setQuery()} is called to pass
+  the XQuery text to the \c query.
+
+  \note \l{QXmlQuery::setQuery()} {setQuery()} must be called
+  \e{after} \l{QXmlQuery::bindVariable()} {bindVariable()}.
+
+  Passing the XQuery to \l{QXmlQuery::setQuery()} {setQuery()} causes
+  QtXmlPatterns to parse the XQuery. \l{QXmlQuery::isValid()} is
+  called to ensure that the XQuery was correctly parsed.
+
+  \target evaluate() function
+  \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/recipes/querymainwindow.cpp 2
+
+  If the XQuery is valid, an instance of QXmlFormatter is created to
+  format the query result as XML into a QBuffer. To evaluate the
+  XQuery, an overload of \l{QXmlQuery::evaluateTo()} {evaluateTo()} is
+  called that takes a QAbstractXmlReceiver for its output
+  (QXmlFormatter inherits QAbstractXmlReceiver). Finally, the
+  formatted XML result is displayed in the UI's bottom text view.
+
+  \note Each XQuery \c{.xq} file must declare the \c{$inputDocument}
+  variable to represent the \c cookbook.xml document:
+
+  \code
+  (: All ingredients for Mushroom Soup. :)
+  declare variable $inputDocument external;
+
+  doc($inputDocument)/cookbook/recipe[@xml:id = "MushroomSoup"]/ingredient/
+  <p>{@name, @quantity}</p>
+  \endcode
+
+  \note If you add add your own query.xq files, you must declare the
+  \c{$inputDocument} and use it as shown above.
+
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/regexp.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/regexp.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..de6cbfc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/regexp.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*! 
+    \example tools/regexp
+    \title Regular Expressions Example
+
+    The Regular Expressions (RegExp) example shows how regular expressions in Qt are
+    applied to text by providing an environment in which new regular expressions can be
+    created and tested on custom text strings.
+
+    \image regexp-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/relationaltablemodel.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/relationaltablemodel.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5e944c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/relationaltablemodel.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*! 
+    \example sql/relationaltablemodel
+    \title Relational Table Model Example
+
+    The Relational Table Model example shows how to use table views with a relational
+    model to visualize the relations between items in a database.
+
+    \image relationaltablemodel-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/remotecontrol.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/remotecontrol.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..698ad1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/remotecontrol.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example help/remotecontrol
+    \title Remote Control Example
+
+    This example shows how to use and control Qt Assistant
+    as a help viewer.
+*/
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/rsslisting.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/rsslisting.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73ff68c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/rsslisting.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example xml/rsslisting
+    \title RSS-Listing Example
+
+    This example shows how to create a widget that displays news items
+    from RDF news sources.
+
+    \image rsslistingexample.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/samplebuffers.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/samplebuffers.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1c8202c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/samplebuffers.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example opengl/samplebuffers
+    \title Sample Buffers Example
+
+    The Sample Buffers example demonstrates how to use and enable
+    sample buffers in a QGLWidget.
+
+    \image samplebuffers-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/saxbookmarks.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/saxbookmarks.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3db87d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/saxbookmarks.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example xml/saxbookmarks
+    \title SAX Bookmarks Example
+
+    The SAX Bookmarks example provides a reader for XML Bookmark Exchange Language (XBEL)
+    files that uses Qt's SAX-based API to read and parse the files. The DOM Bookmarks
+    example provides an alternative way to read this type of file.
+
+    \image saxbookmarks-example.png
+
+    See the \l{XML Bookmark Exchange Language Resource Page} for more
+    information about XBEL files.  
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/screenshot.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/screenshot.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b989a32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/screenshot.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,262 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example desktop/screenshot
+    \title Screenshot Example
+
+    The Screenshot example shows how to take a screenshot of the
+    desktop using QApplication and QDesktopWidget. It also shows how
+    to use QTimer to provide a single-shot timer, and how to
+    reimplement the QWidget::resizeEvent() event handler to make sure
+    that an application resizes smoothly and without data loss.
+
+    \image screenshot-example.png
+
+    With the application the users can take a screenshot of their
+    desktop. They are provided with a couple of options:
+
+    \list
+    \o Delaying the screenshot, giving them time to rearrange
+       their desktop.
+    \o Hiding the application's window while the screenshot is taken.
+    \endlist
+
+    In addition the application allows the users to save their
+    screenshot if they want to.
+
+    \section1 Screenshot Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/screenshot/screenshot.h 0
+
+    The \c Screenshot class inherits QWidget and is the application's
+    main widget. It displays the application options and a preview of
+    the screenshot.
+
+    We reimplement the QWidget::resizeEvent() function to make sure
+    that the preview of the screenshot scales properly when the user
+    resizes the application widget. We also need several private slots
+    to facilitate the options:
+
+    \list
+    \o The \c newScreenshot() slot prepares a new screenshot.
+    \o The \c saveScreenshot() slot saves the last screenshot.
+    \o The \c shootScreen() slot takes the screenshot.
+    \o The \c updateCheckBox() slot enables or disables the
+       \gui {Hide This Window} option.
+    \endlist
+
+    We also declare some private functions: We use the \c
+    createOptionsGroupBox(), \c createButtonsLayout() and \c
+    createButton() functions when we construct the widget. And we call
+    the private \c updateScreenshotLabel() function whenever a new
+    screenshot is taken or when a resize event changes the size of the
+    screenshot preview label.
+
+    In addition we need to store the screenshot's original pixmap. The
+    reason is that when we display the preview of the screenshot, we
+    need to scale its pixmap, storing the original we make sure that
+    no data are lost in that process.
+
+    \section1 Screenshot Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/screenshot/screenshot.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor we first create the QLabel displaying the
+    screenshot preview.
+
+    We set the QLabel's size policy to be QSizePolicy::Expanding both
+    horizontally and vertically. This means that the QLabel's size
+    hint is a sensible size, but the widget can be shrunk and still be
+    useful. Also, the widget can make use of extra space, so it should
+    get as much space as possible. Then we make sure the QLabel is
+    aligned in the center of the \c Screenshot widget, and set its
+    minimum size.
+
+    We create the applications's buttons and the group box containing
+    the application's options, and put it all into a main
+    layout. Finally we take the initial screenshot, and set the inital
+    delay and the window title, before we resize the widget to a
+    suitable size.
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/screenshot/screenshot.cpp 1
+
+    The \c resizeEvent() function is reimplemented to receive the
+    resize events dispatched to the widget. The purpose is to scale
+    the preview screenshot pixmap without deformation of its content,
+    and also make sure that the application can be resized smoothly.
+
+    To achieve the first goal, we scale the screenshot pixmap using
+    Qt::KeepAspectRatio. We scale the pixmap to a rectangle as large
+    as possible inside the current size of the screenshot preview
+    label, preserving the aspect ratio. This means that if the user
+    resizes the application window in only one direction, the preview
+    screenshot keeps the same size.
+
+    To reach our second goal, we make sure that the preview screenshot
+    only is repainted (using the private \c updateScreenshotLabel()
+    function) when it actually changes its size.
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/screenshot/screenshot.cpp 2
+
+    The private \c newScreenshot() slot is called when the user
+    requests a new screenshot; but the slot only prepares a new
+    screenshot.
+
+    First we see if the \gui {Hide This Window} option is checked, if
+    it is we hide the \c Screenshot widget. Then we disable the \gui
+    {New Screenshot} button, to make sure the user only can request
+    one screenshot at a time.
+
+    We create a timer using the QTimer class which provides repetitive
+    and single-shot timers. We set the timer to time out only once,
+    using the static QTimer::singleShot() function. This function
+    calls the private \c shootScreen() slot after the time interval
+    specified by the \gui {Screenshot Delay} option. It is \c
+    shootScreen() that actually performs the screenshot.
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/screenshot/screenshot.cpp 3
+
+    The \c saveScreenshot() slot is called when the user push the \gui
+    Save button, and it presents a file dialog using the QFileDialog
+    class.
+
+    QFileDialog enables a user to traverse the file system in order to
+    select one or many files or a directory. The easiest way to create
+    a QFileDialog is to use the convenience static
+    functions.
+
+    We define the default file format to be png, and we make the file
+    dialog's initial path the path the application is run from. We
+    create the file dialog using the static
+    QFileDialog::getSaveFileName() function which returns a file name
+    selected by the user. The file does not have to exist. If the file
+    name is valid, we use the QPixmap::save() function to save the
+    screenshot's original pixmap in that file.
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/screenshot/screenshot.cpp 4
+
+    The \c shootScreen() slot is called to take the screenshot. If the
+    user has chosen to delay the screenshot, we make the application
+    beep when the screenshot is taken using the static
+    QApplication::beep() function.
+
+    The QApplication class manages the GUI application's control flow
+    and main settings. It contains the main event loop, where all
+    events from the window system and other sources are processed and
+    dispatched.
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/screenshot/screenshot.cpp 5
+
+    We take the screenshot using the static QPixmap::grabWindow()
+    function. The function grabs the contents of the window passed as
+    an argument, makes a pixmap out of it and returns that pixmap.
+
+    We identify the argument window using the QWidget::winID()
+    function which returns the window system identifier. Here it
+    returns the identifier of the current QDesktopWidget retrieved by
+    the QApplication::desktop() function. The QDesktopWidget class
+    provides access to screen information, and inherits
+    QWidget::winID().
+
+    We update the screenshot preview label using the private \c
+    updateScreenshotLabel() function. Then we enable the \gui {New
+    Screenshot} button, and finally we make the \c Screenshot widget
+    visible if it was hidden during the screenshot.
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/screenshot/screenshot.cpp 6
+
+    The \gui {Hide This Window} option is enabled or disabled
+    depending on the delay of the screenshot. If there is no delay,
+    the application window cannot be hidden and the option's checkbox
+    is disabled.
+
+    The \c updateCheckBox() slot is called whenever the user changes
+    the delay using the \gui {Screenshot Delay} option.
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/screenshot/screenshot.cpp 7
+
+    The private \c createOptionsGroupBox() function is called from the
+    constructor.
+
+    First we create a group box that will contain all of the options'
+    widgets. Then we create a QSpinBox and a QLabel for the \gui
+    {Screenshot Delay} option, and connect the spinbox to the \c
+    updateCheckBox() slot. Finally, we create a QCheckBox for the \gui
+    {Hide This Window} option, add all the options' widgets to a
+    QGridLayout and install the layout on the group box.
+
+    Note that we don't have to specify any parents for the widgets
+    when we create them. The reason is that when we add a widget to a
+    layout and install the layout on another widget, the layout's
+    widgets are automatically reparented to the widget the layout is
+    installed on.
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/screenshot/screenshot.cpp 8
+
+    The private \c createButtonsLayout() function is called from the
+    constructor. We create the application's buttons using the private
+    \c createButton() function, and add them to a QHBoxLayout.
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/screenshot/screenshot.cpp 9
+
+    The private \c createButton() function is called from the \c
+    createButtonsLayout() function. It simply creates a QPushButton
+    with the provided text, connects it to the provided receiver and
+    slot, and returns a pointer to the button.
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/screenshot/screenshot.cpp 10
+
+    The private \c updateScreenshotLabel() function is called whenever
+    the screenshot changes, or when a resize event changes the size of
+    the screenshot preview label. It updates the screenshot preview's
+    label using the QLabel::setPixmap() and QPixmap::scaled()
+    functions.
+
+    QPixmap::scaled() returns a copy of the given pixmap scaled to a
+    rectangle of the given size according to the given
+    Qt::AspectRatioMode and Qt::TransformationMode.
+
+    We scale the original pixmap to fit the current screenshot label's
+    size, preserving the aspect ratio and giving the resulting pixmap
+    smoothed edges.
+*/
+
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/scribble.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/scribble.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4dc1783
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/scribble.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,432 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/scribble
+    \title Scribble Example
+
+    The Scribble example shows how to reimplement some of QWidget's
+    event handlers to receive the events generated for the
+    application's widgets.
+
+    We reimplement the mouse event handlers to implement drawing, the
+    paint event handler to update the application and the resize event
+    handler to optimize the application's appearance. In addition we
+    reimplement the close event handler to intercept the close events
+    before terminating the application.
+
+    The example also demonstrates how to use QPainter to draw an image
+    in real time, as well as to repaint widgets.
+
+    \image scribble-example.png Screenshot of the Scribble example
+
+    With the Scribble application the users can draw an image.  The
+    \gui File menu gives the users the possibility to open and edit an
+    existing image file, save an image and exit the application. While
+    drawing, the \gui Options menu allows the users to to choose the
+    pen color and pen width, as well as clear the screen. In addition
+    the \gui Help menu provides the users with information about the
+    Scribble example in particular, and about Qt in general.
+
+    The example consists of two classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c ScribbleArea is a custom widget that displays a QImage and
+       allows to the user to draw on it.
+    \o \c MainWindow provides a menu above the \c ScribbleArea.
+    \endlist
+
+    We will start by reviewing the \c ScribbleArea class, which
+    contains the interesting, then we will take a look at the \c
+    MainWindow class that uses it.
+
+    \section1 ScribbleArea Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.h 0
+
+    The \c ScribbleArea class inherits from QWidget. We reimplement
+    the \c mousePressEvent(), \c mouseMoveEvent() and \c
+    mouseReleaseEvent() functions to implement the drawing. We
+    reimplement the \c paintEvent() function to update the scribble
+    area, and the \c resizeEvent() function to ensure that the QImage
+    on which we draw is at least as large as the widget at any time.
+
+    We need several public functions: \c openImage() loads an image
+    from a file into the scribble area, allowing the user to edit the
+    image; \c save() writes the currently displayed image to file; \c
+    clearImage() slot clears the image displayed in the scribble
+    area. We need the private \c drawLineTo() function to actually do
+    the drawing, and \c resizeImage() to change the size of a
+    QImage. The \c print() slot handles printing.
+
+    We also need the following private variables:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c modified is \c true if there are unsaved
+       changes to the image displayed in the scribble area.
+    \o \c scribbling is \c true while the user is pressing
+       the left mouse button within the scribble area.
+    \o \c penWidth and \c penColor hold the currently
+       set width and color for the pen used in the application.
+    \o \c image stores the image drawn by the user.
+    \o \c lastPoint holds the position of the cursor at the last
+       mouse press or mouse move event.
+    \endlist
+
+    \section1 ScribbleArea Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor, we set the Qt::WA_StaticContents
+    attribute for the widget, indicating that the widget contents are
+    rooted to the top-left corner and don't change when the widget is
+    resized. Qt uses this attribute to optimize paint events on
+    resizes. This is purely an optimization and should only be used
+    for widgets whose contents are static and rooted to the top-left
+    corner.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 2
+
+    In the \c openImage() function, we load the given image. Then we
+    resize the loaded QImage to be at least as large as the widget in
+    both directions using the private \c resizeImage() function and
+    we set the \c image member variable to be the loaded image. At
+    the end, we call QWidget::update() to schedule a repaint.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 4
+
+    The \c saveImage() function creates a QImage object that covers
+    only the visible section of the actual \c image and saves it using
+    QImage::save(). If the image is successfully saved, we set the
+    scribble area's \c modified variable to \c false, because there is
+    no unsaved data.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 6
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 7
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 8
+
+    The \c setPenColor() and \c setPenWidth() functions set the
+    current pen color and width. These values will be used for future
+    drawing operations.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 9
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 10
+
+    The public \c clearImage() slot clears the image displayed in the
+    scribble area. We simply fill the entire image with white, which
+    corresponds to RGB value (255, 255, 255). As usual when we modify
+    the image, we set \c modified to \c true and schedule a repaint.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 11
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 12
+
+    For mouse press and mouse release events, we use the
+    QMouseEvent::button() function to find out which button caused
+    the event. For mose move events, we use QMouseEvent::buttons()
+    to find which buttons are currently held down (as an OR-combination).
+
+    If the users press the left mouse button, we store the position
+    of the mouse cursor in \c lastPoint. We also make a note that the
+    user is currently scribbling. (The \c scribbling variable is
+    necessary because we can't assume that a mouse move and mouse
+    release event is always preceded by a mouse press event on the
+    same widget.)
+
+    If the user moves the mouse with the left button pressed down or
+    releases the button, we call the private \c drawLineTo() function
+    to draw.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 13
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 14
+
+    In the reimplementation of the \l
+    {QWidget::paintEvent()}{paintEvent()} function, we simply create
+    a QPainter for the scribble area, and draw the image.
+
+    At this point, you might wonder why we don't just draw directly
+    onto the widget instead of drawing in a QImage and copying the
+    QImage onto screen in \c paintEvent(). There are at least three
+    good reasons for this:
+
+    \list
+    \o The window system requires us to be able to redraw the widget
+       \e{at any time}. For example, if the window is minimized and
+       restored, the window system might have forgotten the contents
+       of the widget and send us a paint event. In other words, we
+       can't rely on the window system to remember our image.
+
+    \o Qt normally doesn't allow us to paint outside of \c
+       paintEvent(). In particular, we can't paint from the mouse
+       event handlers. (This behavior can be changed using the
+       Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen widget attribute, though.)
+
+    \o If initialized properly, a QImage is guaranteed to use 8-bit
+       for each color channel (red, green, blue, and alpha), whereas
+       a QWidget might have a lower color depth, depending on the
+       monitor configuration. This means that if we load a 24-bit or
+       32-bit image and paint it onto a QWidget, then copy the
+       QWidget into a QImage again, we might lose some information.
+    \endlist
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 15
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 16
+
+    When the user starts the Scribble application, a resize event is
+    generated and an image is created and displayed in the scribble
+    area. We make this initial image slightly larger than the
+    application's main window and scribble area, to avoid always
+    resizing the image when the user resizes the main window (which
+    would be very inefficient). But when the main window becomes
+    larger than this initial size, the image needs to be resized.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 17
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 18
+
+    In \c drawLineTo(), we draw a line from the point where the mouse
+    was located when the last mouse press or mouse move occurred, we
+    set \c modified to true, we generate a repaint event, and we
+    update \c lastPoint so that next time \c drawLineTo() is called,
+    we continue drawing from where we left.
+
+    We could call the \c update() function with no parameter, but as
+    an easy optimization we pass a QRect that specifies the rectangle
+    inside the scribble are needs updating, to avoid a complete
+    repaint of the widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 19
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 20
+
+    QImage has no nice API for resizing an image. There's a
+    QImage::copy() function that could do the trick, but when used to
+    expand an image, it fills the new areas with black, whereas we
+    want white.
+
+    So the trick is to create a brand new QImage with the right size,
+    to fill it with white, and to draw the old image onto it using
+    QPainter. The new image is given the QImage::Format_RGB32
+    format, which means that each pixel is stored as 0xffRRGGBB
+    (where RR, GG, and BB are the red, green and blue
+    color channels, ff is the hexadecimal value 255).
+
+    Printing is handled by the \c print() slot:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 21
+
+    We construct a high resolution QPrinter object for the required
+    output format, using a QPrintDialog to ask the user to specify a
+    page size and indicate how the output should be formatted on the page.
+
+    If the dialog is accepted, we perform the task of printing to the paint
+    device:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/scribblearea.cpp 22
+
+    Printing an image to a file in this way is simply a matter of
+    painting onto the QPrinter. We scale the image to fit within the
+    available space on the page before painting it onto the paint
+    device.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    The \c MainWindow class inherits from QMainWindow. We reimplement
+    the \l{QWidget::closeEvent()}{closeEvent()} handler from QWidget.
+    The \c open(), \c save(), \c penColor() and \c penWidth()
+    slots correspond to menu entries. In addition we create four
+    private functions.
+
+    We use the boolean \c maybeSave() function to check if there are
+    any unsaved changes. If there are unsaved changes, we give the
+    user the opportunity to save these changes. The function returns
+    \c false if the user clicks \gui Cancel. We use the \c saveFile()
+    function to let the user save the image currently displayed in
+    the scribble area.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor, we create a scribble area which we make the
+    central widget of the \c MainWindow widget. Then we create the
+    associated actions and menus.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    Close events are sent to widgets that the users want to close,
+    usually by clicking \gui{File|Exit} or by clicking the \gui X
+    title bar button. By reimplementing the event handler, we can
+    intercept attempts to close the application.
+
+    In this example, we use the close event to ask the user to save
+    any unsaved changes. The logic for that is located in the \c
+    maybeSave() function. If \c maybeSave() returns true, there are
+    no modifications or the users successfully saved them, and we
+    accept the event. The application can then terminate normally. If
+    \c maybeSave() returns false, the user clicked \gui Cancel, so we
+    "ignore" the event, leaving the application unaffected by it.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+    In the \c open() slot we first give the user the opportunity to
+    save any modifications to the currently displayed image, before a
+    new image is loaded into the scribble area. Then we ask the user
+    to choose a file and we load the file in the \c ScribbleArea.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 6
+
+    The \c save() slot is called when the users choose the \gui {Save
+    As} menu entry, and then choose an entry from the format menu. The
+    first thing we need to do is to find out which action sent the
+    signal using QObject::sender(). This function returns the sender
+    as a QObject pointer. Since we know that the sender is an action
+    object, we can safely cast the QObject. We could have used a
+    C-style cast or a C++ \c static_cast<>(), but as a defensive
+    programming technique we use a qobject_cast(). The advantage is
+    that if the object has the wrong type, a null pointer is
+    returned. Crashes due to null pointers are much easier to diagnose
+    than crashes due to unsafe casts.
+
+    Once we have the action, we extract the chosen format using
+    QAction::data(). (When the actions are created, we use
+    QAction::setData() to set our own custom data attached to the
+    action, as a QVariant. More on this when we review \c
+    createActions().)
+
+    Now that we know the format, we call the private \c saveFile()
+    function to save the currently displayed image.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 7
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 8
+
+    We use the \c penColor() slot to retrieve a new color from the
+    user with a QColorDialog. If the user chooses a new color, we
+    make it the scribble area's color.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 9
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 10
+
+    To retrieve a new pen width in the \c penWidth() slot, we use
+    QInputDialog. The QInputDialog class provides a simple
+    convenience dialog to get a single value from the user. We use
+    the static QInputDialog::getInteger() function, which combines a
+    QLabel and a QSpinBox. The QSpinBox is initialized with the
+    scribble area's pen width, allows a range from 1 to 50, a step of
+    1 (meaning that the up and down arrow increment or decrement the
+    value by 1).
+
+    The boolean \c ok variable will be set to \c true if the user
+    clicked \gui OK and to \c false if the user pressed \gui Cancel.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 11
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 12
+
+    We implement the \c about() slot to create a message box
+    describing what the example is designed to show.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 13
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 14
+
+    In the \c createAction() function we create the actions
+    representing the menu entries and connect them to the appropiate
+    slots. In particular we create the actions found in the \gui
+    {Save As} sub-menu. We use QImageWriter::supportedImageFormats()
+    to get a list of the supported formats (as a QList<QByteArray>).
+
+    Then we iterate through the list, creating an action for each
+    format. We call QAction::setData() with the file format, so we
+    can retrieve it later as QAction::data(). We could also have
+    deduced the file format from the action's text, by truncating the
+    "...", but that would have been inelegant.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 15
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 16
+
+    In the \c createMenu() function, we add the previously created
+    format actions to the \c saveAsMenu. Then we add the rest of the
+    actions as well as the \c saveAsMenu sub-menu to the \gui File,
+    \gui Options and \gui Help menus.
+
+    The QMenu class provides a menu widget for use in menu bars,
+    context menus, and other popup menus. The QMenuBar class provides
+    a horizontal menu bar with a list of pull-down \l{QMenu}s. At the
+    end we put the \gui File and \gui Options menus in the \c
+    {MainWindow}'s menu bar, which we retrieve using the
+    QMainWindow::menuBar() function.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 17
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 18
+
+    In \c mayBeSave(), we check if there are any unsaved changes. If
+    there are any, we use QMessageBox to give the user a warning that
+    the image has been modified and the opportunity to save the
+    modifications.
+
+    As with QColorDialog and QFileDialog, the easiest way to create a
+    QMessageBox is to use its static functions. QMessageBox provides
+    a range of different messages arranged along two axes: severity
+    (question, information, warning and critical) and complexity (the
+    number of necessary response buttons). Here we use the \c
+    warning() function sice the message is rather important.
+
+    If the user chooses to save, we call the private \c saveFile()
+    function. For simplicitly, we use PNG as the file format; the
+    user can always press \gui Cancel and save the file using another
+    format.
+
+    The \c maybeSave() function returns \c false if the user clicks
+    \gui Cancel; otherwise it returns \c true.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 19
+    \snippet examples/widgets/scribble/mainwindow.cpp 20
+
+    In \c saveFile(), we pop up a file dialog with a file name
+    suggestion. The static QFileDialog::getSaveFileName() function
+    returns a file name selected by the user. The file does not have
+    to exist.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/sdi.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/sdi.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cfe351c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/sdi.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*! 
+    \example mainwindows/sdi
+    \title SDI Example
+
+    The SDI example shows how to create a Single Document Interface. It uses a number of
+    top-level windows to display the contents of different text files.
+
+    \image sdi-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/securesocketclient.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/securesocketclient.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e93bf20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/securesocketclient.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example network/securesocketclient
+    \title Secure Socket Client Example
+
+    The Secure Socket Client example shows how to use QSslSocket to
+    communicate over an encrypted (SSL) connection. It also demonstrates how
+    to deal with authenticity problems, and how to display security and
+    certificate information.
+
+    \image securesocketclient.png
+    \image securesocketclient2.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/semaphores.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/semaphores.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a387350
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/semaphores.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example threads/semaphores
+    \title Semaphores Example
+
+    The Semaphores example shows how to use QSemaphore to control
+    access to a circular buffer shared by a producer thread and a
+    consumer thread.
+
+    The producer writes data to the buffer until it reaches the end
+    of the buffer, at which point it restarts from the beginning,
+    overwriting existing data. The consumer thread reads the data as
+    it is produced and writes it to standard error.
+
+    Semaphores make it possible to have a higher level of concurrency
+    than mutexes. If accesses to the buffer were guarded by a QMutex,
+    the consumer thread couldn't access the buffer at the same time
+    as the producer thread. Yet, there is no harm in having both
+    threads working on \e{different parts} of the buffer at the same
+    time.
+
+    The example comprises two classes: \c Producer and \c Consumer.
+    Both inherit from QThread. The circular buffer used for
+    communicating between these two classes and the semaphores that
+    protect it are global variables.
+
+    An alternative to using QSemaphore to solve the producer-consumer
+    problem is to use QWaitCondition and QMutex. This is what the
+    \l{threads/waitconditions}{Wait Conditions} example does.
+
+    \section1 Global Variables
+
+    Let's start by reviewing the circular buffer and the associated
+    semaphores:
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/semaphores/semaphores.cpp 0
+
+    \c DataSize is the amout of data that the producer will generate.
+    To keep the example as simple as possible, we make it a constant.
+    \c BufferSize is the size of the circular buffer. It is less than
+    \c DataSize, meaning that at some point the producer will reach
+    the end of the buffer and restart from the beginning.
+
+    To synchronize the producer and the consumer, we need two
+    semaphores. The \c freeBytes semaphore controls the "free" area
+    of the buffer (the area that the producer hasn't filled with data
+    yet or that the consumer has already read). The \c usedBytes
+    semaphore controls the "used" area of the buffer (the area that
+    the producer has filled but that the consumer hasn't read yet).
+
+    Together, the semaphores ensure that the producer is never more
+    than \c BufferSize bytes ahead of the consumer, and that the
+    consumer never reads data that the producer hasn't generated yet.
+
+    The \c freeBytes semaphore is initialized with \c BufferSize,
+    because initially the entire buffer is empty. The \c usedBytes
+    semaphore is initialized to 0 (the default value if none is
+    specified).
+
+    \section1 Producer Class
+
+    Let's review the code for the \c Producer class:
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/semaphores/semaphores.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/threads/semaphores/semaphores.cpp 2
+
+    The producer generates \c DataSize bytes of data. Before it
+    writes a byte to the circular buffer, it must acquire a "free"
+    byte using the \c freeBytes semaphore. The QSemaphore::acquire()
+    call might block if the consumer hasn't kept up the pace with the
+    producer.
+
+    At the end, the producer releases a byte using the \c usedBytes
+    semaphore. The "free" byte has successfully been transformed into
+    a "used" byte, ready to be read by the consumer.
+
+    \section1 Consumer Class
+
+    Let's now turn to the \c Consumer class:
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/semaphores/semaphores.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/threads/semaphores/semaphores.cpp 4
+
+    The code is very similar to the producer, except that this time
+    we acquire a "used" byte and release a "free" byte, instead of
+    the opposite.
+
+    \section1 The main() Function
+
+    In \c main(), we create the two threads and call QThread::wait()
+    to ensure that both threads get time to finish before we exit:
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/semaphores/semaphores.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/threads/semaphores/semaphores.cpp 6
+
+    So what happens when we run the program? Initially, the producer
+    thread is the only one that can do anything; the consumer is
+    blocked waiting for the \c usedBytes semaphore to be released (its
+    initial \l{QSemaphore::available()}{available()} count is 0).
+    Once the producer has put one byte in the buffer,
+    \c{freeBytes.available()} is \c BufferSize - 1 and
+    \c{usedBytes.available()} is 1. At that point, two things can
+    happen: Either the consumer thread takes over and reads that
+    byte, or the consumer gets to produce a second byte.
+
+    The producer-consumer model presented in this example makes it
+    possible to write highly concurrent multithreaded applications.
+    On a multiprocessor machine, the program is potentially up to
+    twice as fast as the equivalent mutex-based program, since the
+    two threads can be active at the same time on different parts of
+    the buffer.
+
+    Be aware though that these benefits aren't always realized.
+    Acquiring and releasing a QSemaphore has a cost. In practice, it
+    would probably be worthwhile to divide the buffer into chunks and
+    to operate on chunks instead of individual bytes. The buffer size
+    is also a parameter that must be selected carefully, based on
+    experimentation.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/settingseditor.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/settingseditor.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ce1e49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/settingseditor.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*! 
+    \example tools/settingseditor
+    \title Settings Editor Example
+
+    The Settings Editor example shows how Qt's standard settings support is used in an
+    application by providing an editor that enables the user to view the settings for
+    installed applications, and modify those that can be edited.
+
+    \image settingseditor-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/shapedclock.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/shapedclock.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..369553b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/shapedclock.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/shapedclock
+    \title Shaped Clock Example
+
+    The Shaped Clock example shows how to apply a widget mask to a top-level
+    widget to produce a shaped window.
+
+    \image shapedclock-example.png
+
+    Widget masks are used to customize the shapes of top-level widgets by restricting
+    the available area for painting. On some window systems, setting certain window flags
+    will cause the window decoration (title bar, window frame, buttons) to be disabled,
+    allowing specially-shaped windows to be created. In this example, we use this feature
+    to create a circular window containing an analog clock.
+
+    Since this example's window does not provide a \gui File menu or a close
+    button, we provide a context menu with an \gui Exit entry so that the example
+    can be closed. Click the right mouse button over the window to open this menu.
+
+    \section1 ShapedClock Class Definition
+
+    The \c ShapedClock class is based on the \c AnalogClock class defined in the
+    \l{Analog Clock Example}{Analog Clock} example. The whole class definition is
+    presented below:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/shapedclock/shapedclock.h 0
+
+    The \l{QWidget::paintEvent()}{paintEvent()} implementation is the same as that found
+    in the \c AnalogClock class. We implement \l{QWidget::sizeHint()}{sizeHint()}
+    so that we don't have to resize the widget explicitly. We also provide an event
+    handler for resize events. This allows us to update the mask if the clock is resized.
+
+    Since the window containing the clock widget will have no title bar, we provide
+    implementations for \l{QWidget::mouseMoveEvent()}{mouseMoveEvent()} and
+    \l{QWidget::mousePressEvent()}{mousePressEvent()} to allow the clock to be dragged
+    around the screen. The \c dragPosition variable lets us keep track of where the user
+    last clicked on the widget.
+
+    \section1 ShapedClock Class Implementation
+
+    The \c ShapedClock constructor performs many of the same tasks as the \c AnalogClock
+    constructor. We set up a timer and connect it to the widget's update() slot:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/shapedclock/shapedclock.cpp 0
+
+    We inform the window manager that the widget is not to be decorated with a window
+    frame by setting the Qt::FramelessWindowHint flag on the widget. As a result, we need
+    to provide a way for the user to move the clock around the screen.
+
+    Mouse button events are delivered to the \c mousePressEvent() handler:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/shapedclock/shapedclock.cpp 1
+
+    If the left mouse button is pressed over the widget, we record the displacement in
+    global (screen) coordinates between the top-left position of the widget's frame (even
+    when hidden) and the point where the mouse click occurred. This displacement will be
+    used if the user moves the mouse while holding down the left button. Since we acted
+    on the event, we accept it by calling its \l{QEvent::accept()}{accept()} function.
+
+    \image shapedclock-dragging.png
+
+    The \c mouseMoveEvent() handler is called if the mouse is moved over the widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/shapedclock/shapedclock.cpp 2
+
+    If the left button is held down while the mouse is moved, the top-left corner of the
+    widget is moved to the point given by subtracting the \c dragPosition from the current
+    cursor position in global coordinates. If we drag the widget, we also accept the event.
+
+    The \c paintEvent() function is given for completeness. See the
+    \l{Analog Clock Example}{Analog Clock} example for a description of the process used
+    to render the clock.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/shapedclock/shapedclock.cpp 3
+
+    In the \c resizeEvent() handler, we re-use some of the code from the \c paintEvent()
+    to determine the region of the widget that is visible to the user:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/shapedclock/shapedclock.cpp 4
+
+    Since the clock face is a circle drawn in the center of the widget, this is the region
+    we use as the mask.
+
+    Although the lack of a window frame may make it difficult for the user to resize the
+    widget on some platforms, it will not necessarily be impossible. The \c resizeEvent()
+    function ensures that the widget mask will always be updated if the widget's dimensions
+    change, and additionally ensures that it will be set up correctly when the widget is
+    first displayed.
+
+    Finally, we implement the \c sizeHint() for the widget so that it is given a reasonable
+    default size when it is first shown:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/shapedclock/shapedclock.cpp 5
+
+    \section1 Notes on Widget Masks
+
+    Since QRegion allows arbitrarily complex regions to be created, widget masks can be
+    made to suit the most unconventionally-shaped windows, and even allow widgets to be
+    displayed with holes in them.
+
+    Widget masks can also be constructed by using the contents of pixmap to define the
+    opaque part of the widget. For a pixmap with an alpha channel, a suitable mask can be
+    obtained with QPixmap::mask().
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/sharedmemory.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/sharedmemory.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f323977
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/sharedmemory.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+  \example ipc/sharedmemory
+  \title Shared Memory Example
+
+  The Shared Memory example shows how to use the QSharedMemory class
+  to implement inter-process communication using shared memory. To
+  build the example, run make. To run the example, start two instances
+  of the executable. The main() function creates an \l {QApplication}
+  {application} and an instance of our example's Dialog class. The
+  dialog is displayed and then control is passed to the application in
+  the standard way.
+
+  \snippet examples/ipc/sharedmemory/main.cpp 0
+
+  Two instances of class Dialog appear.
+
+  \image sharedmemory-example_1.png Screenshot of the Shared Memory example
+
+  Class Dialog inherits QDialog. It encapsulates the user interface
+  and an instance of QSharedMemory. It also has two public slots,
+  loadFromFile() and loadFromMemory() that correspond to the two
+  buttons on the dialog.
+
+  \snippet examples/ipc/sharedmemory/dialog.h 0
+
+  The constructor builds the user interface widgets and connects the
+  clicked() signal of each button to the corresponding slot function.
+
+  \snippet examples/ipc/sharedmemory/dialog.cpp 0
+
+  Note that "QSharedMemoryExample" is passed to the \l {QSharedMemory}
+  {QSharedMemory()} constructor to be used as the key. This will be
+  used by the system as the identifier of the underlying shared memory
+  segment.
+
+  Click the \tt {Load Image From File...} button on one of the
+  dialogs. The loadFromFile() slot is invoked. First, it tests whether
+  a shared memory segment is already attached to the process. If so,
+  that segment is detached from the process, so we can be assured of
+  starting off the example correctly.
+
+  \snippet examples/ipc/sharedmemory/dialog.cpp 1
+
+  The user is then asked to select an image file using
+  QFileDialog::getOpenFileName(). The selected file is loaded into a
+  QImage. Using a QImage lets us ensure that the selected file is a
+  valid image, and it also allows us to immediately display the image
+  in the dialog using setPixmap().
+
+  Next the image is streamed into a QBuffer using a QDataStream. This
+  gives us the size, which we then use to \l {QSharedMemory::}
+  {create()} our shared memory segment. Creating a shared memory
+  segment automatically \l {QSharedMemory::attach()} {attaches} the
+  segment to the process. Using a QBuffer here lets us get a pointer
+  to the image data, which we then use to do a memcopy() from the
+  QBuffer into the shared memory segment.
+
+  \snippet examples/ipc/sharedmemory/dialog.cpp 2
+
+  Note that we \l {QSharedMemory::} {lock()} the shared memory segment
+  before we copy into it, and we \l {QSharedMemory::} {unlock()} it
+  again immediately after the copy. This ensures we have exclusive
+  access to the shared memory segment to do our memcopy(). If some
+  other process has the segment lock, then our process will block
+  until the lock becomes available.
+
+  Note also that the function does not \l {QSharedMemory::} {detach()}
+  from the shared memory segment after the memcopy() and
+  unlock(). Recall that when the last process detaches from a shared
+  memory segment, the segment is released by the operating
+  system. Since this process only one that is attached to the shared
+  memory segment at the moment, if loadFromFile() detached from the
+  shared memory segment, the segment would be destroyed before we get
+  to the next step.
+
+  When the function returns, if the file you selected was qt.png, your
+  first dialog looks like this.
+
+  \image sharedmemory-example_2.png Screenshot of the Shared Memory example
+
+  In the second dialog, click the \tt {Display Image From Shared
+  Memory} button. The loadFromMemory() slot is invoked. It first \l
+  {QSharedMemory::attach()} {attaches} the process to the same shared
+  memory segment created by the first process. Then it \l
+  {QSharedMemory::lock()} {locks} the segment for exclusive access and
+  links a QBuffer to the image data in the shared memory segment. It
+  then streams the data into a QImage and \l {QSharedMemory::unlock()}
+  {unlocks} the segment.
+
+  \snippet examples/ipc/sharedmemory/dialog.cpp 3
+
+  In this case, the function does \l {QSharedMemory::} {detach()} from
+  the segment, because now we are effectively finished using
+  it. Finally, the QImage is displayed. At this point, both dialogs
+  should be showing the same image. When you close the first dialog,
+  the Dialog destructor calls the QSharedMemory destructor, which
+  detaches from the shared memory segment. Since this is the last
+  process to be detached from the segment, the operating system will
+  now release the shared memory.
+
+ */
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/simpledecoration.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/simpledecoration.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe8700a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/simpledecoration.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,266 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example qws/simpledecoration
+    \title Simple Decoration Example
+    \ingroup qt-embedded
+
+    The Simple Decoration example shows how to create a custom window decoration
+    for embedded applications.
+
+    \image embedded-simpledecoration-example.png
+
+    By default, Qt for Embedded Linux applications display windows with one of
+    the standard window decorations provided by Qt which are perfectly suitable
+    for many situations. Nonetheless, for certain applications and devices, it
+    is necessary to provide custom window decorations.
+
+    In this document, we examine the fundamental features of custom window
+    decorations, and create a simple decoration as an example.
+
+    \section1 Styles and Window Decorations
+
+    On many platforms, the style used for the contents of a window (including
+    scroll bars) and the style used for the window decorations (the title bar,
+    window borders, close, maximize and other buttons) are handled differently.
+    This is usually because each application is responsible for rendering the
+    contents of its own windows and the window manager renders the window
+    decorations.
+
+    Although the situation is not quite like this on Qt for Embedded Linux
+    because QApplication automatically handles window decorations as well,
+    there are still two style mechanisms at work: QStyle and its associated
+    classes are responsible for rendering widgets and subclasses of QDecoration
+    are responsible for rendering window decorations.
+
+    \image embedded-simpledecoration-example-styles.png
+
+    Three decorations are provided with Qt for Embedded Linux: \e default is
+    a basic style, \e windows resembles the classic Windows look and feel,
+    and \e styled uses the QStyle classes for QMdiSubWindow to draw window
+    decorations. Of these, \e styled is the most useful if you want to impose
+    a consistent look and feel, but the window decorations may be too large
+    for some use cases.
+
+    If none of these built-in decorations are suitable, a custom style can
+    easily be created and used. To do this, we simply need to create a
+    subclass of QDecorationDefault and apply it to a QApplication instance
+    in a running application.
+
+    \section1 MyDecoration Class Definition
+
+    The \c MyDecoration class is a subclass of QDecorationDefault, a subclass
+    of QDecoration that provides reasonable default behavior for a decoration:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.h decoration class definition
+
+    We only need to implement a constructor and reimplement the
+    \l{QDecorationDefault::}{region()} and \l{QDecorationDefault::}{paint()}
+    functions to provide our own custom appearance for window decorations.
+
+    To make things fairly general, we provide a number of private variables
+    to hold parameters which control certain aspects of the decoration's
+    appearance. We also define some data structures that we will use to
+    relate buttons in the window decorations to regions.
+
+    \section1 MyDecoration Class Implementation
+
+    In the constructor of the \c MyDecoration class, we set up some default
+    values for the decoration, specifying a thin window border, a title
+    bar that is just taller than the buttons it will hold, and we create a
+    list of buttons that we support:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.cpp constructor start
+
+    We map each of these Qt::WindowFlags to QDecoration::DecorationRegion
+    enum values to help with the implementation of the
+    \l{#Finding Regions}{region() function implementation}.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.cpp map window flags to decoration regions
+
+    In this decoration, we implement the buttons used in the decoration as
+    pixmaps. To help us relate regions of the window to these, we define
+    mappings between each \l{QDecoration::}{DecorationRegion} and its
+    corresponding pixmap for two situations: when a window is shown normally
+    and when it has been maximized. This is purely for cosmetic purposes.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.cpp map decoration regions to pixmaps
+
+    We finish the constructor by defining the regions for buttons that we
+    understand. This will be useful when we are asked to give regions for
+    window decoration buttons.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.cpp constructor end
+
+    \section2 Finding Regions
+
+    Each decoration needs to be able to describe the regions used for parts
+    of the window furniture, such as the close button, window borders and
+    title bar. We reimplement the \l{QDecorationDefault::}{region()} function
+    to do this for our decoration. This function returns a QRegion object
+    that describes an arbitrarily-shaped region of the screen that can itself
+    be made up of several distinct areas.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.cpp region start
+
+    The function is called for a given \e widget, occupying a region specified
+    by \e insideRect, and is expected to return a region for the collection of
+    \l{QDecoration::}{DecorationRegion} enum values supplied in the
+    \e decorationRegion parameter.
+
+    We begin by figuring out how much space in the decoration we will need to
+    allocate for buttons, and where to place them:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.cpp calculate the positions of buttons based on the window flags used
+
+    In a more sophisticated implementation, we might test the \e decorationRegion
+    supplied for regions related to buttons and the title bar, and only perform
+    this space allocation if asked for regions related to these.
+
+    We also use the information about the area occupied by buttons to determine
+    how large an area we can use for the window title:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.cpp calculate the extent of the title
+
+    With these basic calculations done, we can start to compose a region, first
+    checking whether we have been asked for all of the window, and we return
+    immediately if so.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.cpp check for all regions
+
+    We examine each decoration region in turn, adding the corresponding region
+    to the \c region object created earlier. We take care to avoid "off by one"
+    errors in the coordinate calculations.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.cpp compose a region based on the decorations specified
+
+    Unlike the window borders and title bar, the regions occupied by buttons
+    many of the window decorations do not occupy fixed places in the window.
+    Instead, their locations depend on which other buttons are present.
+    We only add regions for buttons we can handle (defined in the \c stateRegions)
+    member variable, and only for those that are present (defined in the
+    \c buttons hash).
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.cpp add a region for each button only if it is present
+
+    The fully composed region can then be returned:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.cpp region end
+
+    The information returned by this function is used when the decoration is
+    painted. Ideally, this function should be implemented to perform all the
+    calculations necessary to place elements of the decoration; this makes
+    the implementation of the \c paint() function much easier.
+
+    \section2 Painting the Decoration
+
+    The \c paint() function is responsible for drawing each window element
+    for a given widget. Information about the decoration region, its state
+    and the widget itself is provided along with a QPainter object to use.
+
+    The first check we make is for a call with no regions:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.cpp paint start
+
+    We return false to indicate that we have not painted anything. If we paint
+    something, we must return true so that the window can be composed, if
+    necessary.
+
+    Just as with the \c region() function, we test the decoration region to
+    determine which elements need to be drawn. If we paint anything, we set
+    the \c handled variable to true so that we can return the correct value
+    when we have finished.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.cpp paint different regions
+
+    Note that we use our own \c region() implementation to determine where
+    to draw decorations.
+
+    Since the \c region() function performs calculations to place buttons, we
+    can simply test the window flags against the buttons we support (using the
+    \c buttonHintMap defined in the constructor), and draw each button in the
+    relevant region:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.cpp paint buttons
+
+    Finally, we return the value of \c handled to indicate whether any painting
+    was performed:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/mydecoration.cpp paint end
+
+    We now have a decoration class that we can use in an application.
+
+    \section1 Using the Decoration
+
+    In the \c main.cpp file, we set up the application as usual, but we also
+    create an instance of our decoration and set it as the standard decoration
+    for the application:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/main.cpp create application
+
+    This causes all windows opened by this application to use our decoration.
+    To demonstrate this, we show the analog clock widget from the
+    \l{Analog Clock Example}, which we build into the application:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/simpledecoration/main.cpp start application
+
+    The application can be run either
+    \l{Running Qt for Embedded Linux Applications}{as a server or a client
+    application}. In both cases, it will use our decoration rather than the
+    default one provided with Qt.
+
+    \section1 Notes
+
+    This example does not cache any information about the state or buttons
+    used for each window. This means that the \c region() function calculates
+    the locations and regions of buttons in cases where it could re-use
+    existing information.
+
+    If you run the application as a window server, you may expect client
+    applications to use our decoration in preference to the default Qt
+    decoration. However, it is up to each application to draw its own
+    decoration, so this will not happen automatically. One way to achieve
+    this is to compile the decoration with each application that needs it;
+    another way is to build the decoration as a plugin, using the
+    QDecorationPlugin class, and load it into the server and client
+    applications.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/simpledommodel.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/simpledommodel.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8d2d102
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/simpledommodel.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,294 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/simpledommodel
+    \title Simple DOM Model Example
+
+    The Simple DOM Model example shows how an existing class can be adapted for use with
+    the model/view framework.
+
+    \image simpledommodel-example.png
+
+    Qt provides two complementary sets of classes for reading XML files: The classes based
+    around QXmlReader provide a SAX-style API for incremental reading of large files, and
+    the classes based around QDomDocument enable developers to access the contents of XML
+    files using a Document Object Model (DOM) API.
+
+    In this example, we create a model that uses the DOM API to expose the structure and
+    contents of XML documents to views via the standard QAbstractModel interface.
+
+    \section1 Design and Concepts
+
+    Reading an XML document with Qt's DOM classes is a straightforward process. Typically,
+    the contents of a file are supplied to QDomDocument, and nodes are accessed using the
+    functions provided by QDomNode and its subclasses.
+
+    \omit
+    For example, the following code
+    snippet reads the contents of a file into a QDomDocument object and traverses the
+    document, reading all the plain text that can be found:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_simpledommodel.qdoc 0
+
+    In principle, the functions provided by QDomNode can be used to navigate from any
+    given starting point in a document to the piece of data requested by another component.
+    Since QDomDocument maintains information about the structure of a document, we can
+    use this to implement the required virtual functions in a QAbstractItemModel subclass.
+    \endomit
+
+    The aim is to use the structure provided by QDomDocument by wrapping QDomNode objects
+    in item objects similar to the \c TreeItem objects used in the
+    \l{Simple Tree Model Example}{Simple Tree Model} example.
+
+    \section1 DomModel Class Definition
+
+    Let us begin by examining the \c DomModel class:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/dommodel.h 0
+
+    The class definition contains all the basic functions that are needed for a
+    read-only model. Only the constructor and \c document() function are specific to
+    this model. The private \c domDocument variable is used to hold the document
+    that is exposed by the model; the \c rootItem variable contains a pointer to
+    the root item in the model.
+
+    \section1 DomItem Class Definition
+
+    The \c DomItem class is used to hold information about a specific QDomNode in
+    the document:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/domitem.h 0
+
+    Each \c DomItem provides a wrapper for a QDomNode obtained from the underlying
+    document which contains a reference to the node, it's location in the parent node's
+    list of child nodes, and a pointer to a parent wrapper item.
+
+    The \c parent(), \c child(), and \c row() functions are convenience functions for
+    the \c DomModel to use that provide basic information about the item to be discovered
+    quickly. The node() function provides access to the underlying QDomNode object.
+
+    As well as the information supplied in the constructor, the class maintains a cache
+    of information about any child items. This is used to provide a collection of
+    persistent item objects that the model can identify consistently and improve the
+    performance of the model when accessing child items.
+
+    \section1 DomItem Class Implementation
+
+    Since the \c DomItem class is only a thin wrapper around QDomNode objects, with a
+    few additional features to help improve performance and memory usage, we can provide
+    a brief outline of the class before discussing the model itself.
+
+    The constructor simply records details of the QDomNode that needs to be wrapped:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/domitem.cpp 0
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/domitem.cpp 1
+
+    As a result, functions to provide the parent wrapper, the row number occupied by
+    the item in its parent's list of children, and the underlying QDomNode for each item
+    are straightforward to write:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/domitem.cpp 4
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/domitem.cpp 6
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/domitem.cpp 3
+
+    It is necessary to maintain a collection of items which can be consistently identified
+    by the model. For that reason, we maintain a hash of child wrapper items that, to
+    minimize memory usage, is initially empty. The model uses the item's \c child()
+    function to help create model indexes, and this constructs wrappers for the children
+    of the item's QDomNode, relating the row number of each child to the newly-constructed
+    wrapper:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/domitem.cpp 5
+
+    If a QDomNode was previously wrapped, the cached wrapper is returned; otherwise, a
+    new wrapper is constructed and stored for valid children, and zero is returned for
+    invalid ones.
+
+    The class's destructor deletes all the child items of the wrapper:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/domitem.cpp 2
+
+    These, in turn, will delete their children and free any QDomNode objects in use.
+
+    \section1 DomModel Class Implementation
+
+    The structure provided by the \c DomItem class makes the implementation of \c DomModel
+    similar to the \c TreeModel shown in the
+    \l{Simple Tree Model Example}{Simple Tree Model} example.
+
+    The constructor accepts an existing document and a parent object for the model:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/dommodel.cpp 0
+
+    A shallow copy of the document is stored for future reference, and a root item is
+    created to provide a wrapper around the document. We assign the root item a row
+    number of zero only to be consistent since the root item will have no siblings.
+
+    Since the model only contains information about the root item, the destructor only
+    needs to delete this one item:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/dommodel.cpp 1
+
+    All of the child items in the tree will be deleted by the \c DomItem destructor as
+    their parent items are deleted.
+
+    \section2 Basic Properties of The Model
+
+    Some aspects of the model do not depend on the structure of the underlying document,
+    and these are simple to implement.
+
+    The number of columns exposed by the model is returned by the \c columnCount()
+    function:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/dommodel.cpp 2
+
+    This value is fixed, and does not depend on the location or type of the underlying
+    node in the document. We will use these three columns to display different kinds of
+    data from the underlying document.
+
+    Since we only implement a read-only model, the \c flags() function is straightforward
+    to write:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/dommodel.cpp 5
+
+    Since the model is intended for use in a tree view, the \c headerData() function only
+    provides a horizontal header:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/dommodel.cpp 6
+
+    The model presents the names of nodes in the first column, element attributes in the
+    second, and any node values in the third.
+
+    \section2 Navigating The Document
+
+    The index() function creates a model index for the item with the given row, column,
+    and parent in the model:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/dommodel.cpp 7
+
+    The function first has to relate the parent index to an item that contains a node
+    from the underlying document. If the parent index is invalid, it refers to the root
+    node in the document, so we retrieve the root item that wraps it; otherwise, we
+    obtain a pointer to the relevant item using the QModelIndex::internalPointer()
+    function. We are able to extract a pointer in this way because any valid model index
+    will have been created by this function, and we store pointers to item objects in
+    any new indexes that we create with QAbstractItemModel::createIndex():
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/dommodel.cpp 8
+
+    A child item for the given row is provided by the parent item's \c child() function.
+    If a suitable child item was found then we call
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::createIndex()}{createIndex()} to produce a model index for the
+    requested row and column, passing a pointer to the child item for it to store
+    internally. If no suitable child item is found, an invalid model index is returned.
+
+    Note that the items themselves maintain ownership of their child items. This means
+    that the model does not need to keep track of the child items that have been created,
+    and can let the items themselves tidy up when they are deleted.
+
+    The number of rows beneath a given item in the model is returned by the \c rowCount()
+    function, and is the number of child nodes contained by the node that corresponds to
+    the specified model index:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/dommodel.cpp 10
+
+    To obtain the relevant node in the underlying document, we access the item via the
+    internal pointer stored in the model index. If an invalid index is supplied, the
+    root item is used instead. We use the item's \c node() function to access the node
+    itself, and simply count the number of child nodes it contains.
+
+    Since the model is used to represent a hierarchical data structure, it needs to
+    provide an implementation for the \c parent() function. This returns a model index
+    that corresponds to the parent of a child model index supplied as its argument:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/dommodel.cpp 9
+
+    For valid indexes other than the index corresponding to the root item, we obtain
+    a pointer to the relevant item using the method described in the \c index() function,
+    and use the item's \c parent() function to obtain a pointer to the parent item.
+
+    If no valid parent item exists, or if the parent item is the root item, we can simply
+    follow convention and return an invalid model index. For all other parent items, we
+    create a model index containing the appropriate row and column numbers, and a pointer
+    to the parent item we just obtained.
+
+    Data is provided by the \c data() function. For simplicity, we only provide data for
+    the \l{Qt::DisplayRole}{display role}, returning an invalid variant for all other
+    requests:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/dommodel.cpp 3
+
+    As before, we obtain an item pointer for the index supplied, and use it to obtain
+    the underlying document node. Depending on the column specified, the data we return
+    is obtained in different ways:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpledommodel/dommodel.cpp 4
+
+    For the first column, we return the node's name. For the second column, we read any
+    attributes that the node may have, and return a string that contains a space-separated
+    list of attribute-value assignments. For the third column, we return any value that
+    the node may have; this allows the contents of text nodes to be displayed in a view.
+
+    If data from any other column is requested, an invalid variant is returned.
+
+    \section1 Implementation Notes
+
+    Ideally, we would rely on the structure provided by QDomDocument to help us write
+    the \l{QAbstractItemModel::parent()}{parent()} and
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::index()}{index()} functions that are required when subclassing
+    QAbstractItemModel. However, since Qt's DOM classes use their own system for
+    dynamically allocating memory for DOM nodes, we cannot guarantee that the QDomNode
+    objects returned for a given piece of information will be the same for subsequent
+    accesses to the document.
+
+    We use item wrappers for each QDomNode to provide consistent pointers that the model
+    can use to navigate the document structure.
+    \omit
+    Since these items contain value references to the QDomNode objects themselves, this
+    has the side effect that the DOM nodes themselves can be used to reliably navigate
+    the document [not sure about this - QDom* may return different QDomNode objects for
+    the same piece of information]. However, this advantage is redundant since we need to
+    use wrapper items to obtain it. [Possible use of QDomNode cache in the model itself.]
+    \endomit
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/simpletextviewer.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/simpletextviewer.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2a5e45c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/simpletextviewer.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,466 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example help/simpletextviewer
+    \title Simple Text Viewer Example
+
+    The Simple Text Viewer example shows how to use \QA as a customized
+    help viewer for your application.
+
+    This is done in two stages. Firstly, documentation is created and \QA
+    is customized; secondly, the functionality to launch and control
+    \QA is added to the application.
+
+    \image simpletextviewer-example.png
+
+    The Simple Text Viewer application lets the user select and view
+    existing files.
+
+    The application provides its own custom documentation that is
+    available from the \gui Help menu in the main window's menu bar
+    or by clicking the \gui Help button in the application's find file
+    dialog.
+
+    The example consists of four classes:
+
+    \list
+        \o \c Assistant provides functionality to launch \QA.
+        \o \c MainWindow is the main application window.
+        \o \c FindFileDialog allows the user to search for
+           files using wildcard matching.
+        \o \c TextEdit provides a rich text browser that makes
+           sure that images referenced in HTML documents are
+           displayed properly.
+    \endlist
+
+    Note that we will only comment on the parts of the implementation
+    that are relevant to the main issue, that is making Qt Assistant
+    act as a customized help viewer for our Simple Text Viewer
+    application.
+
+    \section1 Creating Documentation and Customizing \QA
+
+    How to create the actual documentation in the form of HTML pages is
+    not in the scope of this example. In general, HTML pages can either
+    be written by hand or generated with the help of documentation tools
+    like qdoc or Doxygen. For the purposes of this example we assume that
+    the HTML files have already been created. So, the only thing that
+    remains to be done is to tell \QA how to structure and display the
+    help information.
+
+    \section2 Organizing Documentation for \QA
+
+    Plain HTML files only contain text or documentation about specific topics,
+    but they usually include no information about how several HTML documents
+    relate to each other or in which order they are supposed to be read.
+    What is missing is a table of contents along with an index to access
+    certain help contents quickly, without having to browse through a lot
+    of documents in order to find a piece of information.
+
+    To organize the documentation and make it available for \QA, we have
+    to create a Qt help project (.qhp) file. The first and most important
+    part of the project file is the definition of the namespace. The namespace
+    has to be unique and will be the first part of the page URL in \QA.
+    In addition, we have to set a virtual folder which acts as a common
+    folder for documentation sets. This means, that two documentation sets
+    identified by two different namespaces can cross reference HTML files
+    since those files are in one big virtual folder. However, for this
+    example, we'll only have one documentation set available, so the
+    virtual folder name and functionality are not important.
+
+    \code
+    <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+    <QtHelpProject version="1.0">
+      <namespace>com.trolltech.examples.simpletextviewer</namespace>
+      <virtualFolder>doc</virtualFolder>
+    \endcode
+
+    The next step is to define the filter section. A filter section
+    contains the table of contents, indices and a complete list of
+    all documentation files, and can have any number of filter attributes
+    assigned to it. A filter attribute is an ordinary string which can
+    be freely chosen. Later in \QA, users can then define a custom
+    filter referencing those attributes. If the attributes of a filter
+    section match the attributes of the custom filter the documentation
+    will be shown, otherwise \QA will hide the documentation.
+
+    Again, since we'll only have one documentation set, we do not need
+    the filtering functionality of \QA and can therefore skip the
+    filter attributes.
+
+    Now, we build up the table of contents. An item in the table is
+    defined by the \c section tag which contains the attributes for the
+    item title as well as link to the actual page. Section tags can be
+    nested infinitely, but for practical reasons it is not recommended
+    to nest them deeper than three or four levels. For our example we
+    want to use the following outline for the table of contents:
+
+    \list
+    \o Simple Text Viewer
+      \list
+      \o Find File
+        \list
+        \o File Dialog
+        \o Wildcard Matching
+        \o Browse
+        \endlist
+      \o Open File      
+      \endlist
+    \endlist
+
+    In the help project file, the outline is represented by:
+
+    \code
+     <filterSection>
+       <toc>
+         <section title="Simple Text Viewer" ref="index.html">
+           <section title="Find File" ref="./findfile.html">
+             <section title="File Dialog" ref="./filedialog.html"></section>
+             <section title="Wildcard Matching" ref="./wildcardmatching.html"></section>
+             <section title="Browse" ref="./browse.html"></section>
+           </section>
+           <section title="Open File" ref="./openfile.html"></section>
+         </section>
+       </toc>
+    \endcode
+
+    After the table of contents is defined, we will list all index keywords:      
+
+    \code
+        <keywords>
+          <keyword name="Display" ref="./index.html"/>
+          <keyword name="Rich text" ref="./index.html"/>
+          <keyword name="Plain text" ref="./index.html"/>
+          <keyword name="Find" ref="./findfile.html"/>
+          <keyword name="File menu" ref="./findfile.html"/>
+          <keyword name="File name" ref="./filedialog.html"/>
+          <keyword name="File dialog" ref="./filedialog.html"/>
+          <keyword name="File globbing" ref="./wildcardmatching.html"/>
+          <keyword name="Wildcard matching" ref="./wildcardmatching.html"/>
+          <keyword name="Wildcard syntax" ref="./wildcardmatching.html"/>
+          <keyword name="Browse" ref="./browse.html"/>
+          <keyword name="Directory" ref="./browse.html"/>
+          <keyword name="Open" ref="./openfile.html"/>
+          <keyword name="Select" ref="./openfile.html"/>
+        </keywords>
+    \endcode
+
+    As the last step, we have to list all files making up the documentation.
+    An important point to note here is that all files have to listed, including
+    image files, and even stylesheets if they are used.
+
+    \code
+        <files>
+          <file>browse.html</file>
+          <file>filedialog.html</file>
+          <file>findfile.html</file>
+          <file>index.html</file>
+          <file>intro.html</file>
+          <file>openfile.html</file>
+          <file>wildcardmatching.html</file>
+          <file>images/browse.png</file>
+          <file>images/fadedfilemenu.png</file>
+          <file>images/filedialog.png</file>
+          <file>images/handbook.png</file>
+          <file>images/mainwindow.png</file>
+          <file>images/open.png</file>
+          <file>images/wildcard.png</file>
+        </files>
+      </filterSection>
+    </QtHelpProject>
+    \endcode
+
+    The help project file is now finished. If you want to see the resulting
+    documentation in \QA, you have to generate a Qt compressed help file
+    out of it and register it with the default help collection of \QA.
+
+    \code
+    qhelpgenerator simpletextviewer.qhp -o simpletextviewer.qch
+    assistant -register simpletextviewer.qch
+    \endcode
+
+    If you start \QA now, you'll see the Simple Text Viewer documentation
+    beside the Qt documentation. This is OK for testing purposes, but
+    for the final version we want to only have the Simple Text Viewer
+    documentation in \QA.
+
+    \section2 Customizing \QA
+
+    The easiest way to make \QA only display the Simple Text Viewer
+    documentation is to create our own help collection file. A collection
+    file is stored in a binary format, similar to the compressed help file,
+    and generated from a help collection project file (*.qhcp). With
+    the help of a collection file, we can customize the appearance and even
+    some functionality offered by \QA.
+
+    At first, we change the window title and icon. Instead of showing "\QA"
+    it will show "Simple Text Viewer", so it is much clearer for the user
+    that the help viewer actually belongs to our application.    
+
+    \code
+    <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
+    <QHelpCollectionProject version="1.0">
+    <assistant>
+        <title>Simple Text Viewer</title>
+        <applicationIcon>images/handbook.png</applicationIcon>        
+        <cacheDirectory>Trolltech/SimpleTextViewer</cacheDirectory>
+    \endcode
+
+    The \c cacheDirectory tag specifies a subdirectory of the users
+    data directory (see the
+    \l{Using Qt Assistant as a Custom Help Viewer#Qt Help Collection Files}{Qt Help Collection Files})
+    where the cache file for the full text search or the settings file will
+    be stored.
+
+    After this, we set the page displayed by \QA when launched for the very
+    first time in its new configuration. The URL consists of the namespace
+    and virtual folder defined in the Qt help project file, followed by the
+    actual page file name.
+
+    \code
+        <startPage>qthelp://com.trolltech.examples.simpletextviewer/doc/index.html</startPage>
+    \endcode
+
+    Next, we alter the name of the "About" menu item to "About Simple
+    Text Viewer". The contents of the \gui{About} dialog are also changed
+    by specifying a file where the about text or icon is taken from.
+
+    \code
+        <aboutMenuText>
+            <text>About Simple Text Viewer</text>
+        </aboutMenuText>
+        <aboutDialog>
+            <file>about.txt</file>
+            <icon>images/icon.png</icon>
+        </aboutDialog>
+    \endcode
+
+    \QA offers the possibility to add or remove documentation via its
+    preferences dialog. This functionality is helpful when using \QA
+    as the central help viewer for more applications, but in our case
+    we want to actually prevent the user from removing the documentation.
+    So, we disable the documentation manager.
+
+    Since the address bar is not really relevant in such a small
+    documentation set we switch it off as well. By having just one filter
+    section, without any filter attributes, we can also disable the filter
+    functionality of \QA, which means that the filter page and the filter
+    toolbar will not be available.
+
+    \code
+        <enableDocumentationManager>false</enableDocumentationManager>
+        <enableAddressBar>false</enableAddressBar>
+        <enableFilterFunctionality>false</enableFilterFunctionality>
+    </assistant>
+    \endcode
+
+    For testing purposes, we already generated the compressed help file
+    and registered it with \QA's default help collection. With the
+    following lines we achieve the same result. The only and important
+    difference is that we register the compressed help file, not in
+    the default collection, but in our own collection file.
+
+    \code
+      <docFiles>
+        <generate>
+            <file>
+                <input>simpletextviewer.qhp</input>
+                <output>simpletextviewer.qch</output>
+                </file>
+            </generate>
+        <register>
+            <file>simpletextviewer.qch</file>
+            </register>
+        </docFiles>
+    </QHelpCollectionProject>
+    \endcode
+
+    As the last step, we have to generate the binary collection file
+    out of the help collection project file. This is done by running the
+    \c qcollectiongenerator tool.
+
+    \code
+    qcollectiongenerator simpletextviewer.qhcp -o simpletextviewer.qhc
+    \endcode
+
+    To test all our customizations made to \QA, we add the collection
+    file name to the command line:
+
+    \code
+    assistant -collectionFile simpletextviewer.qhc
+    \endcode
+
+    \section1 Controlling \QA via the Assistant Class
+
+    We will first take a look at how to start and operate \QA from a
+    remote application. For that purpose, we create a class called
+    \c Assistant.
+
+    This class provides a public function that is used to show pages
+    of the documentation, and one private helper function to make sure
+    that \QA is up and running.
+
+    Launching \QA is done in the function \c startAssistant() by simply
+    creating and starting a QProcess. If the process is already running,
+    the function returns immediately. Otherwise, the process has
+    to be set up and started.
+
+    \snippet examples/help/simpletextviewer/assistant.cpp 2
+
+    To start the process we need the executable name of \QA as well as the
+    command line arguments for running \QA in a customized mode. The
+    executable name is a little bit tricky since it depends on the
+    platform, but fortunately it is only different on Mac OS X.
+
+    The displayed documentation can be altered using the \c -collectionFile
+    command line argument when launching \QA. When started without any options,
+    \QA displays a default set of documentation. When Qt is installed,
+    the default documentation set in \QA contains the Qt reference
+    documentation as well as the tools that come with Qt, such as Qt
+    Designer and \c qmake.
+
+    In our example, we replace the default documentation set with our
+    custom documentation by passing our application-specific collection
+    file to the process's command line options.
+
+    As the last argument, we add \c -enableRemoteControl, which makes \QA
+    listen to its \c stdin channel for commands, such as those to display
+    a certain page in the documentation.
+    Then we start the process and wait until it is actually running. If,
+    for some reason \QA cannot be started, \c startAssistant() will return
+    false.
+
+    The implementation for \c showDocumentation() is now straightforward.
+    Firstly, we ensure that \QA is running, then we send the request to
+    display the \a page via the \c stdin channel of the process. It is very
+    important here that the command is terminated by the '\\0' character
+    followed by an end of line token to flush the channel.
+
+    \snippet examples/help/simpletextviewer/assistant.cpp 1
+
+    Finally, we make sure that \QA is terminated properly in the case that
+    the application is shut down. The destructor of QProcess kills the
+    process, meaning that the application has no possibility to do things
+    like save user settings, which would result in corrupted settings files.
+    To avoid this, we ask \QA to terminate in the destructor of the
+    \c Assistant class.
+
+    \snippet examples/help/simpletextviewer/assistant.cpp 0
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class 
+
+    \image simpletextviewer-mainwindow.png
+
+    The \c MainWindow class provides the main application window with
+    two menus: the \gui File menu lets the user open and view an
+    existing file, while the \gui Help menu provides information about
+    the application and about Qt, and lets the user open \QA to
+    display the application's documentation.
+
+    To be able to access the help functionality, we initialize the
+    \c Assistant object in the \c MainWindow's constructor.
+
+    \snippet examples/help/simpletextviewer/mainwindow.cpp 0
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/help/simpletextviewer/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    Then we create all the actions for the Simple Text Viewer application.
+    Of special interest is the \c assistantAct action accessible
+    via the \key{F1} shortcut or the \menu{Help|Help Contents} menu item.
+    This action is connected to the \c showDocumentation() slot of
+    the \c MainWindow class.
+
+    \snippet examples/help/simpletextviewer/mainwindow.cpp 4
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/help/simpletextviewer/mainwindow.cpp 5
+
+    In the \c showDocumentation() slot, we call the \c showDocumentation()
+    function of the \c Assistant class with the URL of home page of the
+    documentation.
+
+    \snippet examples/help/simpletextviewer/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+    Finally, we must reimplement the protected QWidget::closeEvent()
+    event handler to ensure that the application's \QA instance is
+    properly closed before we terminate the application.
+
+    \snippet examples/help/simpletextviewer/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    \section1 FindFileDialog Class
+
+    \image simpletextviewer-findfiledialog.png
+
+    The Simple Text Viewer application provides a find file dialog
+    allowing the user to search for files using wildcard matching. The
+    search is performed within the specified directory, and the user
+    is given an option to browse the existing file system to find the
+    relevant directory.
+
+    In the constructor we save the references to the \c Assistant
+    and \c QTextEdit objects passed as arguments. The \c Assistant
+    object will be used in the \c FindFileDialog's \c help() slot,
+    as we will see shortly, while the QTextEdit will be used in the
+    dialog's \c openFile() slot to display the chosen file.
+
+    \snippet examples/help/simpletextviewer/findfiledialog.cpp 0
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/help/simpletextviewer/findfiledialog.cpp 1
+
+    The most relevant member to observe in the \c FindFileDialog
+    class is the private \c help() slot. The slot is connected to the
+    dialog's \gui Help button, and brings the current \QA instance
+    to the foreground with the documentation for the dialog by
+    calling \c Assistant's \c showDocumentation() function.
+
+    \snippet examples/help/simpletextviewer/findfiledialog.cpp 2
+
+    \section1 Summary
+
+    In order to make \QA act as a customized help tool for
+    your application, you must provide your application with a
+    process that controls \QA in addition to a custom help collection
+    file including Qt compressed help files.
+
+    The \l{Using Qt Assistant as a Custom Help Viewer} document contains
+    more information about the options and settings available to
+    applications that use \QA as a custom help viewer.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/simpletreemodel.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/simpletreemodel.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5ddeb46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/simpletreemodel.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,346 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/simpletreemodel
+    \title Simple Tree Model Example
+
+    The Simple Tree Model example shows how to create a basic, read-only
+    hierarchical model to use with Qt's standard view classes. For a
+    description of simple non-hierarchical list and table models, see the
+    \l{model-view-programming.html}{Model/View Programming} overview.
+
+    \image simpletreemodel-example.png
+
+    Qt's model/view architecture provides a standard way for views to manipulate
+    information in a data source, using an abstract model of the data to
+    simplify and standardize the way it is accessed. Simple models represent
+    data as a table of items, and allow views to access this data via an
+    \l{model-view-model.html}{index-based} system. More generally, models can
+    be used to represent data in the form of a tree structure by allowing each
+    item to act as a parent to a table of child items.
+
+    Before attempting to implement a tree model, it is worth considering whether
+    the data is supplied by an external source, or whether it is going to be
+    maintained within the model itself. In this example, we will implement an
+    internal structure to hold data rather than discuss how to package data from
+    an external source.
+
+    \section1 Design and Concepts
+
+    The data structure that we use to represent the structure of the data takes
+    the form of a tree built from \c TreeItem objects. Each \c TreeItem
+    represents an item in a tree view, and contains several columns of data.
+
+    \target SimpleTreeModelStructure
+    \table
+    \row \i \inlineimage treemodel-structure.png
+    \i \bold{Simple Tree Model Structure}
+
+    The data is stored internally in the model using \c TreeItem objects that
+    are linked together in a pointer-based tree structure. Generally, each
+    \c TreeItem has a parent item, and can have a number of child items.
+    However, the root item in the tree structure has no parent item and it
+    is never referenced outside the model.
+
+    Each \c TreeItem contains information about its place in the tree
+    structure; it can return its parent item and its row number. Having
+    this information readily available makes implementing the model easier.
+
+    Since each item in a tree view usually contains several columns of data
+    (a title and a summary in this example), it is natural to store this
+    information in each item. For simplicity, we will use a list of QVariant
+    objects to store the data for each column in the item.
+    \endtable
+
+    The use of a pointer-based tree structure means that, when passing a
+    model index to a view, we can record the address of the corresponding
+    item in the index (see QAbstractItemModel::createIndex()) and retrieve
+    it later with QModelIndex::internalPointer(). This makes writing the
+    model easier and ensures that all model indexes that refer to the same
+    item have the same internal data pointer.
+
+    With the appropriate data structure in place, we can create a tree model
+    with a minimal amount of extra code to supply model indexes and data to
+    other components.
+
+    \section1 TreeItem Class Definition
+
+    The \c TreeItem class is defined as follows:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treeitem.h 0
+
+    The class is a basic C++ class. It does not inherit from QObject or
+    provide signals and slots. It is used to hold a list of QVariants,
+    containing column data, and information about its position in the tree
+    structure. The functions provide the following features:
+
+    \list
+    \o The \c appendChildItem() is used to add data when the model is first
+       constructed and is not used during normal use.
+    \o The \c child() and \c childCount() functions allow the model to obtain
+       information about any child items.
+    \o Information about the number of columns associated with the item is
+       provided by \c columnCount(), and the data in each column can be
+       obtained with the data() function.
+    \o The \c row() and \c parent() functions are used to obtain the item's
+       row number and parent item.
+    \endlist
+
+    The parent item and column data are stored in the \c parentItem and
+    \c itemData private member variables. The \c childItems variable contains
+    a list of pointers to the item's own child items.
+
+    \section1 TreeItem Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor is only used to record the item's parent and the data
+    associated with each column.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 0
+
+    A pointer to each of the child items belonging to this item will be
+    stored in the \c childItems private member variable. When the class's
+    destructor is called, it must delete each of these to ensure that
+    their memory is reused:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 1
+
+    Since each of the child items are constructed when the model is initially
+    populated with data, the function to add child items is straightforward:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 2
+
+    Each item is able to return any of its child items when given a suitable
+    row number. For example, in the \l{#SimpleTreeModelStructure}{above diagram},
+    the item marked with the letter "A" corresponds to the child of the root item
+    with \c{row = 0}, the "B" item is a child of the "A" item with \c{row = 1},
+    and the "C" item is a child of the root item with \c{row = 1}.
+
+    The \c child() function returns the child that corresponds to
+    the specified row number in the item's list of child items:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 3
+
+    The number of child items held can be found with \c childCount():
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 4
+
+    The \c TreeModel uses this function to determine the number of rows that
+    exist for a given parent item.
+
+    The \c row() function reports the item's location within its parent's
+    list of items:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 8
+
+    Note that, although the root item (with no parent item) is automatically
+    assigned a row number of 0, this information is never used by the model.
+
+    The number of columns of data in the item is trivially returned by the
+    \c columnCount() function.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 5
+
+    Column data is returned by the \c data() function, taking advantage of
+    QList's ability to provide sensible default values if the column number
+    is out of range:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 6
+
+    The item's parent is found with \c parent():
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treeitem.cpp 7
+
+    Note that, since the root item in the model will not have a parent, this
+    function will return zero in that case. We need to ensure that the model
+    handles this case correctly when we implement the \c TreeModel::parent()
+    function.
+
+    \section1 TreeModel Class Definition
+
+    The \c TreeModel class is defined as follows:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treemodel.h 0
+
+    This class is similar to most other subclasses of QAbstractItemModel that
+    provide read-only models. Only the form of the constructor and the
+    \c setupModelData() function are specific to this model. In addition, we
+    provide a destructor to clean up when the model is destroyed.
+
+    \section1 TreeModel Class Implementation
+
+    For simplicity, the model does not allow its data to be edited. As a
+    result, the constructor takes an argument containing the data that the
+    model will share with views and delegates:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 0
+
+    It is up to the constructor to create a root item for the model. This
+    item only contains vertical header data for convenience. We also use it
+    to reference the internal data structure that contains the model data,
+    and it is used to represent an imaginary parent of top-level items in
+    the model.
+
+    The model's internal data structure is populated with items by the
+    \c setupModelData() function. We will examine this function separately
+    at the end of this document.
+
+    The destructor ensures that the root item and all of its descendants
+    are deleted when the model is destroyed:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 1
+
+    Since we cannot add data to the model after it is constructed and set
+    up, this simplifies the way that the internal tree of items is managed.
+
+    Models must implement an \c index() function to provide indexes for
+    views and delegates to use when accessing data. Indexes are created
+    for other components when they are referenced by their row and column
+    numbers, and their parent model index. If an invalid model
+    index is specified as the parent, it is up to the model to return an
+    index that corresponds to a top-level item in the model.
+
+    When supplied with a model index, we first check whether it is valid.
+    If it is not, we assume that a top-level item is being referred to;
+    otherwise, we obtain the data pointer from the model index with its
+    \l{QModelIndex::internalPointer()}{internalPointer()} function and use
+    it to reference a \c TreeItem object. Note that all the model indexes
+    that we construct will contain a pointer to an existing \c TreeItem,
+    so we can guarantee that any valid model indexes that we receive will
+    contain a valid data pointer.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 6
+
+    Since the row and column arguments to this function refer to a
+    child item of the corresponding parent item, we obtain the item using
+    the \c TreeItem::child() function. The
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::createIndex()}{createIndex()} function is used
+    to create a model index to be returned. We specify the row and column
+    numbers, and a pointer to the item itself. The model index can be used
+    later to obtain the item's data.
+
+    The way that the \c TreeItem objects are defined makes writing the
+    \c parent() function easy:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 7
+
+    We only need to ensure that we never return a model index corresponding
+    to the root item. To be consistent with the way that the \c index()
+    function is implemented, we return an invalid model index for the
+    parent of any top-level items in the model.
+
+    When creating a model index to return, we must specify the row and
+    column numbers of the parent item within its own parent. We can
+    easily discover the row number with the \c TreeItem::row() function,
+    but we follow a convention of specifying 0 as the column number of
+    the parent. The model index is created with
+    \l{QAbstractItemModel::createIndex()}{createIndex()} in the same way
+    as in the \c index() function.
+
+    The \c rowCount() function simply returns the number of child items
+    for the \c TreeItem that corresponds to a given model index, or the
+    number of top-level items if an invalid index is specified:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 8
+
+    Since each item manages its own column data, the \c columnCount()
+    function has to call the item's own \c columnCount() function to
+    determine how many columns are present for a given model index.
+    As with the \c rowCount() function, if an invalid model index is
+    specified, the number of columns returned is determined from the
+    root item:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 2
+
+    Data is obtained from the model via \c data(). Since the item manages
+    its own columns, we need to use the column number to retrieve the data
+    with the \c TreeItem::data() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 3
+
+    Note that we only support the \l{Qt::ItemDataRole}{DisplayRole}
+    in this implementation, and we also return invalid QVariant objects for
+    invalid model indexes.
+
+    We use the \c flags() function to ensure that views know that the
+    model is read-only:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 4
+
+    The \c headerData() function returns data that we conveniently stored
+    in the root item:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simpletreemodel/treemodel.cpp 5
+
+    This information could have been supplied in a different way: either
+    specified in the constructor, or hard coded into the \c headerData()
+    function.
+
+    \section1 Setting Up the Data in the Model
+
+    We use the \c setupModelData() function to set up the initial data in
+    the model. This function parses a text file, extracting strings of
+    text to use in the model, and creates item objects that record both
+    the data and the overall model structure.
+    Naturally, this function works in a way that is very specific to
+    this model. We provide the following description of its behavior,
+    and refer the reader to the example code itself for more information.
+
+    We begin with a text file in the following format:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_simpletreemodel.qdoc 0
+    \dots
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_simpletreemodel.qdoc 1
+
+    We process the text file with the following two rules:
+
+    \list
+    \o For each pair of strings on each line, create an item (or node)
+       in a tree structure, and place each string in a column of data
+       in the item.
+    \o When the first string on a line is indented with respect to the
+       first string on the previous line, make the item a child of the
+       previous item created.
+    \endlist
+
+    To ensure that the model works correctly, it is only necessary to
+    create instances of \c TreeItem with the correct data and parent item.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/simplewidgetmapper.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/simplewidgetmapper.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2fdbf25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/simplewidgetmapper.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/simplewidgetmapper
+    \title Simple Widget Mapper Example
+
+    The Simple Widget Mapper example shows how to use a widget mapper to display
+    data from a model in a collection of widgets.
+
+    \image simplewidgetmapper-example.png
+
+    The QDataWidgetMapper class allows information obtained from a
+    \l{Model Classes}{model} to be viewed and edited in a collection of
+    widgets instead of in an \l{View Classes}{item view}.
+    Any model derived from QAbstractItemModel can be used as the source of
+    data and almost any input widget can be used to display it.
+
+    The example itself is very simple: we create \c Window, a QWidget subclass
+    that we use to hold the widgets used to present the data, and show it. The
+    \c Window class will provide buttons that the user can click to show
+    different records from the model.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The class provides a constructor, a slot to keep the buttons up to date,
+    and a private function to set up the model:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simplewidgetmapper/window.h Window definition
+
+    In addition to the QDataWidgetMapper object and the controls used to make
+    up the user interface, we use a QStandardItemModel to hold our data.
+    We could use a custom model, but this standard implementation is sufficient
+    for our purposes.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor of the \c Window class can be explained in three parts.
+    In the first part, we set up the widgets used for the user interface:
+    
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simplewidgetmapper/window.cpp Set up widgets
+
+    We also set up the buddy relationships between various labels and the
+    corresponding input widgets.
+
+    Next, we set up the widget mapper, relating each input widget to a column
+    in the model specified by the call to \l{QDataWidgetMapper::}{setModel()}:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simplewidgetmapper/window.cpp Set up the mapper
+
+    We also connect the mapper to the \gui{Next} and \gui{Previous} buttons
+    via its \l{QDataWidgetMapper::}{toNext()} and
+    \l{QDataWidgetMapper::}{toPrevious()} slots. The mapper's
+    \l{QDataWidgetMapper::}{currentIndexChanged()} signal is connected to the
+    \c{updateButtons()} slot in the window which we'll show later.
+
+    In the final part of the constructor, we set up the layout, placing each
+    of the widgets in a grid (we could also use a QFormLayout for this):
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simplewidgetmapper/window.cpp Set up the layout
+
+    Lastly, we set the window title and initialize the mapper by setting it to
+    refer to the first row in the model.
+
+    The model is initialized in the window's \c{setupModel()} function. Here,
+    we create a standard model with 5 rows and 3 columns, and we insert some
+    sample names, addresses and ages into each row:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simplewidgetmapper/window.cpp Set up the model
+
+    As a result, each row can be treated like a record in a database, and the
+    widget mapper will read the data from each row, using the column numbers
+    specified earlier to access the correct data for each widget. This is
+    shown in the following diagram:
+
+    \image widgetmapper-simple-mapping.png
+
+    Since the user can navigate using the buttons in the user interface, the
+    example is fully-functional at this point, but to make it a bit more
+    user-friendly, we implement the \c{updateButtons()} slot to show when the
+    user is viewing the first or last records:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/simplewidgetmapper/window.cpp Slot for updating the buttons
+
+    If the mapper is referring to the first row in the model, the \gui{Previous}
+    button is disabled. Similarly, the \gui{Next} button is disabled if the
+    mapper reaches the last row in the model.
+
+    \section1 More Complex Mappings
+
+    The QDataWidgetMapper class makes it easy to relate information from a
+    model to widgets in a user interface. However, it is sometimes necessary
+    to use input widgets which offer choices to the user, such as QComboBox,
+    in conjunction with a widget mapper.
+
+    In these situations, although the mapping to input widgets remains simple,
+    more work needs to be done to expose additional data to the widget mapper.
+    This is covered by the \l{Combo Widget Mapper Example}{Combo Widget Mapper}
+    and \l{SQL Widget Mapper Example}{SQL Widget Mapper}
+    examples.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/sipdialog.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/sipdialog.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..817f5e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/sipdialog.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example dialogs/sipdialog
+    \title SIP Dialog Example
+    \ingroup qtce
+
+    The SIP Dialog example shows how to create a dialog that is aware of 
+    the Windows Mobile SIP (Software Input Panel) and reacts to it.
+
+    \table
+    \row \o \inlineimage sipdialog-closed.png
+         \o \inlineimage sipdialog-opened.png
+    \endtable
+
+    Sometimes it is necessary for a dialog to take the SIP into account,
+    as the SIP may hide important input widgets. The SIP Dialog Example
+    shows how a \c Dialog object, \c dialog, can be resized accordingly
+    if the SIP is opened, by embedding the contents of \c dialog in a
+    QScrollArea.
+
+    \section1 Dialog Class Definition
+
+    The \c Dialog class is a subclass of QDialog that implements a public
+    slot, \c desktopResized(), and a public function, \c reactToSIP(). Also,
+    it holds a private instance of QRect, \c desktopGeometry.
+
+    \snippet dialogs/sipdialog/dialog.h Dialog header
+
+    \section1 Dialog Class Implementation
+
+    In the constructor of \c Dialog, we start by obtaining the
+    available geometry of the screen with
+    \l{QDesktopWidget::availableGeometry()}{availableGeometry()}. The
+    parameter used is \c 0 to indicate that we require the primary screen.
+
+    \snippet dialogs/sipdialog/dialog.cpp Dialog constructor part1
+
+    We set the window's title to "SIP Dialog Example" and declare a QScrollArea
+    object, \c scrollArea. Next we instantiate a QGroupBox, \c groupBox, with
+    \c scrollArea as its parent. The title of \c groupBox is also set to
+    "SIP Dialog Example". A QGridLayout object, \c gridLayout, is then used
+    as \c{groupBox}'s layout.
+
+    We create a QLineEdit, a QLabel and a QPushButton and we set the
+    \l{QWidget::setMinimumWidth()}{minimumWidth} property to 220 pixels,
+    respectively.
+
+    \snippet dialogs/sipdialog/dialog.cpp Dialog constructor part2
+
+    Also, all three widgets' text are set accordingly. The
+    \l{QGridLayout::setVerticalSpacing()}{verticalSpacing} property of
+    \c gridLayout is set based on the height of \c desktopGeometry. This
+    is to adapt to the different form factors of Windows Mobile. Then, we
+    add our widgets to the layout.
+
+    \snippet dialogs/sipdialog/dialog.cpp Dialog constructor part3
+
+    The \c{scrollArea}'s widget is set to \c groupBox. We use a QHBoxLayout
+    object, \c layout, to contain \c scrollArea. The \c{Dialog}'s layout
+    is set to \c layout and the scroll area's horizontal scroll bar is turned
+    off.
+
+    \snippet dialogs/sipdialog/dialog.cpp Dialog constructor part4
+
+    The following signals are connected to their respective slots:
+    \list
+        \o \c{button}'s \l{QPushButton::pressed()}{pressed()} signal to
+        \l{QApplication}'s \l{QApplication::closeAllWindows()}
+        {closeAllWindows()} slot,
+        \o \l{QDesktopWidget}'s \l{QDesktopWidget::workAreaResized()}
+        {workAreaResized()} signal to \c{dialog}'s \c desktopResized() slot.
+    \endlist
+
+    \snippet dialogs/sipdialog/dialog.cpp Dialog constructor part5
+
+    The \c desktopResized() function accepts an integer, \a screen,
+    corresponding to the screen's index. We only invoke \c reactToSIP()
+    if \a screen is the primary screen (e.g. index = 0).
+
+    \snippet dialogs/sipdialog/dialog.cpp desktopResized() function
+
+    The \c reactToSIP() function resizes \c dialog accordingly if the
+    desktop's available geometry changed vertically, as this change signifies
+    that the SIP may have been opened or closed.
+
+    \snippet dialogs/sipdialog/dialog.cpp reactToSIP() function
+
+    If the height has decreased, we unset the maximized window state.
+    Otherwise, we set the maximized window state. Lastly, we update
+    \c desktopGeometry to the desktop's available geometry.
+
+    \section1 The \c main() function
+
+    The \c main() function for the SIP Dialog example instantiates \c Dialog
+    and invokes its \l{QDialog::exec()}{exec()} function.
+
+    \snippet dialogs/sipdialog/main.cpp main() function
+
+    \note Although this example uses a dialog, the techniques used here apply to
+    all top-level widgets respectively.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/sliders.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/sliders.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..650fdcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/sliders.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,269 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/sliders
+    \title Sliders Example
+
+    Qt provides three types of slider-like widgets: QSlider,
+    QScrollBar and QDial. They all inherit most of their
+    functionality from QAbstractSlider, and can in theory replace
+    each other in an application since the differences only concern
+    their look and feel. This example shows what they look like, how
+    they work and how their behavior and appearance can be
+    manipulated through their properties.
+
+    The example also demonstrates how signals and slots can be used to
+    synchronize the behavior of two or more widgets.
+
+    \image sliders-example.png Screenshot of the Sliders example
+
+    The Sliders example consists of two classes:
+
+    \list
+
+    \o \c SlidersGroup is a custom widget. It combines a QSlider, a
+    QScrollBar and a QDial.
+
+    \o \c Window is the main widget combining a QGroupBox and a
+    QStackedWidget. In this example, the QStackedWidget provides a
+    stack of two \c SlidersGroup widgets. The QGroupBox contain
+    several widgets that control the behavior of the slider-like
+    widgets.
+
+    \endlist
+
+    First we will review the \c Window class, then we
+    will take a look at the \c SlidersGroup class.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/window.h 0
+
+    The \c Window class inherits from QWidget. It displays the slider
+    widgets and allows the user to set their minimum, maximum and
+    current values and to customize their appearance, key bindings
+    and orientation. We use a private \c createControls() function to
+    create the widgets that provide these controlling mechanisms and
+    to connect them to the slider widgets.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/window.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor we first create the two \c SlidersGroup
+    widgets that display the slider widgets horizontally and
+    vertically, and add them to the QStackedWidget. QStackedWidget
+    provides a stack of widgets where only the top widget is visible.
+    With \c createControls() we create a connection from a
+    controlling widget to the QStackedWidget, making the user able to
+    choose between horizontal and vertical orientation of the slider
+    widgets. The rest of the controlling mechanisms is implemented by
+    the same function call.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/window.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/window.cpp 2
+
+    Then we connect the \c horizontalSliders, \c verticalSliders and
+    \c valueSpinBox to each other, so that the slider widgets and the
+    control widget will behave synchronized when the current value of
+    one of them changes. The \c valueChanged() signal is emitted with
+    the new value as argument. The \c setValue() slot sets the
+    current value of the widget to the new value, and emits \c
+    valueChanged() if the new value is different from the old one.
+
+    We put the group of control widgets and the stacked widget in a
+    horizontal layout before we initialize the minimum, maximum and
+    current values. The initialization of the current value will
+    propagate to the slider widgets through the connection we made
+    between \c valueSpinBox and the \c SlidersGroup widgets. The
+    minimum and maximum values propagate through the connections we
+    created with \c createControls().
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/window.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/window.cpp 4
+
+    In the private \c createControls() function, we let a QGroupBox
+    (\c controlsGroup) display the control widgets. A group box can
+    provide a frame, a title and a keyboard shortcut, and displays
+    various other widgets inside itself. The group of control widgets
+    is composed by two checkboxes, three spin boxes (with labels) and
+    one combobox.
+
+    After creating the labels, we create the two checkboxes.
+    Checkboxes are typically used to represent features in an
+    application that can be enabled or disabled. When \c
+    invertedAppearance is enabled, the slider values are inverted.
+    The table below shows the appearance for the different
+    slider-like widgets:
+
+    \table
+    \header \o                \o{2,1} QSlider                   \o{2,1} QScrollBar                \o{2,1} QDial
+    \header \o                \o Normal        \o Inverted      \o Normal        \o Inverted      \o Normal         \o Inverted
+    \row    \o Qt::Horizontal \o Left to right \o Right to left \o Left to right \o Right to left \o Clockwise \o Counterclockwise
+    \row    \o Qt::Vertical   \o Bottom to top \o Top to bottom \o Top to bottom \o Bottom to top \o Clockwise \o Counterclockwise
+    \endtable
+
+    It is common to invert the appearance of a vertical QSlider. A
+    vertical slider that controls volume, for example, will typically
+    go from bottom to top (the non-inverted appearance), whereas a
+    vertical slider that controls the position of an object on screen
+    might go from top to bottom, because screen coordinates go from
+    top to bottom.
+
+    When the \c invertedKeyBindings option is enabled (corresponding
+    to the QAbstractSlider::invertedControls property), the slider's
+    wheel and key events are inverted. The normal key bindings mean
+    that scrolling the mouse wheel "up" or using keys like page up
+    will increase the slider's current value towards its maximum.
+    Inverted, the same wheel and key events will move the value
+    toward the slider's minimum. This can be useful if the \e
+    appearance of a slider is inverted: Some users might expect the
+    keys to still work the same way on the value, whereas others
+    might expect \key PageUp to mean "up" on the screen.
+
+    Note that for horizontal and vertical scroll bars, the key
+    bindings are inverted by default: \key PageDown increases the
+    current value, and \key PageUp decreases it.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/window.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/window.cpp 6
+
+    Then we create the spin boxes. QSpinBox allows the user to choose
+    a value by clicking the up and down buttons or pressing the \key
+    Up and \key Down keys on the keyboard to modify the value
+    currently displayed. The user can also type in the value
+    manually. The spin boxes control the minimum, maximum and current
+    values for the QSlider, QScrollBar, and QDial widgets.
+
+    We create a QComboBox that allows the user to choose the
+    orientation of the slider widgets. The QComboBox widget is a
+    combined button and popup list. It provides a means of presenting
+    a list of options to the user in a way that takes up the minimum
+    amount of screen space.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/window.cpp 7
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/window.cpp 8
+
+    We synchronize the behavior of the control widgets and the slider
+    widgets through their signals and slots. We connect each control
+    widget to both the horizontal and vertical group of slider
+    widgets. We also connect \c orientationCombo to the
+    QStackedWidget, so that the correct "page" is shown. Finally, we
+    lay out the control widgets in a QGridLayout within the \c
+    controlsGroup group box.
+
+    \section1 SlidersGroup Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.h 0
+
+    The \c SlidersGroup class inherits from QGroupBox. It provides a
+    frame and a title, and contains a QSlider, a QScrollBar and a
+    QDial.
+
+    We provide a \c valueChanged() signal and a public \c setValue()
+    slot with equivalent functionality to the ones in QAbstractSlider
+    and QSpinBox. In addition, we implement several other public
+    slots to set the minimum and maximum value, and invert the slider
+    widgets' appearance as well as key bindings.
+
+    \section1 SlidersGroup Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.cpp 0
+
+    First we create the slider-like widgets with the appropiate
+    properties. In particular we set the focus policy for each
+    widget. Qt::FocusPolicy is an enum type that defines the various
+    policies a widget can have with respect to acquiring keyboard
+    focus. The Qt::StrongFocus policy means that the widget accepts
+    focus by both tabbing and clicking.
+
+    Then we connect the widgets with each other, so that they will
+    stay synchronized when the current value of one of them changes.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.cpp 2
+
+    We connect \c {dial}'s \c valueChanged() signal to the
+    \c{SlidersGroup}'s \c valueChanged() signal, to notify the other
+    widgets in the application (i.e., the control widgets) of the
+    changed value.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.cpp 3
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.cpp 4
+
+    Finally, depending on the \l {Qt::Orientation}{orientation} given
+    at the time of construction, we choose and create the layout for
+    the slider widgets within the group box.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.cpp 6
+
+    The \c setValue() slot sets the value of the QSlider. We don't
+    need to explicitly call
+    \l{QAbstractSlider::setValue()}{setValue()} on the QScrollBar and
+    QDial widgets, since QSlider will emit the
+    \l{QAbstractSlider::valueChanged()}{valueChanged()} signal when
+    its value changes, triggering a domino effect.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.cpp 7
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.cpp 8
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.cpp 9
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.cpp 10
+
+    The \c setMinimum() and \c setMaximum() slots are used by the \c
+    Window class to set the range of the QSlider, QScrollBar, and
+    QDial widgets.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.cpp 11
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.cpp 12
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.cpp 13
+    \snippet examples/widgets/sliders/slidersgroup.cpp 14
+
+    The \c invertAppearance() and \c invertKeyBindings() slots
+    control the child widgets'
+    \l{QAbstractSlider::invertedAppearance}{invertedAppearance} and
+    \l{QAbstractSlider::invertedControls}{invertedControls}
+    properties.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/spinboxdelegate.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/spinboxdelegate.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..542eebd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/spinboxdelegate.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/spinboxdelegate
+    \title Spin Box Delegate Example
+
+    The Spin Box Delegate example shows how to create an editor for a custom delegate in
+    the model/view framework by reusing a standard Qt editor widget.
+
+    The model/view framework provides a standard delegate that is used by default
+    with the standard view classes. For most purposes, the selection of editor
+    widgets available through this delegate is sufficient for editing text, boolean
+    values, and other simple data types. However, for specific data types, it is
+    sometimes necessary to use a custom delegate to either display the data in a
+    specific way, or allow the user to edit it with a custom control.
+
+    \image spinboxdelegate-example.png
+
+    This concepts behind this example are covered in the
+    \l{model-view-delegate.html}{Delegate Classes} chapter of the
+    \l{model-view-programming.html}{Model/View Programming} overview.
+
+    \section1 SpinBoxDelegate Class Definition
+
+    The definition of the delegate is as follows:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/spinboxdelegate/delegate.h 0
+
+    The delegate class declares only those functions that are needed to
+    create an editor widget, display it at the correct location in a view,
+    and communicate with a model. Custom delegates can also provide their
+    own painting code by reimplementing the \c paintEvent() function.
+
+    \section1 SpinBoxDelegate Class Implementation
+
+    Since the delegate is stateless, the constructor only needs to
+    call the base class's constructor with the parent QObject as its
+    argument:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/spinboxdelegate/delegate.cpp 0
+
+    Since the delegate is a subclass of QItemDelegate, the data it retrieves
+    from the model is displayed in a default style, and we do not need to
+    provide a custom \c paintEvent().
+
+    The \c createEditor() function returns an editor widget, in this case a
+    spin box that restricts values from the model to integers from 0 to 100
+    inclusive.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/spinboxdelegate/delegate.cpp 1
+
+    We install an event filter on the spin box to ensure that it behaves in
+    a way that is consistent with other delegates. The implementation for
+    the event filter is provided by the base class.
+
+    The \c setEditorData() function reads data from the model, converts it
+    to an integer value, and writes it to the editor widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/spinboxdelegate/delegate.cpp 2
+
+    Since the view treats delegates as ordinary QWidget instances, we have
+    to use a static cast before we can set the value in the spin box.
+
+    The \c setModelData() function reads the contents of the spin box, and
+    writes it to the model.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/spinboxdelegate/delegate.cpp 3
+
+    We call \l{QSpinBox::interpretText()}{interpretText()} to make sure that
+    we obtain the most up-to-date value in the spin box.
+
+    The \c updateEditorGeometry() function updates the editor widget's
+    geometry using the information supplied in the style option. This is the
+    minimum that the delegate must do in this case.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/spinboxdelegate/delegate.cpp 4
+
+    More complex editor widgets may divide the rectangle available in
+    \c{option.rect} between different child widgets if required.
+
+    \section1 The Main Function
+
+    This example is written in a slightly different way to many of the
+    other examples supplied with Qt. To demonstrate the use of a custom
+    editor widget in a standard view, it is necessary to set up a model
+    containing some arbitrary data and a view to display it.
+
+    We set up the application in the normal way, construct a standard item
+    model to hold some data, set up a table view to use the data in the
+    model, and construct a custom delegate to use for editing:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/spinboxdelegate/main.cpp 0
+
+    The table view is informed about the delegate, and will use it to
+    display each of the items. Since the delegate is a subclass of
+    QItemDelegate, each cell in the table will be rendered using standard
+    painting operations.
+
+    We insert some arbitrary data into the model for demonstration purposes:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/spinboxdelegate/main.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/spinboxdelegate/main.cpp 2
+
+    Finally, the table view is displayed with a window title, and we start
+    the application's event loop:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/spinboxdelegate/main.cpp 3
+
+    Each of the cells in the table can now be edited in the usual way, but
+    the spin box ensures that the data returned to the model is always
+    constrained by the values allowed by the spin box delegate.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/spinboxes.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/spinboxes.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d8b0daa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/spinboxes.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,205 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*! 
+    \example widgets/spinboxes
+    \title Spin Boxes Example
+
+    The Spin Boxes example shows how to use the many different types of spin boxes
+    available in Qt, from a simple QSpinBox widget to more complex editors like
+    the QDateTimeEdit widget.
+
+    \image spinboxes-example.png
+
+    The example consists of a single \c Window class that is used to display the
+    different spin box-based widgets available with Qt.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The \c Window class inherits QWidget and contains two slots that are used
+    to provide interactive features:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.h 0
+
+    The private functions are used to set up each type of spin box in the window.
+    We use member variables to keep track of various widgets so that they can
+    be reconfigured when required.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor simply calls private functions to set up the different types
+    of spin box used in the example, and places each group in a layout:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 0
+
+    We use the layout to manage the arrangement of the window's child widgets,
+    and change the window title.
+
+    The \c createSpinBoxes() function constructs a QGroupBox and places three
+    QSpinBox widgets inside it with descriptive labels to indicate the types of
+    input they expect.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 1
+
+    The first spin box shows the simplest way to use QSpinBox. It accepts values
+    from -20 to 20, the current value can be increased or decreased by 1 with
+    either the arrow buttons or \key{Up} and \key{Down} keys, and the default
+    value is 0.
+
+    The second spin box uses a larger step size and displays a suffix to
+    provide more information about the type of data the number represents:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 2
+
+    This spin box also displays a
+    \l{QAbstractSpinBox::specialValueText}{special value} instead of the minimum
+    value defined for it. This means that it will never show \gui{0%}, but will
+    display \gui{Automatic} when the minimum value is selected.
+
+    The third spin box shows how a prefix can be used:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 4
+
+    For simplicity, we show a spin box with a prefix and no suffix. It is also
+    possible to use both at the same time.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 5
+
+    The rest of the function sets up a layout for the group box and places each
+    of the widgets inside it.
+
+    The \c createDateTimeEdits() function constructs another group box with a
+    selection of spin boxes used for editing dates and times.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 6
+
+    The first spin box is a QDateEdit widget that is able to accept dates
+    within a given range specified using QDate values. The arrow buttons and
+    \key{Up} and \key{Down} keys can be used to increase and decrease the
+    values for year, month, and day when the cursor is in the relevant section.
+
+    The second spin box is a QTimeEdit widget:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 7
+
+    Acceptable values for the time are defined using QTime values.
+
+    The third spin box is a QDateTimeEdit widget that can display both date and
+    time values, and we place a label above it to indicate the range of allowed
+    times for a meeting. These widgets will be updated when the user changes a
+    format string.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 8
+
+    The format string used for the date time editor, which is also shown in the
+    string displayed by the label, is chosen from a set of strings in a combobox:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 9
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 10
+
+    A signal from this combobox is connected to a slot in the \c Window class
+    (shown later).
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 11
+
+    Each child widget of the group box in placed in a layout.
+
+    The \c setFormatString() slot is called whenever the user selects a new
+    format string in the combobox. The display format for the QDateTimeEdit
+    widget is set using the raw string passed by the signal:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 12
+
+    Depending on the visible sections in the widget, we set a new date or time
+    range, and update the associated label to provide relevant information for
+    the user:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 13
+
+    When the format string is changed, there will be an appropriate label and
+    entry widget for dates, times, or both types of input.
+
+    The \c createDoubleSpinBoxes() function constructs three spin boxes that are
+    used to input double-precision floating point numbers:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 14
+
+    Before the QDoubleSpinBox widgets are constructed, we create a spin box to
+    control how many decimal places they show. By default, only two decimal places
+    are shown in the following spin boxes, each of which is the equivalent of a
+    spin box in the group created by the \c createSpinBoxes() function.
+
+    The first double spin box shows a basic double-precision spin box with the
+    same range, step size, and default value as the first spin box in the
+    \c createSpinBoxes() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 15
+
+    However, this spin box also allows non-integer values to be entered.
+
+    The second spin box displays a suffix and shows a special value instead
+    of the minimum value:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 16
+
+    The third spin box displays a prefix instead of a suffix:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 17
+
+    We connect the QSpinBox widget that specifies the precision to a slot in
+    the \c Window class.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 18
+
+    The rest of the function places each of the widgets into a layout for the
+    group box.
+
+    The \c changePrecision() slot is called when the user changes the value in
+    the precision spin box:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/spinboxes/window.cpp 19
+
+    This function simply uses the integer supplied by the signal to specify the
+    number of decimal places in each of the QDoubleSpinBox widgets. Each one
+    of these will be updated automatically when their
+    \l{QDoubleSpinBox::decimals}{decimals} property is changed.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/sqlwidgetmapper.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/sqlwidgetmapper.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..173aea4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/sqlwidgetmapper.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,199 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example sql/sqlwidgetmapper
+    \title SQL Widget Mapper Example
+
+    The SQL Widget Mapper example shows how to use a map information from a
+    database to widgets on a form.
+
+    \image sql-widget-mapper.png
+
+    In the \l{Combo Widget Mapper Example}, we showed how to use a named
+    mapping between a widget mapper and a QComboBox widget with a special
+    purpose model to relate values in the model to a list of choices.
+
+    Again, we create a \c Window class with an almost identical user interface,
+    providing a combo box to allow their addresses to be classified as "Home",
+    "Work" or "Other". However, instead of using a separate model to hold these
+    address types, we use one database table to hold the example data and
+    another to hold the address types. In this way, we store all the
+    information in the same place.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The class provides a constructor, a slot to keep the buttons up to date,
+    and a private function to set up the model:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/sqlwidgetmapper/window.h Window definition
+
+    In addition to the QDataWidgetMapper object and the controls used to make
+    up the user interface, we use a QStandardItemModel to hold our data and
+    a QStringListModel to hold information about the types of address that
+    can be applied to each person's data.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    The first act performed by the \c Window class constructor is to set up
+    the model used to hold the example data. Since this is a key part of the
+    example, we will look at this first.
+
+    The model is initialized in the window's \c{setupModel()} function. Here,
+    we create a SQLite database containing a "person" table with primary key,
+    name, address and type fields.
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/sqlwidgetmapper/window.cpp Set up the main table
+
+    On each row of the table, we insert default values for these fields,
+    including values for the address types that correspond to the address
+    types are stored in a separate table.
+
+    \image widgetmapper-sql-mapping-table.png
+
+    We create an "addresstype" table containing the identifiers used in the
+    "person" table and the corresponding strings:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/sqlwidgetmapper/window.cpp Set up the address type table
+
+    The "typeid" field in the "person" table is related to the contents of
+    the "addresstype" table via a relation in a QSqlRelationalTableModel.
+    This kind of model performs all the necessary work to store the data in
+    a database and also allows any relations to be used as models in their
+    own right.
+
+    In this case, we have defined a relation for the "typeid" field in the
+    "person" table that relates it to the "id" field in the "addresstype"
+    table and which causes the contents of the "description" field to be
+    used wherever the "typeid" is presented to the user. (See the
+    QSqlRelationalTableModel::setRelation() documentation for details.)
+
+    \image widgetmapper-sql-mapping.png
+
+    The constructor of the \c Window class can be explained in three parts.
+    In the first part, we set up the model used to hold the data, then we set
+    up the widgets used for the user interface:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/sqlwidgetmapper/window.cpp Set up widgets
+
+    We obtain a model for the combo box from the main model, based on the
+    relation we set up for the "typeid" field. The call to the combo box's
+    \l{QComboBox::}{setModelColumn()} selects the field in the field in the
+    model to display.
+
+    Note that this approach is similar to the one used in the
+    \l{Combo Widget Mapper Example} in that we set up a model for the
+    combo box. However, in this case, we obtain a model based on a relation
+    in the QSqlRelationalTableModel rather than create a separate one.
+
+    Next, we set up the widget mapper, relating each input widget to a field
+    in the model:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/sqlwidgetmapper/window.cpp Set up the mapper
+
+    For the combo box, we already know the index of the field in the model
+    from the \c{setupModel()} function. We use a QSqlRelationalDelegate as
+    a proxy between the mapper and the input widgets to match up the "typeid"
+    values in the model with those in the combo box's model and populate the
+    combo box with descriptions rather than integer values.
+
+    As a result, the user is able to select an item from the combo box,
+    and the associated value is written back to the model.
+
+    The rest of the constructor is very similar to that of the
+    \l{Simple Widget Mapper Example}:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/sqlwidgetmapper/window.cpp Set up connections and layouts
+
+    We show the implementation of the \c{updateButtons()} slot for
+    completeness:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/sqlwidgetmapper/window.cpp Slot for updating the buttons
+
+    \omit
+    \section1 Delegate Class Definition and Implementation
+
+    The delegate we use to mediate interaction between the widget mapper and
+    the input widgets is a small QItemDelegate subclass:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/sqlwidgetmapper/delegate.h Delegate class definition
+
+    This provides implementations of the two standard functions used to pass
+    data between editor widgets and the model (see the \l{Delegate Classes}
+    documentation for a more general description of these functions).
+
+    Since we only provide an empty implementation of the constructor, we
+    concentrate on the other two functions.
+
+    The \l{QItemDelegate::}{setEditorData()} implementation takes the data
+    referred to by the model index supplied and processes it according to
+    the presence of a \c currentIndex property in the editor widget:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/sqlwidgetmapper/delegate.cpp setEditorData implementation
+
+    If, like QComboBox, the editor widget has this property, it is set using
+    the value from the model. Since we are passing around QVariant values,
+    the strings stored in the model are automatically converted to the integer
+    values needed for the \c currentIndex property.
+
+    As a result, instead of showing "0", "1" or "2" in the combo box, one of
+    its predefined set of items is shown. We call QItemDelegate::setEditorData()
+    for widgets without the \c currentIndex property.
+
+    The \l{QItemDelegate::}{setModelData()} implementation performs the reverse
+    process, taking the value stored in the widget's \c currentIndex property
+    and storing it back in the model:
+
+    \snippet examples/sql/sqlwidgetmapper/delegate.cpp setModelData implementation
+    \endomit
+
+    \section1 Summary and Further Reading
+
+    The use of a separate model for the combo box and a special delegate for the
+    widget mapper allows us to present a menu of choices to the user. Although
+    the choices are stored in the same database as the user's data, they are held
+    in a separate table. Using this approach, we can reconstructed complete records
+    at a later time while using database features appropriately.
+
+    If SQL models are not being used, it is still possible to use more than
+    one model to present choices to the user. This is covered by the
+    \l{Combo Widget Mapper Example}.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/standarddialogs.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/standarddialogs.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db533ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/standarddialogs.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*! 
+    \example dialogs/standarddialogs
+    \title Standard Dialogs Example
+
+    The Standard Dialogs example shows the standard dialogs that are provided by Qt.
+
+    \image standarddialogs-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/stardelegate.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/stardelegate.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fde3316
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/stardelegate.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,310 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example itemviews/stardelegate
+    \title Star Delegate Example
+
+    The Star Delegate example shows how to create a delegate that
+    can paint itself and that supports editing.
+
+    \image stardelegate.png The Star Delegate Example
+
+    When displaying data in a QListView, QTableView, or QTreeView,
+    the individual items are drawn by a
+    \l{Delegate Classes}{delegate}. Also, when the user starts
+    editing an item (e.g., by double-clicking the item), the delegate
+    provides an editor widget that is placed on top of the item while
+    editing takes place.
+
+    Delegates are subclasses of QAbstractItemDelegate. Qt provides
+    QItemDelegate, which inherits QAbstractItemDelegate and handles
+    the most common data types (notably \c int and QString). If we
+    need to support custom data types, or want to customize the
+    rendering or the editing for existing data types, we can subclass
+    QAbstractItemDelegate or QItemDelegate. See \l{Delegate Classes}
+    for more information about delegates, and \l{Model/View
+    Programming} if you need a high-level introduction to Qt's
+    model/view architecture (including delegates).
+
+    In this example, we will see how to implement a custom delegate
+    to render and edit a "star rating" data type, which can store
+    values such as "1 out of 5 stars".
+
+    The example consists of the following classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c StarRating is the custom data type. It stores a rating
+       expressed as stars, such as "2 out of 5 stars" or "5 out of
+       6 stars".
+
+    \o \c StarDelegate inherits QItemDelegate and provides support
+       for \c StarRating (in addition to the data types already
+       handled by QItemDelegate).
+
+    \o \c StarEditor inherits QWidget and is used by \c StarDelegate
+       to let the user edit a star rating using the mouse.
+    \endlist
+
+    To show the \c StarDelegate in action, we will fill a
+    QTableWidget with some data and install the delegate on it.
+
+    \section1 StarDelegate Class Definition
+
+    Here's the definition of the \c StarDelegate class:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/stardelegate.h 0
+
+    All public functions are reimplemented virtual functions from
+    QItemDelegate to provide custom rendering and editing.
+
+    \section1 StarDelegate Class Implementation
+
+    The \l{QAbstractItemDelegate::}{paint()} function is
+    reimplemented from QItemDelegate and is called whenever the view
+    needs to repaint an item:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/stardelegate.cpp 0
+
+    The function is invoked once for each item, represented by a
+    QModelIndex object from the model. If the data stored in the item
+    is a \c StarRating, we paint it ourselves; otherwise, we let
+    QItemDelegate paint it for us. This ensures that the \c
+    StarDelegate can handle the most common data types.
+
+    In the case where the item is a \c StarRating, we draw the
+    background if the item is selected, and we draw the item using \c
+    StarRating::paint(), which we will review later.
+
+    \c{StartRating}s can be stored in a QVariant thanks to the
+    Q_DECLARE_METATYPE() macro appearing in \c starrating.h. More on
+    this later.
+
+    The \l{QAbstractItemDelegate::}{createEditor()} function is
+    called when the user starts editing an item:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/stardelegate.cpp 2
+
+    If the item is a \c StarRating, we create a \c StarEditor and
+    connect its \c editingFinished() signal to our \c
+    commitAndCloseEditor() slot, so we can update the model when the
+    editor closes.
+
+    Here's the implementation of \c commitAndCloseEditor():
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/stardelegate.cpp 5
+
+    When the user is done editing, we emit
+    \l{QAbstractItemDelegate::}{commitData()} and
+    \l{QAbstractItemDelegate::}{closeEditor()} (both declared in
+    QAbstractItemDelegate), to tell the model that there is edited
+    data and to inform the view that the editor is no longer needed.
+
+    The \l{QAbstractItemDelegate::}{setEditorData()} function is
+    called when an editor is created to initialize it with data
+    from the model:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/stardelegate.cpp 3
+
+    We simply call \c setStarRating() on the editor.
+
+    The \l{QAbstractItemDelegate::}{setModelData()} function is
+    called when editing is finished, to commit data from the editor
+    to the model:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/stardelegate.cpp 4
+
+    The \c sizeHint() function returns an item's preferred size:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/stardelegate.cpp 1
+
+    We simply forward the call to \c StarRating.
+
+    \section1 StarEditor Class Definition
+
+    The \c StarEditor class was used when implementing \c
+    StarDelegate. Here's the class definition:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/stareditor.h 0
+
+    The class lets the user edit a \c StarRating by moving the mouse
+    over the editor. It emits the \c editingFinished() signal when
+    the user clicks on the editor.
+
+    The protected functions are reimplemented from QWidget to handle
+    mouse and paint events. The private function \c starAtPosition()
+    is a helper function that returns the number of the star under
+    the mouse pointer.
+
+    \section1 StarEditor Class Implementation
+
+    Let's start with the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/stareditor.cpp 0
+
+    We enable \l{QWidget::setMouseTracking()}{mouse tracking} on the
+    widget so we can follow the cursor even when the user doesn't
+    hold down any mouse button. We also turn on QWidget's
+    \l{QWidget::autoFillBackground}{auto-fill background} feature to
+    obtain an opaque background. (Without the call, the view's
+    background would shine through the editor.)
+
+    The \l{QWidget::}{paintEvent()} function is reimplemented from
+    QWidget:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/stareditor.cpp 1
+
+    We simply call \c StarRating::paint() to draw the stars, just
+    like we did when implementing \c StarDelegate.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/stareditor.cpp 2
+
+    In the mouse event handler, we call \c setStarCount() on the
+    private data member \c myStarRating to reflect the current cursor
+    position, and we call QWidget::update() to force a repaint.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/stareditor.cpp 3
+
+    When the user releases a mouse button, we simply emit the \c
+    editingFinished() signal.
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/stareditor.cpp 4
+
+    The \c starAtPosition() function uses basic linear algebra to
+    find out which star is under the cursor.
+
+    \section1 StarRating Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/starrating.h 0
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/starrating.h 1
+
+    The \c StarRating class represents a rating as a number of stars.
+    In addition to holding the data, it is also capable of painting
+    the stars on a QPaintDevice, which in this example is either a
+    view or an editor. The \c myStarCount member variable stores the
+    current rating, and \c myMaxStarCount stores the highest possible
+    rating (typically 5).
+
+    The Q_DECLARE_METATYPE() macro makes the type \c StarRating known
+    to QVariant, making it possible to store \c StarRating values in
+    QVariant.
+
+    \section1 StarRating Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor initializes \c myStarCount and \c myMaxStarCount,
+    and sets up the polygons used to draw stars and diamonds:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/starrating.cpp 0
+
+    The \c paint() function paints the stars in this \c StarRating
+    object on a paint device:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/starrating.cpp 2
+
+    We first set the pen and brush we will use for painting. The \c
+    mode parameter can be either \c Editable or \c ReadOnly. If \c
+    mode is editable, we use the \l{QPalette::}{Highlight} color
+    instead of the \l{QPalette::}{Foreground} color to draw the
+    stars.
+
+    Then we draw the stars. If we are in \c Edit mode, we paint
+    diamonds in place of stars if the rating is less than the highest
+    rating.
+
+    The \c sizeHint() function returns the preferred size for an area
+    to paint the stars on:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/starrating.cpp 1
+
+    The preferred size is just enough to paint the maximum number of
+    stars. The function is called by both \c StarDelegate::sizeHint()
+    and \c StarEditor::sizeHint().
+
+    \section1 The \c main() Function
+
+    Here's the program's \c main() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/main.cpp 5
+
+    The \c main() function creates a QTableWidget and sets a \c
+    StarDelegate on it. \l{QAbstractItemView::}{DoubleClicked} and
+    \l{QAbstractItemView::}{SelectedClicked} are set as
+    \l{QAbstractItemView::editTriggers()}{edit triggers}, so that the
+    editor is opened with a single click when the star rating item is
+    selected.
+    
+    The \c populateTableWidget() function fills the QTableWidget with
+    data:
+
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/main.cpp 0
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/main.cpp 1
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/main.cpp 2
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/main.cpp 3
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/itemviews/stardelegate/main.cpp 4
+
+    Notice the call to qVariantFromValue to convert a \c
+    StarRating to a QVariant.
+
+    \section1 Possible Extensions and Suggestions
+
+    There are many ways to customize Qt's \l{Model/View
+    Programming}{model/view framework}. The approach used in this
+    example is appropriate for most custom delegates and editors.
+    Examples of possibilities not used by the star delegate and star
+    editor are:
+
+    \list
+    \o It is possible to open editors programmatically by calling
+       QAbstractItemView::edit(), instead of relying on edit
+       triggers. This could be use to support other edit triggers
+       than those offered by the QAbstractItemView::EditTrigger enum.
+       For example, in the Star Delegate example, hovering over an
+       item with the mouse might make sense as a way to pop up an
+       editor.
+
+    \o By reimplementing QAbstractItemDelegate::editorEvent(), it is
+       possible to implement the editor directly in the delegate,
+       instead of creating a separate QWidget subclass.
+    \endlist
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/styleplugin.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/styleplugin.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0dea7bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/styleplugin.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example tools/styleplugin
+    \title Style Plugin Example
+
+    This example shows how to create a plugin that extends Qt with a new 
+    GUI look and feel. 
+
+    \image stylepluginexample.png
+
+    On some platforms, the native style will prevent the button
+    from having a red background. In this case, try to run the example
+    in another style (e.g., plastique).
+
+    A plugin in Qt is a class stored in a shared library that can be
+    loaded by a QPluginLoader at run-time. When you create plugins in
+    Qt, they either extend a Qt application or Qt itself. Writing a
+    plugin that extends Qt itself is achieved by inheriting one of the
+    plugin \l{Plugin Classes}{base classes}, reimplementing functions
+    from that class, and adding a macro. In this example we extend Qt
+    by adding a new GUI look and feel (i.e., making a new QStyle
+    available). A high-level introduction to plugins is given in the
+    plugin \l{How to Create Qt Plugins}{overview document}. 
+
+    Plugins that provide new styles inherit the QStylePlugin base
+    class. Style plugins are loaded by Qt and made available through
+    QStyleFactory; we will look at this later. We have implemented \c
+    SimpleStylePlugin, which provides \c SimpleStyle. The new style
+    inherits QWindowsStyle and contributes to widget styling by
+    drawing button backgrounds in red - not a major contribution, but
+    it still makes a new style. We test the plugin with \c
+    StyleWindow, in which we display a QPushButton.
+
+    The \c SimpleStyle and \c StyleWindow classes do not contain any
+    plugin specific functionality and their implementations are
+    trivial; we will therefore leap past them and head on to the \c
+    SimpleStylePlugin and the \c main() function. After we have looked
+    at that, we examine the plugin's profile.
+
+
+    \section1 SimpleStylePlugin Class Definition
+
+    \c SimpleStylePlugin inherits QStylePlugin and is the plugin
+    class. 
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/styleplugin/plugin/simplestyleplugin.h 0
+
+    \c keys() returns a list of style names that this plugin can
+    create, while \c create() takes such a string and returns the
+    QStyle corresponding to the key. Both functions are pure virtual
+    functions reimplemented from QStylePlugin. When an application
+    requests an instance of the \c SimpleStyle style, which this
+    plugin creates, Qt will create it with this plugin.
+
+
+    \section1 SimpleStylePlugin Class Implementation
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c keys():
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/styleplugin/plugin/simplestyleplugin.cpp 0
+
+    Since this plugin only supports one style, we return a QStringList
+    with the class name of that style.
+
+    Here is the \c create() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/styleplugin/plugin/simplestyleplugin.cpp 1
+
+    Note that the key for style plugins are case insensitive.
+    The case sensitivity varies from plugin to plugin, so you need to
+    check this when implementing new plugins.
+
+    \section1 The \c main() function
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/styleplugin/stylewindow/main.cpp 0
+
+    Qt loads the available style plugins when the QApplication object
+    is initialized. The QStyleFactory class knows about all styles and
+    produces them with \l{QStyleFactory::}{create()} (it is a
+    wrapper around all the style plugins).
+
+    \section1 The Simple Style Plugin Profile
+
+    The \c SimpleStylePlugin lives in its own directory and have
+    its own profile:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/styleplugin/plugin/plugin.pro 0
+
+    In the plugin profile we need to set the lib template as we are
+    building a shared library instead of an executable. We must also
+    set the config to plugin. We set the library to be stored in the
+    styles folder under stylewindow because this is a path in which Qt
+    will search for style plugins.
+
+    \section1 Related articles and examples
+
+    In addition to the plugin \l{How to Create Qt Plugins}{overview
+    document}, we have other examples and articles that concern
+    plugins.
+
+    In the \l{Echo Plugin Example}{echo plugin example} we show how to
+    implement plugins that extends Qt applications rather than Qt
+    itself, which is the case with the style plugin of this example.
+    The \l{Plug & Paint Example}{plug & paint} example shows how to
+    implement a static plugin as well as being a more involved example
+    on plugins that extend applications.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/styles.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/styles.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b68a310
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/styles.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,486 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/styles
+    \title Styles Example
+
+    The Styles example illustrates how to create custom widget
+    drawing styles using Qt, and demonstrates Qt's predefined styles.
+
+    \image styles-enabledwood.png Screenshot of the Styles example
+
+    A style in Qt is a subclass of QStyle or of one of its
+    subclasses. Styles perform drawing on behalf of widgets. Qt
+    provides a whole range of predefined styles, either built into
+    the \l QtGui library or found in plugins. Custom styles are
+    usually created by subclassing one of Qt's existing style and
+    reimplementing a few virtual functions.
+
+    In this example, the custom style is called \c NorwegianWoodStyle
+    and derives from QMotifStyle. Its main features are the wooden
+    textures used for filling most of the widgets and its round
+    buttons and comboboxes.
+
+    To implement the style, we use some advanced features provided by
+    QPainter, such as \l{QPainter::Antialiasing}{antialiasing} (to
+    obtain smoother button edges), \l{QColor::alpha()}{alpha blending}
+    (to make the buttons appeared raised or sunken), and
+    \l{QPainterPath}{painter paths} (to fill the buttons and draw the
+    outline). We also use many features of QBrush and QPalette.
+
+    The example consists of the following classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c NorwegianWoodStyle inherits from QMotifStyle and implements
+        the Norwegian Wood style.
+    \o \c WidgetGallery is a \c QDialog subclass that shows the most
+       common widgets and allows the user to switch style
+       dynamically.
+    \endlist
+
+    \section1 NorwegianWoodStyle Class Definition
+
+    Here's the definition of the \c NorwegianWoodStyle class:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.h 0
+
+    The public functions are all declared in QStyle (QMotifStyle's
+    grandparent class) and reimplemented here to override the Motif
+    look and feel. The private functions are helper functions.
+
+    \section1 NorwegianWoodStyle Class Implementation
+
+    We will now review the implementation of the \c
+    NorwegianWoodStyle class.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 0
+
+    The \c polish() function is reimplemented from QStyle. It takes a
+    QPalette as a reference and adapts the palette to fit the style.
+    Most styles don't need to reimplement that function. The
+    Norwegian Wood style reimplements it to set a "wooden" palette.
+
+    We start by defining a few \l{QColor}s that we'll need. Then we
+    load two PNG images. The \c : prefix in the file path indicates
+    that the PNG files are \l{The Qt Resource System}{embedded
+    resources}.
+
+    \table
+    \row \o \inlineimage widgets/styles/images/woodbackground.png
+
+         \o \bold{woodbackground.png}
+
+            This texture is used as the background of most widgets.
+            The wood pattern is horizontal.
+
+    \row \o \inlineimage widgets/styles/images/woodbutton.png
+
+         \o \bold{woodbutton.png}
+
+            This texture is used for filling push buttons and
+            comboboxes. The wood pattern is vertical and more reddish
+            than the texture used for the background.
+    \endtable
+
+    The \c midImage variable is initialized to be the same as \c
+    buttonImage, but then we use a QPainter and fill it with a 25%
+    opaque black color (a black with an \l{QColor::alpha()}{alpha
+    channel} of 63). The result is a somewhat darker image than \c
+    buttonImage. This image will be used for filling buttons that the
+    user is holding down.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 1
+
+    We initialize the palette. Palettes have various
+    \l{QPalette::ColorRole}{color roles}, such as QPalette::Base
+    (used for filling text editors, item views, etc.), QPalette::Text
+    (used for foreground text), and QPalette::Background (used for
+    the background of most widgets). Each role has its own QBrush,
+    which usually is a plain color but can also be a brush pattern or
+    even a texture (a QPixmap).
+
+    In addition to the roles, palettes have several
+    \l{QPalette::ColorGroup}{color groups}: active, disabled, and
+    inactive. The active color group is used for painting widgets in
+    the active window. The disabled group is used for disabled
+    widgets. The inactive group is used for all other widgets. Most
+    palettes have identical active and inactive groups, while the
+    disabled group uses darker shades.
+
+    We initialize the QPalette object with a brown color. Qt
+    automatically derivates all color roles for all color groups from
+    that single color. We then override some of the default values. For
+    example, we use Qt::darkGreen instead of the default
+    (Qt::darkBlue) for the QPalette::Highlight role. The
+    QPalette::setBrush() overload that we use here sets the same
+    color or brush for all three color groups.
+
+    The \c setTexture() function is a private function that sets the
+    texture for a certain color role, while preserving the existing
+    color in the QBrush. A QBrush can hold both a solid color and a
+    texture at the same time. The solid color is used for drawing
+    text and other graphical elements where textures don't look good.
+
+    At the end, we set the brush for the disabled color group of the
+    palette. We use \c woodbackground.png as the texture for all
+    disabled widgets, including buttons, and use a darker color to
+    accompany the texture.
+
+    \image styles-disabledwood.png The Norwegian Wood style with disabled widgets
+
+    Let's move on to the other functions reimplemented from
+    QMotifStyle:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 4
+
+    This QStyle::polish() overload is called once on every widget
+    drawn using the style. We reimplement it to set the Qt::WA_Hover
+    attribute on \l{QPushButton}s and \l{QComboBox}es. When this
+    attribute is set, Qt generates paint events when the mouse
+    pointer enters or leaves the widget. This makes it possible to
+    render push buttons and comboboxes differently when the mouse
+    pointer is over them.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 6
+
+    This QStyle::unpolish() overload is called to undo any
+    modification done to the widget in \c polish(). For simplicity,
+    we assume that the flag wasn't set before \c polish() was called.
+    In an ideal world, we would remember the original state for each
+    widgets (e.g., using a QMap<QWidget *, bool>) and restore it in
+    \c unpolish().
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 7
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 8
+
+    The \l{QStyle::pixelMetric()}{pixelMetric()} function returns the
+    size in pixels for a certain user interface element. By
+    reimplementing this function, we can affect the way certain
+    widgets are drawn and their size hint. Here, we return 8 as the
+    width around a shown in a QComboBox, ensuring that there is
+    enough place around the text and the arrow for the Norwegian Wood
+    round corners. The default value for this setting in the Motif
+    style is 2.
+
+    We also change the extent of \l{QScrollBar}s, i.e., the height
+    for a horizontal scroll bar and the width for a vertical scroll
+    bar, to be 4 pixels more than in the Motif style. This makes the
+    style a bit more distinctive.
+
+    For all other QStyle::PixelMetric elements, we use the Motif
+    settings.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 9
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 10
+
+    The \l{QStyle::styleHint()}{styleHint()} function returns some
+    hints to widgets or to the base style (in our case QMotifStyle)
+    about how to draw the widgets. The Motif style returns \c true
+    for the QStyle::SH_DitherDisabledText hint, resulting in a most
+    unpleasing visual effect. We override this behavior and return \c
+    false instead. We also return \c true for the
+    QStyle::SH_EtchDisabledText hint, meaning that disabled text is
+    rendered with an embossed look (as QWindowsStyle does).
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 11
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 12
+
+    The \l{QStyle::drawPrimitive()}{drawPrimitive()} function is
+    called by Qt widgets to draw various fundamental graphical
+    elements. Here we reimplement it to draw QPushButton and
+    QComboBox with round corners. The button part of these widgets is
+    drawn using the QStyle::PE_PanelButtonCommand primitive element.
+
+    The \c option parameter, of type QStyleOption, contains
+    everything we need to know about the widget we want to draw on.
+    In particular, \c option->rect gives the rectangle within which
+    to draw the primitive element. The \c painter parameter is a
+    QPainter object that we can use to draw on the widget.
+
+    The \c widget parameter is the widget itself. Normally, all the
+    information we need is available in \c option and \c painter, so
+    we don't need \c widget. We can use it to perform special
+    effects; for example, QMacStyle uses it to animate default
+    buttons. If you use it, be aware that the caller is allowed to
+    pass a null pointer.
+
+    We start by defining three \l{QColor}s that we'll need later on.
+    We also put the x, y, width, and height components of the
+    widget's rectangle in local variables. The value used for the \c
+    semiTransparentWhite and for the \c semiTransparentBlack color's
+    alpha channel depends on whether the mouse cursor is over the
+    widget or not. Since we set the Qt::WA_Hover attribute on
+    \l{QPushButton}s and \l{QComboBox}es, we can rely on the
+    QStyle::State_MouseOver flag to be set when the mouse is over the
+    widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 13
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 14
+
+    The \c roundRect variable is a QPainterPath. A QPainterPath is is
+    a vectorial specification of a shape. Any shape (rectangle,
+    ellipse, spline, etc.) or combination of shapes can be expressed
+    as a path. We will use \c roundRect both for filling the button
+    background with a wooden texture and for drawing the outline. The
+    \c roundRectPath() function is a private function; we will come
+    back to it later.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 15
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 16
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 17
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 18
+
+    We define two variables, \c brush and \c darker, and initialize
+    them based on the state of the button:
+
+    \list
+    \o If the button is a \l{QPushButton::flat}{flat button}, we use
+       the \l{QPalette::Background}{Background} brush. We set \c
+       darker to \c true if the button is
+       \l{QAbstractButton::down}{down} or
+       \l{QAbstractButton::checked}{checked}.
+    \o If the button is currently held down by the user or in the
+       \l{QAbstractButton::checked}{checked} state, we use the
+       \l{QPalette::Mid}{Mid} component of the palette. We set
+       \c darker to \c true if the button is
+       \l{QAbstractButton::checked}{checked}.
+    \o Otherwise, we use the \l{QPalette::Button}{Button} component
+       of the palette.
+    \endlist
+
+    The screenshot below illustrates how \l{QPushButton}s are
+    rendered based on their state:
+
+    \image styles-woodbuttons.png Norwegian Wood buttons in different states
+
+    To discover whether the button is flat or not, we need to cast
+    the \c option parameter to QStyleOptionButton and check if the
+    \l{QStyleOptionButton::features}{features} member specifies the
+    QStyleOptionButton::Flat flag. The qstyleoption_cast() function
+    performs a dynamic cast; if \c option is not a
+    QStyleOptionButton, qstyleoption_cast() returns a null pointer.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 19
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 20
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 21
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 22
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 23
+
+    We turn on antialiasing on QPainter. Antialiasing is a technique
+    that reduces the visual distortion that occurs when the edges of
+    a shape are converted into pixels. For the Norwegian Wood style,
+    we use it to obtain smoother edges for the round buttons.
+
+    \image styles-aliasing.png Norwegian wood buttons with and without antialiasing
+
+    The first call to QPainter::fillPath() draws the background of
+    the button with a wooden texture. The second call to
+    \l{QPainter::fillPath()}{fillPath()} paints the same area with a
+    semi-transparent black color (a black color with an alpha channel
+    of 63) to make the area darker if \c darker is true.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 24
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 25
+
+    Next, we draw the outline. The top-left half of the outline and
+    the bottom-right half of the outline are drawn using different
+    \l{QPen}s to produce a 3D effect. Normally, the top-left half of
+    the outline is drawn lighter whereas the bottom-right half is
+    drawn darker, but if the button is
+    \l{QAbstractButton::down}{down} or
+    \l{QAbstractButton::checked}{checked}, we invert the two
+    \l{QPen}s to give a sunken look to the button.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 26
+
+    We draw the top-left part of the outline by calling
+    QPainter::drawPath() with an appropriate
+    \l{QPainter::setClipRegion()}{clip region}. If the
+    \l{QStyleOption::direction}{layout direction} is right-to-left
+    instead of left-to-right, we swap the \c x1, \c x2, \c x3, and \c
+    x4 variables to obtain correct results. On right-to-left desktop,
+    the "light" comes from the top-right corner of the screen instead
+    of the top-left corner; raised and sunken widgets must be drawn
+    accordingly.
+
+    The diagram below illustrates how 3D effects are drawn according
+    to the layout direction. The area in red on the diagram
+    corresponds to the \c topHalf polygon:
+
+    \image styles-3d.png
+
+    An easy way to test how a style looks in right-to-left mode is to
+    pass the \c -reverse command-line option to the application. This
+    option is recognized by the QApplication constructor.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 32
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 33
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 34
+
+    The bottom-right part of the outline is drawn in a similar
+    fashion. Then we draw a one-pixel wide outline around the entire
+    button, using the \l{QPalette::Foreground}{Foreground} component
+    of the QPalette.
+
+    This completes the QStyle::PE_PanelButtonCommand case of the \c
+    switch statement. Other primitive elements are handled by the
+    base style. Let's now turn to the other \c NorwegianWoodStyle
+    member functions:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 35
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 36
+
+    We reimplement QStyle::drawControl() to draw the text on a
+    QPushButton in a bright color when the button is
+    \l{QAbstractButton::down}{down} or
+    \l{QAbstractButton::checked}{checked}.
+
+    If the \c option parameter points to a QStyleOptionButton object
+    (it normally should), we take a copy of the object and modify its
+    \l{QStyleOption::palette}{palette} member to make the
+    QPalette::ButtonText be the same as the QPalette::BrightText
+    component (unless the widget is disabled).
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 37
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 38
+
+    The \c setTexture() function is a private function that sets the
+    \l{QBrush::texture()}{texture} component of the \l{QBrush}es for
+    a certain \l{QPalette::ColorRole}{color role}, for all three
+    \l{QPalette::ColorGroup}{color groups} (active, disabled,
+    inactive). We used it to initialize the Norwegian Wood palette in
+    \c polish(QPalette &).
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 39
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/norwegianwoodstyle.cpp 40
+
+    The \c roundRectPath() function is a private function that
+    constructs a QPainterPath object for round buttons. The path
+    consists of eight segments: four arc segments for the corners and
+    four lines for the sides.
+
+    With around 250 lines of code, we have a fully functional custom
+    style based on one of the predefined styles. Custom styles can be
+    used to provide a distinct look to an application or family of
+    applications.
+
+    \section1 WidgetGallery Class
+
+    For completeness, we will quickly review the \c WidgetGallery
+    class, which contains the most common Qt widgets and allows the
+    user to change style dynamically. Here's the class definition:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.h 0
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.h 1
+
+    Here's the \c WidgetGallery constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.cpp 0
+
+    We start by creating child widgets. The \gui Style combobox is
+    initialized with all the styles known to QStyleFactory, in
+    addition to \c NorwegianWood. The \c create...() functions are
+    private functions that set up the various parts of the \c
+    WidgetGallery.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.cpp 2
+
+    We connect the \gui Style combobox to the \c changeStyle()
+    private slot, the \gui{Use style's standard palette} check box to
+    the \c changePalette() slot, and the \gui{Disable widgets} check
+    box to the child widgets'
+    \l{QWidget::setDisabled()}{setDisabled()} slot.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.cpp 4
+
+    Finally, we put the child widgets in layouts.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.cpp 6
+
+    When the user changes the style in the combobox, we call
+    QApplication::setStyle() to dynamically change the style of the
+    application.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.cpp 7
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.cpp 8
+
+    If the user turns the \gui{Use style's standard palette} on, the
+    current style's \l{QStyle::standardPalette()}{standard palette}
+    is used; otherwise, the system's default palette is honored.
+
+    For the Norwegian Wood style, this makes no difference because we
+    always override the palette with our own palette in \c
+    NorwegianWoodStyle::polish().
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.cpp 9
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.cpp 10
+
+    The \c advanceProgressBar() slot is called at regular intervals
+    to advance the progress bar. Since we don't know how long the
+    user will keep the Styles application running, we use a
+    logarithmic formula: The closer the progress bar gets to 100%,
+    the slower it advances.
+
+    We will review \c createProgressBar() in a moment.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.cpp 11
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.cpp 12
+
+    The \c createTopLeftGroupBox() function creates the QGroupBox
+    that occupies the top-left corner of the \c WidgetGallery. We
+    skip the \c createTopRightGroupBox(), \c
+    createBottomLeftTabWidget(), and \c createBottomRightGroupBox()
+    functions, which are very similar.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/styles/widgetgallery.cpp 13
+
+    In \c createProgressBar(), we create a QProgressBar at the bottom
+    of the \c WidgetGallery and connect its
+    \l{QTimer::timeout()}{timeout()} signal to the \c
+    advanceProgressBar() slot.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/stylesheet.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/stylesheet.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..811d65c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/stylesheet.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/stylesheet
+    \title Style Sheet Example
+
+    The Style Sheet Example shows how to use style sheets.
+    
+    \image stylesheet-pagefold.png Screen Shot of the Pagefold style sheet
+*/
+
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/svgalib.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/svgalib.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c94d408
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/svgalib.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,360 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example qws/svgalib
+    \title Accelerated Graphics Driver Example
+
+    The Accelerated Graphics Driver example shows how you can write
+    your own accelerated graphics driver and \l {add your graphics
+    driver to Qt for Embedded Linux}.  In \l{Qt for Embedded Linux},
+    painting is a pure software implementation and is normally performed
+    in two steps:
+    The clients render each window onto a corresponding surface
+    (stored in memory) using a paint engine, and then the server uses
+    the graphics driver to compose the surface images and copy them to
+    the screen. (See the \l{Qt for Embedded Linux Architecture} documentation
+    for details.)
+
+    The rendering can be accelerated in two ways: Either by
+    accelerating the copying of pixels to the screen, or by
+    accelerating the explicit painting operations. The first is done
+    in the graphics driver implementation, the latter is performed by
+    the paint engine implementation. Typically, both the pixel copying
+    and the painting operations are accelerated using the following
+    approach:
+
+    \list 1
+        \o \l {Step 1: Creating a Custom Graphics Driver}
+        {Creating a Custom Graphics Driver}
+
+        \o \l {Step 2: Implementing a Custom Raster Paint Engine}
+        {Implementing a Custom Paint Engine}
+
+        \o \l {Step 3: Making the Widgets Aware of the Custom Paint
+        Engine}{Making the Widgets Aware of the Custom Paint Engine}
+
+    \endlist
+
+    After compiling the example code, install the graphics driver
+    plugin with the command \c {make install}. To start an application
+    using the graphics driver, you can either set the environment
+    variable \l QWS_DISPLAY and then run the application, or you can
+    just run the application using the \c -display switch:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_svgalib.qdoc 0
+
+    \table
+    \header \o SVGAlib
+    \row \o
+
+    Instead of interfacing the graphics hardware directly, this
+    example relies on \l {http://www.svgalib.org}{SVGAlib} being
+    installed on your system.  \l {http://www.svgalib.org}{SVGAlib} is
+    a small graphics library which provides acceleration for many
+    common graphics cards used on desktop computers. It should work on
+    most workstations and has a small and simple API.
+
+    \endtable
+
+    \section1 Step 1: Creating a Custom Graphics Driver
+
+    The custom graphics driver is created by deriving from the QScreen
+    class. QScreen is the base class for implementing screen/graphics
+    drivers in Qt for Embedded Linux.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibscreen.h 0
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibscreen.h 1
+
+    The \l {QScreen::}{connect()}, \l {QScreen::}{disconnect()}, \l
+    {QScreen::}{initDevice()} and \l {QScreen::}{shutdownDevice()}
+    functions are declared as pure virtual functions in QScreen and
+    must be implemented. They are used to configure the hardware, or
+    query its configuration: \l {QScreen::}{connect()} and \l
+    {QScreen::}{disconnect()} are called by both the server and client
+    processes, while the \l {QScreen::}{initDevice()} and \l
+    {QScreen::}{shutdownDevice()} functions are only called by the
+    server process.
+
+    QScreen's \l {QScreen::}{setMode()} and \l {QScreen::}{blank()}
+    functions are also pure virtual, but our driver's implementations
+    are trivial. The last two functions (\l {QScreen::}{blit()} and \l
+    {QScreen::}{solidFill()}) are the ones involved in putting pixels
+    on the screen, i.e., we reimplement these functions to perform the
+    pixel copying acceleration.
+
+    Finally, the \c context variable is a pointer to a \l
+    {http://www.svgalib.org}{SVGAlib} specific type. Note that the
+    details of using the \l {http://www.svgalib.org}{SVGAlib} library
+    is beyond the scope of this example.
+
+    \section2 SvgalibScreen Class Implementation
+
+    The \l {QScreen::}{connect()} function is the first function that
+    is called after the constructor returns. It queries \l
+    {http://www.svgalib.org}{SVGAlib} about the graphics mode and
+    initializes the variables.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibscreen.cpp 0
+
+    It is important that the \l {QScreen::}{connect()} function
+    initializes the \c data, \c lstep, \c w, \c h, \c dw, \c dh, \c d,
+    \c physWidth and \c physHeight variables (inherited from QScreen)
+    to ensure that the driver is in a state consistent with the driver
+    configuration.
+
+    In this particular example we do not have any information of the
+    real physical size of the screen, so we set these values with the
+    assumption of a screen with 72 DPI.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibscreen.cpp 1
+
+    When the \l {QScreen::}{connect()} function returns, the server
+    process calls the \l {QScreen::}{initDevice()} function which is
+    expected to do the necessary hardware initialization, leaving the
+    hardware in a state consistent with the driver configuration.
+
+    Note that we have chosen to use the software cursor. If you want
+    to use a hardware cursor, you should create a subclass of
+    QScreenCursor, create an instance of it, and make the global
+    variable \c qt_screencursor point to this instance.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibscreen.cpp 2
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibscreen.cpp 3
+
+    Before exiting, the server process will call the \l
+    {QScreen::}{shutdownDevice()} function to do the necessary
+    hardware cleanup. Again, it is important that the function leaves
+    the hardware in a state consistent with the driver
+    configuration. When \l {QScreen::}{shutdownDevice()} returns, the
+    \l {QScreen::}{disconnect()} function is called. Our
+    implementation of the latter function is trivial.
+
+    Note that, provided that the \c QScreen::data variable points to a
+    valid linear framebuffer, the graphics driver is fully functional
+    as a simple screen driver at this point. The rest of this example
+    will show where to take advantage of the accelerated capabilities
+    available on the hardware.
+
+    Whenever an area on the screen needs to be updated, the server will
+    call the \l {QScreen::}{exposeRegion()} function that paints the 
+    given region on screen. The default implementation will do the 
+    necessary composing of the top-level windows and call \l 
+    {QScreen::}{solidFill()} and \l {QScreen::}{blit()} whenever it is 
+    required. We do not want to change this behavior in the driver so
+    we do not reimplement \l {QScreen::}{exposeRegion()}. 
+
+    To control how the pixels are put onto the screen we need to
+    reimplement the \l {QScreen::}{solidFill()} and \l 
+    {QScreen::}{blit()} functions.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibscreen.cpp 4
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibscreen.cpp 5
+
+    \section1 Step 2: Implementing a Custom Raster Paint Engine
+
+    \l{Qt for Embedded Linux} uses QRasterPaintEngine (a raster-based
+    implementation of QPaintEngine) to implement the painting
+    operations.
+
+    Acceleration of the painting operations is done by deriving from
+    QRasterPaintEngine class. This is a powerful mechanism for
+    accelerating graphic primitives while getting software fallbacks
+    for all the primitives you do not accelerate.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibpaintengine.h 0
+
+    In this example, we will only accelerate one of the \l
+    {QRasterPaintEngine::}{drawRects()} functions, i.e., only
+    non-rotated, aliased and opaque rectangles will be rendered using
+    accelerated painting. All other primitives are rendered using the
+    base class's unaccelerated implementation.
+
+    The paint engine's state is stored in the private member
+    variables, and we reimplement the \l
+    {QPaintEngine::}{updateState()} function to ensure that our
+    custom paint engine's state is updated properly whenever it is
+    required. The private \c setClip() and \c updateClip() functions
+    are only helper function used to simplify the \l
+    {QPaintEngine::}{updateState()} implementation.
+
+    We also reimplement QRasterPaintEngine's \l
+    {QRasterPaintEngine::}{begin()} and \l
+    {QRasterPaintEngine::}{end()} functions to initialize the paint
+    engine and to do the cleanup when we are done rendering,
+    respectively.
+
+    \table
+    \header \o Private Header Files
+    \row
+    \o
+
+    Note the \c include statement used by this class. The files
+    prefixed with \c private/ are private headers file within
+    \l{Qt for Embedded Linux}. Private header files are not part of
+    the standard installation and are only present while
+    compiling Qt. To be able to compile using
+    private header files you need to use a \c qmake binary within a
+    compiled \l{Qt for Embedded Linux} package.
+
+    \warning Private header files may change without notice between
+    releases.
+
+    \endtable
+
+    The \l {QRasterPaintEngine::}{begin()} function initializes the
+    internal state of the paint engine. Note that it also calls the
+    base class implementation to initialize the parts inherited from
+    QRasterPaintEngine:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibpaintengine.cpp 0
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibpaintengine.cpp 1
+
+    The implementation of the \l {QRasterPaintEngine::}{end()}
+    function removes the clipping constraints that might have been set
+    in \l {http://www.svgalib.org}{SVGAlib}, before calling the
+    corresponding base class implementation.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibpaintengine.cpp 2
+
+    The \l {QPaintEngine::}{updateState()} function updates our
+    custom paint engine's state. The QPaintEngineState class provides
+    information about the active paint engine's current state.
+
+    Note that we only accept and save the current matrix if it doesn't
+    do any shearing. The pen is accepted if it is opaque and only one
+    pixel wide. The rest of the engine's properties are updated
+    following the same pattern. Again it is important that the
+    QPaintEngine::updateState() function is called to update the
+    parts inherited from the base class.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibpaintengine.cpp 3
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibpaintengine.cpp 4
+
+    The \c setClip() helper function is called from our custom
+    implementation of \l {QPaintEngine::}{updateState()}, and
+    enables clipping to the given region. An empty region means that
+    clipping is disabled.
+
+    Our custom update function also makes use of the \c updateClip()
+    helper function that checks if the clip is "simple", i.e., that it
+    can be represented by only one rectangle, and updates the clip
+    region in \l {http://www.svgalib.org}{SVGAlib}.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibpaintengine.cpp 5
+
+    Finally, we accelerated that drawing of non-rotated, aliased and
+    opaque rectangles in our reimplementation of the \l
+    {QRasterPaintEngine::}{drawRects()} function. The
+    QRasterPaintEngine fallback is used whenever the rectangle is not
+    simple enough.
+
+    \section1 Step 3: Making the Widgets Aware of the Custom Paint Engine
+
+    To activate the custom paint engine, we also need to implement a
+    corresponding paint device and window surface and make some minor
+    adjustments of the graphics driver.
+
+    \list
+        \o \l {Implementing a Custom Paint Device}
+        \o \l {Implementing a Custom Window Surface}
+        \o \l {Adjusting the Graphics Driver}
+    \endlist
+
+    \section2 Implementing a Custom Paint Device
+
+    The custom paint device can be derived from the
+    QCustomRasterPaintDevice class. Reimplement its \l
+    {QCustomRasterPaintDevice::}{paintEngine()} and \l
+    {QCustomRasterPaintDevice::}{memory()} functions to activate the
+    accelerated paint engine:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibpaintdevice.h 0
+
+    The \l {QCustomRasterPaintDevice::}{paintEngine()} function should
+    return an instance of the \c SvgalibPaintEngine class. The \l
+    {QCustomRasterPaintDevice::}{memory()} function should return a
+    pointer to the buffer which should be used when drawing the
+    widget.
+
+    Our example driver is rendering directly to the screen without any
+    buffering, i.e., our custom pain device's \l
+    {QCustomRasterPaintDevice::}{memory()} function returns a pointer
+    to the framebuffer. For this reason, we must also reimplement the
+    \l {QPaintDevice::}{metric()} function to reflect the metrics of
+    framebuffer.
+
+    \section2 Implementing a Custom Window Surface
+
+    The custom window surface can be derived from the QWSWindowSurface
+    class. QWSWindowSurface manages the memory used when drawing a
+    window.
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibsurface.h 0
+
+    We can implement most of the pure virtual functions inherited from
+    QWSWindowSurface as trivial inline functions, except the 
+    \l {QWindowSurface::}{scroll()} function that actually makes use
+    of some hardware acceleration:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibsurface.cpp 0
+
+    \section2 Adjusting the Graphics Driver
+
+    Finally, we enable the graphics driver to recognize an instance of
+    our custom window surface:
+
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibscreen.cpp 7
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/qws/svgalib/svgalibscreen.cpp 8
+
+    The \l {QScreen::}{createSurface()} functions are factory
+    functions that determines what kind of surface a top-level window
+    is using. In our example we only use the custom surface if the
+    given window has the Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen attribute or the
+    QT_ONSCREEN_PAINT environment variable is set.
+*/
+
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/svgviewer.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/svgviewer.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..affc85f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/svgviewer.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example painting/svgviewer
+    \title SVG Viewer Example
+
+    The SVG Viewer example shows how to add SVG viewing support to applications.
+
+    \image svgviewer-example.png
+
+    Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) is an XML-based language for describing two-dimensional
+    vector graphics. Qt provides classes for rendering and displaying SVG drawings in
+    widgets and on other paint devices. This example allows the user to load SVG files
+    and view them in a QGraphicsView using a QGraphicsSvgItem. Based on the selected
+    renderer the QGraphicsView uses either a QWidget or QGLWidget as its viewport. A
+    third render mode is also provided, where the QGraphicsView draws indirectly though
+    a QImage. This allows testing of drawing accuracy and performance for both the 
+    native, raster, and OpenGL paint engines.
+
+    See the QtSvg module documentation for more information about SVG and Qt's SVG classes.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/syntaxhighlighter.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/syntaxhighlighter.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7cc9e61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/syntaxhighlighter.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example richtext/syntaxhighlighter
+    \title Syntax Highlighter Example
+
+    The Syntax Highlighter example shows how to perform simple syntax
+    highlighting by subclassing the QSyntaxHighlighter class.
+
+    \image syntaxhighlighter-example.png
+
+    The Syntax Highlighter application displays C++ files with custom
+    syntax highlighting.
+
+    The example consists of two classes:
+
+    \list
+        \o The \c Highlighter class defines and applies the
+           highlighting rules.
+        \o The \c MainWindow widget is the application's main window.
+    \endlist
+
+    We will first review the \c Highlighter class to see how you can
+    customize the QSyntaxHighlighter class to fit your preferences,
+    then we will take a look at the relevant parts of the \c
+    MainWindow class to see how you can use your custom highlighter
+    class in an application.
+
+    \section1 Highlighter Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/highlighter.h 0
+
+    To provide your own syntax highlighting, you must subclass
+    QSyntaxHighlighter, reimplement the \l
+    {QSyntaxHighlighter::highlightBlock()}{highlightBlock()} function,
+    and define your own highlighting rules.
+
+    We have chosen to store our highlighting rules using a private
+    struct: A rule consists of a QRegExp pattern and a QTextCharFormat
+    instance. The various rules are then stored using a QVector.
+
+    The QTextCharFormat class provides formatting information for
+    characters in a QTextDocument specifying the visual properties of
+    the text, as well as information about its role in a hypertext
+    document. In this example, we will only define the font weight and
+    color using the QTextCharFormat::setFontWeight() and
+    QTextCharFormat::setForeground() functions.
+
+    \section1 Highlighter Class Implementation
+
+    When subclassing the QSyntaxHighlighter class you must pass the
+    parent parameter to the base class constructor. The parent is the
+    text document upon which the syntax highligning will be
+    applied. In this example, we have also chosen to define our
+    highlighting rules in the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/highlighter.cpp 0
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/highlighter.cpp 1
+
+    First we define a keyword rule which recognizes the most common
+    C++ keywords. We give the \c keywordFormat a bold, dark blue
+    font. For each keyword, we assign the keyword and the specified
+    format to a HighlightingRule object and append the object to our
+    list of rules.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/highlighter.cpp 2
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/highlighter.cpp 4
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/highlighter.cpp 5
+
+    Then we create a format that we will apply to Qt class names. The
+    class names will be rendered with a dark magenta color and a bold
+    style. We specify a string pattern that is actually a regular
+    expression capturing all Qt class names. Then we assign the
+    regular expression and the specified format to a HighlightingRule
+    object and append the object to our list of rules.
+
+    We also define highlighting rules for quotations and functions
+    using the same approach: The patterns have the form of regular
+    expressions and are stored in HighlightingRule objects with the
+    associated format.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/highlighter.cpp 3
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/highlighter.cpp 6
+
+    The C++ language has two variations of comments: The single line
+    comment (\c //) and the multiline comment (\c{/*...}\starslash). The single
+    line comment can easily be defined through a highlighting rule
+    similar to the previous ones. But the multiline comment needs
+    special care due to the design of the QSyntaxHighlighter class.
+
+    After a QSyntaxHighlighter object is created, its \l
+    {QSyntaxHighlighter::highlightBlock()}{highlightBlock()} function
+    will be called automatically whenever it is necessary by the rich
+    text engine, highlighting the given text block. The problem
+    appears when a comment spans several text blocks. We will take a
+    closer look at how this problem can be solved when reviewing the
+    implementation of the \c Highlighter::highlightBlock()
+    function. At this point we only specify the multiline comment's
+    color.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/highlighter.cpp 7
+
+    The highlightBlock() function is called automatically whenever it
+    is necessary by the rich text engine, i.e. when there are text
+    blocks that have changed.
+
+    First we apply the syntax highlighting rules that we stored in the
+    \c highlightingRules vector. For each rule (i.e. for each
+    HighlightingRule object) we search for the pattern in the given
+    textblock using the QString::indexOf() function. When the first
+    occurrence of the pattern is found, we use the
+    QRegExp::matchedLength() function to determine the string that
+    will be formatted. QRegExp::matchedLength() returns the length of
+    the last matched string, or -1 if there was no match.
+
+    To perform the actual formatting the QSyntaxHighlighter class
+    provides the \l {QSyntaxHighlighter::setFormat()}{setFormat()}
+    function. This function operates on the text block that is passed
+    as argument to the \c highlightBlock() function. The specified
+    format is applied to the text from the given start position for
+    the given length. The formatting properties set in the given
+    format are merged at display time with the formatting information
+    stored directly in the document. Note that the document itself
+    remains unmodified by the format set through this function.
+
+    This process is repeated until the last occurrence of the pattern
+    in the current text block is found.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/highlighter.cpp 8
+
+    To deal with constructs that can span several text blocks (like
+    the C++ multiline comment), it is necessary to know the end state
+    of the previous text block (e.g. "in comment"). Inside your \c
+    highlightBlock() implementation you can query the end state of the
+    previous text block using the
+    QSyntaxHighlighter::previousBlockState() function. After parsing
+    the block you can save the last state using
+    QSyntaxHighlighter::setCurrentBlockState().
+
+    The \l
+    {QSyntaxHighlighter::previousBlockState()}{previousBlockState()}
+    function return an int value. If no state is set, the returned
+    value is -1. You can designate any other value to identify any
+    given state using the \l
+    {QSyntaxHighlighter::setCurrentBlockState()}{setCurrentBlockState()}
+    function. Once the state is set, the QTextBlock keeps that value
+    until it is set again or until the corresponding paragraph of text
+    is deleted.
+
+    In this example we have chosen to use 0 to represent the "not in
+    comment" state, and 1 for the "in comment" state. When the stored
+    syntax highlighting rules are applied we initialize the current
+    block state to 0.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/highlighter.cpp 9
+
+    If the previous block state was "in comment" (\c
+    {previousBlockState() == 1}), we start the search for an end
+    expression at the beginning of the text block. If the
+    previousBlockState() returns 0, we start the search at the
+    location of the first occurrence of a start expression.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/highlighter.cpp 10
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/highlighter.cpp 11
+
+    When an end expression is found, we calculate the length of the
+    comment and apply the multiline comment format. Then we search for
+    the next occurrence of the start expression and repeat the
+    process.  If no end expression can be found in the current text
+    block we set the current block state to 1, i.e. "in comment".
+
+    This completes the \c Highlighter class implementation; it is now
+    ready for use.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    Using a QSyntaxHighlighter subclass is simple; just provide your
+    application with an instance of the class and pass it the document
+    upon which you want the highlighting to be applied.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    In this example we declare a pointer to a \c Highlighter instance
+    which we later will initialize in the private \c setupEditor()
+    function.
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor of the main window is straight forward. We first
+    set up the menus, then we initialize the editor and make it the
+    central widget of the application. Finally we set the main
+    window's title.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    We initialize and install the \c Highlighter object in the private
+    setupEditor() convenience function:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/syntaxhighlighter/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    First we create the font we want to use in the editor, then we
+    create the editor itself which is an instance of the QTextEdit
+    class. Before we initialize the editor with the \c MainWindow
+    class definition file, we create a \c Highlighter instance passing
+    the editor's document as argument. This is the document that the
+    highlighting will be applied to. Then we are done.
+
+    A QSyntaxHighlighter object can only be installed on one document
+    at the time, but you can easily reinstall the highlighter on
+    another document using the QSyntaxHighlighter::setDocument()
+    function. The QSyntaxHighlighter class also provides the \l
+    {QSyntaxHighlighter::document()}{document()} function which
+    returns the currently set document.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/systray.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/systray.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..62bc05c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/systray.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,197 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example desktop/systray
+    \title System Tray Icon Example
+
+
+    The System Tray Icon example shows how to add an icon with a menu
+    and popup messages to a desktop environment's system tray.
+
+    \image systemtray-example.png Screenshot of the System Tray Icon.
+
+    Modern operating systems usually provide a special area on the
+    desktop, called the system tray or notification area, where
+    long-running applications can display icons and short messages.
+
+    This example consists of one single class, \c Window, providing
+    the main application window (i.e., an editor for the system tray
+    icon) and the associated icon.
+
+    \image systemtray-editor.png
+
+    The editor allows the user to choose the preferred icon as well as
+    set the balloon message's type and duration. The user can also
+    edit the message's title and body. Finally, the editor provide a
+    checkbox controlling whether the icon is actually shown in the
+    system tray, or not.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The \c Window class inherits QWidget:
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/systray/window.h 0
+
+    We implement several private slots to respond to user
+    interaction. The other private functions are only convenience
+    functions provided to simplify the constructor.
+
+    The tray icon is an instance of the QSystemTrayIcon class. To
+    check whether a system tray is present on the user's desktop, call
+    the static QSystemTrayIcon::isSystemTrayAvailable()
+    function. Associated with the icon, we provide a menu containing
+    the typical \gui minimize, \gui maximize, \gui restore and \gui
+    quit actions. We reimplement the QWidget::setVisible() function to
+    update the tray icon's menu whenever the editor's appearance
+    changes, e.g., when maximizing or minimizing the main application
+    window.
+
+    Finally, we reimplement QWidget's \l {QWidget::}{closeEvent()}
+    function to be able to inform the user (when closing the editor
+    window) that the program will keep running in the system tray
+    until the user chooses the \gui Quit entry in the icon's context
+    menu.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    When constructing the editor widget, we first create the various
+    editor elements before we create the actual system tray icon:
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/systray/window.cpp 0
+
+    We ensure that the application responds to user input by
+    connecting most of the editor's input widgets (including the
+    system tray icon) to the application's private slots. But note the
+    visibility checkbox; its \l {QCheckBox::}{toggled()} signal is
+    connected to the \e {icon}'s \l {QSystemTrayIcon::}{setVisible()}
+    function instead.
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/systray/window.cpp 3
+
+    The \c setIcon() slot is triggered whenever the current index in
+    the icon combobox changes, i.e., whenever the user chooses another
+    icon in the editor. Note that it is also called when the user
+    activates the tray icon with the left mouse button, triggering the
+    icon's \l {QSystemTrayIcon::}{activated()} signal. We will come
+    back to this signal shortly.
+
+    The QSystemTrayIcon::setIcon() function sets the \l
+    {QSystemTrayIcon::}{icon} property that holds the actual system
+    tray icon. On Windows, the system tray icon size is 16x16; on X11,
+    the preferred size is 22x22. The icon will be scaled to the
+    appropriate size as necessary.
+
+    Note that on X11, due to a limitation in the system tray
+    specification, mouse clicks on transparent areas in the icon are
+    propagated to the system tray. If this behavior is unacceptable,
+    we suggest using an icon with no transparency.
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/systray/window.cpp 4
+
+    Whenever the user activates the system tray icon, it emits its \l
+    {QSystemTrayIcon::}{activated()} signal passing the triggering
+    reason as parameter. QSystemTrayIcon provides the \l
+    {QSystemTrayIcon::}{ActivationReason} enum to describe how the
+    icon was activated.
+
+    In the constructor, we connected our icon's \l
+    {QSystemTrayIcon::}{activated()} signal to our custom \c
+    iconActivated() slot: If the user has clicked the icon using the
+    left mouse button, this function changes the icon image by
+    incrementing the icon combobox's current index, triggering the \c
+    setIcon() slot as mentioned above. If the user activates the icon
+    using the middle mouse button, it calls the custom \c
+    showMessage() slot:
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/systray/window.cpp 5
+
+    When the \e showMessage() slot is triggered, we first retrieve the
+    message icon depending on the currently chosen message type. The
+    QSystemTrayIcon::MessageIcon enum describes the icon that is shown
+    when a balloon message is displayed. Then we call
+    QSystemTrayIcon's \l {QSystemTrayIcon::}{showMessage()} function
+    to show the message with the title, body, and icon for the time
+    specified in milliseconds.
+    
+    Mac OS X users note: The Growl notification system must be
+    installed for QSystemTrayIcon::showMessage() to display messages.
+
+    QSystemTrayIcon also has the corresponding, \l {QSystemTrayIcon::}
+    {messageClicked()} signal, which is emitted when the user clicks a
+    message displayed by \l {QSystemTrayIcon::}{showMessage()}.
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/systray/window.cpp 6
+
+    In the constructor, we connected the \l
+    {QSystemTrayIcon::}{messageClicked()} signal to our custom \c
+    messageClicked() slot that simply displays a message using the
+    QMessageBox class.
+
+    QMessageBox provides a modal dialog with a short message, an icon,
+    and buttons laid out depending on the current style. It supports
+    four severity levels: "Question", "Information", "Warning" and
+    "Critical". The easiest way to pop up a message box in Qt is to
+    call one of the associated static functions, e.g.,
+    QMessageBox::information().
+
+    As we mentioned earlier, we reimplement a couple of QWidget's
+    virtual functions:
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/systray/window.cpp 1
+
+    Our reimplementation of the QWidget::setVisible() function updates
+    the tray icon's menu whenever the editor's appearance changes,
+    e.g., when maximizing or minimizing the main application window,
+    before calling the base class implementation.
+
+    \snippet examples/desktop/systray/window.cpp 2
+
+    We have reimplemented the QWidget::closeEvent() event handler to
+    receive widget close events, showing the above message to the
+    users when they are closing the editor window.
+
+    In addition to the functions and slots discussed above, we have
+    also implemented several convenience functions to simplify the
+    constructor: \c createIconGroupBox(), \c createMessageGroupBox(),
+    \c createActions() and \c createTrayIcon(). See the \l
+    {desktop/systray/window.cpp}{window.cpp} file for details.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/tabdialog.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/tabdialog.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c9500af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/tabdialog.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example dialogs/tabdialog
+    \title Tab Dialog Example
+
+    The Tab Dialog example shows how to construct a tab dialog using the
+    QTabWidget class.
+
+    Dialogs provide an efficient way for the application to communicate
+    with the user, but complex dialogs suffer from the problem that they
+    often take up too much screen area. By using a number of tabs in a
+    dialog, information can be split into different categories, while
+    remaining accessible.
+
+    \image tabdialog-example.png
+
+    The Tab Dialog example consists of a single \c TabDialog class that
+    provides three tabs, each containing information about a particular
+    file, and two standard push buttons that are used to accept or reject
+    the contents of the dialog.
+
+    \section1 TabDialog Class Definition
+
+    The \c TabDialog class is a subclass of QDialog that displays a
+    QTabWidget and two standard dialog buttons. The class definition
+    only contain the class constructor and a private data member for
+    the QTabWidget:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/tabdialog/tabdialog.h 3
+
+    In the example, the widget will be used as a top-level window, but
+    we define the constructor so that it can take a parent widget. This
+    allows the dialog to be centered on top of an application's main
+    window.
+
+    \section1 TabDialog Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor calls the QDialog constructor and creates a QFileInfo
+    object for the specified filename.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp 0
+
+    The tab widget is populated with three custom widgets that each
+    contain information about the file. We construct each of these
+    without a parent widget because the tab widget will reparent
+    them as they are added to it.
+
+    We create two standard push buttons, and connect each of them to
+    the appropriate slots in the dialog:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp 3
+
+    We arrange the the tab widget above the buttons in the dialog:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp 4
+
+    Finally, we set the dialog's title:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp 5
+
+    Each of the tabs are subclassed from QWidget, and only provide
+    constructors.
+
+    \section1 GeneralTab Class Definition
+
+    The GeneralTab widget definition is simple because we are only interested
+    in displaying the contents of a widget within a tab:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/tabdialog/tabdialog.h 0
+
+    \section1 GeneralTab Class Implementation
+
+    The GeneralTab widget simply displays some information about the file
+    passed by the TabDialog. Various widgets for this purpose, and these
+    are arranged within a vertical layout:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp 6
+
+    \section1 PermissionsTab Class Definition
+
+    Like the GeneralTab, the PermissionsTab is just used as a placeholder
+    widget for its children:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/tabdialog/tabdialog.h 1
+
+    \section1 PermissionsTab Class Implementation
+
+    The PermissionsTab shows information about the file's access information,
+    displaying details of the file permissions and owner in widgets that are
+    arranged in nested layouts:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp 7
+
+    \section1 ApplicationsTab Class Definition
+
+    The ApplicationsTab is another placeholder widget that is mostly
+    cosmetic:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/tabdialog/tabdialog.h 2
+
+    \section1 ApplicationsTab Class Implementation
+
+    The ApplicationsTab does not show any useful information, but could be
+    used as a template for a more complicated example:
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/tabdialog/tabdialog.cpp 8
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/tablemodel.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/tablemodel.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e3d4a22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/tablemodel.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*! 
+    \example sql/tablemodel
+    \title Table Model Example
+
+    The Table Model example shows how to use a specialized SQL table model with table
+    views to edit information in a database.
+
+    \image tablemodel-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/tablet.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/tablet.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..476bba1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/tablet.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,380 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/tablet
+    \title Tablet Example
+
+    This example shows how to use a Wacom tablet in Qt applications.
+
+    \image tabletexample.png
+
+    When you use a tablet with Qt applications, \l{QTabletEvent}s are
+    genarated. You need to reimplement the
+    \l{QWidget::}{tabletEvent()} event handler if you want to handle
+    tablet events. Events are generated when the device used for
+    drawing enters and leaves the proximity of the tablet (i.e., when
+    it is close but not pressed down on it), when a device is pushed
+    down and released from it, and when a device is moved on the
+    tablet.
+  
+    The information available in QTabletEvent depends on the device
+    used. The tablet in this example has two different devices for
+    drawing: a stylus and an airbrush. For both devices the event
+    contains the position of the device, pressure on the tablet,
+    vertical tilt, and horizontal tilt (i.e, the angle between the
+    device and the perpendicular of the tablet). The airbrush has a
+    finger wheel; the position of this is also available in the tablet
+    event.
+
+    In this example we implement a drawing program. You can use the
+    stylus to draw on the tablet as you use a pencil on paper. When
+    you draw with the airbrush you get a spray of paint; the finger
+    wheel is used to change the density of the spray. The pressure and
+    tilt can change the alpha and saturation values of the QColor and the
+    width of the QPen used for drawing.
+
+    The example consists of the following:
+
+    \list
+        \o The \c MainWindow class inherits QMainWindow and creates
+           the examples menus and connect their slots and signals.
+	\o The \c TabletCanvas class inherits QWidget and 
+	   receives tablet events. It uses the events to paint on a
+	   QImage, which it draws onto itself.
+	\o The \c TabletApplication class inherits QApplication. This
+	   class handles tablet events that are not sent to \c tabletEvent(). 
+	   We will look at this later.
+	\o The \c main() function creates a \c MainWindow and shows it
+	   as a top level window.
+    \endlist
+
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    The \c MainWindow creates a \c TabletCanvas and sets it as its 
+    center widget. 
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    The QActions let the user select if the tablets pressure and
+    tilt should change the pen width, color alpha component and color
+    saturation. \c createActions() creates all actions, and \c
+    createMenus() sets up the menus with the actions. We have one
+    QActionGroup for the actions that alter the alpha channel, color
+    saturation and line width respectively. The action groups are
+    connected to the \c alphaActionTriggered(), \c
+    colorSaturationActiontriggered(), and \c
+    lineWidthActionTriggered() slots, which calls functions in \c
+    myCanvas.
+
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    We start width a look at the constructor \c MainWindow():
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor we create the canvas, actions, and menus.
+    We set the canvas as the center widget. We also initialize the
+    canvas to match the state of our menus and start drawing with a
+    red color.
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c brushColorAct():
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    We let the user pick a color with a QColorDialog. If it is valid,
+    we set a new drawing color with \c setColor().
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c alphaActionTriggered():
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    The \c TabletCanvas class supports two ways by which the alpha 
+    channel of the drawing color can be changed: tablet pressure and
+    tilt. We have one action for each and an action if the alpha
+    channel should not be changed. 
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c lineWidthActionTriggered():
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+    We check which action is selected in \c lineWidthGroup, and set
+    how the canvas should change the drawing line width.
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c saturationActionTriggered():
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+    We check which action is selected in \c colorSaturationGroup, and
+    set how the canvas should change the color saturation of the
+    drawing color.
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c saveAct():
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/mainwindow.cpp 5
+
+    We use the QFileDialog to let the user select a file to save the
+    drawing in. It is the \c TabletCanvas that save the drawing, so we
+    call its \c saveImage() function.
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c loadAct():
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/mainwindow.cpp 6
+
+    We let the user select the image file to be opened with
+    a QFileDialog; we then ask the canvas to load the image with \c
+    loadImage().
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c aboutAct():
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/mainwindow.cpp 7
+
+    We show a message box with a short description of the example. 
+
+    \c createActions() creates all actions and action groups of
+    the example. We look at the creation of one action group and its
+    actions. See the \l{Application Example}{application example} if
+    you want a high-level introduction to QActions. 
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c createActions:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/mainwindow.cpp 8
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/mainwindow.cpp 9
+
+    We want the user to be able to choose if the drawing color's
+    alpha component should be changed by the tablet pressure or tilt.
+    We have one action for each choice and an action if the alpha
+    channel is not to be changed, i.e, the color is opaque. We make
+    the actions checkable; the \c alphaChannelGroup will then ensure
+    that only one of the actions are checked at any time. The \c
+    triggered() signal is emitted when an action is checked.
+
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/mainwindow.cpp 10
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c createMenus():
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/mainwindow.cpp 11
+
+    We create the menus of the example and add the actions to them.
+
+
+    \section1 TabletCanvas Class Definition
+
+    The \c TabletCanvas class provides a surface on which the
+    user can draw with a tablet. 
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/tabletcanvas.h 0
+
+    The canvas can change the alpha channel, color saturation,
+    and line width of the drawing. We have one enum for each of
+    these; their values decide if it is the tablet pressure or tilt
+    that will alter them. We keep a private variable for each, the \c
+    alphaChannelType, \c colorSturationType, and \c penWidthType,
+    which we provide access functions for. 
+
+    We draw on a QImage with \c myPen and \c myBrush using \c
+    myColor. The \c saveImage() and \c loadImage() saves and loads
+    the QImage to disk. The image is drawn on the widget in \c
+    paintEvent(). The \c pointerType and \c deviceType keeps the type
+    of pointer, which is either a pen or an eraser, and device
+    currently used on the tablet, which is either a stylus or an
+    airbrush.
+
+    The interpretation of events from the tablet is done in \c
+    tabletEvent(); \c paintImage(), \c updateBrush(), and \c
+    brushPattern() are helper functions used by \c tabletEvent().
+
+
+    \section1 TabletCanvas Class Implementation
+
+    We start with a look at the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/tabletcanvas.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor we initialize our class variables. We need
+    to draw the background of our image, as the default is gray.
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c saveImage():
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/tabletcanvas.cpp 1
+
+    QImage implements functionality to save itself to disk, so we
+    simply call \l{QImage::}{save()}.
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c loadImage():
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/tabletcanvas.cpp 2
+
+    We simply call \l{QImage::}{load()}, which loads the image in \a
+    file.
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c tabletEvent():
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/tabletcanvas.cpp 3
+
+    We get three kind of events to this function: TabletPress,
+    TabletRelease, and TabletMove, which is generated when a device
+    is pressed down on, leaves, or moves on the tablet. We set the \c
+    deviceDown to true when a device is pressed down on the tablet;
+    we then know when we should draw when we receive move events. We
+    have implemented the \c updateBrush() and \c paintImage() helper
+    functions to update \c myBrush and \c myPen after the state of \c
+    alphaChannelType, \c colorSaturationType, and \c lineWidthType.
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c paintEvent():
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/tabletcanvas.cpp 4
+
+    We simply draw the image to the top left of the widget.
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c paintImage():
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/tabletcanvas.cpp 5
+
+    In this function we draw on the image based on the movement of the
+    device. If the device used on the tablet is a stylus we want to draw a
+    line between the positions of the stylus recorded in \c polyLine.
+    If it is an airbrush we want to draw a circle of points with a
+    point density based on the tangential pressure, which is the position
+    of the finger wheel on the airbrush. We use the Qt::BrushStyle to
+    draw the points as it has styles that draw points with different
+    density; we select the style based on the tangential pressure in
+    \c brushPattern().
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/tabletcanvas.cpp 6
+
+    We return a brush style with a point density that increases with
+    the tangential pressure.
+
+    In \c updateBrush() we set the pen and brush used for drawing
+    to match \c alphaChannelType, \c lineWidthType, \c
+    colorSaturationType, and \c myColor. We will examine the code to
+    set up \c myBrush and \c myPen for each of these variables:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/tabletcanvas.cpp 7
+
+    We fetch the current drawingcolor's hue, saturation, value,
+    and alpha values. \c hValue and \c vValue are set to the
+    horizontal and vertical tilt as a number from 0 to 255. The
+    original values are in degrees from -60 to 60, i.e., 0 equals
+    -60, 127 equals 0, and 255 equals 60 degrees. The angle measured
+    is between the device and the perpendicular of the tablet (see
+    QTabletEvent for an illustration).
+         
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/tabletcanvas.cpp 8
+
+    The alpha channel of QColor is given as a number between 0
+    and 255 where 0 is transparent and 255 is opaque.
+    \l{QTabletEvent::}{pressure()} returns the pressure as a qreal
+    between 0.0 and 1.0. By subtracting 127 from the tilt values and
+    taking the absolute value we get the smallest alpha values (i.e.,
+    the color is most transparent) when the pen is perpendicular to
+    the tablet. We select the largest of the vertical and horizontal
+    tilt value. 
+ 
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/tabletcanvas.cpp 9
+
+    The colorsaturation is given as a number between 0 and 255. It is
+    set with \l{QColor::}{setHsv()}. We can set the tilt values
+    directly, but must multiply the pressure to a number between 0 and
+    255.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/tabletcanvas.cpp 10
+
+    The width of the pen increases with the pressure. When the pen
+    width is controlled with the tilt we let the width increse with
+    the angle between the device and the perpendicular of the tablet.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/tabletcanvas.cpp 11
+   
+    We finally check wether the pointer is the stylus or the eraser.
+    If it is the eraser, we set the color to the background color of
+    the image an let the pressure decide the pen width, else we set
+    the colors we have set up previously in the function.
+
+
+    \section1 TabletApplication Class Definition
+
+    We inherit QApplication in this class because we want to
+    reimplement the \l{QApplication::}{event()} function. 
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/tabletapplication.h 0
+
+    We keep a \c TabletCanvas we send the device type of the events we
+    handle in the \c event() function to. The TabletEnterProximity
+    and TabletLeaveProximity events are not sendt to the QApplication
+    object, while other tablet events are sendt to the QWidget's
+    \c event(), which sends them on to \l{QWidget::}{tabletEvent()}.
+    Since we want to handle these events we have implemented \c 
+    TabletApplication.
+
+
+    \section1 TabletApplication Class Implementation
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c event():
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/tabletapplication.cpp 0
+
+    We use this function to handle the TabletEnterProximity and
+    TabletLeaveProximity events, which is generated when a device
+    enters and leaves the proximity of the tablet. The intended use of these
+    events is to do work that is dependent on what kind of device is
+    used on the tablet. This way, you don't have to do this work
+    when other events are generated, which is more frequently than the
+    leave and enter proximity events. We call \c setTabletDevice() in 
+    \c TabletCanvas.
+
+    \section1 The \c main() function
+
+    Here is the examples \c main() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tablet/main.cpp 0
+
+    In the \c main() function we create a \c MainWinow and display it
+    as a top level window. We use the \c TabletApplication class. We
+    need to set the canvas after the application is created. We cannot
+    use classes that implement event handling before an QApplication
+    object is instantiated.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/taskmenuextension.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/taskmenuextension.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b02da6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/taskmenuextension.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,457 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example designer/taskmenuextension
+    \title Task Menu Extension Example
+
+    The Task Menu Extension example shows how to create a custom
+    widget plugin for \l {Qt Designer Manual}{\QD}, and how to to use
+    the QDesignerTaskMenuExtension class to provide custom task menu
+    entries associated with the plugin.
+
+    \image taskmenuextension-example-faded.png
+
+    To provide a custom widget that can be used with \QD, we need to
+    supply a self-contained implementation. In this example we use a
+    custom widget designed to show the task menu extension feature:
+    The TicTacToe widget.
+
+    An extension is an object which modifies the behavior of \QD. The
+    QDesignerTaskMenuExtension can provide custom task menu entries
+    when a widget with this extension is selected.
+
+    There are four available types of extensions in \QD:
+
+    \list
+        \o QDesignerContainerExtension provides an extension that allows
+           you to add (and delete) pages to a multi-page container plugin
+           in \QD.
+        \o QDesignerMemberSheetExtension provides an extension that allows
+           you to manipulate a widget's member functions which is displayed
+           when configuring connections using Qt Designer's mode for editing
+           signals and slots.
+        \o QDesignerPropertySheetExtension provides an extension that
+           allows you to manipulate a widget's properties which is displayed
+           in Qt Designer's property editor.
+        \o QDesignerTaskMenuExtension provides an extension that allows
+           you to add custom menu entries to \QD's task menu.
+    \endlist
+
+    You can use all the extensions following the same pattern as in
+    this example, only replacing the respective extension base
+    class. For more information, see the \l {QtDesigner Module}.
+
+    The Task Menu Extension example consists of five classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c TicTacToe is a custom widget that lets the user play
+       the Tic-Tac-Toe game.
+    \o \c TicTacToePlugin exposes the \c TicTacToe class to \QD.
+    \o \c TicTacToeTaskMenuFactory creates a \c TicTacToeTaskMenu object.
+    \o \c TicTacToeTaskMenu provides the task menu extension, i.e the
+       plugin's associated task menu entries.
+    \o \c TicTacToeDialog lets the user modify the state of a
+       Tic-Tac-Toe plugin loaded into \QD.
+    \endlist
+
+    The project file for custom widget plugins needs some additional
+    information to ensure that they will work within \QD. For example,
+    custom widget plugins rely on components supplied with \QD, and
+    this must be specified in the project file that we use. We will
+    first take a look at the plugin's project file.
+
+    Then we will continue by reviewing the \c TicTacToePlugin class,
+    and take a look at the \c TicTacToeTaskMenuFactory and \c
+    TicTacToeTaskMenu classes. Finally, we will review the \c
+    TicTacToeDialog class before we take a quick look at the \c
+    TicTacToe widget's class definition.
+
+    \section1 The Project File: taskmenuextension.pro
+
+    The project file must contain some additional information to
+    ensure that the plugin will work as expected:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/taskmenuextension.pro 0
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/taskmenuextension.pro 1
+
+    The \c TEMPLATE variable's value makes \c qmake create the custom
+    widget as a library. Later, we will ensure that the widget will be
+    recognized as a plugin by Qt by using the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro to
+    export the relevant widget information.
+
+    The \c CONFIG variable contains two values, \c designer and \c
+    plugin:
+
+    \list
+        \o \c designer: Since custom widgets plugins rely on components
+           supplied with \QD, this value ensures that our plugin links against
+           \QD's library (\c libQtDesigner.so).
+
+        \o \c plugin: We also need to ensure that \c qmake considers the
+           custom widget a \e plugin library.
+    \endlist
+
+    When Qt is configured to build in both debug and release modes,
+    \QD will be built in release mode.  When this occurs, it is
+    necessary to ensure that plugins are also built in release
+    mode. For that reason we add the \c debug_and_release value to
+    the \c CONFIG variable. Otherwise, if a plugin is built in a mode
+    that is incompatible with \QD, it won't be loaded and
+    installed.
+
+    The header and source files for the widget are declared in the
+    usual way:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/taskmenuextension.pro 2
+
+    We provide an implementation of the plugin interface so that \QD
+    can use the custom widget.  In this particular example we also
+    provide implementations of the task menu extension and the
+    extension factory as well as a dialog implementation.
+
+    It is important to ensure that the plugin is installed in a
+    location that is searched by \QD. We do this by specifying a
+    target path for the project and adding it to the list of items to
+    install:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_taskmenuextension.qdoc 0
+
+    The task menu extension is created as a library, and will be
+    installed alongside the other \QD plugins when the project is
+    installed (using \c{make install} or an equivalent installation
+    procedure).
+
+    Note that if you want the plugins to appear in a Visual Studio
+    integration, the plugins must be built in release mode and their
+    libraries must be copied into the plugin directory in the install
+    path of the integration (for an example, see \c {C:/program
+    files/trolltech as/visual studio integration/plugins}).
+
+    For more information about plugins, see the \l {How to Create Qt
+    Plugins} documentation.
+
+    \section1 TicTacToePlugin Class Definition
+
+    The \c TicTacToePlugin class exposes \c the TicTacToe class to
+    \QD. Its definition is equivalent to the \l
+    {designer/customwidgetplugin}{Custom Widget Plugin} example's
+    plugin class which is explained in detail. The only part of the
+    class definition that is specific to this particular custom widget
+    is the class name:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoeplugin.h 0
+
+    The plugin class provides \QD with basic information about our
+    plugin, such as its class name and its include file. Furthermore
+    it knows how to create instances of the \c TicTacToe widget.
+    TicTacToePlugin also defines the \l
+    {QDesignerCustomWidgetInterface::initialize()}{initialize()}
+    function which is called after the plugin is loaded into \QD. The
+    function's QDesignerFormEditorInterface parameter provides the
+    plugin with a gateway to all of \QD's API's.
+
+    The \c TicTacToePlugin class inherits from both QObject and
+    QDesignerCustomWidgetInterface. It is important to remember, when
+    using multiple inheritance, to ensure that all the interfaces
+    (i.e. the classes that doesn't inherit Q_OBJECT) are made known to
+    the meta object system using the Q_INTERFACES() macro. This
+    enables \QD to use \l qobject_cast() to query for supported
+    interfaces using nothing but a QObject pointer.
+
+    \section1 TicTacToePlugin Class Implementation
+
+    The TicTacToePlugin class implementation is in most parts
+    equivalent to the \l {designer/customwidgetplugin}{Custom Widget
+    Plugin} example's plugin class:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoeplugin.cpp 0
+
+    The only function that differs significantly is the initialize()
+    function:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoeplugin.cpp 1
+
+    The \c initialize() function takes a QDesignerFormEditorInterface
+    object as argument.  The QDesignerFormEditorInterface class
+    provides access to Qt Designer's components.
+
+    In \QD you can create two kinds of plugins: custom widget plugins
+    and tool plugins. QDesignerFormEditorInterface provides access to
+    all the \QD components that you normally need to create a tool
+    plugin: the extension manager, the object inspector, the property
+    editor and the widget box. Custom widget plugins have access to
+    the same components.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoeplugin.cpp 2
+
+    When creating extensions associated with custom widget plugins, we
+    need to access \QD's current extension manager which we retrieve
+    from the QDesignerFormEditorInterface parameter.
+
+    \QD's QDesignerFormEditorInterface holds information about all Qt
+    Designer's components: The action editor, the object inspector,
+    the property editor, the widget box, and the extension and form
+    window managers.
+
+    The QExtensionManager class provides extension management
+    facilities for \QD. Using \QD's current extension manager you can
+    retrieve the extension for a given object. You can also register
+    and unregister an extension for a given object. Remember that an
+    extension is an object which modifies the behavior of \QD.
+
+    When registrering an extension, it is actually the associated
+    extension factory that is registered. In \QD, extension factories
+    are used to look up and create named extensions as they are
+    required. So, in this example, the task menu extension itself is
+    not created until a task menu is requested by the user.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoeplugin.cpp 3
+
+    We create a \c TicTacToeTaskMenuFactory object that we register
+    using \QD's current \l {QExtensionManager}{extension manager}
+    retrieved from the QDesignerFormEditorInterface parameter. The
+    first argument is the newly created factory and the second
+    argument is an extension identifier which is a string. The \c
+    Q_TYPEID() macro simply converts the string into a QLatin1String.
+
+    The \c TicTacToeTaskMenuFactory class is a subclass of
+    QExtensionFactory. When the user request a task menu by clicking
+    the right mouse button over a widget with the specified task menu
+    extension, \QD's extension manager will run through all its
+    registered factories invoking the first one that is able to create
+    a task menu extension for the selected widget. This factory will
+    in turn create a \c TicTacToeTaskMenu object (the extension).
+
+    We omit to reimplement the
+    QDesignerCustomWidgetInterface::domXml() function (which include
+    default settings for the widget in the standard XML format used by
+    Qt Designer), since no default values are necessary.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoeplugin.cpp 4
+
+    Finally, we use the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro to export the
+    TicTacToePlugin class for use with Qt's plugin handling classes:
+    This macro ensures that \QD can access and construct the custom
+    widget. Without this macro, there is no way for \QD to use the
+    widget.
+
+    \section1 TicTacToeTaskMenuFactory Class Definition
+
+    The \c TicTacToeTaskMenuFactory class inherits QExtensionFactory
+    which provides a standard extension factory for \QD.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoetaskmenu.h 1
+
+    The subclass's purpose is to reimplement the
+    QExtensionFactory::createExtension() function, making it able to
+    create a \c TicTacToe task menu extension.
+
+    \section1 TicTacToeTaskMenuFactory Class Implementation
+
+    The class constructor simply calls the QExtensionFactory base
+    class constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoetaskmenu.cpp 4
+
+    As described above, the factory is invoked when the user request a
+    task menu by clicking the right mouse button over a widget with
+    the specified task menu extension in \QD.
+
+    \QD's behavior is the same whether the requested extension is
+    associated with a container, a member sheet, a property sheet or a
+    task menu: Its extension manager runs through all its registered
+    extension factories calling \c createExtension() for each until
+    one responds by creating the requested extension.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoetaskmenu.cpp 5
+
+    So the first thing we do in \c
+    TicTacToeTaskMenuFactory::createExtension() is to check if the
+    requested extension is a task menu extension. If it is, and the
+    widget requesting it is a \c TicTacToe widget, we create and
+    return a \c TicTacToeTaskMenu object. Otherwise, we simply return
+    a null pointer, allowing \QD's extension manager to continue its
+    search through the registered factories.
+
+
+    \section1 TicTacToeTaskMenu Class Definition
+
+    \image taskmenuextension-menu.png
+
+    The \c TicTacToeTaskMenu class inherits QDesignerTaskMenuExtension
+    which allows you to add custom entries (in the form of QActions)
+    to the task menu in \QD.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoetaskmenu.h 0
+
+    We reimplement the \c preferredEditAction() and \c taskActions()
+    functions. Note that we implement a constructor that takes \e two
+    arguments: the parent widget, and the \c TicTacToe widget for
+    which the task menu is requested.
+
+    In addition we declare the private \c editState() slot, our custom
+    \c editStateAction and a private pointer to the \c TicTacToe
+    widget which state we want to modify.
+
+    \section1 TicTacToeTaskMenu Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoetaskmenu.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor we first save the reference to the \c TicTacToe
+    widget sent as parameter, i.e the widget which state we want to
+    modify. We will need this later when our custom action is
+    invoked. We also create our custom \c editStateAction and connect
+    it to the \c editState() slot.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoetaskmenu.cpp 1
+
+    The \c editState() slot is called whenever the user chooses the
+    \gui {Edit State...} option in a \c TicTacToe widget's task menu. The
+    slot creates a \c TicTacToeDialog presenting the current state of
+    the widget, and allowing the user to edit its state by playing the
+    game.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoetaskmenu.cpp 2
+
+    We reimplement the \c preferredEditAction() function to return our
+    custom \c editStateAction as the action that should be invoked
+    when selecting a \c TicTacToe widget and pressing \key F2 .
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoetaskmenu.cpp 3
+
+    We reimplement the \c taskActions() function to return a list of
+    our custom actions making these appear on top of the default menu
+    entries in a \c TicTacToe widget's task menu.
+
+    \section1 TicTacToeDialog Class Definition
+
+    \image taskmenuextension-dialog.png
+
+    The \c TicTacToeDialog class inherits QDialog. The dialog lets the
+    user modify the state of the currently selected Tic-Tac-Toe
+    plugin.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoedialog.h 0
+
+    We reimplement the \c sizeHint() function. We also declare two
+    private slots: \c resetState() and \c saveState(). In addition to
+    the dialog's buttons and layouts we declare two \c TicTacToe
+    pointers, one to the widget the user can interact with and the
+    other to the original custom widget plugin which state the user
+    wants to edit.
+
+    \section1 TicTacToeDialog Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoedialog.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor we first save the reference to the TicTacToe
+    widget sent as parameter, i.e the widget which state the user want
+    to modify. Then we create a new \c TicTacToe widget, and set its
+    state to be equivalent to the parameter widget's state.
+
+    Finally, we create the dialog's buttons and layout.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoedialog.cpp 1
+
+    We reimplement the \c sizeHint() function to ensure that the
+    dialog is given a reasonable size.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoedialog.cpp 2
+
+    The \c resetState() slot is called whenever the user press the
+    \gui Reset button. The only thing we do is to call the \c
+    clearBoard() function for the editor widget, i.e. the \c TicTacToe
+    widget we created in the dialog's constructor.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoedialog.cpp 3
+
+    The \c saveState() slot is called whenever the user press the \gui
+    OK button, and transfers the state of the editor widget to the
+    widget which state we want to modify. In order to make the change
+    of state visible to \QD we need to set the latter widget's state
+    property using the QDesignerFormWindowInterface class.
+
+    QDesignerFormWindowInterface provides you with information about
+    the associated form window as well as allowing you to alter its
+    properties. The interface is not intended to be instantiated
+    directly, but to provide access to Qt Designer's current form
+    windows controlled by Qt Designer's form window manager.
+
+    If you are looking for the form window containing a specific
+    widget, you can use the static
+    QDesignerFormWindowInterface::findFormWindow() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoedialog.cpp 4
+
+    After retrieving the form window of the widget (which state we
+    want to modify), we use the QDesignerFormWindowInterface::cursor()
+    function to retrieve the form window's cursor.
+
+    The QDesignerFormWindowCursorInterface class provides an interface
+    to the form window's text cursor. Once we have cursor, we can
+    finally set the state property using the
+    QDesignerFormWindowCursorInterface::setProperty() function.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoedialog.cpp 5
+
+    In the end we call the QEvent::accept() function which sets the
+    accept flag of the event object. Setting the \c accept parameter
+    indicates that the event receiver wants the event. Unwanted events
+    might be propagated to the parent widget.
+
+    \section1 TicTacToe Class Definition
+
+    The \c TicTacToe class is a custom widget that lets the user play
+    the Tic-Tac-Toe game.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/taskmenuextension/tictactoe.h 0
+
+    The main details to observe in the \c TicTacToe class defintion is
+    the declaration of the \c state property and its \c state() and \c
+    setState() functions.
+
+    We need to declare the \c TicTacToe widget's state as a property
+    to make it visible to \QD; allowing \QD to manage it in the same
+    way it manages the properties the \c TicTacToe widget inherits
+    from QWidget and QObject, for example featuring the property
+    editor.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/tetrix.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/tetrix.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b9adb98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/tetrix.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,445 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*! 
+    \example widgets/tetrix
+    \title Tetrix Example
+
+    The Tetrix example is a Qt version of the classic Tetrix game.
+
+    \image tetrix-example.png
+
+    The object of the game is to stack pieces dropped from the top of the
+    playing area so that they fill entire rows at the bottom of the playing area.
+
+    When a row is filled, all the blocks on that row are removed, the player earns
+    a number of points, and the pieces above are moved down to occupy that row.
+    If more than one row is filled, the blocks on each row are removed, and the
+    player earns extra points.
+
+    The \gui{Left} cursor key moves the current piece one space to the left, the
+    \gui{Right} cursor key moves it one space to the right, the \gui{Up} cursor
+    key rotates the piece counter-clockwise by 90 degrees, and the \gui{Down}
+    cursor key rotates the piece clockwise by 90 degrees.
+
+    To avoid waiting for a piece to fall to the bottom of the board, press \gui{D}
+    to immediately move the piece down by one row, or press the \gui{Space} key to
+    drop it as close to the bottom of the board as possible.
+
+    This example shows how a simple game can be created using only three classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o The \c TetrixWindow class is used to display the player's score, number of
+       lives, and information about the next piece to appear.
+    \o The \c TetrixBoard class contains the game logic, handles keyboard input, and
+       displays the pieces on the playing area.
+    \o The \c TetrixPiece class contains information about each piece.
+    \endlist
+
+    In this approach, the \c TetrixBoard class is the most complex class, since it
+    handles the game logic and rendering. One benefit of this is that the
+    \c TetrixWindow and \c TetrixPiece classes are very simple and contain only a
+    minimum of code.
+
+    \section1 TetrixWindow Class Definition
+
+    The \c TetrixWindow class is used to display the game information and contains
+    the playing area:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixwindow.h 0
+
+    We use private member variables for the board, various display widgets, and
+    buttons to allow the user to start a new game, pause the current game, and quit.
+
+    Although the window inherits QWidget, the constructor does not provide an
+    argument to allow a parent widget to be specified. This is because the window
+    will always be used as a top-level widget.
+
+    \section1 TetrixWindow Class Implementation
+
+    The constructor sets up the user interface elements for the game:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixwindow.cpp 0
+
+    We begin by constructing a \c TetrixBoard instance for the playing area and a
+    label that shows the next piece to be dropped into the playing area; the label
+    is initially empty.
+
+    Three QLCDNumber objects are used to display the score, number of lives, and
+    lines removed. These initially show default values, and will be filled in
+    when a game begins:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixwindow.cpp 1
+
+    Three buttons with shortcuts are constructed so that the user can start a
+    new game, pause the current game, and quit the application:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixwindow.cpp 2
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixwindow.cpp 3
+
+    These buttons are configured so that they never receive the keyboard focus;
+    we want the keyboard focus to remain with the \c TetrixBoard instance so that
+    it receives all the keyboard events. Nonetheless, the buttons will still respond
+    to \key{Alt} key shortcuts.
+
+    We connect \l{QAbstractButton::}{clicked()} signals from the \gui{Start}
+    and \gui{Pause} buttons to the board, and from the \gui{Quit} button to the
+    application's \l{QApplication::}{quit()} slot.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixwindow.cpp 4
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixwindow.cpp 5
+
+    Signals from the board are also connected to the LCD widgets for the purpose of
+    updating the score, number of lives, and lines removed from the playing area.
+
+    We place the label, LCD widgets, and the board into a QGridLayout
+    along with some labels that we create with the \c createLabel() convenience
+    function:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixwindow.cpp 6
+
+    Finally, we set the grid layout on the widget, give the window a title, and
+    resize it to an appropriate size.
+
+    The \c createLabel() convenience function simply creates a new label on the
+    heap, gives it an appropriate alignment, and returns it to the caller:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixwindow.cpp 7
+
+    Since each label will be used in the widget's layout, it will become a child
+    of the \c TetrixWindow widget and, as a result, it will be deleted when the
+    window is deleted.
+
+    \section1 TetrixPiece Class Definition
+
+    The \c TetrixPiece class holds information about a piece in the game's
+    playing area, including its shape, position, and the range of positions it can
+    occupy on the board:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixpiece.h 0
+
+    Each shape contains four blocks, and these are defined by the \c coords private
+    member variable. Additionally, each piece has a high-level description that is
+    stored internally in the \c pieceShape variable.
+
+    The constructor is written inline in the definition, and simply ensures that
+    each piece is initially created with no shape. The \c shape() function simply
+    returns the contents of the \c pieceShape variable, and the \c x() and \c y()
+    functions return the x and y-coordinates of any given block in the shape.
+
+    \section1 TetrixPiece Class Implementation
+
+    The \c setRandomShape() function is used to select a random shape for a piece:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixpiece.cpp 0
+
+    For convenience, it simply chooses a random shape from the \c TetrixShape enum
+    and calls the \c setShape() function to perform the task of positioning the
+    blocks.
+
+    The \c setShape() function uses a look-up table of pieces to associate each
+    shape with an array of block positions:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixpiece.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixpiece.cpp 2
+
+    These positions are read from the table into the piece's own array of positions,
+    and the piece's internal shape information is updated to use the new shape.
+
+    The \c x() and \c y() functions are implemented inline in the class definition,
+    returning positions defined on a grid that extends horizontally and vertically
+    with coordinates from -2 to 2. Although the predefined coordinates for each
+    piece only vary horizontally from -1 to 1 and vertically from -1 to 2, each
+    piece can be rotated by 90, 180, and 270 degrees.
+
+    The \c minX() and \c maxX() functions return the minimum and maximum horizontal
+    coordinates occupied by the blocks that make up the piece:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixpiece.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixpiece.cpp 4
+
+    Similarly, the \c minY() and \c maxY() functions return the minimum and maximum
+    vertical coordinates occupied by the blocks:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixpiece.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixpiece.cpp 6
+
+    The \c rotatedLeft() function returns a new piece with the same shape as an
+    existing piece, but rotated counter-clockwise by 90 degrees:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixpiece.cpp 7
+
+    Similarly, the \c rotatedRight() function returns a new piece with the same
+    shape as an existing piece, but rotated clockwise by 90 degrees:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixpiece.cpp 9
+
+    These last two functions enable each piece to create rotated copies of itself.
+
+    \section1 TetrixBoard Class Definition
+
+    The \c TetrixBoard class inherits from QFrame and contains the game logic and display features:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.h 0
+
+    Apart from the \c setNextPieceLabel() function and the \c start() and \c pause()
+    public slots, we only provide public functions to reimplement QWidget::sizeHint()
+    and QWidget::minimumSizeHint(). The signals are used to communicate changes to
+    the player's information to the \c TetrixWindow instance.
+
+    The rest of the functionality is provided by reimplementations of protected event
+    handlers and private functions:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.h 1
+
+    The board is composed of a fixed-size array whose elements correspond to
+    spaces for individual blocks. Each element in the array contains a \c TetrixShape
+    value corresponding to the type of shape that occupies that element.
+
+    Each shape on the board will occupy four elements in the array, and these will
+    all contain the enum value that corresponds to the type of the shape.
+
+    We use a QBasicTimer to control the rate at which pieces fall toward the bottom
+    of the playing area. This allows us to provide an implementation of
+    \l{QObject::}{timerEvent()} that we can use to update the widget.
+
+    \section1 TetrixBoard Class Implementation
+
+    In the constructor, we customize the frame style of the widget, ensure that
+    keyboard input will be received by the widget by using Qt::StrongFocus for the
+    focus policy, and initialize the game state:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 0
+
+    The first (next) piece is also set up with a random shape.
+
+    The \c setNextPieceLabel() function is used to pass in an externally-constructed
+    label to the board, so that it can be shown alongside the playing area:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 1
+
+    We provide a reasonable size hint and minimum size hint for the board, based on
+    the size of the space for each block in the playing area:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 2
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 3
+
+    By using a minimum size hint, we indicate to the layout in the parent widget
+    that the board should not shrink below a minimum size.
+
+    A new game is started when the \c start() slot is called. This resets the
+    game's state, the player's score and level, and the contents of the board:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 4
+
+    We also emit signals to inform other components of these changes before creating
+    a new piece that is ready to be dropped into the playing area. We start the
+    timer that determines how often the piece drops down one row on the board.
+
+    The \c pause() slot is used to temporarily stop the current game by stopping the
+    internal timer:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 6
+
+    We perform checks to ensure that the game can only be paused if it is already
+    running and not already paused.
+
+    The \c paintEvent() function is straightforward to implement. We begin by
+    calling the base class's implementation of \l{QWidget::}{paintEvent()} before
+    constructing a QPainter for use on the board:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 7
+
+    Since the board is a subclass of QFrame, we obtain a QRect that covers the area
+    \e inside the frame decoration before drawing our own content.
+
+    If the game is paused, we want to hide the existing state of the board and
+    show some text. We achieve this by painting text onto the widget and returning
+    early from the function. The rest of the painting is performed after this point.
+
+    The position of the top of the board is found by subtracting the total height
+    of each space on the board from the bottom of the frame's internal rectangle.
+    For each space on the board that is occupied by a piece, we call the
+    \c drawSquare() function to draw a block at that position.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 8
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 9
+
+    Spaces that are not occupied by blocks are left blank.
+
+    Unlike the existing pieces on the board, the current piece is drawn
+    block-by-block at its current position:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 10
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 11
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 12
+
+    The \c keyPressEvent() handler is called whenever the player presses a key while
+    the \c TetrixBoard widget has the keyboard focus.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 13
+
+    If there is no current game, the game is running but paused, or if there is no
+    current shape to control, we simply pass on the event to the base class.
+
+    We check whether the event is about any of the keys that the player uses to
+    control the current piece and, if so, we call the relevant function to handle
+    the input:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 14
+
+    In the case where the player presses a key that we are not interested in, we
+    again pass on the event to the base class's implementation of
+    \l{QWidget::}{keyPressEvent()}.
+
+    The \c timerEvent() handler is called every time the class's QBasicTimer
+    instance times out. We need to check that the event we receive corresponds to
+    our timer. If it does, we can update the board:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 15
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 16
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 17
+
+    If a row (or line) has just been filled, we create a new piece and reset the
+    timer; otherwise we move the current piece down by one row. We let the base
+    class handle other timer events that we receive.
+
+    The \c clearBoard() function simply fills the board with the
+    \c TetrixShape::NoShape value:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 18
+
+    The \c dropDown() function moves the current piece down as far as possible on
+    the board, either until it is touching the bottom of the playing area or it is
+    stacked on top of another piece:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 19
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 20
+
+    The number of rows the piece has dropped is recorded and passed to the
+    \c pieceDropped() function so that the player's score can be updated.
+
+    The \c oneLineDown() function is used to move the current piece down by one row
+    (line), either when the user presses the \gui{D} key or when the piece is
+    scheduled to move:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 21
+
+    If the piece cannot drop down by one line, we call the \c pieceDropped() function
+    with zero as the argument to indicate that it cannot fall any further, and that
+    the player should receive no extra points for the fall.
+
+    The \c pieceDropped() function itself is responsible for awarding points to the
+    player for positioning the current piece, checking for full rows on the board
+    and, if no lines have been removed, creating a new piece to replace the current
+    one:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 22
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 23
+
+    We call \c removeFullLines() each time a piece has been dropped. This scans
+    the board from bottom to top, looking for blank spaces on each row.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 24
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 25
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 26
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 27
+
+    If a row contains no blank spaces, the rows above it are copied down by one row
+    to compress the stack of pieces, the top row on the board is cleared, and the
+    number of full lines found is incremented.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 28
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 29
+
+    If some lines have been removed, the player's score and the total number of lines
+    removed are updated. The \c linesRemoved() and \c scoreChanged() signals are
+    emitted to send these new values to other widgets in the window.
+
+    Additionally, we set the timer to elapse after half a second, set the
+    \c isWaitingAfterLine flag to indicate that lines have been removed, unset
+    the piece's shape to ensure that it is not drawn, and update the widget.
+    The next time that the \c timerEvent() handler is called, a new piece will be
+    created and the game will continue.
+
+    The \c newPiece() function places the next available piece at the top of the
+    board, and creates a new piece with a random shape:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 30
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 31
+
+    We place a new piece in the middle of the board at the top. The game is over if
+    the piece can't move, so we unset its shape to prevent it from being drawn, stop
+    the timer, and unset the \c isStarted flag.
+
+    The \c showNextPiece() function updates the label that shows the next piece to
+    be dropped:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 32
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 33
+
+    We draw the piece's component blocks onto a pixmap that is then set on the label.
+
+    The \c tryMove() function is used to determine whether a piece can be positioned
+    at the specified coordinates:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 34
+
+    We examine the spaces on the board that the piece needs to occupy and, if they
+    are already occupied by other pieces, we return \c false to indicate that the
+    move has failed.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 35
+
+    If the piece could be placed on the board at the desired location, we update the
+    current piece and its position, update the widget, and return \c true to indicate
+    success.
+
+    The \c drawSquare() function draws the blocks (normally squares) that make up
+    each piece using different colors for pieces with different shapes:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tetrix/tetrixboard.cpp 36
+
+    We obtain the color to use from a look-up table that relates each shape to an
+    RGB value, and use the painter provided to draw the block at the specified
+    coordinates.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/textfinder.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/textfinder.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2eea15d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/textfinder.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example uitools/textfinder
+    \title Text Finder Example
+
+    The Text Finder example demonstrates how to dynamically process forms
+    using the QtUiTools module. Dynamic form processing enables a form to
+    be processed at run-time only by changing the .ui file for the project.
+    The program allows the user to look up a particular word within the
+    contents of a text file. This text file is included in the project's
+    resource and is loaded into the display at startup.
+
+    \table
+    \row \o \inlineimage textfinder-example-find.png
+         \o \inlineimage textfinder-example-find2.png
+    \endtable
+
+    \section1 Setting Up The Resource File
+
+    The resources required for Text Finder are:
+    \list
+        \o \e{textfinder.ui} - the user interface file created in QtDesigner
+        \o \e{input.txt} - a text file containing some text to be displayed
+                           in the QTextEdit
+    \endlist
+
+    \e{textfinder.ui} contains all the necessary QWidget objects for the
+    Text Finder. A QLineEdit is used for the user input, a QTextEdit is
+    used to display the contents of \e{input.txt}, a QLabel is used to
+    display the text "Keyword", and a QPushButton is used for the "Find"
+    button. The screenshot below shows the preview obtained in QtDesigner.
+
+    \image textfinder-example-userinterface.png
+
+    A \e{textfinder.qrc} file is used to store both the \e{textfinder.ui}
+    and \e{input.txt} in the application's executable. The file contains 
+    the following code:
+
+    \quotefile examples/uitools/textfinder/textfinder.qrc
+
+    For more information on resource files, see \l{The Qt Resource System}.
+
+    To generate a form at run-time, the example is linked against the
+    QtUiTools module library. This is done in the \c{textfinder.pro} file
+    that contains the following lines:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_textfinder.qdoc 0
+
+    \section1 TextFinder Class Definition
+
+    The \c TextFinder class is a subclass of QWidget and it hosts the
+    \l{QWidget}s we need to access in the user interface. The QLabel in the
+    user interface is not declared here as we do not need to access it.
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/textfinder/textfinder.h 0
+
+    The slot \c{on_find_Button_clicked()} is a slot named according to the
+    \l{Using a Designer .ui File in Your Application#Automatic Connections}
+    {Automatic Connection} naming convention required
+    by \c uic.
+
+    \section1 TextFinder Class Implementation
+
+    The \c TextFinder class's constructor calls the \c loadUiFile() function
+    and then uses \c qFindChild() to access the user interface's
+    \l{QWidget}s.
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 0
+
+    We then use QMetaObject's system to enable signal and slot connections.
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 2
+
+    The loadTextFile() function is called to load \c{input.txt} into
+    QTextEdit to displays its contents.
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 3a
+
+    The \c{TextFinder}'s layout is set with \l{QWidget::}{setLayout()}.
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 3b
+
+    Finally, the window title is set to \e {Text Finder} and \c isFirstTime is
+    set to true.
+
+    \c isFirstTime is used as a flag to indicate whether the search operation
+    has been performed more than once. This is further explained with the
+    \c{on_findButton_clicked()} function.
+
+    The \c{loadUiFile()} function is used to load the user interface file
+    previously created in QtDesigner. The QUiLoader class is instantiated
+    and its \c load() function is used to load the form into \c{formWidget}
+    that acts as a place holder for the user interface. The function then
+    returns \c{formWidget} to its caller.
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 4
+
+    As mentioned earlier, the loadTextFile() function loads \e{input.txt}
+    into QTextEdit to display its contents. Data is read using QTextStream
+    into a QString object, \c line with the QTextStream::readAll() function.
+    The contents of \c line are then appended to \c{ui_textEdit}.
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 5
+
+    The \c{on_findButton_clicked()} function is a slot that is connected to
+    \c{ui_findButton}'s \c clicked() signal. The \c searchString is extracted
+    from the \c ui_lineEdit and the \c document is extracted from \c textEdit.
+    In event there is an empty \c searchString, a QMessageBox is used,
+    requesting the user to enter a word. Otherwise, we traverse through the
+    words in \c ui_textEdit, and highlight all ocurrences of the
+    \c searchString . Two QTextCursor objects are used: One to traverse through
+    the words in \c line and another to keep track of the edit blocks.
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 7
+
+    The \c isFirstTime flag is set to false the moment \c findButton is
+    clicked. This is necessary to undo the previous text highlight before
+    highlighting the user's next search string. Also, the \c found flag
+    is used to indicate if the \c searchString was found within the contents
+    of \c ui_textEdit. If it was not found, a QMessageBox is used
+    to inform the user.
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 9
+
+    \section1 \c main() Function
+
+    \snippet examples/uitools/textfinder/main.cpp 0
+
+    The \c main() function initialises the \e{textfinder.qrc} resource file
+    and instantiates as well as displays \c TextFinder.
+
+    \sa{Calculator Builder Example}, {World Time Clock Builder Example}
+    */
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/textobject.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/textobject.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc5a6b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/textobject.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example richtext/textobject
+    \title Text Object Example
+    
+    The Text Object example shows how to insert an SVG file into a
+    QTextDocument.
+
+    \image textobject-example.png
+
+    A QTextDocument consists of a hierarchy of elements, such as text blocks and
+    frames. A text object describes the structure or format of one or more of these
+    elements. For instance, images imported from HTML are implemented using text
+    objects. Text objects are used by the document's
+    \l{QAbstractTextDocumentLayout}{layout} to lay out and render (paint) the
+    document. Each object knows how to paint the elements they govern, and
+    calculates their size. 
+
+    To be able to insert an SVG image into a text document, we create
+    a text object, and implement painting for that object. This object
+    can then be \l{QTextCharFormat::setObjectType()}{set} on a
+    QTextCharFormat. We also register the text object with the layout
+    of the document, enabling it to draw \l{QTextCharFormat}s governed
+    by our text object. We can summarize the procedure with the
+    following steps:
+
+    \list
+        \o Implement the text object.
+        \o Register the text object with the layout of the text
+           document.
+        \o Set the text object on a QTextCharFormat.
+        \o Insert a QChar::ObjectReplacementCharacter with that
+           text char format into the document.
+    \endlist
+
+    The example consists of the following classes:
+
+    \list
+        \o \c{SvgTextObject} implements the text object.
+        \o \c{Window} shows a QTextEdit into which SVG images can be
+           inserted.
+    \endlist
+
+    \section1 SvgTextObject Class Definition
+
+    Let's take a look at the header file of \c {SvgTextObject}:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/textobject/svgtextobject.h 0
+
+    A text object is a QObject that implements QTextObjectInterface.
+    Note that the first class inherited must be QObject, and that
+    you must use Q_INTERFACES to let Qt know that your class
+    implements QTextObjectInterface.
+
+    The document layout keeps a collection of text objects stored as
+    \l{QObject}s, each of which has an associated object type. The
+    layout casts the QObject for the associated object type into the
+    QTextObjectInterface.
+
+    The \l{QTextObjectInterface::}{intrinsicSize()} and
+    \l{QTextObjectInterface::}{drawObject()} functions are then used
+    to calculate the size of the text object and draw it.
+
+    \section1 SvgTextObject Class Implementation
+
+    We start of by taking a look at the
+    \l{QTextObjectInterface::}{intrinsicSize()} function:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/textobject/svgtextobject.cpp 0
+
+    \c intrinsicSize() is called by the layout to calculate the size
+    of the text object. Notice that we have drawn the SVG image on a
+    QImage. This is because SVG rendering is quite expensive. The
+    example would lag seriously for large images if we drew them
+    with a QSvgRenderer each time.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/textobject/svgtextobject.cpp 1
+
+    In \c drawObject(), we paint the SVG image using the QPainter
+    provided by the layout.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The \c Window class is a self-contained window that has a
+    QTextEdit in which SVG images can be inserted.
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/textobject/window.h 0
+
+    The \c insertTextObject() slot inserts an SVG image at the current
+    cursor position, while \c setupTextObject() creates and registers
+    the SvgTextObject with the layout of the text edit's document.
+
+    The constructor simply calls \c setupTextObject() and \c
+    setupGui(), which creates and lays out the widgets of the \c
+    Window.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    We will now take a closer look at the functions that are relevant
+    to our text object, starting with the \c setupTextObject()
+    function.
+    
+    \snippet examples/richtext/textobject/window.cpp 3
+
+    \c {SvgTextFormat}'s value is the number of our object type. It is
+    used to identify object types by the document layout. 
+
+    Note that we only create one SvgTextObject instance; it will be
+    used for all QTextCharFormat's with the \c SvgTextFormat object
+    type.
+
+    Let's move on to the \c insertTextObject() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/textobject/window.cpp 1
+
+    First, the \c .svg file is opened and its contents are read
+    into the \c svgData array. 
+
+    \snippet examples/richtext/textobject/window.cpp 2
+
+    To speed things up, we buffer the SVG image in a QImage.  We use
+    \l{QTextFormat::}{setProperty()} to store the QImage in the in the
+    QTextCharFormat. We can retrieve it later with
+    \l{QTextCharFormat::}{property()}.
+
+    We insert the char format in the standard way - using a
+    QTextCursor. Notice that we use the special QChar
+    \l{QChar::}{ObjectReplacementCharacter}.
+*/
+
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/textures.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/textures.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2f0389c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/textures.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example opengl/textures
+    \title Textures Example
+
+    The Textures example demonstrates the use of Qt's image classes as textures in
+    applications that use both OpenGL and Qt to display graphics.
+
+    \image textures-example.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/threadedfortuneserver.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/threadedfortuneserver.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d5f2571
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/threadedfortuneserver.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example network/threadedfortuneserver
+    \title Threaded Fortune Server Example
+
+    The Threaded Fortune Server example shows how to create a server for a
+    simple network service that uses threads to handle requests from different
+    clients. It is intended to be run alongside the Fortune Client example.
+
+    \image threadedfortuneserver-example.png
+
+    The implementation of this example is similar to that of the
+    \l{network/fortuneserver}{Fortune Server} example, but here we will
+    implement a subclass of QTcpServer that starts each connection in a
+    different thread.
+
+    For this we need two classes: FortuneServer, a QTcpServer subclass, and
+    FortuneThread, which inherits QThread.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/threadedfortuneserver/fortuneserver.h 0
+
+    FortuneServer inherits QTcpServer and reimplements
+    QTcpServer::incomingConnection(). We also use it for storing the list of
+    random fortunes. 
+    
+    \snippet examples/network/threadedfortuneserver/fortuneserver.cpp 0
+
+    We use FortuneServer's constructor to simply generate the list of
+    fortunes.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/threadedfortuneserver/fortuneserver.cpp 1
+
+    Our implementation of QTcpServer::incomingConnection() creates a
+    FortuneThread object, passing the incoming socket descriptor and a random
+    fortune to FortuneThread's constructor. By connecting FortuneThread's
+    finished() signal to QObject::deleteLater(), we ensure that the thread
+    gets deleted once it has finished. We can then call QThread::start(),
+    which starts the thread.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/threadedfortuneserver/fortunethread.h 0
+
+    Moving on to the FortuneThread class, this is a QThread subclass whose job
+    is to write the fortune to the connected socket. The class reimplements
+    QThread::run(), and it has a signal for reporting errors.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/threadedfortuneserver/fortunethread.cpp 0
+    
+    FortuneThread's constructor simply stores the socket descriptor and
+    fortune text, so that they are available for run() later on.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/threadedfortuneserver/fortunethread.cpp 1
+
+    The first thing our run() function does is to create a QTcpSocket object
+    on the stack. What's worth noticing is that we are creating this object
+    inside the thread, which automatically associates the socket to the
+    thread's event loop. This ensures that Qt will not try to deliver events
+    to our socket from the main thread while we are accessing it from
+    FortuneThread::run().
+
+    \snippet examples/network/threadedfortuneserver/fortunethread.cpp 2
+
+    The socket is initialized by calling QTcpSocket::setSocketDescriptor(),
+    passing our socket descriptor as an argument. We expect this to succeed,
+    but just to be sure, (although unlikely, the system may run out of
+    resources,) we catch the return value and report any error.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/threadedfortuneserver/fortunethread.cpp 3
+
+    As with the \l{network/fortuneserver}{Fortune Server} example, we encode
+    the fortune into a QByteArray using QDataStream.
+
+    \snippet examples/network/threadedfortuneserver/fortunethread.cpp 4
+
+    But unlike the previous example, we finish off by calling
+    QTcpSocket::waitForDisconnected(), which blocks the calling thread until
+    the socket has disconnected. Because we are running in a separate thread,
+    the GUI will remain responsive.  
+
+    \sa {Fortune Server Example}, {Fortune Client Example}, {Blocking Fortune
+    Client Example}
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/tooltips.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/tooltips.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5daa2b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/tooltips.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,408 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/tooltips
+    \title Tool Tips Example
+
+    The Tool Tips example shows how to provide static and dynamic tool
+    tips for an application's widgets.
+
+    The simplest and most common way to set a widget's tool tip is by
+    calling its QWidget::setToolTip() function (static tool
+    tips). Then the tool tip is shown whenever the cursor points at
+    the widget. We show how to do this with our application's tool
+    buttons. But it is also possible to show different tool tips
+    depending on the cursor's position (dynamic tooltips). This
+    approach uses mouse tracking and event handling to determine what
+    widgets are located under the cursor at any point in time, and
+    displays their tool tips. The tool tips for the shape items in our
+    application are implemented using the latter approach.
+
+    \image tooltips-example.png
+
+    With the \c Tooltips application the user can create new shape
+    items with the provided tool buttons, and move the items around
+    using the mouse. Tooltips are provided whenever the cursor is
+    pointing to a shape item or one of the buttons.
+
+    The Tooltips example consists of two classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c ShapeItem is a custom widget representing one single shape item.
+    \o \c SortingBox inherits from QWidget and is the application's main
+        widget.
+    \endlist
+
+    First we will review the \c SortingBox class, then we will take a
+    look at the \c ShapeItem class.
+
+    \section1  SortingBox Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.h 0
+
+    The \c SortingBox class inherits QWidget, and it is the Tooltips
+    application's main widget. We reimplement several of the event
+    handlers.
+
+    The \c event() function provides tooltips, the \c resize()
+    function makes sure the application appears consistently when the
+    user resizes the main widget, and the \c paintEvent() function
+    displays the shape items within the \c SortingBox widget. The
+    mouse event handlers are reimplemented to make the user able to
+    move the items around.
+
+    In addition we need three private slots to make the user able to
+    create new shape items.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.h 1
+
+    We also create several private functions: We use the \c
+    initialItemPosition(), \c initialItemColor() and \c
+    createToolButton() functions when we are constructing the widget,
+    and we use the \c updateButtonGeometry() function whenever the
+    user is resizing the application's main widget.
+
+    The \c itemAt() function determines if there is a shape item at a
+    particular position, and the \c moveItemTo() function moves an
+    item to a new position. We use the \c createShapeItem(), \c
+    randomItemPosition() and \c randomItemColor() functions to create
+    new shape items.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.h 2
+
+    We keep all the shape items in a QList, and we keep three
+    QPainterPath objects holding the shapes of a circle, a square and
+    a triangle. We also need to have a pointer to an item when it is
+    moving, and we need to know its previous position.
+
+    \section1 SortingBox Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor, we first set the Qt::WA_StaticContents
+    attribute on the widget. This attribute indicates that the widget
+    contents are north-west aligned and static. On resize, such a
+    widget will receive paint events only for the newly visible part
+    of itself.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 1
+
+    To be able to show the appropiate tooltips while the user is
+    moving the cursor around, we need to enable mouse tracking for the
+    widget.
+
+    If mouse tracking is disabled (the default), the widget only
+    receives mouse move events when at least one mouse button is
+    pressed while the mouse is being moved. If mouse tracking is
+    enabled, the widget receives mouse move events even if no buttons
+    are pressed.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 2
+
+    A widget's background role defines the brush from the widget's
+    palette that is used to render the background, and QPalette::Base
+    is typically white.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 3
+
+    After creating the application's tool buttons using the private \c
+    createToolButton() function, we construct the shapes of a circle,
+    a square and a triangle using QPainterPath.
+
+    The QPainterPath class provides a container for painting
+    operations, enabling graphical shapes to be constructed and
+    reused. The main advantage of painter paths over normal drawing
+    operations is that complex shapes only need to be created once,
+    but they can be drawn many times using only calls to
+    QPainter::drawPath().
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 4
+
+    Then we set the window title, resize the widget to a suitable
+    size, and finally create three initial shape items using the
+    private \c createShapeItem(), \c initialItemPosition() and \c
+    initialItemColor() functions.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 5
+
+    QWidget::event() is the main event handler and receives all the
+    widget's events. Normally, we recommend reimplementing one of the
+    specialized event handlers instead of this function. But here we
+    want to catch the QEvent::ToolTip events, and since these are
+    rather rare, there exists no specific event handler. For that
+    reason we reimplement the main event handler, and the first thing
+    we need to do is to determine the event's type:
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 6
+
+    If the type is QEvent::ToolTip, we cast the event to a QHelpEvent,
+    otherwise we propagate the event using the QWidget::event()
+    function.
+
+    The QHelpEvent class provides an event that is used to request
+    helpful information about a particular point in a widget.
+
+    For example, the QHelpEvent::pos() function returns the event's
+    position relative to the widget to which the event is dispatched.
+    Here we use this information to determine if the position of the
+    event is contained within the area of any of the shape items. If
+    it is, we display the shape item's tooltip at the position of the
+    event. If not, we hide the tooltip and explicitly ignore the event.
+    This makes sure that the calling code does not start any tooltip
+    specific modes as a result of the event. Note that the
+    QToolTip::showText() function needs the event's position in global
+    coordinates provided by QHelpEvent::globalPos().
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 7
+
+    The \c resizeEvent() function is reimplemented to receive the
+    resize events dispatched to the widget. It makes sure that the
+    tool buttons keep their position relative to the main widget when
+    the widget is resized. We want the buttons to always be vertically
+    aligned in the application's bottom right corner, so each time the
+    main widget is resized we update the buttons geometry.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 8
+
+    The \c paintEvent() function is reimplemented to receive paint
+    events for the widget. We create a QPainter for the \c SortingBox
+    widget, and run through the list of created shape items, drawing
+    each item at its defined position.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 9
+
+    The painter will by default draw all the shape items at position
+    (0,0) in the \c SortingBox widget. The QPainter::translate()
+    function translates the coordinate system by the given offset,
+    making each shape item appear at its defined position. But
+    remember to translate the coordinate system back when the item is
+    drawn, otherwise the next shape item will appear at a position
+    relative to the item we drawed last.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 10
+
+    The QPainter::setBrush() function sets the current brush used by
+    the painter. When the provided argument is a QColor, the function
+    calls the appropiate QBrush constructor which creates a brush with
+    the specified color and Qt::SolidPattern style. The
+    QPainter::drawPath() function draws the given path using the
+    current pen for outline and the current brush for filling.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 11
+
+    The \c mousePressEvent() function is reimplemented to receive the
+    mouse press events dispatched to the widget. It determines if an
+    event's position is contained within the area of any of the shape
+    items, using the private \c itemAt() function.
+
+    If an item covers the position, we store a pointer to that item
+    and the event's position. If several of the shape items cover the
+    position, we store the pointer to the uppermost item. Finally, we
+    move the shape item to the end of the list, and make a call to the
+    QWidget::update() function to make the item appear on top.
+
+    The QWidget::update() function does not cause an immediate
+    repaint; instead it schedules a paint event for processing when Qt
+    returns to the main event loop.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 12
+
+    The \c mouseMoveEvent() function is reimplemented to receive mouse
+    move events for the widget. If the left mouse button is pressed
+    and there exists a shape item in motion, we use the private \c
+    moveItemTo() function to move the item with an offset
+    corresponding to the offset between the positions of the current
+    mouse event and the previous one.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 13
+
+    The \c mouseReleaseEvent() function is reimplemented to receive
+    the mouse release events dispatched to the widget. If the left
+    mouse button is pressed and there exists a shape item in motion,
+    we use the private \c moveItemTo() function to move the item like
+    we did in \c mouseMoveEvent(). But then we remove the pointer to
+    the item in motion, making the shape item's position final for
+    now. To move the item further, the user will need to press the
+    left mouse button again.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 14
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 15
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 16
+
+    The \c createNewCircle(), \c createNewSquare() and \c
+    createNewTriangle() slots simply create new shape items, using the
+    private \c createShapeItem(), \c randomItemPosition() and \c
+    randomItemColor() functions.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 17
+
+    In the \c itemAt() function, we run through the list of created
+    shape items to check if the given position is contained within the
+    area of any of the shape items.
+
+    For each shape item we use the QPainterPath::contains() function
+    to find out if the item's painter path contains the position. If
+    it does we return the index of the item, otherwise we return
+    -1. We run through the list backwards to get the index of the
+    uppermost shape item in case several items cover the position.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 18
+
+    The \c moveItemTo() function moves the shape item in motion, and
+    the parameter \c pos is the position of a mouse event. First we
+    calculate the offset between the parameter \c pos and the previous
+    mouse event position. Then we add the offset to the current
+    position of the item in motion.
+
+    It is tempting to simply set the position of the item to be the
+    parameter \c pos. But an item's position defines the top left
+    corner of the item's bounding rectangle, and the parameter \c pos
+    can be any point; The suggested shortcut would cause the item to
+    jump to a position where the cursor is pointing to the bounding
+    rectangle's top left corner, regardless of the item's previous
+    position.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 19
+
+    Finally, we update the previous mouse event position, and make a
+    call to the QWidget::update() function to make the item appear at
+    its new position.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 20
+
+    In the \c updateButtonGeometry() function we set the geometry for
+    the given button. The parameter coordinates define the bottom
+    right corner of the button. We use these coordinates and the
+    button's size hint to determine the position of the upper left
+    corner. This position, and the button's width and height, are the
+    arguments required by the QWidget::setGeometry() function.
+
+    In the end, we calculate and return the y-coordinate of the bottom
+    right corner of the next button. We use the QWidget::style()
+    function to retrieve the widget's GUI style, and then
+    QStyle::pixelMetric() to determine the widget's preferred default
+    spacing between its child widgets.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 21
+
+    The \c createShapeItem() function creates a single shape item. It
+    sets the path, tooltip, position and color, using the item's own
+    functions. In the end, the function appends the new item to the
+    list of shape items, and calls the QWidget::update() function to
+    make it appear with the other items within the \c SortingBox
+    widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 22
+
+    The \c createToolButton() function is called from the \c
+    SortingBox constructor. We create a tool button with the given
+    tooltip and icon. The button's parent is the \c SortingBox widget,
+    and its size is 32 x 32 pixels. Before we return the button, we
+    connect it to the given slot.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 23
+
+    The \c initialItemPosition() function is also called from the
+    constructor. We want the three first items to initially be
+    centered in the middle of the \c SortingBox widget, and we use
+    this function to calculate their positions.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 24
+
+    Whenever the user creates a new shape item, we want the new item
+    to appear at a random position, and we use the \c
+    randomItemPosition() function to calculate such a position. We
+    make sure that the item appears within the the visible area of the
+    \c SortingBox widget, using the widget's current width and heigth
+    when calculating the random coordinates.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 25
+
+    As with \c initialItemPosition(), the \c initialItemColor()
+    function is called from the constructor. The purposes of both
+    functions are purely cosmetic: We want to control the inital
+    position and color of the three first items.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/sortingbox.cpp 26
+
+    Finally the \c randomItemColor() function is implemented to give
+    the shape items the user creates, a random color.
+
+    \section1 ShapeItem Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/shapeitem.h 0
+
+    The \c ShapeItem class is a custom widget representing one single
+    shape item. The widget has a path, a position, a color and a
+    tooltip. We need functions to set or modify these objects, as well
+    as functions that return them. We make the latter functions \c
+    const to prohibit any modifications of the objects,
+    i.e. prohibiting unauthorized manipulation of the shape items
+    appearance.
+
+    \section1 ShapeItem Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/shapeitem.cpp 0
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/shapeitem.cpp 1
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/shapeitem.cpp 2
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/shapeitem.cpp 3
+
+    This first group of functions simply return the objects that are
+    requested. The objects are returned as constants, i.e. they cannot
+    be modified.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/shapeitem.cpp 4
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/shapeitem.cpp 5
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/shapeitem.cpp 6
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/widgets/tooltips/shapeitem.cpp 7
+
+    The last group of functions set or modify the shape item's path,
+    position, color and tooltip, respectively.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/torrent.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/torrent.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8805dad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/torrent.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example network/torrent
+    \title Torrent Example
+
+    The Torrent example is a functional BitTorrent client that
+    illustrates how to write a complex TCP/IP application using Qt.
+
+    \image torrent-example.png
+
+    \section1 License Information
+
+    The implementation of the US Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (SHA1) in this example is
+    derived from the original description in \l{RFC 3174}.
+
+    \legalese
+    Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2001).  All Rights Reserved.
+
+    This document and translations of it may be copied and furnished to
+    others, and derivative works that comment on or otherwise explain it
+    or assist in its implementation may be prepared, copied, published
+    and distributed, in whole or in part, without restriction of any
+    kind, provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are
+    included on all such copies and derivative works.  However, this
+    document itself may not be modified in any way, such as by removing
+    the copyright notice or references to the Internet Society or other
+    Internet organizations, except as needed for the purpose of
+    developing Internet standards in which case the procedures for
+    copyrights defined in the Internet Standards process must be
+    followed, or as required to translate it into languages other than
+    English.
+
+    The limited permissions granted above are perpetual and will not be
+    revoked by the Internet Society or its successors or assigns.
+
+    This document and the information contained herein is provided on an
+    "AS IS" basis and THE INTERNET SOCIETY AND THE INTERNET ENGINEERING
+    TASK FORCE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
+    BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTY THAT THE USE OF THE INFORMATION
+    HEREIN WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY RIGHTS OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+    MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+    \endlegalese
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/trafficinfo.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/trafficinfo.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c9b6890
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/trafficinfo.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2008 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example xmlpatterns/trafficinfo
+    \title TrafficInfo Example
+
+    Shows how XQuery can be used extract information from WML documents provided by a WAP service.
+
+    \section1 Overview
+
+    The WAP service used in this example is \l{Trafikanten}{wap.trafikanten.no}
+    that is run by the Norwegian governmental agency for public transport in
+    Oslo. The service provides real time information about the departure of
+    busses, trams and undergrounds for every station in the city area.
+
+    This example application displays the departure information for a specific
+    station and provides the feature to filter for a special bus or tram line.
+
+    \image trafficinfo-example.png
+
+    \section1 Retrieving the Data
+
+    Without the knowledge of XQuery, one would use QNetworkAccessManager to
+    query the WML document from the WAP service and then using the QDom
+    classes or QXmlStreamReader classes to iterate over the document and
+    extract the needed information.
+    However this approach results in a lot of glue code and consumes valuable
+    developer time, so we are looking for something that can access XML
+    documents locally or over the network and extract data according to given
+    filter rules. That's the point where XQuery enters the stage!
+
+    If we want to know when the underground number 6 in direction
+    \Aring\c{}sjordet is passing the underground station in Nydalen on November
+    14th 2008 after 1pm, we use the following URL:
+
+    \c{http://wap.trafikanten.no/F.asp?f=03012130&t=13&m=00&d=14.11.2008&start=1}
+
+    The parameters have the following meanings:
+    \list
+        \o \e{f} The unique station ID of Nydalen.
+        \o \e{t} The hour in 0-23 format.
+        \o \e{m} The minute in 0-59 format.
+        \o \e{d} The date in dd.mm.yyyy format.
+        \o \e{start} Not interesting for our use but should be passed.
+    \endlist
+
+    As a result we get the following document:
+
+    \quotefile examples/xmlpatterns/trafficinfo/time_example.wml
+
+    So for every departure we have a \c <a> tag that contains the time as a
+    text element, and the following text element contains the line number
+    and direction.
+
+    To encapsulate the XQuery code in the example application, we create a
+    custom \c TimeQuery class. This provides the \c queryInternal() function
+    that takes a station ID and date/time as input and returns the list of
+    times and directions:
+
+    \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/trafficinfo/timequery.cpp 1
+
+    The first lines of this function synthesize the XQuery strings that fetch
+    the document and extract the data.
+    For better readability, two separated queries are used here: the first one
+    fetches the times and the second fetches the line numbers and directions.
+
+    The \c doc() XQuery method opens a local or remote XML document and returns
+    it, so the \c{/wml/card/p/small/} statement behind it selects all XML nodes
+    that can be reached by the path, \c wml \rarrow \c card \rarrow \c p \rarrow
+    \c small.
+    Now we are on the node that contains all the XML nodes we are interested in.
+
+    In the first query we select all \c a nodes that have a \c href attribute
+    starting with the string "Rute" and return the text of these nodes.
+
+    In the second query we select all text nodes that are children of the
+    \c small node which start with a number.
+    These two queries are passed to the QXmlQuery instance and are evaluated
+    to string lists. After some sanity checking, we have collected all the
+    information we need.
+
+    In the section above we have seen that an unique station ID must be passed
+    as an argument to the URL for retrieving the time, so how to find out which
+    is the right station ID to use? The WAP service provides a page for that
+    as well, so the URL
+
+    \c{http://wap.trafikanten.no/FromLink1.asp?fra=Nydalen}
+
+    will return the following document:
+
+    \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/trafficinfo/station_example.wml 0
+
+    The names of the available stations are listed as separate text elements
+    and the station ID is part of the \c href attribute of the parent \c a
+    (anchor) element. In our example, the \c StationQuery class encapsulates
+    the action of querying the stations that match the given name pattern with
+    the following code:
+
+    \snippet examples/xmlpatterns/trafficinfo/stationquery.cpp 0
+
+    Just as in the \c TimeQuery implementation, the first step is to
+    synthesize the XQuery strings for selecting the station names and the
+    station IDs. As the station name that we pass in the URL will be input
+    from the user, we should protect the XQuery from code injection by using
+    the QXmlQuery::bindVariable() method to do proper quoting of the variable
+    content for us instead of concatenating the two strings manually.
+
+    So, we define a XQuery \c $station variable that is bound to the user
+    input. This variable is concatenated inside the XQuery code with the
+    \c concat method. To extract the station IDs, we select all \c a elements
+    that have an \c title attribute with the content "Velg", and from these
+    elements we take the substring of the \c href attribute that starts at the
+    18th character.
+
+    The station name can be extracted a bit more easily by just taking the
+    text elements of the selected \a elements.
+
+    After some sanity checks we have all the station IDs and the corresponding
+    names available.
+
+    The rest of the code in this example is just for representing the time and
+    station information to the user, and uses techniques described in the
+    \l{Qt Examples#Widgets}{Widgets examples}.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/transformations.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/transformations.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eabb803
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/transformations.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,385 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example painting/transformations
+    \title Transformations Example
+
+    The Transformations example shows how transformations influence
+    the way that QPainter renders graphics primitives. In particular
+    it shows how the order of transformations affect the result.
+
+    \image transformations-example.png
+
+    The application allows the user to manipulate the rendering of a
+    shape by changing the translation, rotation and scale of
+    QPainter's coordinate system.
+
+    The example consists of two classes and a global enum:
+
+    \list
+    \o The \c RenderArea class controls the rendering of a given shape.
+    \o The \c Window class is the application's main window.
+    \o The \c Operation enum describes the various transformation
+       operations available in the application.
+    \endlist
+
+    First we will take a quick look at the \c Operation enum, then we
+    will review the \c RenderArea class to see how a shape is
+    rendered. Finally, we will take a look at the Transformations
+    application's features implemented in the \c Window class.
+
+    \section1 Transformation Operations
+
+    Normally, the QPainter operates on the associated device's own
+    coordinate system, but it also has good support for coordinate
+    transformations.
+
+    The default coordinate system of a paint device has its origin at
+    the top-left corner. The x values increase to the right and the y
+    values increase downwards. You can scale the coordinate system by
+    a given offset using the QPainter::scale() function, you can
+    rotate it clockwise using the QPainter::rotate() function and you
+    can translate it (i.e. adding a given offset to the points) using
+    the QPainter::translate() function. You can also twist the
+    coordinate system around the origin (called shearing) using the
+    QPainter::shear() function.
+
+    All the tranformation operations operate on QPainter's
+    tranformation matrix that you can retrieve using the
+    QPainter::matrix() function. A matrix transforms a point in the
+    plane to another point. For more information about the
+    transformation matrix, see the \l {The Coordinate System} and
+    QMatrix documentation.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.h 0
+
+    The global \c Operation enum is declared in the \c renderarea.h
+    file and describes the various transformation operations available
+    in the Transformations application.
+
+    \section1 RenderArea Class Definition
+
+    The \c RenderArea class inherits QWidget, and controls the
+    rendering of a given shape.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.h 1
+
+    We declare two public functions, \c setOperations() and
+    \c setShape(), to be able to specify the \c RenderArea widget's shape
+    and to transform the coordinate system the shape is rendered
+    within.
+
+    We reimplement the QWidget's \l
+    {QWidget::minimumSizeHint()}{minimumSizeHint()} and \l
+    {QWidget::sizeHint()}{sizeHint()} functions to give the \c
+    RenderArea widget a reasonable size within our application, and we
+    reimplement the QWidget::paintEvent() event handler to draw the
+    render area's shape applying the user's transformation choices.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.h 2
+
+    We also declare several convenience functions to draw the shape,
+    the coordinate system's outline and the coordinates, and to
+    transform the painter according to the chosen transformations.
+
+    In addition, the \c RenderArea widget keeps a list of the
+    currently applied transformation operations, a reference to its
+    shape, and a couple of convenience variables that we will use when
+    rendering the coordinates.
+
+    \section1 RenderArea Class Implementation
+
+    The \c RenderArea widget controls the rendering of a given shape,
+    including the transformations of the coordinate system, by
+    reimplementing the QWidget::paintEvent() event handler. But first
+    we will take a quick look at the constructor and at the functions
+    that provides access to the \c RenderArea widget:
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor we pass the parent parameter on to the base
+    class, and customize the font that we will use to render the
+    coordinates. The QWidget::font() funtion returns the font
+    currently set for the widget. As long as no special font has been
+    set, or after QWidget::setFont() is called, this is either a
+    special font for the widget class, the parent's font or (if this
+    widget is a top level widget) the default application font.
+
+    After ensuring that the font's size is 12 points, we extract the
+    rectangles enclosing the coordinate letters, 'x' and 'y',  using the
+    QFontMetrics class.
+
+    QFontMetrics provides functions to access the individual metrics
+    of the font, its characters, and for strings rendered in the
+    font. The QFontMetrics::boundingRect() function returns the
+    bounding rectangle of the given character relative to the
+    left-most point on the base line.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.cpp 1
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.cpp 2
+
+    In the \c setShape() and \c setOperations() functions we update
+    the \c RenderArea widget by storing the new value or values
+    followed by a call to the QWidget::update() slot which schedules a
+    paint event for processing when Qt returns to the main event loop.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.cpp 3
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.cpp 4
+
+    We reimplement the QWidget's \l
+    {QWidget::minimumSizeHint()}{minimumSizeHint()} and \l
+    {QWidget::sizeHint()}{sizeHint()} functions to give the \c
+    RenderArea widget a reasonable size within our application. The
+    default implementations of these functions returns an invalid size
+    if there is no layout for this widget, and returns the layout's
+    minimum size or preferred size, respectively, otherwise.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.cpp 5
+
+    The \c paintEvent() event handler recieves the \c RenderArea
+    widget's paint events. A paint event is a request to repaint all
+    or part of the widget. It can happen as a result of
+    QWidget::repaint() or QWidget::update(), or because the widget was
+    obscured and has now been uncovered, or for many other reasons.
+
+    First we create a QPainter for the \c RenderArea widget. The \l
+    {QPainter::RenderHint}{QPainter::Antialiasing} render hint
+    indicates that the engine should antialias edges of primitives if
+    possible. Then we erase the area that needs to be repainted using
+    the QPainter::fillRect() function.
+
+    We also translate the coordinate system with an constant offset to
+    ensure that the original shape is renderend with a suitable
+    margin.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.cpp 6
+
+    Before we start to render the shape, we call the QPainter::save()
+    function.
+
+    QPainter::save() saves the current painter state (i.e. pushes the
+    state onto a stack) including the current coordinate system. The
+    rationale for saving the painter state is that the following call
+    to the \c transformPainter() function will transform the
+    coordinate system depending on the currently chosen transformation
+    operations, and we need a way to get back to the original state to
+    draw the outline.
+
+    After transforming the coordinate system, we draw the \c
+    RenderArea's shape, and then we restore the painter state using
+    the the QPainter::restore() function (i.e. popping the saved state off
+    the stack).
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.cpp 7
+
+    Then we draw the square outline.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.cpp 8
+
+    Since we want the coordinates to correspond with the coordinate
+    system the shape is rendered within, we must make another call to
+    the \c transformPainter() function.
+
+    The order of the painting operations is essential with respect to
+    the shared pixels. The reason why we don't render the coordinates
+    when the coordinate system already is transformed to render the
+    shape, but instead defer their rendering to the end, is that we
+    want the coordinates to appear on top of the shape and its
+    outline.
+
+    There is no need to save the QPainter state this time since
+    drawing the coordinates is the last painting operation.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.cpp 9
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.cpp 10
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.cpp 11
+
+    The \c drawCoordinates(), \c drawOutline() and \c drawShape() are
+    convenience functions called from the \c paintEvent() event
+    handler. For more information about QPainter's basic drawing
+    operations and how to display basic graphics primitives, see the
+    \l {painting/basicdrawing}{Basic Drawing} example.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/renderarea.cpp 12
+
+    The \c transformPainter() convenience function is also called from
+    the \c paintEvent() event handler, and transforms the given
+    QPainter's coordinate system according to the user's
+    transformation choices.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Definition
+
+    The \c Window class is the Transformations application's main
+    window.
+
+    The application displays four \c RenderArea widgets. The left-most
+    widget renders the shape in QPainter's default coordinate system,
+    the others render the shape with the chosen transformation in
+    addition to all the transformations applied to the \c RenderArea
+    widgets to their left.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/window.h 0
+
+    We declare two public slots to make the application able to
+    respond to user interaction, updating the displayed \c RenderArea
+    widgets according to the user's transformation choices.
+
+    The \c operationChanged() slot updates each of the \c RenderArea
+    widgets applying the currently chosen transformation operations, and
+    is called whenever the user changes the selected operations. The
+    \c shapeSelected() slot updates the \c RenderArea widgets' shapes
+    whenever the user changes the preferred shape.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/window.h 1
+
+    We also declare a private convenience function, \c setupShapes(),
+    that is used when constructing the \c Window widget, and we
+    declare pointers to the various components of the widget. We
+    choose to keep the available shapes in a QList of \l
+    {QPainterPath}s. In addition we declare a private enum counting
+    the number of displayed \c RenderArea widgets except the widget
+    that renders the shape in QPainter's default coordinate system.
+
+    \section1 Window Class Implementation
+
+    In the constructor we create and initialize the application's
+    components:
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/window.cpp 0
+
+    First we create the \c RenderArea widget that will render the
+    shape in the default coordinate system. We also create the
+    associated QComboBox that allows the user to choose among four
+    different shapes: A clock, a house, a text and a truck. The shapes
+    themselves are created at the end of the constructor, using the
+    \c setupShapes() convenience function.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/window.cpp 1
+
+    Then we create the \c RenderArea widgets that will render their
+    shapes with coordinate tranformations. By default the applied
+    operation is \gui {No Transformation}, i.e. the shapes are
+    rendered within the default coordinate system. We create and
+    initialize the associated \l {QComboBox}es with items
+    corresponding to the various transformation operations decribed by
+    the global \c Operation enum.
+
+    We also connect the \l {QComboBox}es' \l
+    {QComboBox::activated()}{activated()} signal to the \c
+    operationChanged() slot to update the application whenever the
+    user changes the selected transformation operations.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/window.cpp 2
+
+    Finally, we set the layout for the application window using the
+    QWidget::setLayout() function, construct the available shapes
+    using the private \c setupShapes() convenience function, and make
+    the application show the clock shape on startup using the public
+    \c shapeSelected() slot before we set the window title.
+
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/window.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/window.cpp 4
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/window.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/window.cpp 6
+    \dots
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/window.cpp 7
+
+    The \c setupShapes() function is called from the constructor and
+    create the QPainterPath objects representing the shapes that are
+    used in the application. For construction details, see the \l
+    {painting/transformations/window.cpp}{window.cpp} example
+    file. The shapes are stored in a QList. The QList::append()
+    function inserts the given shape at the end of the list.
+
+    We also connect the associated QComboBox's \l
+    {QComboBox::activated()}{activated()} signal to the \c
+    shapeSelected() slot to update the application when the user
+    changes the preferred shape.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/window.cpp 8
+
+    The public \c operationChanged() slot is called whenever the user
+    changes the selected operations.
+
+    We retrieve the chosen transformation operation for each of the
+    transformed \c RenderArea widgets by querying the associated \l
+    {QComboBox}{QComboBoxes}. The transformed \c RenderArea widgets
+    are supposed to render the shape with the transformation specified
+    by its associated combobox \e {in addition to} all the
+    transformations applied to the \c RenderArea widgets to its
+    left. For that reason, for each widget we query, we append the
+    associated operation to a QList of transformations which we apply
+    to the widget before proceeding to the next.
+
+    \snippet examples/painting/transformations/window.cpp 9
+
+    The \c shapeSelected() slot is called whenever the user changes
+    the preferred shape, updating the \c RenderArea widgets using
+    their public \c setShape() function.
+
+    \section1 Summary
+
+    The Transformations example shows how transformations influence
+    the way that QPainter renders graphics primitives. Normally, the
+    QPainter operates on the device's own coordinate system, but it
+    also has good support for coordinate transformations. With the
+    Transformations application you can scale, rotate and translate
+    QPainter's coordinate system.  The order in which these
+    tranformations are applied is essential for the result.
+
+    All the tranformation operations operate on QPainter's
+    tranformation matrix. For more information about the
+    transformation matrix, see the \l {The Coordinate System} and
+    QMatrix documentation.
+
+    The Qt reference documentation provides several painting
+    demos. Among these is the \l {demos/affine}{Affine
+    Transformations} demo that shows Qt's ability to perform
+    transformations on painting operations. The demo also allows the
+    user to experiment with the various transformation operations.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/treemodelcompleter.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/treemodelcompleter.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..82e9c24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/treemodelcompleter.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,185 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example tools/treemodelcompleter
+    \title Tree Model Completer Example
+
+    The Tree Model Completer example shows how to provide completion
+    facilities for a hierarchical model, using a period as the separator
+    to access Child, GrandChild and GrandGrandChild level objects.
+
+    \image treemodelcompleter-example.png
+
+    Similar to the \l{Completer Example}, we provide QComboBox objects to
+    enable selection for completion mode and case sensitivity, as well as
+    a QCheckBox for wrap completions.
+
+    \section1 The Resource File
+
+    The contents of the TreeModelCompleter is read from \e treemodel.txt.
+    This file is embedded within the \e treemodelcompleter.qrc resource file,
+    which contains the following:
+
+    \quotefile examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/treemodelcompleter.qrc
+
+    \section1 TreeModelCompleter Class Definition
+
+    The \c TreeModelCompleter is a subclass of QCompleter with two
+    constructors - one with \a parent as an argument and another with
+    \a parent and \a model as arguments.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/treemodelcompleter.h 0
+
+    The class reimplements the protected functions
+    \l{QCompleter::splitPath()}{splitPath()}  and
+    \l{QCompleter::pathFromIndex()}{pathFromIndex()} to suit a tree model.
+    For more information on customizing QCompleter to suit tree models, refer
+    to \l{QCompleter#Handling Tree Models}{Handling Tree Models}.
+
+    \c TreeModelCompleter also has a separator property which is declared
+    using the Q_PROPERTY() macro. The separator has READ and WRITE attributes
+    and the corresponding functions \c separator() and \c setSeparator(). For
+    more information on Q_PROPERTY(), refer to \l{Qt's Property System}.
+
+    \section1 TreeModelCompleter Class Implementation
+
+    The first constructor constructs a \c TreeModelCompleter object with a
+    parent while the second constructor constructs an object with a parent
+    and a QAbstractItemModel, \a model.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/treemodelcompleter.cpp 0
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/treemodelcompleter.cpp 1
+
+    The \c separator() function is a getter function that returns the
+    separator string.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/treemodelcompleter.cpp 2
+
+    As mentioned earlier, the \c splitPath() function is reimplemented because
+    the default implementation is more suited to QDirModel or list models. In
+    order for QCompleter to split the path into a list of strings that are
+    matched at each level, we split it using QString::split() with \c sep as its
+    separator.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/treemodelcompleter.cpp 3
+
+    The \c pathFromIndex() function returns data for the completionRole() for a
+    tree model. This function is reimplemented as its default implementation is
+    more suitable for list models. If there is no separator, we use
+    \l{QCompleter}'s default implementation, otherwise we use the
+    \l{QStringList::prepend()}{prepend()} function to navigate upwards and
+    accumulate the data. The function then returns a QStringList, \c dataList,
+    using a separator to join objects of different levels.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/treemodelcompleter.cpp 4
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    The \c MainWindow class is a subclass of QMainWindow and implements five
+    custom slots: \c about(), \c changeCase(), \c changeMode(),
+    \c highlight(), and \c updateContentsLabel().
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    In addition, the class has two private functions, \c createMenu() and
+    \c modelFromFile(), as well as private instances of QTreeView, QComboBox,
+    QLabel, \c TreeModelCompleter and QLineEdit.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/mainwindow.h 1
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    The \c{MainWindow}'s constructor creates a \c MainWindow object with a
+    parent and initializes the \c completer and \c lineEdit. The
+    \c createMenu() function is invoked to set up the "File" menu and "Help"
+    menu. The \c{completer}'s model is set to the QAbstractItemModel obtained
+    from \c modelFromFile(), and the \l{QCompleter::highlighted()}
+    {highlighted()} signal is connected to \c{MainWindow}'s \c highlight()
+    slot.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    The QLabel objects \c modelLabel, \c modeLabel and \c caseLabel are
+    instantiated. Also, the QComboBox objects, \c modeCombo and \c caseCombo,
+    are instantiated and populated. By default, the \c{completer}'s mode is
+    "Filtered Popup" and the case is insensitive.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/mainwindow.cpp 1
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/mainwindow.cpp 2
+
+    We use a QGridLayout to place all the objects in the \c MainWindow.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+    The \c createMenu() function sets up the QAction objects required and
+    adds them to the "File" menu and "Help" menu. The
+    \l{QAction::triggered()}{triggered()} signals from these actions are
+    connected to their respective slots.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/mainwindow.cpp 4
+
+    The \c changeMode() function accepts an \a index corresponding to the
+    user's choice of completion mode and changes the \c{completer}'s mode
+    accordingly.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/mainwindow.cpp 5
+
+    The \c about() function provides a brief description on the Tree Model
+    Completer example.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/mainwindow.cpp 6
+
+    The \c changeCase() function alternates between \l{Qt::CaseSensitive}
+    {Case Sensitive} and \l{Qt::CaseInsensitive}{Case Insensitive} modes,
+    depending on the value of \a cs.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/mainwindow.cpp 7
+
+    \section1 \c main() Function
+
+    The \c main() function instantiates \c MainWindow and invokes the
+    \l{QWidget::show()}{show()} function to display it.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/treemodelcompleter/main.cpp 0
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/trivialwizard.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/trivialwizard.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..360ea00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/trivialwizard.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example dialogs/trivialwizard
+    \title Trivial Wizard Example
+
+    The Trivial Wizard example illustrates how to create a linear three-page
+    registration wizard using three instances of QWizardPage and one instance
+    of QWizard.
+
+    \image trivialwizard-example-flow.png
+
+    \section1 Introduction Page
+
+    \image trivialwizard-example-introduction.png
+
+    The introduction page is created with the \c createIntroPage()
+    function where a QWizardPage is created and its title is set to
+    "Introduction". A QLabel is used to hold the description of \c page.
+    A QVBoxLayout is used to hold the \c label. This \c page is returned
+    when the \c createIntroPage() function is called.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/trivialwizard/trivialwizard.cpp 0
+
+    \section1 Registration Page
+
+    \image trivialwizard-example-registration.png
+
+    The registration page is created with the \c createRegistrationPage()
+    function. QLineEdit objects are used to allow the user to input a name
+    and an e-mail address. A QGridLayout is used to hold the QLabel and
+    QLineEdit objects.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/trivialwizard/trivialwizard.cpp 2
+
+    \section1 Conclusion Page
+
+    \image trivialwizard-example-conclusion.png
+
+    The conclusion page is created in the \c createConclusionPage()
+    function. This function's content is similar to \c createIntroPage(). A
+    QLabel is used to inform the user that the registration process has
+    completed successfully.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/trivialwizard/trivialwizard.cpp 6
+
+    \section1 \c main() Function
+
+    The \c main() function instantiates a QWizard object, \c wizard, and
+    adds all three QWizardPage objects to it. The \c wizard window title is
+    set to "Trivial Wizard" and its \c show() function is invoked to display
+    it.
+
+    \snippet examples/dialogs/trivialwizard/trivialwizard.cpp 10
+
+    \sa QWizard, {Class Wizard Example}, {License Wizard Example}
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/trollprint.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/trollprint.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..38251ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/trollprint.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,275 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example linguist/trollprint
+    \title Troll Print Example
+
+    Troll Print is an example application that lets the user choose
+    printer settings. It comes in two versions: English and
+    Portuguese.
+
+    \image linguist-trollprint_10_en.png
+
+    We've included a translation file, \c trollprint_pt.ts, which contains some
+    Portuguese translations for this example.
+
+    We will consider two releases of the same application: Troll Print
+    1.0 and 1.1. We will learn to reuse the translations created for one
+    release in a subsequent release. (In this tutorial, you need to edit
+    some source files. It's probably best to copy all the files to a new
+    temporary directory and work from there.)
+
+    See the \l{Qt Linguist manual} for more information about
+    translating Qt application.
+
+    \section1 Line by Line Walkthrough
+
+    The \c PrintPanel class is defined in \c printpanel.h.
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/trollprint/printpanel.h 0
+
+    \c PrintPanel is a QWidget. It needs the \c Q_OBJECT macro for \c
+    tr() to work properly.
+
+    The implementation file is \c printpanel.cpp.
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/trollprint/printpanel.cpp 0
+
+    Some of the code is commented out in Troll Print 1.0; you will
+    uncomment it later, for Troll Print 1.1.
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/trollprint/printpanel.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/linguist/trollprint/printpanel.cpp 2
+
+    Notice the two occurrences of \c tr("Enabled") and of \c
+    tr("Disabled") in PrintPanel. Since both "Enabled"s and "Disabled"s
+    appear in the same context \e {Qt Linguist} will only display one
+    occurrence of each and will use the same translations for the
+    duplicates that it doesn't display. Whilst this is a useful
+    timesaver, in some languages, such as Portuguese, the second
+    occurrence requires a separate translation. We will see how \e {Qt
+    Linguist} can be made to display all the occurrences for separate
+    translation shortly.
+
+    The header file for \c MainWindow, \c mainwindow.h, contains no
+    surprises. In the implementation, \c mainwindow.cpp, we have some
+    user-visible source texts that must be marked for translation.
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/trollprint/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    We must translate the window title.
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/trollprint/mainwindow.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/linguist/trollprint/mainwindow.cpp 3
+
+    We also need to translate the actions and menus. Note that the
+    two argument form of \c tr() is used for the keyboard
+    accelerator, "Ctrl+Q", since the second argument is the only clue
+    the translator has to indicate what function that accelerator
+    will perform.
+
+    \snippet examples/linguist/trollprint/main.cpp 0
+
+    The \c main() function in \c main.cpp is the same as the one in
+    the \l{linguist/arrowpad}{Arrow Pad} example. In particular, it
+    chooses a translation file based on the current locale.
+
+    \section1 Running Troll Print 1.0 in English and in Portuguese
+
+    We will use the translations in the \c trollprint_pt.ts file that is provided.
+
+    Set the \c LANG environment variable to \c pt, and then run \c
+    trollprint. You should still see the English version. Now run \c
+    lrelease, e.g. \c {lrelease trollprint.pro}, and then run the
+    example again. Now you should see the Portuguese edition (Troll
+    Imprimir 1.0):
+
+    \image linguist-trollprint_10_pt_bad.png
+
+    Whilst the translation has appeared correctly, it is in fact wrong. In
+    good Portuguese, the second occurrence of "Enabled" should be
+    "Ativadas", not "Ativado" and the ending for the second translation of
+    "Disabled" must change similarly too.
+
+    If you open \c trollprint_pt.ts using \e {Qt Linguist}, you will see that
+    there is just one occurrence of "Enabled" and of "Disabled" in the
+    translation source file, even though there are two of each in the
+    source code. This is because \e {Qt Linguist} tries to minimize the
+    translator's work by using the same translation for duplicate source
+    texts. In cases such as this where an identical translation is wrong,
+    the programmer must disambiguate the duplicate occurrences. This is
+    easily achieved by using the two argument form of \c tr().
+
+    We can easily determine which file must be changed because the
+    translator's "context" is in fact the class name for the class where
+    the texts that must be changed appears. In this case the file is \c
+    printpanel.cpp, where the there are four lines to change. Add the
+    second argument "two-sided" in the appropriate \c tr() calls to the
+    first pair of radio buttons:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_trollprint.qdoc 0
+
+    and add the second argument "colors" in the appropriate \c tr() calls
+    for the second pair of radio buttons:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_trollprint.qdoc 1
+
+    Now run \c lupdate and open \c trollprint_pt.ts with \e {Qt Linguist}. You
+    should now see two changes.
+
+    First, the translation source file now contains \e three "Enabled",
+    "Disabled" pairs. The first pair is marked "(obs.)" signifying that they
+    are obsolete. This is because these texts appeared in \c tr() calls that
+    have been replaced by new calls with two arguments. The second pair has
+    "two-sided" as their comment, and the third pair has "colors" as their
+    comment. The comments are shown in the \gui {Source text and comments}
+    area in \e {Qt Linguist}.
+
+    Second, the translation text "Ativado" and "Desativado" have been
+    automatically used as translations for the new "Enabled" and "Disabled"
+    texts, again to minimize the translator's work. Of course in this case
+    these are not correct for the second occurrence of each word, but they
+    provide a good starting point.
+
+    Change the second "Ativado" into "Ativadas" and the second
+    "Desativado" into "Desativadas", then save and quit. Run \c lrelease
+    to obtain an up-to-date binary \c trollprint_pt.qm file, and run Troll Print
+    (or rather Troll Imprimir).
+
+    \image linguist-trollprint_10_pt_good.png
+
+    The second argument to \c tr() calls, called "comments" in \e {Qt
+    Linguist}, distinguish between identical source texts that occur in
+    the same context (class). They are also useful in other cases to give
+    clues to the translator, and in the case of Ctrl key accelerators are
+    the only means of conveying the function performed by the accelerator to
+    the translator.
+
+    An additional way of helping the translator is to provide information on
+    how to navigate to the particular part of the application that contains
+    the source texts they must translate. This helps them see the context
+    in which the translation appears and also helps them to find and test
+    the translations. This can be achieved by using a \c TRANSLATOR comment
+    in the source code:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_trollprint.qdoc 2
+
+    Try adding these comments to some source files, particularly to
+    dialog classes, describing the navigation necessary to reach the
+    dialogs. You could also add them to the example files, e.g. \c
+    mainwindow.cpp and \c printpanel.cpp are appropriate files. Run \c
+    lupdate and then start \e {Qt Linguist} and load in \c trollprint_pt.ts.
+    You should see the comments in the \gui {Source text and comments} area
+    as you browse through the list of source texts.
+
+    Sometimes, particularly with large programs, it can be difficult for
+    the translator to find their translations and check that they're
+    correct. Comments that provide good navigation information can save
+    them time:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_trollprint.qdoc 3
+
+    \section1 Troll Print 1.1
+
+    We'll now prepare release 1.1 of Troll Print. Start your favorite text
+    editor and follow these steps:
+
+    \list
+    \o Uncomment the two lines that create a QLabel with the text
+         "\<b\>TROLL PRINT\</b\>" in \c printpanel.cpp.
+    \o Word-tidying: Replace "2-sided" by "Two-sided" in \c printpanel.cpp.
+    \o Replace "1.0" with "1.1" everywhere it occurs in \c mainwindow.cpp.
+    \o Update the copyright year to 1999-2000 in \c mainwindow.cpp.
+    \endlist
+
+    (Of course the version number and copyright year would be consts or
+    #defines in a real application.)
+
+    Once finished, run \c lupdate, then open \c trollprint_pt.ts in \e {Qt
+    Linguist}. The following items are of special interest:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c MainWindow
+         \list
+         \o Troll Print 1.0 - marked "(obs.)", obsolete
+         \o About Troll Print 1.0 - marked "(obs.)", obsolete
+         \o Troll Print 1.0. Copyright 1999 Software, Inc. -
+       marked obsolete
+         \o Troll Print 1.1 - automatically translated as
+       "Troll Imprimir 1.1"
+         \o About Troll Print 1.1 - automatically translated as
+       "Troll Imprimir 1.1"
+         \o Troll Print 1.1. Copyright 1999-2000 Software,
+       Inc. - automatically translated as "Troll Imprimir 1.1.
+       Copyright 1999-2000 Software, Inc."
+         \endlist
+    \o \c PrintPanel
+         \list
+         \o 2-sided - marked "(obs.)", obsolete
+         \o \<b\>TROLL PRINT\</b\> - unmarked, i.e. untranslated
+         \o Two-sided - unmarked, i.e. untranslated.
+         \endlist
+    \endlist
+
+    Notice that \c lupdate works hard behind the scenes to make revisions
+    easier, and it's pretty smart with numbers.
+
+    Go over the translations in \c MainWindow and mark these as "done".
+    Translate "\<b\>TROLL PRINT\</b\>" as "\<b\>TROLL IMPRIMIR\</b\>".
+    When you're translating "Two-sided", press the \gui {Guess Again}
+    button to translate "Two-sided", but change the "2" into "Dois".
+
+    Save and quit, then run \c lrelease. The Portuguese version
+    should look like this:
+
+    \image linguist-trollprint_11_pt.png
+
+    Choose \gui{Ajuda|Sobre} (\gui{Help|About}) to see the about box.
+
+    If you choose \gui {Ajuda|Sobre Qt} (\gui {Help|About Qt}), you'll get
+    an English dialog. Oops! Qt itself needs to be translated. See
+    \l{Internationalization with Qt} for details.
+
+    Now set \c LANG=en to get the original English version:
+
+    \image linguist-trollprint_11_en.png
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/undoframework.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/undoframework.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3d0965f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/undoframework.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,306 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example tools/undoframework 
+    \title Undo Framework Example
+
+    This example shows how to implement undo/redo functionality 
+    with the Qt undo framework.
+
+    \image undoframeworkexample.png The Undo Diagram Example
+
+    In the Qt undo framework, all actions that the user performs are
+    implemented in classes that inherit QUndoCommand. An undo command
+    class knows how to both \l{QUndoCommand::}{redo()} - or just do
+    the first time - and \l{QUndoCommand::}{undo()} an action. For
+    each action the user performs, a command is placed on a
+    QUndoStack.  Since the stack contains all commands executed
+    (stacked in chronological order) on the document, it can roll the
+    state of the document backwards and forwards by undoing and redoing
+    its commands. See the \l{Overview of Qt's Undo Framework}{overview
+    document} for a high-level introduction to the undo framework.
+
+    The undo example implements a simple diagram application. It is
+    possible to add and delete items, which are either box or
+    rectangular shaped, and move the items by dragging them with the
+    mouse. The undo stack is shown in a QUndoView, which is a list in
+    which the commands are shown as list items. Undo and redo are
+    available through the edit menu. The user can also select a command
+    from the undo view.
+
+    We use the \l{The Graphics View Framework}{graphics view
+    framework} to implement the diagram. We only treat the related
+    code briefly as the framework has examples of its own (e.g., the
+    \l{Diagram Scene Example}).
+
+    The example consists of the following classes:
+
+    \list 
+        \o \c MainWindow is the main window and arranges the
+              example's widgets. It creates the commands based 
+              on user input and keeps them on the command stack.
+        \o \c AddCommand adds an item to the scene.
+        \o \c DeleteCommand deletes an item from the scene.
+        \o \c MoveCommand when an item is moved the MoveCommand keeps record
+              of the start and stop positions of the move, and it
+              moves the item according to these when \c redo() and \c undo()
+              is called.
+        \o \c DiagramScene inherits QGraphicsScene and
+              emits signals for the \c MoveComands when an item is moved.
+        \o \c DiagramItem inherits QGraphicsPolygonItem and represents
+              an item in the diagram.
+    \endlist
+
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.h 0
+
+    The \c MainWindow class maintains the undo stack, i.e., it creates
+    \l{QUndoCommand}s and pushes and pops them from the stack when it
+    receives the \c triggered() signal from \c undoAction and \c
+    redoAction.
+    
+    \section1 MainWindow Class Implementation
+
+    We will start with a look at the constructor:    
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor, we set up the DiagramScene and QGraphicsView. 
+
+    Here is the \c createUndoView() function:    
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.cpp 1
+
+    The QUndoView is a widget that display the text, which is set with
+    the \l{QUndoCommand::}{setText()} function, for each QUndoCommand
+    in the undo stack in a list.
+    
+    Here is the \c createActions() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.cpp 2
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.cpp 3
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.cpp 5
+
+    The \c createActions() function sets up all the examples actions
+    in the manner shown above. The
+    \l{QUndoStack::}{createUndoAction()} and
+    \l{QUndoStack::}{createRedoAction()} helps us crate actions that
+    are disabled and enabled based on the state of the stack.  Also,
+    the text of the action will be updated automatically based on the
+    \l{QUndoCommand::}{text()} of the undo commands. For the other
+    actions we have implemented slots in the \c MainWindow class.
+
+    Here is the \c createMenus() function:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.cpp 6
+
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.cpp 7
+    \dots
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.cpp 8
+
+    We have to use the QMenu \c aboutToShow() and \c aboutToHide()
+    signals since we only want \c deleteAction to be enabled when we
+    have selected an item.     
+
+    Here is the \c itemMoved() slot:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.cpp 9
+
+    We simply push a MoveCommand on the stack, which calls \c redo()
+    on it.
+
+    Here is the \c deleteItem() slot:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.cpp 10
+
+    An item must be selected to be deleted.  We need to check if it is
+    selected as the \c deleteAction may be enabled even if an item is
+    not selected. This can happen as we do not catch a signal or event
+    when an item is selected.
+
+    Here is the \c itemMenuAboutToShow() and itemMenuAboutToHide() slots:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.cpp 11
+    \codeline
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.cpp 12
+
+    We implement \c itemMenuAboutToShow() and \c itemMenuAboutToHide()
+    to get a dynamic item menu. These slots are connected to the 
+    \l{QMenu::}{aboutToShow()} and \l{QMenu::}{aboutToHide()} signals.
+    We need this to disable or enable the \c deleteAction. 
+
+    Here is the \c addBox() slot:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.cpp 13
+
+    The \c addBox() function creates an AddCommand and pushes it on
+    the undo stack.
+
+    Here is the \c addTriangle() sot:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.cpp 14
+
+    The \c addTriangle() function creates an AddCommand and pushes it
+    on the undo stack.    
+
+    Here is the implementation of \c about():
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/mainwindow.cpp 15
+    
+    The about slot is triggered by the \c aboutAction and displays an
+    about box for the example.
+
+    \section1 AddCommand Class Definition
+    
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/commands.h 2
+
+    The \c AddCommand class adds DiagramItem graphics items to the
+    DiagramScene.  
+
+    \section1 AddCommand Class Implementation
+
+    We start with the constructor:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/commands.cpp 7
+
+    We first create the DiagramItem to add to the DiagramScene.  The
+    \l{QUndoCommand::}{setText()} function let us set a QString that
+    describes the command. We use this to get custom messages in the
+    QUndoView and in the menu of the main window.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/commands.cpp 8
+
+    \c undo() removes the item from the scene. We need to update the
+    scene as ...(ask Andreas)
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/commands.cpp 9
+
+    We set the position of the item as we do not do this in the
+    constructor.
+
+    \section1 DeleteCommand Class Definition
+    
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/commands.h 1
+
+    The DeleteCommand class implements the functionality to remove an
+    item from the scene.
+    
+    \section1 DeleteCommand Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/commands.cpp 4
+
+    We know that there must be one selected item as it is not possible
+    to create a DeleteCommand unless the item to be deleted is
+    selected and that only one item can be selected at any time. 
+    The item must be unselected if it is inserted back into the 
+    scene.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/commands.cpp 5
+
+    The item is simply reinserted into the scene.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/commands.cpp 6
+
+    The item is removed from the scene.
+
+    \section1 MoveCommand Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/commands.h 0
+
+    The \l{QUndoCommand::}{mergeWith()} is reimplemented to make
+    consecutive moves of an item one MoveCommand, i.e, the item will
+    be moved back to the start position of the first move.
+
+    \section1 MoveCommand Class Implementation
+
+    
+    The constructor of MoveCommand looks like this:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/commands.cpp 0
+
+    We save both the old and new positions for undo and redo
+    respectively.
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/commands.cpp 2
+
+    We simply set the items old position and update the scene.    
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/commands.cpp 3
+
+    We set the item to its new position.
+    
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/commands.cpp 1
+
+    Whenever a MoveCommand is created, this function is called to
+    check if it should be merged with the previous command. It is the
+    previous command object that is kept on the stack. The function
+    returns true if the command is merged; otherwise false.
+
+    We first check whether it is the same item that has been moved
+    twice, in which case we merge the commands. We update the position
+    of the item so that it will take the last position in the move
+    sequence when undone. 
+
+    \section1 DiagramScene Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/diagramscene.h 0
+
+    The DiagramScene implements the functionality to move a
+    DiagramItem with the mouse. It emits a signal when a move is
+    completed. This is caught by the \c MainWindow, which makes
+    MoveCommands. We do not examine the implementation of DiagramScene
+    as it only deals with graphics framework issues.
+
+    \section1 The \c main() Function
+    
+    The \c main() function of the program looks like this:
+
+    \snippet examples/tools/undoframework/main.cpp 0
+
+    We draw a grid in the background of the DiagramScene, so we use a
+    resource file. The rest of the function creates the \c MainWindow and
+    shows it as a top level window.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/waitconditions.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/waitconditions.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dce0411
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/waitconditions.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example threads/waitconditions
+    \title Wait Conditions Example
+
+    The Wait Conditions example shows how to use QWaitCondition and
+    QMutex to control access to a circular buffer shared by a
+    producer thread and a consumer thread.
+
+    The producer writes data to the buffer until it reaches the end
+    of the buffer, at which point it restarts from the beginning,
+    overwriting existing data. The consumer thread reads the data as
+    it is produced and writes it to standard error.
+
+    Wait conditions make it possible to have a higher level of
+    concurrency than what is possible with mutexes alone. If accesses
+    to the buffer were simply guarded by a QMutex, the consumer
+    thread couldn't access the buffer at the same time as the
+    producer thread. Yet, there is no harm in having both threads
+    working on \e{different parts} of the buffer at the same time.
+
+    The example comprises two classes: \c Producer and \c Consumer.
+    Both inherit from QThread. The circular buffer used for
+    communicating between these two classes and the synchronization
+    tools that protect it are global variables.
+
+    An alternative to using QWaitCondition and QMutex to solve the
+    producer-consumer problem is to use QSemaphore. This is what the
+    \l{threads/semaphores}{Semaphores} example does.
+
+    \section1 Global Variables
+
+    Let's start by reviewing the circular buffer and the associated
+    synchronization tools:
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/waitconditions/waitconditions.cpp 0
+
+    \c DataSize is the amount of data that the producer will generate.
+    To keep the example as simple as possible, we make it a constant.
+    \c BufferSize is the size of the circular buffer. It is less than
+    \c DataSize, meaning that at some point the producer will reach
+    the end of the buffer and restart from the beginning.
+
+    To synchronize the producer and the consumer, we need two wait
+    conditions and one mutex. The \c bufferNotEmpty condition is
+    signalled when the producer has generated some data, telling the
+    consumer that it can start reading it. The \c bufferNotFull
+    condition is signalled when the consumer has read some data,
+    telling the producer that it can generate more. The \c numUsedBytes
+    is the number of bytes in the buffer that contain data.
+
+    Together, the wait conditions, the mutex, and the \c numUsedBytes
+    counter ensure that the producer is never more than \c BufferSize
+    bytes ahead of the consumer, and that the consumer never reads
+    data that the consumer hasn't generated yet.
+
+    \section1 Producer Class
+
+    Let's review the code for the \c Producer class:
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/waitconditions/waitconditions.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/threads/waitconditions/waitconditions.cpp 2
+
+    The producer generates \c DataSize bytes of data. Before it
+    writes a byte to the circular buffer, it must first check whether
+    the buffer is full (i.e., \c numUsedBytes equals \c BufferSize).
+    If the buffer is full, the thread waits on the \c bufferNotFull
+    condition.
+
+    At the end, the producer increments \c numUsedBytes and signalls
+    that the condition \c bufferNotEmpty is true, since \c
+    numUsedBytes is necessarily greater than 0.
+
+    We guard all accesses to the \c numUsedBytes variable with a
+    mutex. In addition, the QWaitCondition::wait() function accepts a
+    mutex as its argument. This mutex is unlocked before the thread
+    is put to sleep and locked when the thread wakes up. Furthermore,
+    the transition from the locked state to the wait state is atomic,
+    to prevent race conditions from occurring.
+
+    \section1 Consumer Class
+
+    Let's turn to the \c Consumer class:
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/waitconditions/waitconditions.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/threads/waitconditions/waitconditions.cpp 4
+
+    The code is very similar to the producer. Before we read the
+    byte, we check whether the buffer is empty (\c numUsedBytes is 0)
+    instead of whether it's full and wait on the \c bufferNotEmpty
+    condition if it's empty. After we've read the byte, we decrement
+    \c numUsedBytes (instead of incrementing it), and we signal the
+    \c bufferNotFull condition (instead of the \c bufferNotEmpty
+    condition).
+
+    \section1 The main() Function
+
+    In \c main(), we create the two threads and call QThread::wait()
+    to ensure that both threads get time to finish before we exit:
+
+    \snippet examples/threads/waitconditions/waitconditions.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/threads/waitconditions/waitconditions.cpp 6
+
+    So what happens when we run the program? Initially, the producer
+    thread is the only one that can do anything; the consumer is
+    blocked waiting for the \c bufferNotEmpty condition to be
+    signalled (\c numUsedBytes is 0). Once the producer has put one
+    byte in the buffer, \c numUsedBytes is \c BufferSize - 1 and the
+    \c bufferNotEmpty condition is signalled. At that point, two
+    things can happen: Either the consumer thread takes over and
+    reads that byte, or the consumer gets to produce a second byte.
+
+    The producer-consumer model presented in this example makes it
+    possible to write highly concurrent multithreaded applications.
+    On a multiprocessor machine, the program is potentially up to
+    twice as fast as the equivalent mutex-based program, since the
+    two threads can be active at the same time on different parts of
+    the buffer.
+
+    Be aware though that these benefits aren't always realized.
+    Locking and unlocking a QMutex has a cost. In practice, it would
+    probably be worthwhile to divide the buffer into chunks and to
+    operate on chunks instead of individual bytes. The buffer size is
+    also a parameter that must be selected carefully, based on
+    experimentation.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/wiggly.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/wiggly.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5406c77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/wiggly.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/wiggly
+    \title Wiggly Example
+
+    The Wiggly example shows how to animate a widget using
+    QBasicTimer and \l{QObject::timerEvent()}{timerEvent()}. In
+    addition, the example demonstrates how to use QFontMetrics to
+    determine the size of text on screen.
+
+    \image wiggly-example.png Screenshot of the Wiggly example
+
+    QBasicTimer is a low-level class for timers. Unlike QTimer,
+    QBasicTimer doesn't inherit from QObject; instead of emitting a
+    \l{QTimer::timeout()}{timeout()} signal when a certain amount of
+    time has passed, it sends a QTimerEvent to a QObject of our
+    choice. This makes QBasicTimer a more lightweight alternative to
+    QTimer. Qt's built-in widgets use it internally, and it is
+    provided in Qt's API for highly-optimized applications (e.g.,
+    \l{Qt for Embedded Linux} applications).
+
+    The example consists of two classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c WigglyWidget is the custom widget displaying the text
+        in a wiggly line.
+
+    \o \c Dialog is the dialog widget allowing the user to enter a
+        text. It combines a \c WigglyWidget and a \c QLineEdit.
+    \endlist
+
+    We will first take a quick look at the \c Dialog class, then we
+    will review the \c WigglyWidget class.
+
+    \section1 Dialog Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/wiggly/dialog.h 0
+
+    The \c Dialog class provides a dialog widget that allows the user
+    to enter a text. The text is then rendered by \c WigglyWidget.
+
+    \section1 Dialog Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/wiggly/dialog.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor we create a wiggly widget along with a
+    \l{QLineEdit}{line edit}, and we put the two widgets in a
+    vertical layout. We connect the line edit's \l
+    {QLineEdit::textChanged()}{textChanged()} signal to the wiggly
+    widget's \c setText() slot to obtain the real time interaction
+    with the wiggly widget. The widget's default text is "Hello
+    world!".
+
+    \section1 WigglyWidget Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/wiggly/wigglywidget.h 0
+
+    The \c WigglyWidget class provides the wiggly line displaying the
+    text. We subclass QWidget and reimplement the standard \l
+    {QWidget::paintEvent()}{paintEvent()} and \l
+    {QObject::timerEvent()}{timerEvent()} functions to draw and update
+    the widget. In addition we implement a public \c setText() slot
+    that sets the widget's text.
+
+    The \c timer variable, of type QBasicTimer, is used to update the
+    widget at regular intervals, making the widget move. The \c text
+    variable is used to store the currently displayed text, and \c
+    step to calculate position and color for each character on the
+    wiggly line.
+
+    \section1 WigglyWidget Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/wiggly/wigglywidget.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor, we make the widget's background slightly
+    lighter than the usual background using the QPalette::Midlight
+    color role. The background role defines the brush from the
+    widget's palette that Qt uses to paint the background. Then we
+    enlarge the widget's font with 20 points.
+
+    Finally we start the timer; the call to QBasicTimer::start()
+    makes sure that \e this particular wiggly widget will receive the
+    timer events generated when the timer times out (every 60
+    milliseconds).
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/wiggly/wigglywidget.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/widgets/wiggly/wigglywidget.cpp 2
+
+    The \c paintEvent() function is called whenever a QPaintEvent is
+    sent to the widget. Paint events are sent to widgets that need to
+    update themselves, for instance when part of a widget is exposed
+    because a covering widget was moved. For the wiggly widget, a
+    paint event will also be generated every 60 milliseconds from
+    the \c timerEvent() slot.
+
+    The \c sineTable represents y-values of the sine curve,
+    multiplied by 100. It is used to make the wiggly widget move
+    along the sine curve.
+
+    The QFontMetrics object provides information about the widget's
+    font. The \c x variable is the horizontal position where we start
+    drawing the text. The \c y variable is the vertical position of
+    the text's base line. Both variables are computed so that the
+    text is horizontally and vertically centered. To compute the base
+    line, we take into account the font's ascent (the height of the
+    font above the base line) and font's descent (the height of the
+    font below the base line). If the descent equals the ascent, they
+    cancel out each other and the base line is at \c height() / 2.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/wiggly/wigglywidget.cpp 3
+    \snippet examples/widgets/wiggly/wigglywidget.cpp 4
+
+    Each time the \c paintEvent() function is called, we create a
+    QPainter object \c painter to draw the contents of the widget.
+    For each character in \c text, we determine the color and the
+    position on the wiggly line based on \c step. In addition, \c x
+    is incremented by the character's width.
+
+    For simplicity, we assume that QFontMetrics::width(\c text)
+    returns the sum of the individual character widths
+    (QFontMetrics::width(\c text[i])). In practice, this is not
+    always the case because QFontMetrics::width(\c text) also takes
+    into account the kerning between certain letters (e.g., 'A' and
+    'V'). The result is that the text isn't perfectly centered. You
+    can verify this by typing "AVAVAVAVAVAV" in the line edit.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/wiggly/wigglywidget.cpp 5
+    \snippet examples/widgets/wiggly/wigglywidget.cpp 6
+
+    The \c timerEvent() function receives all the timer events that
+    are generated for this widget. If a timer event is sent from the
+    widget's QBasicTimer, we increment \c step to make the text move,
+    and call QWidget::update() to refresh the display. Any other
+    timer event is passed on to the base class's implementation of
+    the \l{QWidget::timerEvent()}{timerEvent()} function.
+
+    The QWidget::update() slot does not cause an immediate repaint;
+    instead the slot schedules a paint event for processing when Qt
+    returns to the main event loop. The paint events are then handled
+    by \c{WigglyWidget}'s \c paintEvent() function.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/windowflags.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/windowflags.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b25206e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/windowflags.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,230 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example widgets/windowflags
+    \title Window Flags Example
+
+    The Window Flags example shows how to use the window flags
+    available in Qt.
+
+    A window flag is either a type or a hint. A type is used to
+    specify various window-system properties for the widget. A widget
+    can only have one type, and the default is Qt::Widget. However, a
+    widget can have zero or more hints. The hints are used to
+    customize the appearance of top-level windows.
+
+    A widget's flags are stored in a Qt::WindowFlags type which stores
+    an OR combination of the flags.
+
+    \image windowflags-example.png Screenshot of the Window Flags example
+
+    The example consists of two classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c ControllerWindow is the main application widget that allows
+       the user to choose among the available window flags, and displays
+       the effect on a separate preview window.
+    \o \c PreviewWindow is a custom widget displaying the name of
+       its currently set window flags in a read-only text editor.
+    \endlist
+
+    We will start by reviewing the \c ControllerWindow class, then we
+    will take a look at the \c PreviewWindow class.
+
+    \section1 ControllerWindow Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/windowflags/controllerwindow.h 0
+
+    The \c ControllerWindow class inherits QWidget. The widget allows
+    the user to choose among the available window flags, and displays
+    the effect on a separate preview window.
+
+    We declare a private \c updatePreview() slot to refresh the
+    preview window whenever the user changes the window flags.
+
+    We also declare several private functions to simplify the
+    constructor: We call the \c createTypeGroupBox() function to
+    create a radio button for each available window type, using the
+    private \c createButton() function, and gather them within a group
+    box. In a similar way we use the \c createHintsGroupBox() function
+    to create a check box for each available hint, using the private
+    \c createCheckBox() function.
+
+    In addition to the various radio buttons and checkboxes, we need
+    an associated \c PreviewWindow to show the effect of the currently
+    chosen window flags.
+
+    \image windowflags_controllerwindow.png Screenshot of the Controller Window
+
+    \section1 ControllerWindow Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/windowflags/controllerwindow.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor we first create the preview window. Then we
+    create the group boxes containing the available window flags using
+    the private \c createTypeGroupBox() and \c createHintsGroupBox()
+    functions. In addition we create a \gui Quit button. We put the
+    button and a stretchable space in a separate layout to make the
+    button appear in the \c WindowFlag widget's right bottom corner.
+
+    Finally, we add the button's layout and the two goup boxes to a
+    QVBoxLayout, set the window title and refresh the preview window
+    using the \c updatePreview() slot.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/windowflags/controllerwindow.cpp 1
+    \snippet examples/widgets/windowflags/controllerwindow.cpp 2
+
+    The \c updatePreview() slot is called whenever the user changes
+    any of the window flags. First we create an empty Qt::WindowFlags
+    \c flags, then we determine which one of the types that is checked
+    and add it to \c flags.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/windowflags/controllerwindow.cpp 3
+
+    We also determine which of the hints that are checked, and add
+    them to \c flags using an OR operator. We use \c flags to set the
+    window flags for the preview window.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/windowflags/controllerwindow.cpp 4
+
+    We adjust the position of the preview window. The reason we do
+    that, is that playing around with the window's frame may on some
+    platforms cause the window's position to be changed behind our
+    back. If a window is located in the upper left corner of the
+    screen, parts of the window may not be visible. So we adjust the
+    widget's position to make sure that, if this happens, the window
+    is moved within the screen's boundaries. Finally, we call
+    QWidget::show() to make sure the preview window is visible.
+
+    \omit
+    \skipto pos
+    \printuntil /^\}/
+    \endomit
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/windowflags/controllerwindow.cpp 5
+
+    The private \c createTypeGroupBox() function is called from the
+    constructor.
+
+    First we create a group box, and then we create a radio button
+    (using the private \c createRadioButton() function) for each of
+    the available types among the window flags. We make Qt::Window the
+    initially applied type. We put the radio buttons into a
+    QGridLayout and install the layout on the group box.
+
+    We do not include the default Qt::Widget type. The reason is that
+    it behaves somewhat different than the other types. If the type is
+    not specified for a widget, and it has no parent, the widget is a
+    window. However, if it has a parent, it is a standard child
+    widget. The other types are all top-level windows, and since the
+    hints only affect top-level windows, we abandon the Qt::Widget
+    type.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/windowflags/controllerwindow.cpp 6
+
+    The private \c createHintsGroupBox() function is also called from
+    the constructor.
+
+    Again, the first thing we do is to create a group box. Then we
+    create a checkbox, using the private \c createCheckBox() function,
+    for each of the available hints among the window flags. We put the
+    checkboxes into a QGridLayout and install the layout on the group
+    box.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/windowflags/controllerwindow.cpp 7
+
+    The private \c createCheckBox() function is called from \c
+    createHintsGroupBox().
+
+    We simply create a QCheckBox with the provided text, connect it to
+    the private \c updatePreview() slot, and return a pointer to the
+    checkbox.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/windowflags/controllerwindow.cpp 8
+
+    In the private \c createRadioButton() function it is a
+    QRadioButton we create with the provided text, and connect to the
+    private \c updatePreview() slot. The function is called from \c
+    createTypeGroupBox(), and returns a pointer to the button.
+
+    \section1 PreviewWindow Class Definition
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/windowflags/previewwindow.h 0
+
+    The \c PreviewWindow class inherits QWidget. It is a custom widget
+    that displays the names of its currently set window flags in a
+    read-only text editor. It is also provided with a QPushbutton that
+    closes the window.
+
+    We reimplement the constructor to create the \gui Close button and
+    the text editor, and the QWidget::setWindowFlags() function to
+    display the names of the window flags.
+
+    \image windowflags_previewwindow.png Screenshot of the Preview Window
+
+    \section1 PreviewWindow Class Implementation
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/windowflags/previewwindow.cpp 0
+
+    In the constructor, we first create a QTextEdit and make sure that
+    it is read-only.
+
+    We also prohibit any line wrapping in the text editor using the
+    QTextEdit::setLineWrapMode() function. The result is that a
+    horizontal scrollbar appears when a window flag's name exceeds the
+    width of the editor. This is a reasonable solution since we
+    construct the displayed text with built-in line breaks. If no line
+    breaks were guaranteed, using another QTextEdit::LineWrapMode
+    would perhaps make more sense.
+
+    Then we create the \gui Close button, and put both the widgets
+    into a QVBoxLayout before we set the window title.
+
+    \snippet examples/widgets/windowflags/previewwindow.cpp 1
+
+    In our reimplementation of the \c setWindowFlags() function, we
+    first set the widgets flags using the QWidget::setWindowFlags()
+    function. Then we run through the available window flags, creating
+    a text that contains the names of the flags that matches the \c
+    flags parameter. Finally, we display the text in the widgets text
+    editor.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/worldtimeclockbuilder.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/worldtimeclockbuilder.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..644ffdb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/worldtimeclockbuilder.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+  \example designer/worldtimeclockbuilder
+  \title World Time Clock Builder Example
+
+  The World Time Clock Builder example shows how forms created with Qt
+  Designer that contain custom widgets can be dynamically generated at
+  run-time.
+
+  \image worldtimeclockbuilder-example.png
+
+  This example uses a form containing the custom widget plugin described in the
+  \l{designer/worldtimeclockplugin}{World Time Clock Plugin} example, and
+  dynamically generates a user interface using the QUiLoader class, part of
+  the QtUiTools module.
+
+  \section1 Preparation
+
+  As with the \l{designer/calculatorbuilder}{Calculator Builder} example, the
+  project file for this example needs to include the appropriate definitions
+  to ensure that it is built against the required Qt modules.
+
+  \snippet examples/designer/worldtimeclockbuilder/worldtimeclockbuilder.pro 0
+
+  By appending \c form to the \c CONFIG declaration, we instruct \c qmake to
+  generate a dependency on the \c libQtUiTools library containing the QtUiTools
+  classes.
+
+  Note that we do not inform \c qmake about any .ui files, and so none will
+  be processed and built into the application. The resource file contains
+  an entry for the particular form that we wish to use:
+
+  \quotefile examples/designer/worldtimeclockbuilder/worldtimeclockbuilder.qrc
+
+  Forms do not need to be included with the application in this way. We only
+  include a form in the application's resources for convenience, and to keep
+  the example short.
+
+  \section1 Loading and Building the Form
+
+  Since this example only loads and displays a pre-prepared form, all of the
+  work can be done in the main() function. We are using a class from the
+  QtUiTools library so, in addition to any other Qt classes that are normally
+  required to write an application, we must include the appropriate header
+  file:
+
+  \snippet examples/designer/worldtimeclockbuilder/main.cpp 0
+
+  The main function initializes the resource system with the Q_INIT_RESOURCE()
+  macro and constructs an QApplication instance in the usual way:
+
+  \snippet examples/designer/worldtimeclockbuilder/main.cpp 1
+
+  We construct a QUiLoader object to handle the form we want to use.
+
+  The form itself is obtained from the resource file system using the path
+  defined in the resource file. We use the form loader to load and construct
+  the form:
+
+  \snippet examples/designer/worldtimeclockbuilder/main.cpp 2
+
+  Once the form has been loaded, the resource file can be closed and the
+  widget is shown.
+
+  \snippet examples/designer/worldtimeclockbuilder/main.cpp 3
+
+  The form loader ensures that all the signal and slot connections between
+  objects in the form are set up correctly when the form is loaded. As a
+  result, the time is updated by the World Time Clock widget, and the time
+  zone spin box can be used to change the position of the hour hand.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/worldtimeclockplugin.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/worldtimeclockplugin.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..072b1f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/worldtimeclockplugin.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,210 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example designer/worldtimeclockplugin
+    \title World Time Clock Plugin Example
+
+    The World Time Clock Plugin example shows how to create a custom
+    widget plugin for \QD that uses signals and slots.
+
+    \image worldtimeclockplugin-example.png
+
+    In this example, we simply extend the \l
+    {designer/customwidgetplugin}{Custom Widget Plugin} example and
+    its custom widget (based on the \l{widgets/analogclock}{Analog
+    Clock} example), by introducing the concept of signals and slots.
+
+    The World Time Clock Plugin example consists of two classes:
+
+    \list
+    \o \c WorldTimeClock is a custom clock widget with hour and
+       minute hands that is automatically updated every few seconds.
+    \o \c WorldTimeClockPlugin exposes the \c WorldTimeClock class to \QD.
+    \endlist
+
+    First we will take a look at the \c WorldTimeClock class which
+    extends the \l {designer/customwidgetplugin}{Custom Widget Plugin}
+    example's \c AnalogClock class by providing a signal and a
+    slot. Then we will take a quick look at the \c
+    WorldTimeClockPlugin class, but this class is in most parts
+    identical to the \l {designer/customwidgetplugin}{Custom Widget
+    Plugin} example's implementation.
+
+    Finally we take a look at the plugin's project file. The project
+    file for custom widget plugins needs some additional information
+    to ensure that they will work within \QD. This is also covered in
+    the \l {designer/customwidgetplugin}{Custom Widget Plugin} example,
+    but due to its importance (custom widget plugins rely on
+    components supplied with \QD which must be specified in the
+    project file that we use) we will repeat it here.
+
+    \section1 WorldTimeClock Class
+
+    The \c WorldTimeClock class inherits QWidget, and is a custom
+    clock widget with hour and minute hands that is automatically
+    updated every few seconds. What makes this example different from
+    the \l {designer/customwidgetplugin}{Custom Widget Plugin}
+    example, is the introduction of the signal and slot in the custom
+    widget class:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/worldtimeclockplugin/worldtimeclock.h 1
+
+    Note the use of the QDESIGNER_WIDGET_EXPORT macro. This is needed
+    to ensure that \QD can create instances of the widget on some
+    platforms, but it is a good idea to use it on all platforms.
+
+    We declare the \c setTimeZone() slot with an associated \c
+    timeZoneOffset variable, and we declare an \c updated() signal
+    which takes the current time as argument and is emitted whenever
+    the widget is repainted.
+
+    \image worldtimeclock-connection.png
+
+    In \QD's workspace we can then, for example, connect the \c
+    WorldTimeClock widget's \c updated() signal to a QTimeEdit's \l
+    {QDateTimeEdit::setTime()}{setTime()} slot using \QD's mode
+    for editing signal and slots.
+
+    \image worldtimeclock-signalandslot.png
+
+    We can also connect a QSpinBox's \l
+    {QSpinBox::valueChanged()}{valueChanged()} signal to the \c
+    WorldTimeClock's \c setTimeZone() slot.
+
+    \section1 WorldTimeClockPlugin Class
+
+    The \c WorldTimeClockPlugin class exposes the \c WorldTimeClock
+    class to \QD. Its definition is equivalent to the \l
+    {designer/customwidgetplugin}{Custom Widget Plugin} example's
+    plugin class which is explained in detail. The only part of the
+    class definition that is specific to this particular custom widget
+    is the class name:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/worldtimeclockplugin/worldtimeclockplugin.h 0
+
+    The plugin class provides \QD with basic information about our
+    plugin, such as its class name and its include file. Furthermore
+    it knows how to create instances of the \c WorldTimeClockPlugin
+    widget.  \c WorldTimeClockPlugin also defines the \l
+    {QDesignerCustomWidgetInterface::initialize()}{initialize()}
+    function which is called after the plugin is loaded into \QD. The
+    function's QDesignerFormEditorInterface parameter provides the
+    plugin with a gateway to all of \QD's API's.
+
+    The \c WorldTimeClockPlugin class inherits from both QObject and
+    QDesignerCustomWidgetInterface. It is important to remember, when
+    using multiple inheritance, to ensure that all the interfaces
+    (i.e. the classes that doesn't inherit Q_OBJECT) are made known to
+    the meta object system using the Q_INTERFACES() macro. This
+    enables \QD to use \l qobject_cast() to query for supported
+    interfaces using nothing but a QObject pointer.
+
+    The implementation of the \c WorldTimeClockPlugin is also
+    equivalent to the plugin interface implementation in the \l
+    {designer/customwidgetplugin}{Custom Widget Plugin} example (only
+    the class name and the implementation of
+    QDesignerCustomWidgetInterface::domXml() differ). The main thing
+    to remember is to use the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro to export the \c
+    WorldTimeClockPlugin class for use with \QD:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/worldtimeclockplugin/worldtimeclockplugin.cpp 0
+
+    Without this macro, there is no way for Qt Designer to use the
+    widget.
+
+    \section1 The Project File: worldtimeclockplugin.pro
+
+    The project file for custom widget plugins needs some additional
+    information to ensure that they will work as expected within \QD:
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/worldtimeclockplugin/worldtimeclockplugin.pro 0
+    \snippet examples/designer/worldtimeclockplugin/worldtimeclockplugin.pro 1
+
+    The \c TEMPLATE variable's value make \c qmake create the custom
+    widget as a library. The \c CONFIG variable contains two values,
+    \c designer and \c plugin:
+
+    \list
+        \o \c designer: Since custom widgets plugins rely on components
+           supplied with \QD, this value ensures that our plugin links against
+           \QD's library (\c libQtDesigner.so).
+
+        \o \c plugin: We also need to ensure that \c qmake considers the
+           custom widget a \e plugin library.
+    \endlist
+
+    When Qt is configured to build in both debug and release modes,
+    \QD will be built in release mode.  When this occurs, it is
+    necessary to ensure that plugins are also built in release
+    mode. For that reason you might have to add a \c release value to
+    your \c CONFIG variable. Otherwise, if a plugin is built in a mode
+    that is incompatible with \QD, it won't be loaded and
+    installed.
+
+    The header and source files for the widget are declared in the
+    usual way, and in addition we provide an implementation of the
+    plugin interface so that \QD can use the custom widget.
+
+    \snippet examples/designer/worldtimeclockplugin/worldtimeclockplugin.pro 2
+
+    It is important to ensure that the plugin is installed in a location that
+    is searched by \QD. We do this by specifying a target path for the project
+    and adding it to the list of items to install:
+
+    \snippet doc/src/snippets/code/doc_src_examples_worldtimeclockplugin.qdoc 0
+
+    The custom widget is created as a library, and will be installed
+    alongside the other \QD plugins when the project is installed
+    (using \c{make install} or an equivalent installation procedure).
+    Later, we will ensure that it is recognized as a plugin by \QD by
+    using the Q_EXPORT_PLUGIN2() macro to export the relevant widget
+    information.
+
+    Note that if you want the plugins to appear in a Visual Studio
+    integration, the plugins must be built in release mode and their
+    libraries must be copied into the plugin directory in the install
+    path of the integration (for an example, see \c {C:/program
+    files/trolltech as/visual studio integration/plugins}).
+
+    For more information about plugins, see the \l {How to Create Qt
+    Plugins} document.
+*/
diff --git a/doc/src/examples/xmlstreamlint.qdoc b/doc/src/examples/xmlstreamlint.qdoc
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..925a7a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/src/examples/xmlstreamlint.qdoc
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/****************************************************************************
+**
+** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
+** Contact: Qt Software Information (qt-info@nokia.com)
+**
+** This file is part of the documentation of the Qt Toolkit.
+**
+** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
+** No Commercial Usage
+** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
+** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
+** contained in the either Technology Preview License Agreement or the
+** Beta Release License Agreement.
+**
+** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
+** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
+** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
+**
+** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain
+** additional rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL
+** Exception version 1.0, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this
+** package.
+**
+** GNU General Public License Usage
+** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU
+** General Public License version 3.0 as published by the Free Software
+** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.GPL included in the
+** packaging of this file.  Please review the following information to
+** ensure the GNU General Public License version 3.0 requirements will be
+** met: http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html.
+**
+** If you are unsure which license is appropriate for your use, please
+** contact the sales department at qt-sales@nokia.com.
+** $QT_END_LICENSE$
+**
+****************************************************************************/
+
+/*!
+    \example xml/xmlstreamlint
+    \title XML Stream Lint Example
+
+    The XML Stream Lint example provides a simple command line utility that
+    accepts a file name as its single argument and writes it to the standard
+    output file.
+
+    The specified file is parsed using an QXmlStreamReader object and written
+    to the standard output file using an QXmlStreamWriter object. If the file
+    does not contain a well-formed XML document or the use of namespaces in
+    the document is incorrect, a description of the error is printed to
+    the standard error file and will appear in the console.
+
+    \section1 Basic Operation
+
+    The main function of the example opens the file specified by the user
+    for input (\c inputFile), and it uses QFile to access the standard output
+    file.
+
+    Reading XML is handled by an instance of the QXmlStreamReader class, which
+    operates on the input file object; writing is handled by an instance of
+    QXmlStreamWriter operating on the output file object:
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/xmlstreamlint/main.cpp 0
+
+    The work of parsing and rewriting the XML is done in a while loop, and is
+    driven by input from the reader:
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/xmlstreamlint/main.cpp 1
+
+    If more input is available, the next token from the input file is read
+    and parsed. If an error occurred, information is written to the standard
+    error file via a stream, and the example exits by returning a non-zero
+    value from the main function.
+
+    \snippet examples/xml/xmlstreamlint/main.cpp 2
+
+    For valid input, the writer is fed the current token from the reader,
+    and this is written to the output file that was specified when it was
+    constructed.
+
+    When there is no more input, the loop terminates, and the example can
+    exit successfully.
+*/